fooaeren 


ἔπ 4. 
ἐπασσντν 


ee iM eve jeep! 
rae ἀπ Narnaen ea ear Po ° 
aa het χ λον νας νων ως μά λννακως 


we ire en mm rcapton one 
Sinecne natinetgeieatees > 
Perey eee 

= ee 


=m 
een ee pee wow oe 
TU EF Sg am ogo, 
Nae me coe ee Nae re 


Se ow ome ep στ ae ieoeetwon - 
Wp “nae en oon Sree semwracseony vate om wen omy 
a ἴεν 5 ; 


7 


ἢ 
ἷ 


cies 


Ὁ 291} {ἘΠ} 
}1}}}14 }] 
aay 


¢ A pen x ee τὸ eae, cov ᾿ 
ste Pino res ral a deren oon ται : 


1m στ τον πλοῖον το meh ee) wae ere 


Samceecienette tee ete τν 
a alone mri sow mentee 
eet von Sheepentint beeen, oe 


" ΞΞΞΞ ΞΞ a 


εν ye Nie a ἐς ΤῊΝ 
* e ΄ ΄ 
|” Diviston 
Range 


/ 


‘in 729 © Sie Mun lige GU cee ae Lak τ Uae. 


: : ἜΝ eho fee 1879 


PRESENTED TO THE . 


μη ἡ the University. of ln, 


— BY — 


EM Ear meny Bg. : 


ἡ otek < 13k ee A.D. 1873, | 


ee Coes πον ΧΕ--- IK OiNE we IK OE ἔχεις = SRE ROE ζΕ--- IK OF 


i tar! 


See MRT ae 


4 4 ὟΝ 
τῆν χε αὐ 
yt oe 


bebo 


- 4, ~~ ee 
ARREARS 


᾿ y HOUMA. 


COMPENDIOUS GREEK GRAMMAR. 


A 
CE: 37-#+D 
Γ᾽ GRAMMAR 


OF THE > 
"LOM pehdadlouws 


GREEK LANGUAGE. 


By ALPHEUS CROSBY, 


\ 
PROFESSOR EMERITUS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN DARTMOUTH COLLEGE. 


: ~~ aliforal&- 
WOOLWORTH, FSNSWORTH-® COMPANY, 
51, 58, & 55 JOHN STREET, NEW YORK, 
lll STATE STREET, CHICAGO. 


1871. 


TH 
6247 


‘The LANGUAGE OF THE GREEKS was truly like themselves, it was con- 
formable to their transcendent and universal Genius. ... - THE GREEK 
Toneur, from its propriety and universality, is made for all that is great, and 
all that is beautiful, in every Subject, and under every Form of writing.” — 
Harris’s Hermes, Bk. III., Ch. 5. 


‘‘ GREEK, —the shrine of thé genius of the old world; as universal as our 
race, as individual as ourselves; of infinite flexibility, of indefatigable strength, 
with the complication and the distinctness of Nature herself; to which nothing 
was vulgar, from which nothing was excluded; speaking to the ear like Italian, 
_ speaking to the mind like English; with words like pictures, with words like 
the gossamer film of the summer; at once the variety and picturesqueness of 
Homer, the gloom and the intensity of Eschylus; not compressed to the closest 
by Thucydides, not fathomed to the bottom by Plato, not sounding with all 
its thunders, nor lit up with all its ardors even under the Promethean touch 
of Demosthenes! ’? —CoLERIDGE’s Study of the Greek Classic Poets. 


VIGNETTE: TEMPLE OF THESEUS AT ATHENS. 
“ Athens, the eye of Greece.” — Milton. 


FIFO 


Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871, 
BY ALPHEUS CROSBY, 
in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 


University Press: WetcuH, Bicetow, & Co., 
“CAMBRIDGE. 


PREFACE. 


Tur motto on the title-page, from old Taroenis if not the older 
CiEosutus, indicates the principle on which this treatise has been 
prepared. There has been throughout an earnest effort to carry 
nothing to excess, neither insertion nor omission, but to write that 
“Mimpite” GramMar which, it might be hoped, the old moralist 
would approve, if he were at my side. The Tables, that mnemonic 
associations may not be disturbed, are throughout the same as in 
the larger grammar upon which this is based; and so little of prac- 
tical precept has been omitted from the text of the latter, that many 
might regard this condensed edition as still large enough for the ob- 
ject stated in the original preface to the fuller work: “ to supply 
what was believed to be a desideratum in the list of Greek text- 
books; viz.,a grammar which should be portable and simple enough 
to be put into the hands of the beginner, and which should yet be 
sufficiently scientific and complete to accompany him through his 
whole course.” Even slight variations of phraseology have been 
avoided, with few and unimportant exceptions; and the division 
here made into sections and their parts, and the references to these, 
apply throughout to the fuller edition ; so that the two editions might 
even be used together in the same class without inconvenience. 
They are really one and the same work, unum et idem; except that 
the screw of compression, which had been before so severely applied, 
has here received a few more turns. 

It must be confessed, however, that the arguments in favor of a 
short grammar have far less strength for the Greek than for the 
Latin. The study of the latter language is usually commenced at an 
earlier age, and when the learner is wholly new to philological ac- 
quisition; and it is also commenced by many who contemplate only a 
brief course of classical study, and who therefore find in a brief gram- 
mar, supplemented here ‘and there by an able teacher, a supply of 
their wants. , On the other hand, most of our students, in beginning 
the study of Greek, have in view a college course; and they begin it 
with the experience and mental strength derived from the acquisi- 
tion of the Latin. They know already how to use a grammar as, 
what it mainly should be, a book of constant reference; and are 
more troubled by not finding in it what they seek, than by the pres- 
ence there of much that is not immediately needed, — with which, 


COMP. GR. ὁ ες : 
5730 


4 PREFACE, 


however, as lying before the eye, they are gaining without effort 
Some acquaintance in anticipation of future wants. At least they 
will better know, —a large part of knowledge, — where to find what 
they want. ἢ 

It may be added that the Greek, from the much greater fulness 
of its forms and variety of its constructions, cannot be as adequately 
treated as the Latin, except in a larger volume. Mr, Marsu, in his 
able Lectures on the English Language, thus distinguishes: ‘“ The 
grammar of the Greek language is much more flexible, more tolerant 
of aberration, less rigid in its requirements, than the Latin. The 
precision, which the regularity of Latin syntax gives to a period, 
the Greek more completely and clearly. accomplishes by the nicety 
with which individual words are defined in meaning; and while the 
Latin trains us to be good grammarians, the Greek elevates us to 
the highest dignity of manhood by making us acute and powerful 
thinkers.” The greater need of explanation which results from this 
fulness and freedom, calls for additional space ; for, as Professor Cur- 
Trius has well remarked, “Memory can neither accurately grasp the 
great variety of Greek forms nor retain them, unless it be supported 
by an.analyzing and combining intelligence, which furnishes, as it 
were, the hooks and cement to strengthen that whieh has been learned, 
and permanently impress it upon the mind.” 

In respect to form, the present treatise should not be judged as an _ 
independent work, but as a condensed edition of a larger work, from 
the form of which it was deemed important to depart as little as pos- 
sible. Thus, some references to authors, which are there fully made, 
are here given partially in preference to omitting them altogether. 
For fuller illustration and explanation on many points, will the reader 
pardon, once for all, a reference to the larger grammar? And will 
he permit the statement of principles and acknowledgments in its 
preface to be here understood without repetition, — the rather for a 
reason which will appear in the next paragraph? _ 

The occurrence of some spaces in printing the Revised Grammar 
presented a temptation to adorn it with a few extracts. In the pres- 
ent form of printing, these spaces do not occur; and, from a reluc- 
tance to part with these gems, room has been found for them here, 
— where, indeed, they seem to be placed even more appropriately, 
as a fit introduction to the book. In their original position, they be- 
long to sections 796, 171, 724, and 799. The last of these passages 

, 1s selected the rather because its author is Professor of Modern Lan- 
guages, not of Greek, and is especially eminent as a Sanskrit scholar ; 
as that in ἃ 800, with a quotation above, because they occur in Lec- 
tures, not on the Greek, but on the English Language, and by one 
who has gained such distinction, both in public life, and by his 


PREFACE. εὐ 5 


scholarship in other than classic fields. The teacher of Greek, whose 
judgment might be suspected of partiality, would not perhaps ven- 
ture upon the strength of expression employed by the statesman- 


scholar. 
Ἂν δ᾽ 


‘*T'HE REASONS why we spend so long a time in acquiring a mastery 
over the GREEK LANGUAGE are manifold. We do so partly because 
it is one of the most delicate and perfect instruments for the expres- 
sion of thought which was ever elaborated by the mind of man, and be- 
cause it is therefore admirably adapted, both by its points of resemblance 
to our own and other modern languages, and by its points of difference 
from them, to give us the IDEA, or fundamental conception, of all Gram- 
mar ; i. 6. of those laws which regulate the use of the forms by which we 
express our thoughts. 

** Again, Greek is the key to one of the most astonishing and splendid 
regions of LITERATURE which are open for the intellect to explore, —a 
literature which enshrines works not only of imperishable interest, but 
also of imperishable importance, both directly and historically, for the 
development of human thought. It is the language in which the New 
Testament was first written; and into which the Old Testament was first 
translated. It was the language spoken by the greatest poets, the greatest 
orators, the greatest historians, the profoundest philosophers, the world 
has ever seen. It was the language of the most ancient, the most elo- 
quent, and in some respects the most important of the Christian fathers. 
It contains the record of institutions and conceptions which lie at the base 
of modern civilization ; and at the same time it contains the record, and 
presents the spectacle, of precisely those virtues in which modern civiliza- 
tion is most deficient. 

‘Nor is it an end only ; it is also a means. Even for those who never 
succeed in reaping all the advantages which it places within their reach, 
it has been found to be, in various nations and ages during many hundred 
years, one of the very best instruments for the EXERCISE AND TRAINING 
OF THE MIND. It may have been studied irrationally, pedantically, and 
too exclusively ; but though it is desirable that much should be super- 
added, yet with Latin it will probably ever continue to be — what the 
great German poet Goethe breathed a wish that it always should be— 
the BASIS OF ALL HIGHER CULTURE.” — Farrar’s Greek Syntax. 


INFLECTION. — “GREEK presents the MOST PERFECT SPECIMEN of 
an inflectional, or synthetic language. A language which gets rid of in- 
flections as far as possible, and substitutes separate words for each part 
of the conception, is called an analytic language ; and next to the Chi- 
nese, which has never attained to synthesis at all, few languages are more 
analytic than the English. A synthetic language will express in one word 
what requires many words for its expression in an analytic language : 
e. g. πεφιλήσομαι, 7 shall have been loved, Ich werde geliebt worden sein : 
ᾧχετο, abierat, i s’en était allé. 

‘The advantage of synthetic language lies in its compactness, precision, 
and beauty of form ; analytic languages are clumsier, but they possibly 
admit of greater accuracy of expression, and are less liable to misconcep- 
tion. If they are inferior instruments for the imagination, they better 


6 _ PREFACE. 


serve the purposes of reason. Splendid efflorescence is followed by ripe 
fruit. The tendency of all languages, at least in historic times, is from 
synthesis to analysis, e. g. from case-inflections to the use of prepositions, 
and from tense-inflections to the use of auxiliaries. This tendency may 
be seen by comparing any modern language with its ancestor, e. g. Italian 
with Latin, Modern with Ancient Greek, Bengali with Sanskrit, Persian 
with Zend, German with Gothic, or English with Anglo-Saxon. 

“ὁ ΤΆ is most important to observe that no inflection is arbitrary. Among 
all the richly multitudinous forms assumed by the Greek and Latin verbs, 
there is not one which does not follow some definite and ascertainable law. 
Parsing loses its difficulty and repulsiveness, when it is once understood 
that there is a definite recurrence of the same forms in the same meaning, 
and that the distorted shape assumed by some words is not due to arbi- 
trary license, but to regular and well understood laws of phonetic corrup- 
tion.” — Do. (from § 7-14 of Pt. I.). 


Prosop1AL Distinctions. — ““ Both AccENT and QUANTITY have, 
and must have some play in all languages. So long as speech is dic- 
tated by thought and feeling, will men mark the more pregnant words 
and syllables with a superior tension of the voice. And so long as con- 
sonants remain solid, will it take a longer time to get over two of them in 
pronunciation than over one. In Greek, both accent and quantity were 
powerfully developed, so that whereas accent, the intellectual element, 
overbore quantity in prose, in verse on the other hand quantity, the 
musical element, overbore accent.” — CLYDE’s Greek Syntax. 


THE GREEK ῬΒΟΒΙΕΜ. ‘“ What the inhabitants of the small city of 
Athens achieved in philosophy, in poetry, in art, in science, in poli- 
tics, is known to all of us; and our admiration for them increases ten- 
fold if, by a study of other literatures, such as the literatures of India, 
Persia, and China, we are enabled to compare their achievements with 
those of other nations of antiquity. The rudiments of almost everything, 
with the exception of religion, we, the people of aie δὼ the heirs to a 
fortune accumulated during twenty or thirty centuries of intellectual toil, 
owe to the Greeks ; and, strange as it may sound, but few, I think, would 
gainsay it, that to the present day the achievements of these our distant 
ancestors and earliest masters, the songs of Homer, the dialogues of Plato, 
the speeches of Demosthenes, and the statues of Phidias, stand, if not un- 
rivalled, at least unsurpassed by anything that has been achieved by their 
descendants and pupils. 

** How the Greeks came to be what they were, and how, alone of all 
other nations, they opened almost every mine of thought that has since 
been worked by mankind ; how they invented and perfected almost every 
style of poetry and prose which has since been cultivated by the greatest 
minds μὰ race ; how they laid the lasting foundation of the principal 
arts and sciences, and in some of them achieved triumphs never since 
equalled, is a PROBLEM which neither historian nor philosopher has as yet 
been able to solve. Like their own goddess Athene, the people of Athens 
seem to spring full-armed into the arena of history ; and we look in vain 
to Egypt, Syria, or India for more than a few of the seeds that burst into 
such marvellous growth on the soil of Attica.” — Lectures on the Science 
of Language, by MAx MUuuEr, Professor of Modern European Languages 
in the University of Oxford ; Second Series. 


PREFACE TO THE TABLES. 


Tue following tables have been prepared as part of a Greek Gram- 
mar. They are likewise published separately, for the greater con- 
venience and economy in their use. The advantages of a tabular 
arrangement are too obvious to require remark; nor is it less obvi- 
ous, that tables are consulted and compared with greater ease when 
printed together, than when scattered throughout a volume. 

The principles upon which the Tables of Paradigms have been 
constructed are the following: — 

I. To avoid needless repetition. There is a certain ellipsis in gram- 
matical tables, as well as in discourse, which relieves not only the 
material instruments of the mind, but the mind itself, and which as- 

‘sists alike the understanding and the memory. When the student 
has learned that, in the neuter gender, the nominative, accusative, 
and vocative are always the same, why, in each neuter paradigm that 
he studies, must his eye and mind be taxed with the examination of 
nine forms instead of three? why, in his daily exercises in declen- 
sion, must his tongue triple its labor, and more than triple the weari- 
ness of the teacher’s ear ? 

II. To represent the language according to its actual use, and not 
according to the theories or fancies of the Alexandrine and Byzantine 
grammarians. For a single example, where not a few might be 
cited, the second future active and middle, which, except as a eu- 
phonic form of the first future, is purely imaginary, has been wholly 
rejected. 

III. To distinguish between regular and irregular usage. What 
student, from the common paradigms, does not receive the impres- 
sion, sometimes never corrected, that the second perfect and pluper- 
fect, the second aorist and future, and the third future belong as reg- 

ularly to the Greek verb, as the first tenses bearing the same name; 
when, in point of fact, the Attic dialect, even including poetic usage, 
presents only about fifty verbs which have the second perfect or 
pluperfect; eighty, which have the second aorist active; fifty, which 
have the second aorist or future passive; forty, which have the 
second aorist middle; and thirty which have the third future? The 
gleanings of all the other dialects will not double these numbers. 
From the common paradigms, what student would hesitate, in 
writing Greek, to employ the form in -μεθον, little suspecting that it 
is only a variety of the first person dual, so exceedingly rare, that 
the learned Elmsley (perhaps too hastily) pronounced it a mere in- 


8 PREFACE, 


vention of the Alexandrine grammarians? The teacher who meets 
with it in his recitation-room may almost call his class, as the crier 
called the Roman people upon the celebration of the secular games, 
“to gaze upon that which they had never seen before, and would 
never see again.” And yet, in the single paradigm of τύπτω, as I 
learned it in my boyhood, this ‘needless Alexandrine,” 
“* Which, like a wounded snake, drags its slow length along,” 

occurs no fewer than twenty-six times, — almost nine times as often 
as in the whole range of the Greek classics. 

To some there may appear to be an impiety in attacking the ven- 
erable shade of τύπτω, but alas! it is little more than a shade, and, 
with all my early and long cherished attachment to it, I am forced, 
after examination, to exclaim, in the language of Electra, 

᾿Αντὶ φιλτάτης 
Μορφῆς, σποδόν τε καὶ σκιὰν ἀνωφελῆ, 
and to ask why, in an age which professes such devotion to truth, a 
false representation of an irregular verb should be still set forth as 
the paradigm of regular conjugation, and made the Procrustes’ bed to 
which all other verbs must be stretched or pruned.* 

With respect to the manner in which these tables should be used, 
so much depends upon the age and attainments of the student, that 
no directions could be given which might not require to be greatly 
modified in particular cases. I would, however, recommend, 

1. That the paradigms should not be learned en masse, but eradu- 
ally, in connection with the study of the principles and ‘pales “of the 
grammar, and with other exercises. 

2. That some of the paradigms should rather be used for reference, 
than formally committed to memory. It will be seen at once, that 
some of them have been inserted merely for the sake of exhibiting ~ 
differences of accent, or individual peculiarities. Ε 

3. That, in learning and consulting the paradigms, the student 
should constantly compare them with ‘each other, with the tables of 
terminations, and with the rules of the grammar. | 

4, That the humble volume should not be dismissed from service, 
till the paradigms are impressed upon the tablets of the memory as 
legibly as upon the printed page, — till they have become so familiar 
to the student, that whenever he has occasion to repeat them, “ the 


* In this edition, the example which takes the place of τύπτω is λύω, hap- 
pily chosen by the sagacious Kriiger as convenient and economical of time 
(zeitsparend), — ἃ verb which presents, to the eye, the prefixes, stem, and affixes, 
with entire distinctness and regularity throughout. A method of pronuncia- 
tion now becoming common in our country renders the use of βουλεύω as a 
verb of constant repetition less desirable than formerly, while it removes an 
objection to the use of λύω. This paradigm, as well as some others, has been 
the rather substituted as presenting a closer analogy to the Latin. 


_ PREFACE. 9 


words,” in the expressive language of Milton, “like so many nimble 

and airy servitors, shall trip about him at command, and in well- 

ordered files, as he would wish, fall aptly into their own places.” 
HANOVER, August 10, 1841. A 


Durie the period that has passed since the preceding was writ- 
ten, such great changes have taken place in the grammars used in 
our schools and colleges, that some passages above seem almost to 
require historic notes, and the earnestness of argument in others 
may appear to students of the present generation like a Quixotic 
joust with windmills. It seems difficult to believe that it is only 
since that time that the use of τύπτω as a paradigm, and the tedious 
superfluities in -μεθον, have been dropped in our American grammars 
(not yet in all); and it is certainly much harder to understand, with 
all allowances for conservative force, why the latter are still so com- 
monly retained in the grammars prepared for German and English 
students. But time and labor are accounted of less value in the Old 
World than in the New. 

The Tables are printed, in the present edition, more compactly 
than they have hitherto been, and with a distinction of type to assist 
in the analysis of forms, which has also been made more mintte. For 
illustration and explanation, many Latin analogies and many refer- 
ences to the text of the Grammar have been introduced, while other 
examples have been proposed for further practice. A minute Cata- 
logue of Verbs, with many references to authors, has been brought 
within moderate compass, with the help of some abbreviations; while 
the tenses commonly cited in parsing are so distinguished by larger 
type, that the eye of the student will catch them at once. 

It was believed that a few pages could not be better occupied than 
by a very brief statement of some of the chief principles, definitions, 
and figures of Syntax, and of a convenient System of Sentential 
Analysis. As these belong to General Grammar, rather than to that 
of any particular language, it seemed best, for economy of space and 
greater clearness, to present the few examples which only could find 
room, in our own language chiefly. 

Full compensation, however, is made to the Greek in § 80, which 
has been condensed from Dr. Clyde’s Appendix to his valuable trea- 
tise on Greek Syntax, with slight additions in brackets, and refer- 
ences to parallel parts of the present grammar. We are truly his 
debtors for presenting to us so concisely the received principles of 
Greek Grammar, in language such as an ancient grammarian, writing 
of course after the most classic period, might himself have used. 


«*, The volume of Tables contains pp. 1, 2, 7-10, 19 - 120. 
ay | 


CONTENTS. 
TABLES. 


I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND 
ORTHOEPY. 


. Alphabet. . 

. Comparison of Alphabets 

. Ligatures. 

_ Vocal Elements : 

. Words classified according to 
Accent . 

. Figures affecting Letters and 
Sounds . Ἄρεος 

. Contraction of Vowels 

. Consonant Changes 


cost ὍΦὺ Ovum 69 bo eH 


Il. ETYMOLOGY. 
A. DECLENSION. 


1. Cases classified . 
τι. Affixes of Declension . 
111. Elements of the Affixes. 
tv. Affixes analyzed and com- 
pared with the Latin 
v. Greek and Latin Paradigms 
_ compared, λύρα, ναύτης, &c. 
vi. Nouns of Declension I., θεά, 
μοῦσα, wd}, μνᾶ, ταμίας, &c. 
vit. Nouns οἵ Declension IL., 
χορός, νοῦς, νεώς, why, &c.. 
vit. Nouns οἵ Declension III. 
A. Mute, γύψ, θρίξ, ἐλπίς, κλείς, 
λέων, σῶμα, φῶς, κέρας, &c. 
B. Liquid, θήρ, pis, ἀνήρ, &c. 
c. Pure, xis, ols, πόλις, ἱππεύς, 
ἠχώ, ναῦς, γένος, ἄστυ, &c. 
1x. Dialectic Forms of Declension 


x. Irregular and Dialectic De- . 


clension, Ζεύς, vids, δόρυ, &e. 
x1. Adjectives of Two Termina- 

tions, ἄδικος, σαφής, &c. . 
xu. Adjectives of Three Termi- 

nations, μῶρος, ἡδύς, &c. . 
x11. Numerals, εἷς, δύο, τρεῖς, &c. 
xiy. Active Participles, λύων, &c. 
xv. Substantive Pronouns . 
xvi. Adjective Pronouns, ὁ, &c. 


B. CoMPARISON . , 
C. CONJUGATION. 
I. Distinctions classified. . . 


COONTO στ Pome 


17 
18 


19 
20 


21 
2 


bo 


23 
25 
26 
27 
28 


29 


30 


11. Formation of the Tenses. .§ 81 
11. Analysis of the Verb 32 
ιν. Translation of παύω. . 34 
v. Subjective Affixes analyzed 
and compared . . 35 
vi. Objective Affixes analyzed 
and compared . 36 
vil. General Paradigm, λύω 57 
ἔλιπον, πέποιθα, ἐτρίβην. 88 
vill. Classes of Verbs. 
A. Mute, τρίβω, τάσσω, &e. . 39 
B. Liquid, ἀγγέλλω, φαίνω 40 
c. Double-Consonant . ~ 41 
D. Pure. i. Contract, τιμῶ, 
PAO, δηλῶ, OnpS, πλέω, Kc. 42 
Latin Analogies . 43 
ii. Barytones in -a, θύω, &e, 44 
iii, Verbs in -pt, ἵστημι, 
τίθημι, δίδωμι, δείκνυμι, 
ἕημι, εἰμί," εἶμι, φημί, ο. 45 
E. Preteritives, οἶδα, ἣμαι, &c. 46 
ΙΧ. Relation of Tenses and Stem- 
ROMS ΠΥ αος, ΑΕΥΡΙ ΣΧ ΕΝ ον £7 
x. Dialectic Forms . 48 
XI. Classes & Notation of Stems 49 
x1. Catalogue of Verbs. . 50 
D. Numerars . .~52 
E. PRONOMINAL CORRELATIVES 58 
ΒΕ, Taste oF DERIVATION 54 
G. SIGNIFICANT ELEMENTS δῦ 
Ill. SYNTAX. 
A. General Principles . . . 56 
B. Figures of Syntax. . 67 
C. Formsof Analysisand Parsing 72 
D. Chief Rules of Syntax 76 


IV. PROSODY AND PRO- 
NUNCIATION. 


A. Table of Feet a 77 

B. Metrical Deseription eid 
Analysis . 78 

C. Methods of Pronunciation . 79 


GREEK APPENDIX 80 


» 


CONTENTS. 


1 


ΓΝΤΒΟΡΌΟΤΊΟΝ. ---- DIALECTS. . . . . . 881 


BOOK I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 
- §90 


Cu. 1. CHARACTERS. . 


History of ek a ‘ 


Cu. 2. Fiaures . 

Cu. 3. VowEis ... 
Syllabication . . . 
1. Precession. ᾿ 
11. Union of Syllables . 

A. Contraction 
Ἦ δον τς 


97 
99 


- 106 


111 
113 


» ἢ τὶ 


118 
124 


c. Apostrophe, οὐ Elision . 127 
Dialectic Variations . 180 
Cu. 4. CONSONANTS. . 137 
Old Semivowels. . 188 

Euphonic Changes, 
A. In Formation of Words 147 


B. In Connection of Words 161 


c. Special Rules. . . 
Dialectic Variations . . . 


BOOK II. ETYMOLOGY. 


. 172 
Cu. 1. PRINCIPLES OF DECLEN- 
~« 178 


Divisions and Definitions 


BION - τἀ es 
A. Gender .. 
B. Number, c. Case 


D. Methods and General Rules 
. 186 
Cu. 2. DECLENSION oF Nouns. 
. 194 


E. History of Declension . 


1. First Declension. . 


Dialectic Forms. . . . 197 

11. Second Declension. . . 199 

Dialectic Forms . NE at Τ ς 

ur. Third Declension. . . 202 

A. Mutes . . Shore poe | 

B. Liquids. j % 208 

c. Pures J ite 91. 

Dialectic Forms . Lh, Sou 

tv. Irregular Nouns + » 228 

Cu. 8. ADJECTIVES . 35 229 

Cu. 4. NUMERALS « . 289 
Cu. 5. PRoNouNs. 

1. Substantive . . . . . 948 

11. Adjective . eit ih je 348 

Cu. 6. COMPARISON. . . 256 
1. Of Adjectives, 

A. By -τερος, -raros . 257 

B. By -lwv, -urros . . . 260 

c. Irregular . : . 262 

π. Of Adverbe 3s. οὐ ξ 2. 1263 

History of Comparison 264 

Cu. 7. PRINCIPLES OF Consu- 

GATION . egy. ae Oe 

A. Voice . . 266 

B. Tense . . 267 

BOOK III: 

General Remarks . ow SOL 


Cu. 1. Tue SUBSTANTIVE. 


174 
178 
180 


. 165 


167 


c. Mode . . 269 
p. Number and Person . 270 
π. History of Conjugation . 271 


Cu. 8. PREFIXES OF CoNJUGA- 
TION. 


1 Augmen.. est Sl ot ς 977 
11. Reduplication . . . . 280 
111. In Composition . . . 282 
Dialectic Use 284 


Cu. 9. AFFIXES oF ConsvGA- 
TION. 
1. Classification and Analysis 
A. Tense-Signs a> 
B. Connecting Vowels . 
c. Flexible Endings. . . 
11. Union with the Stem. 
A. Consonant Changes. . 


285 
288 


- 290 


295 
304 


B. Vowel Changes . . 809 

c. -MI Form. ἃ 1518 

ἐᾷ Complete Tenses. 817 
Dialectic Forms. » 321 
Cu. 10. STEM OF THE VERB . 336 
1. Prime Stems . . » B40 
11. Euphonic Stems . 341 
111.. Emphatic Stems . . 346 
Iv. Adopted Stems. 358 


Cu. 11. FoRMATION OF Worps 


359 


1, Of Simple Words . 362 
A. Nouns . . 363 
B. Adjectives . . 373 
c. Pronouns . . 377 
D. Verbs . 378 
E. Adverbs .. τ POU 

11. Of Compound Words. . 383 

SYNTAX. 


‘Js Agreement =... + γα ἢ 
II. Use of Cases. . 


393 


. 897 


(12 


A. Nominative 
B. Genitive. A 
1. Of Departure 
1. Separation . 
2. Distinction 
ir. Of Cause. 
A. 1. Origin . 
. Material 
. Supply. . 
. Partitive 
. Motive, &e. 
. Price, Value, &e. 
: Sensible and Men- 
tal Object 
. Time and Place . 


p. Constituent . . ἢ 
1. Property aA 
2: nelataon ἐς Ss 
C. Dative Objective . 
1. Of Approach . 
1. Nearness . 
2. Likeness 
ur. Of Influence 
D. Dative Residual 
1. Instrumentaland Modal 
ΤΙ. Temporal and Local . 
E. Accusative . . : 
1. Of Direct Object, κοι. 
Double Accusative . 
11. Of Specification 
m1. Of Extent . ; 
tv. Adverbial (. 0°. 
F. Vocative. 
Remarks on. the Cases 
III. Use of Numbers, Gen- 
ders, and Persons 
Rules of Agreement 
Cu. 2. ADJECTIVE AND PRO- 
NOUN. 
1. Agreement rig 
11. On the Adjective . 


BOOK. IV. 


Cu. 1. QUANTITY AND VER- 
SIFICATION . . tes 
I. Natural Quantity . 
II. Local Quantity 
111. Versification . 
A. Dactylic Verse . 
B. Anapzestic Verse 
c. Iambic Verse. 
D. Trochaic Verse . 
£. Other Metres 


CONTENTS. 
8 400[ «11. Use of Degrees 
403] .v. Use of the Article. 
404 A. Broad Use 
405 B. Article Proper . 
406} vy. On the Pronoun 
410 A. Personal, &c. . 
411 B. Αὐτός. Ε 
412 c. Demonstrative . 
414 p. Indefinite. 
415 E. Relative . . 
428 F. Complementary and In- 
431 terrogative . 
α. ΓΛΑλλος and Ἕτερος. - 
432|Cu. 8. THE VERB. 
433} I. Agreement . . 
434| II. Use of the Voices 
435 A. Active. 
440 B. Middle nae 
441 C. Passive .. » 9 Ὁ 
448} III. Use of the Tenses Oi 
449 A. Definite and Indefinite 
450 B. Complete . 
451 σ. Interchange oe aR 
452| IV. Use of the Modes. 
465 A. Intellective . 
466 Use of ἄν΄. 
469 1. Final Clauses . 
470 11. Conditional . 
472 111. Relative & Temporal 
480 Iv. Complementary . 
481 v. Interchange . 
482 B. Volitive 
483 c. Incorporated . 
484 1. Infinitive . 
485 ' u1. Participle . 
1Π|. Verbal in -réos . 
488|Cu. 4. THE PARTICLE. 
492 A. The Adverb . > 
B. The Preposition. . 
c. The Conjunction . 
504 Observations 
506'Cu. 5. ARRANGEMENT. 
PROSODY. 
Cu. 2. ACCENT . 
728) I. General Laws . . . + 
726] II. In Vowel Changes . . 
734| III. In Inflection. . . . 
740] IV. In Construction. ; 
747 A. Grave Accent 
701}. Β. Anastrophe . τ λα 
755 Oo. Prochtics’. Σ᾿“ τς 
760 Ὁ. Enclitics . : 
764| V. In Formation . ἢ 


GREEK TABLES. 


I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 


1. Tue ALPHABET. 


(8 90 — 92.) 
Order. Large. Senall. Tethers. ; Names. 
i A a a "Aga Alpha 
I. B £86 b Βῆτα Beta 
Ill. r yf δ, ἢ Tappa Gamma 
IV. aa d Δέλτα Delta 
Υ. Bit ἃ & Ἔ Widdv Epsilon 
¥L ATs Ὁ Z Zinta Zeta 
VII. H 7 é - *Hra Eta 
MIE <5 8. 9 th Θῆτα Theta 
IX. I ι i ἸἸῶτα Tota 
x. KR Ks c Karna Kappa 
ΧΙ. ἈΠ Χ ] AdpBda Lambda 
XII. M up m Μῦ. Mu 
XIII Lae n No Nu 
XIV. mw § x Ξι ΧΙ 
XV. Oe 5 *O μῖκρόν Omicron 
XVI. i χὰ P Ti Pi 
XVII P a pep Ἐν Ῥῶ Rho 
XVIII 2,C σιν 5 Σίγμα Sigma 
XIX. ἘΠ ΕΝ t Ταῦ Tau 
FoF Y¥ °Y y Ὗ ψῖλόν Upsilon 
ΧΧΙ. Φ φ ph di Phi 
XXII Som ch ΧΙ Chi, 
XXIII v y ps Vi Psi 
XXIV. Ὧν ἃ Ὁ Ὦ μέγα Omega 
Peewey Sani * Bai Vau 
δες | φις 4 Κόππα Koppa 
7) sh Say San 


14 7 | TABLES. § 2. 


2. COMPARISON OF ALPHABETS. 


(97, 98.) 

Hebrew. Greek. Latin. Hebrew. Greek. Latin. 
δὲ Aleph Aa Alpha A a |DSamekh 2 oSigma S 5 
5 Beth B B Beta B b |y Ayn Oo OmicronO o 
ἃ Gimel IT y Gamma G g [3 Pe II + Pi ἘΠ τα 
Ἵ Daleth A ὃ Delta D ἃ |x Tsadhe Ἐξ Xi eS 
1 He Ee Epsilon E e Ρ Qoph Fg Koppa Q ἃ 
ἡ Vav F F Vau F f |5 Resh Pp Rho τ 
+ Zayin Zt Zeta Ζ z twShin ΤΟ San,Sampi 
m Hheth Hy Eta H ἢ |nTav T +r Tau To. 
Ὁ Tet © @ Theta Y v U psilon U,V,u, v, 
> Yodh I t Iota 1. 51) Ἐπ ἢ 
5. Kaph Kk Kappa 0C,Ke,k ᾧ & Phi 
5 Lamedh A A Lambda L 1 X X Chi 
Dn Mem Mp Mu Mm Ψ Psi 
ΣΝ Nw Νὰ N on Q ὦ O mega 

3. LigATuREs. 
(90. 2.) 

ou as | om ἐπι | of 
270 amo | of ἐξ | 0% σθαι 
αν av | a εὖ |os oo 

\ \ 

ὃ γαρ lw nv 3 OT 
2 vy ἢ : σχ 
A Kab 
οἷο γεν | © ται 
25 YP | mM λλ ὧν Tav 
4 δὲ μὴν μεν ὥ τὴν 
δὲ δι» ος |¢ τῆς 
Δίῳ δια | g ον ae το 
εἰ ῇ Ges περι 9 τοῦ 

ἶ a |\F τῶν 
q |e p : 
2 εκ CA pe ww υν 
ey ev | eg po | va ὕπο 


§ 5. ‘ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOHPY. 15 


| 4. VocaL ELEMENTS. 
I. Vowets, Suvpte anp Compounp (106-110). 


Class I. ro: SRR ARS OW. 
A O E U I 
Perle ἢ Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. 
hort ae ο ε v ἵ 
ΞΙΜΡΙΕ VoweLs, ᾿ rr τ Ὁ 
Long, 2. “ἃ @ ἢ ῦ ϊ 
Proper 3. a ot εἰ ve 
DIPHTHONGS IN Ἢ; ren 3 mt 
Improper, 4. @ ῳ n ve 
Proper, 5. ἅν οὐ ev 
DiIpHTHONGS IN »,4 Per, a 
Improper, 6. Gv ov nu 


II. Consonants (137, 138). 
Class I. Class II. Class IIT. 


Orders. Labials. Palatals. Linguals. 

1. Smootn Mutss, π k τ 

MUTES. 2. MippLe Mutes, β Ύ ὃ 

3. Rouen Motes, p x θ 

4, DoustE Consonants, Ψ ξ ζ 

SEMI-— )5. Sprrants, F I σ 
VOWELS. ) 6. Nasats, μ Ύ ν ἐπι ΓΕΡᾺ 
7. FLvents, A p ΕΑΝ 


ConsoNANTS (SECOND ARRANGEMENT). 

Labial, or + Mutes, 7, B, 4, 
_MUTES, Guttural, or x Mutes, k, y, X, 

Dental, or τ Mutes, 1, 8, 0, Simple Consonants. 
Liquids, A, p, v, p, Ὑ nasal, 


Sibilants, Pure, σ᾽ 


SEMIVOWELS, 
Mixed, W, Ἐξ, Double, or Compound Con- 


sonants. 


III. Breararnes (93). - 


Rouen Breatuine, or AsprraTE (‘). 
Smootn, or Sorr Breatuina (ἢ). 


5. Worps CuLassiFieD ACCORDING TO ACCENT. 


Proclitic: ( Oxytone: Paroxytone: 
ς 3. 3 ε e997 5» , ’ ’ 
6, οὐ, ἐν, ὡς. | σύ, ἰδέ, ἀκοή. λύω, ταμίας. 
ORTHOTONE : Barytone : Proparoxy tone: 
: : 
ὅς, dpa, mip: | ὕω, ἄξια, Ade - ἴδιος, ἐλύετε. 
Enclitic : Perispome : Properispome : 
νῆσός τις. οὗ, ὁρῶ, ἀνιῶ. σῦκον, τιμᾶτε. 


16 ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. § 6. 


6. Figures arrectinc Lerrers AnD Sounps (99s). 


1. Adding : 2. Subtracting: 3. Transposing: 5. Uniting: 
PRoTHESIS, (Jnitial) APH#RESIS, METATHESIS. SYNARESIS, 
EPENTHESIS, (Medial) SyNcoPE, 4, Exchanging : Contraction, 
PARAGOGE, (Final) APocoPE, ANTITHESIS. Crasis, 
EXTENSION. Apostrophe. Assimilation. Synizesis. 

6. Resolving : 7. Shortening: 8. Lengthening: 9. Attenuating: 


DLERESIS. . SYSTOLE. DIASTOLE. PRECESSION. 


7. ContTRactTION oF VoweEts (115s). 


In the columnsin § 7 and 8, the first of the vowels or consonants affected by the change 
is placed at the left, and the second at the top, both in common type. The result of the 
change is in full-face type, in a line with the first and beneath the second. The paren- 
theses enclose regular changes in the union of the stem and affixes of verbs. The labial, 
palatal, or lingual mute with which v final combines as a, is represented by/ or p. Some 
changes are placed below the columns, and some special cases are enclosed in brackets. 


Se! ἡ - δου ete τῷ, (ἃ OLR) 
(@ mw ἃ @ @ ἃ @ © © @© ©) @ mw a 

a {av ae oe τ Γ ἢ ἢ o ἐᾧᾧ ὦ εἕὦ εῷᾧ GQ 

ω. αι [Dor. ἃ ᾶ 

ἢ ἢ ἢ @ &@ ἢ ἢ OV οἱ οὔ, ὦ) ῳ εἰ εὖ 
en a ey [lon. ev ev] 

a εἰ [Augm. ἡ o © <0] 
oh τῷ Ἧς ἢ » εν ἢ -ὴν 

ω αι (ov ob ὦ οὐ οὐ οὐ οὐ ὦ) ᾧ οι ov 
οὐ ἃ υη: ο ἢ @ ὦ 

ov a 
wo @ ω ῳ ὧν 
εκ U t 6 
v Ὁ v wu 0 


eve & eva εἰ, ore & o1a Or, ova w & ov, viv. In Augment, éav ηὐ & ad, ἐευ 
εὖ & nd, ἐο ὦ, ἐεο éw. In Affixes (18), ao ov& a, ac ar, o¢ or & ὠ, οἵῳ. 


_8. EvpHonic CHANGES OF ConsoNANTS (141 5). 


0, v fi- π; β, Ύ; 
CK pp ΘΝ nal 6 ¢y x€ I 
7,26 (by  μμ 40 πτ gar) ἴα BB [πφ] ἴσσ, 1] 
ΎΧχ €& X ye x® «Kr yar) pa 75 [xx] oo, ὕ 
7 δ οθ) (σ K σμσθ στ Sar) ἴα o, σι 
ἐκ [τθ] ν t, oo 
(ve γκ py v0) μπ ιν 
i a le Ng να ΕΠ ΠΥ 
OF στε μ a ὙΧ 
eg pe γέ 


VA AA, vp Pp & νδρ, νθσ vo, vet, (Ao AE, μα με, PT PE, μμμ BH, ὙΎΜ Yt.) 
μὰ BA, up Bp, po Pp, oo rr, σδ ἵ, Fp p, Fo vo, AL AA. 


§ 10. ETYMOLOGY. — DECLENSION. 17 


IL ETYMOLOGY. 


9. Nores. 1. To avoid needless repetition, alike burdensome to 
teacher and pupil, and to accustom the student early to the application 
of rule, the tables of paradigms have been constructed with the following 
ellipses, which will be at once supplied from general rules : 

a. In the paradigms of DECLENSION, except the first, the Voc. sing. is 
omitted whenever it has the same form with the Nom., and the following 
cases are omitted throughout (see 181) : 

a. The Voc. plur., because it is always the same with the Nom. 

8. The Dat. dual, because it is always the same with the Gen. 

y. The Acc. and Voc. dual, as always the same with the Nom. 

ὃ. The Acc. and Voc. neut., in all the numbers, as always the same 
with the Nom. . 

b. In the paradigms of ADJECTIVES, and of words similarly inflected, 
the Neuter is omitted in the Gen. and Dat. of all the numbers, and in the 
Nom. dual ; because in these cases it never differs from the Masculine. 

c. In the paradigms of consucaTiIoN, the 1st Pers. dual is omitted. 
throughout, as having the same form with the Ist Pers. plur., and the 3d 
Pers. dual is omitted whenever it has the same form with the 2d Pers. 
dual, that is, in the primary tenses of the Indicative, and in the Subjunc- 
tive (299¢).. For the form in -μεθον, whose empty shade has been so 
multiplied by grammarians, and forced to stand, for idle show, in the 
rank and file of numbers and persons, see 299 b. 

2. Varieties of inflection have been illustrated by some tables of still 
briefer form ; where it seemed undesirable to cumber the page and weary 
the eye by the multiplication of needless details (17 s, 26, 39s). In the 
shorter paradigms of verbs, the dual has been commonly omitted, because 
so little used, and so readily supplied from the general rule in 299 e. 

3. The regular formation of the tenses is exhibited in the table (81), 
which may be thus read: ‘‘ The tense is formed from the stem by 
affixing , or, ‘by prefixing and affixing (or, in the nude 
form, ).” In the application of this table, the forms of the stem 
must be distinguished, if it has more than a single form (336). 

4. A star (*) in the tables shows that an element or form is wanting. 
Brackets [7 are chiefly used to enclose what is unusual or doubtful, or 
may be omitted. . For the common mode of representing euphonic change 
by the aid of parentheses, see 118 6, In this mode, Latin Italics have 
the same office as Greek full-face letters (and also, in § 42, common Greek 
letters, until a hyphen separates). For the use of the signs j, |], ~, see 27; 
of ‘, !, and superior figures, 36 g, 37 r; of (v, 162a. 


A. TABLES OF DECLENSION. 
10. 1. Cases Cuassiriep (397 s). 


Subjective. Objective. Residual. 
NoMINATIVE. ACOCUSATIVE. VOCATIVE. 
Direct. - Subject. Direct Object. Compellative. 
Who. W hereinto. Address. 
GENITIVE. DATIVE. Dative (Ablative). 
Indirect. Origin, &c. Indirect Object. Accompaniment. 
Whence (from, of). Whither (to, for). Where (at,in, with, by). 


18 DECLENSION. — AFFIXES, ὁ § 11. 


11. wu. AFFIxEsS OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS. 


ὩΣ Ἢ κα, Μ. x Nout, M. a vejent. 
Sing. Nom. as, ης α; ἢ os | ον ee aa 
Gen. ov |as, ἧς ov os 
Dat. a, ἢ @ ἵ 
Ace. av, nv ov ν, a ᾿ 
Voce. a, ἢ ε [ον Ἐ + 
Plur. Nom. αι o | ἃ ες | ἀ 
Gen. ῶν ων ων 
Dat. aus” ous oi(v 
Ace. as ous | ἃ as a 
Voc. αι o | a ες ἄ 
Dual Nom. a w | ε 
~ Gen. aw : ον. ou 
Dat. aw ow ow 
Acc. a ω ε 
Voc. a @ € 


12. 11. Exements of THE AFFIXES. 


In the column of Flexible Endings, the figures denote the Declensions ; 
the small full-face letters are signs of relation or case, and the full-face 
capitals are signs of nwmber ; while those to which G. is attached also in- 
dicate gender. See 186-189. 


Connecting Vowels. Flexible Endings. 
Dec. I. | Dec. II. | Dec. ITT. 
Sing. Nom. || a(n) | © νὴ ς. Fem. 1, *. Neut. 2, να. ; 3, * 
Gen. a(n) ο * ier os. ὸ and Mase. 1, o. 
Dat. a(n) | © Ἂ 
Acc. a(n) | © = οἱ ἅ. Neut. 8, *. 
γοο. a(n) | o(e) = * 
Plur. Nom. || a ο * * llEs. land2,E. Neut.“AG. 
Gen. α oF * oN. 
Dat. a oz * (Ext). 3, Xv. 1 and 2, md. 
Ace. || α ο ἢ * ΠΣ) a. Neut.“A α. 
Du. N. A.V.|| α ο ιν E. 
G. D. a ο * UN. 8, oN. 


ὃ 14, 
13. 


, AFFIXES AND PARADIGMS COMPARED, 


19 


1v. ArFixEs ANALYZED AND COMPARED WITH THE LATIN. 


The Affixes, printed in full-face type or italics, are preceded by their 
analyses in common type. Hyphens separate the Connecting Vowels from 


the Flexible Endings. 


Dec. I Dec. II. 
Masc. Fem M. F. Neut. 
S.N. a-s Gs,qs | a-* a, o-s os | o-v ov 
a-* ἃ o-s ws | o-m ἄν, 
G.a-o ov | a-os ds, ns 0-0 ου͵ 
8-1 ὦ [di, ds] o-i i [tits] 
D. αι 4,4 o-t ῳ 
8:1 ὦ οἱ 61] 
Ab.a-e ἃ 0-6 6 
A. av αν, nv o-v ον 
am am o-m wm 
Vee ee τὰ ἢ o-* ε 0-» ον 
a-* @ o-* ὅ o-m wm 
P.N. a-e a -o-e ov } *-a & 
a-e ὦ o-e ἢ *¥.a ἅ 
G. a-wv ὧν o-wy wv 
a-um aréim [ttm] o-um 6riim[ tim] 
Ὁ. α-ἰς αἷς ο-ἰς οις 
a-is is [abis] o-is is [dbis] 
A. a-vs as o-vs ovs | *-a & 
a-ms ds o-msés | *-a & 
DN. ἀεὶ ἃ o-€ @ 
G. a-w ay ο-ιν οιἂν 


Dec. III. 

M. F. Neut. 
ς * 
8 | x 

os 

is 

t 

a 

é [2 
ν,ἅ τ 
em [im] ~ 
% [ Br N.] * 
=. N. be 
ες ἅ 
és | a [ta 

ων 

oi(v 

ibis[is 

vs ἅς 
ems és [7s] a [ta] 
€ 
ow 


14. v. GREEK AND Latin PARADIGMS COMPARED. 
FIRST DECLENSION, — FEMININE. 


Sing. Nom. λύρᾶ, 
Gen. λύρᾶς, 
Dat. λύρᾳ, 
Ace. λύρᾶν, 
Voc. dupa, 

Plur. Nom. λύραι, 
Gen. λυρῶν, 
Dat. λύραις, 
Acc. λύρᾶς, 
Voc. λύραι, 

Dual Nom. λύρᾶ, 
Gen. λύραιν, 


Gen. | 


Abl. 
Dat. 
Abl. 


Gen. 


Abl. 1 


Dat. 
Abl. 


lyra, 
yTe, 
lyra, 
lyre, 
lyra, 
lyram, 
lyra, 


lyre, 
lyraérum, 
yris, 
lyris, 
lyris, 
lyras, 
lyre, 


lyre duc, 


lyrérum duarum, 


a lyre (Subject). 
of a lyre. 

from a lyre. 

to or for a lyre. 
with or by a.lyre. 
a lyre (Object). 
O lyre. 


lyres (Subject). 
of lyres. 

Srom lyres. 

to or for lyres. 
with or by lyres. 
lyres (Object). 
O lyres. 


two lyres (Subject). 
of two lyres, &e. 


20 GREEK AND LATIN DECLENSION COMPARED. § 14. 
DEC. I. MASC. DEC. II. MASC, DEC. Ill. M. F. 
Sailor. Wile. Swine. 
Sing. Nom. ναύτη  nauta δόλος dolus σῦς suis 
Gen. ναύτου naute δόλου doli aids sitis 
Dat. ναύτῃ naut@ δόλῳ dole ott = std 
Abl. nauta . dolo ste 
Acc. ναύτην nautan δόλον dolwm σῦν stem 
Voc. ναῦτἅ nauta δόλε dole od ~~ suis 
Plur. N.V. ναῦται naute δόλοι dol aves sites 
Gen. ναυτῶν nautdrum δόλων dolorwn στῶν suwm 
Dat. ναύταις nautis δόλοις dolis ctot stibus 
Ace. vatras nautas δόλους dolos avas siles 
Du. N. A.V. vara δόλω ove 
G. D. ναύταιν δόλοιν ovoty 
DEC. II. NEUT. DEC. III. NEUT. DEC. IV. N. 
Gift. Fire. Throat. Tear. Knee. 
5, N. A.V. δῶρον = donwm πῦρ guttir δάκρῦ — gen 
Gen. δώρου dont πῦρός guttiris ddxpios gen(iiis)iis 
Dat. δώρῳ. dono πυρί gutturé δάκρυς = gen(uz)a 
Abl. dono gutture gen(ue)ti 
P. N. A.V. δῶρά dona guttura δάκρυα genta 
Gen. δώρων dondrum gutturwm δακρύων genuwm 
Dat. δώροις donis gutturibus - δάκρυσν genubus 
D. N. A.V. depo δάκρυε 
α. ἢ. δώροιν δακρύοιν 


For σύας was also used the contract form σῦς ; for swibus, the syncopated 
stibus ; and for genwous (genuibus), by a syncope of the τ, genibus. See 225 f. 


15. vi. Nouns or THE First DsEciEnsion. 
ἃ. FEMININE. 

The goddess, ἥν, MUSE, table, SONY, mind, 
Lat. dea musca § musa mensa 5dé mina 
OS ae bea pvia μοῦσᾶ Tpame Ca oon μνᾶ 
G. τῆς θεᾶς μυίας μούσης τραπέζης ᾧδῆς μνᾶς 

D. τῇ θεᾷ μυίᾳ μούσῃ τραπέζῃ. ᾧδῇῃ μνᾷ 

A. τὴν θεν μυϊᾶν μοῦσᾶάνδϑΨΣἀἭ τράπεζΑν ῳᾧδήν μνᾶν 
P.N. ai δεαΐ pviat  μοῦσαι τράπεζαι δαί μναῖ 
α. τῶν θεῶν μυιῶν μουσῶν τραπεζῶν δῶν μνῶν 
D. ταῖς θεαῖς μυίαις μούσαις τραπέζαις ᾧδαῖς μναῖς 

A. τὰς θεᾶς μυίς povods τραπέζαεςἁ @das μνᾶς 

Ὁ. Ν. τὰ θεᾶ pula μούσᾶ τραπέζᾶ oda μνᾶ 
G. ταῖν θεαῖν μυίαν μούσαινν τραπέζαιν day μναῖν 
8 16. ὁ. Dec. I. 180}, 194s: Gender 176; ἡ, ὁ, 175 Ὁ; ἃ; ἃ, or η, 


in Sing., 1945; ποιητὰ 194. 25 μν(αα)ᾶ, Ἑρμ(έας)ῆς, 196, 120 6; βοῤῥᾶ, 
Τωβρύου and -a, 198.1, 954. Accent: θεᾶς 775 ἃ, μυίας 771 Ὁ, μυιῶν 7118, 
τραπέζης 710 ἃ, ᾿Ατρεῖδαι 711 ο, Ἑρμ(έαςγῆς 772. — Other Examples, σκιά 
shadow, οἰκία house, θύρα door, ὥρα hora, HOUR, μοῖρα portion, γλῶσσα or 
γλῶττα (169 a) tongue, δόξα opinion, λέαινα lioness, τιμή honor, κόρη maiden, 
ovx(éa)h fig-tree ; vedvias young man, κριτής judge, Mépans Persian. 


§ 16. NOUNS OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSION,. 21 


b. MASCULINE. 
steward, poet,  sonof Atreus, Mercury, north wind. 
questor ροδία Atrides Hermes boreas 
rapids ποιητῆς ᾿Ατρείδης ‘Epu(eas γῆς Bo(péds)ppas 
ταμίου ποιητοῦ ‘Arpeidov Ἑ ρμίέου )od Bo(péou)ppa 
τῷ ταμίᾳ ποιητῇ ᾿Ατρείδη ἙἙρμίέᾳ ἢ ββο(ρέᾳ )ppa 
τὰν ταμίᾶν ποιητήν ᾿Ατρείδην ‘Epp(éay ἣν Bo(peav)ppay 


2 
᾿».ΌΦΙΕ 
- st 

Ya Κα 
Saag 


V. ταμίξ ποιητᾶ ᾿Ατρείδη ἝἙῬρμίέαᾷ ἢ ββο(ρέᾶ ἡῥῥᾶ 
; : , : : Gobryas. 
΄“ ΄ ji 
P. N. of ταμίαι ποιηταί Ατρεῖδαι Ἕ,ρμίέαι )at N. Τωβρύᾶς 
G. τῶν ταμιῶν ποιητῶν ᾿Ατρειδῶν Ἑρμ(εῶν)ῶν G. Τωβρύου, 
D. τοῖς ταμίαις ποιηταῖς ᾿Ατρείδαις “Epp(éats)ais Γωβρύα 
A. τοὺς ταμίᾷ: ποιητᾶς ᾿Ατρείδας ‘Epp(éds jas D. Τωβρύᾳ 
. μ “) ρ ρμ Ξ ρ ‘ 
D. N. τὼ ταμίῷ ποιτά ᾿Ατρείδδ ‘Epu(ea la A. Τωβρύᾶν 
a , “ > ΄ c ΄ “ Mo 
G. τοῖν ταμίαιν ποιηταᾶῖν ᾿Ατρείδαιν Ἑ, ρμίέαιν)αῖν V. Τωβρύὰᾶ 
16. vu. Nouns or THE Sseconp DEcLENSION. 
a. MASCULINE AND FEMININE. 
The choir, island, angel, mind, temple. 
Lat. chorus instila angélus ᾿ mens fanum 
¢ a A - : 
S.N. ὁ χορός ἡἣ νῆσος ὃ ἄγγελος ὁ νόος, νοῦς ὃ νᾶός, νεώς 
“a / 7 “ a 
G. χοροῦ νήσου ἀγγέλου νόου, νοῦ ναοῦ, νεώ 
a ’ > , , a a , 
D. χορῷ νήσῳ ἀγγέλῳ νόῳ, νῷ ναῷ, νεῴ 
Α. χορόν νῆσον ἄγγελον νόον, νοῦν ναόν, νεών, 
Ὑ. χορέ νῆσε ἄγγελε νόε, νοῦ [νεώ 
P.N. χοροί νῆσοι ἄγγελοι νόοι, νοῖ ναοί, νεῴ 
α. χορῶν νήσων ἀγγέλων νόων, νῶν ναῶν, νεών 
D. χοροῖς νήσοις ἀγγέλοις νόοις νοῖς ναοῖς, νεῴς 
“ ’ 
A. χορούς νήσους ἀγγέλους νόους, νοῦς ναούς, νεώς 
D.N. χορώ νήσω ἀγγέλω νόω, νώ ναώ, νεώ 
“ , ΕῚ ’ὔ’ , ΄ “ , 
G. xopoty νῆσον ἀγγέλοιν νόοιν, vow ναοῖν, νεὼν 
. b. NEUTER. 
The €99, cave, apple, part, bone. 
Lat. ovum antrum malum membrum os 
\ bw ἃ a “a νυ 3 ’, > a 
S. N. τὸ ὠόν ἄντρον μῆλον μόρϊον ὀστέον, ὀστοῦν 
G. τῦ ὠοῦ ἄντρου μήλου μορίου ὀστέου, ὀστοῦ 
a reer »” , , > , > a 
D. τῷ ὠῷ ἄντρῳ μήλῳ μορίῳ ὀστέῳ, ὀστῷ 
P.N. ra ou ἄντρᾶ μῆλᾶ pooped doTéd, ὀστᾶ 
G. τῶν av ἄντρων. μήλων μορίων ὀστέων, ὀστῶν 
a ΄“΄ a “ 
D. τος ὠοῖς ἄντροις μήλοις μορίοις ὀστέοις, ὀστοῖς 
D.N. τὼ ὠώ ἄντρω μήλω μορίω ὀστέω, ὀστώ 
“ “ ΄ , > ~ 
G. τὸν ov ἄντρον μήλοιν μορίοιν ὀστέοιν, ὀστοῖν 


§ 16. c. Ῥπο. IT. 1995: Gender 176 ; v(d0s)ots, ὀστ(έονγοῦν, 121, 120 6, 
772; ν(αῤε)εώς 120 ο, i, 772 ἃ ; A. νεώ 199. 8 ; ὠόν 140. —O. E. ὁ λόγος 
word, ἡ ὁδός way, ὁ δῆμος people, ὁ ταῦρος taurus, bull, 6, ἡ ἄνθρωπος homo, 
man, ὁ θεός (182 c) deus, god, ὁ πλοῦς voyage, ὁ λεώς people, ὁ λαγώς hare, 
ἡ ἕως dawn; πτερόν wing, ῥόδον rosa, ROSE, σῦκον Jig, ὄργανον tool, 


22 THIRD DECLENSION. — MUTES. § 17. 
17. v. Nouns or THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
A. MUTE.—a. MAscuLINE AND FEMININE. 
a. LABIAL. b. PALATAL. c. LINGUAL. 
ὁ, vulture. | ὁ, ἡ, goat. ἡ, hair. | n, hope. ὁ, tooth. ἡ, key. 
5. N. yi αἴξ θρίξ ἐλπὶς ὀδούς κλείς clavis 
G. γῦπός | alyds τρῖχός | ἐλπῖδοο ὀδόντος κλειδός 
D. γῦπί αἰγί τριχί ἐλπίδι ὀδόντι κλειδί 
A. γῦπα αἶγα τρίχα | ἐλπίδα ὀδόντα κλεῖδα, κλεῖν 
P.N. γῦπες αἶγες τρίχες | ἐλπίδες ὀδόντες κλεῖδες κλεῖς] 
G. γυπῶν | αἰγῶν τριχῶν | ἐλπίδων ὀδόντων κλειδῶν 
D. yowi αἰξί θριξί ἐλπίσι ὀδοῦσι κλεισί 
_A. γῦπας αἶγας τρίχας | ἐλπίδας ὀδόντας κλεῖδας, κλεῖς 
D.N. γῦπε aiye «τρίχε | ἐλπίδε ὀδόντε κλεῖδε 
G. γῦποῖν | αἰγον τριχοῖν | ἐλπίδονν ὀδόντοιν κλειδοῖν 
ἡ, vein. | 6, raven. ὁ, lynx. | ἡ, strife. ἡ, helmet. 6, foot. 
S. N. φλέ κόραξ λύγξ ἔρϊς κόρῦς πούς 
G. φλεβός | κόρᾶκος λυγκός | ἔρϊδος KopvOos ποδός 
D, φλεβί | Kopaxt λυγκί ᾿ ἔριδι κόρυθι ποδί 
A. φλέβα | κόρακα λύγκα | ἔριδα, ἔριν κόρυθα, κόρυν πόδα 
P.D. φλεψί | κόραξι λυγξί | ἔρισι κύρυσι ποσί 
d. LINGUAL (continued). 
ὁ, ἡ, child. 6,sovereign. ἡ, wife 6, lion. 6, giant. ἡ, Opus. 
S. N. παῖς ἄναξ δάμαρ λέων γίγᾶς ᾽Οποῦς 
G. παιδός ἄνακτος δάμαρτος λέοντος γίγαντος ᾿Οποῦντος 
D. παιδί ἄνακτι δάμαρτι λέοντι γίγαντι ᾽Οποῦντι 
Α. παῖδα ἄνακτα δάμαρτα λέοντα γίγαντα ᾿ὈΟποῦντα 
Υ. παῖ ava λέον γίγἄᾶν 
Ῥ, Ὁ. παισί ἄναξι δάμαρσε λέουσι. γίγᾶσι 
6. NEUTER. — LINGUAL. 
τὸ, body. τὸ, light. τὸ, liver. τὸ, horn. — Τὸ, 607. 
S. N. capa φῶς ἧπᾶρ κέρᾶς cornu οὖς 
G. σώμᾶτος φωτός ἥπᾶτος κέρᾶτος, κέρἄος, κέρως ὠτός 
D. σώματι φωτί ἥπατι κέρᾶτι, κέραϊ, κέρᾳ. ὠτί 
P.N. σώματα φῶτα ἥπατα κέρᾶτα, κέραα, κέρᾶ ὦτα 
G. σωμάτω (φώτων ἡπάτων κερᾶτων κεράων, κερῶν ὦτων 
D. σώμασι φωσί ἥπασι κέρᾶσι ὠσί 
D.N. σώματε φῶτε ἥπατε κέρᾶτε, κέραε, κέρᾶ Ore 
G. σωμάτον (φώτοιν ἡπάτοιν κερᾶτοιν, κεράοιν, κερῷν ὄὦτοιν 
817. f. Dec. III. 202s: Gender 177. Mutes: yé(as)p, λύγ(κε)ξ, 


lyn(es)x, ἐλπί(δεο)ς, 151 ; γϑίπν)πα, κλεῖ(δν)ν, 160 6, 204 ἃ ; (θ)τριχός 159 Ὁ ; 
ὀδ(οντο)ούς den(ts)s, ὀδ(οντσιγοῦσι, γίγ(αντε)ᾷς gig(ants)ds, λέ(οντε)γων 
le(ons)o, δάμα(ρτΞ)ρ, 153, 156, 205 ; π(οδεο)ούς pe(ds)s 214 ; ἄν(ακτ)α, παῖ, 


§ 19. LIQUIDS. PURE. 23 


-(a. Not syncopated.) 18. B. LIQUID. (Ὁ. Syncopated.) 
ὁ, beast. nose. ἡ, hand. 6, man. ὁ, ἡ, dog. 6,7, lamb. 
S. N. Onp féra pis xelp ἀνήρ Vir κύων (dvds) 
6. θηρός ῥινός χειρὸς ἀνέρος, ἀνδρός κὕνός ἀρνός 
D. θηρί ῥινί χειρί ἀνέρι, ἀνδρί κυνί ἀρνί 
A. θῆρα ῥῖνα σχεῖρα ἀνέρα, ἄνδδα κύνα ἄρνα 
V. pw ἄνερ κύον 
P.N. Onpes ῥῖνες χεῖρες ἀνέρες, ἄνδρες κύνες ἄρνες 
G. θηρῶν ῥι᾿νῶν χειρῶν ἀνέρων, avipav κυνῶν ἀρνῶν 
D. θηρσί ῥισί χερσί ἀνδράσι κυσξ ἀρνάσι 
A. θῆρας ῥῖνας χεῖρας ἀνέρας, ἄνδρας κύνας ἄρνας 
P.N. ϑῆρε ᾿ ῥῖνε χεῖρε ἀνέρε, ἄνδε κύνε ἄρνε 
G. θηρον = pwoiv χεροῦν ἀνέροιν, ἀνδροῖν κυνοῖν ἀρνοῖν 


6, orator. 6,harbor. 46, deity. ὁ, pean. 6, father. 


Lat. orator portus deemon pean pater 

8. N. ῥήτωρ Atuny δαίμων παιᾶν warnp 
G. ῥήτορος λιμένος δαίμονος παιᾶνος πατέρος, πατρός 
D. ῥήτορι λιμένι δαίμονι παιᾶνι πατέρι, πατρί 
A. ῥήτορα λιμένα δαίμονα παιᾶνα πατέρα 
V. ῥῆτορ δαῖμον πάτερ 

P.D. ῥήτορσι λιμέσι δαίμοσι παιᾶσι πατράσι 


19. Cc. PURE. —a. Mascunmne anp Feminine. 


6, weevil. ὁ, ἡ, sheep. ὃ, hero. ὁ, ἡ, 0%. 6, fish. ἡ, echo. 
S.N. kis οἷς Gvis ἥρως hérds Bots bos ἰχθύς ἤχώ echo 
G. kids olds ἥρωος βοός bovis ἰχθύος ἠχ(όοε)οῦς 
Des καρ OE ἡρωὶ [ἥρῳ] βοΐ bovi ἐχθῦϊ ἠχ(όϊ )οῖ 
A. κίν οἷν ἥρωα, ἥρω βοῦν ἰχθύν ἠχίόα )ώ 
Vv. Bod ἐχθύ nxot 
P.N. Kies οἷες [οἷς] ἥρωες βόες ἰχθῦες [ἰχθὺς] 
G. κῶν οἰῶν ἡρώων βοῶν boum ἰχθύων 
D. kisi οἰσί ἥρωσι. βουσί ἰχθύσι 
A. κίας las, ois ἥρωας, ἥρως βόας, βοῦς ἰχθύας, ἰχθῦς 
D.N. κίε. οἷε ἥρωε, βόε ἰχθύε [ἰχθ0] 
, . kioty οἰοῖν ἡρώοιν βοοῖν ix Ovouw 


204b; c&u(ar)a, φ(ωτ)ῶς, ἥπ(ατ)αρ, 160. Contraction 207: κλεῖς 122, 
"Om (ders)os 118 d, 121 b, κερᾳ 119, κέρα, κέρως, (ofas) οὖς, ὠτός, 120 ἃ, Ὁ, c. 
Accent: γυπός 778 a, φώτων 778 b. — Ο. E. ὁ γρύψ, -ὕπός, gryps, -yphis, 
GRIFFIN, Ἄραψ, -aBos, ARAB, ἡ φάλαγξ, -ayyos, phalanx, -angis, 47s, 
θητός, hired man, ἡ λαμπάς, -άδος, torch, LAMP, ἡ χάρις, -cros, grace, ἡ νύξ, 
-κτός, NOX, -ctis, NIGHT, ὁ δράκων, -ovros, draco, DRAGON, ὁ ἱμάς, -dvros, 
thong ; τὸ ποίημα, -aros, poéma, -atis, POEM, τὸ fuap, -aros, day, τὸ Tépas, 
-atos, prodigy,7Td ὕδωρ, ὕδατος, water. 

§ 18. 6. Liquids 208 s: OA(ps)p, λιμ(ενε)ήν, pl(vs)s, 153, 156, 208 ; 
λιμέσι, Onpol, 154, 157 ; χερσί 2241; ἄνερ 208f; κυ[ο]νός canis, πατί εἸ]ρί 


THIRD DECLENSION. — PURES. $19. 


24 
b. MAscuLnine AND FEMININE (continued). 
S. N. ἡ πόλϊς city ὁ πῆχῦς cubit ππεύς knight ἧ ναῦς ship 
6. πόλως.. πήχεως ἱππέως 3 νεώς 
D. πόλεϊ, πόλει πήχεϊ, πήχει ἱππέϊ, ἱππεῖ νηΐ 
A. πόλιν πῆχυν ἱππέᾶ ναῦν 
V. πόλι πῆχυ ἱππεῦ (γραῦ) 
P.N. πόλεες, πόλεις πήχεες, πήχεις ἱππέες, ἱππεῖς, -ῆς νῆες 
α. πόλεων πή χεων [πηχῶν] ἱππέων νεῶν 
Ὁ. πόλεσι πήχεσι ἱππεῦσι ναυσί 
Α. πόλεας, πόλεις πήχεας, πήχεις ἱππέᾶς, ἱππεῖς ναῦς 
D.N. πόλεε, πόλη πήχεε ἱππέε [»ῆε]. 
α. πολέοιν πηχέοιν ἱππέοιν νεοῖν 
S. Ν. Σωκρἄτης Socrates Ἡρακλέης, Ἡρακλῆς Hercules 
G. Σωκράτεος, Σωκράτους Ἡρακλέεος, Ἡρακλέους 
1). Σωκράτεϊ, Σωκράτει Ἡρακλεῖ, Ἡρακλέξει, Ἡρακλεῖ 
A. Σωκράτεα, Σωκράτη, τὴν Ἡρακλέεα, Ἡρακλέᾷ, Ἡρακλῆ 
V. Σώκρατες Ἡράκλεες, Ἡράκλεις [Ἥρακλες] 
6. NEUTER. A 
S. N. τὸ yépiis honor τὸ γένος race gens τὸ dori town 
G. γέρᾶος, γέρως γένεος, γένους generis ἄστεος, ἄστεως 
D. γέραὶ γέραι γένεϊ, γένει gener ἄστεϊ, ἄστει 
Ῥ.Ν. γέραα, γέρᾶ γένεα γένη genere ἄστεα, ἄστη 
α. γεράων, γρῶν γενέων γενῶν generum ἀστέων 
Ὦ. γεέρασι γένεσι generibus ἄστεσι 
D.N. γέραε, γέρα γένεε γένη ἄστεε 
.α.. γεράοιν, γερῷν γενέοιν, γενοῖν ἀστέοιν 


patfe}ri, ἄρ[ε]να, 210 ; ἀνδρός 146 ; dp(evor)vaor 145 4a.—O. E. ὁ dap, 
-wpds, fu(rs)r, thief, ὁ, ἡ ᾿ἀήρ, τέρας, ἢ der, AIR, 77 μήτηρ, -τρύς, mater, -tris, 
MOTHER, a axris, τῖνος, TAY, ὁ ποιμήν, πένος, shepherd, ὁ μήν, μηνός, raensis, 
MONTH, ὁ αἰών, -ὥνος, evum, age, ὁ ads, ἁλός, sa(ls)l, SALT ; τὸ νέκταρ, 
-apos, nectar, τὸ (Feap) ἔαρ ἣ hp ver, in 

§ 19. ἃ. Pures 212s: xis, ἰχθῦς, 217 ¢; ; κίν 216 b, i ταν (é6Fts ovis) 
dis οἷς 21, 140 Ὁ; [Bors, Boros bovis} βοῦς, Bods, 214, 217 a, b : tm (eFs)ebs, 
v(aFs)ats navis, πῆχυς, ἄστυ 213 a, 215 Ὁ, 216, 217 b; πόλις 213 b, 217 g; 
Σωκράτης 213 a, 217 6 ; γένος 215 Ὁ, 217d; ἠχ(ος)ώ 214b; V. ἠχοῖ, Bod, 
21 ο, 217 Ὁ, ἃ ; βουσί, ναυσί, 216d; νηΐ 222 ἢ; Σωκράτην 216c. Con- 
traction 7, 118s: ἥρῳ, χόλει, γέραι, 119 ; Ὑδρὰ, ἄστη, γέρως, ἥρω, 120 «, 
b,c; "Hi pachéa 120f ; νεώς 120 i i, ΟΣ ἡ κα πόλεις, γένους, ἠχοῦς echus, οἷς, 
ἐχθῦ; πόλη, ἱππῆς, 121; A. οἷς, βοῦς, wanders: ναῦς, 122; πόλεως, ἱππέα, -ἂς, 
220; πηχῶν 220 ; Ἡρῤακλῆν 219 ο. ---Ο. E. ὁ θώς, θωός, jackal, ὁ μῦς, 
pds, miis, mUris, MOUSE ; ἡ ἄρκυς, -vos, net, ἡ Ἰώ, Ἰοῦς, Io, Ius, ἡ τάξις, 
-ews, rank, ὁ πέλεκυς, -ews, ax, ὁ βασιλεύς king, ὁ Ἑϊμένης, -ους, ὁ Περι- 
κλ(έης)ῆς " τὸ κρέας caro, flesh, τὸ νέφος niibes, cloud, τὸ τεῖχος wall. 


§ 20. 
20. 


DIALECTS. 


1x. Dtanectic ForMs oF DECLENSION. 


a. First DEcLENSION (197s). 


ταμίης, βορέης. 
ναύτᾶς, ᾿Ατρείδᾶς. 
Old, &* ἱππότα, μητίετᾶ. 
Ion. ἡ * λύρη, οἰκίη. [ση. 
Ion. n* Ep. ἀληθείη, κνίοσ- 
ἡ, Dor. a: (ὦ δά, τιμᾶ, γᾶ. 
6. ov, Old, ἄο : ᾿Ατρείδαο, Βορέᾶο. 


S. N. ἄς, Ion. nS 
ns, Dor. as 


a, 
a, 


Ion. €w, @ "᾿Ατρείδεω, Bopéw. 


Dor. ἃ " “Arpeida, Ἑρμᾶ. 
ds, lon. ys" λύρης, γενεῆς. 
ys, Dor. ds " τιμᾶς, μούσᾶς. 

Ep. ηθείν - Αἰσύμηθεν. 

D.q, lon. ἢ᾿ ταμίῃ, λύρῃ. 
Ἢ», Dor. a: ναύτᾳ, τᾷ ὠδᾷ. 
Ep. ηφιίν - ἦφι βίηφιν. 


Ion. qv, ed (masc.) ; λύρ ηΡ, 


A. ae [Δρισταγόρην, -εἃ. 
. Ἦν» ( Dor. ἂν - ναὐτᾶν, τιμᾶν. 
Vy. ἃ, Ion. ἡ ᾿ ταμίη, νεηνίη. 


ui, Poet. ἢ Αἰήτη Ap. Rh. 


ἢ, Dor. ἃ" ᾿Ατρείδᾷ, Μενάλκα. 
Old, ἅ νύυμφὰ, Δικὰ. 
P. 6. ὧν, Old, dev: ᾿Ατρειδάων. [wr. 


Ton. ἔων " ᾿Ατρειδέων, λυρέ- 
Dor. ἂν᾽ ᾿Ατρειδᾶν, ᾿ θυρᾶν. 
D. ats, Old, αὐσι(ν " ταῖσι θύραισιν. 
Ton. you(v, ns’ θεῇσι, πέτρῃς. 
A. ἅς, [Ton. etis(mase.) ; deoméreds |. 
Dor. ἅς + Μοϊρᾶς, vindds. 
fiol. αἷς " ταὶς τιμαίς. 


b. Srconp DECLENSION (201). 


5. N. os, Laconic, op: παλεόρ, 169d. 
G. ov, Ep.& Thes. ovo + τοῖο λόγοιο. 
Dor. ὦ " τῶ λόγω. 
[lon. ew - Βάττεω, Κροίσεω.] 
Ep. οθείν - οὐράνοθεν. 
ω (fr. aov), Ep. wo: Πετεῶο. 
D.@, Old, οι - Ἰσθμοῖ, rot δάμοι. 
Ep. όφι(ν- αὐτόφι, ζυγόφιυν. 
Ep. οθι - οὐρανόθι, Ἰλιόθι. 


S. D.@, Βαοῦ. ὕ αὐτῦ, τῦ δάμῦ. 
P.N.ov, Βοοῦ. δ καλύ, Ὅμηρῦ. 
[G. ev, Ιοη. dav: πυρέων, Σουσέων.] 
D. οις, Old, οὐσιί(ν - τοῖσι λόγοισιν. 
Beeot. ὕς + ἄλλῦς προξένῦς. 
A. ovs, Dor. ὡς, ος τὼς λόγως, τὼς 
λύκος, παρθένος. 
Bol. ous: ἀνδρεΐοις πέπλοις. 
Dual ov, Ep. oviy + ἵπποιϊν, ὦμοιϊν. 


c. THrrD DECLENSION (221s). 


S. G.aros, aos, Ion. εος " κέρεος, οὔδεος. 
eos, Ion. & Dor. evs: θέρευς. 


éws, Ep. fos: βασιλῆος, ἱππῆος. 
Ion. & Dor. ἔος + βασιλέος. 
ews, Poet. εος,ος " πόλεος,-ηος. 


Ion. & Dor. tos: πόλιος. 


dos, Ion. & Dor. tos Κύπριος. 
Dor. υτος " Θέμιτος. 
οὖς, ΠΟΥ. ὅς Aol. ὥς - ἀχῶς, αἴδως. 
1). εὖ Ep. ἢϊ βασιλῆϊ, Πηλῆϊ. 

: Ton. € + βασιλέϊ, ἸΠηλέϊ. 
εἰ, lon. &Dor.t: πόλι, δυνάμι. 
ιδι, Ion. & Dor. t+ Θέτι, ἀπόλι. 
vi, Ep. w- νέκυι, ὀϊζυῖϊ, 

A.v, Poet. a: εὐρέα, ixdva. 
. 6a, Ion. otv: ‘Iodv, Λητοῦν. 
Dor. ev: Ἥρων, Λατών. 
ἐᾶ, Ep. qa: βασιλῆα, ἱππῆᾶ. 
Ion. & Poet. ἐᾶ - βασιλέὰᾶ. 
. Dor. & Poet. ἢ - βασιλῆ. 
V.es, Mol. €* Σώκρατε. 


GR. TAB. 2 


P.N.ets, Old Att. ἧς βασιλῆς. 
Ep. fjes " βασιλῆες, ἱππῆες. 
Ton. & Dor.ées - βασιλέες. 
εἴς, Ton. & Dor. τες + πόλιες. 
aa, Poet. ἅ - yépa, κρέᾶ. 
Ion, εα “ yépea, τέρεα. 
G.ov, [1}οπιέων’ χηνέων, ἀνδρέων. 
[Dor. av: αἰγᾶν, κυνᾶν 2] 
éov, Ep. fev: βασιλήων. 
εων, lon. & Dor. lav: πολίων. 
D.ov(v, Old, εσι(ν " χείρεσι. 


Poet. oouv: ἔπεσσι. 
εσσι(ν - πόδεσσιν. 
εσιίν, Ep. εσφι(ν - ὄχεσφιν. 
Ion. τισι(ν - πόλισι. 
εῦσιί(ν, Ep. ἤεσσιίν" ἀριστήεσσι. 


Α.ἐᾶς, Ep. ἢᾶς - βασιλῆὰς. [ἄς. 
Ton. & Dor. é&s - βασιλέ- 
Comm. εἷς βασιλεῖς. 
εἰς, Ton. & Dor. τᾶς + πόλιας. 
Dualow, Ep. oviv.: ποδοῖὶν. 


26 
ΒΝ: 
α. 
D. 
A. 
Ms 
PN, 
Ss. 


(9% pye4 <byoZ 


. 


NOUNS. § 21. 


21. x. IRREGULAR AND DIALECTIC DECLENSION. 


ὁ, Jupiter. Dor. ὁ, Gliis. ὁ, dipus. Poet. & Ion. 
Ζεύς, Lav Τλοῦς Οἰδίπους [Οἰδίπος] 

Διός, Ζηνός Zavis Ψλοῦ Οἰδίποδος, Oidirovpoet.Oidirdddo,-d,-ew 
Ad, Ζηνί Zavi Γλοῦ Οἰδίποδι Οἰδιπόδᾳ, -ἢ 
Δία, Ζῆνα Lava ὙΤλοῦν Οἰδίποδα, Οἰδίπουν Οἰδιπόδᾶν, -ν 
Zed Trod Οὐἰδίπου Οἰδιπόδα, -7 
[Ates, Ζῆνες} 6. Οἰδιπόδων, A. -as 

Attic. 6,son. Homeric. Doric.%, ship. Ionic. 

vids υἱός ναῦς [vas] νηῦς [νῆϊ-ς] 

υἱοῦ, υἱέος υἱοῦ, υἷος, υἱέος. ναός νηός, νεός 

υἱῷ, υἱεῖ υἱῷ, υἷι, υἱέϊ, vier vat νηΐ 

υἱόν υἱόν, υἷα, viéd ναῦν [νᾶν] νῆα, νέα [vndv] 

υἱέ υἱέ - 

υἱοί, υἱεῖς υἷες, υἱέες, υἱεῖς νᾶες νῆες, νέες 

υἱῶν, υἱέων υἱῶν, υἱέων ναῶν νηῶν, νεῶν 

υἱοῖς, υἱέσι υἱοῖσι, υἱάσι, ναυσί,νάεσσι νηυσί, νήεσσι, νέεσσι, 
υἱούς, υἱεῖς υἷας, υἱέας vaas νῆας, νέας [ναῦφι 


υἱώ, υἱέε 
| ee) 
vioty, υἱέοιν 


Attic. τὸ, spear. Homeric. 7o,-cave. Homeric. 6,stone. 


N. δόρυ Poet. δόρυ σπέος σπεῖος Adas 
G. δόρατος, δορός Sovpds (yolvaros) σπείους λᾶος 
D. δόρατι, δορί, δόρει δουρί δούρατι σπῆϊ rat 
A. λᾶαν 
N. δόρατα, δόρη δοῦρα δούρατα (κλέα) 
G. δοράτων δούρων σπείων λάων 
D. δόρασι δούρεσσι, δούρασι σπέσσι, σπήεσσι λάεσσι 
N. δόρατε δοῦρε Ade 
G. dopdrow 
Homeric PARADIGMS. 

6, knight. ἡ, city. ὁ, ἡ, sheep. 
Ν. ἱππεύς πόλις ; dis 
G. ἱππῆος (Tvdéos) πόλιος, πτόλιος, πόλεος, πόληος dios, olds 
D. ἱππῆϊ (Πηλέϊ,-εἴ) πόλι, πτόλεϊ, worer? πόληϊ 
A. ἱππῆα (Τυδέὰ,-ἢ) πόλιν, πτόλιν (πόληα Hes.) ὄν 
V. ἱππεῦ (μάντι Α. 106) 
N. ἱππῆες, ἱππεῖς ὃ πόλιες, πόληες ὄϊες 
G. ἱππήων πολίων : ὀΐων, οἱῶν 
1). ἱππεῦσι (ἀριστή- πολίεσσι (ἐπάλξεσιν) ~ ῥΐεσσι,οἴεσι, 
A. ἱππῆας  [eoor) πόλιας, πόλις or πόλεις, πόληας ὄϊς [ὄεσσι 

6, Ulysses. 6, Patroclus. 6, Mars. 
N. Ὀδυσσεύς, Od ceds IIdrpoxdos(-fsTheoe.) “Apns 
G. Ὀδυσσῆος,-έος, Ὀδυσῆος, Οδυσεῦς Πατρόκλου, -o10, -ἣος ἴΑρηος, -εος 
D. (ἀχιλλεῖ) Ὀδυσῆϊ Πατρόκλῳ "Αρηΐ, -εἴ,-εἰ 
Α. Ὀδυσσῆα, ᾿Οδυσῆα Ὀδυσῇ Πάτροκλον, -ἢα "Apna, -nv 
V. Ὀδυσσεῦ, ᾿Οδυσεῦ Πάτροκλε, -εες or -εἰς “Apes EH. 31. 


§ 22. 


A 


- fs) 
aZ rood τἰρ ΟΦ 


QR 


9 "Ὁ 
QZ road dPpyaZ 


A 


59 rd 
PAPUA προ ΩΣ 


ADJECTIVES. 47 


22. xi. ADJECTIVES OF 


Two TERMINATIONS. 


a. OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 


ὁ, ἡ (unjust) τὸ ὁ, ἡ (unfading) τὸ 
adixos ἄδικον ἀγήρᾶος ἀγήρως ἀγήραον, ἀγήρων 
ἀδίκου ἀγηράου, ἀγήρω 
ἀδίκῳ ἀγηράῳ, ἀγήρῳ 
ἄδικον ἀγήραον, ἀγήρων, ἀγήρω 
ἄδικε 
ἄδικοι ἄδικα ἀγήραοι, ἀγήρῳ ἀγήραα, ἀγήρω 
ἀδίκων ἀγηράων, ἀγήρων 
ἀδίκοις ἀγηράοις, ἀγήρῳς 
ἀδίκους ἀγηράονο, ἀγήρως 
ἀδίκω ἀγηράω, ἀγήρω 
ἀδίκοιν ἀγηράοιν, ἀγήρῷν 
b. Or THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
ὁ, ἡ (male) τὸ ὁ, ἡ (pleasing) τὸ ὁ, ἡ (two-footed) τὸ 
ἄῤῥην ἄῤῥεν εὔχἄρις εὔχαρι δίπους δίπουν 
ἄῤῥενος εὐχάρϊτος δίποδος 
ἄῤῥενι εὐχάριτι δίποδι 
ἄῤῥενα εὐχάριτα, εὔχαριν δίποδα, δίπουν 
ἄῤῥεν εὔχαρι δίπου 
ἄῤῥενες dppeva εὐχάριτες εὐχάριτα δίποδες δίποδα 
ἀῤῥένων εὐχαρίτων διπόδων 
ἄῤῥεσι εὐχάρισι δίποσι 
ἄῤῥενας. εὐχάριτας δίποδας 
aippeve εὐχάριτε δίποδε 
ἀῤῥένοιν εὐχαρίτοιν διπόδοιν 


0, ἡ, (evident) τὸ 

σαφής σαφές 
σαφέος, σαφοῦς 
σαφεῖ, σαφεῖ 

σαφέα, σαφῆ 

σαφές 

σαφέες σαφεῖς σαφέα, σαφῆ 
σαφέων, σαφῶν 
σαφέσι 

σαφέας, σαφεῖς 
σαφέε, σαφῆ 
σαφέοιν, σαφοῖν 


ὁ, ἡ (greater) τὸ 
cH major μεῖζον majus 
μείζονος majoris 
μείζονι majori 
μείζονα, μείζω 
μεῖζον 
μείζονες, μείζους μείζονα, μείζω 
μειζόνων 
μείζοσι 
μείζονας, μείζους 
μείζονε 
μειζόνοιν 


ες 8 22. 6. Aps. or Two TERM. 231: 
&pp(evs) qv, welf(ovs)wv, 208a, 157 ; εὔχαρι(το)ς 204 ; Sim (08s)ous bipes, δίπουν. 
2148, 251 ο, 204, 202 a, δίπου οἷδε: σαφής, σαφές, 918 c, 215a, 217 d,e, 
σαφοῦς, σαφεῖ, 219 a, 119, 1218; μείζω 211. --- Ο. E. ἥσυχος quiet, ἔνδοξος 
glorious, ἄν(οοΞ)γους, - “(oov)ouv, senseless, td(aos)ews propitious, εὔγεως Sertile ; 
evdaiu(ovs)ov fortunate, εὔελπι(δεοὺ)ὴς hopeful, ἀληθής, -és, true, ὑγιής, -és 
(120f), healthy, μείων minor, less, πολύπους many-footed, polypus, polyp. - 


ἀγήρως 200, ἀγήρω 199. 3, 1206; 


28 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. . δ 28, 


23. xu. ApbJECTIVES oF THREE TERMINATIONS. 


a. OF THE SECOND AND First DECLENSIONS. 


ὁ (moérus) ἡ (foolish) τὸ M. (ἀγαθός) F. (good) N. 
S.N. μῶρος papa μῶρον bonus bona bonum 
G. popov papas boni bone 
D. pape μώρᾳ ἀτο ὍΟΠῸ bone, Ab. -a 
A. p@pov μώρᾶν bonum bonam 
V. μῶρε bone 
P.N. papor papa papa boni bone bona 
G. papery μώρων bondrum bonarum 
D. μώροις μώραις bonis bonis 
A. μώρους popas bonos bonas 
D.N. pope popa 
G. μώροινν popaw 
ὁ (sapiens) ἡ (wise) τὸ ὁ (simplex) ἡ (simple) τὸ 
8S. N. σοφός σοφή σοφόν ἁπλί(όος Jods ἁπλί(όη ))ῆ ἁπλί(ὀον)οῦν 
G. σοφοῦ σοφῆς ἁπλ(όου )od ἁπλί(όης )ῆς 
D. σοφῷ σοφῇ ἁπλίόῳ ἢῷ ἁπλί(όῃ )ῇ 
A. σοφόν σοφήν ἁπλί(όον )οῦν ἁπλ(όην )ῆν 
V. cope ὃ 
P.N. σοφοί σοφαί σοφά ἁπλί(όοι jot ἁπλ΄ αι jai ἁπλί(όδ )a 
6. σοφῶν σοφῶν ἁπλί(όων γῶν ἁπλ(όων)ῶν 
D. σοφοῖς σοφαῖς ἁπλ(όοις ois ἁπλί(όαις)αῖς 
Α. σοφούς σοφᾶς ἁπλ(όους)οῦς ἁπλ(όᾶς )ᾶς 
D.N. σοφώ σοφᾶ ἁπλ(όω )o ἁπλί(όᾶ )a 
G. σοφοῖν σοφαῖν ἁπλί(όοιν)οῖν ἁπλ(όαιν)αῖν 
ο΄ ὁ (aureus, golden) ἡ τὸ 
S.N. χρύσεος, χρῦσοῦς χρυσέθ, χρυσῆ χρύσεον, χρυσοῦν 
G. χρυσέου, χρυσῦ χρυσέᾶς, χρυσῆς 
D. -χρυσέῳ,ρ,ρ χρυσῷ χρυσέᾳ, χρυσῇ 
A. χρύσεον, χρυσοῦν χρυσέᾶν, χρυσῆν 
P.N. χρύσεοι, χρυσῖ § xpvoeat, χρυσαῖ χρύσεδ, χρυσᾶ 
6. χρυσέων, χρυσῶν χρυσέων, χρυσῶν 
D. χρυσέοις χρυσοῖς χρυσέαις, χρυσαῖς 
A. χρυσέους, χρυσοῦς χρυσέας, χρυσᾶς 
D.N. χρυσέω, χρυσώ χρυσέᾶ, χρυσᾶ 
G. χρυσέοιν, χρυσοῖν χρυσέαιν, χρυσαῖν 


8 23. c. Dec. I. and II. 232: μώρων 777 Ὁ ; ἁπλοῦς, χρυσοῦς, 200, 
120s, 772 ο, 777 b. —O. E. φίλιος friendly, δίκαιος just, μακρός long, ἐχθρός 
hostile, ἀθρόος dense, καλός beautiful. μέσος medius, MIDDLE, διπλ(όος)οῦς 
duplex, DOUBLE, ἀργύρεος dpyt pods argenteus, of silver. 

ἃ. Dec. III. and 1. 233: μέλας 208 ; πᾶς, χαρίεις 205 ; ἡδύς 213 ὁ, 
217 b; μέλαινα, ἡδεῖα, 2388 ἃ ; πᾶσα, χαρίεσσα, 233 Ὁ, 155, 156; μέλασι, 


§ 24. OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 29 
b. Or THE THIRD AND First DECLENSIONS. 
ὁ (niger) ἡ (black) τὸ ὁ (omnis) ἡ (all) τὸ 
8. N. μέλᾶς ᾿ μέλαινα pe day πᾶς πᾶσα πᾶν 
G. μέλᾶνος μελαίνης παντός πάσης 
D. μέλανι μελαίνῃ παντί πάσῃ 
A μέλανα μέλαιναν πάντα πᾶσαν 
P.N. μέλανες μέλαιναι μέλανα πάντες πᾶσαι πάντα 
α. μελάνων μελαινῶν πάντων πασῶν 
D. μέλασι μελαίναις πᾶσι πάσαις 
A. μέλανας μελαίνας πάντας πάσᾶς 
D.N. μέλανε μελαίνᾶ πάντε πάσᾶᾷ 
G. μελάνοιν μελαίναιν πάντοιν πάσαιν 
ὁ (gratidsus) ἡ (agreeable) τὸ ὁ (suavis) ἡ (sweet) τὸ 
Ξ. Ν. χαρίεις χαρίεσσα χαρίεν ἡδύς ἡδεῖα ἡδύ 
G. χαρίεντος χαριέσσης ἡδέος ἡδείας 
D. χαρίεντι χαριέσσῃ ἡδέϊ, ἡδεῖ ἡδείᾳ 
A. χαρίεντα χαρίεσσαν ἡδύν ἡδεῖαν 
Υ. χαρίεν ἡδύ 
P.N. χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα ἡδέες, ἡδεῖς ἡδεῖαι ἡδέα 
G. χαριέντων χαριεσσῶν ἡδέων ἡδειῶν 
2). χαρίεσι χαριέσσαις ἡδέσι ἡδείαις 
A. χαρίεντας χαριέσσᾶς ἡδέας, ἡδεῖς ἡδείας 
D.N. ‘xapievre χαριέσσᾶ ἡδέε ἡδείᾷ 
G. χαριέντοιν χαριέσσαιν ἡδέοιν ἡδείαιν 
24. OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS. 
0 (magnus) ἡ (great) τὸ ὁ co ἡ (much) τὸ 
SN. μέγᾶς μεγάλη μέγα πολύς πολλή πολύ 
6. μεγάλου μεγάλης πολλοῦ πολλῆς 
D. μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ πολλῷΆ πολλῇ. 
Α. μέγαν μεγάλην πολύν πολλήν 
Me meyers multi, many 
P.N. peyddor μεγάλαι μεγάλα πολλοέ πολλαί πολλά 
G. μεγάλων μεγάλων πολλῶν πολλῶν 
1). μεγάλοις μεγάλαις πολλοῖς πολλαῖς 
A. μεγάλους μεγάλᾶς. πολλούς πολλάς 
. Ν. μεγάλω μεγάλᾷ 
α. μεγάλοιν μεγάλαιν 
χαρίεσι, πᾶσι, 1548; πᾶν, πάντων, πᾶσι, 729. 2, 778 Ὁ : ἡδεῖ 219. — 


Ο. E. rdX(avs)Gs wretched (M. Voc. τάλᾶἄν), rép(evs)nv tener, 


TENDER, 


σύμπας (σύν, was), -doa, -av, all together, Tiujers honored, πτερόεις winged 
(207 c), ἑκ(οντεο)ών willing, βραχύς brevis, short, γλυκύς dulcis, sweet (168), 
εὐρύς wide, ὀξύς sharp, βραδύς tardus, slow, ταχύς swift. 


30 ADJECTIVES. —- NUMERALS. § 24. 


S. - ὁ (mitis) ἡ (mild) τὸ Ρ, οἱ es Ὁ τὰ 

N. πρᾶος mpacia πρᾶον πρᾶοι, πραεῖς πραεῖαι πραέα 
G. πράου πραείᾶς πραέων πραειῶν 

Ὦ. πράῳ πραείᾳ πράοις, πραέσι πραείαις πραέσι 
A. πρᾶον πραεῖαν πράους, πραεῖς - πραείᾶς 


25. x. DECLENSION oF NUMERALS. 


M. (ἀπ) F. (one): N. M. (nullus) F. (no one) N. M., none. 
8. N. εἷς μίά ἕν οὐδείς οὐδεμία οὐδέν P. οὐδένες 
G. ἑνός μιᾶς οὐδενός οὐδεμιᾶς οὐδένων 
D. ἑνέ μιᾷ οὐδενί οὐδεμιᾷ οὐδέσι 
A. ἕνα μίᾶἂν οὐδένα οὐδεμίαν. οὐδένας 
M. F.N., both. » M.F.N., two. Μ. F. 


D.N. A. ἄμφω ambo, -88, -0 δύο, δύω duo du in, 
G. D. ἀμφοῖν amborum, &e. δυοῖν, late G, δυεῖν P. late D. δυσί 


M.F.(three)N. M.F. Ν. MF. (quatuor, four) N. 
PLN. τρεῖς τρία tres tria τέσσᾶρες, τέτταρες τέσσαρα, τέτταρα 
α. τριῶν trium τεσσάρων, τεττάρων 
D. τρισί tribus τέσσαρσι, τέτταρσι 
A. τρεῖς tres τέσσαρας; τέτταρας 


8 24. ἃ. See 236; πολύς 218 ο, 217 Ὁ ; πραεῖα 233 a, πραεῖς 121. 


5. Homeric Forms of πολύς. 


ὁ. ἡ τὸ 

5. N. πολύς, πουλύς πολλός πολλή πολύ, πουλύ, πολλόν 
G. πολέος πολλῆς ᾿ 
D. (πολεῖ ? Asch.) πολλῷ πολλῇ 
Α. πολύν, πουλύν πολλόν πολλήν, πουλύν 

P. Ν. πολέες, πολεῖς πολλοί πολλαί (πολέα Esch.) πολλά 
G. πολέων πολλῶν πολλάων, πολλέων 
D. πολέσι, -έσσι, -ἐεσσι πολλοῖσι πολλῇσι 
A. πολέας [πολεῖς ) πολλούς πολλάς 


§ 25. a. NUMERALS 240: (évs) εἷς 208d, μία 194 ο, οὐδενός 978 Ὁ ; τρεῖς 
218 ; τέτταρες 169 ἃ, τέσσαρσι 157 ; (οὐδὲ εἷς) οὐδείς, μηδείς, no one, 128 a, 
late M. and N. (οὔτε εἷς, μήτε εἷς) οὐθείς, οὐθέν, μηθείς, μηθέν, 161 Ὁ. 

b. Dialectic Forms : 1: Mase. N. Ep. ἕεις 135, Hes. Th. 145, Dor. js 
131d, Inse. Heracl. ; Fem. Ion. μέη, -ἧς, οὐδεμίη, 197 a, Hipp., Ep. (fr. 
old tos) id, tis, in, idv, A. 487, Il. 178, A. 174, & 485; also Neut. ἰῷ Z. 
422; Pl. Ion. οὐδαμοί, μηδαμοί, -al, -d, none, -ὧν, -οἵσι, -αἷσι, -ovs, -ds (v. 1. 
οὐδαμέας 135 a, Hdt. 4. 114), Hdt. 1. 18, 143, &. 2: Ep. Du. dow I’. 236, 
Pl. δοιοί, -ai, -d, -oto1, -ots, -ovs, -ds, M. 455, 464, A. 7, 6. 129, 526; Ion. 
Pl. δυῶν Hdt. 1. 94, δυοῖσι Ib. 82. 3: Dor. N. A. τρῖς Insc., Poet. D. 
τριοῖσι Hippon. Fr. 8. 4: Ion. τέσσερες Hdt. 2. 80, 81, Dor. réropes or 
τέττορες, Theoc. 14. 16, Tim. 96 Ὁ, Mol. and Ep. πίσυρες ε. 70 ; Poet. or 
late D. τέτρασι Hes. Fr. 47. 5. : 


PARTICIPLES. 3.1 


26. xiv. Active PARTICIPLES. 
a. Present. b. 2 Aorist, -» Form. 


ὁ (solvens) ἡ (loosing) τὸ ~—s (clearing) ὁ (having put) ἡ τὸ 
S.N. λύων. λύουσα λῦον  luens θείς θεῖσα θέν 
G. λύοντος λυούσης luentis θέντος θείσης 
D. Avovre λυούσῃ luenti Oevrt θείση 
A. λύοντα ᾿ λύουσαν luentem θέντα θεῖσαν 
P.N. λύοντες λύουσαι λύοντα luentes,-ia θέντες θεῖσαι θέντα 
G. λυόντων λυουσῶν luentium θέντων θεισῶν 
D. λύουσι. λυούσαις luentibus θεῖσι θείσαις 
A. λύοντας λυούσᾶς luentes θέντας θείσᾶς 
D.N. λύοντε λυούσᾶ θέντε θείσα 
G. λυόντοιν λυούσαιν θέντοιν θείσαιν 
e. Present Contracted. d. Liquid Future. 
ὁ (vivens) ἡ (living) τὸ ὁ (dictiirus) ἡ (about to say) τὸ 
S.N. (dwr)dv F(dov)dsa  §(dov)av ἐρῶν ἐροῦσα ἐροῦν 
G. ὑἑ(ζάογῶντος ζ(αού)γώσης ἐροῦντος ἐρούσης 
D. ἑζ(άογῶντι ζ(αούγώσῃ ἐροῦντι ἐρούσῃ 
A. ἑζάογῶντα ἕἑζάου)γῶσαν ἐροῦντα ἐροῦσαν 
P.N. ἕζάογῶντες ἑ(άουγῶσαι ἕ(ἀογῶντα ἐροῦντες ἐροῦσαι ἐροῦντα 
α. ζ(αὀγώντων ξ(αουγωσῶν ἐρούντων ἐρουσῶν 
Ὁ. ἕἑ(άογῶσι ζ(αούγώσαις ἐροῦσι ἐρούσαις 
A. §(do)avras ζ(αούγώσᾶς ἐροῦντας ἐρούσᾶς 
D.N. ἑ(άογῶντε  ἑἕζαού) σᾶ ἐροῦντε ἐρούσα 
G. ¢(ad)dvrow ζ(αού)γώσαιν ἐρούντοιν ἐρούσαιν 
8, 1 Aorist. f. 2 Aorist. 
ὁ (having loosed) ἡ τὸ 6 (having left) ἡ τὸ 
S.N. λύσας λύσᾶσα λῦσᾶν λίπών λιποῦσα λιπόν 
. . λύσαντος λυσάσης λιπόντος λιπούσης 
P.N. λύσαντες λύσᾶσαι λύσαντα λιπόντες λιποῦσαι λιπόντα 
D. λύσᾶσι λυσᾶσαις λιποῦσι λιπούσαις 
δ. 2 Aorist, -μι Form. 
ὁ (having given) ἡ τὸ ὁ (having entered) ἡ τὸ 
S. N. δούς δοῦσα δόν δύς δῦσα dup 
G. ddvros δούσης δύντος δύσης 
P.N. ὃόντες δοῦσαι δόντα δύντες δῦσαι δύντα 
D. δοῦσι δούσαις ᾿ δῦσι δύσαις 
h. Perfect. i. Perfect Contracted. 
ὁ (sciens) ἡ (knowing) τὸ ὁ (stans) ἡ (standing) τὸ 
S.N. εἰδώς εἰδυῖα εἰδός ἑστώς ἑστῶσα Ἑἕἑστώς, ἕστός 
G. εἰδότος εἰδυίᾶς ἑστῶτος ἑστώσης 
P.N. εἰδότες εἰδυῖαι εἰδότα ἑστῶτες ἑστῶσαι ἑστῶτα 
D. εἰδόσι εἰδυίαις ἑστῶσι ἑστώσαις 
§ 26. 1. PARTICIPLES 294. 1: Ad(ovTs)wv, λύσ(αντε)ας, θείς, dvs, 205 ; 


δούς 205 a ; εἰδ(οτε)ώς 2148. ; λύουσα, λύσασα, 2595 Ὁ ; εἰδυῖα, ἑστῶσα, dente; 
2858 0, α ; ((dwv)av, ζῶσα, ξῶντος; ἑστ(αώςκ)ώς, ἑστ(αὀ)ῶτος, 120 ; ἐρ(έων)ῶν, 
ἐρ(ἐουγοῦσα, ἐρ(ἐον)οῦν, 152, 121. —O. E. λύσων, λυθείς, λελύκώς, 37. 


‘PRONOUNS. § 27. 


2.2. Ἰχὸς 


The forms marked with the sign; are enclitic when used without emphasis. The shorter 
forms, μοῦ, μοί, μέ, are only so used. The initials affixed to dialectic forms denote, 


SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 


Z&. Holic, B. Boeotic, Ὁ. Doric, E. Epic, I. Ionic, 0. Old, P. Poetic. The plural nos 
and vos are placed beside the dual for comparison. 
a. PERSONAL. 
1 Pers., I. 2 Pers., thou. 3 Pers., of him, her, tt. 
S. Nom. ἐγώ ὅσο σὔ τὰ * * 
Gen. ἐμοῦ, μοῦ] mei govj; = tu 00} sul 
Dat. ἐμοί, μοί] mihi σοί _—itibi olf sibi 
Acc. ἐμέ, pe; mé σέϊ te éj sé 
P. Nom. ἡμεῖς we μεῖς you σφεῖς they 
Gen. ἡμῶν μῶν σφῶν 
Dat. ἡμῖν ~ “ppiy σφισίν — 
Acc. ἡμᾶς “μᾶς σφᾶς [neut. σφέα] 
D.N. A. vo nos σφώ vos [A. σφωέ] 
G. D. νῷν nostrum σφῷν vestrum [opair] 
e. PERSONAL Pronouns: ANALYSIS, 243, 246. 
Stem. Conn.| Flexible 
1: 2. 8. | Vow.} Ending. Uncontracted and Contract Forms. 
S. N. p- σ- ‘- 
G. μιν ἐμ- σ- “- |-e |-0 ἐμ(έογοῦ σ(έο)ου (ξογοὗ 
Ὁ. μ-» ἐμ- σ- - [- ἃ ἐμ(εϊ)οῖ eens (ἐϊ)οῖ 
A. μ-γἐμ- σ- “= |-- | * ἐμέ σ' ἕ 
P.N.tp- ὑμ- od-j-e- [-es nu(ées)ets ὑμ(έες)εῖς od(ees)ets 
6. ἡμ- . ὑμ- σφ- -ε- | -ov ἡμ(ἐωνγῶν ὑμ(έωνγῶν σφ(ἐων)ῶν 
Ὁ. ἡμ- ὑμ-σῷῴ-] -€-(1)  -ἰν, -ol(v | ἡμ(εωγῖν du(ew)iv σφίσι 
A. ἡμ- ὑμ- σφ-}-ε-. |-ἂς [.-ἃ]} ἡμ(ἐας)ᾶς ὑμ(έας)ᾶς op(éas)as[-€a} 
D.N. v- σφ- oh-|-w- | -€ v(Be)o oh(Ge)d σῴφωέ 
G. v- σφ- oh-|-o- | -iv ν(ῶι νῷν σφ(ῶιν)ῷν σφωΐν 


f. Forms 1n Homer AnD Heropotus. Those following the sign |j are 
not m Herodotus, and those in brackets are not in Homer. The sign ~ 
denotes synizesis in Homer. , 


5. N. ἐγώ || éyav ov τύνη 
G. ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μεῦ ἐμεῖο, |céoj σεῦ! |[ἰσεῖο, σέθεν, | εὖ] [{ξο] εἶο, ἕθεν - 
ἐμέθεν τεεῖο Féoj Ἐεῦ] Βεῖο, Ἐέθεν] 
D. ἐμοί, μοί] σοί, τοί! ||Tew ofj ||¢ot- or Ῥοῖ] Ῥεοῖ 


A. ἐμέ, μέϊ 


P.N. [nudes] ἡ ἡμεῖς ἄμμες 


α. ἡμέων || ἡμείων 


1). ἡμῖν ἥμῖν, ἥμιν, Ser cli 
A. nuéds, -éas || fud’s,du 


σεὶ 

[dudes} ὑμεῖς {{ὕμμες 
ὑμέων || ὑμείων 

ὑμῖν || ὕμιν» ὕμμι(ν, ὕμμ᾽ |o 
ὑμέᾶδς, -éas || ὕμμε 


ej μάν}! ἑέ - or Fé] Feé 
[σφεῖς] 
σφέων] ᾿σφείων, σφῶν 


σφισίν σφί( σφ᾽ 
opéas [-ἐας] σφέ] ᾿σφεῖ- 


D.N. {νῶϊ |lopai, σφώ ας, σφᾶς] [n. σφέαῃ 
G. νῶϊν ᾿σφῶϊν 
D. νῶν 


Αὐ!νῶϊς, vd 


᾿᾿σφῶϊν, σφῷν 


ἸΙσφῶϊ, σφώ 


᾿σφωΐν] 
᾿σφωέ; σφω 


§ 27. SUBSTANTIVE, 33 


b. REFLEXIVE. . 


1 Pers. M. (of myself) F. 2 Pers. M. (of thyself) τ. 


ΤΟΣ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐμαυτῆς σεαυτοῦ, σαυτοῦ σεαυτῆς, σαυτῆς 
Ὁ. ἐμαυτῷ ἐμαυτῇ σεαυτῷ, σαυτῷ σεαυτῇ, σαυτῇ 
A. ἐμαυτόν ἐμαυτήν σεαυτόν, σαυτόν σεαυτήν, σαυτὴν 

P.G. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ὑμῶν αὐτῶν 
D. ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς ἡμῖν αὐταῖς ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς ᾿ ὑμῖν αὐταῖς 
A. ἡμᾶς αὐτούς ἡμᾶς αὐτᾶς ὑμᾶς αὐτούς ὑμᾶς αὐτᾶς 
3 Pers. M., of himself. τι, of herself. Ἔ N., of tself. 

S. 6. ἑαυτοῦ, αὑτοῦ ἑαυτῆς, αὑτῆς 
D. ἑαυτῷ, αὑτῷ ἑαυτῇ, αὑτῇ 
A. ἑαυτόν, αὑτόν ἑαυτήν, αὑτήν ἑαυτό, αὑτό 

P.G. ἑαυτῶν, αὑτῶν ἑαυτῶν, αὑτῶν 
D. ἑαυτοῖς, αὑτοῖς ἑαυταῖς, αὑταῖς 
A. ᾿ἑαυτούς, αὑτούς ἑαυτάς, αὑτᾶς ἑαυτά, avra 
or P. G. σφῶν αὐτῶν, 1). σφίσιν αὐτοῖς -ais, A. σφᾶς αὐτούς -ds 

96. RECIPROCAL. 
M. (of one another) F. N. M. N. F. 

P. G. ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων D. A. ἀλλήλω ἀλλήλᾷ 
D. ἀλλήλοις ἀλλήλαις 6. ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν 
A. ἀλλήλους ἀλληλᾶς ἀἄλληλᾶ : 

d. INDEFINITE. 
M. F..N., such ὦ one. M. 

S. N.. 6, ty τὸ δεῖνα P.. οἱ δεῖνες 
G. τοῦ, τῆς δεῖνος τῶν δείνων 
D. τῷ, τῇ δεῖνι ᾿ * 

A. τὸν, τὴν, τὸ δεῖνα τοὺς δεῖνας 
g. ADDITIONAL Forms, 
5. Ν, ἐών, ἰώ 8. Tv ν., τού ti, B. 
G. ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, ἐμοῦς, με- τέο, τεῦ! τέος] τεῦς] Feder] m., ἑοῦς Ὁ. Β.» 
θέν! Ὁ. τεοῦς, τεοῦ Ὁ. ἑεῖο E. 
Ὁ. ἐμίν D., ἐμύ 8. τίν D. B. For] &., ἵν ori Ὁ., ὃ 8. 
Α. τέ te, τύ] τίν Ῥ. Fé] &., Viv} Ὁ. P. 
PE. apes D. [Δ. ὑμές τ. 
Go ἁμέων, -OV D., ἀμμέων ὑμμέων RB. 
1). ἡμίν P., Guly D., ἄμμε- ὑμίν, Siw Ὁ. P. ply} ψίν! D., ἄσφι i. 
A. ‘apé Ὁ. [σι(ν m. ὑμέ, ὕμμε D. ψέϊ D., ἄσφε AR. 
D.N. νῶε 8. 


h. REFLEXIVE 244, 248: 


ΟΥ -W, -ἄς, τῳ, -ᾳ, τον, -ἄν, -o, Pl. 


New Ion. 1 Pers. ἐμεωυτοῦ, -ἣς, -@, -ἢ, τόν, 
-jv* 2 Pers. σεωυτοῦ, -ἧς, -@, ἢ-» -6v, -ἦν " 3 Pers. ἑωυτοῦ, -ἧς, -@, -ἢ, -όν, 
-ἦν, -ό, Pl. -ῶὥν, -έων, -οἷσι, -ἥσι, -οὖς, -ds, -ά " Hdt. 


Dor. 3 Pers. αὐταύτου 


των, -ἄν, τοις, -als, τους OF -WS, -ἄς, -a. 


Jol. Ἑαυτῶ for αὑτοῦ, Alc. 88 [74]. See 181 6, 180 ο, 197 ¢, 246 ἃ. 


i. RECIPROCAL 244: 
Pind. P. 4. 397, δα. 


GR. TAB. pig 


Dor. ἀλλάκων 1804, Theoc. 14. 46, ἀλλάλοισι 
Ep. I Dual ΠΥ» ΠΊΩΝ K. 65. 


Cc 


34 PRONOUNS. § 28. 
28. xvi. ApJEcTIVE PRONOUNS. 


I. DEFINITE. 


a. Article. b. Relative. c. Iterative. 
M. (the) ΕΒ. Ν. M. (qui) 3 F. (ont) N. M. (ipse) F. (very, same) N. 
ε 
5. Ν. ὁ ἢ 0. τὸ ὅς ἥ αὐτός αὐτή αὐτό 
G. τοῦ τῆς οὗ ἧς αὐτοῦ αὐτῆς 
nw - : ~ ΄“ 
D. τῷ τῇ ᾧ ἧ αὐτῷ αὐτῇ 
,ὔ 
A. τόν τήν ὅν ἣν αὐτόν αὐτήν 
P.N. of aire οἵ εὖ "ἃ αὐτοί αὐταί αὐτᾶ 
G. τῶν τῶν ὧν ὧν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν 
D. τοῖς ταῖς οἷς αἷς αὐτοῖς αὐταῖς 
7 .«“ 9 2 
A. τούς τᾶς ous as αὐτούς αὐτᾶς 
D.N. τώ Ta & "a αὐτώ αὐτά 
G. τοῖν ταῖν ov aw αὐτον αὐταῖν 
. Demonstrative. 
M. (this) F N. M. (hic) τ. (this) N. 
S.N. ὅδε hic ἥδε hee τόδε hoc οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο 
G. τοῦδε τῆσδε τούτου ταύτης 
. D. τῷδε τῇδε τούτῳ.- ταύτῃ 
A. τόνδε τήνδε τοῦτον ταύτην 
P.N. οἵδε hi aide he τἄδε hec οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτἅ 
΄“ ~~ d ’ , 
G. τῶνδε τῶνδε τούτων τούτων 
-" ΄ , , 
D. τοῖσδε ταῖσδε τούτοις ταύταις 
ν" φ , -- 
A. τούσδε τᾶἄσδε τούτους ταὐτᾶς 
D.N. τώδε τἄδε τούτω ravTa 
΄“΄ al , , 
G. rode ταῖνδε τούτοιν πταύταιν 
6. Possessive. 
S. 1 P. ἐμός meus, my 2 Ρ. σός tuus, thy 3 P. ὅς suus, his, her, ts 
΄, id Md 
P. ἡμέτερος = our ὑμέτερος your σφέτερος their 
§ 28. i. ADJECTIVE Pronouns 234. 4, 249s. Those of Dec. 2 and 1 


have in general the dialectic forms belonging to those declensions (20, 
201, 197s, 131 ἃ): as, Ep. τοῖο, αὐτοῖο, τοῖϊν " Old τάων, αὐτάων, τοῖσι, 
ταῖσι, τοισίδε, αὐτοῖσι " Ion. τῇσι, τῇς, τῃσίδε, ἧσι, αὐτῇσι " Dor. τῶ, αὐτῶ, 
τώς, ‘ad, ἅ, ἅτις, τᾶς, αὐτᾶς, τᾷδε, ταύταν, τᾶν, αὐτᾶν " Mol. τοίς, ταίς. 
-  j. Article 250: 6, τό, 199; τώ, τοῖν, 2846. Dialectic Forms: Old 
Nom. Pl. τοί A. 447, Hdt. 8. 68. 1, Theoc. 1. 80, isch. Pers. 424, ταί 
Dr’. 5, .Pind.0.. 13; 25, Ar. Eq. 1329. 
k. Relative 250: 6199. 0. F.: Ep. Gen. δου a. 70, ἕης Π. 208, § 135. 
1. Iterative 251: αὐτό 199. So decline ἄλλος alius, other, and ἐκεῖνος 
1116, that (κεῖνος P. 1., B. 87, Hdt. 8. 74, κῆνος m., Sap. 2. 1, τῆνος D., 
Theoc. 1. 4). D.F.: M. αὐτέου, -ἐῳ, ἡ“ -ἔων, -έοισι, “ἔους, F. én, -ἔης, -ἔῃ, 
-ἔην, -έων, -έῃσι, -έας, New Ion. 


§ 28, ADJECTIVE. 35 


II. INDEFINITE. 


f. Simple Indefinite. g. Interrogative. h. Relative Indefinite. 


Lat. aliquis, ullus quis ? quicumque, quisquis 
M.F.(any,some)N. M.F.(who?)N. Μ. (whoever) F. N. 
ΟΝ. tis τὶ τίς τί dais ἥτις ὅτι 

G. τῖνός, τοῦ τίνος, τοῦ οὗτινος, ὅτορ ἧστινος 
Ὁ. τινί, τῷ τίνι, τῷ ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ ἥτινι 
A. τινά τίνα ὅντινα ἥντινα 
PLN. τινέξ τινά, «τίνες τίνα οἵτινες. αἵτινες ἅτινα, 
G. τινῶν [ἅττα τίνων ὧντινων, ὅτων ὧντινων [ἅττα 
D. τισί τίσι οἵστισι, ὅτοις αἷστισι 
A. τινάς τίνας οὕστινας ἅστινας 
D.N. τινέ τίνε ὥτινε ἅτινε 
G. τινοῖν τίνοιν οἵντινοιν αἷντινοιν 


τη. Demonstrative 252: οὗτος, αὕτη, 252b. Decline τοιόσδε, -ἄδε, 
-dvde, and τοιοῦτος, -avrn, -οῦτον or -οὔῦτο (199 8), talis, such, τοσόσδε (232 a) 
and τοσοῦτος tantus, so much, τηλικόσδε and τηλικοῦτος so old, τυννοῦτος 
tantillus, so small. D. F.: for τῶνδε, τοῖσδε, by a kind of double declen- 
sion, Poet. τῶνδεων Ale. 127 Bk., Ep. τοῖσδεσι φ. 93, τοϊσδεσσι(ν K. 462, 
B. 47 ; τουτέῳ, τουτέων, 255 Ὁ ; τοῦτοι, ταῦται, 255 a. 


Paragogic Declension (252 ο) : 


S.N.  6d¢ Hot τοδί οὑτοσί abril τουτί 
G. τουδί τησδί τουτοῦί ταυτησί 
D. τῳδί Tot TOUT wk ταυτῇϊί 
Α. τονδί τηνδί τουτονί ταυτηνί 

P.N. οἱδί αἱδί ταδί οὑτοίί avrail ταυτί 
G. τωνδί, ὅχο. τουτωνί, &c. 


n. Possessive 252. D. F.: 1 Pers. Pl. ‘duds or duds ο., Z. 414, Alsch. 
Ch. 428, ‘auérepos p., Theoc. 2. 31, ἄμμος, ἀμμέτερος m., Alc. 103, 104; 
Du. vwirepos E., O. 39: 2 Pers. S. reds D. E., y. 122, Asch. Pr. 162; 
Pl. ‘duds 0., a. 375, ὕμμος m. ; Du. σφωΐτερος E., A. 216: 3 Pers. S. ds 
p.1., I’. 333, Hdt. 1. 205, Soph. Aj. 442, ἐός E. D., a. 409, Theoe. 17. 
50, Fés m.; Pl. ods ο., A. 534. 


0. Indefinite 2538: Tis 208d, ὅ τι or ὅ,τι 255; τοῖσι; Brow, 258. 


Forms of τὶς, ris, and ὅτις = ὅστις, in Homer and Herodotus, marked 
as in 27f: - 


5. Ν. τὶς τὶ τίς τί ᾿Ιὅτις ὅτι [|ὅ ττι - 
6. τέο, τεῦ τεῦ {τέο ὅτευ [[ὅττεο, ὅττευ 
Ὦ. τέῳ τῷ [τέῳ] ὅτεῳ 
A. τινά τίνα ||br eva 
PLN.  rweés τινά τίνες τίνα Πδὅτινα 
α. [réwv] τέων brew 
1). [τέοισι] Sica ὁτέοισι [f. -ἐῃσι] 
A. Twas ldooa [τίνας] lor was ἅσσα 


p- For Correlative Pronouns, see 53. 


36 


COMPARISON AND CONJUGATION. 


§ 29. 


29. 3B. ANALYSIS OF COMPARISON. 


1. Old Greek and Latin πο Δα: 2. Common Greek Form. 8. Second 


Greek Form. 4. Common Latin Form. 


5. Common English Form. 


BASE. CONNECT- DEGREE-SIGN. EXAMPLES 
IVE. Comp. Sup. Comp. Sup. 
1. Root or a T véaTos 
Pos. Stem. (u)i m minimus 
2. Pos. Stem. ο τερ τατ μακρότερος μακρότατος 
ω νεώτερος νεώτατος 
αι φιλαίτερος φιλαίτατος 
€s ve pid oad ἀκρατέστατος 
is Aadicrepos λαλίστατος 
of μελάντερος μελάντατος 
3. Root. (I)e ov στ ἡδίων ἥδιστος 
4. Pos. Stem. i or -ssim | longéor longissimus 
5. Positive. e ἐν st longer longest 
C. TABLES OF CONJUGATION. 
30. 1. Distincrions Cuassiriep (265 5). 
ἶ a. VOICES. 
SUBJECTIVE. OBJECTIVE. 
1 act Fam acted upon 
by myself by another 
(Simple Performance of . | (Both Performance and Recep- | (Simple Recep- 
the act) : tion) : tion of the act): 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE, Reflexive PASSIVE. 
Intransitive : Transitive : directly : indirectly : 3 
ἔδραμον, ἔπαυσα, ἐπαυσάμην, εἱλόμην, ἔπαύθην, | 
-cucurri, I stopped |I stopped my- 1 took for my-| I was stopped 
1 ran. another. | self, 1 ceased. self, I chose. by another. 


b. TENSES. 


Ἄ I. Prmary. IL. SeconpaRY. 
Time. 1. Present. 2. Future. 8. Past. 
Relations. 
1. Def- PRESENT. IMPERFECT. 
inite. γράφω scribo, μὴ ἔγραφον scribébam, 
Lam writing. 1 shall be writing. 1 was writing. 
2. Indef- FUTURE. AORIST. 
inite. gee γράψω scribam, ἔγραψα scripsi, 
1 write. 7 shall write. IT wrote. 
3. Com- PERFECT. FUTURE PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
plete. γέγραφα scripsi, πεπαύσομαι desiero, ἐγεγράφειν scripseram, 
T have written. TI shall have ceased. 1 had written. 


§ 32. DISTINCTIONS AND ELEMENTS. ~ 37 


6. MODES. 
I. DISTINCT. 
A, INTELLECTIVE. 
1, Decided, or Actual. 2. Undecided, or Contingent. 
a, Present Contingence. B. Past Contingence, 
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. OPTATIVE. 
γράφω scribo, γράφω scribam,  γράφοιμι scriberem, 
Lam writing. I may write. 1 might write. 


B. VoLirive. 


IMPERATIVE. <a 
ae hie» Rss 
Ps ὦ 


γράφε scribe, O98 
Write. /*&* 


“ᾧ ty 
II, INCORPORATED. 


A. Substantive, B. Adjective, \ L MY, "ar GY 


‘INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 


γράφειν scribere γράφων scribens 
To write. Writing. ἢ OF Carsgorais-_ 


31. wu. FoRMATION OF THE TENSES. 


PREFIXES, TENSES, AFFIXES. 
: Active. Middle, Passive, 
PRESENT, @, μι ομαι, μαι 
Augm. IMPERFECT, ov, v όμην, μὴν 
FUTURE, oo σομαι θήσομαι 
τς 2 Fururs, ήσομαι 
Augm. AorISsT, σα σάμην ν 
Augm. 2 AORIST, ον, ν | όμην, μην av 
: Redupl. ῬΕΒΕΈΟΥ, κα μαι 
Redupl. 2 PERFEcT, a 
Augm. Redupl. PLUPERFECT, κειν μην 
Augm. Redupl. 2 PLUPERFECT, εἰν ἷ 
Redupl. Future ῬΡΕΡΈΟΤ, [σὼ] LR σόμαυ 


32. τ΄. ANALYSIS OF THE VERB. 


I. PREFIXES (277s). 


The AuGMENT, prefixed to Secondary Tenses in the Indicative. 
The REDUPLICATION, prefixed to Complete Tenses in all the Modes, 


II. THE STEM (344s), including, 


PREFORMATIVES, additions prefixed to the Root. 
. The Root, the primitive element of the Verb. 
LETTERS INSERTED or CHANGED in the Root. 
AFFORMATIVES, additions affixed to the Root. 


III. AFFIXES (285s), including, 
g. TENSE-SIGNS. 
e(c), Future and Aorist, Active and | θης, Future Passive. 


oP 


rho 249 


Middle ; Future Perfect. ys, 2 Future Passive. 
x, Perfect and Plupertect Active. *, Present and Imperfect; Perfect 
θε(θη), Aorist Passive. and Pluperfect Passive ; 2 Per- 


ε(η), 2 Aorist Passive. fect and Pluperfect Active. 


38 


CONJUGATION. —— ANALYSIS. 


§ 32. 


ἢ, Connectinec VOWELS (290s). 


Indicative. 

0,€, (w, εἰ), Pres., Impf., Fut., Fut. Perf. 
ae), Aor. Act. and Mid.; Perf. Act. 
ev(e), Pluperfect Active. 
*, Aorist, Perfect, and Pluperfect 

Passive ; -pt Form. 
ων, n(n); Subjunctive. 

Optative. 

t, General Sign ; -μι Form Middle. 


un, Aorist Passive ; -μᾶ Form Active. 
οι(οιη), Pres., Fut., Perf., Fut. Perf. 
αι(ειά,, eve), Aorist Act. and Mid. 


Imperative, Infinitive, Participle. 


e(o), Zmv. ) Present, Future, Future 
e(et), Inf. Perfect ; Perfect Ac- 
ὃ, Par. tive. 


a(o), Aorist Active and Middle. 
*, Perf. and Aor. Pass. ; -pt Form. 


i. FLEXIBLE Enprncs (295s). 
A. SUBJECTIVE. 


Sing. 1 2 3 PET Ὁ 8 Du.2 3 
Ρ Ρ Ρ pn pn np po pon 
Pri. -p(ut,*)  -s(c 0a) ar(ci,*) | -μεν -τε -ντ(νοΐ, dot) ~TOV ~TOV 
Sec. -μίν, ut, *) -Ξ(σθα) ~1(*) -μεν -τε -ντίν,εν, σὰν) τον -τὴν 
Lat. -m(*) -s(sti) -t ~mius -tis -nt(runt, re) 
Pp pm pn npmn pm on pn pmn 
Imv. «θ(θϊ, ς,ε,ν, ἢ -τω “TE -ντων,-τωσᾶν | -TOV -των 
L. -*(to) . - «ἐξ -nto 
ΤΣ rd 
Inf. “Vy -VOL, -b Part. -vt-s (r-s) 
1. -ré(se) ni-s _ -tir-tis 
B. OBJECTIVE. 
Sing. 1 2 3 ῬΙ.Ὶ 2 8 Du2 8 
ΡΥ pv py pvyn pvyn np v pyn pvn 
Pri. -pat -σαι(αι) -ται | -μεθᾶ -σθε = -vrar(drar) -σθον -σθον 
Sec. -μὴν -σο(ο)ὺ -ττο | -μεὰ -σθε -vro(aro) -σθον -σθην 
Lat. -(mr)r -ris(re) -ttir | -mir -mini -ntir 
pv pym pyn pymn pyvm ἢ pyvn pymn 
Imv. -σο(ο) -σθω -σσθε -σθων, -σθωσᾶν | -σθον -σϑων 
1. ~  -r&(tor) -tor mint -ntor ' 
1 Pee ae ae d a 
Inf. -o bar Part.-pev-os Ὑγε1}.-τ-ός -τέ-ος 
1. «γἱᾷ, ier, rier) -t-tis(sus) -nd-ts 


j. Add to the list, ν pPARAGoGIC in the 3d Person, after € or simple t 
(163) ; LETTERS INSERTED between the stem and affix (as o, ἡ, € 307, 
$11) ; and also, in compound verbs, a preceding PREPOSITION (390). 


33. Norrs. a. In 32i, the ELEMENTS of the Flexible Endings are 
mostly marked, according to their force, with small letters placed above : 
μη o, 8, τ, with p, as signs of person (246, 271), ο, 6. 2); v, ε, a, with n, 
as signs of nwmber (271 Ὁ, ο, 6) ; at, 0, 6, 8, nv, ev, with v, as signs of 
voice (271 6, 272 ἃ, Ὁ) ; w, with m, as a sign of mode (272 6) ; v and t, with 
r, as signs of relation (272, 12) ; + and τέ, with ἃ, as suffixes of derivation 
(272 b) ; while letters unmarked are, for the most part, simply euphonice. 

b. The TRANSLATION in 34, applies, except in the Imperative, to the 
Ist Person singular, and must be varied for the other persons and num- 
bers. It is read across thus: Pres. Ind. Act. 7 am stopping another, Mid. 
I am stopping myself, &c.; while the different forms of the Pres. and Impf. 
may be also rendered, J stop, I stopped, ἕο. Some words are printed in 
Roman letters as explanatory or, in some combinations, inadmissible. 


§ 35. 


SUBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 


AND CoMPARED WiTH THE LATIN. 


d. AORIST 
ACTIVE. 


Primary. 


9 


τ΄ 0. PF. 
σ-ἅ 5-ἴ 
σ-α-ς 5-1-5} 
σ-ε 5-1-ὖῦ 
σ-ἅςμεν s-i-mus 
σ-α-τε 5-1-5015 
σ-α-ν 5-δ-ταηῦ 
o-a-TOV 

σ-ά-την 


— 
ΒΞ 

ἕῳ 
TR 


Secondary. 


Sub. 8S. 1 o-@ s-éri-m | 
o-y-S s-eri-s 
o-y 5-οὐ-ὖ- 
σ-ω-μεν 
σ-η-τε 
σ-ω-σι 


o-1-TOV 


σ-αι-μυ S-isse-m 
T-At-S, σ-εια-ς 
σ-αι-μεν, 
σ-αι-τε 
σ-αι-εν, 
σ-αι-τον 


σ-αί-την 


σ-εια-ν 


(σ-α-θ)σον 
σ-ἄἅ-τω. 
σ-α-τε 
σ-ά-τωσαν, 

σ-ά-ντων 
σ-α-τον 
σ-ά-των 


wh wre wh WNH Whr 


wb 


O-a-t S-iS-se 


(c-a-vT-s) σᾶς 
(c-a-vo-a)o dou 
᾿ς (σ-α-ντ)σᾶν 
σ-α-ντ-ος 


6. PERF., 
2 PERFECT. 

τ. 0. F. 

κ-α vi-i 

κ-ατς V‘-i-sti 

K‘~€ v‘-i-t . 

K‘-d-pev V‘-i-mus 

κί-α-τε v‘-i-stis 

(κ-α-ντ)κ' σι ν΄-8- 

K‘-a-rov = [runt 
τι ¢. Fr. [éra-m 
κί-εὐ-ν, κ-ἡ ν΄- 
κί-εἰ-ς v‘-era-s 
κεἰ ν΄-οτα-ᾧ 
κί-εὐ-μεν 
κί-ει-τε ἴσαν 
κί-ευ-σαν, K‘-€- 
κί-εἰ-τον 


κ'-εἰ-την 


PLUPERF., 
2 PLUPERFECT. 


κω —-v‘-éri-m 
κ'-ῃ-9 ν΄ -611-5 
κῃ -VS-eri-t 


κί-ου-μι ν΄ -1556-τὰ 
κί-οἱ-ς ν΄-1556-5 
κοι _—-v‘-isse-t 
κί-οι-μεν 
κί-οι-τε 
κί-οι-εν 
κί-οι-τον 


κι-οί-την 
κί-ε 
κ-έ-τω 
K‘=€-TE 


vp Ké-roacay, 


τς K&6-vrev 

K‘-€-TOV 

κ-έ-των 
κ΄-έ-ναι v‘-is-se 
(x‘-0-7-s) KOS 
(x‘-o-0-a)K‘ute 
(κ’-ο-τὴκός 
κ’-ό-τ-ος 


σ-ἄσ-ης 


K‘-ul-ds 


41 


f, Aorist Pass., 
2 Aorist Pass, 


τ᾿ F. 
(θε-μ)θην 
On 
θέη-μεν 
θέη-τε 
θη-σαν 
θη-τον 
aie ales 
(θέέ-ὠ-μ)θῷ 
(θ.ἐ-η-Ξ)θῇ 
(θ“ἐ-η-τ)θῃ 
θῶ-μεν 
θέῆ-τε 
θώ-σι 
᾿θἢ-τον 


(θ'ε-ιη-μ)θ'είην 
| (θε-ιη-ο)θεείης ὁ 


(θ'ε-ιη-τ)θείη 

θεείη-μεν, O%et-pev 

θείη-τε, ” Oci-re 

θείη-σαν, θεῖ-εν 

θείη-τον, θεῖ-τον 

θειή-την, θεί-την 

T. 5. 

(θε-θγθητι 

θή-τω 

θέη-τε 

θή-τωσαν, 
θέ-ντων 

θέη-τον 

θή-των 

θῆ-ναι 

(0%e-vr-s) Oels 

(θ'ε-νσ-α)θεῖσα 

(θεε-ντ)θέν 

θέ-ντ-ος 


θείσ-ης 


42 CONJUGATION. τ 86, 
36. vi. Opsnctive Arrixrs ANALYZED 
a. NUDE. b. EvPHONIC. 
Pres., Perf. (2 Aor.) Impf., Plup. Present (2 Aorist.) | Imperfect. 
Ε. σ. F. 
Ind. 5. 1 μαι ο-μαι ΟἹ 
2 σαι(αι) (ε-αὐ)ῇνει €-ris, -re 
: 3 ται e-Trav i-tur 
p> PP. 1 μεθα όὄ-μεθα i-mur 
5 2 σθε ε-σθε = =i-mini 
ἣν 3 νται ο-νταᾶι u-ntur 
D. 2 σθον ἐ-σθον 
: F. 0. F. 
Ind. 8. 1 μην ό-μην éba-r 
2 σοί(ο) (ε-ο)ου 
ἰς 3 το €-TO 
eek θα ό-μεθα 
Ἔ 2 a ec ε-σθε 
9 3 ντο 0-yTO 
nm D.2 σθον ἐ-σθον 
3 σθην έ-σθην 
Sub. S. 1 ὡ-μαᾶν a-r 
2 (n-at)q a-ris,-re 
8 H-Tav δ- 
Pp Pl ώ-μεθα a-mur 
a 2 n-o8e a-mini 
ἜΝ 3 ὠ-νται a-ntur 
oD, ἃ ἡ-σθον 
C.F. σ. F. 
Opt. S. 1 (-pnv οί-μην ére-r 
2 ι-ο οι-ο — eré-ris, -re 
fe 3 l-TO οι-το οἵδθ- 
iy Ped (-μεθα οί-μεθα ere-mur 
Ἔ 2 ι-σθε οι-σθε ere-mini 
9 3 t-vTO οὐ-ντο ere-ntur 
oe Des ι-σθον οι-σϑον 
ϑ (-σθην οί-σθην 
Imy. 8. 2 σοί(ο) (€-0)ov é-re 
3 σθω έ-σθω i-tor 
P. 2 oe ε-σθε i-mini 
3 σθωσαν, έ-σθωσαν, u-ntor -: 
σθων έ-σθων Ξ Ξ 
D. 2 σθον e-c ov ae 
3 σθων ἔ-σθων $ of 
Ε. τὸ τ 
Infin. σθαι ἐ-σθαι (é-ri)i Ex 
Part. N. μεν-ος, μέν-ος ό-μεν-ος aed 
-" ο-μέν-η Ἔ og 
μενον, μένεον é-jev-ov eet 
σα. μέν-ου ο-μέν-ου Ps 
μέν-ης ο-μέν-ης SOE 


43 


§ 36. 


OBJECTIVE AFFIXES, 


AND CoMPARED WITH THE LATIN. 


puosss 90} UL Poq{TULO 58 ‘SUSIS-aSUd} 9} 10 g PUL % S10} JOT OY, 


, 9 82 Som (Stor) 7. “ME fe TOS “4 46% 49 (9) “TOS “JUL ‘ P00E ‘Amg-0 ‘amaa 991 “008 ‘an.0 (22) ‘40 (440) “opm (1900M 
ie 1a0%) n.ono (7000 ‘1040 ‘1a0) Ἴ4 8. £B1GS 2 (99 ‘43) 675 “ “0 (4) “Ge £q 065 3.1 9 265 “10.0 ‘mo (ovD ‘onn.) ‘no (09 
‘0.02) ‘0 0.0 “9 10 Uh (102 0.29} “ww mo Ὁ 601 whe (19l09 “929) “Ὁ L6z “Ὁ γδῦ Α0. (002) Ὃ 16% 091 2 (99). (ὁ "19 (9) Ἥ 800 SOD 
“8 166 “P G16 599) (59) "SG 9091 “8 880 Alig (7199) ‘0 166 ‘arom “Un (035) “ὃ Ὃ 6) Ὁ “ΤῸ ὦ (το “η0) ‘ggg ‘a “τ (Π) “BUIS T “8808 
S 79 ‘SG SOXYFY 10 Sjuouleyy ῬῈΒ ΒΘΒΒΌΤΟ — Ὃ 695 095 “4 Ὑ Ἵ 28 05]8 ΡΒ ‘q ‘Vege ‘a ἢ Ὁ 696 UI 4τιοτ πο 3 θα 1Ὁ OY} 10g ἜΟΙΒ 
«1010 JUSNbay 521 WOLF “ΙΘΙΠ ΘΙ 9.1 UL a UTYeT oY} pure { xIYe 91} Jo 4591 oY} τοι! , yeu oy} Aq poyeredas 918 “(68) 598102 


‘S{UOULO]9 9591} OFUL UOISTAIP oy} Yeu sueydAy 901 pues 


{SONIGND WIAIXGTA puv ‘STAMOA ONILOANNOO ‘SNDIS-ASNUL ojouep a pur ‘0 “1, 5] ΤΠ Ὶ [[vUIS 911 ‘gg ΡΒ cg ὃ Π 9 


> a S 
Ba ! Por y > ee 
Ὁ e824 2s > S of anf EG δ τ 
~ i aes Seev2 se «-- ὁ δὼ Ρ 3 saa ae 
ἃ ϑός τ Fo Tei ts Φ ἔτεῖε 
HE soOSwouo ᾧ 3350585 δ b τὸ ὁπό O00 
DN \ eos, ies ἃ “ὦ Π eee ae 8.9 
FH ΦΡΡΡΡΡ se PE Pe Ee ΒΟ Pee ee 
6 HOSS OOD ὦ SoS OOS OG > bos te 
μ " Σ᾿ 
= a > 4 at a 3 = 2 a2 2 9FO 9 & 
2 & - »=feSws 5 & SCeess 33 ¥3h 338 3 iid 3 
Ξ τῇ SSEEEES Tol PEESE SETTLES τ θεῖς 
᾿ ἐς ἐέξεφκεν 88 988 98 ἐ ὅδ ὁ ᾧ GEG αὶ 
Ὁ bb b&b bbbEbL bEKEbbEKEbE 50 80 bb b bEEEDS 
i 2 
᾿ ὃ 
ad <p “ 3 a δ Ses 85 
Ἔ - > > wo 9 2 ; aie Sie | ' 4 
ae gosRe88 fF of > 3 aS > 
Exige Fk S Ee setts ἐ ἐεεθε 
SRE eres: SRP VES FF γ oS ΟΥ̓ 
ΞΕ eb S bbb bbb bb δ bbb bb 
Ee INO HNO ΟἹ AD WFNS FNC MANO HNO NO ὺ 5 
Bee = pe 6 ry a. og πὸ ξολδο δι 
Sa, ἐν 2, & + 
° a *£reurll gf ‘£iepuodoeg “θα Oo ‘Arepuoog as 


44 


ACTIVE. 
a. PRESENT. b. IMPERFECT. 
Iam loosing. I was loosing. 
solvo solvébam 
Ind; 5, 1 Ξλύω liio 
2 Aves = luzs 
Ν 3 2λύει luit 
Ρ P. 1 λύομεν lutmus 
Ξ 2 λύετε luitis 
ἐξ : 8 Ζλύουσι“ luwnt 
D. 2 Ξλύετον 
Ιη4.. 5.1 Ξἔλσον lué- 
' 2 ἔλυες [bam 
Bs ἐξ evel 
Cay ieee | ἐλύομεν 
r= 2 é\vere 
8 3 22\vov 
2 Ἢ, 4 ἐλύετον 
8 ἐλυέτην 
Sub. 5. 1 Ζλύω luam 
2 λύῃξ = luas 
; 8 ὅλύῃ ~~ luat 
Ε P. 1 λύωμεν ludmus 
Be 2 λύητε luatis 
= 8 λύωσι luant 
D. 2 λύητον 
Opt. S. 1 λύοιμι lugrem 
2 λύοις = lueres 
= 3 Avo —lueret 
τρῶς aes | λύοιμεν luerémus 
Ξ 2 λύοιτε lueretis 
3 3 λύοιεν luerent 
> D2 λύοιτον 
3 Avolrny 
Imy. 8. 2. λῦε lue 
8. λυέτω luito 
P. 2 2\vere luite 


CONJUGATION. 


§ 37. 


37. vit. GENERAL PARADIGM OF 
(Stem Av- ; Pass. to be loosed ; Mid. 
- A. DEFINITE TENSEs. 
1. Present, or Definite System: Base λῦ- 


3 λυέτωσαν, 
= 2\vévrev luunto 


. 2 *dberov 


3 λυέτων 
λύειν luge 
_ Mev,-ovea,-ov! luens 


᾿ λύοντος,-ούσης luentis — 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 


c. PRESENT. d. IMPERFECT. 
Iam loosed, ὅθ. Iwas loosed, &e. 
solvor, &c. solvébar, &c. . 

Avopar — luor 

Shin, *Aver luzris,-re 

λύεται luitur 

λυόμεθα ludmaur 

2) Jeo Oe luiminé 

λύονται luuntur 

2\ ver ov 
ἐλυσόμην lué- 
é\vov_ [bar 
ἐλύετο 
ἐλυόμεθα 
ἐλύεσθε 
ἐλύοντο 

. ἐλύεσθον 

ἐλυέσθην 


λύωμαν luar 
aig ludris,-re 
λύηταν luatur 
λυώμεθα luamwr 
λύησϑε luamini 
λύωνται luantur 


λύησθον 
λυοίμην luérer 


λύοιο Ἰπογδγ18,-76 
λύοιτο = lueretur 


λυοίμεθα lueremur 
λύοισθε lucremint 
λύοιντο lucrentur 


λύοισθον 


λυοίσϑην 


_ luére 
luitor 


luimint 


λύου 
λυέσθω 


2) Heo Ge 
Avés Saray, 
2\véo Pav luwntor 


2)\ veo Pov. 
2)\véor bwv 


λύεσθαι luz 
λυόμενος, -ἢ» τον 
λυομένου, -ἡς 


7” LSS RS ΓΚ Pe EEO) τ. 


§ 37. GENERAL PARADIGM. 45 
CONJUGATION : Ava, solvo, to loose. 
to loose for one’s self, redimo, to ransom.) 
B. SrmpLEe INDEFINITE TENSES. 
2, 3. Future and Aorist Systems: Base λῦσ-. 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
6. FuTuRE. f. AORIST. g. FurTure. h. Aorist. 
I shall loose. I loosed. I shall ransom. I ransomed. 
solvam solvi redimam redémi 
Ind. λύσω luam λύσομαι  luar ———— 
-2 λύσεις lues 3\voy,*vore lugris,-7e af qVE R ΚῪ ἐ 
8 λύσει ΤἸπυοΐ λύσεται = luetur , 4) ? 
P. 1 λύσομεν luémus λυσόμεθα luemur // 
2 λύσετε luetis λύσεσθε = Luemrtnd; L ¥/ > 
3 2Ξλύσουσι“ luent λύσονται luentur\ 4440} a? 
tA vA 4 
D. 2 λύσετον I played. λύσεσθον ἃ 
Ind. ick 1092 aiodp ΓΤ Califopai®- 
2 ἔλυσας  lusisti ἐλύσω - ᾿ : : 
8 €rvoe® ΤἸι51ὲ ἐλύσατο 
ὌΝ ἐλύσᾶμεν lustmus ἐλυσάμεθα 
2 ἐλύσατε lusistis ἐλύσασθε 
3 ἔλυσαν lusérunt, ἐλύσαντο 
D. 2 ἐλύσατον [-re ἐλύσασθον 
ϑ ἐλυσάτην ΐ ἐλυσάσθην 
Sub. 2ticw  lusérim λύσωμαν 
2 λύσῃς 7[1.50718 voy 
3 voy _luserit λύσηται 
ἘΣ λύσωμεν λυσώμεθα 
2 λύσητε λύσησθε 
3 λύσωσι“ λύσωνταν 
D. 2 λύσητον λύσησθον 
Opt. λύσοιμι λύσαιμι lusissem | λυσοίμην λυσαίμην 
2 λύσοις λύσαις, λύσειας | λύσοιο λύσαιο 
3 λύσοι ϑλύσαι, λύσειες | λύσοιτο λύσαιυτο 
P. 1 λύσοιμεν λύσαιμεν λυσοίμεθα λυσαίμεθα 
2 λύσοιτε λύσαιτε λύσοισθε λύσαισθε 
3 λύσοιεν λύσαιεν, λύσειαν | λύσοιντο λύσαιντο 
D. 2 λύσοιτον λύσαιτον λύσοισθον λύσαισθον 
3 λυσοίτην λυσαίτην λυσοίσϑην λυσαίσθην 
Imv. 2\borov ϑλῦσαι 
3 λυσάτω λυσάσθω 
P. 2 λύσατε λύσασθε 
3 λυσάτωσαν, λυσάσθωσαν, 
2 λυσάντων Avr dcbov 
D. 2 λύσατον λύσασϑον 
8 λυσάτων Ξλυσάσθων 
Inf. λύσειν [50γ! ὅλῦσαι! lusisse | λύσεσθαι λύσασθαι 
Par. λύσων,-ουσα, λύσᾶς,-ἄσα,-ἅν! λυσόμενος, γον λυσάμενος,- γον 
6. λύσοντος, οὐσης λύσαντος, -dons | λυσομένου, -ηΞ λυσαμένου, -ς 


46 § 37. 


CONJUGATION. — GENERAL PARADIGM. 


C. CoMPLETE TENSES. 


4, Perfect System: Base \edvx-. 


5. Perfect Passive System : 


ACTIVE. PASSIVE AND 
i. PERFECT. j. PLUPERFECT. 1, PERFECT. m. PLUPERFECT. 
I have loosed. I had loosed. Thave been V'd, §c. I had been I'd, δε. 
solvi solyéram solitussum,&c. _ solitus ram, &c. 
Ind. 8. 1 ATK pepulz AAT par 
2 λέλυκας pepuliste λέλυσαι 
- 8 λέλυκε pepulit λέλυται 
Fo PL 1 λελύκᾶμεν λελύμεθα 
Η 2 λελύκᾶἄτε Ζλέλυσθε 
ἐς 8 λελύκᾶσι“ λέλυνται 
D. 2 λελύκἄτον λέλυσθον 
Ind. 5.1 ἐλελύκειν ρορυ]ὅ- ἐλελύμην 
2 ἐλελύκεις [ram ἐλέλυσο 
3 ϑ ἐλελύκει ἐλέλυτο 
ΞΡ ha ἐλελύκειμεν ἐλελύμεθα 
ὍΞ 2 ἐλελύκειτε [κεσὰν ἐλέλυσθε 
8 3 ἐλελύκεισαν, ἐλελύ- ἐλέλυντο 
an ὦ ἐλελύκειτον ἐλέλυσθον 
3 ἐλελυκείτην ἐλελύσθϑην 
Sub. S. 1 λελύκω ρορυ]δγΐην λελυμένος ὦ 
2 λελύκῃς pepuleris λελυμένος ἧς 
. 3 λελύκῃ pepulerit λελυμένος 
re P.1 λελύκωμεν λελυμένοι ὦμεν 
5 2 λελύκητε λελυμένοι μὲ 
A 3 λελύκωσις λελυμένοι ὦσι" 
gts λελύκητον λελυμένω ἦτον 
Opt. S. 1 λελύκοιμι pepulissem λελυμένος εἴην 
2 λελύκοις pepulisses λελυμένος εἴης 
: 3 λελύκοι pepulisset λελυμένος εἴη 
E iggy | λελύκοιμεν λελυμένοι εἴημεν 
Ἔ 2 λελύκοιτε λελυμένοι εἴητε 
Θ 3 λελύκοιεν λελυμένοι εἴησαν 
na D.2 λελύκοιτον λελυμένω εἴητον 
3 λελυκοίτην λελυμένω εἰήτην 
Τηγ. S. 2 Ξλέλυκε λέλυσο 
8 λελυκέτω λελύσθω 
P. 2 λελύκετε Ζλέλυσϑε 
3 λελυκέτωσαν, λελύσθωσαν, ᾿ 
λελυκόντων Ζλελύσθων 
D. 2 λελύκετον λέλυσϑον 
3 λελυκέτων ϑλελύσθων 
Infin. λελυκέναιν!] pepulisse λελύσθαι! 
Part. N. λελυκώς! -via! -ds! λελυμένος [ -n,- ov! 
G. λελυκότος! -vlas λελυμένου, -ἡς 
Ind. k. Future Perfect λελυκὼς ἔσομαι solvéro, J shall have loosed. 


oe 
~] 


ὃ 37. COMPLETE AND COMPOUND TENSES. — 


D. CompounpD INDEFINITE TENSES. 


Bases λελὕ- and λελῦσ-. 6. Compound System: Bases AvGe- and λὕθησ-. 
MIDDLE. } PASSIVE. Ξ $ Ξ 3 
n. Furure PERFECT. o. AoRIST. p. Furure. ἮΝ Se ἐς 
I shall have been loosed, §c. | I was loosed. I shall be loosed. ξ ΒΕ ΟΝ 
solitus €ro,red@méro | solitus sum solvar mC "πὶ ᾿ δ 
Ind. λελύσομαι λύθήσομαι Be 2S εὖ 
2 λελύσῃ;, λελύσει λυθήσῃ, λυθήσει | S's Ξ po 
3 Aeddoreran λυθήσεται Ξ oF φ 
P. 1 λελυσόμεθα λυθησόμεθα 6 Ὅν: ὍΣ 
2 λελύσεσθε λυθήσεσθε ΠΕ 8. ΛΠ) 
8 λελύσονται λυθήσονται Sa ES 
Ὁ. 2 λελύσεσθον λυθήσεσθον cad 2 

-Ξ 
Ind. ἐλύθην απ ἃ 
2 ἐλύθης ΞΕΦο 
8 ἐλύθη a2 25 
P.1 ἐλύθη ee 
. υ ΓΝ 
2 vente. E E ae 
3 ἐλύθησαν eae 
D. 2 ἐλύθητον 5: ga = 
3 ἐλυθήτην Sees 
Sub. λυθῶ es 
2 “os λυθῇς gz oS Ξ 
8 λυθῇ PP ge 
P.1 λυθῶμεν 53 3 
2 2Ζλυθῆτε ΠΕ νῇ Ε 
8 λυθῶσι: S685 
D. 2 λυθῆτον τὰ ας αἢ 
δ᾽ τ 

Opt. λελυσοίμην λυθείην λυθησοίμην Ξ Ξ am 
2 λελύσοιο λυθείης λυθήσοιο ASS s 
3 λελύσοιτο λυθείη λυθήσοιτο Εὰς- ᾧ A 

P. 1 λελυσοίμεθα λυθείημεν, λυθεῖμεν λυθησοίμεθα ae Ξ 
2 λελύσοισθε λυθείητε, λυθεῦῖτε λυθήσοισθε oa r= Ξ 
8 λελύσοιντο λυθείησαν, λυθεῖεν λυθήσοιντο SS, 3 Ξ 
D. 2 λελύσοισθον | λυθείητον, λυθεῦτον λυθήσοισθον ΒΕ is Ξ 
8 λελυσοίσθην λυθειήτην, λυθείτην λυθησοίσθην > 5.3 δ: 
Imy. λύθητι ἜΘ ὦ Ὁ 
8 λυθήτω Sek 5 
P. 2 Ξλύθητε Ἐξ —3 
3 λυθήτωσαν, 3 Hs, 
Ξλυθέντων Ξ μας 9 
D. 2 λύθητον Ξ μας je 
3 λυθήτων ΠΝ ot 
: = ap 
Inf. λελύσεσϑαι λυθῆναι! λυθήσεσθαι 3 ve Eb 
Par. AeAvordpevos,-n,-ov| AvOels! -εἶσα! -ἐν! λυθησόμενος,-η,-ον] .: Ses 
- G. λελυσομένου,-ς | λυθέντος! -elo-ns λυθησομένου, ns ἢ 3 = 3 


q. Verbals \trés! soliitus, solibilis, Zoosed, loosable ; λὕτέος ! solvendus. 


48 CONJUGATION. —- SECOND TENSES. 


38. E. 
7. 2 Aorist System. 


r. 2 Aor. Act. t. 2 Aor. Mippie. 
ya left. I remained. 
Ind. Ξἔχίπον liqui ἐλϊπόμην 
2 ἔλιπες ἐλίπου 
8. ἔλιπε ἐλίπετο 
P..1 ἐλίπομεν ἐλιπόμεθα 
2 ἐλίπετε ἐλίπεσθε 
3 Ζέλιπον ἐλίποντο 
D. 2 ἐλίπετον ἐλίπεσϑον 
8 ἐλιπέτην ἐλιπέσθην 
Sub. λίπω λίπωμαι - 
2 λίπῃς Nin 
3 *iry λίπηται 
P.1 λίπωμεν λιπώμεϑα 
2 λίπητε “λίπησθε 
8 λίπωσιϊ λίπωνται 
D. 2 λίπητον λίπησθον 
Opt. λίποιμι λιποίμην 
2 λίποις λίποιο 
8. λίποι λίποιτο 
Pp. 1 λίποιμεν λιποίμεθα 
 λίποιτε λίποισθε 
3 λίποιεν λίποιντο 
Ὁ. 2 λίποιτον λίποισθον 
8 λιποίτην λιποίσϑην 
Τὴν. λίπε ᾿ λιποῦ! 
8 λιπέτω Nréo wo 
Pp. ἃ λίπετε λίπεσθε 
8 λιπέτωσαν, λιπέσθωσαν, 
λιπόντων Ἔλιπέσθων 
D. 2 λίπετον λίπεσθον 
8 λιπέτων δἜῬλιπέσθων 
Inf. λιπεῖν! λιπέσθαι! 
Par. λιπών! λιπόμενος 


Theme λείπω (5. λιπ-, λειπ-, 
347 h) linquo, to Jeave, 50; F. 
λείψω, 2 Pf. λέλοιπα, 312 b; 
λιπών decl. 26f; accent 
780 b, 781 b, 782. 


Srconp TENSES. 
8. 2 Perfect Syst. 


* uy. 2 Perrsect ACTIVE. 


I trust, pret. 
πέποιθα, fido 
πέποιθας 

Ζηπέποιθε: 
trem οἰίθἄμεν 
πεποίθατε 
πεποίθᾷσι 
tet ol0arov 


πεποίθω 
πεποίθῃς 
πεποίθῃ 
πεποίθωμεν 
πεποίθητε 
πεποίθωσι' 


πεποίθητον 


πεποίθοιμι, -οίην 
πεποίθοις, -οίης 
πεποίθοι, -οίη 
πεποίθοιμιεν 
πεποίθουτε 
πεποίθοιεν 


πεποίθοντον 

πεποιθοίτην 
Ζ2Ζπέποιθε 

πεποιθέτω 


πεποίθετε 
πεποιθέτωσαν, 
πεποιθόντων 
πεποίθετον 
πεποιθέτων 


πεποιθέναι! 


πεποιθώς -υἵα ! -ός! 


v. 2 Piup. Act. 
ἐπεποίθειν 
ἐπεποίθεις 
ἐπεποίθει 
ἔπεποίθειμεν, &c. 


8. 38, 


9. 2 Comp. Syst. 
w. 2 AORIST PASSIVE. 
Iwas worn. 
ἐτρίβην tritus sum 

ἐτρίβης 
ἐτρίβη 
ἐτρίβημεν 
ἐτρίβητε 
ἐτρίβησαν 
ἐτρίβητον 
ἐτριβήτην 
τριβῶ 
τριβῇς 
τριβῇ 
τριβῶμεν ͵ 
2τριβῆτε 
τριβῶσι" 
τριβῆτον 


τριβείην 

τριβείης 

τριβείη. 
τριβείημεν, -εἶμεν 
τριβείητε, -εῖτε 
τριβείησαν, -εἶεν 
τριβείητον, -εἶτον 
τριβειήτην, -εἰτην 


τρίβηθι 
τριβήτω 
2τρίβητε 
τριβήτωσαν, 
27 piBévTwv 
τρίβητον 
τριβήτων 
τριβῆναι!ϊ 
τριβείς! -εἶσα! -ev! 
x. 2 Fur. Pass. 
τριβήσομαι 
τριβησοίμην 
τριβήσεσθαι 
τριβησόμενος 


8 38. y. The Second ΤΈΝΒΕΒ, which have no place in the regular con- 
jugation, are here supplied from the verbs λείπω, πείθω, and τρίβω (39). 


See 289, 303, 336s. 
θοίην 293 ο. , 


Pret. πέποιθα 268, 338 b, 312 Ὁ, 817 Ὁ, 818 ; πεποι- 


8 89, 6. Mute Versps 2706 : τρίβω 847 g, τάσσω 8491, 169 a, πείθω 
847 h, ὁρίζω 3498; τρί(β-σωγψω, ἔτα(γ-σαγξα, πέπει(θ-σο)σο, πεπεῖ(θ-σθαι)- 
σθαι, 151 ; ὁριί(σω, εω)ῶ, 806 ἃ ; τέτρι(β-κα)φα,. τέτα(γ-κα)χα, wpi(d-Kew)- 


§ 39. MUTE VERBS. - 


39. vit. Crasses or Verss. A. 


a, LABIAL: τρίβω 
Stem τρίβ-, rpiB- ; to rub. 
Pres. A. τρίβω téro 
P. & M. τρίβομαι 
Impf. A. ἔτριβον 
P. ἃ M. ἐτριβόμην 
Fut. A. τρίψω 
Mid. τρίψομαι 
1 Aor. A. ἔτριψα 
Mid. ἐτριψάμην 
2 Aor. A. €A\aBov took 
Mid. ἐλαβόμην 
1 Pf A. τέτρϊφὰ trivi 
1 Pl. A. ἐτετρίφειν 
2. Pi Ad λέλοιπα 38 r 
2 Fi A, ἐλελοίπειν 


PE Ῥ, Ind. τέτριμμαι 
τέτριψαι 
τέτριπται 
Ρ. 1 τετρίμμεθὰ 
τέτριφθε 
τετριμμένοι εἰσί' 
την. τέτριψο 
τετρίφθω 
Ρ. 2 τέτριφθε 
τετρίφθωσαν, 
τετρίφθων 
Inf. τετρίφθαι! 
Par. τετριμμένος ! 
Pl. P. Ind. ἐτετρίμμην 
2 ἐτέτριψο 
3 ἐτέτριπτο 
p. 1 ἐτετρίμμεθα 
2 ἐτέτριφθε 
3 τετριμμένοι ἦσαν 
Fut. Pf τετρίψομαι 
1 Aor. P. ἐτρίφθην 
1 Fut. P. τριφθήσομαι 
2 Aor. P. ἐτρίβην ottener 
2 Fut. P. τριβήσομαι 
Verbals τριπτός, τριπτέος 


ἴων eo wh ew bo 


Ὁ. PALATAL: τάσσω 
τὰἄγ-, τασσ-:; arrange. 
τάσσω, τάττω 
τάσσομαι, τάττομαι 
ἔτασσον, ἔταττον 
ἐτασσόμην, ἐταττόμην 
τάξω 
4 
τάξομαι 
» 
ἔταξα 
> / 
ἐταξάμην 
ΜΎυῃω 
ἤγἄγον led 
ἐὼν 
i ee eee 
τέτἄχα 
ἐτετάχειν 
ta = - 
πέ a figi 
τέφευγα fig 
ἐπεφεύγειν 
τέταγμαι 
τέταξαι 
τέτακται 
τετάγμεθα 
τέταχθε 
τετάχαται͵ 


τέταξο 
τετάχθω 
τέταχθε 
τετάχθωσαν, 
τετάχθων 
τετάχθαι! 
τεταγμένος | 
ἐτετάγμην 
ἐτέταξο 
ἐτέτακτο 
ἐτετάγμεθα 
ἐτέταχθε 
> , 
ἐτετάχατο 


τετάξομαι 
ἐτάχθην 
ταχθήσομαι 
ἐτἄγην rare 
ταγήσομαι 
τακτός, τακτέος 


49 


Mute. 


C. LINGUAL! πείθω 
wi6-, πειθ-; persuade. 
πείθω 
, 
πείθομαι 
ΕΣ 
ἔπειθον 
> ’ 
ἐπειθόμην 
πείσω 
πείσομαι 
ἔπεισα 
ἐπεισάμην 
ἔπιθον poet. 
ἐπιθόμην 
πέπεικα 
ἐπεπείκειν 
πέποιθα 38 
> / 
ἐπεποίθειν 


πέπεισμαι 
πέπεισαι 
πέπεισται 
πεπείσμεθα 
πέπεισθε 
πεπεισμένοι Eloi 


πέπεισο 
πεπείσθω 
πέπεισθε 
πεπείσθωσαν,΄ 
πεπείσθων 
πεπεῖσθαι!ϊ 
πεπεισμένος | 
ἐπεπείσμην 
ἐπέπεισο 
ἐπέπειστο 
ἐπεπείσμεθα 
ἐπέπεισθε 
ξ΄ > 
πεπεισμένοι ἦσαν 


λελήσομαι 
ἐπείσθην 
πεισθήσομαι 
ἐδράθην τ. οΥ]. 
[Ξἰορὲ 


πιστός, πειστέος 


kev, 149 ; τέτρι(β-μα)μμαι, ἐπεπεί(θ-μην)σμην, 148 ; τέτρι(β-ταηπται, 
ἐτέτα(γ-το)κτο, πει(θ-τεος)στέος, ἐτρί(β-θην φθην, τα(γ-θ)χθήσομαι, ὡρί(δ-θ)- 
σθην, 147 ; τέτρι(β-σθεγφθε, τετά(γ-σθωγχθω, 158 ; τετριμμένοι (-αι, -α) ἦσαν, 
τεταγμένοι (-αι, -α) εἰσί or τετάχαται, 800 b, c, 158; ὥριζον, ὥρικα, 277 ὁ, 
278 a, 280 8. Tenses supplied from other Verbs: ἔλαβον 851. 2 ; ἤγαγον, 


Gk. ΚΒ. SD. 


D 


50 VERBS, — MUTE, LIQUID. - $39. 


Mure VERBS. ἡ 40. B. Liquip: Verss. 
ἃ, LINGUAL: ὁρίζω | a. ἀγγέλλω nuntio b. φαίνω ostendo 
- ὁῤίδ-, dpcg-; to bound. Ἰἰάγγελ-, ἀγγελλ-; toannounce. ddv-, paw-; to show. 
Pte=, ΟΡ YY εἰ 
Pres, A. ὁρίζω finio ἀγγέλλω φαίνω 
P. & M. ὁρίζομαι ἀγγέλλομαι φαίνομαι 
Impf. A. ὥριζον ἤγγελλον ἔφαινον 
Ῥ ἃ Μ. ὡριζόμην ἠγγελλόμην ἐφαινόμην 
1 aon = pica decry: alee 
id. ὡρισάμην ἡγγειλάμην ἐφηνάμην 
2 Aor. ἃ. εἶδον saw ifyyehov rarer €Barov threw 
Mid. εἰδόμην ἠγγελόμην : ἐβαλόμην 
i. Pie, Sptka ἤγγελκα πέφαγκα 
1 PL A ὡρίκειν ἠγγέλκειν ἐπεφάγκειν 
2 Ph A. οἶδα 46 ἃ ὄλωλα peril πέφηνα as mid, 
2 Pl. A. 7dew 7 ὀλώλειν ἐπεφήνειν 
Perf. iZ ὥρισμαι ἤγγελμαι πέφασμαι 
Finp: ἃ raped ye ἜΝ. 
or. P. ὡρίσθην ἡγγέλθην ἐφάνθην 
1 Fut. P. ὁρισθήσομαι ἀγγελθήσομαι φανθήσομαι 
2 Aor. i. ἠγγέλην late ἐφάνην as mid. 
2 Fut. P. ; [oreos ἀγγελήσομαι φανήσομαι 
Verbals ὁριστός, dpe- ἀγγελτός, ἀγγελτέος φαντός, φαντέος 
Fut. Act. Fut. Mid. Peif. Pass. & Mid. 
For. A. ὁρίσω, ποκα ἀπ χρῶ é 
ὁριῶ ayyeA@ ἀἄγγελουμαε Τῃᾷ. πέφασμαι 
Opt. ὁρίσοιμι, Ind. paiva φανοῦμαι 2 πέφανσαι 
~~ δριοῖμι 2 φανεῖς φανῇ, φανεῖ ὦ πέφανται 
Inf. ὁρίσειν, 3 φανεῖ φανεῖτι ».1 πεφάσμεθα 
ὁριεῖν P. 1 φανοῦμεν chavotpeba 2 πέφανθε [εἰσί 
Par. ὁρίσων, 2 φανεῖτε φανεῖσθε 3 πεφασμένοι 
ὁριῶν 3 φανοῦσ. εἰ φανοῦνται Imv. πέφανσο 
gon Opt. φανοῖμι,-οίην φανοίμην ὃ π' εφάνθω 
For. Μ. ὁρίσομαι, “ΡΣ τρανοῦ, οίηα φανοῖο. Κ. 2 πέφανθε, kc 
Opt. ὅριι te οἴμηι ᾿ 3 pavoi, -oin pavoiro Inf. πεφάνθαι! 
Sakae? 1 φανοίμεν φανοίμεθα Par. πεφασμένος! 
Inf. ὁρίσεσθαι, ‘ee φανοῖσθε Plup. Pass. & Mid. 
ὁριεῖσθαι Inf Parole pavolsma ἐπεφάσμην 
Par. ὁρισόμενος, | 1}}}- φανεῖν φανεῖσθαι ἐπέφανσο 
éptovpevos' Par. φανῶν φανούμενος ἐπέφαντο, Kc. 


fr. ἄγω ago, lead, 284 6, g; πέφευγα, fr. φεύγω fugio, flee, ὅ0 ; λελήσομαι 
shall have forgotten, fr. λανθάνω δ0 ; ἐδράθην 342. 3, 351. 2 ; εἶδον 358. 
— Ο. E. γράφω write, tpérw turn, κόπτω cut, τύπτω strike, πλέκω plait, 
δέχομαι receive, πράσσω do, φράζω tell, πλάσσω fashion, 50 ; κομίζω, -ἰσω, 
-10, κεκόμικα, -ἰσμαι, ἐκομίσθην, κομιστός, bring ; σπεύδω hasten. 

8 40. c. Liquip VERBS: ἀγγέλλω 3491, φαίνω 847 ἢ ; ἀγγεί(λ-σω, 
χέω)λῶ, φανῶ, ἔφ(αν-σαγηνα, ἤγγειλα, 1δ2 ; φαν(ἐωλ)ῶ, - «(ἀειε)εῖς, -(ἐογοῦμεν, 
-(ἐε)εῖτε, -(ἐουγοῦσι, -(ἐοι)οῖμι, -(ἐων)ῶν, 121, cf. φιλέω 42 ; φανοίην 293 Ὁ ; 
“πέφα(ν-καγγκα 150; πέφηνα 312a; πέφα(ν-μαῦσμαι 100 d; πέφαν-σαι 


δ. 42... DOUBLE-CONSONANT, PURE. 61 


41. C. DovsiEe-Consonant VERBS. 


a. πέμπω mitto Ὀ. σπένδω libo c. αὔξω or αὐξάνω augeo 
πεμπ-; send. omrevd-; pour, avé-, avédv-; increase, 
Pres. A. πέμπω ἄρχω σπένδω αὔξω, αὐξἄνω 
P.& Μ. πέμπομαι.. lead σπένδομαι αὔξομαι, αὐξάνομαι 
Impf. A. ἔπεμπον ἦρχον ἔσπενδον ηὖξον, ηὔξανον 
P. ἃ Μ. ἐπεμπόμην ἐσπενδόμην ηὐξόμην, ηὐξανόμην 
Fut. A. πέμψω ἄρξω σπείσω αὐξήσω μελλήσω 
Mid. πέμψομαι σπείσομαι αὐξήσομαι 
Aor. A. ἔπεμψα ἦρξα ἔσπεισα ηὔξησα ἥψησα 
Mid. ἐπεμψάμην ἐσπεισάμην ηὐξησάμην 
1 Pf. A. πέπομφα ἦρχα ἔσπεικα late ηὔξηκα ἤῤῥηκα 
1 PL ἃ ἐπεπόμφειν ἐσπείκειν ηὐξήκειν 
2 Pf A. λέλαμπα blaze πέπονθα ὄδωδα smell 
2 Pl. A. eheAdprrew ἐπεπόνθειν ὀδώδειν 
Pere Ῥ'. πέπεμμαι ἦργμαι ἔσπεισμαι ηὔξημαι 
Plup. Ῥ. ἐπεπέμμην ἐσπείσμην ηἰξήμην 
Aor. P. ἐπέμφθην ἤρχθην ἐσπείσθην ηὐξήθην 
Fut. P. πεμφθήσομαι σπεισθήσομαι αὐξηθήσομαι 
‘Verbals πεμπτός, πεμπτέος σπειστέος αὐξητός, αὐξητέος 


Perfect Passive. (ἃ. ἐλέγχω to confute.) Pluperfect Passive. 


Ind. πέπεμμαι ἐλήλεγμαι ἐπεπέμμην ἐληλέγμην 
2 πέπεμψαι ἐλήλεγξαι ἐπέπεμψο ἐληλεγξο 
3 πέπεμπται ἐλήλεγκται ἐπεπέμπτο ἐλήλεγκτο 
P. 1 πεπέμμεθα ἐληλέγμεθα ἐπεπέμμεθα ἐληλέγμεθα 
2 πέπεμφθε — ἐλήλεγχθε ἐπέπεμφθε ἐλήλεγχθε ἴσαν 
3 πεπεμμένοι εἰσί ἐληλεγμένοι εἰσί πεπεμμένοι ἦσαν ἐληλεγμένοι ἧ- 
Imv. πέπεμψο ἐλήηλεγξο Pr. P. taf. Wire Paste: 
2 πεπέμφθω ἐληλέγχθω πεπέμφθαι! πεπεμμένος! 
Pp. ὃ πέπεμφθε, ὅς. ἐλήλεγχθε, Xe. ἐληλέγχθαι!ϊ ἐληλεγμένος ! 


42. D. Pure Verss. 1. CONTRACT. 


1. Τὴ -άω: τιμάω hondro 2. In -έω: φιλέω imo 3. In -dw: δηλόω declaro 
5. Tiud-; to honor. S. φίλε-; ἐο love. ry δηλο-; to manifest. 


156 Ὁ ; πέφα(ν-σθεννθε 158 : ὄλωλα, fr. ὄλλῦμι destroy, 351. 4, 281 ο ; ἔβα- 
λον, fr. βάλλω 50. —O. E. στέλλω send, καθαίρω purify, δέρω Aa γ, σπείρω 
sow, φθείρω destroy, μιαίνω stain, τῷ νὼ stretch, κλίνω bend, κρίνω judge, 
πλύνω wash, τέμνω cut, βάλλω throw, μένω remain, νέμω distribute, 50. 

§ 41. 6, DovusBLe-ConsonANT VERBS: πέπομφα 8120 ; πέπε(μπ- 
μαιῆμμαν, ἐλήλεγμαι, 148 ἃ ; σπί(ενδ-σω)γείσω, ἔσπ(ενδ-μ, ενσμ)εισμαι, 151, 
156, 148 ; ἔσπεικα 50 ; αὐξάνω 351. 2; αὐξήσω 511 ἃ ; λέλαμπα, rerovla, 
ὄδωδα, fr. λάμπω, πάσχω suffer, ὄξω, 50; ἀελλήσω, ἥψησα, ἤῤῥηκα, ἴν. 
μέλλω delay, ἕψω boil, ἔῤῥω go away, 8511, 50. --- Ο. E. κάμπτω bend, 
σφίγγω bind, τέρπω please, κλάζω clang, βόσκω feed, ἄχθομαι be vexed. 


52 CONJUGATION. ΘΖ, 


DEFINITE 
a. PRESENT ACTIVE. 


I honor, live, love, run, manifest. 
Ind. rip(ao)a ζῶ φϊλ(έω)γῶ θέω δηλ(όω)ῷ 
2 τιμ(άεις)ᾷς Gs φιλίέεις)εῖς θεῖς δηλί(όεις)οῖς 
3 τιμ(ἀει)ᾷ ζῶ φιλίέει) et θεῖ δηλ(όει)οϊ 
Pp. 1 τιμ(άἀογῶ-μεν ζῶμεν φιλ(έογοῦτμεν θέομεν δηλ(όὀο)οῦ-μεν 
2 τιμ(άε)αττε ζῆτε φιλ(έε)εῖ-τε θεῖτε δηλί(όε)οῦ-τε 
3 τιμ(ἀουγῶ-σι’ ζῶσι’ φιλί(έου)οῦ-σι’ θέουσι’ δηλί(όου)οῦ-σι' 


Sub. τιμ(ἀω)ῶ ζῶ φιλ(έω)ῶ θέω δηλ(όω)ῶ 
2 τιμ(άῃς)ᾷς ὥς φιλί(έῃς)ῆς θέῃς δηλ(ύῃε)οῖς 
3 τιμ(άῃ)ᾷ ᾧ. φιλ(έῃ)ῃ θέῃ δηλ(όῃγοϊ 


P. 1 τιμ(άωγῶ-μεν ζῶμεν φιλ(έωγῶστμεν θέωμεν δηλ(όω)ῶ-μεν 
2 τιμ(ἀηγᾶττε (ῆτε φιλ(έηγῆττε θέητε δηλί(όη)γῶ-τε 
8 τιμ(ἀωγῶ-σιι ζῶσι φιλ(έωγῶ-σι’ θέωσι' δηλ(όω)ῶ-σι' 


Opt. τιμ(ἀοιγῷ-μι, “yy φιλίέοι)οῖ-μι, -οίην δηλ(όοι)οῖ-μι, -οίην 


2 τιμί(ἀοιε)ῷς, “ons φιλ(εοιε)οῖς, -οίης δηλ(όοι)οῖς, -οίης 
9 τιμ(ἀου)ῷ, τῴη φιλ(έομ)οῖ, -oin dnA(dor)ot, -οίη 
Pp. 1 τιμ(ἀοιγῷτμεν, τῴημεν φιλίέοι)οῖ-μεν, -οίημεν δηλ(όοι)οῖ-μεν,-οίημεν 
2 τιμ(ἀοιλῷ-τε, τῴητε φιλίέοι)οῖ-τε, -οίητε δηλ(όοι)οῖ-τε, -oinre 
3 τιμ(ἀοι)ῷ- εν φιλίέοι)οῖ-εν δηλί(όοι)οῖ-εν 
Imvy. τίμ(αε)ᾶ ζὥ φίλ(εε)ει θεὶ - δήλ(οε)ου 


ὃ τιμ(αέ)άττω ζήτω φιλ(εέ)γείτω θείτω δηλί(οέ)ού-τω 

Ρ. 2 τιμ(άε)δα-ττε ζῆτε, φιλ(έεγεῖ-τε θεῖτε, δηλ(όε)οῦ-τε 
3 τιμ(αἐέ)ά-τωσαν, We. φιλ(εέ)εί-τωσαν, &e. δηλί(οέ)ού-τωσαν, 
τιμ(αὀ)γώ-ντων φιλ(εό)ού-ντων δηλ(οὐὀ)ού-ντων 


Inf. τιμ(άειναν ζῆν φιλί(έεινγεῖν θεῖν δηλ(όειν)οῦν 


Par. τιμ(ἀωνῶν ζῶν φιλ(έων)ῶν θέων δηλ(όων)ῶν 
τιμ(ἀουγῶ-σα φιλί(έου)οῦ-σα δηλ(δου)οῦ-σα 
τιμ(αον)ῶν φιλ(έον)οῦν δηλ(όον)οῦν 


b. IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 


s. 1 ἐτίμ(αονων ἔζων ἐφίλ(εοννουν ἔθεον ἐδήλ(οον)ουν 
2eérip(aes)as ἔζης ἐφίλ(εες)εις ἔθεις ἐδηλί(οες)ους 
8 ἐτίμ(αε)α ἔζη ἐφίλί(εε)ει ἔθει ἐδήλ(οε)ου 

p. 1 ἐτιμ(ἀογῶ-μεν ἐζῶμεν ἐφιλ(έογοῦ-μεν ἐθέομεν ἐδηλ(όο)οῦ-μεν 
2 ἐτιμ(ἀε)ᾶ-ττε ἐζῆτε ἐφιλί(έε)εῖ-τε ἐθεῖτε ἐδηλί(όε)οῦ-τε 


8 ἐτίμί(αονων ἔζων edid(eov)ovy ἔθεον ἐδήλ(οον)ουν 


§ 42. 6. ConrracT VERBS 290}, 309, 1205, 7; τιμ(άω)ῶ, τιμ(ἀο)γῶμεν, 
τιμ(άουγῶσι, τιμ(ἀοιγῶμι, 1206 ; ; τιμ(άειο)ᾷο, τιμ(άεγᾶτε, τιμ(άῃε)ᾷς, τιμ(ἀη)ᾶ ᾶ- 
τε, 1208, 118 ἃ ; φιλ(έωγώῶσι, ᾿ιλ(ἐουλοῦ, φιλ(έοιγοῖο, 121 ο ; φιλ(έογοῦμαι, 
pir(éer)et, φιλ(ἐε)εῖται, 121 ἃ, Ὁ ; φιλί(έῃγῇ, φιλ(έηγῆται, 121 ἀ; ; δηλ(δων)ῶν, 
δηλ(ὀουγοῦσα, δηλ(όοις)οῖς, 121 ὃ: ; Snr(ders)ots, δηλ(όῃ)οῖ, 123 ἃ; δήλ(οε)ου, 
ἐδήλ(οον)ουν, 121 Ὁ ; δηλ(όηγῶσθε, 120 ἃ ; τιμ(άεω)ᾶν, Bup\(Seer) 067; 309 ¢ ; 
τιμῴην, φιλοίης, δήλοίη (in this second form of the Opt., the parts shown 
above take the place of all that follows the parentheses in the first form), 
293 ", ὁ ; §(deus)qs, ζ(άῃ)ῇ», eF(ae)n, 120g; θέω, θεῖς, 809 Ὁ ; τιμήσω, θη- 


§ 42. CONTRACT VERBS. 53 


TENSES. 
6, PRESENT PAssIVE AND MIDDLE. 
I am honored, loved, manifested, dc. 
-Ind. τιμ(άἀο)γῶ-μαι φιλ(έογοῦ-μαι δηλ(όο)οῦ-μαι 
2 τιμ(άἀῃ)ᾷ ᾿ φιλ(έῃ)ῇ, φιλ(έει)εῖ δηλ(όῃ)οϊ 
8 τιμ(ἀε)ᾶτ-ται φιλί(έε)εῖ-ται δηλ(ὀε)οῦ-ται 
Ρ. 1 τιμ(αὀ)ώ-μεθα φιλ(εό)ού-μεθα δηλ(οό)ού-μεθα 
2 τιμί(άαε)ᾶ-σθε φιλ(έε)εῖ-σθε δηλ(ὀε)οῦ-σθε 
8. τιμ(άο)ῶ-νται φιλ(έο)οῦ-νται δηλ(όο)οῦ-νται 
Sub. τιμί(ἀω)γῶ-μαι φιλ(έω)ῶ-μαι δηλ(ύω)ῶ-μαι 
2 τιμ(άῃλᾷ φιλ(έῃ)ῇ δηλ(όῃ)οῖ 
8. τιμ(άη)ᾶ-ται φιλ(έη)ῆ-ται δηλ(ὀη)ῶ-ται 
Pp. 1 τιμ(αὠ)ώ-μεθα φιλ(εώ)ώ-μεθα δηλ(οὠ)ώ-μεθα 
2 τιμ(ἀη)ᾶ-σθε φιλ(έη)ῆ-σθε δηλ(όηγῶ-σθε 
8. τιμ(αω)ῶ-νται φιλ(έω)ῶ-νται δηλ(όω)ῶ-νται 
Opt. τιμ(αοί,ῴ-μην φιλ(εοί)οί-μην δηλ(οοί)οί-μην 
2 τιμί(ἀοι)ῷ-ο φιλί(έοι)οῖ-ο δηλ(όοι)οῖ-ο 
8. τιμ(αοι)ῷ-το φιλί(έοι)οῖ-το δηλ(όοι)οῖ-το 
Ρ. 1 τιμίαοίῴ-μεθα φιλ(εοί)οί-μεθα δηλ(οοί)οί-μεθα 
2 τιμ(ἀοι)ῷ-σθε φιλί(έοι)οῖ-σθε ᾿ς δηλ(όοι)οῖ-σθε 
98. τιμ(ἀοι)γῷ-ντο φιλ(έοι)οῖ-ντο δηλ(όοι)οῖ-ντο 
Imv. τιμ(ἀου)ῶ φιλ(έουοῦ .- ᾿ δηλ(ὀου)οῦ 
8. τιμί(αέ)ά-σθω φιλ(εέ)εί-σθω δηλ(οέ)ού-σθω 
p.2 τιμ(άἀε)ᾶ-σθε φιλί(έε)εῖ-σθε δηλ(όε)οῦ-σθε 
8 τιμ(αέ)ά-σθωσαν, φιλ(εέ)εί-σθωσαν, δηλ(οέ)γού-σθωσαν, 
τιμ(αέ)ά-σθων φιλ(εέ)εί-σθων δηλ(οέ)ού-σθων 
Inf. τιμ(άε)ᾶ-σθαι φιλίέεγεῖ-σθαι δηλ(ύε)οῦ-σθαι 
Par. τιμ(αὀγώ-μενος _ φιλ(εὐ)ού-μενος δηλ(οὀ)ού-μενος 
- τιμ(αο)γω-μένη φιλ(εο)ου-μένη δηλ(οο)ου-μένη: 
τιμ(αὀ)ώ-μενον φιλ(εό)ού-μενον δηλ(οὀ)ού-μενον 
ἃ. ἹΜΡΕΒΕΈΟΤ PAssIVE AND MIDDLE. 
5.1 ἐτιμ(αὀ)ώ-μην ἐφιλ(εὐ)ού-μην ἐδηλ(οό)ού-μην 
2 ἐτιμ(άου)ῶ ἐφιλ(έου)οῦ ἐδηλ(όου)οῦ 
8 ἐτιμ(άε)ᾶ-το ἐφιλ(έε)εῖ-το ἐδηλ(ὀε)οῦ-το 
P.1 ἐτιμ(αὀ)ώ-μεθα ἐφιλ(εό)ού-μεθα ἐδηλ(οὐ)ού-μεθα 
2 ἐτιμ(ἀε)ᾶ-σθε ἐφιλί(έεγ)εῖ-σθε ἐδηλ(ὀε)οῦ-σθε 
8. ἐτιμ(αο)ῶ-ντο ἐφιλ(έο)οῦ-ντο ἐδηλ(ὀο)οῦ-ντο 


ράσω, ἐφίλησα, δεδήλωκα, 310; ἐτέλεσα 8100 ; πλεύσω 345 ; πλευσοῦμαι 
806 ἃ ; τετέλεσμαι, ἐπλεύσθην, 807 ἃ, Ὁ ; ἐλζάσω)γῶ, τελ(έσω)ῶ, 305 Ὁ ; πε- 
πράσομαι fr. (πρα-) πιπράσκω sell, 50; κεκλήσομαι fr. καλέω, -ἔσω, CALL, 
842. 2, 50; δεδήσομαι fr. δέω bind, 8190, 809 b; accent 772.— Ο. E. 
νικάω conquer, ὀπτάω roast; dupdw thirst, rewdw hunger, 120g; πειράω 
try, édw permit, ἀνιάω vex, axpodoua hear, 310, 279¢; σπάω draw, yehdw 
laugh, 310 ο, 6, 807 a; αἰτέω ask, μισέω hate, oixéw inhabit, ἡγέομαι lead, 
μιμέομαι imitor, imitate; ζέω boil, αἰδέομαι respect, 310 c, 307 a, 809 Ὁ ; 
πληρόω fill, χρυσόω gild ; prydw shiver, 824 Ὁ ; ἀρόω plough, 510 ο, 50. 


Fut. 


GREEK AND.LATIN CONTRACT VERBS. 


§ 42. 


f. INDEFINITE AND CoMPLETE TENSES. 


. τιμήσω : 
. τιμήσομαι 

. ἐτίμησα 

. ἐτιμησάμην 
. τετίμηκα 

. ἐτετιμήκειν 


. PB. τετίμημαι 
Ὁ P. ἐτετιμήμην 


. τετιμήσομαι 


. P. ἐτιμήθην 


P. τιμηθήσομαι 
τιμητός, τιμητέος 


φιλήσω 
φιλήησομαι 
ἐφίλησα 
ἐφιλησάμην 
πεφίληκα 
ἐπεφιλήκειν 
πεφίλημαι 
ἐπεφιλήμην 
πεφιλήσομαι 
ἐφιλήθην 
φιληθήσομαι 
φιλητός, φιλητέος 


g. OTHER EXAMPLES. 


» Onp(aw)& hunt 
. Onp(do)d-pat 

. €Onp(aov)av 

» €Onp(ad}a-pnv 
A. θηράσω 

id. θηρᾶσομαι 

A. ἐθήρᾶσα 

. ἐθηρασάμην 


. A. τεθήρᾶκα 


> m4 
: ἐτεθηρᾶκειν 


+ ag ἐξ τεθήρᾶμαι 
. Ρ. ἐτεθηράμην 


πεπρᾶσομαι 
P. ἐθηράθην 
P. θηραθήσομαι 


_Verbals θηρᾶτός, θηρᾶτέος 


Fut. 


Att. 


τελ(έωγῶ finish 
τελ(έογοῦ-μαι 
ἐτέλ(εον)ουν 


. ἐτελ(εό)ού-μην 


τελέσω, τελῷ 
τελέσομαι, τελοῦμαι 


ἐτέ ἔλεσα 


ἐτελεσάμην 
τετέλεκα 
> ΄ 
ἐτετελέκειν 
τετέλεσμαι 
ἐτετελέσμην 

κεκλήσομαι 
» ’ 
ἐτελέσθην 

, 

τελεσθήσομαι 
τελεστός, τελεστέος 


δηλώσω 
δηλώσομαι 
ἐδήλωσα 
ἐδηλωσάμην 
δεδήλωκα 
ἐδεδηλώκειν 
δεδήλωμαι 
ἐδεδηλώμην 
δεδηλώσομαι 
ἐδηλώθην 
δηλωθήσομαι 
δηλωτός, δηλωτέος 


πλέω sail 
ἔπλεον 


πλεύσω late 
πλεύσομαι, πλευσοῦ- 


ἔπλευσα [pat 


πέπλευκα 
ἐπεπλεύκειν 
πέπλευσμαι 
ἐπεπλεύσμην 
δεδήσομαι 
ἐπλεύσθην late 
πλευσθήσομαι late 
πλευστέος 


ἐλί doo, ἀωγῶ, ἐλᾷς, ἐλᾷ, ἐλῶμεν, Ke.; ἐλῷμι or ἐλῴην" ἐλᾶν ἐλῶν. 
τελ(έσω, ἐω)ῶ, τέλεῖο, τελεῖ, &e.; + χελοῖμε. or τελοίην" τελεῖν" τελῶν. 


43. ΑΝΑΙΟΘΙΕΒ From Latin Contract VERBS. 


1. In -(ao)o: ama-. 


Ind. Pr. am(ao)o love 
2 am<(ais)ds 
3 am(ait)at 
Pp. 1 am(ai)émus 
2 am(ai)dtis 
3 am(aiint)ant 
Impf. am(aé)a@bam 
Sub. Pr. am(aam)em 
Impf. am(aé)dérem 


2. In -eo: mone-. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


monéo warn 
mon (615) 25 
mon(eit)@ 
mon(ei)émus 
mon(ei)étis 
mon(eiint)ent 
mon(eé)ébam 


moneam 
mon(eé)érem 


8. In -ἰο: audi-. 


audio hear 
aud (iis)zs 
aud (iit)%z 
aud(ii)tmus 
audii)ztis 
audiunt 
audiébam 


audiam 
aud(ié)trem 


§ 45. 


BARYTONES IN τῷ AND 
Imy.s.2 διη(αδ)ῶ mon(eé)é 
2,3 am(ai)dto mon(ei)éto » 
Ρ. 2 am(aijdte mon(ei)éte 
3 am(aiijanto mon(eii)ento 
Inf. Pr. am/(aé)dare mon(eé)ére 
Par. Pr. am(aens)ans mon(eens)éns 
PASSIVE VOICE. 
Ind. Pr. am/(aor)or monéor 
2 am(aé)dris, -re mon(eé)éris -re, 
3 am(ai)a@tur mon(ei)étur 
Pp. 1 am(ai)@mur mon(ei)émur 
2 am(ai)dmini mon(ei)émini 
3 am<(aii)antur mon(eiijentur 
Impf. am(aé)abar mon(eé)ébar 
Sub. Pr. am(aar)er monear 
Impf. am(aé)érer mon(eé)érer 
Imy.s.2 am(aé)ére mon(eé)ére 
2,3 am/(ai)dtor mon(ei)étor 
; p. 2° am(ai)@mini mon(ei)émini | 
3 am(aii)antor mon(eii)entor 
Inf. Pr. am(aé)ari mon(eé)éri 
44. Pure VERBS. 11. 


55 


aud (δ) 
aud(ii)ito 
aud(ii)ite. 
audiunto 
aud(ié)ire 
audiens 


audior 
aud(ié)tris, -re 
aud(ii)étur 
aud(ii)¢mur 
aud(ii)tmini 
audiuntur 
audiébar 
audiar 
aud(ié)zrer 
aud(ié)ire 
aud(ii)ttor 
aud (ii)?mini 
audiuntor 
aud (ié)éri 


BARYTONES IN -@. 


S. βουλευ-, to plan; σει-, shake ; θὕ-, θῦ-, sacrifice ; και-, κα-, &c., burn. 


Pres. A. 
Ῥ. ἃ M. 
Impf. A. 
P. ἃ M. 
Fut. A. 

Mid. 
Aor. A. 

Mid. 
Perf. A. 
Plup. A. 
Pett ἜΣ 
Plup. P. 
Aor: P. 
Fut. P. 
Verbals 


, - 4 
Bovreto , σείω θύω (). καίω, ο. A. κάω 
[2 ’ 
βουλεύομαι σείομαι θύομαι καίομαι 
ἐβούλευον ἔσειον ἔθυον ἔκαιον, €kaov 
ἐβουλευόμην ἐσειόμην ἐθυόμην ἐκαιόμην 
. 
βουλεύσω σείσω vow Kavo@ 
, 
βουλεύσομαι σείσομαι θυσομαι καύσομαι 
4 - 
ἐβούλευσα ἔσεισα ἔθυσα éxavoa, P. €xea 
ἐβουλευσάμην ἐσεισάμην ἐθυσάμην ἐκαυσάμην 
΄ 
βεβούλευκα.. σέσεικα τέθὑκα κέκαυκα “ 
> 4 > , > , > ’ 
ἐβεβουλεύκειν ἐσεσείκειν ἐτεθύκειν ἐκεκαύκειν 
΄ . ΄ 
βεβούλευμαι σέσεισμαι τέθῦμαι κέκαυμαι 
> ‘ > , Ane. U > , 
ἐβεβουλεύμην ἐσεσείσμην ἐτεθύμην ἐκεκαύμην 
> ’ rete; » A > , 2 Ψ 
ἐβουλεύθην ἐσείσθην ἐτὕθην ἐκαύθην, exanv 
’ , , 
βουλευθήσομαι σεισθήσομαι τυθήσομαι καυθήσομαι 
’, v 
βουλευτός, -τέος σειστός, -τέος θὕτέος καυτός ΟΥ̓́-στός 


45. Pure VERBS. 


il, . VERBS IN -μι. 


1. ἵστημι (8. ora-, ἱστἄ-) stdtuo, to set up, station (Pf. and 2 Aor.,, 
to STAND); 2. τίθημι (θε-, riMe-) pono, to put, place: 3. δίδωμι (do-, 
δῖδο-) do, to give ; 4. δείκνῦμι (Setx-, δεικνῦ-) indico to point out, show. 


§ 44. a. BARYTONE VERBS 309a: βεβούλευμαι, σέσεισμαι, 307 Ὁ, ἃ : 
θύσω, τέθὕκα 810 ἃ ; ἐτύθην 159d; καίω (s. καξ-, Kav-, Kd-, Ke-, Kd-, Kat-) 
345, 341, 847 g,h. —O. E. παιδεύω educate ; πιστεύω trust ; τίω poet.,' 


56 


3 ἱσταίη 


P. 1 ἱσταίημεν, -aipev 
2 ἱσταίητε, -aire 
3 ἱσταίησαν,-αἴεν 


PURE VERBS. 


a. PRESENT ACTIVE. 


& 

TiOnue 
τίθης 
τίθησ εἴ 

» 
τίθεμεν 

, 
τίθετε 
τιθέᾷσι", 

τιθεῖσι 


τεθείημεν, -εἴμεν 
τιθείητε, -εἴτε 
τιθείησαν,-εἴεν 


δίδωμε 
δίδως 


δίδωσι 


διδοίημεν, -oiper 
διδοίητε, -oire 


διδοίησαν;-οἷεν 


8.40. 
DEFINITE 


δείκνῦμι, vo 
δείκνῦς 
δείκνῦσε! 
δείκνῦμεν 
δείκνυτε 
δεικνύασι', 
derxvice® 
δεικνύω 
δεικνύῃς 
δεικνύῃ 
δεικνύωμεν 
δεικνύητε 
δεικνύωσ εἰ 
δείκνύοιμε 
δεικνύοις 
δεικνύοι 
δεικνύοιμεν 
δεικνύοιτε 
δεικνύοιεν 


Imv. ἵστη τίθει δίδου δείκνῦ, -ve 
c Jb ’, ᾿ bb 
3 ἱστἄτω τιθέτω διδότω . δεικνύῦτω 
P. 2 ἵστατε τίθετε δίδοτε δείκνυτε 
ς , - > , 
3 ἱστάτωσαν, τιθέτωσαν, διδότωσαν, δεικνύτωσαν, 
ἑἱστάντων τιθέντων διδόντων» δεικνύντων 
vo vb 
Inf. ἱστἄναε! τιθέναεϊ διδόναεϊ δεικνύναι 
Par. ἱστᾶς τιθείς! διδούς! δεικνύς! -ων 
icraca! ribeical didotca! δεικνῦσα! 
wv wb 
icra! τιθέν! διδάν! Secxvur | 
b. ImpER¥FECT ACTIVE. : 
Ind. ἵστην ἐτίθην, eriovy ἐδίδων, edi8ovv ἐδείκνῦν, ἐδείκνῦον 
2 a : ee > (6 53Q/ a7 > ’ - > , ww 
ἵστης ἐτίθης, ἐτίθεις ἐδίδως, ἐδίδους ἐδείκνῦς, edeixvves 
3 ovr > , > *£ PAY ea > , > , -- » , v < 
ἵστη ἐτίθη, ἐτίθει ἐδίδω, ἐδίδου ἐδείκνυ, edeixvie 
p. 1 ἵστᾶἄμεν ἐτίθεμεν ἐδίδομεν ἐδείκνῦμεν 
a OF a7 3 , 
2 ἵστατε ἐτίθετε ἐδίδοτε ἐδείκνυτε 
a > # 59. > , 
8 ἵστασαν ἐτίθεσαν ἐδίδοσαν ἐδείκνυσαν, -υον 


honor ; κελεύω command, παίω strike, 807 Ὁ ; κλείω shut, κολούω main, 


307 6, 50 ; daxpiw weep, κωλύω (Vv) hinder ; kate weep, 50. 


§ 45. 6. VERBS IN -pt 313s: Stems, δο- διδο-, θε- τιθε-, 357. 1, στα- 


tora- 357. 3, δεικ- δεικνυ- 351. 3; stem-mark lengthened 314. 


Affixes 


35a, 36a, g, 321, 2958; (στα-μ) ὕστημι, ὕστην, 296; (ἱστα-τ) ἵστησι, 
torn, 298 ; ἱστία-ντ, aver, αασι)ᾶσι, τιθέασε 300 a, 156; δείκνυμε or δεικνύω 
315a; lor(d-w)a, ἱστ(ά-ῃς)ῇς, βῇς, διδ(ό-ῃγῷ, δῷ, γνῷ, τιθ(ἐ-ωγῶμαι, 316 a; 
ἱσταίην, δεικνύοιμι, 298, διδῴην, δῴην, 516 Ὁ, ἱσταῖμεν, θεῖμεν, 2988 ; ior (a-e)n, 
τίθ(ε-ε)ει, θές, δός, στῆθι, δῦθι, 297 c; ἱστάναι, δῦναι, 801 ; ἱστ(α-ντ-Ξ)άς, 
βάς, τιθ(ε-ντ-ε)είς, γνούς, 156, 26, ἱστᾶσα, δίδουσα, 233 Ὁ ; ἐδίδουν, ἐτίθεις, 


§ 45. 


TENSES. 


VERBS IN -MI. 


c. PRESENT PAsstvE AND MIDDLE. 


Ind. ἵστἅμαι 
2 ἵστασαι 
oa 
3 ἵσταται 
P. 1 ἱστάμεθα 
a 
2 ἵστασθε 
3 ἵστανται 


Sub. ἱστῶμαι 
2 ἱστῇ 
3 ἱστῆται 


Imv. ἵστἄσο, ἵστω 
3 ἱστάσθω 
Pp, 2 ἴστασθε 
3 ἱστάσθ 
ἱστάσθωσαν, 
ἱστάσθων 
Inf. ἵστασθαι 


Par. ἱστάμενος 
ἱσταμένη 


ἱστάμενον 


4. 


& 
Ind. icrapny 
2 ἵστασο, icra 
3 ἵστατο 


P. 1 ἱστάμεθα 


τίθεμαι 
τίθεσαι, τίθη 
τίθεται 
τιθέμεθα 
τίθεσθε 
τίθενται 


τιθῶμαι 
τιθῇ 
τιθῆται 
τιθώμεθα 
τιθῆσθε 
τιθῶνται 


τιθείμην, τιθοίμην 


τιθεῖο, τιθοῖο 
τιθεῖτο, τιθοῖτο 


τιθείμεθα, τιθοίμεθα 


᾿ φιθεῖσθε, τιθοῖσθε 


τιθεῖντο τιθοῖντο 


τίθεσο, τίθου 
τιθέσθω 
τίθεσθε 
τιθέσθωσαν, 
τιθέσθων 


τίθεσθαι 


τιθέμενος 
τιθεμένη 
τιθέμενον 


δίδομαι 
δίδοσαι 
δίδοται 
διδόμεθα 
δίδοσθε 


δίδονται 


διδῶνται 


διδοίμην 
διδοῖο 
διδοῖτο 
διδοίμεθα 
διδοῖσθε 


διδοῖντο 


δίδοσο, δίδου 
διδόσθω 
δίδοσθε 


διδόσθωσαν, 


διδόσθων 
ἰδοσθαι 


διδόμενος 
διδομένη 
διδόμενον 


IMPERFECT PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 


ἐτιθέμην ἐδιδόμην 
ἐτίθεσο, ἐτίθον ἐξδίδοσο, ἐδίδου 
ἐτίθετο ἐδίδοτο 
ἐτιθέμεθα ἐδιδόμεθα 
ἐτίθεσθε ἐδίδοσθε 
ἐτίθεντο ἐδίδοντο 


57 


δείκνύὕμαι 
δείκνυσαι 
δείκνυται 
δεικνύμεθα 
δείκνυσθε 
δείκνυνται 


δεικνύωμαι 
δεικνύῃ 
δεικνύηται 
δεικνυώμεθα 
δεικνύησθε 
δεικνύωνται 


δεικνυοίμην 
δεικνύοιο 
δεικνύοιτο 
δεικνυοίμεθα 
δεικνύοισθε 
δεικνύοιντο 
δείκνύῦσο 
δεικνύσθω 
δείκνυσθε 
δεικνύσθωσαν, 
δεικνύσθων 


δείκνυσθαι 


δεικνύμενος 
δεικνυμένη 
δεικνύμενον 


᾽ wb 
ἐδεικνύμην 

> ’ 
ἐδείκνυσο 

» ’ 
ἐδείκνυτο 

» , 
ἐδεικνύμεθα 

3 , 
ἐδείκνυσθε 

» , 
ἐδείκνυντο 


315b; ἵστασαν 300; τίθεσαι τίθῃ (late, Pall. Ep. 79), ἵστασο ἵστω, ἔθ(εσο)ον, 
δ(οσο)γοῦ, 297 6, hh; τιθοίμην, θοίμην, 315¢; accent 772 g, h, 780 a, 781, 
182 b-— O. E. πέμπλημι pleo, fill, πίμπρημι burn, ὀνίνημι benefit, κίχρημι 
lend ; &yayaradmire, δύναμαι be able, κρέμαμαι hang, μάρναμαι poet., fight ; 
δίζημαι Ep. & Ion., seek: ὄνομαι Ep., blame ; ἄγνῦμι break, ζεύγνῦμι jungo, 


join, ζώννῦμι gird, ὄλλῦμι destroy, ὄμνῦμι swear, πήγνῦμι fasten. 


See 50. 


2 Aor. (see also above) 313 Ὁ, 814 ο, ἃ : ἔβην, ἔσβην, ἔγνων, (forms par- 
tially given in 45h), ἔδυν, ἔδραν, 2 A. of βαίνω go, σβέννῦμι quench, γιγνώ- 
oKw gnosco, KNOW, δύνω enter, sink, διδράσκω run, 50 ; ἐπριάμην (8. πρια-) 
as 2 A. of ὠνέομαι buy, 50; στὰ 297 ἃ ; στάντων, γνόντων, 8140 ; ἔθηκα, 


GR. TAB. 3* 


58 $45, 
INDEFINITE AND 
f. Fut. A. στήσω θήσω δώσω δείξω. 
Mid. στήσομαι θήσομαι δώσομαι δείξομαι 
1 Aor. ἃ. ἔστησα ἔθηκα 3806 Ὁ ἔδωκα ἔδειξα 
Mid. ἐστησάμην ἐθηκάμην Ep. ἐδειξάμην 
Perf. A. ἕστηκα 46 τέθεικα 510 ἢ δέδωκα δέδειχα 
Plup. A. ἑστήκειν, εἱστήκειν ἐτεθείκειν ἐδεδώκειν ἐδεδείχειν 
F. Pf. A. ἑστήξω 819} 
h. Seconp Aorist 
Ind. ἔστην ἔβην (ἔθηκα ἔσβην (ἔδωκα ἔγνων ἔδῦν sank. 
2 ἔστης ἔβης ἔθηκας ἔσβης ἔδωκας ἔγνως dus 
3 ἔστη ἔβη ἔθηκε") ἔσβη ἔδωκε") ἔγνω ἔδυ 
Ρ. 1 ἔστημεν ἔθεμεν ἔδομεν ἔδῦμεν 
2 ἔστητε ἔθετε ἔδοτε ἔδυτε 
3 ἔστησαν ἔθεσαν ἔδοσαν ἔδυσαν 
Sub. στῶ βῶ θῶ δῶ γνῶ ὕω 
2 στῆς βῆς θῆς δῷς γνῷς δύῃς 
“Se δέ δῷ γιῷ  δῃ 
P. 1 στῶμεν βῶμεν θῶμεν . δῶμεν γνῶμεν δύωμεν 
2 στῆτε Bite θῆτε δῶτε γνῶτε δύητε 
ὃ στῶσι Bao θῶσι' δῶσι’ γνῶσι δύωσι" 
Opt. σταίην βαίην θείην δοίην [δῴην] δύην Ep 
2 σταίης βαίης θείης δοίης δύης 
8 σταίη Bain θείη. - δοίη δύη 
P. 1 σταίημεν, σταῖμεν θείημεν, θεῖμεν . δοίημεν; δοῖμεν δύημεν, δῦμεν 
2 σταίητε, σταῖτε, θείητε, θεῖτε δοίητε, δοῖτε δύητε, δῦτε᾽ 
3 σταίησαν,σταῖεν θείησαν,θεῖεν δοίησαν,δοῖεν δύησαν, δῦεν 
Imv, στῆθι [ora] θές δός γνῶθι δῦθι 
3 στήτω θέτω δότω γνώτω δύτω 
p. 2 στῆτε θέτε δότε γνῶτε δῦτε 
8 στήτωσαν, θέτωσαν, δότωσαν, δύτωσαν, 
στάντων θέντων δόντων δύντων 
Inf. στῆναι βῆναι θεῖναι σβῆναι δοῦναι γνῶναι δῦναι 
Par. στᾶς Bas θείς σβείς δούς γνούς δύς 


PURE’ VERBS. 


ἔθεμεν, θεῖναι, ἔδωκα, ἔδομεν, δοῦναι, 306 b, c, 314d; δύην 816 ὁ ; δρ(άῃε)ᾷς 
120} ; πρίωμαι, πρίαιο, 788 Ὁ. --- Ο. E. ἔτλην, ἔφθην, ἔπτην, ἐπτάμην, 
ἔσκλην, ἑάλων or ἥλων, ἐβίων, 2 A. οἵ τλα- endure, φθάνω anticipate, πέτο- 
μαι fly, σκέλλω dry, ἁλίσκομαι be taken, Bidw vivo, live, ὅθ. 

§ 45. j. Setecr Homeric Forms oF ἵστημι, τίθημι, tnpr, δίδωμι, &c. 


Active. Pres. Ind. 


5. 2 ἱεῖς E. 880, διδοῖς (ins, δίδως, Bek.), 335, τί- 


θησθα, δίδοισθα (δίδωσθα Bek.), 297b; 3 τιθεῖ, ie? B. 752, δίδοϊ, 335 ἃ ; 
Ρ, 3 θέουσι (θέωσι Bek.) 335a5; Sub. 5. 3 ίῃσι N. 234, § 328 Ὁ; Imv. ἵστα 
335 a, δίδωθι 335d; Inf. ἱέμεν A. 351, ἱέμεναι N. 114, τιθήμεναι, διδοῦναι, 
333.c, 335d: Impf. 5. 1 lew (inv Bek.) ει. 88, § 315 bs 3 ἵστασκε τ. 574, 
§ 332 σ᾿, τίθει (τίθη Bek.) A. 441, § 284 a, 315b; P. 3 τίθεν a. 112, tev M. 
88 (v. 1. ξύν-ιον A. 273), ἔδιδον, 330 b: Fut. Ind. 8. 3 ἀν-έσει σ. 265, ὃ 310 d; 
P. 1 διδώσομεν (s. διδο-) v. 358 ; Inf. ἡσέμεν T. 361, ἡσέμεναι π. 377, θησέ- 
μεναι Μ. 8ὅ, δωσέμεναι 6.7, § 333d, διδώσειν w. 314: 1 Aor. στῆσα ὃ. 582, : 


§ 45. VERBS IN -MI. 59 
COMPLETE TENSES. 
g. Perf. P. ἕστἄμαι 310d τέθειμαι δέδομαι δέδειγμαι 

Plup. P. ἑστάμην ἐτεθείμην ἐδεδόμην ἐδεδείγμην 

F. Pf. P. ἑστήξομαι 319 b dedei£oua 1. 


Aor. P. ἐστἄθην 
Fut. P. σταθήσομαι 


ἐτέθην 159 ἃ ἐδόθην 
τεθήσομαι δοθήσομαι 


ἐδείχθην 
δειχθήσομαι 


Verbals στατός, στατέος θετός, θετέος Soros, δοτέος δεικτός, δεικτέος 


ACTIVE. i. SeconD Aorist MIDDLE. 
Ind. ἔδρᾶν ran ἐπριάμην bought ἐθέμην ἐδόμην 
2 ἔδρας ἐπρίω ἔθου ἔδου 
ὃ ἔδρα ἐπρίατο ἔθετο ἔδοτο 
Ρ. 1 ἔδραμεν. ἐπριάμεθα ἐθέμεθα ἐδόμεθα 
2 ἔδρατε ἐπρίασθε ἔθεσθε ἔδοσθε 
8. ἔδρασαν ἐπρίαντο ἔθεντο ἔδοντο 
Sub. δρῶ πρίωμαι θῶμαι . δῶμαι 
2 δρᾷς ἐπὶ θῇ δῷ 
8. δρᾷ πρίηται θῆται δῶται 
P.1 δρῶμεν πριώμεθα θώμεθα δώμεθα 
2 ὃρᾶτε πρίησθε θῆσθε δῶσθε 
ὃ δρῶσι πρίωνται θῶνται δῶνται 
Opt. δραίην πριαίμην θείμην, θοίμην δοίμην 
2 Spains πρίαιο eto, θοῖο, δοῖο 
8. Spain πρίαιτο θεῖτο ὅἄζο. δοῖτο 
P.1 δραίημεν, δραῖμεν πριαίμεθα θείμεθα δοίμεθα 
2 Spainre, δραῖτε πρίαισθε θεῖσθε δοῖσθε 
8 δραίησαν, δραῖεν πρίαιντο θεῖντο δοῖντο 
Imv. ὃρᾶθι πρίασο, πρίω θοῦ δοῦ 
8. δράτω πριάσθω θέσθω δόσθω 
-P.2 Spare πρίασθε θέσθε δόσθε 
8 δράτωσαν, πριάσθωσαν, θέσθωσαν, δόσθωσαν, 
δράντων πριάσθων θέσθων δόσθων 
Inf. δρᾶναι πρίασθαι θέσθαι δόσθαι 
Par. Spas πριάμενος θέμενος δόμενος 


δῶκα ὃ. 649, § 284, ἕηκα P. 708, 8 185 : Perf..Ind. ». 2 ἔστητε 885 .ἃ ; 


Inf. ἑστάμεν φ. 261, ἑστώμεναι N. 56, § 3886 ; Part. ἑστὰότος T. 79, ἑστεῶτα 
N. 261, § 325d: 2 Aor. Ind. 5.1 στῆν Λ΄. 744, § 284, δόσκον, ὃ στάσκεν, 3322 ; 
Ρ. ὃ ἔσταν, στάν I. 198, ἔφυν, 330 b, ἔστᾶσαν Μ. 56, ὃ 335d, θέσαν Β. 599, 
ἕσαν 5. 681, δόσαν A. 162, 8 2844, Sub. (822 ἃ, c, 828 ο, 824 ο, 328 Ὀ) 5.1 
βείω, θείω, elw A. 567, γνώω: 2 στήῃς, θείῃς or θήῃς, γνώῃς Ψ. 487 ; 3 στήῃ, 
Bin, βέῃ Il. 94, 852, θείῃ οΥ θήῃ, ἕῃ Π. 590, ety or ty ε. 471, ἧσιν Ο. 359, 
δώῃ, δῷσι, δώῃσιν. Ὁ. 1 στέωμεν, στείομεν, Olwuev, θείομεν, δώομεν. 3 στή- 
wot ΟΥ̓ στείωσι, δώωσιν- D. 8 orherov; Inf. στήμεναι K. 55, θέμεν, θέμεναι, 
ἕμεν Δ. 94, δόμεν, δόμεναι, γνώμεναι, 8386. ΜιρΡρΡΠπΕ. Pres. Jmv. ἵστασο, 
ἵσταο Bek., K. 291, § 297 e; Part. τιθήμενον 335d: Impf. Ρ. ὃ τίθεντο Ἡ. 
475: Fut. 5. 2 θήσεαι δ. 163, 8 8286 : 1 Aor. 5. 3 θήκατο K. 31, ὃ 306 Ὁ: 
2 Aor. Ind. 5. 8 θέτο Τ'. 310, ἕτο δ, 76, ὃ 284 ἃ ; D. 8 θέσθην x. 141; Subd: 
S. 1 θείομαι 323 ὁ ; 2 θῆαι (v. 1. θείῃς) T. 408 ; mv. θέο x. 333, θεῦ 323 ο. 


60 


PURE VERBS. —-MI FORMS. 


VERBS IN -MI (continued). 


ACTIVE VOICE. 
k. type mitto 1. εἰμί sum 
S. ἐ-, ἱε- ; to send. S. ἐσ-, ἐ- ; to be. 
Present. 2 Aorist. πες 
Ind. ἴημι (ἧκα εἰμί I sum 
2 ims ἧκας [εἰς il εἶ 68 
3 inoe’ ἧκε" ἐστί γ' est 
Pp. 1 teper εἷμεν ἐσμενὶὴ  sumus 
2 tere εἶτε ἐστέ] estis 
3 ἑᾶσι', feioe® εἷσαν (fav) εἰσί j* sunt 
“ 
D. 2 ἵετον εἷτον, ὃ εἴτην ἐστόν] 
Sub. ia & ὦ sim 
2 ifs ἧς ὁ ἧς sis 
3 in ἧ 7 sit 
p. 1 idpev ὧμεν ὦμεν simus 
2 inre fre ἦτε sitis 
3 ἰῶσι' ὥσι" ὦσι! sint 
ν. 2 ἰῆτον ἧτον ἦτον 
Opt. i ἱείην [ἴοεμι] εἴην εἴην essem 
2 teins eins εἴης esses 
3 i ἱείη εἴη εἴη esset 
p. 1 ἱείημεν, ἱεῖμεν εἵημην, εἷμεν εἴημεν, εἶμεν 
2 ἱείητε, ἱεῖτε εἴητε, εἶτε εἴητε, εἶτε 
8 ἱείησαν, ἱεῖεν εἴησαν, εἷεν εἴησαν, εἶεν 
Ρ.2ὲὶ ἱείητον, ἱεῖτον εἴητον, εἷτον εἴητον, εἶτον 
3 ἱειήτην, ἱείτην εἱήτην, εἴτην εἰήτην, εἴτην 
Imv. ἵ ἵει ἧς Ἐν ἴσθι es 
3 ἱέτω ἕτω ἔστω [ἤτω] esto 
p. 2 ἵετε ere ἔστε este 
3 ἱέτωσαν, ἕτωσαν, ἔστωσαν, sunto 
ἱέντων ἕντων ἔστων, τ. ὄντων 
Ῥ. 2 ἵετον ἕτον ἔστον 
3 ἱέτων ἕτων ἔστων 
Inf. iévae! εἷναι εἶναι esse 
Par. eis! eis ὧν [ens] 
icioa! fev! εἷσα, ἕν οὖσα, ὅν 
τρερέσίοες; Imperfect 
Ind. inv, [ζουν] ἵειν Fut. ἥ ἥσω, ἥσοιμι, S. 1 ἦν, ἦ, ἤμην 
2 ti is, tets ἥσειν, ἥσων 2 [ns ἦσθα 
8. in, ἵει 1 Aor. ἧκα (Ind. 3 ἦν erat 
Pp. 1 ἵεμεν onlv) 306 ©: 1 ἦμεν 
07 y) 5 ἦτε } 
ἵετε Perf cher chee ἦτε, ἦστε 
ὃ ἵεσαν ἘᾺΝ gr 5160 9. ἦσαν erant 
D. 2 ἵετον εἱκὼς 5100 Ὁ, 2 ἦτον, ἦστον 
ε a ” 
ὃ. ἱέτην Plup. εἵκειν 9. ἤτην, ἤστην 


ξ 45. 


τῇ. εἶμι 60, ire 


5. “i-; to go. 

Rica 
eit  €O 

> . 
[εἰς] ec is 
εἶσι’ τὶ 
ἴμεν imus 
ἴτε 1015 
wet 

tac’ —s eunt 
troy 
a” 

t@ eam 
ins seas 
a” 
ἴῃ eat 
ἴωμεν eanms 
ἴητε eatis 
a 


a” y Fo 4 

ἴοιμι, ἰοίην 

tots ~—s res 

»” . 

ἴοι iret 

ἴοιμεν 

ἴοιτε 

Ww 

ἴοιεν 

A 

ἰοιτον 

ἰοίτην 

ἴθι [et?] i 

ἴτω ito 

tre ite 

ἴτωσαν, eunto 
ἰόντων, trev 

trov 


ΕΙΣ 

tT@YV 

teva! ire 
5.» = 
ἰὼν! iens 


, A ! »" 
ἰοῦσα! ἰόν! 


Imperfect. 


jew, ἦα ibam 
jets, neta Oa 


> 
ἥμεν 
3 

yre 
noav 
> 
]TOV 


ἤτην 


§ 45. 


Ind. 


"τς 


iy ae 
᾿ σ᾽ whewhy 


ΘΟ 
ἘΣ 
χὰ 


x 


bt 
Ξ 
ΟΞ whewrp 


7 


‘IHMI, EIMI, ΕἸΜῚ, KEIMAT. 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES. 


n. Of ine. o. Of εἰμί, to be. 
Present. 2 Aorist. Future. 
ἵεμαι εἵμην ἔσομαι 
ἵεσαι εἷσο ἔσῃ, ἔσει 
τ ΣΙΝ ᾿ 
ἵεται εἷτο [ἐσέται) ἔσται 
, Ὁ 3 , 
ἱέμεθα εἵμεθα ἐσόμεθα 
» 
ἵεσθε εἶσθε ἔσεσθε 
ἵενται εἷντο ἔσονται 
ἰῶμαι ὧμαι 
ca e 
if A 
en 
inrae ἧτα 
ἑἱώμεθα ὥμεθα 
ἱῆσθε ἧσθε 
ἰῶνται ὦνται 
ae: es - a > , 
ἱείμην, ἱοίμην. εἵμην, οἵμην ἐσοίμην 
ἱεῖο, ἱἰοῖο, €i0, οἷο ἔσοιο 
co τ τ ᾿» 
ἱετο ἅὅζο. εἷτο, οἶἷτο ἔσοιτο 
cr “ a > ’ 
ἱείμεθα εἵμεθα, οἵμεθα ἐσοίμεθα 
δ» τ τ ” 
ἱεῖσθε εἷσθε, οἷσθε ἔσοισθε 
΄ κ 
ἱεῖντο εἷντο, οἷντο ἔσοιντο 
Φ oe = 
ἵεσο; tov οὗ 
¢? ΄ 
ἱέσθω ἔσθω 
ἵεσθε ἔσθε 
ec? id 
ἱέσθωσαν, ἕσθωσαν, 
«; a 
ἱέσθων ἔσθων 
ἵεσθαι ἕσθαι ἔσεσθαι 
ἱέμενος ἕμενος ἐσόμενος 
Imperfect. 
- «ΣΝ 
ΗΝ Fut. M. noopat pp, To elu to go, some as- 
tego, iov 1A. M. ἡἠκάμην εἴσῃ a Middle, ἕεμαι to 
vie fe 4 oe i ar hasten, Imperf. ἰέμην. 
a _ ‘Ace P εἴθην Others write these tenses 
€ . . * ΄ 
palate y nih with a rough breathing, 
ἵεντο ~— Fut. P. ἐθήσομαι gan tee and beter 
ἵεσθον Verb- § ἑτός +e : t es ee bs 
ἱέσθην als ἡ ἑτέος See re eee Sere 


61 


q. κεῖμαι, to lie. 


Present. 
κεῖμαι 
κεῖσαι 
κεῖται 

, 
κείμεθα 
κεῖσθε 
κεῖνται 
κέωμαι 
κέῃ 
κέηται 

, 
κεώμεθα 
κέησθε 
κέωνται 


κεοίμην 
κέοιο 
κέοιτο 

/ 
κερίμεθα 
κέοισθε 
κέοιντο 


κεῖσο 
, 
κείσθω 
κεῖσθε 
κείσθωσαν, 
κείσθων 


κεῖσθαι 
κείμενος 


Imperfect. 
ἐκείμην 
ἔκεισο 
ἔκειτο 
> , 
ἐκείμεθα 
» 
ἔκεισθε 
ἔκειντο 
Future. 
κείσομαι 


ὃ 45. τ. Stems é- ἱε- 357. 8, ἐσ- ἐ- 345, t-, φα-, 814 «, κεε-») contr. κει-» 
342. 1: ἵἴημι, cf. τίθημι" (ἱεασι) ἱεῖσι, Att. ἱᾶσι, 122, 120 ἢ ; Youu 81δ ὁ ; 
ἵειν 816 Ὁ ; A. εἷμεν, εἵμην, εἵθην, 279 ο ; εἰμί, εἶμι, 50; ἐστί 298 ἃ ; ἰοίην 
2990 ; ἴθι, εἰ, 297 ἃ, ἰόντων 818 ο, ἔστων, ἴτων, 800 6 ; ἦσθα, ἤεισθα, 297 Ὁ ; 
ἦν, jee’, 165 Ὁ ; (Πει)ῇμεν 118 4, 121d; ἔσεται Ep., A. 211, ἔσται nude 
(the only Att. form) 808 ἃ ; dialectic forms 50; φημί, cf. ἵστημι: jul, 
φής, 50; φαθί, ἔφησθα, 297 b, ἃ ; (kéewar) κεῖμαι, cf. τίθεμαι: κέωμαι, κε- 
οίμην, 315 ο, 772 σ. Hdt. has the uncontracted κέεται, ἐκέετο, κέεσθαι, &c. 


es 


orms marked with the sign ; may be enclitic. 


62. PURE VERBS. —-MI FORM. δ. 45, 


VERBS IN -μι: u. φημί fari, to say (85. φᾶ:). 


Pres. Ind. Subj. Opt. Τὴν. Inf. - -ἿΜΡΈ, 
S.1 φημί! nui φῶ φαίην φάναι ἔφην, ἦν 


2 φῆς, dns φῆς φαίης φᾶθί; or φάθι ἔφης, ἔφησθα 
ὃ φησί" φῇ φαίη, φάτω Part. én, ἢ 
P.1 paper] φῶμεν Xe. r.in Att. ἔφᾶἄμεν 
2 φατέ] φῆτε φάτε φᾶς ἔφατε 
3 φασί": φῶσι! φάτωσαν, φάντων ἔφασαν 


Fut. φήσω, Aor. ἔφησα. Min. and Pass., little used in Att.: Pres. 
Inf. φάσθαι, Pt. papevos - Impf. ἐφάμην - Perf. Imv. πεφάσθω-: Aor.» 
P. ἐφἄθην - Verb. φᾶτός, φατέος. --- See 45 τ, t, 50. 

46. E. PRETERITIVES. 


"» é = 
a. οἶδα novi, I know (8. ᾽ἴδ-, εἰδ-, eide-). 


2 Perr. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imy. 2 Puiu. 
8.1 οἶδα εἰδῶ εἰδείην ἤδειν, ἤδη 
2 οἶδας, οἶσθα εἰδῇς εἰδείης ἴσθι ἤδεις, ἤδης, 
ἤδεισθα, ἤδησθα 
8 οἶδε" εἰδῇ εἰδείη, ἴστω noe, ἤδη 
Ῥ.1 οοἴδᾶμεν, ἴσμεν εἰδῶμεν = Xe. ἤδειμεν, ἦσμεν 
2 οἴδατε, ἴστε εἰδῆτε ἴστε ᾿ἤδειτε, ἦστε 
8. οἴδασι', ἴσᾶσιι εἰδῶσι' ἴστωσαν ἤδεσαν, ἧσαν 


Inf. εἴδέναι! Part. εἰδώς! Fut. εἴσομαι " less Att. Fut. εἰδήσω and Aor. 
εἴδησα " Verb. ioréos. — See ὁράω 50. 


b. δέδοικα or δέδια timeo, I am afraid (s. δῖ-, See-). 


2 Perr. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imy. Inf. 2 PLup. 
5.1 δέδια δεδίω δεδιείην δεδιέναι! ἐδεδίειν 
2 δέδιας Sedins δεδιείηῆς δέδζθι Part. ἐδεδίεις ἡ 
8. δέδιε! δεδίῆ, δεδιείη, δεδίτω δεδιώς! ἐδεδίει 
Ῥ,1 δέδιμεν Xe. &e. ἐδέδιμεν 
2 δέδιτε δέδιτε ; ἐδέδιτε 
8. δεδίασι: δεδίτωσαν ἐδέδισαν 


1 Perf. δέδοικα, 1 Plup. ἐδεδοίκειν, Fut. δείσομαι Ep. chiefly, δείσω 
late, Aor. ἔδεισα. ---- See δείδω 50. 


§ 46. 6. PRETERITIVES 268, 317s: οἶδα, δέδοικα, ἕστηκα, 320b; 
(oid-c0a nude, 151) οἶσθα, ἤδεισθα, 297 Ὁ ; (ἴδμεν O. 32, § 148) toner, 
(7δ-μενὴ ἤσμεν, δέδιμεν, ἕσταμεν, 820 a; δεδίασι 156a; εἰδῶ, ἑστῶ, εἰδείην 
(so δεδιείην ? as fr. base δεδιε-, Pl. Pheedr. 861 4), ἑσταίην, (i5-9), ἴσθι, 
ἑστάναι, 320c; ἑστώς 320d; ἤδειν, ἤδη, 278d, 21c; ἑστήκειν 280 a, 
Att. also εἱστήκειν 279 c ; ἦμαι κάθημαι (κατά, Fuar) 280 a, 161 b (having 
forms from both ᾿ἑ- and €-, or see 307 6) ; cf. Lat. séde-o, and see 141 ; 
(ἡδ-ται) ἧσται, ἧστο, 147 ; καθῶμαι, καθοίμην, 317 ὁ ; ἥμενος 780 c; ἐκάθησο, 
καθῆσο, 282 Ὁ, 783 a, 771 α. --- Ο. E. τέθνηκα am dead, β΄βηκα stand, μέ- 
μονα am eager, ἄνωγα command, 8520 6, f. 


FORMS OF THE STEM. 


§ 47. PRETERITIVES. 63 
6. ἣμαι and κάθημαι sedeo, I sit (s. €é-, €5-). 
PERFECT MIDDLE. 
Indicative. Subj. Opt. Imperative. 
S.1 fa κάθημαι καθῶμαι καθοίμην 
2 σαι κάθησαι καθῆ καθοῖο ἧσο κάθησο 
8 ἧσται κάθηται καθῆται καθοῖτο ἥσθω καθήσθω, 
Bel ἥμεθα καθήμεθα καθώμεθα καθοίμεθα Xe. 
2 tobe κάθησθε καθῆσθε καθοῖσθε ἧσθε 
8 ἧνται κάθηνται καθῶνται καθοῖντο ἥσθωσαν, ἥσθων 
Infin. ἧσθαι καθῆσθαι Part. ἥμενος καθήμενος 
PLUPERFECT MIDDLE. 
8. 1 ἥμην ἐκαθήμην, καθήμην Ῥ.1 ἥμεθα ἐκαθήμεθα, καθήμεθα 
2 ἧσο ἐκάθησο, καθῆσο 2 ἧσθε ἐκάθησθε, καθῆσθε 
3 ἧστο ἐκάθητο, καθῆστο, 8 ἧντο ἐκάθηντο, καθῆντο 


καθῆτο 


Fut. Pf. καθήσομαι late. — See ἵζω 50. 


ἃ. ἕστηκα sto, I stand (45 f). 
First AND SECOND PERFECT. 


Indicative. Subjunctive. Opt. Imv. Infin. 
S. 1 ἕστηκα ἑστήκω ἑστῶ ἑσταίην ἑστηκέναιϊ 1. 
2 ἕστηκας = * ἑστήκης * ἑσταίης ἔστἄθι ἑστάναι! 
3 ἕστηκε, ἢ ἑστήκη, ἢ ἑσταίη,γ ἑστάτωὼ: Part. 
P.l ἄτο. €oripe Xe. ἑστῶμεν Xe. ἑστηκώς! 
2 ἕστατε * ἕστατε. ἑστώς! 261 
3 ἑστᾶσι" ἑστῶσι! ἑστάτωσαν, ἑστάντων. 
Ἵ PLUPERFECT. 2 PLUPERFECT. 
3. 1 ἑστήκειν, εἱστήκεν PP. ἑστήκειμεν S. * P. éordpev 
2 ἑστήκεις, εἱστήκεις ἑστήκειτε * ἕστατε 
8. ἑστήκει, εἱστήκει ἑστήκεσαν, XC. as ἕστασαν 
47. 1x. RELATION OF THE TENSES AND FORMS OF THE STEM. 
1. DomAINn oF THE OLp STEM: λᾶθ- τῦγ- δᾶκ- 
Second Aorist System : ἔλᾶθον : ἔδἄᾶκον 
Second Compound System : ἐζύγην ἐδάκην 
2. DoMAIN oF THE MrppLE STEM: ληθ- fevy- - ϑηκ- 
Perfect Passive System : λέλησμαι ἔζευγμαι δέδηγμαι 
First Compound System : ἐλήσθην ἐζεύχθην ἐδήχθην 
Second Perfect System : λέληθα 
First Perfect System : ἔξευχα δέδηχα 
First Aorist System : ἔλησα ἔζευξα ἔδηξα 
Future System : λήσω ξεύξω δήξομαι 
8. Domain or THE NEw SteM:-  Φλανθᾶν- {ζευγνὕ- δακν- 
_ Present System : λανθἄνω ζεύγνῦμι.. δάκνω 


§ 48, 


TABLES OF CONJUGATION. 


64 


109.039\9 “1n9.099A0P . 19.037 TO] “1709-029 
‘mpolidian .rogol “Ἰο6 
‘"mpgonpdo .rng.onp “Ἢ 
"g.0930X . ΥῸ0.099 ἼΙΟ] “9.00 “ΤΌ. ΟϑὉ “ΜΙ 
“4Ὁρ.9951 ‘anpopoltn . ΛΌΡ.0 “ἼΟ( ‘Algo 5 Ἥ 
‘oLaomans . 010M ‘oLAmo "Ἢ foLAm Δ ΛΟῸ 
“07.170 . LAM ‘Lam ‘dy ‘p.Lae “LAoD 
Ἵ.1π0}} "Ὁ..Ὁ3.] (0.L09\A0G)9 . 04707 ΟΊ] foLAo 
*"ILD2ANQ . OLD? ΑἸ ΜΌΝ ΠΟ] foLan “ὙὈΨΛΌ 
"o1p2 “Ὁ ΌΞΘΝΗ . ΟΨῸ ‘“YLD “UOT ὍΛ “104 6 
“ὌροϑηοὉ “ngoanohy . goa “y00g “ὭΘΡΗ Τ 
“TVunTd 


139d “nao . ro.‘ ἍΤ “nthe “ols 
"οϑρο nagop“n2ga7! . 09 ‘71030 | £037 “11039 
‘on.002 “nly s)9g “mlkangn ovo dy ‘0.0 “0.0 
‘nd ‘3p iL9 ΚΣ . Ὁ ὍἼΟΩ 
"ODL0}.L9 ‘003999 ‘oopndda . op ‘uoy Ὁ 
‘019.0 ‘orada . 093 “AY 
‘aaspdd ‘nayu2 . Ὁ ὯΟΩ F ἼΟΙ 
‘oaSnd “Οϑγ.Μ8 ‘oaaaha . 03 ἼΟ] ‘no 
ὙΟΡΌΧΛΑΌΝ “poskop “ἸῸ09).ν . Ὁ.Ο9 ΗΠ ἢ 
"αἰυ] “γοίιργ.ι ‘many . νοῦ, long ‘v2 0} “ἃ Κα 
-9vovolanl ‘alrioxoayaL . αἰνή ον. "1917 
‘annijoaak, Sanrio ‘anrinang . ΛΌΤΙ πος ‘ald 
‘mnoayo ‘mrloganp . vorlop ‘uoy “rorln0 


‘vorlao33 . vorlas.0 ‘vnrlao.o ἼἸΟΩ “noo 
ronaagod . vorlaa-10(7 ἡ ἼΟ] “ΠΟ “vorlo? Τ 
“MVINDNIS 
"MAILODTLAQ 


-mliniyay “50.10) 090) .So1m ‘dy ἴδοι “4 
so] ‘pomp1zi0a ‘wommgls ‘nomodo 
. v.00) “v.0mm ‘v.0m0 ‘dy “v.om “n.onop 
“OILY "9.010X2. ὍΘ ΘΠ “Ὁ ΟἽΟἼΟΗ 0.000 
“nomya'sin zd . 0.010 “5ΥῸ "1057 “Ὁ.ΟὉ ‘Sp 
‘amconivonl ‘amgdo . Aco ‘amo “diy fam ‘amp 
“ae3d3 ‘amzanp (an7XIKAD « Am ἼΟ] Am 
«9. ‘mavngsg . ali ‘ar "OWT 29 “OCT “1043 
-alinpag{ ‘amhag ‘agaug . Ae “oc ‘A199 
-ἰὑΧῸΣ «γραϑγγμ 19. road ‘dq £019? “A2D 
maa] *alAro ‘aldo . AL ΟΠ 
‘anpitay ‘anpdo . any ‘diy ‘av ‘avn 
04] —*19997DL (3399) « - A193 “LOT A> 
-9Υ|93Ὁ ΟΣ . vas ‘aaa 904 
‘ada ‘audi ‘akdaa . αἰ, ΟΣ ἢ 10 
“0371 ‘aandnk ‘aaxoog . Ad “IOcy “4.3 
-29 ‘raanlgXr . voaad ‘omy αὶ diy 
‘aap ‘aanlugidy . asd “dy Ὁ ‘107 
"aly tay ‘apps ‘aigongan .a “jou ‘a +fuy 
"aD01D09XO “2000119 . ADO ὝΟΤΥ (49 ‘A 
᾿αϑρόϑαίν ‘aoaha 4431 ‘anl02 . A ὍΤΟ ‘Avo 
‘ankdoa ‘anulid,a ‘anymahz . an ‘xoTy “on 
"ΑἹΡΥΌΝΊΟΥΘΗ Yon . 1.070 ‘[OT “1.0% 
1.003103 00310) . 1.00) “UOT “0D 
"21009491 1LAN3\IP . LAKI"1O(T 
*2.00300N') 1.903101 . 1.003 ‘UOT 1.000 1.0209 
1:007] *1LaDNIA VLAYAIIL . LAD ἼΟΩ 
-mdg‘momoo” .1.099 ‘1.00 ‘diy ‘1.0 on0n 
7.010091970 §21010LuAdN . 1.010 ἼΟΠΝ ‘1.020 
*2Lamaan 1100X2 “Land .1LA *1O(T “OA 9 


‘9490. 0ϑγ94 ‘919979 . 313 “dy Sah ‘qny ὦ 
‘amnion ‘asrlodiahy . aarlo “diy ‘astm “qngy 
‘san, ‘savlnyj0gag ‘sar/odga . 5317 ‘10g ‘aad Τ 
“IVaNTd 

‘moliag Gologon “οἰ. κοὐ “ἀπ -qny 
“enh ““Ωρλορ “1ἰιρη.ν . 1% “IOC “10 9 
‘sbpa ‘sbpriap ‘sbpdo . sdy “Ἢ 
‘sly ‘slinlyor ‘sida ‘sido . SL ος ‘Sd “590 
*s99.0)d0.0 ‘sahay ‘Sakyan'p . 59 ‘10 ‘S13 
"09.013X3 ‘ng o10\'p¢) “ὩὨροίι.ι9 - 09-0 PIO ‘SZ 
‘omak “730 " ὍΝ fom Ὁ)» “dy 
"39 ‘m2anp ‘m3gay . m3 ἼΟ] ‘co 
ὝΠΟ. “rrlengy “Moya? . vdeo “dy Ὁ -gngy 
‘ugagusng ‘leh .u nV PIO 
ρϑμίιρ9.3 “vagh . > ‘uoy ‘aw “dni g 
-0.0— ‘AON ΟΌ 36.1.0. AONOVO *104] 
‘aoxo] “ὈΞΌρΦΞ “ὈΞΊΥΙΟΣ . DZ ἼΟ( “Ὦ.9 "LOW 
-pAle . And Ο( Ὁ ΠΟ] ‘A0> “UOT ‘Am ‘Aon 
‘ana| “ng ‘vl “0397132 . Ὃ “UOT 
"ΛΟ. οϑοϑῳ ‘aox0aX2 . Aow.o "1921 ‘A ἼΘΙ] 
“m3d3 ‘maanp ‘mayahhp . m2 ΟἹ] ὦ 
ΟΞΥΠΟΝ ΦὩΒΌΧΊΟ. 3 “107 ‘oo 
‘opras ‘pao ‘pod «ὦ ‘10g ὦ Ἅ 1 
‘maar Sojaau ‘enganiaa Ο)9 “ΔΉ Ὁ S03 
‘mmaroagrl ‘modo . oo ‘mo “diy 
“m3dX ‘mano ‘mado . 3 ἼΟ] Ὁ ‘on 
ὝΨΗ mur “nllide . ad plo Ὁ “Id ‘put Έ 
'“ΥΊΩΘΝΙΒ 
"TALLOULTAG 


(S$ 176) Savy, IVuGNay Ἔ 


‘SHUO, OILOWIVIG Σ ‘SP 


§ 47, 


DIALECTIC FORMS. 


65 


, 
b. REFERRED TO Av@ AS A MODEL. 


ACTIVE. 


Pres. Ind. 
S. 2 Ades, λύης D. 326 a 
λύεισθα 0. 297 Ὁ 
8 λύησι ὃ EB. 328 Ὁ 
hin D. 130¢ 
P.1 λύομες D. 828 a 
3 λύοντι Ὁ. 328 a 
λύοισι κι. 328 
Pres. Sub. 
S. 1 λύωμι E. 328 ἢ 
ὦ λύῃσθα E. 297 Ὁ 
8 λύῃσι E., -τι D. 828 Ὁ 
P. 1 λύομεν E. 826 ἃ 
λύωμες D. 828 a 
λύετε π. 826 ἃ 
λύωντι D. 328 a 
Pres. Opt. 
λύοισθα E. 297 Ὁ 
λύοισαν AL. 880 a 
Pres. Inf. 
dev, λύην D. 826 a 
λυέμεν E. D. 888 ἃ 
λυέμεναι E. 8388 ἃ 
Pres. Part. 

F. λύοισα κι. 131 ἃ 
λύωα LAC. 334 
Imperfect. 

S.1 λῦον o. 284a 
λύεσκον IT. 332 
P. 3 ἐλύοσαν AL. 330 a 
D.2 ἐλυέτην A. 299 ἃ 
3 [ἐϊλύετον E. 299 ἃ 
ἐλυέταν Ὁ. 828 a 
Fut. Ind. 
λυσῶ, -εἴς, -e?, χα. Ὁ. 825 Ὁ 
1 Aor. Ind. 
S. 1 Adoa 0. 2848 
λύσασκον IT. 3382 


8. 2 
P.3 


CS SS 


[ἔ]λῦσον E. 327 a 
1 Aor. Part. 
λύσαις,-αισα BH. 151 ἃ 
Perf. Ind. 

S. 1 λελύκω,-ης Ὁ. 326b 
P. 3 λελύκαντι D. 828 a 
λελύκασι P. 828 C ᾿ 

λέλυκαν AL. 890 8 


Perf. Inf. 
λελύκειν, -ην ἢ. κι. 826 Ὁ 
Perf. Part. 

λελύκων Ὁ. B. 8526 Ὁ 
Plup. Ind. 
S. 1 λελύκεα!τ.,-η 0.291 ¢ 
ἐλέλυκον E. 326 Ὁ 
 λελύκεας I., -ἢς Ο. 


2916 [163 b 
3 λελύκεε(ν I., -εἰ(ν P. 
2 Aor. Ind. 


(λέλιπον, -ες, -€ E. 284 e 
P. 3 ἔλιπαν AL. 327 ἢ 
2 Aor. Inf. 
Auréew τ. 825 4 
λιπῆν D. 326 a) 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
Pres. Ind. 
S. 2 λύεαι I. 823 a 
λύεσαι HEL. 331 ¢ 
P. 1 λυόμεσθα P. 299 ἃ 
Pres. Sub. 
S. 2 λύηαι 1. 331 a 
Aveat E. 826 
8 λύεται E. 326d 
P. 1 λυόμεσθα E. 299 ἃ 


Pres. Opt. 
P. 3 Avolaro I. 329 a 


Pres, Imy. 
S. 2 Aveol., λύευ 1.9. 929 


Imperfect. 

S. 1 λυόμην o. 284 a 
ἐλυόμᾶν D. 328 a 
λυεσκόμην IT. 332 

2 [é]\WeoL.,-ev 1.D.323 
D.3 [ἐϊλύεσθον E. 299 ἃ 
ἐλυέσθαν D. 828 ἃ 
Fut. Μ. Ind. 
Avoeduat,-H, &c., τ. 825 Ὁ 
S. 2 λύσεαι 1. 828 a 
Aor, M. Ind. 
S. 1 λυσάμην ο. 2844 
τς ἐλυσάμᾶν D. 828 a 
λυσασκόμην IT. 882 
2 [ἐϊλύσαο τ. 322 " 
ἐλύσᾷ D. 822 6 


Aor. Μ. Opt. 
P. 3 λυσαίατο τ. 829 a 
Perf. Ind. 
S. 2 λέλυαι E. 331 Ὁ 
P. 3 λελύαται I. 83292 
Perf. Opt. 
P.3 λελῦντο E. 8176 
Pluperfect. 
P. 3 [é]AeAvaro 1. 829 a 
: Aor. P. Ind. 
P. 3 ἔλυθεν P. 880 Ὁ 
Aor. P. Sub. 
S. 1 λυθέω 1., -elw E. 
323.a,c [8286 
2 λυθείῃς or -Hys E. 
3 λυθείῃ or -ἠῃ E.323¢ 
P. 1 λυθέωμεν I. 323 a 
2 λυθείετε E. 323.6 
8 λυθέωσι I. 828 a 
Aor. P. Inf. 


λύθην 1... -ἣμεν Ὁ. 888 Ὁ 
λυθήμεναι π. 888 Ὁ 


2 Aor. M. 
[ἐϊλύμην, -co E. 8158 


c. Various Forms or Contract VERBS (321 s). 


Uncontracted. Contracted. Variously Protracted. 
ὁρἄω, ὁρέω 1. ὁρῶ ὁρόω, μενοινώω, Pt. ὁρόων A. 350 
ὁράει, ὁράῃ ὁρᾷ ὁρᾶᾳ, μενοινάᾳ, Inf. ἀντιᾶαν N. 215 
ὁράοιμι ὁρῷμι ὁρόῳμι, ἡβώοιμι, Mid. 2 αἰτιόφο v. 135 
ὁράουσα ὁρῶσα ὁρόωσα, ναιετάωσα, μαιμώωσα 0. 542 
ὁράοντες,-ἔοντες I. ὁρῶντες ὁρόωντες, ὁρέωντες 1., ἡβώοντες x. 6 
ὁράεσθαι ὁρᾶσθαι ὁἜὁρᾶασθαι σ. 4, μνάασθαι a. 39 
ψεικέω νεικῶ νεικείω, Inf. πλείειν ο. 84, Pt. νεικείων σ. 9 
γεικέῃ νεικῇ νεικείῃ ρ. 189, νεικείῃσι A. 579, θείῃ Z. 507 
ἱδρόοντα ἱδροῦντα ἱδρώοντα, ὑπνώοντας, Fem. ἱδρώουσα 
ἀρόουσι ἀροῦσι ἀρόωσι, Opt. δηϊόωεν, Mid. δηϊόωντο 


66 


* CONJUGATION. — 


g49. 


49. x1. Criasses anp Notation oF STEms. 


I. PRIME STEMS (a; 340). 


Roots, (a!) giving rise, and (a?) not | Derived Stems, (63) giving rise, and 


giving rise to Modified Stems. 


II. MODIFIED STEMS, 


b. By Precession: Ὁ}. Of & to ε. 
b?. Of € oro tor. 
b®. Of ἃ to a, &c. 
cl. By Contraction. 
οὗ, By Syncope in the Theme. 
oaks ‘¢ in the 2 Aorist. 
c*, * {Ἐξ in Other Tenses. 
οὔ, By Metathesis in the Theme. 
ye es in the 2 Aorist. 


TI. MODIFIED STEMS. 


A. By LENGTHENING A SHORT 
VOWEL. 
δ' To the cognate Long Vowel. 
. To a Diphthong. 


B: By Apprtnc SYLLABLES OR 
LETTERS. 


‘I. BY ANNEXING OR INSERTING 
CONSONANTS. 

i,j, 1. The Conson. I ; uniting with, 
i, A Palatal Mute 
i?, A Lingual Mute 
i3, A Labial Mute 
ji. A Lingual Mute 
j*. A Palatal Mute 

* 3% A Double Palatal 
jt. A Labial Mute 
l. 2X to form AA. 

Ζ. %: zi. Alone. 

22. With a Vowel. 
k. ox: k4. Alone. 

κ᾿, With a Vowel. 

k?, With preceding Conso- 
nant dropped. 

Κι, With Transposition. 

k®. With the « dropped. 

k®, With preceding Vowel 
lengthened. 

k’. With Precess. of a Vowel. 

n. v: nl, y annexed. 


to form oo, 
or TT. 


to form {. 


(a*) not giving rise to Mod. St. 


1. EUPHONIC (341s). 


οἵ, By Metathesis in Other Tenses. 
c&. By Antithesis. 

di, To avoid Double Aspiration. 

d?, From Use of both Sm. & R. Forms. 
el. By dropping a Consonant. 

e?, By adding a Consonant. 

f.1 By dropping the Digamma. 

f?. By changing the Digamma. 

f%. By changing or dropping σ΄. 


2, EMPHATIC (346s). 


n*, With preceding V. lengthened. 
n®, ν inserted. 
n*, ἅν annexed. 
n>, With 0 inserted. 
n®, With &y lengthened. 
ΠΤ, vv annexed. 
n®, Becoming vvv after a short V. 
n®, A Lingual or Liquid dropped. 
n°, ve annexed. 
t. τι tt. Alone. 
+7. With a Vowel. 
q. 8: qi. Alone. 
q?. With a Vowel. 
q®. With preceding Vowel. 
lengthened. 
o. Other Consonants: οἱ. Alone. 
o*, With a Vowel. 
II. BY ANNEXING VOWELS. 
u. By annexing a. 
u?. With change of an € to w. 


v. By annexing e. 
v2. With change of an ε to o. 


| w. By annexing other Vowels. 


III. BY PREFIXING SYLLABLES OR 
LETTERS. 
Ῥ. Various Preformatives. 
r. Reduplication: rl. Proper. 
r, Attic. 
r°, Improper. 


IV. ADOPTED STEMS (x; 358). 


§ 50. ALPHABETIC ‘LIST. 67 
- $50. xm. CataLocuse or VERBS. 
Notes. a. The following Catalogue contains the principal IRREGULAR 


Vers, and some verbs which are not usually so termed ; while many 
COGNATES are added (338d). Whatever is enclosed in brackets will be 
understood to be DIALECTIC; and to occur in the Epic (commonly in 
Homer), unless specially ascribed to another dialect or another author. 
The dialects are commonly denoted by initials, as in ὃ 27; and the sign + 
marks the rare occurrence of a word beyond the range noted (85 ο, ἃ). 
Some of the less familiar forms are referred to passages where they occur. 

b. The REGULAR TENSE-SYSTEMS in use, represented by their leadin 
forms, are arranged in the same order as in ὃ 37; while the Future an 
Perfect usually cited in parsing are printed in full-face type, and the sxc- 
OND TENSES are introduced by name. The abbreviations chiefly used in 
naming the tenses are ‘‘pr., ipf., f., ao. (la., 2a.), pf., plp., and 3f.” 
The voices and modes are denoted by italics: as, 4., a., M., m., P., p.; 
ind., sub., opt., imv., inf., pt. The persons and numbers are marked 
thus: 1s., 1 p., 1d., 2s., &. The abbreviation m. (J/.), p. (P.), ao., 
or f., annexed to a form, shows that the corresponding middle, passive, 
aorist, or futwre is also formed after the same analogy ; and the voices be- 
longing to the aorist system are then indicated, if they are not the same 
with those of the future system. 

c. Srems are marked by hyphens affixed ; and the small letters placed 


᾿ immediately after these, or after the themes, denote varieties of stems 


according to the notation in § 49 and 340-358. A small © prefixed toa 
word marks it as having been found only in composition : as, © qvexa, 
found in ἐπ-ήνεκα. The abbreviations l., r., po., ep., ct., and ». 1., stand 
for late, rare, poetic, conpounded, contracted, and various reading. Less 


important forms or marks are sometimes omitted. See § 51. 


A. 


Pad- hurt, mislead ; m. 85. ἀᾶται 
T. 91; ao. daca, ct. doa, m.; ἀάσθην. 
Aug. ‘a- 279 f.] 

[ἀβροτάξομεν, see ἁμαρτάνω. 

ἀγάλλω (1, ἀγαλ-) adorn, M. glory; 
ἀγαλῶ, ἤγηλα- ἠγάλθην 1. ' 

ἄγαμαι αὐηυΐγο; [ἀγάσομαι, 6.181, ] 
80. ; usu., as mid., ἠγάσθην, f. 1. Cog. 
ἀγάζω po., [ἀγάομαι, ἀγαίομαι,}] ad- 
mire, envy, &c. 

ἀγγέλλω (1, ἀγγελ-), annownce; see 
40. : 

ἀγείρω (h, ἀγερ-) collect ; [ἀγεροῦ- 
μαι Or. 510.,] ἤγειρα [m., 2 ἃ. ἀγερό- 
μην, pt. sync. ἀγρόμενος] ; ἀγήγερκα 
1, -μαι 1]. [plp. 3 p. ἀγηγέρατο Δ. 211, 
ἠγέρθην, A. 57. Cog. ἀγέρομαι, ἦἠγε- 
ρέθομαι, v. L. ἠγερέομαι.] 

ἄγνυμι (n’, Fay-, dy-f) break, usu. 
ep. w. κατά - “dw, ata 279 b[Héa, Ψ. 
392]; 2pf. “ἐᾶγα [ἔηγα 1.7 ambroken, 
σξαγμαι 1., 2 ἃ. ἐάγην (Ep. ἃ, or ἃ 2]. 
It has some forms as if from éay-: 


ao. pt.© edéas Lys.100.5, f. ° ἐάξει Mat. 
12.20. [Δο.ορέ.(κατξαξαις, κα Έαξαις, 
136, 142) καυάξαις Hes. Op. 664.] 
ἄγω ago, lead, bring; ἄξω, m. 
(sometimes as pass.), Réar., 2 ἃ. ἤγα- 


‘you m.284¢; i xa, later ἀγήοχα 312d, 


ἦγμαι, ἤχθην ἵ, Cog. ἡγέομαι, [ἀγινέω.] 

[ἀδε- be sated ; see ἄω.] 

ἄϑω sing; ropa, -cw τ., Fea: 
ἦσμαι, ἤσθην : ct. fr. po. & τ. delSa,. 
ἀείσω M., Hea. 

delpw ἃ ἀερτάζω raise ; see αὔρω. 

ἀέξω increase ; see αὔξω. 

[ἄημι & dw (ἀ-, de- v) breathe, blow, 
P. ἄημαι (314 Ὁ ; and ἢ in some other 
forms for the ἘΠ ΑΘ Σ τῇ ao. ἄεσα, ct. 
doa, breathed in sleep, slept. Cog. ἀΐω, 
ἀΐσθω.] ᾿ ᾿ 

αἰδέομαι v, po.aldouar,respect ; at8é- 
Topo. ao.; ἤδεσμαι, ἠδέσθην f. [Pr. 
imv. αἰδεῖο 323 e. | 

αἰνέω praise, usu. cp. w. ἐπί, &c.; 
αἰνέσω “mn [-jow], a0.; Sajvexa, © ἤνη- 
μαι 310d, ἠνέθην σῇ, [Cog. αἴψημι, 
αἰνίζω, -ομαι.}. Pe τον : 


68 


3, 
αἴνυμαι 


[atvupar take, see αἴρω. 
aipéw take, M. choose; αἱρήσω m., 
a0. a.1.,m.7T.3 ἥρηκα, -μαι [dpelonen 
-μαι, I.], 3f. ῃρήσομαι τ., ῃρέθην f. 
310 d.: (FaA- χ, ad-f, ἐλ- Ὁ, ἁλο- w, 
ἁλισκ- ΚΤ) 2a, εἷλον m. 279 ¢, 6, late 
f. & ao. ἑλῶ m., εἷλα m.: as pass., 
ἁλίσκομαι be taken, captured; ἁλώ- 
copat, 2a. ἑάλων & ἥλων ((λῶ, -οίην, 
-ὥναι, -ovs) ; ἑᾶάλωκα & ἥλωκα. 
αἴρω (h, ἀερ-, syne. ἀρ-) raise, M. 
win; ᾿ἄρῶ m., ἦρα m. (dpw, ᾿άραιμι, 
ἄρον, &c.), 2a. ἠρόμην (‘apwuat, &c.) 
po.; ἦρκα, -μαι, -Onvf. Po. ἃ 1. delpw 
m. [ἀέῤῥω m. 171 ἃ] ; ᾿αρῶ (ct. fr. 
ἀερῶ) m., ἤειρα m.; ἤερμαι | plp. ἄωρτο 
312d], ἠέρθην. Οὐορ. “ἄρνυμαι, [αἴνυ- 
μαι π᾿, ἠερέθομαι, ἀερτάζω. 
αἰσθάνομαι (ἢ 5, αἰσθ-), αἴσθομαιτ., 
perceive; αἰσθήσομαι 8511 8, 2a. ἠσθό- 
μην - ἤσθημαι, ἠσθήθην & -άνθην ἴ. 1. 
[ἀἰσϑω & ἀΐω breathe ; see ἄημι. 
ἀΐσσω 11, doowc!, rush,po.+, IL; 
ἀΐξω, ἄξω, ao. a. [m. τ.; ἠΐχθην. 
᾿αἴω audio, hear, po. ο7.1.; ipf.*ciov 
279 f, ἤϊον 1., [ἐπ-ηΐσα 1.] 

[ἀκ- or ἀχ- acuo, sharpen, pf. pt. 
ἀκαχμένος sharpened, 148 Ὁ, &. 12.] 

[ἀκαχίζω (z, dx-, dxax- 1?) afflict, 
M. sorrow; ἀκαχήσω 311 ο, ao. r., 
usu. 2a. ἤκαχον m. 284 f.; ἀκάχημαι 
pret. (3 p. ἀκηχέδαται, plp. ἀκαχήατο 
or -elaro M. 179, ὃ 329 a, pt. ἀκαχή- 
μενος 2. 550, or ἀκηχέμενος, Εἰ. 364). 
Cog. ἄχομαι, ἄχνυμαι, be grieved; Pt. 
ἀχέων, ἀχεύων, sorrowing. 

ἀκούω (ἢ, ἀκο-) hear ; ἀκούσομαι, 
-owl., ἤκουσα - [ἄκουκα D.,| 2 pf. ἀκή- 
Koa, 2 plp. ἠκηκόειν 281d, ἤκουσμαι:]., 
-σθηνῖ. Cog. ἀκροάομαι, [dxovd gw. | 

[ἀλάλκω ward off; see ἀλέξω.] 

dhdopat wander, po. + [ἀλόω 522 6]; 
[° ἀλήσομαι or -ησάμην, Hes. Se. 409 ; 
ἀλάλημαι - pret. 284 4,] ἠλήθην. Po. 
cog. ἀλητεύω, ἀλαίνω, [ἠλαίνω, ἠλά- 
KW, ἠλασκάζω.] 

- ἀλδαίνω (n®, ἀλδ-) alo, nowrish, 
po.; 1. ἤλδηνα or -ησα, [2 ἃ. ἤλδανον. 
Θορ. ἀλδήσκω alesco, grow. } 
ἀλείφω (h, ἀλιφ-) anoint, M.; ἀλεί- 
wo m., a0.; “ἀάλήλιφα or -ειἰφα, ἀλή- 
Aquat οΥ-ειμμαι Th. 4. 68, ἠλείφθην ἴ., 
2a. ἠλίφην τ. 

ἀλέξωτ. (k 5, ἀλεκ-, dAK-c®) Χἀλέκω ?, 
ward off, M. defend one’s self, requite ; 


TABLES. 


» 
ἀμπνυ-᾿ § 50. 
[ἀλεξήσω, “ ἀλέξω τ.,] m., ao., [2 ἃ. 
ἄλαλκον 284 e,] 2 a. inf. ἀλκαθεῖν po. 
r. 853a. [Cog. 1. ἀλάλκω, -κήσω.] 

ἀλεύω ([2, ἀλεξ-, ἀλε- [3) avert, 
po. [Π΄ ἀλεύομαι & ἀλέομαι shun]; 
ἀλεύσω, a0. α., m. τ. [ἠλεύαμην & 
-εάμην 806 84]. Pr. imv. ἄλευ, by 
apocope for ἄλευε, Aisch. Pr. 568 v. 7. 
Po. cog. ἀλύσκω (Κ 8, ἀλυκ-), f. ἀλύξω 
M.,a0.; ἀλυσκάζω,[ἀλυσκἄνω, ἀλεείνω. 

ἀλέω grind; ἀλ(έσωγῶ τ. 806 Ὁ, 
ἤλεσα- ἀλήλεκαρο. τ., -εσμαι or -enat, 
ἠλέσθην]. Cog. ἀλήθωτ., [ἀλητρεύω.] 

[ἄλθομαι become healed, π. & 1.; 
“ ἀλθήσομαι, ao. 1.; °7APécOnr. Cog. 
ἀλθαίνω ἃ -loxw or -joKw, cure; f. 
ἀλθήσω 1.) 

ἀλίνδω roll ; see κυλίνδω, 

ἁλίσκομαι be captured ; see alpéw. 

[ἀλιταίνω & -τραίνω (n®, 0, ἀλιτ-) 
sin, E.+, Ma; ἀλίτησαγ., 2 a. ἤλιτον 
Mm. he pt. ἀλιτήμενος guilty. | 

ἀλλάσσω or -ττω (11, ἀλλαγ-) 

change, M. barter ; ἀλλάξω ηι., a0. ; 
σἤλλαχα, -αγμαι, -άχθην °f., usu. in 
Att. prose 2 a. ἠλλάγην f. , 

ἅλλομαι (1, ἀλ-) salio 141, leap ; 
ἁλοῦμαι, ἡλάμην, comm. (exc. in Ind.) 
2 ἃ. ἡλόμην [2 8. ἄλσο, 8.5. Gro, pl. 
ἄλμενος, 826 6, 167 c]. 

ἀλύσκω, -κάζω, & -κάνω, see ἀλεύω. 

ἀλύω (Ὁ) be excited, po.+. [Cog. 
ἀλύσσω, f. -Ew, ἀλυσθαίνω, ἀλυκτέω 
(ἀλαλύκτημαι pret., 2844), ἀλυκτά ζω, 
Ηαΐ. 9. 70.] - 

ἀλφάνω (n*, ἀλφ-) find, po.;[2 ἃ. 
ἦλφον, opt. 3p. ἄλφοιν for -οἱεν, 135, 
v. 383 v. 1.] 

ἁμαρτάνω (n*, duapr-) err, miss ; 
ἁμαρτήσομαι, -cw 1. +, ao. a. 1. +, 
2a. ἥμαρτον: ἡμάρτηκα, -μαι, -θην : 
[2 ἃ. (ἀμροτ- οὗ, b®, 167, ἀμβροτ- or 
aBpor- 146 Ὁ) ἤμβροτον. Cog. 1 ἃ. 
sub. 1 p. ἀβροτάξομεν 326 d, K. 65.] 

ἀμβλίσκω Κ΄ & © ἀμβλόω cause mis- 
carriage ; ἀμβλώσω 1., a0., 2a. © ἤμ- 
Brwv 1.; δἤμβλωκα, ὅ-μαι, -θην. 

[ἀμέρδω & ἀμείρω (ο, h, ἀμερ-), de- 
prive; ἀμέρσω, ao. a. +, m. 1.; 
ἠμέρθην +.] 

ἀμπλακίσκω (k?, ἀμπλακ-), miss, 
err, po.; 2 ἃ. ἤμπλακον, pt. ἀπλακών 
171, Eur. Ale. 241 ; ἠμπλάκημαι 311, 
Asch. Sup. 916. 


[ἀμπνυ- take breath ; see rvéw.] 


§ 50. ἀμὔνω 

ἀμύνω avert, defend (cf. munio), 
M. repel, requite ; apvve m., ἤμῦνα 
m., ἃ ἃ. ἠμύναθον 353 a. 

ἀμφιγνοέω doubt ; see γιγνώσκω. 

ἀμφισβητέω dispute ; see βαίνω. 

ἀναίνομαι (ἢ, ἀναν-) refuse; 80. 
ἠνηνάμην. : 

ἀν-αλίσκω & ἀν-αλόω (ddo-, Καὶ 
expend ; ἀναλώσω, m. 1., ἀνήλωσα ; 
ἀνήλωκα, -μαι, -Onvf. In the aug., 
a is often retained, esp. in the older 
Att.: ἀνάλωσα, ἀνάλωκα, Th. 7. 88, 
2.64; & in comp. w. κατά, the aug. 
is rarely on the prep. ἀνά : κατηνά- 
λωσα, Isoc. 201 b. See 279 f, 282 b. 
For the simple verb, see αἱρέω. 

ἁνδάνω (n*, Fad-, ἀδ- f) please, po. 
ἃ 1.; ipf. ἥνδανον, ἑάνδανον, & ἑήνδα- 
νον, 219 Ὁ, 6 ; ἁδήσω, 2 ἃ. ἕαδον Hdt. 
1. 151, εὔαδον 142, π. 28 ; ἅδηκα r., 
2 p. ἕάδα E. Cog. ἥδω q. τ. 

[ἀνεθ- grow, akin to ἀνθέω - 2 pf. 
σἤνοθα 312 b: ἀν-ἤνοθεν rises, p. 270; 
ἐπ-εν-ἤνοθε grows upon, β. 219.] 

ἀνοίγω & -olyvupe open ; see οὔγω. 

ἀνύω ἃ also Att. ἀνύτω t (acc. to 
some, Att. G-), accomplish, M.; ἀνύσω 
M.,80.; ἤνυκα, -σμαι, -cOnv f. [Nude 
pr. ἄνυται l.; ipf. ἤνυτο ε. 243, "avumes 
ἃ “dvuro Theoc.] Cog. ἄνω m., po. 

ἀνώγω command, po. & 1.; ἀνώξω, 
ao.; 2 pf. ἄνωγα pret. & unaugm. 
{nude 1 p. ἄνωγμεν 320, Hom. Ap. 
528], imv. ἄνωγε ἃ ἄνωχθι 320f. 
[Cog. dvwyéw H. 394 v. 1.] See 326 ο. 

ἀπαυράω, ἀπούρας, see ἐπαυρέω. 

[ἀπαφίσκω (k?, ἀπαφ-) deceive ; 
ἀπαφήσω 311, ao. r., 2a. #rapov+, 
m. See drrw. | 

ἀπεχϑάνομανι & ἀπέχθομαι, be hat- 
ed ; see ἔχθω. 

ἅπτω (t, ἀφ-, 147) fasten, kindle, 
M. touch ; &pwm., ao0.; Fupac, ἥφθην, 
°f. 1. [ἄμμαι & &POny, Hat. 1. 86, 19, 
ἑάφθην 279 b, N. 548. Cog. ἀφάω or 
ἁφάω ἃ ἀφάσσω, handle, τ. +, m.; 
f. ἀφήσω, ao. ἤφησα & ἤφασα : ἀπα- 
φίσκω α. v.] 

ἀράομαι pray, curse; dpacopar 
a0.; δἤραμαι, ὅ-θην]. [Pr. inf. a. 
ἀρήμεναι 333 6, x. 322. Cog.? pf. pt. 
ἀρημένος oppressed, Σ. 435, 

[ἀραρίσκω (k? τ΄, dp-) Πέ; ἦρσα 
m., 2a. ἤραρον + m. 2846 (nude 
pt. as adj. ἄρμενοΞ) ;] 2 pf. dpapa 


VERBS. 


Baive 69 
[dpnpa] pret. intrans. po. +, [ἀρήρε- 
μαι, ApOnv.| Cog. ἁρμόζω α. v., ἀρτύω 
& ἀρτύνω [ἀρτέομαι 1.1 prepare, and 
ἀρέσκω (Κ, dpe-) please, M.; ἀρέσω 
M., ἃο.; ἀρήρεκα l., ἠρέσθην. 
ἀριστάω dine, with regular forms, 
has in comedy 2 pf. nude 1 p. ἠρίστα- 
μεν Ar. Fr. 528, inf. ἠριστάναι, ὃ 320: 
and in imitation, Semvéw sup, has 
δεδείπναμεν, δεδειπνάναι Lb. 248. 

ἁρμόζω ἃ Att. ἁρμόττω (1, 13, 
ἁρμοδ-) adjust, M.; ἁρμόσω, ηι.1., ao. ; 
ἥρμοκα, -σμαι, -σθην f. See dpapicxw. 

ἄρνυμαι win; see αἴρω. 

ἀρόω aro, plough; ἀρόσω, ao. ; 
[ἀρήρομαι BE. 1.,] ἠρόώθην : [dpdwow 
324 c, dpdupevar 333 65.} 

ἁρπάζω 71" seize; ἁρπάσω and oft- 
ener ἁρπάσομαι [ἁρπάξω], ao.; ἥρ- 
Taka, -σμαι (-Ύμαι ].), -σθην ἴ, [-χθην, 
Hdt. 2. 90+ 1,28. ἡρπάγην.1. [Nude 
2 ἃ. pt. m. (ἁρπα-) ἁρπάμενος 1.] 

ἀρτύω, -ὕνω, -έομαι, see ἀραρίσκω. 

ἀρύω & ἀρύτω t, draw water, M.; 
ἀρύσομαι 1., ἤρυσα nr.; ἠρύθην or 
-ύσθην 307 e.— ἄρχω lead, see 41. 

drow rush ; see ἀΐσσω. 

αὔξω [αἔξω Ἑ. 1. -- & αὐξάνω (n4, 
ἀξεξ-, αὐξ-, ἀεξ-, £17) augeo, increase; 
see 41. Εὶ αὐξανῶ ἴῃ Lxx. Cog. αὐξέω]. 

αὔω shout, po.; ἀΐὔσω (Ὁ), ἤῦσα. 

ἀφάω ἃ ἀφάσσω handle; 566 ἅπτω. 
ἀχέων, ἀχεύων, ἄχνυμαι & ἄχομαι 
be grieved ; see ἀκαχίζω. 

ἄχθομαι be vexed ; dy Séropar 311d; 
ἤχθημαι 1., ἠχθέσθην f. 

[dw satiate ; ἤασω ηι., doa m.; pr. 
inf. ᾽ἄμεναι 333e". Cog. sub. 1 p. 
ἑῶμεν T. 402, ao. opt. 8 5. ᾿άδήσειεν 
a. 134, pf. pt. ᾿ἀδηκότες K. 399, as fr. 
éd- & ἀδέ- become sated; ἀσάομαι be 
nauseated, τ. Ὁ. +.] —See ἄημι. 


B. 


βαίνω (n°, Ba-) vado, go ; βήσομαι 
po. exc. in comp., [ἐβησάμην, usu. 
-σόμην 327 a, |] 2a. ἔβην 45h, 6, 5822 ὁ 
(tmv. βῆθι, °Ba, 297 c,d); βέβηκα 
(2 pf. id. 3 p. βεβάᾶσι B. 134, ct. 
βεβᾶσι Eur. Tro. 835, § 156, sub. éu- 
βεβῶσι Pl. Pheedr. 252 e, inf. βεβάναι 
Eur. Heracl. 610, pt. βεβάως, Hes. Se. 
307, ct. BeBds, Pl. Tim. 68 ο, 2 plp. 
3 p. βέβασαν Ῥ. 286, ὃ 320 e), 5 βέβα- 


70 βαίνω 
μαι or -ασμαιτ., δέβάθην r., ὃ -ἄσθην 
_or -άνθην]. As trans., cause to go, f. 
Οβήσω, ao. EBnoa. Cog. © Baw r., 
βάσκω po., [βιβάω, βίβημι, βιβάσθω,] 
βιβάξζω make go 305b. Cp. ἀμφι- 
σ-βητέω dispute ; f. -σω m., ao. ἦμ- 
φισβήτησα ἃ ἠμφεσβήτησα ; -ητήθην 
(so ipf. -ἥτουν, 282 b). 

βάλλω (1, βαλ-, βλα- οὐ Τὴ throw, M. ; 
βαλῶ m. (βαλλήσω 311 ἃ, Ar. Vesp. 
222), [βλήσομαι, T. 335,] 2 ἃ. ἔβα- 
λον m. [ἔβλην, m. ἐβλήμην, opt. 2 5. 
βλῇο or βλεῖο b}, N. 288]; βέβληκα, 
-μαι [βεβόλημαι 114 8, 511,1. 9], 8 f. 
βεβλήσομαι, ἐβλήθην f. 

βάπτω (t, βαφ-) dip, M.; βάψω ην., 
80.; βέβαμμαι, ἐβάφθην, usu. 2 ἃ. ἐβά- 


PM, 
βαστάζω carry, po. orl.; βαστάσω, 
' &c., later, Bacrdéw, &c., 349 a. 
[βεβρώθοις (eat), see βιβρώσκω.] 
[βέομαι, βείομαι, live ; see Bidw.] 
βιβάζω, [βιβάω, -ημι, -άσθω,] see 
βαίνω. 
βιβρώσκω (r+ Κ΄, βρο-, cf. voro) 
eat, mostly dial. or 1.; βρώσομαι 1., 
CéBowoa 1., [2 a. ἔβρων 313 Ὁ]; βέ- 
βρωκα (pt. βεβρώς 320d, Soph. Ant. 
1022), βέβρωμαι, [3 f. -σομαι,] ἐβρώ- 
θην, f. 1. Cog. βρώθω 1., [2 pf. opt. 
βεβρώθοις Δ. 35, or pr. fr. βεβρώθ-.] 
Bidw live, M.; & βιώσκομαι k ® 
revive, usu. cp. w. ἀνά βιώσομαι, 
-7w 1., ao., oftener 2 ao. ἐβίων 313 Ὁ 
(opt. βιῴην 316 Ὁ) ; BeBloxa, -μαι, -Onv 
f. 1. [Cog. βέομαι (βείομαι 134 8) or 
βίομαι, also as fut. 305 ἢ, O. 194, X. 
431, Hom. Ap. 528.] See ζάω. 
βλάπτω (t, βλαβ-) hurt; βλάψω 
ην., 80. a, m. 1.; βέβλαφα, -αμμαι, 
8 f. -άψομαι, ἐβλάφθην, & 2 ἃ. ἐβλά- 
Bf. [Cog. βλάβω τ., T. 82.] 
βλαστάνω & τ. βλαστέω (n+, v, 
βλαστ-) sprout, bud ; βλαστήσω, ao., 
comm. 2a. ἔβλαστον ; βεβλάστηκα 
ἃ ἐβλάστηκα 280 c. 
βλίύττω (12, βλιτ- for μελιτ- 146 b) 
take honey from the hive; ἔβλισα. 
βλώσκω (k®, 146 Ὁ, wod-) go, po.; 
μολοῦμαι, 2a. ἔμολον +; μέμβλωκα. 
βοάω boo, shout, M.; βοήσομαι, 
-cwl.,a0.a.,m.1.; BeBdnkal., -wacl., 
ἐβοήθην 1.: [Β. & 1. 5 βώσομαι, EBwoa 
m., βέβωμαι, ἐβώσθην, 131 f.] 
βόσκω feed, M. (cf. pasco, vescor) ; 


_TABLES. 


~ γηράω § 50. 


θην, f. 1. 

βούλομαι [βόλομαι] volo, WILL, 
wish (2s. βούλει 297 f); βουλήσομαι ; 
βεβούλημαι, ἐβουλήθην & ἠβουλήθην 
279 ἃ, ἴ. 1.: [2 pf. προ-βέβουλα prefer, 
A. 113.] Cog. βουλεύω plan, 44. © 

[Bpax- resound ; 2a. ἔβραχε 337 a, 
E. 863. ] 


Bpéxw (Ὁ, Bpax-) wet; βρέξω 1., 
ao.; βέβρεγμαι, ἐβρέχθην, less Att. 
ἐβράχην, f. 1. : 

[Bpoy-swaliow ; ἔβροξα ; “ βέβροχα, 
σεβρόχθην 1., © ἐβρόχην. 

βρυχάομαι (u, Bpvx-) roar, 355 u; 
CBpuxjcopar very l., ao.; 2 pf. βέ- 
βρυχα pret., ἐβρυχήθην. 

υνέω nl x, βύω, stopup, M.; © βύ- 
ow, 20. a., m.1.; βέβυσμαι, © εβύσθην. 
Cog. Bivw & βύζω τ. 


- 


 ¥ 


γαμέω (Vv, yau-) marry (oftheman), 
M. marry (of the woman); γαμῶ m. 
152, 1. γαμήσω m., ἔγημα m., later 
ἐγάμησα" γεγάμηκα, -μαι, ἐγαμήθην 
ἢ. 1.: [f. m. γαμέσσεται will provide 
a wife, 1. 394 υ. 1.| 

γάνυμαι, 1. γάννυμαι, rejoice ; [ya- 
νύσσομαι 171, 2. 504; yeydvopor 
Anact. 35.] Cog. yavéw brighten, 
[γανάω shine. ] 

γέγονα, yeyddre, γεγάκειν, yelvo- 
μαι, γεννάω, see γίγνομαι. 

γεγωνέω [ ὠνω] & γεγωνίσκω (v, 
k2, yeywr- r) shout; γεγωνήσω ao.; 
yéyova pret. (sub. γεγώνω, imu. γέ- 
γωνε 318). 

γελάω laugh; γελάσομαι, -σω 1., 
ao. a.; ὃ γεγέλασμαι ]., ἐγελάσθην, f.1. 
[Cog. γελοιάω.] 

γεν- =(&, according to some, tol. 
for) ἐλ- (see aipéw), in 2 ἃ. m. 8 8. 
γέντο took, 2. 476. See also γίγνο- 
pat. | 

γεύω cause to taste, M. gusto, taste ; 
yevow m., 20.; γέγευμαι, ἐγεύσθην 
807 6. [Nude pr. 1 p. γεύμεθα Theoc. 
14. 51.] 

[γηθέω (ν, γήθω m. 1.) gaudeo, re- 
joice+; γηθήσω, ao.;] γέγηθα pret. 

γηράω & oftener γηράσκω Κα}, grow 
old, M.; γηρᾶσω ἃ -ἄσομαι, ao. α:, 


2 ἃ. ἐγήραν po. or 1., 8195 Ὁ (inf. γη- 


βοσκήσω 511 ἃ, ηι.]., 80.].; ἐβοσκή- | 


ὃ 50. ynpdw 
pavat or -dvar Asch. Ch. 908); γεγή- 
ρᾶκα, “έγηραθην 1. 

γίγνομαι (11 ο2, γα-, γεν- πιΪ Ὁ1), 
or I. & later γίνομαι, become; γενή- 
copa, 2a. ἐγενόμην [nude 3 5. ἔγεντο 
326 e, γέντο Hes. Th. 199]; 2 pf. γέ- 
yova. [yeydare, for γέγατε, 320, 134s, 
Hom. Batr. 148, yeyddou A. 41, plp. 
3d. ἐκ-γεγάτην x. 138, inf. γεγάμεν 
333.¢, E. 248, pt. yeyaws, I. 456], 
pt. po γεγώς 320d, Soph. Aj. 472, 
γεγένημαι, ἐγενήθην τ. Ὁ. or l., f. τ΄ 

Pf. inf. γεγάκειν D. 826 Ὁ.] Cog. 

is γεγάομαι82θο, γείνομαι X. 477 v.Z., | 
ao. ἐγεινάμην begat, po. +3 γεννάω 
beget. Cf. gigno, gnascor. 

γιγνώσκω (k® r, yvo-), or 1. & later 
γινώσκω, gnosco, KNOW, ΟΠ. 1.; γνώ- 
copa, ao. mw. 1. [ἀν-έγνωσα persuad- 
ed, Hdt.], 2 ἃ. ἔγνων, 45h, e (im. opt. 
3 8. συγ-γνοῖτο Aisch. Sup. 216); 
ἔγνωκα, -σμαι, -σθην f. Cog. γνωρί- 
ζω, -ίσω, -ιῶ, ἐγνώρικα, make known; 
ἀμφιγνοέω, -σω, doubt, aug. ἠμφιγ- 
& ἠμφεγ- 282 Ὁ. 

γλύφω. sculpo, carve; γλύψω 1., 
ao. a, m. 1.; γέγλυμμαι & ἔγλυμμαι 
280 ο, ἐγλύφθην 1. &v., 2 ἃ. ἐγλύφην 1. 
Cf. glubo. Cog. γλάφω. 

γοάω (τ, yo-) bewail, M., po. + 
(in Att. only pr. & ipf. m., & pr. p.); 

γοήσομαι, -σω 1., ao. 1., 2 a. ἔγοον Z. 
500 ; ἐγοήθην 1. 

γράφω scribo, GRAVE, write, M.; 
γράψω m., 20.5 γέγραφα (γεγράφηκα 

1. + ἢ, γέγραμμαι (ἔγραμμαι ]., 280 ο), 
9 f. γεγράψομαι, ὃ ἐγράφθην 1., 2 ἃ. 

.ἐγράφην f. 


Δ. 


δα-, teach, learn ; see διδάσκω. 

ϑαίνῦμι (n°, δαιτ-) feast, entertain, 
ο. +, M. [opt. δαινῦτο, -ύατο, 316 c]; 
alow, m. 1., ao.; ἐδαίσθην. 

Safopar (h, da-) divido, divide, 
_ ch. po. (pr. & f.), P.; ϑάσομαι ao.; 
ϑέδασμαι, A. 125 [δέδαιμαι, a. 23], 
ἐδάσθην 1. Cog. δατέομαι po. 1. [ao. 
inf. δατέασθαι 306, Hes. Op. 765], 
δαίνῦμι q. ν., δαΐζω, -ίξω, rend, po. 
_ ϑαίω (h, δαξ-, δα-) kindle, po. +, 
M.; (2 a, ἐδαόμην, T. 316 ; 2 pf. δέδηα 
blaze, pret., T. 18,] δέδαυμαι, Sim. 
Am. 30. ; ΣΟ 


. VERBS, 


δέω 71 

ϑάκνω (n1, dax-, δηκ- g) dite, 47; 
δήξομαι, -ξω 1., ao. r., 2a. ἔδακον ; 
δέδηχα 1., δέδηγμαι, ἐδήχθην ἴ., 2 a. 
ἐδάκην l. Cog. δακνά ζω po. 

δαμάζω (z, dau-) domo, tame, sub- 
due, po. +, M.; δαμάσω [m., δαμῶ 
305 b, A. 61], a0.; δεδάμακα 1., -σμαι 
1. [δέδμημαι οἿ, E. 878, 3 ἢ. δεδμήσο- 
μαι, Hom. Ap. 543, | ἐδαμάσθην θ. 291, 
Mem. 4.1.8, ἐδμήθηνρο., Δ.99, oftener 
2 ἃ. ἐδάμην po., T. 94. Po. cog. δα- 
paw 1., δαμαλίζω, δαμνάω, δάμνημι 
(M. δάμναμαι). 

σδαρθάνω (n*, δαρθ-) sleep, usu. ep. 
w. κατά" 2a. 5 ἐδαρθον, po. ἔδραθον οὅ, 
TL. 143 ; ὁδεδάρθηκα 311, 2 ἃ. “éddp- 
θην, ὃ ἐδράθην vr. or |. 

Saréopar divide, po.; see δαίομαι. 
[S8éaro appeared ; see 5oa-. | 
[SelSm+ ἃ δίω (δι-, δειδ- ο ἢ) fear, 

δίομαι + frighten ; δείσομαι, + %, -σω 
1., ] ἔδεισα « pret. δέδοικα & 2 pf. δέδια 
46 Ὁ [δείδοικα, δείδια, 134 ἃ, dedoixw 
D., 8526 Ὁ]. Cog. δειμαίνω fear, δε- 
δίσσομαι [δειδίσσομαι), r. δεδίσκομαι, 
Frighten, Sinus chase (M. δίεμαι) po., 
ἃ διώκω q. Vv. 

δείκνυμι & δεικνύω (n7, δεικ-) in- 
pico, extend the hand to point out, 
show (M. greet with extended hand]; 
δείξω, &c., 45 [in Hdt., fr. dex-,° δέξω, 
ἔδεξα m., ὃ δέδεγμαι, ὃ ἐδέχθην. Ep. 
δείδεγμαι 134 ἃ, pret., η. 72). Cog. 
δέχομαι 4. ν., δεξιόομαι greet, [ δεδί- 
σκομαι ἃς δειδίσκομαι greet, δεικανάω 
show. | 

δειπνέω sup ; see ἀριστάω. 

[δέμω build, Hom. Mere.87 ;] ἔδειμα 
m.; [δέδμημαι οἷ.1 Cog. douéw 1. 

ϑέρκομαι Ὁ} sce, po. o7 |.; δέρξομαι 
]., ao. 1., 2a. ἔδρακον ο5, m. r.; δέ- 
Sopka pret., ἐδέρχθην [2 a. ἐδράκην 
Pind. N. 7. 4]. 

Sépw (b1, dap-), less Att. δείρω or 
δαίρω ἢ, flay, °M. τ.; Sepa, ἔδειρα " 
δέδαρμαι, ἐδάρθην r., 2 ἃ. ἐδάρην, f. 1. 

δεύομαι want ; see δέω. 

δέχομαι receive ; δέξομαι ao.; δέ- 
δεγμαι, 3 f. dedéEouar, ἐδέχθην, f. 1. 
[Pr. 3 p. δέχαται for δέχ[ο)νται 158, 
M. 147, 2 a. ἐδέγμην, 826 6. Cog. 
δέχνυμαι, δέκομαι 167, Hat. 9. 91 ;] 
see δείκνῦμι. 

Séw, bind, M., 309b; δήσω m., 
a0.; δέδεκα (τ. -ηκα 310d), δέδεμαι, 


72 


dew 


3 f. δεδήσομαι 819 ο, Cyr. 4. 8. 18, 
ἐδέθην ff. Cog. τ. δίδημι r}, v. 8. 24. 

δέω ({1, deF-) necd, want, M. need, 
bey; Sehow m. 8511, ao. a. [3 5. 
ἔδησεν =. 100]; δεδέηκα, -μαι, ἐδεή- 
θην, f. 1. [Εγ. δεύομαι f2, -ἥσομαι, 
ἐδεύησα, t. 540.] Impers. δεῖ there ts 
need, δέῃ, ct. dy 809}, δέοι, δεῖν, 
δέον + δεήσει, ἐδέησε. 

δηλόω, -do0,&c., manifest ; see 42. 

Sho shall find ; see διδάσκω. 

διαυτάω regulate, M.; ϑδιαιτήσω, 
διήτησα & ἐδιήτησα, δεδιήτηκα, &Kc., 
282 c. 

Staxovéw minister ; -how, ἐδιᾶκό- 
νησα, ϑεδιακόνηκα (less Att. διηκό- 
νησα, δεδιηκόνηκα), &c., 282 ο. 

διδάσκω ([κ, δα-, διδαχ-Υ10) doceo, 
teach, M.; διδάξω m., ao. [ἐδιδάσκησα 
311, Hom. Cer. 144]; δεδίδαχα, -Ύμαι, 
ἐδιδάχθην, f. 1. [Fr. da- disco, learn, 
teach, δαήσομαι 311, 2 a. ἔδαον & δέ- 
δαον 284e ; deddnxa, 0. 134, 2 pf. de- 
daa, ρ. 519, δεδάημαι Hom. Merc. 483, 
2 ἃ. ἐδάην +. Cog. δεδάομαι 326 ¢, 
7.316; δήω 5 fut., shall find, N.260. | 

δίδημι bind ; see δέω bind. 

σδιδράσκω (rik, dpa-) run ; °Spa- 
σομαι, ao. a. 1., 2 a. “ἔδραν 45h; 
σδέδρακα. Cog. δράπετεύω, δρασκά- 
ἕω - ἔδραμον, see τρέχω. See δράω. 

δίδωμι (r}, δο-) do, give, δώσω, 

δέδωκα, &c.; see 45. 

[δίζημαι seek, E. & 1., 814 Ὁ ; διζή- 
wopatao. Cog. δίζω M., po.] 

(npr chase, M. flee, po.; see δείδω. 
διοικέω manage, -ἤσω, ϑιῴκηκα, 
«μαι & vr. δεδιῴκημαι, 282 Ὁ. 

διψάω thirst, -how, &c. (διψ(άει) ῇ 
120 g). 

δίω fear, flee ; see δείδω. 

διώκω pursue, M.; διώξω and oft- 
ener διώξομαι, ao. a., 2 a. ἐδιώκαθον 
8ὅ8 ἃ ; δεδίωχα, -γμαι 1., ἐδιώχθην, 
f. 1. See δείδω. 

[Soa-, Sea- 114 Ὁ, appear ; ipf. nude 
δέατο ¢. 242; ao. m. δοάσσατο &. 23, 
sub. δοάσσεται 326d, Ψ. 339. Cog. 
δοιάζω or δοάζω, doubt, imagine, Ap. 
Rh. 

Bock (v, dox-) seem, think ; ϑόξω 
ao.; δέδοχα ]., -Ὑμαι, ἐδόχθην}.: ch. po. 
δοκήσω a0., ϑδεδόκηκα, -μαι, ἐδοκήθην᾽ 
[pf. m. pt. δεδοκημένος pret., fixed in 
thought, intent, watching, O. 730.] 


‘TABLES. 


ἐθέλω § 50. 
Cog. [δοκεύω watch,| δοκιμάζω ex- 
amine. 

δουπέω (e1, ydoure-v) sownd heavi- 
ly, ch. po.; δουπήσω, ao. [ἐγδούπησα, 
A. 45], 2 ἃ. “5 ἔδουπον 1.; 2 pf. ϑέδου- 
πα, ἐδουπήθην 1. 

δράσσομαι 11, grasp, seize, A. 1.; 
δράξομαι 1., a0.; δέδραγμαι (δέδαρξαι 
οἷ, Eur. Tro. 745 v. 7.). 

Spdw do; δρἄσω ao.; Séipaxa, 
-ὅμαι,γ. -ασμαι 307 e, ἐδράσθην. Cog. 
[δραίνω,] ἀπο-διδράσκω make off, run 
away. 

δρέπω (b1, δραπ-), po. 1. δρέπτω t, 
pluck, M.; δρέψομαι po., ao. a. m., 
[2 ἃ. ἔδραπον Pind. P. 4. 231.] 

δύναμαι be able (2 5. diva 297 h); 
δυνήσομαι [40. +]; δεδύνημαι, ἐδυ- 
νήθην, ili. 1. 35, f. 1., ἠδυνήθην 279 a, 
Cyr. 3. 1. 30, less Att. ἐδυνάσθην, 
vii. 6. 20. 

δύω [ Hont.] cause to enter, enter 
(cf. in-duo), Suva n}, & less Att. δύ- 
ομαι, enter (the causative sense be- 
longs to the fut. ἃ 1 ao. act., but not 
to the 2 ao., & very rarely to the pf. 
act., V. 8. 23); ϑύσω, δύσομαι, ao., 
[ἐδυσόμην 327 a,] 2 ἃ. ἔδῦν 45h; δέ- 
δυκα, ὃ δέδῦμαι 310 d, © ἐδύθην f., [2 ἃ. 
r. ἐδύην Hipp. Cog. δύπτω, dive. ] 


E. 

éa- become sated, ἑῶμεν ; see dw. 

ἐάω permit ; ἐάσω m., εἴασα 2796; 
εἴακα, -μαι, -θην. 

ἐγγυάω pledge, M.; ἐγγυήσω, ἦγ- 
yinoa or ἐνεγύησα - ἠγγύηκα or ἐγ- 

inka, &c.; 282 c. 

he ἀπὸ πρὶ (ἢ, ἐγερ-) rouse, raise, M. 
rise; ἔγερῶ, m.1., ἤγειρα, m. 1., 2 a. 
ἠγρόμην οὅ; ἐγήγερκα 1., 2 pf. pret. 
ἐγρήρορα, am awake, 281 ἃ [ἐγρήγορθε 
320f; in imitation, ind. 3 p. ἐγρη- 
γόρθᾶσι K. 419, inf. m. ἔγρήγορθαι 
for ἐγηγέρθαι, K. 67], ἐγήγερμαι, ἠγέρ- 
θην, f.1. Cog. ἔγρω po., ἔγρηγορέω 
ἃς γρηγορέω 1., [ἔγρηγοράω, éypjoow. | 

ἔγκομιάζω praise ; -dow m., ἐνεκω- 
placa, ἐγκεκωμίακα, 282 c. 

ἔδω cat; see ἐσθίω. 

ἐν αι seat one’s self, sit ; see tfw. 

ei Ne p & θέλω, wish ; -ἤσω 511}, 
ἠθέλησα & ἐθέλησα " ἠθέληκα & 1. 
τεθέληκα. Θέλω is rare & doubtful 


§ 50. ἐθέλω 
in Hom., Hes., & Pind.; & is in gen- 
eral less common than ἐθέλω, exc. in 
dramatic dialegue. 
— ἐθίζω (23, Fe0-, €0-) accustom, M.; 
ἐθίσω, -ιῶ 305a, εἴθεσα 2790; εἴθικα, 
-σμαι, -σθην, f.1. Intrans. 2 pf. pret. 
εἴωθα [ἔωθα E. I.] 312d, am wont, 
[pr. pt. ἔθων I. 540.] 
εἴδομαι seem, εἶδον saw ; see dpdw. 
εἰκάζω (z?, Fuc-, Fecx- h, εἰκ-) liken; 
ekdow, °m., εἴκασα & ἤκασα 278d; 
εἴκακα l., -σμαι & ἤκασμαι, -Ony f. 
Intrans., 2 pf. pret. ἔοικα 312 Ὁ, some- 
times εἶκα or ἧκα [οἷκα 1.], seem (nude 
1 p. po. ἔοιγμεν 148, Soph. Aj. 1239, 
[3 ἃ. ἔϊκτον δ. 27, plp. ἐΐκτην A. 104,] 
ureg. 3 p. εἴξασι po. +, Ar. Av. 96, 
see icdov under dpdw), plp. ἐῴκειν 279, 
f. r. el Ar. ΝΡ. 1001, ipf. εἶκε Σ. 
520? [Cog. toxw, ἐΐσκω q. v.] 
εἴκω (Fecx-) yield ; εἴξω [°m.], ao., 
2 ἃ. εἴκαθον 353 a. 


_ VERBS. 


εἰμί καὶ εἶμι 19 


[εἰλ-- (ἃ, καλ-, ἀλ-, ἐλ- b1) volvo, 
roll up, press together, P. εἴλομαι, EB. 
203; ἔλσα 152d, A. 413; ἔελμαι Q. 
662, 2a. ἐάλην, N. 408.] Cog. εἴλλω 
or ef \Aw, UAW, εἰλέω or εἱλέω [ἐολέω, 
Pind. P. 4. 414], -ήσω, εἰλύω po. +, 
-ὅσω [ao. p. ἐλύσθην, Ψ. 393; deriv. 
εἰλύφωαω, εἰλῦφά ζω], ἑλίσσω [εἱλίσσω 
po. & 1. 1, -ίξω (εἵλιξα 279 c), [ἐλε- 
λέξω, -ίξω, A. 530.] — εἴβω 844. 

εἷλον took ; see αἱρέω. 

εἰμί (ἐσ-) be, ἃς εἶμι (i-, Lat. i-re) 
go. The Pres. of εἶμε has comm. in 
the wad. (in Att. prose regularly), & 
sometimes in the other modes, the 
sense of the Fut.: εἶμι, [I am going} 
1 shall go. For the common forms 
of these verbs, see 451,m,o0,r. Their 
chief dialectic forms appear below, 
those preceded by t belonging to εἶμε 
go, and the others to εἰμί be : 


a. DrtaLectic Forms oF εἰμί to be, AND εἶμι to go. 


Pres. Ind. 3 ἔωσι E. 1. 
S.1 ἔμμι x. ἔωντι Ὁ. 
2 εἷς Ἐ.1., ἐσσί». Pres. Opt. 
Τεῖς, εἶσθα E./S, 2 εἴησθα P., ἔοις 
3 ἐντί Ὁ. 8 ἔοι Ἑ. τ. [E. 
P.1 εἰμέν &. 1. tiein, ein? Ἑ. 
εἰμές D., ἐμέν P. Dies. Tae 


3 Edo E., evi, é- 


yw 
+ Tove. [ovreD. S. 2 ἔσο, ἔσσο P. 


P.3 édvrw D. 


Pres. Sub. Pres. Inf. 
8.1 wk. 1., εἴω EB. | ἔμεν, ἔμεναι E. 
+elw P. ἔμμεν E. Ὁ. 
2 Τἴῃσθα Ἑ. ἔμμεναι EB. A 
3 ἦσι,ἔῃσι, ἔῃ E. | ἦμεν, εἶμεν Ὁ. 
Τἴῃσι E. εἴμεναι D.? 
P.1 ὦμες vd. tivev, ἔμεναι E. 
+touev E. +iupevac BE. 
Ἐζωμες Ὁ. Τἰέμεναι Ἐ. 


ti€wev D., ar P. |P.1 Fues D. 
Pres. Part. Tower E. 
ἐών, ἐοῦσα, ἐόν, G. 2 ἔατε at [σαν Ἦ 
p PSR τ 3 ἔσαν P. I., ἔα- 
εὗσα, ἐᾶσα, G. εὖν- ἔσσαν oP 
Tos, ἔντος D. ἔσκον It. 
ἔοισα 2. ero te. 
+hicav E. 1. 
Imperfect. ticav, Hiov E. 


S.1 ἔα BE. τ., Fa E. 


gov, ἔην 1 Ἑ. 


D.3 tirny Ε. 


Fut. Ind. 
ἔσκον It. [E. Soroumae 
+ Hia E. τ., ἤτον Aga : 
2 ἧς late, gas I saa th 
2 SE EDS egoovuat Ὁ. E. 
éenoOak., ἔης P. ἡ εἴσομαι E. 
8 ἦεν, ἔην, ἤην E. 
ἧς D., ἔσκε It. Aor. Ind. 


+ Hie I. Τείσάμην E. 


tHe, te, ele? E. ἸἘἐεισάμην E. 


b. The comparison of a few cognate tongues will show more clearly that 


the root of εἰμί to be, was éo-, and will also illustrate the forms of inflec- 
tion. The Latin is placed first, as showing least change in the flexible 
endings (271 d*). The harsh forms esm, esmus, and esnt became, by trans- 
position and change of vowel (cf. 116), swm, swmus, sunt. In the Greek, 
the elements are first given (32 i), and then the results. For the relation 
of the Sanskrit as- to the es- of the other languages, see 1148. In the 
plural, the a is dropped or transposed. See 271d. In the Slavic, the 7 
is to be pronounced as y. The Lithuanian, which shows the root entire 
throughout, is placed last, as a language which yet lives to link the pres- 
ent to the remote past. | 


GR. TAB. 4 


74 εἰμί TABLES. εἶμι § 50. 


Latin Gothic. Greek. Sanskrit. Old Slavic. Lithuan. 
5.1. swm am ἐσ-μ, εἰμί, κι. ἔμμι αϑτηὶ jeswmi esmi 
2 68 ds ἐσ-ς εἷς, Ῥι ἐσσί αϑὶ jesi esi 
3 est ist ἐσ-τ ἐστί asti jesti esti 
P.1 sumus : éo-pev ἐσμέν, Τ.εἶμές 81η885 jesmu esme 
2 estis ἐσ-(το)τε ἐστέ stha jeste este 
ὃ sunt sind éo-vr εἰσί, τ. ἐντί santi sunti esti 


c. In εἰμί fo be, the o of the root was retained in some forms (before τὶ 
θ, and p; € becoming t by precession in ἴσθι, 114d). (4) It was dropped 
before o of the Fut. (ἔσομαι, cf. Lat. evo, 139), and between two vowels, 
which were then contracted: Pr. 3 p. (ἐσᾶσι) ἔᾶσι E., εἰσί, sub. (ow) Ew 
F. 1., ὦ, opt. (ἐσιην, οἵ. ἐ: sim) εἴην - Ipf. 1 5. (augmented ἦσν, joa, cf. 
273" c, 6, and L. eram, 139) ja E., ἢ (Old Att., Ar. Av. 1363), ὃ 5. (ἦστ, 
hoc, 2737 ο, 6) Fev E. 163 Ὁ, ἦν. (e) It was also dropped before wr, ἐ com- 
monly passing into the kindred ὁ (cf. 114 Ὁ, ο): Pr. 3 p. ἐντέ D., pt. (ἐντ- 
L. ent-, évr-) ὦν, ἔντος D., inv. 3 p. (ἐντων) ὄντων. (ἢ) It was contracted, 
as ε (142), with ἐ or ἢ preceding: Pr. ind. (ἐσμὼ) εἰμί, (ἐσς) εἷς E. 1., or 
(both sigmas apparently taken up) εἶ, (ἐσμέν) εἰμέν B. 1., inf. (ἐσναι) εἶναι 
(in Lat. the 7 was assimilated, (es-re) esse), imv. (ἔστω, éerw, cf. 121 e) 
ἤτω 1.: Ipf. 1 5. (nov) ἣν, 2 5. (jos) ἧς 1., pl. ἦμεν, Fre (oftener than ἦστε, 
while in the dual ἦστον and ἤστην prevail), ἦσαν. See 139 5. 

The DIALECTIC or LESS ATTIC FORMS of εἰμί to be, are (g) forms wncon- 
tracted or like those of verbs in -w (315) : ἔᾶσιν Β. 125, ἔοντι Archim., ἔω 
ι. 18, ἔωσι Hdt. 2. 39, dows I. 284, ἐν-έοι Hdt. 7. 6, ἔων B. 27, ζουσα Τ΄. 159, 
ἔοισα Pind. P. 4. 471, εὖσα, εὖντα, Theoc. 2. 8, 76, (ἐνσα, 156) ἐᾶσα Tim. 
Loc. 96a, ha β. 313, ἣεν M. 9; (h) variously protracted: ἐσσί (in imita- 
tion of the other persons) A. 176, μετ-εἰω Y. 47, ἔῃσι 328 Ὁ, B. 366, εἴη- 
'σθα 297 Ὁ, Theog. 715, ἔης 135, ἔησθα X. 435, ἔην M. 10, ἤην A. 808, 
ἔσκον 332, H. 153, ἔσκε Hdt. 1. 196, ἔσσομαι 171, A. 267 (ἔσεται 457, 
A. 211), ἐσοῦμαι 305 ἃ, Th. 5. 77 ; (i) shortened or unaugmented : ἐμέν Υ., 
Call. Fr. 294, ἔα 829d, tov A. 762, ἔσαν A. 267; (1) middle forms ; ἔσο 
or ἔσσο A. 302, Sap. 1. 28, ἤμην r. or 1., Cyr. 6.1. 9 v. 1. (ἤμεθα Mat. 29. 
80), εἴατο 329 a, v. 106 v. 1.; (k) infinitives (333): ἔμεν A. 299, ἔμμεναι 
Sap. 2. 2, ἦμεν or εἶμεν (v. 1. Hues or ewes 1) Th. 5.77, Theoc. 14. 6, εἴμεναι 
or ἤμεναι Ar. Ach. 7752; (1) various forms ; ἔμμι 171 ἃ, Sap. 2. 15, εἷς (or 
εἴς Bek.) II. 515, Hdt. 7. 9, εἰμέν E. 873, εἰμές, Sues, ues, 328 a, Theoc. 
15. 73, 9, 14. 29, 8 5. ἐντί 169 ς, Theoc. 1. 17, 3 p. ἐντί 328 a, Th. 5, 77, 
ἐόντω 328 dt, 2 5. ἧς 1., 297 Ὁ, 8 5. (for) ἧς Theoc. 2. 90, ἔσεται 45 r. 


τη. In εἶμι to go, the root ’t-, in the sing. of the Pres. and commonly in 
the Impf. throughout, was lengthened to εἰ- (314), which augmented be- 
came ἡ- (278d): εἶμι, εἷς, εἶσι (qv, cf. 2787 c, 6) ya (common in the Old 
and Mid. Att., Pl. Apol. 22a, and followed in the Ep. by ge M. 371), 
ἦμεν, ἥτε, ἧσαν. The Impf., having thus a form resembling that of the 
old Plup. (291 ¢), fell into the analogy of this tense in its subsequent 
development, and has been often so named: jew, ees, Χο. The shorter 
forms of the plur. and dual were, however, more common, except perhaps 
ἧσαν, which some deny to the Att., while others regard it as the true Att. form. 


The DIALECTIC FORMS of εἶμι to go, are (n) regular nude forms: eis Hes. 
Op. 206 (Att. εἶ, as if in imitation of εἰμί to be; εἶσθα 297, K. 450), (ἴᾶσι, 
156) ioc Theog. 716 (v. 1. εἶσι), ἐξ-ίναι Ath. 580 ο, ἔσαν I. 8, ἔτην A. 347: 
(0) forms with ἢ resolved: (na) Hia Hdt. 1. 42, ἤϊε A. 47, ἤϊσαν Hat. 1. 
43, ἤϊον 315, ψ. 370; (p) with’ lengthened to εἰ, as in the Pr. ind.: εἴω 
Sophr. 2 [23], xar-etey? Hes. Sc. 254, εἴσομαι Z. 8, εἴσατο A. 138, ἐείσατο 
O. 415 ; (q) as from te-: ἰείη T. 209, and also ἴεμαι, ἰέμην, 45 p, if they 


§ 50. 


> 
εἰμι 


VERBS. 


ἕπω τὸ 


should be thus written ; (1) infinitives (333): ἔμεν A. 170, ἔμμεναι T. 365, 
ἐσ-ιέμεναι x. 480 ; (t) various forms: ἴῃσθα 297 Ὁ, K. 67, ἴῃσι, ἴωμες 328b, a, 
ἴομεν 326 ἃ, tev, Homer, 315, B. 872, r. 22. 


εἶπον said, 2 aor.; see φημί. 

εἴργω (ἢ, Fepy-, ἐργ-) shut out; 
εἴρξω m., εἶρξα ; 2 a. po. εἴργαθον m. 
353.03; εἴργμαι, -xOnv: [E. 1. ἔργω & 
ἔργνυμι n7; ἔρξομαι, ἔρξα, 2 a. ἔργα- 
θον m.; ἔργμαι (ἔρχατα!:, -το, 529 ἃ, 
κ. 283, P. 854) : also ἐέργω, &c., Β. 
617.| Cog. Lat. arceo, urgeo ; and 

elpyw & elpyvupt (h, n’, Fepy-, €py-) 
shut in; εἴρξω, εἴρξα ; εἴργμαι, -xOnv: 
ch. Ion., δέργω, °epiw, ἕρξα, ἕρχθην. 
The single verb Fépyw (or éFépyw p) 
in Hom., seems to have become elpyw 
ἃ eipyw in the Att., with a distinc- 
tion of sense, which, however, was 
not always observed. 

[εἴρομαι, εἰρωτάω, ask; see Epwrdu. | 

[εἰρύω draw ; see éptw. | 

[εἴρω, elpéw, say ; see φημί. 

εἴρω (f{* h, cep-) sero, join, knit 
[ipf. or ao. ἤειρε Κα. 499] ; δ εἶρα [“ ἔρσα 
152d, Hipp.]; “ εἶρκα, -μαι [Ἑ- ἔερμαε, 
σ. 296, 1. δ ἔρμαι f 

εἶσα set, placed, 1 a.; see ifw. 

[ἐΐσικω & ἴσικω (k®, see εἰκά fw) liken ; 
pret. #iyua:+, °Eur. Ale. 1063. ] 

εἴωθα wm wont, pret.; see edi fw. 

éexxrAynorateholdanassembly, -are, 
&c.; aug. ἠκκλ-, e&exd-, &c., 282 c. 

ἐλαύνω (n?, ἐλα-) & τ. ἐλάω drive, 
M.; ἔἐλάσω, [ἐλάω 305 b, ἐλόω 322 ο] 
ἐλῶ, ἐλάσομαι]., ἤλασα ην.; ἐλήλακα, 
-μαι, -σμαι 1., [plp. 8 p. ἐληλάδατο 
or -έδατο 829 ἃ, η. 86,] ἠλάθην, -σθην 
*f. 1. [Cog. ἐλαστρέω Ε. I. +.] 

[ἔλδομαι (FerAS-) & ἐέλδομαι, desire. } 

ἐλέγχω examine, confute; ἐλέγξω 
ao.; ἐλήλεγμαι 41, °F#reyuarr., ἠλέγ- 
χθην f. 

ἕλκω & 1. ἑλκύω (w, Fe\x-, cf. vel- 
lico) pull, draw, M.; ἕλξω, less Att. 
ἑλκύσω, m. 1., εἵλκυσα m., εἶλξα mM. 1. ; 
εἵλκυκα, -σμαι, -σθην f., εἵλχθην f. 1. 
[Cog. ἑλκέω, -ἥσω - ἑλκυστάζω. 

ἑλληνίζω speak Greek, -ἴσω, Ke.; 
ἑλληνίσθην or HrAAnvic Onv 279 f. 

ἐλπίζω (z2, FéAm-) hope, M.; &- 
t(icw)@l., ἤλπισα > ἤλπικα ]., -σμαι 
1., -σθὴν : [ἔλπω give hope, M. & 2 pf. 
pret. ἔολπα ε. 379, hope, 2 plp. ἐώλ- 
mew 279 ἃ, φ. 96.] 

ἔλυθ- come ; see ἔρχομαι. 


ἐμέω vomo, VOMIT; ἐμ(έσω)ῷ m., 
ἤμεσα [ἤμησα 1] ; ἐμήμεκα, -σμαι 1., 
ἐμέθην f. 1. 

ἐμπολάω traffic ; 
ἦμπ- or éverr-, 282 ο. 

ἐναίρω (ἢ, évap-) kill, po., M.; 
[ἔνηρα l., m. Εἰ. 59,] 2a. ἤναρον, Kur. 
And. 1182. Cog., 

ἐναρίζω kill, despoil, po., 3494; 
[ἐναρίξω, m. 1.,] ἠνάριξα, in. 1., [τἰσα, 
Anac. 100]; ὃ ἠνάρισμαι, © -σθην. 

ἐνέπω & ἐννέπω, & |. ἐνίσπω (ἐνεπ-, 
ἐνιπ- b?, ἐνισπ- ο), tell, speak (οἵ. in- 
quam), po.,a.1; [ἐνίψω & ἐνισπήσω 
311, ε. 98, ἔνιψα 1.,] 3 ἃ. ἔνισπον [amv. 
ἐνίσπες ν, 818 Ὁ, y. 101.1 Cog. [ἐνί- 
nw +, & ἐνίσσω 15, chide, 2 ἃ. ἐνένϊπον, 
ἠνίπαπον, 284 6 ;] εἶπον, see φημί. 

[3 ἐν-ήνοθα grow or lic on; see ἀνεθ-.} ° 

Céyvupe (n7, Fe-, é-), vestio, clothe, 
fIl.; f. ἔσω (ἕσσω 171, π. 79) ©m., 
ao. (ἕσσα ὃ. 253, ἑέσσατο Κι. 23) ; pf. 
εἷμαι +7. 72, & ἕσμαι, w. 250 :] comm. 
ἀμφι-έννυμι J/.; ἀμφιέσω ε. 167, 
Att. “ἀμφιῶ 305b, Ar. Eq. 891, ἀμφι- 
écoua Cyr. 4. 3.20, ἠμφίεσα m. 282b, 
Cyr. 1.3.17; ἠμφίεσμαι, -cOnv l. Cog. 
[9 εἴνῦμι F. 1.3] 1. ἀμφιάζω, -dow> ἐσθε- 
in pf. ἤσθημαι. 

ἐνοχλέω annoy, -yow, &e.; aug. 
ἦνωχ-, v. lL. ἠνοχ- or ἐνωχ-, 282 Ὁ. 

[ἐολέω press, trouble ; see eid-. | 

ἑορτάζω keep a feast, -dow, &c.; 
aug. éwp- 279d: [ὁρτάζω 1.] 

ἔπ-αν-ορθόω set upright, -ὥσω, &e.; 
aug. ἐπηνωρ- 282 Ὁ. 

[ἐπ- αυρέω τ. & ἐπ-αυρίσκω τ. (v, k 2, 
avp-) enjoy, M.; ἔπαυρήσομαι Z. 353, 
ἐπηυράμην 1. +, oftener 2 a. ἐπηῦρον, 
p. 81,] ἐπηυρόμην Eur. Hel. 469. Cog. 
ἀπαυράω take wway, po., ao. ἀπηυρά- 
μην 1 [pt. ἀπούρας 114, A. 356, ἀπου- 
ράμενος; Hes. Sc. 173, f. ἀπουρήσουσιν 
X. 489 v. 1.} 

ἔπι-μέλομαι & ἔπι-μελέομαι care 
for ; see μέλω. 

ἔπ-ίσταμαι understand ; see ἵστημι. 

ἕπω (f°, σεπ-, σπ- c®) be after or 
busy with (act. scarce used exc. in 
comp.), M. ἕπομαν sequor, follow ; 
ipf. εἶπον m. 279 ; ϑέψω, ἕψομαι, 


-ήσω, &e.; aug. 


ao. m.?, 2a. ὃ ἔσπον (σπω, σποιμι, &C.), 


76 


2 
ἐπω 


ἐσπόμην (σπῶμαι, &c.) & (by redupl. & 
change of initial σι, σεσπ- ἑσπ-, 284, 
_ 345) ch. po. ἑσπόμην (ἑσπωμαι, &c.), 
[imv. σπεῖο 323 α ; a0. p. περι-έφθην, 
Hdt. 6. 15.] Cog. τ. or 1, ἕσπω m. 
épdw love, desire, M. po. ἐράομαι ἃ 
oftenerépapar ; [ἠρασάμην ;| ἤἄρασμαι 
1., -cOnvf. Po. cog. ἐραστεύω, Aisch. 
Pr. 893, [ἐρατίζω, A. 551.] 
épydtopar work ; ἐργάσομαι, εἰργα- 
σάμην 279 c; εἴργασμαι, -σθην ἴ. See 
ἔρδω. 
ἔργω, -γνῦμι, ἕργω, see εἴῤγω, εἴργω. 
ἔρδω & ἕρδω (f, Fepy- & Fepé-, cf. 
168, épy-) worK, do, po. ἃ 1. (&pdw 
Hadt.), ,].; ἔρξω, ἔρξα [ἕρξα 2] ; [2 pf. 
ἔοργα 312b, plp. ἐώργειν 279 d, δ. 693, 
ἐόργεα 284b, 291¢, Hdt. 1. 127.] Cog. 
ἐργάζομαι, ῥέζω, q. Vv. 
ἐρείδω prop, ch. po., M.; ἐρείσω 1., 
€m., ao.; ϑἤρεικα ἃ 1. © ἐρήρεικα, ἐρή- 
ρεισμαι & ἤρεισμαι [8 p. ἐρηρέδαται, 
-ατο, 829 ἃ, 8 f. ἐρερείσομαι ὃ Hipp., | 
.ἠρείσθην. 
ἐρείκω (h, ἐρικ-) rend, break, ©M.; 
ἤρειξα, m. 1., 2 ἃ. ἤρικον po.; ἐρήρι- 
μαι, ἠρείχθην 1. Cog. ῥήγνῦμι 4. V., 
[ἐρέχθω, ε. 88.] ' 
ἐρείπω (h, ἐριπ-}) throw down, r. in 
Att. prose ; ἐρείψω, ao. a. ©m., 2 a. 
ἤριπον fell, BE. 47, m. 1.; ἢ pf. °épy- 
pita have Jfallen, Ἐ. 55,) ἐρήριμμαι 
& 1. ἤρειμμαι, ἠρείφθην, [2 a. ἠρίπην 
Pind. O. 2. 76.] Cog. ῥίπτω throw. 
ἐρέσσω! 132, row, po. orl. ;[ao. #peca. | 
ἐρεύθω & ἐρυθαίνω (h, n°, ἐρυθ-, ef. 
‘rubeo & Germ. réthen) make red, 
REDDEN, po. or 1., M.; [épevow? Σ. 
329 v. 1., ao. Ib., ἐρύθηνα l., ao. p. 
opt. ὃ ἐρευθείην, Hipp. Cog. ἐρυθραίνω, 
ἐρυθριάω, -dow. 
ἐρίζω (j, ἐριδ-) rixor, contend, [ M. +]; 
ἐρίσω 1., ao. a. m.; ἤρικα 1., [ἐρήρι- 
σμαι. Cog. ἐριδαίνω, ao. ἐρίδηνα 1., 
ἐριδήσασθαι or ἐριζήσασθαι Ψ. 792; 
ἐριδμαίνω. 
ἕρπω (f3, σερπ-) serpo, creep, po. 
‘or 1.; ἕρψω, εἶρψα 1. 279¢. Cog. ép- 
“πύζω po. +, °-tow, εἵρπυσα. 
ἔῤῥω go away, cf. erro, ruo ; ἐῤῥή- 
oo 311, a0.; δἤῤῥηκα. ([Cog.? ao. 
ἀπό-ερσα swept away, Z. 348.] 
ἐρυγγάνω (n5, épvy-) ructo, eriigo, 
belch, ERvoT, [M. & ἐρεύγομαι 1. ἃ 
E. +3; ἐρεύξομαι 1.,] 80. 1., 2a. ἤρνγον. 


TABLES. 


εὑρίσκω § 50. 
ἐρύκω hold back, ch. po. ἃ 1., [I.; 
ἐρύξω,74ο., [2 ἃ. ἠρύκακον 2846. Cog. 
ἐρύκάνω & ἐρῦκανάω, a. 199, x. 429.] 
ἐρύω ἃ εἰρύω (Fepu-) draw, BE. & 1., 
M. draw to one’s self, protect ; ἐρύσω 
1. (ἐρύω 305 f, X. 67) & Ceiptce 1., 
m., εἴρυσα mM.+3; εἴρῦμαι & -υσμαι, 
-ύσθην ; see 279c. [Nude pr. & ipf. 
forms (326e): act. inf. εἰρύμεναι 333.¢, 
Hes. Op. 816 ; mid. ἔρῦται Ap. Rh. 
2. 1208, εἰρύαται A. 239, epico, -ὕτο, 
τυντο, X. 507, εἴρῦτο, -vvro, II. 542, 
ἔρυσθαι €. 484, εἴρυσθαι ψ. 82; pass. 
épvro Hes. Th. 301. Some regard 
these mid. & pass. forms as pret. pf. 
& plf.] See ῥύομαι. 
ἔρχομαι (epx-, ἐλυθ- x, ἐλευθ- h) 
go, come ; ipt. ἠρχόμην scarcely in Att., 
exc. in comp.; ἐλεύσομαι scarcely in 
Att. prose, 2 a. ἦλθον c® (po. ἤλυθον), 
[p. ἦνθον 168. 3, Theoc. 16. 9, Lac. 
ἦλσον 169d, Ar. Lys. 105; for ἤλυθα,᾽ 
sync. ἦλθα, see 327 Ὁ]; 2 pf. ἐλήλυθα 
[εἰλήλουθα 134 a, nude 1 p. εἰλήλουθ- 
μεν 826 6, y. 81.] For the pr. exc. in 
the ind., the ipf., & the fut., the Att. 
comm. used other verbs, esp. εἶμι. 
épwrdw (07, ép-) inquire, ask ; ἐρω- 
τήσω ἃ ἐρήσομαι 311, ἠρώτησα, 2a. 
m. ἠρόμην [imy. ἔρειο 323 ο, A. 6117; 
ἠρώτηκα, -μαι, -θην. [Ep. & 1. εἴρο- 
μαι A. 553 (also 2 5. ἔρεαι Hes. Cert. ), 
-hoouat* elpwrdw ἃ -éw 322a, Hdt. 
4, 145; ἐρέω, H. 128 ; ἐρεείνω-Ἐ, Z. 
145.] 
ἐσθίω, & po. + ἔσθω & Be, 2. 415, 
Eur. Cyc. 245 (ἐδ-, ἐσθ- αἱ 147, ἐσθι- 
w, pay- x) edo, EAT; f. ἔδομαι (1. φά- 
youn, ἐδοῦμαι ? 305 a), 2 a0. ἔφαγον ; 
ἐδήδοκα 312d, iv. 8. 20, [2 pf. ἔδηδα, 
P. 542, ἐδήδομαι, x. 56, | 5 ἐδήδεσμαι, 
ἠδέσθην. [Nude pr. inf. ἔδμεναι 326e, 
888 ς, N. 36.] 
ἑστιάω feast, entertain, M.; ἕστι- 
dow m., εἱστίᾶσα 279 ο, m. 1.; εἷστί- 
aka, -μαι, -θην, f. 1.: florid 1.) 
εὔϑω, comm. καθ-εύδω, sleep ; ipf. 
ηὗδον, εὗδον, ἐκάθευδον, 278d, 282b; 
εὑδήσω 311, ὅ4ο.; δεύϑηκα |. 
εὐεργετέω benefit, -σω, &c.; aug. 
evep- & εὐηρ- 283. 2. 
εὑρίσκω (k2, εὑρ-) find, M.; εὑρή- 
ow m. 311b, ao. a. 1., 2 ἃ. εὗρον or 
ηὗρον m. 278 ἃ (εὑράμην 327 Ὁ) ; εὕ- 
ρηκα, -nuat, -έθην f. 310d. 


§ 50.  €x0@ 
ἔχθω, ἐχθαίρω, & ἐχθραίνω (o, n&, 
ἐχθ-), hate, ch. po.; ao. ἤχθηρα, m. 
1., ἤχθρηνα 1. M. or P. ἔχθομαι ἃ 
ἐχθαίρομαι be hateful or hated, f. ἐχ- 
θαροῦμαι, pf. 1. ἤχθημαι - comm. ἀπ- 
εχθάνομαι n*; -εχθήσομαι 311, 2 ἃ. 
᾿ηχθόμην ; -ἤχθημαι: 
ἔχω & ἴσχω (σεχ-, ἐχ- [ὃ, ἐχ- ἃ, 
σχ- ο8, σχε- οὕ, ἰσχ- r? d) have, hold 
(have belonging rather to ἔχω, ἕξω, 
and hold to ἴσχω, σχήσω), M.; ipf. 
εἶχον & ἴσχον 2788; Ham. & σχήσω 
m., [ἔσχησα r.,] 2 ἃ. ἔσχον m. (σχῶ, 
σχοίην & σχοῖμι 298 ο, σχές like θές 
314d, ὄσχετ., σχεῖν, σχών, M. σχῶ- 
μαι, &e.), po. ἔσχεθον, Aisch. Pr. 16 
[°m. Theoc. |, ἔσχχηκα [}έ. συν-οχωκώς, 
B. 218, as for -oywxws 312d, ef. 281 ¢, 
159], ἔσχημαι [plf. 3 p. ἐπ-ώχατο 
312d, 329 a], ἐσχέθην I. or 1., f. 1. 
Cp. ἀμπ-έχω or ἀμπ-ίσχω 159 ἃ (ipf. 
Mm. ἠμπειχόμην 282 b, Pl. Pheedo 87 b); 
dv-éxw (2 ἃ. m. ἀνεσχόμην, oftener 
ἠνεσχόμην 282 Ὁ, po. ἠνσχόμην 136, 
2. 518). Cog. δἰσχνέομαι ἢ 19 or ὃ ἰσ- 
χέομαι v (see ὑπισχνέομαι), [ἰσχάνω, 
ἰσχανάω, P. 747, 5723] ὀχέω bear. 
ἕψω, less Att. ἑψέω, boil, cook ; 
ἑψήσω m. 311, a0.; Hpynka? 1, -μαι, 
εθην, ἴ 1. 


Ζ. 


{dw, live, see 42a, (nude ipf. ἔξην 
r. Dem. 702. 2, later amv. ζῆθι po.); 
ζήσω m., ao. a.; ἔζηκα. The Att. 
preferred ἕάω in the pr. ἃ ipf., but 
elsewhere βιόω q. Vv. Cog. po. or L., 
ζώω, Soph, El. 157, or r. fw. 

ζεύγνυμι (n7, ζυγ-, fevy- ἢ, ef. jug- 
um, jung-o) join, YOKE, I/.; ζεύξω 
M., 20.; “eLevxal., -γμαι, -xOny, f. 1., 
2a. ἐζύγην ; 47. Cog. ζυγόω, ζυγέω. 

ζώννυμι (n°, ζο-) gird, M.; Ἰώσω 
m.1.,a0.; ἔζωκα l., -σμαι, -σθην 307 ἃ. 


Η. 


ἥδω (f g, Fad-) please, M. delight 
in; howl, ao. a. [m. ι. 353]; ἥσθην f. 
Cog. ἁνδάνω q. v.; old pt. as adj. (Fad- 
μενος 148) ἄσμενος pleased, glad ; ἡδύ- 
vw sweeten, ἥδῦνα, Hive was 304 b, -ὕνθην, 
1.-ὑσθην. 

[ἠλαίνω, ἠλάσκω, see ἀλάομαι. 

ἦμαι sit, pret.;. see ἕξω & 46 ο. 


VERBS. 


᾿θνήσκω 77 
hpl Tsay, ἣν 1 said; see φημί & 45u. 
[ἡμύω bow, sink ; ἠἡμύσω, ao. + ; pf. 

8 5. ὑπ-εμνήμῦκε 281 d, X. 491.] 


0. 
θάλλω (1, Gar-) bloom, flourish ; 
θαλλήσω 1. 311, 1 ἃ. “ἔθηλα 1., 2 ἃ. 


ἔθαλον r. or l.; 2 pf. pret. τέθηλα | pt. 
τεθαλυῖα 325e. Cog. Garéw, θαλέθω, 


᾿θηλέω, τηλεθάω.] 


θάπτω (t, θαφ-}) bury; θάψω ao. ; 
τέθαμμαι, ὃ f. τεθάψομαι, [ἐθάφθην 
1.;] 2 ἃ. ἐτάφην f. dt. Cf. τέθηπα. 
θαυμάζω wonder, M. pr. }.; θαυ- 
μάσομαι, less Att. -σω, ao. a, m. 1.; 
τεθαύμακα, -σμαι, ἐθαυμάσθην f.: [π.᾿ 
θωυμάζω or θωμάζω, 1316. Cog. 
θαυμαίνω.] : 
[θε- pray for ; ao. m. 3 p. θέσσαντο 
Pind. N. 5. 18, pt. θεσσάμενος Hes. } 
θείνω (h, θεν-) fendo, strike, smite, 
po.; Seva, [ἔθεινα, . 491,] 2a. ἔθενον. 
«θέλω, wish, will; see ἐθέλω. 
θέρω warm, ch. po., «4. τ. & 1, M. 
θέρομαι - [θέρσομαι 152d, τ. 507 ; 
2a. p. ἐθέρην, p. 23.] Cog. [θέρμω,] 
θερμαίνω. 
θέω (f17, θεΕ-} run, see 42a; θεύ- 
σομαι, -σω 1. ἃ τ΄; ao. & pf. sup- 
plied by τρέχω, &cz 
Onpdw hunt, -dow, &c., see 42 ¢; 
oftenerin Att. prose, θηρεύω, -εύσω, Kc. 
θιγγάνω (πὅ, θιγ-) tango, TOUCH 
(in Att. prose r. & only 2 a., but 
rather ἅπτομαι) ; θίξομαι or -ξω, 2 a. 
ἔθιγον, m. 1.; 3 f. τεθίξομαι 2, ἐθίχθην. 
θλίϑω g, press; θλίψω [m. p. 221], 
ao. a.; τέθλιφα 1., -ιἰμμαι, ἐθλίφθην, 
later 2 a. ἐθχίβην, f. 1.: [φλίβω 1. D. 
168. 2.] 
θνήσκω (ΚΡ, θαν-, Ova- ο5 7) die 
(comm. cp. w. ἀπό in prose, exe. in 
the complete tenses, which are rarely 
cp.); θανοῦμαι (kar-Pavoduacpo. 156d, 
Eur. Med. 1386), 2a. ἔθανον ; τέθνηκα 
(2 pf. pl. ἃ du. τέθναμεν, -are, -ἄσι, 
-ατον, iv. 2.17, 1.19, X.52, ορέ. τεθναίην 
Σ. 98, wmv. τέθναθι X. 365, inf. τεθνά- 
vat Th. 8. 92, po. τεθν(α-ε)ᾶναι ὃ Aisch. 
Ag. 539, pt. reOvaws, Pind. N. 10. 
139, ct. τεθνεώς 1201 & later τεθνώς, 
-ὥσα, -ws & -ds 258 α, τ. 331, vil. 4. 19, 
Hdt. 1. 112, [τεθνηώς or -erws 325 ἃ, 
P. 161,] plp. 3 p. éré@vacav Hel. 6.- 


78 θνήσκω 
4. 16), 8 f. τεθνήξω & -ομαι 819 Ὁ. 
See κτείνω. Cog. θανατόω put to death, 
θανατάω desire death, 818 ἃ. 

θοινάω feast, po., M.; -ἄσομαι ἃ 
-ἥσομαι, &c., 8510 ἃ. 

θορεῖν, θόρνυμαι, Zeap; see θρώσκω. 

θράσσω disturb: see ταράσσω. 

θραύω break ; θραύσω 8ο.; τέθραυ- 
σμαι (τεθραυμαι 3). ἐθραύσθην, f. 1. 

θρύπτω (t, θρυφ-)} crush, M. put on 
airs; θρύψω 1., m., Sao. a.; τέθρυμ- 
μαι, ἐθρύφθην, f. 1., [2 a. © ἐτρύφην 
d}, I’. 363.] Cog. τρυφάω." 

θρώσκω (k*®, Gop-) leap, ch. po:; 
σθοροῦμαι, 2a. ἔθορον. Cog. θόρνυμαι. 

[θύω rush, rage; “btow 1., ἐθῦσα]. 
Cog. θύνω, Oivéw, θυΐω.] 

θύω (v) sacrifice, M.; θύσω m., ao.; 
τέθὑκα, -ὕμαι, ἐτὕθην, f. 1., 159; 44. 


I. 


ἰάλλω (1, ἰαλ-) send, po. (or ἑἱάλλω 
d?); Stara, [Cinra.] Cog. ἅλλομαια.ν. 

[ἰάχω shout, +; pf. δἴαχα pret. B. 
316.] Po. cog. iaxéw, ἰακχέω. 

ἰδεῖν, ἰδέσθαι, sce, 2 ἃ. ; see dpdw. 

ἰδρόω sudo, sweat (for ct. & pro- 
longed forms, see 324);, ἱδρώσω ao. ; 
ἵδρωκα ]., -μαι 1. Cog., iw, Ar. Pax 
85, []. 1. ἱδρώω. 

ἱδρύω ( Ε.) scat, set up, M.; ἱδρύσω 
m., 20.3 ἵδρυκα, -ὕμαι, -ὕθην & -ύνθην 
n}, Τ΄, 78, f. 1. Cog. tfw q. v.- 

ἵεμαι or ἴεμαι hasten ; see 45 p. 

ἵἴζω (j, σεδ-, €6-£%, i6- b?, cf. sedeo, 
sido) SEAT, SET, SIT, ch. po. or dial., 
M. ἵζομαι & ἕζομαι sit ; Cigyow1., ao. 
1., 3lla; f. m. ἔσομαι 151 (ἐφ-έσσε- 
σθαι 1. 455, εἵσομαι 1.}), ao. εἶσα m. 
279 ο, Β. 549, Eur. Iph. T. 946 [pt. 
Celoas, -άμενος, Hdt. 3. 126, 1. 66]; 
ἵζηκα 1., nyo 61, pret., see 46 ο (2 5. 
κάθ-ῃ Acts 23. 8, ef. 381 Ὁ), ἥσθην 1 
In Att. prose, comm. καθίζω, Η-. 
-ἰζομαι & -ἐζομαι ; καθίσω, -1a 305a, 
ii. 1. 4, m.1., f. m. καθιζήσομαι ἃ 
καθεδοῦμαι 305a [καθεδήσομαι l.), ao. 
ἐκάθισα & καθῖσα 282 Ὁ, m., ἐκαθίζη- 
σα 1., [καθεῖσα m. +3] κεκάθικα 1., 
κάθημαι 46 ὁ (comic or 1. dmv. κάθου 
Ja. 2. 8), 8 f. καθήσομαι, ἐκαθέσθην 1., 
ἔ. 1 Cog. ifdvw, ἱδρύω q. ν. 

ἵἕημι (ἑ-, ἴε- τ 8) send (ch. in comp. 
& many forms only so found), J. 


TABLES, 


καθαίρω § 50. 
hasten, desire ; pr. a. ind. 2 8. ἀφ-εῖς 
Rey. 2. 20, 3 p. συν-ιοῦσι Mat. 13. 13, 
pt. συν-ιῶν Rom. 3. 11, [imv. ξύν-ιε, inf. 
συν-ιεῖν, Theog. 1240, 565 ;] ipf. 1s. 
Ciew or Sinv 315 Ὁ, 8 5. ἤφ-ιε 282 Ὁ, 
Mk. 1. 34, 3 p. ἀφ-ίεσαν iv. 5. 30, 
ἠφίεσαν Hel. 4.6.11; how °m., ἧκα 
Cm. 306, 2 a. δεῖμεν “m., A. 642, 
Hier. 7. 11; Seika, ii. 3. 18, δ εἶμαι, 
Th. 1. 6 [ind. 3 p. 1. ἀφ-έωνται D.? 
Lk. 5. 23, ἀν-έωνται or -éovrac Η αὖ. 
2.165 v.1., pt. με-μετ-ιμένος 282 Ὁ, 
167a, Hdt. 6. 1], δεΐθην, Eur. Ph. 
1376, °f. Ven. 7. 11. See also 45k, 
n, r,j, 315. Some forms are made 
as from shorter themes, tw, ἕω. 

ixvéopar (119, ix-), po. “tkdvea n°, 
[m., & ἵκω,]} come, in prose usu. ἀφ- 
ixvéouar: ἵξομαι [ἱξῶ D., Ar. Ach. 
742], ao. a. 1. [ov 327 a], 2a. m. 
ἱκόμην ; typar. Cog. ἥκω 114 ἃ, ixe- 
τεύω supplicate. 

ἱλάσκομοι (k, “t\a-) propitiate [E. 
ἱλάομαι ἃ ἵλαμαι}; tAdoopar ao. ; ἱλά- 
σθην, ἴ. 1. Cog. ἱλέομαι po., ἱλεόομαι, 
[ἃ as fr. ἵλημι be propitious, pr. ime. 
ἵλαθι 297 d, ἵληθι 335 d*, pret. sub. 
& opt. ἱλήκω, ἱλήκοιμι, φ. 365. ] 

trw roll, [ἐπ-ιλλέξω, | see εἰλ-. 

[ἱμάσσω 1, lash ; ao. tuaca, €. 380. ] 

ἱπποτροφέω keep horses ; -ἥσω a0. ; 
ἱπποτρόφηκα or -τετρόφηκα 283 a. 

Yrrapat fly ; see πέτομαι. 

[Yoap. know, D.; see dpdw. 

ἵστημι (1°, ora-, cf. Lat. sta-re) 
statuo, seé wp, STATION, M/.sto, STAND ; 
στήσω I., 20., 2a. ἔστην ; ἕστηκα 
(1. pf. trans. ἕστᾶἄκα & 1 a0. ἔστἄσα ; 
so some explain ἔστασαν M. 56), [2 pf. 
I. ἑστέατε -ἄσι 335, pt. ἑστεώς 1201, 
Hat. 2. 38,] ϑἕσταμαι r., &c. See 45, 
46. Cp. ἐπ-ίσταμαι understand (2 5. 
ἐπίστᾳ 297 h, 1. ἐπίστεαι 322 a, Hat. 
7. 135); ἐπι-στήσομαι ; ἠπιστήθην 
282 Ὁ. Cog. ἱστάνω, 1. στήκω & ἑστή- 
κω, Rom. 14. 4, [στεῦμαι 826 e. | 

ἴσχω, ἰσχνέομαι, hold; see ἔχω. 


Κ. 
καθαίρω (h, καθαρ-) purify, I.; 
καθαρῶ m., ἐκάθηρα m., Vv. 7. 35, & 
éxdOapa, Ec. 18. 8, 152 ¢ ; κεκάθαρκα 
1., -μαι, ἐκαθάρθην, ἴ. 1., 2a. 1. éxa- 


θάρην ? 


§ 50. καθέζομαι 


καθέζομαι, κάθημαι, καθίζω, see ἕξω. 

καθ-εύδω sicep ; see εὕδω & 282 b. 

καίνυμαι (n°, xad-, xacd- h) excel, 
po.; κέκασμαι, Eur. El. 616 [ pt. κε- 
καδμένος D., 148 Ὁ, Pind. O. 1. 42.] 

καίνω (h, καν-) kill, in prose usu. 
cp. w. κατά, i. 6. 2; Kava, 2 ἃ. Exa- 
vov; 2 pf. r. κέκονα or xéxava, 114. 
Cog. κτείνω. 

καίω (ἢ, xaF-, cav-f?, xa- f1, xe- Ὁ) 
burn, also Att. κάω g, 44, 309 Ὁ [κήω 
H. 408 v.1.], .; καύσω, m.7., ἔκαυσα 
Cm. Hdt. 8. 19, éxna m. or éxeca A. 
40, φ. 176,] pt. po. xéas, Ausch. Ag. 
849 ; δκέκαυκα, -μαι, ἐκαύθην f. [2 a. 
ἐκάην BE. 1. +, μ. 18, f. 1] 

καλέω calo, CALL, AZ; καλέσω m., 
[καλέω, I’. 383] Att. usu. καλῷ m., 
305 Ὁ, ἐκάλεσα m.; κέκληκα cf, -μαι 
(opt. 817 ο), ὃ f. κεκλήσομαι, ἐκλήθην ἴ. 
Cog. κικλήσκω po., [κάλημι B. 88 b, 
προ-καλίζομαι σ. 20;] κλητεύω swm- 
mon; κλέω, κλή ζω, celebrate. 

καλινδέω roll ; see κυλῖίνδω. 

κάμνω (n, καμ-) labor ; καμοῦμαι, 
2 ἃ. ἔκαμον [m.]; κέκμηκα οἴ, 308 
[pt. κεκμηώς 325d, Th. 8. 59 2]. 

κάμπτω (t, καμπ-) bend, M.; κάμψω 
a0.; κέκαμμαι 148 a, 41, ἐκάμφθην, f. 1. 
Cog. γνάμπτω po. 

Kaw burn, not ct.; see καίω. 

κεδάννυμι, κεδάω ; see σκεδάννῦμι. 

κεῖμαι(οἱ, xee-; butaccented without 
regard to the contraction, & deemed 
by some a pret.) die (cf. quie-sco), see 
4δ α,γ1τ [2 5: κατά-κειαι 297 ἢ, Hom. 
Mere. 254, 8 5. κέσκετο 332d, 3 p. 
κέαται, -To 329 a, κέονται (as fr. xe-, 


315) X. 510; sub. 3s. ct. κῆται or| KA 


(κέεται 326.) κεῖται 2. 554; old pr. as 
fut. xéw, 7. 342, κείω τ. 340, § 305f]. 

κείρω (h, καρ-, xep- b) shear, M.; 
κερῶ m., ἔκειρα m. [ἔκερσα m. 152 ἃ, 
N. 546]; °xéxapxa 1]., -μαε, [1 a. pt. 
kepOels, Pind. P. 4. 146,] 2 a. ἐκάρην 
I. or 1. : 

κεκαδήσω, κεκαδών, see χάζω. 

κεκαδήσομαι, see κήδω vex. 

κέλομαι command, po. +, ch. Ε-; 
κελήσομαν ao. 311 b, 2a. κεκλόμην or 
ἐκεκλόμην 2846. Cog. {κέκλομαι 1., | 
κελεύω, -εύσω, 307 Ὁ. 

κεντέω (v, κεντ-) prick ; κεντήσω 
80. Linf. κένσαι 156 Ὁ, Ψ, 337]; &e. 

κεράννυμι (1%, κερα-) mix; κεράσω 


VERBS. 


κλίνω 79. 
1., m. 1., a0., [ἔκρησα E. τ., η. 1647; 
κεκέρακα ]., κέκράμαι οὗ & 1. κεκέρα- 
σμαι, ἐκράθην ἴ., Th. 6. ὅ, & ἐκεράσθην, 
v. 4. 29: [xepdw E.+, κέραιε 822 ο,] 
po., 1, or 1. κερνάω & xipynus n®, Ὁ. 

κερδαίνω (n°, κερδ-) gain; Kepda- 
v@, éxépdava 152¢, [1. or L κερδήσω 
m., a0. @., 3115] κεκέρδηκα (1. -axa 
or -ayxa), -nuac l., ἐκερδάνθην 1. 

κεύθω (h, κυθ-) hide, po.; κεύσω 
[°ao., 2 a. ἔκυθον y. 16, ὃ 2846 5] 
2 pf. pret. κέκευθα, [xéxev0uaer. Cog. 
κευθάνω, I, 453. ] 

[κήδω (g, xad-) vex; Kndhow “ao. 
3llc; 2 pf. pret. κέκηδα sorrow. | 
M. κήδομαι sorrow, care; ἐκηδεσάμην 
r., Aisch. Th. 138 ; [8 f. κεκαδήσομαι, 
9.353. Cp. ἀ-κηδέω + neglect, -ἡσω]., 
ἀκήδεσα, =. 427. ] 

κίδνημι spread ; see σκεδάννῦμι. 

kivéw, -ἦσω, &c., move; M. [& κί- 
νυμαι, Δ. 281.] Cog. «lw go, po., [ pt. 
κιών - 2 ἃ. μετ-εκίαθον 353.a, Σ. 581.] 

κιχάἄνω m.,] Att. Kuyydve, v. 1. κι- 
χἄνω (n®, πὃ, Kex-) find, po.; κιχή- 
σομαι, [-σω l., ao. a. 1., m.,] 2a. ἔκι- 
xo. [Cog. κίχημι {(κιχε- V3 not in 
pr. ind.), m. pt. κιχήμενος 314 b.]. 

κίχρημι lend ; see χράω. 

κλάζω (138, κλαγ-, κλαγγ- n°) clan- 
go, scream, CLANG, ch. po.; κλάγξω 
ao., 2a. Exdayov; 2 pf. pret. κέκλαγ- 
ya, Ven. 3. 9 [κέκληγα, B. 222, pf. 
κεκλήγοντες 326 "Ὁ, ἕξ. 30, but -Gres 
Bek.], 3 f. κεκλάγξομαι 8519}. Po. cog. 
κλαγγάνω +, κλαγγαίνω, κλαγγέω. 

κλαίω (h, κλαξ-, κλαυ- 3, κλα- [1 
weep, also Att. κλάω g, 809», IZ; 
αὔσομαι, -σω 1. (-οῦμαι 305d, Ar. 
Pax 1081), also Att. κλαιήσω or κλᾶ- 
yow 511 ο, ἔκλαυσα m. [2 a.? ExdAdov, 
Theoc. 14. 32]; κέκλαυμαι (-σμαι 1.), 
3 f. κεκλαύσομαι, ἐκλαύσθην f. 1. 

KAdw break, M.; κλάσω 1., °m. 1., 
ao. a., m. 1., [nude 2 a. pt. ἀπο-κλάς 
Anac. 17]; κέκλασμαι, ἐκλάσθην Ff. 

κλείω claudo, shut ; κλείσω, ao. a. 
“m.; κέκλεικα, -μαι & -σμαι 807 6, 
3f. κεκλείσομαι, ἐκλείσθην ἴ.: [1. κληΐω, 
ἐκλήϊσα, &c.;] older Att. κλήω, -ἥσω. 

κλέπτω (t, κλαπ-, κλεπ- b) clepo, 
steal, °M.1.; κλέψω m., a0. α.; κέ- 
κλοφα 312 ο, κέκλεμμαι, ἐκλέφθην, . 
comm. 2 ἃ. ἐκλάπην. 

κλίνω (σ, κλίν-) clino, bend, INCLINE, 


‘80 κλίνω 
M.; κλινῷῶ ©m., Awa m.; κέκλικα 
1., -μαι, 804, ἐκλίθην f. [ἐκλίνθην +], 
2 ἃ. ϑἐκλίνην “fF. 

κλύω hear, po.; ipf. ἔκλυον also as 
ao.; nude 2 ἃ. imv. κλῦθι A. 37 [κέ- 
κλῦθι 284 6, K. 284, m. pt. κλύμενος 
_ in-cliftus ; κέκλυκα Epich. ] 

Kvaw scrape, M., see 120g; κνήσω, 
&e. (ἐκνήύσθην 307d). Cog. κναίω, 
κνίζω, κνήθω 1, Kviw po. 

κολούω maim; κολούσω 1., ao.; 
κεκόλουμαε or -σμαι }., ἐκολούθην or 
-σθην, f. 1., 801 8. ' 

κομίζω (13, κομιδ-} bring ; see 39 6. 
' κόπτω (t, κοπ-)} cut, M. bewail ; 
κόψω, f. }., a0.; “xéxoda [2 pf. pt. 
κεκοπώς N. 60], κέκομμαι, 3 f. ὃ κεκό- 
ψομαι, i. 5. 16, 2 ἃ. ἐκόπην f. 

κορέννυμι (n®, Kxope-} satiate, eh. 
po., J.; (pees Hdt. 3. 212, m. 1., 
kopéw, 305 b, 828 ο, N. 831,] ἐκόρεσα 
[m.; 2 pf. pt. intrans. κεκορηώς 325 ἃ, 
σ. 372,|} κεκόρεσμαι [-ἡμαι E. 1.1, 3 f. 
κεκορήσομα: 1., ἐκορέσθην, f. 1.: κορέω 
& κορέσκω Υ. 1. 

κορύσσω (12, κορυθ-} arm, po., .77.; 
fao. pt. κορυσσάμενος T. 897 ; κεκορυ- 
θμένος 148 Ὁ, P. 8 +.] 

[κοτέω + be angry, M.; κοτέσσο- 
pou? a. 101, ao. a. m.; 2 pf. pt. Ke- 
κοτηώς 325d, &. 456.} Cog. κοταίνω 
po., Asch. Th. 485. 


κράζω (72, κραγ-) ery out, pr. 7.3} 


κράξω 1., m.1., ao. a. 1., 2 a. © ἔκρα- 
yov v. 1. 14; 2 pf. pret. κέκραγα vii. 
8. 15 (imv. κέκραχθι 320 ἢ), 3 f. κε- 
κράξομαι 319 Ὁ. Cog. κεκράγω 1. 326 ο, 
κλάζω q. V., κρώζω CROAK, κλώζω. 

κραίνω (h, xpav-) fulfil, po. & I. 
[κραιαίνω 135]; κρανῶ m., Expava, m. 
]., [ἔκρηνα, ἐκρήηνα, 130 a, 135 ;] pf. 
p. 8 5. κέκρανται Eur. Hipp. 1255 (or 
3 p. for -av-vrai?), ἐκράνθην f. 


suspend, hang; κρεμάσω, Att. κρεμῶ 
[κρεμόω 322 c], éxpéuaca m.; κεκρέμα- 
σμαι 1., ἐκρεμάσθην. Cog. κρέμαμαι, 
-ἥσομαι, iv. 1. 2 ; κρήμνημι po. or |. 

κρίζω (152, κριγ- or κρικ-Ὶ CREAK, 
po.; ἔκριξα 1., [2 ἃ. 8 5. κρίκε or κρίγε 
ΤΠ. 470 ;] 2 pf. pt. κεκρτγότες Ar. Av. 
1521. 

κρίνω (g, Kpiv-) judge, M.; κρινῶ 
Mm., Expiva.m.; κέκρικα, -μαι, ἐκρίθην 
f. [ἐκρίνθην), 804. Cp. ἀπο-κρίνομαι 


TABLES. 


λαγχάνω § 50. 
answer, -κρινοῦμαι, -κέκρίμαι, a0. ἀπ- 
εκρινάμην & later -εκῥίθην. 

κρούω beat, M.; κρούσω ηι., a0.m.; 
κέκρουκα, ὅ-μαι & ©-cuar, ἐκρούσθην, 
907 6. [Cog. κροαίνω stamp, Z. δ07.} 

κρύπτω (t, κρυβ- & κρυφ-} conceal, 
hide, M.; [iter. κρύπτασκον 892 6 :} 
κρύψω m., av., 2 ἃ. “ ἔκρυβον m. 1.; 


᾿κέκρυφα, -μμαι,[9 ζ. κεκρύψομαι Hipp. | 


ἐκρύφθην, f. 1., later 2 a. ἐκρύφην τ΄ or 
ἐκρύβην f.: 1. ὃ κρύβω & κρύφω. 
κτάομαι aequire ; κτήσομαι ao.; 
κέκτημαι & less Att. ἔκτημαι 280 Ὁ, 
have acquired, pret. possess (κεκτῶμαι, 
-ἥμην or -ᾧμην, 8170}, 8 £. κεκτήσομαι 


(τ. ἐκτ-), ἐκτήθην as pass., f. 1. 


κτείνω (ἢ, κτα-, κταν- τι, κτεν- b) 
kill (usu. ep. with ἀπό, or κατά po.); 
Kteva [xravéw m., Σ. 309], Exrewa, 
2 ἃ. po.+ ἔκτανον, po. ἔκτὰν m. 314d; 
2 pf. “ἔκτονα, later 1 pf. © éxrayxa, 
®éxraxa, & " ἐκτόνηκα, pf. p. inf. ὃ ἐκ- 


'τάνθαι Polyb. 7. 7, [ἐκτάθην) ἐκτάν- - 


θην 1. Cog. κτίννῦμι Ὁ, vi. 3. 5, or 
κτείνῦμε τι; καίνω ἃ. γ. As the pass. 
of κτείνω, the Att. comm. used θνήσκω. 

κτίζω (z, xri-) build ; κτίσω, ao. 
a., m. po. r., [2 a. pt. ἐὺ-κτίμενος, B. 
501 ;} κέκτικα or éxrexa 1. 280 ¢, ἔκ- 
τισμαι, -σθην, f. 1 

κτυπέω v, sound, crash, ch. po., M.; 
ἐκτύπησα, [2 a. ἔκτυπον +, Θ. 75.} 

κυλίνδω οἱ, κυλινδέω v, & τ. or I. 
κυλίω, roll, M.; κυλινδήσω 1., ὃ κυλί- 
σομαι]., ἐκύλισα, ©m. 1.3 κεκύλισμαι, 
ἐκυλίσθην f., ἐκυλινδήθην t. Cog. κα- 
λινδέω m.; ἀλίνδω or -έω, m. Ἰ., 5 ἤλι- 
σα, δἤλικα. 

κυνέω (n®, κυ-} kiss, po. +; κύσω 
1., a0., [κυνήσομαι τ., το. a. 1.) Cp. 
προσ-κυνέω worship, -ἤἥσω, &c. Cog. 


-kvéw (-how), κύω (ἔκῦσα), κυΐσκω, con- 
ceive. 

, sod 8 , 
κρεμάννυμι (n°, xpeua-) & 1. kpepco | 


Kipo m. & κύὕρέω (g, v, κῦρ-) meet, 
chance, po., 1., or 1.; κύρσω ao. 152d, 
& κυρήσω a0.; κεκύρηκα, -μαι. 


A. 


λαγχάνω (n®, Aax-, Anx- δ, λεγχ- 
πῃ by) obterin by lot; λήξομαι [λάξομαι, 
Hat. 7. 144], 2 a. ἔλαχον fredupl. & 
causative, 284e]; εἴληχα 281, λέ- 
λογχα po., 1., 071. [λελόγχᾶσι 328 οἷ, 
184 4], εἔληγμαι, ἐλήχθην. 


§ 50. λαμβάνω 

λαμβάνω (n5, λαβ-, ληβ- g) take, 
M. lay hold of; Χήψομαι, -ψω 1., 
2 a. ἔλαβον nv. [redupl. 284 6] ; εἴλη- 
da 281, εἴλημμαι & po. λέλημμαι, 3 Ὁ 
Crernvouae 1., ἐλήφθην f. (᾿ εἰλήφθην 
281 Ὁ) : [Ion. f. λάμψομαι n¥, ao.°a. 
m. Y., λελάβηκα Vv, δ λέλαμμαι, ἐλάμ- 
φθην, Hdt. 9. 108, 51, 119, 4. 79: 
Hellen. λήμψομαι, δέἐλήμφθην, Acts 
1. 8, 2.] Po. & I. cog. λάζυμαι & λά- 
fouat. 

λάμπω shine, M.; λάμψω [°m. 1.], 
ao. a.; 2 pf. pret. λέλαμπα, © ἐλάμ- 
φθην]., °f. 1. [Cog. λαμπετάω.] 

λανθάνω & ch. po. λήθω (n°, g, 
λαθ-} lateo, lie hid, escape notice; M. 
forget, in prose usu. cp. w. ἐπέ - λήσω 
Mm., 20. ὦ. po. +, m. 1., 2 a. ἔλαθον 
m. [redupl. 284 e]; 2 pf. λέληθα, λέ- 
λησμαι [-ασμαι, E. 834], 3 f. λελήσο- 
pat, Eur. Ale. 198, [ἐλήσθην °f. 1. -Ε. 
Cog. ἐκ-ληθάνω cause to forget, ἡ. 221. ] 

λάσκω (k%, λὰκ-, cf. loquor) sownd, 
utter, po. +; λακήσομαι, ao. a, 2 a. 
ἔλακον m. [redupl. 284 6] ; 2 pf. pret. 
λέλακα 312a [-nKa, pt. λελᾶκυϊα 325 6]. 
Po. cog. λακάζω Aisch., [ληκέω.] 

[Adw, a Dor. pres. = ἐθέλω wish ; 
ind. ct. λῶ, λῇς, A, λῶμες, λῆτε, 
λῶντι, &c., 131 ο, 828 a, Ar. Lys., ὅζο. 
Cog. λιλαίομαι r1 h, desire eagerly ; 
pret. λελίημαι, M. 106.] 

λέγω lego, Germ. legen, LAY, 
gather, (Att. only in comp., esp. w. 
σύν,) M.; Χέξω m., ao., [nude 2 a. 
ἐλέγμην 326 e, ι. 335, tmv. λέξο & λέξεο 
8278, I. 617, inf. ©Aéx Oar, pt. ©ré- 
" ypevos ;| δεἴλοχα (°-exa 1.) 281, 312¢, 
Dem. 522. 12, δλέλεγμαι, more Att. 
Οεὔἴλεγμαι, Th. 2. 10, ἐλέχθην, °f. 1., 
usu. in Att. 2 ao. δέἐλέγην “ἢ, Some 
have inferred a second stem, λεχ-, 
fr. the noun λέχος, bed. 

λέγω say, tell (the same in origin 
with the preceding, & borrowing, ch. 
]., some of its special forms), JZ; 
λέξω ., ao. a.°m.; λέλεχα 1]. (classic 
εἴρηκα, see φημί), λέλεγμαι, 3 f. λε- 
λέξομαι, ἐλέχθην f. Cog. λογέζομαι 
reckon. 

λείβω libo, powr, po. εἴβω 61, II. 
11, Μ΄; ἔλειψα m. 

λείπω (h, λιπ-) linquo, LEAVE, r. 
λιμπάνω n®, M. remain [ipf. ἔλει- 
πτο 326e, Ap. Rh. 1. 45]; λείψω m., 


GR. TAB. 4* 


VERBS. 


μάομαι 81 
ao. 1., 2 ἃ. ἔλιπον m., 88 ; 2 pf. λέ- 
λοιπα, λέλειμμαι, 3 f. λελεέψομαι, 
ἐλείφθην f., 2 ἃ. ἐλίπην 1., +? 
λείχω lingo, Germ. lecken, LICK, 
not in Att. prose ; λείξω 1., ao.; [2 pf. 
pt. λελειχμώς οἱ, Hes. Th. 826], 
CéreixOnv 1. Cog. λιχμάω, λιχμάζω. 
λέπω (b, λαπ-)} peel, ch. po., I; 
σλέψω δο.; [“λέλεμμαι Epich. 109, ] 
Οἐλάπην, f. 1. 7. 
λεύσσω LOOK,;.-po.; λεύσω ao. 1. 
λήθω, ληθάνω, 566 λανθάνω. 
ληΐζομαι plunder, 41. τ.; ἱληΐσο- 
pat] ao.; λελήϊσμαι, [ἐληΐσθην.] In 
Att., some would contract the yt into 
q throughout. Cog. λῃστεύω. 
Aryy-; a0. λίγξε twanged (both 
onomatopes), 337 a, A. 125. 
[λιλαίομαι, λελίημαι ; see Adw.] 
λιμπάνω leave, ΤῊ. 8.17 ; see Xeirw. 
λίσσομαι 15, τ. λίτομαι, pray, po. + ; 
[ἐλισάμην, X. 35, 2a. ἐλιτόμην, 11. 47.} 
Ad@ & λούω (f12, AoF-) lavo, wash, 
esp. the body, JZ. bathe (the et. forms 
from λόω, as ἔλου, λοῦμαι, λοῦται, &c., 
are the more common ; pr. @. r.) ; 
[λούσω] m., a0. a. m.; λέλουμαι, ἐλού- 
θην, -σθην 1.: [E. λοέω v, -éow 1., m., 
ao., § 221, 227; τ. Aovéw.]} 
λύω [usu. ¥ Hom.|} loose, see 37, 
48 Ὁ ; [iter. (ἀνα-λ) ἀλλύεσκεν 332, 
136; 2a. m. ἐλύμην 313 b, Φ. 80,114: 
pf. opt. λελῦντο or -ῦτο σ. 238, § 317 c.} 


M. 


μαίνω (ἢ, μαν-) madden, oftener 
μαίνομαι be mad, rave; [μανοῦμαι 
r., Hdt. 1. 109,] ἔμηνα [m. +]; με- 
μάνηκα }., -μαι 1., 2 pf. pret. μέμηνα 
am mad, 2a. ἐμάνην, f. 1. Cog., 

μαίομαι seek, po. +; see μάομαι. 

μανθάνω (πη, μαθ-) learn; μαθή- 
σομαι [μαθεῦμαι᾽ D. 80 ἃ], 2 ἃ. ἔμα- 
Gov ; μεμάθηκα, -μαι 1. 

μάομαι & μαίομαι h, desire eagerly, 
feel after, po. +; [μάσομαι “ao., λ. 
591]; 2 pf. pret. μέμονα n Ὁ, am 
eager, Aisch. Th. 686, [pl. μέμαμεν, 
-aTe, -ddo., H. 260, imv. μεμάτω A. 
304, pt. weudws A. 40, plp. 3 p. μέ- 
μασαν B. 863, 8 320e, 325d. The 
Dor. has forms as fr. μω-, ch. nude 
or ct., as 8 5. μῶται, imv. μῶσο or 
μώεο (Mem. 2. 1. 20), inf. μῶσθαι 

F 


82 μάομαι 


(PI. Crat. 406 4).1] Cog. μαιμάω po., 
μνάομαι W200, μαίνομαι rage, &c. 


μάρναμαι fight, po.; sub. de. μάρ-" 


νωμαι, -αἰμὴν (υ. 1. -οίμεθα 315"), -ao 
Ο. 475, -ασθαι, -άμενος ; ipf. ἐμαρνά- 
μην, H. 300, Eur, Ph. 1142. 
μάρπτω (t, μαρπ-) seize, po.; μάρψω 
ao., Ar. Eq» 197, [2 a. ἔμαρπον or 
ἔμαπον 61 (redupl. 284e); pépaprra. | 
᾿ μάσσω (i1, way-) knead, M.; μάξω 
Cm.,a0.; μέμαχα, -Ὑμαι, ἐμάχθην po., 
2a. δἐμάγην. : 
μάχομαι fight [μαχέομαι, A, 272, 
pt. -ειόμενος or -εούμενος 134 a, p. 471, 
A. 403]; μαχέσομαι ao., [-έομαι, Β. 
366] Att. μαχοῦμαι, E. & 1. μαχήσο- 
μαι a0.; μεμάχημαι (-εσμαι 1), ἐμα- 
χέσθην f. 1.; 511 ἃ. Cf. di-mico. 
ἔδω ἃ -éw protect, rule, po. +; M. 
pedopar care for, devise ; [μεδήσομαι 
311, I. 650.] Cog. μήδομαι q. v. 
Cf. moderor, medeor, meditor. 
μεθύσκω (k1, μεθυ-) intoxicate, 
379 b, M.; μεθύσω 1., a0.; μεμέθυ- 
σμαι]., ἐμεθύσθην, f.1.: peOdwintrans., 
be intoxicated. 
μειδιάω (μειδα-, μειδια-) smile ; 
ἐμειδίασα [ἐμείδησα 0. 47]. 
[μείρομαι (h, μαρ-, μερ- Ὁ) obtain, 
I. 616; 2 pf. ἔμμορα 284d, 1. ἔμμορον 
‘as 2a. 326 b, | εἕἵμαρμαι 281 (as if for 
σε-σμαρ-μαι, ἑεμαρμαι 141, 142), Pl, 
[l. μεμόρηκα, -μαι & μέμορμαι.: 


μέλλω be about to, intend, delay ;| 


μελλήσω 311, m. 1., ἐμέλλησα & ἠμέλ- 
Anoa 279 a. 
μέλω concern (often impers.), JZ. 
(in prose ch. ep. w. ἐπί or μετά) care 
for, concern; μελήσω [m. A. 523] 
80. a.; [2 pf. μέμηλα ch. pret., B. 25,] 
μεμέληκα, -μαι [3 5. syne. μέμβλεται, 
το, 146, 311d, T. 848, Φ. 516], 
ἐμελήθην δῖ, Cp. ἐπιμέλομαι & -με- 
λέομαι v, care for, -μελήσομαι, ao. 1., 
:μεμέλημαι, ἐπεμελήθην f. Der. pe- 
λετάω study, practice. “ 
μέμονα am eager; see μάομαι. 
μένω aneo, TEMAIN, Wait ; μενῶ, 
ἔμεινα " μεμένηκα 311 b (2 pf. μέμονα 
Eur. Iph. A. 1495). Po. cog. μέίμνω 
ri¢?, Asch. Ag. 74, [μιμνάζω.] 
μήδομαι devise, po., Φ. 413; μή- 
σομαι, ao. Aisch. Pr. 477 ; see μέδω. 
μηκάομαι ? (g u, μακ-) bleat; [2a. 
pt. μακών σ. 98; 2pf. pret. pt. μεμη- 


TABLES, 


νάσσω § 50. 
κώς, μεμακυῖα 325 6, 2 plp. ἐμέμηκον 
926 Ὁ. Like onomatopes, μυκάομαι, 
βληχάομαι, βρυχάομαι. 

μιαίνω (ἢ, μιαν-) stain, 5}7.; μια.- 
va, ἐμίανα & less Att. -ηνα Ἰῦῶο; 
μεμίαγκα 1., -ασμα: & 1. -αμμαι 804}, 
ἐμιάνθην f. [8 p. μιάνθην 880}, 134, 
Δ. 146.] 

μίγνυμι (n7, μιγ-) & μίσγω 350, 
misceo, Germ. mischen, Mix, J/.; 
μίξω [m.,] ao. a., m. 1., [nude 2 a. éuly- 
μὴν 620 6:] pépryal., -γμαι, 3 ἢ, με- 
μίξομαι, ἐμίχθην f., 2 ἃ. ἐμίγην f. 
274b*%. [(ορ. μιγάζομαι, θ. 271.] 

μιμνήσκω (r+ k®, μνα-) remind (cf. 
moneo), J/. re-miniscor, 7¢-MEMBER,- 
MENTION 3 PVATWN., 80. α., 1. PO. +3 
μέμνημαι memini, remember, pret. 
268 [2 5. μέμνηαι, -vy, 3831 Ὁ], sud. 
&e. μεμνῶμαι, -ἡμην or -wuny, -noo 
[μέμνεο 140, 134, Hdt. 5. 105]; &c., 
317s, 3 ἢ, μέμνήσομαι, ἐμνήσθην f. 
307 6. The old J/. μνάομαι [remem- 
ber, heed, pay attention to, ipf. 3 p.. 
ἐμνώοντο 322.c, pt. μνωόμενος, 6. 106, 
& by like protraction dmv. μνώεο Ap. 
R. 1. 896] passed into the sense of 
solicit, court, woo (in Att., cp. w. 
πρό, vii. 3. 18); ἐμνησάμην. Cog. 
[μνήσκω remind ;| μνηστεύω woo; μνὴ- 
μονεύω remember, -σω, ἐμνημόνευκα 
280. 
μίσγω misceo, mix ; see μίγνυμι. 
μνάομαι, μνημονεύω, see μιμνήσκω. 
μολοῦμαι, 1. pr. μολέω go; see 
βλώσκω. 

μύζω, -έω, 1.°-de, suck; ἐμύζησα.. 

μυθέω, -ἤσω, &e., say, po. +; [μυ- 
θεῖαι, μυθέαι, 323 e. | 

μνκάομαι (g ἃ, μῦκ-) miigio, low, 
bellow, A. 1.; μυκήσομαι ao., [2 a, 
ἔμῦκον, E. 749 ; 2 pf. pret. μέμυκα Ἐ, 
=. 580.] See μηκάομαι, ἃ pf. of 

piw shut eyes or lips; pice 1., 
ao.; pépuka, 310d. Late καμμύω 
for κατα-μύω 136, Mat. 13. 15. 


N. 


ναίω (h, va-) dwell, settle, po.; 
[νάσσομαι, ao. a.] m.; νένασμαι l., 
ἐνάσθην. Der. ναιετάω po. [ναιετάωσα 
or -άουσα 822 ο]. 

νάσσω i, stuff, pr. 1.; [ἔναξα, φ. 
122 ;| νένασμαι, ΑΥ.,᾿νέναγμαι l.+. 


νεικέω 


§ 50. 


[νεικέω, -elw 828 ο, chide; νεικέσω, 
ao. I’. 59.] 

νέμω distribute, pasture, M. possess, 
feed; νεμῶ m. (1. νεμήσω m., ao., 
311 Ὁ), ἔνειμα m.; δ νενέμηκα, -μαι, 
vii. 8. 21, ἐνεμήθην (-ἐθην v. 1.}, ἴ 1. 
Cog. νωμάωῳ τι", νομεύω, [νεμέθω.] 

νέομαν [ct. νεῦμαι Σ. 136] go, come 
(also as fut. 305 f), po. +, Cyr. 4. 1. 
11. Po. cog. viccouat, f. νίσομαι ao. 

σνεφέω v, nubilo, gather clouds (cp. 
w. συν); °vephow 1.; Svévoda Ar. 

véw (f, veF-) no, nato, swim, 809 Ὁ ; 
νευσοῦμαν or νεύσομαι 305 ἃ, iv. 3. 
12, °évevoa ; “vévevxa Pl. Rep. 441 ¢. 
Cog. νήχω ch. po. 

σνέω Hdt., heap up; vow Suid., 
ἔνησα, m. 1.; vévnuat, v. 4. 27, & -σμαι 
Ar. Nub. 1203, ἐνήθην ὃ -σθην 1., 307¢. 
[Cog. νηέω, Svnvéw.| 

[νέω, Hes. Op. 775] ἃ νήθω q 3, neo, 
spin; view, ἔνησα ἴηι. ἡ. 198] ; νέ- 
νησμαι 1., ἐνήθην. Cog. νάω ? 

νίζω (17, νιῴ- or νιβ-)}, & ch. 1. vi- 
πτω t, wash hands or feet, 1; νίψω 
m., 20.; νένιμμαι, [5 ἐνίέφθην Hipp., ] 
2 f. νιφήσομαι 1. Lxx. Cog.? νίφω, 
-ψω, &¢., ningo, snow (cf. nix, nivis). 

νοέω, -ἤσω, &c., think; [1. ὦ for 
οἡη 131 f.] 


ἘΞ 
ξέω scrape ; [ἔξεσα HE. 81 :] ἔξεσμαι, 
«σθην]. Cog. ξαίνω, ξύω Evpéw shave. 
ξηραίνω dry ; -avam., ao. a. 152¢ 
[ay-Enpdvy for dva-Enpdvy, 136, Φ. 
347]; ἐξήρασμαι &c. 804}, -άνθην, f. 1. 


Ο. 


ὀδάξω (Κὅ, δακ-, ὁδακ- Ὁ, cf. δάκνω), 
-έω, -dw 1., feel w bite, bite, M.; [ὁδα- 
ξήσομαι 311, Hipp.], ὠδαξάμην 1. ; 
ὦδαγμαι. 
᾿ς ὁδοιπορέω travel, δδοποιέω make a 
road ; -σω, &c.; ὡδουπόρηκα & ὁδοι- 
πεπόρηκα - ὡδοπεποίηκα, -μαι & ὧδο- 
ποίημαι" 288 ἃ. 
[ὀδυ- be angry, cf. odi; ὠδύσάμην -Ἐ, 
a. 62; ὀδώδυσμαι pret., ε. 423.] 
ὀδύρομαι, & trag. δύρομαι lament ; 
ὀδύυροῦμαι, ὠδυράμην ; ὠδύρθην 1. 
᾿ hee ( ἣν 66-) Sige t oleo, emit ODOR; 
ow |-éow Hipp.] ao., 311; 2 pf. 
Sheba : [ὄσδω D. m., 170 a, Theoe.] 


VERBS. 


ὀμόργνῦμι 83 

οἴγω & οἴγνυμι n7, open, very r. in 
prose exc. in comp., ch. with ἀνά & 
διά > olf, ᾧξα [dita 132, a. 436]; dy- 
θην. Cp. ἀν-οίγω ἃ ἀν-οίγνυμι, ΗΓ. 
1.; ἀνοίξω, ἀνέῳξα, Th. 2. 2, ἃ τ. ἤνοιξα — 
[ἀνῷξα po.], 279 Ὁ, 282b, m. τ. 1.; 
ἀνέῳχα, 2 pf. ἀνέῳγα ch. 1., ἀνέῳγμαι, 
Th. 2. 4, ἤνοιγμαι 1. [ἀνῷγμαι Ρο.], 
8 f. ἀνεῴξομαι Hel. 5.1.14, ἀνεῴχθην 
(sub. ἀνοίχθω, &c.), ἠνοίχθην ἴ. 1., 
2 ἃ. ἠνοίγην ἴ.1. Even a triple aug- 
ment occurs late: ἠνέῳξα, ἠνεῴχθην, 
Lxx. 

οἶδα know, εἴσομαι " see 46 & ὁράω. 

οἰδ-έω, -άνω, l.-dw ἃ -αίνω, swell, 
M. τ.; οἰδήσω Hipp., ao.; ᾧδηκα. 

οἰκτείρω h, pity ; οἰκτερῶ, ᾧκτειρα - 
late οἰκτειρήσω Rom. 9. 15, ao. a. p. 

οἰνοχοέω, -ἤσω, pour wine ; 279 Ὁ. 

οἴομαν opinor, think (nude 1 5. 
οἶμαι, ipf. @unv, 313 6 ; 2s. οἴει 297 ἢ; 
οἰήσομαι 811 ο, ao. 1.; φήθην, f. 1: 
[ὀΐομαι 132, τὰ. 644, ὠϊσάμην (ὀϊσ- in 
Hom., a. 323), ὠΐσθην. A. (pr. 1 5. 
only) οἴω, τ. usu: ὀΐω A. 59, Lac. οἰῶ 
Ar. Lys. 81; in 6t- or ὠϊ-, usu. ὦ] 

οἰστράω goad, -how; aug. 278 d. 

οἴχομαι go, be gone; οἰχήσομαι 
311; οἴχωκα or ᾧχωκα 312d, Soph. 
Aj. 896, ᾧχηκα E.? & 1., οἴχημαι or 
OX IMAL. 

ὀκέλλω (p, Ked-) run ashore, Vii. 
5. 12; κέλσω ao. po. 152d, ὥκειλα. 

ὀλισθάνω, τ. or 1. -αίνω (n4, n°, 
ὀλισθ-), slip, slide ; ὀλισθήσω |., ao. 
ch. 1., 2 ao. ὥλισθον, Soph. El. 746 ; 
ὠλίσθηκα Hipp. & 1. 

ὄλλυμι (ὀλ- 351. 4) perdo, destroy, 
lose, (po. or 1. exc. in comp., ch. with 
ἀπό,) M. perish; ὀλέσω 311d, [1. 
ὀλέω m.] Att. ὀλῶ m., ὥλεσα, m. 1., 
2 ἃ. m. ὠλόμην [ pt. οὐλόμενος + 134a, 
A. 2]; δὀλώλεκα, perdidi, 2 pf. pret. 
ὄλωλα perii, am undone, ὀλώλεσμαι l., 
ὠλέσθην, f. 1. [Cog. ὀλέκω m. +, A. 
10, ὀλέω, T. 135 v. 1.} 

ὁμαρτέω accompany, meet, po. +; 
[ipf. du. ὁμαρτήτην 323 f. ;] ὁμαρτήσω 
ao., v. 87, [2 a. Suapror |. | 

ὄμνυμι (n7, du-, duo- w) swear, <M. ; 
ὀμοῦμαι 152 (1. ὀμόσω m.), ὥμοσα ©m.; 
ὀμώμοκα, -μαι & -σμαι 307 6 (ὥμω- 
σμαι 1.)}, ὠμόθην & -σθην f.: [186. f. 
ὀμιώμεθα, 323 [5.} : 

ὀμόργνυμι (n7, ὀμοργ-) wipe, po. Ἔ, 


84 ὀμόργνῦμι 
M.; ὀμόρξω ὅδηι., ao. δα. m., θ. 88, 
Pl. Gorg. 525a; δ ὠμόρχθην. 

ὀνίνημι (dva- 357. 2) benefit, M.; 
ὀνήσωηι., a0. a., m.1., 2a.inf.drvivac ὃ, 
m. ὠνήμην 314 Ὁ & -άμην, opt. ὀναίμην, 
[imv. &vnoo r. 68), inf. ὄνασθαι [-ἡσθαι 
I., pt. -juevos β. 33 ;] Gvnuacl., -θην. 

[ὄνομαι (dvo-) scorn, E. & 1.; pr. & 
ipf. nude, cf. δίδομαι 45; ὀνόσομαι 
a0.; °dvicOnv. Fr. ὁν-, pr. οὔνεσθε 
(134a) 0. 241, & 1 ἃ. ὥνατο P. 25, 
if these forms are genuine. | 

ὀπυίω or ὀπύω marry} ὀπύσω- 
ὥπυσμαι : according to some, -vt- be- 
fore a vowel, -v- before a consonant. 

ὁράω (dpa-) see, M., ipf. ἑώρ(αονγων 
279 Ὁ, [ὁρέω 1., -όω E., ipf. ὥρεον or 
ὥρων 1., 48 ο, 322 ;] ἑώρᾶκα & esp. in 
comedy ἑόρακα, -μαι (later than ὧμ- 
μαι, Isoc. Antid.), ἑωράθην f. 1.: (fr. 
ὁπ- x) f. ὄψομαι (2s. ὄψει 297 f), ao. 
r.; 2 pf. ὄπωπα po. & 1.4, Spat, 
Aisch. Pr. 998, ὥφθην f.: (fr. Fi8- x, 
cf. video) 2 a. εἶδον, m. ch. po. or 1.; 
279 ο, sub. ἴδω, ἴδωμαι, &c. (imv. ἴδε, 
ἰδοῦ, or as exclam. ἐδέ, ἰδού); 2 pf. 
οἶδα (1 have seen, hence) 7 know 
(46, 320, & below) ; Aid. (ch. po.) 
εἴδομαν h, seem, resemble, 1 a. εἰσά- 
μην, T. 81. [Cog. ὅρημι m. 335d; 
γι. 2s. Bena 814}, & 343: ὄσσομαι 
i3, v. 81.] 

In the pret. οἶδα, the stem has 
four forms: (1) t8-; ἔσμεν [ἴδ- μεν 
148 b, A. 124], ἴσθι, ἴστω [B. ἴττω 
Ar. Ach. 911], &c., 320a [also to 
shorten other forms, as below, 134]: 
(2) e8-h; [swb. εἴδομεν, εἴδετε, 326 d, ] 
εἰδέναι [ἴδ- μεν, ἴδμεναι, 333 6], εἰδώς 
[ἰδυῖα, A. 608], ἤδειν [w. double aug. 
2s. ἠείδης X. 280, 8 8. ἠείδη ι. 206, 
or -det, or 1.-δὲ ?, 3 p. ἠείδειν or ἤδειν 
330 Ὁ, also (id-cav) ἴσαν ν. 170], f. 
εἴσομαι : (3) οἰδ- 312b; olda, οἶδας 
or οἷσθα (oidas very r. in Att., Eur. 
Alc. 780; the comic poets sometimes 
blend the two forms into oic@as, also 
Eur. Ion 999 3): (4) εἰδε- v ; (εἰδέ- ὦ) 
εἰδῶ [ἰδέω =F. 235], εἰδείην, 820 ὁ ; ἢ 
εἰδήσω, A. 546, Isoc. 11 ἃ [ἰδησῶ 
Theoe. 8. 57], a0. 1. or 1. In the ind. 
plur., the shorter forms were more 
comm. in the pf., & the longer in the 

Ip. (also 1, ἤδεισαν Mk. 14. 40). 
ime defects of oféa are ch. supplied 


TABLES. 


§ 50. 


παίζω 


by γίγνώσκω. [Cog. ἴσάμι D. (per- 


haps suggested by 3 p. todox) Pind. 
P. 4. 441, ἴσας, ἴσᾶτι 828 a, Theoc. 
15. 146, &c.] With the ind. of οἶδα, 
ef. the corresponding Sanskrit 1 5. 
véd-a, 2 véttha, 3 véda ; 1 p. vid-ma, 
2 vida, 3 vidus. 

ὀρέγω [r. ὀρέγνῦμι τιἴ, X. 37] stretch 
out, REACH (cf. rego, Germ. recken, 
reichen), ..,7. reach for, desire, (A. 
ch. po. or 1.;) ὀρέξω m., ao.; [ὥρεγ- 
μαι Hipp., ὀρώρεγμαι, Il. 834,] ὠρέχ- 
θην as mid. See 480 Ὁ. Cog. ὀριγνά- 
omar, ὀρεχθέω po. 

ὁρίζω 11 [οὐρίζω 1.] bound ; see 39. 

ὄρνυμι (n7, dp-) rouse, po., M. 
arise ; ὄρσω ao. 152d, [f. m. ὀροῦμαι, 
2 a0. ὥρορον 284e,| 2 a0. m. ὠρόμην 
(ὦρτο, wmv. ὄρσο, -εο, -ev, inf. ὄρθαι, 
&c. 8526 6, 327); 2 pf. ὄρωρα as mid., 
N. 78, 2 plp. ὠρώρειν 281d, Aisch. 
Ag. 653: [fr. épe- v, ipf. ὀρέοντο B. 
398, pf. ὀρώρεμαι, sub. ὁρώρηται N. 
271.] Cog., ch. po., Spw, ὀρίνω, épo- 
θύνω, ὀρούω " Lat. orior. 

ὀρύσσω (11,ὀρυχ- or ὀρυγ- d?) dig; 
ὀρύξω, ao. α., m. 1. or ]., 2a. ὥρυγον Υ.; 
ὁ ὀρώρυχα (1. ὥρυχα,) -γὙμαι, (plf. ὀρωρ- 
or ὠρωρ- 281 ἃ,) ὠρύχθην °f., 2a. 1. 
ὠρύχην or -ynyr, f. 

ὀσφραίνομαι & 1. ὀσφράομαι (τ, 
u, ὀσφρ-) perceive by smell, A. 1.; 
ὀσφρίήσομαι, ao. 1., 2 a. ὠσφρόμην 
[ὄσφραντο ? 327b, Hat.); ὠσφράνθην. 

[οὐτάω wound, +; οὐτήσω 1., ao., 
2 ἃ. οὗτὰᾶν m. 314d, Δ. 525, λ. 40; 
οὐτήθην, Θ. ὅ87.1 Cog. οὐτάζω po. 

ὀφείλω (h, ὀφελ-} owe, ought, [ὀφέλ- 
hw H. E. 171, θ. 462 ;] ὀφειλήσω 
ao. 511 Ὁ, 2 ἃ. ὥφελον (po. & 1. ἄφε- 
λον 284}, c) expressing wish, (I ought) 
O that, utinam, (1. as a particle, Gal. 
5.12;) ὠφείληκα, -θην. Cog. [ὀφέλ- 
λω- “increase, ao. opt. 8 5. ὀφέλλειε 
171a, 325 c’, Π. 651,] & 

ὀφλισκάνω (k? π΄, ὀφλ-) owe, in- 
cur; ὀφλήσω 311, ao. r., 2 ἃ. ὦφλον, 
v. 8.1; ὠφληκα, -μαι: 1. pr. pro. 


II. 
παίζω (j, παιδ-, παιγ-, 349 a) sport ; 
παιξοῦμαι 305d, Symp. 9. 2 (1. -ξομαι 
& -tw), ἔπαισα (-ξα 1.) ; πέπαικα (-xa 


1.), τσμαι (-Ύμαι 1), -χθην 1. 


§ 50. mate 

παίω strike, M.; παίσω & po. παι- 
how 311, ἔπαισα m.; πέπαικα & 1. 
πεπαίηκα, “πέπαισμαι 1., ἐπαίσθην. 
566 τύπτω. 

παλιλλογέω repeat; [plp. ἐπαλιλ- 
λόγητο 2840, Hdt. 1. 118. 

πάλλω (1, rad-) shake, ch. po., M.; 
ἔπηλα [m. 1, 2 ἃ. 3s. nude πάλτο 
326 6, O. 645, pt. ἀμ-πεπαλών 284e ;] 
πέπαλμαι, 2a. °érddnv 1. 

πά- acquire; πᾶσομαι ao. po.; 
πέπαμαν pret. possess, 111. 3. 18, 3 ἢ 
πεπάσομαι τ. Of. potior. 

παρανομέω transgress ; -ἥσω, πα- 
ρενόμησα 2820, & παρηνόμησα 2179 ἃ 
(as if cp. of παρά & ἀνομέω); παρα- 
γνενόμηκα (1. παρηνόμηκα), -μαι, &c. 

παροινέω act the drunkard ; ἐπαρῴ- 
νησα 282¢; πεπαρῴνηκα, -μαι l., &. 

πάσσω 132, sprinkle; πάσω, “ao. 
a.,m.1.; πέπασμαι l., ἐπάσθην, °f. 1. 

πάσχω (k* 350, παθ-, πενθ- n® b) 
patior, suffer ; πείσομαι 156, (ao. pt. 
po. πήσας 1.) 2 a. ἔπαθον ; 2 pf. πέ- 
mova, Th. 6. 11, [πέποσχα D.; 2 p. 
πέποσθε 320 f, Y. 53, pt. πεπαθυίῃ p. 
555, ὃ 325 e.] 

[πατέομαι (v, rar-) eat, taste, Hdt. 
2. 37 ;] πᾶσομαι po. r., ao. po., 1.» 
or 1., y. 9, Soph. Ant. 202; [plp. 
πεπάσμην Q. 642]. Cf. pascor. 

παύω stop, repress, M. cease, PAUSE, 
34; παύσω m., 8ο.; πέπαυκα, -μαι, 
ὃ f. πεπαύσομαι Soph. Ant. 91, ἐπαύ- 
θην (-σθην 1. or-v.1.), ἔ, τ., 2 ἃ. 1. 
ἐπάην °f., Rev. 14. 13. 

πείθω (h, πιθ-) persuade, M. be- 
lieve, obey, 38, 39 ; πείσω m., ao. a., 
m. 1., [πεπιθήσω 284f., 311, & as 
mid. πιθήσω, φ. 369, ao. + A. 398,] 
2a. ἔπιθον m. po. [πέπιθον m. 284 f, 
W. 40]; πέπεικα, 2 pf. pret. πέποιθα 
trust, 38. 8, Th. 2. 42, nude zmv. r. 
πέπεισθι 320, Asch. Kum. 599, [2 plp. 
1 p. ἐπέπιθμεν B. 341,] πέπεισμαι, 
ἐπείσθην f. Cog. πιστεύω; Lat. fido. 

πεινάω hunger, πειν(άει)ῇ 120¢; 
-ἥσω (1. -dow) ao.; πεπείνηκα. 

πείρω (h, παρ-, περ- b) pierce, po., 
I., or l.; περῶ ὃ, ἔπειρα, A. 465; πέ- 
mappat, 2a. °érdpnv, Hdt. 4. 94. 

πεκτέω (32, rex-) pecto, comb, shear, 
po., [πείκω h, σ. 316; πεξῶ D. 325b, 
ἔπεξα l., m.;] ἐπέχθην, Ar. Nub. 1356. 

πελάζω (Zz, πελα-), & po. πελάω, 


VERBS. 


πίμπλημι 85 
πελᾶθω 4, & (πλεὰθ- 051) πλάθω, 
bring or come near, M. po.; πελάσω, 
πελῶ 305 Ὁ, ἐπέλασα iv. 2. 8, [2 ἃ. m. 
ἐπλήμην 314b, Θ. 68 :] πέπλημαι po., 
po. ἐπελάσθην & ἐπλάθην. Cog. πλη- 
σιάζω, [πιλνάω n® b, πίλναμαι, T. 94.] 
πέλω be, po.+, M.; [ipf. ὃ 5. ἔπλε 
c*, M. 11, m. 2s. ἔπλεο, -ev, 358. 
ἔπλετο, X. 281, 116, pt. πλόμενος.] 
πέμπω send, 41; M. ep. in classic 
prose, i. 1. 2; πέμψω, πέπομφα, &c. 
πεπαρεῖν, πέπρωται ; see πορίζω. 
πέρϑομαι (Ὁ, παρδ-) pedo, 4. τ΄; 
σπαρδήσομαι 311, 2 ἃ. © ἔπαρδον ; 
πέπορϑα ; Ar. 
πέρθω (Ὁ, παρθ-) destroy, ravage, 
po.+, [nude pr. inf. p. (περθ-σθαι, 
περ-σθαι, 151, 158) πέρθαι If. 708 :] 
πέρσω M., 20. a., [2 a. ἔπραθον °m. 
οὅ, «. 40.] Usu. πορθέω v2, -ἤσω. 
πέρνημι 5011, po.; see πιπράσκω. 
πέσσω (13, πεπ-), & later πέπτω t, 
coquo, cook, digest, M.; πέψω, ao. a., 
m.?; πέπεμμαι, ἐπέφθην f. 
πετάννυμι (n°, rera-) pando, spread, 
expand, (in Att. ch. ep., esp. w. ἀνά ") 
πετάσω, “mera 305b, ἐπέτασα, m. 1].; 
Careméraxal., -σμαι, usu. πέπταμαι οἷ, 
Ar, Nub. 343, ἐπετάσθην. Cog. [πί- 
τνημι n® b, λ. 392, πίτνω,] 1. ὁ πετάω. 
πέτομαι (i. 5. 8) & po. or 1. πέτα- 
Maru, & ἵπταμαι τῇ ο2, fly; πετήσο- 
μαι 311, usu. πτήσομαι οἴ, 2 a. a. 
ἔπτην po. or 1., m. ἐπτόμην & ἐπτά- 
μὴν - ἐπετάσθην 1. Po. cog. ποτά- 
opat, Ar. Av. 251 [nude 2 5. πότῃ 
Sap. 20, pt. rorjuevos, Theoc. 29. 30, 
ὃ 335b], ποτήσομαι ?, πεπότημαι, 2. 
222, ἐποτήθην - [πωτάομαι, πετάομαι 1] 
πεύθομαι inquire ; see πυνθάνομαι. 
πήγνυμι. (ἢ, παγ-, πηγΎ- 5) pango, 
fasten, fix, M. (opt. πήγνῦτο 316 ο) ; 
πήξω m., a0., [2 a.m. 3 s. κατ-ἐπήκτο 
326e, A. 378 ;] °méarnyxa 1., 2 pf. 
πέπηγα pret. am fimed, I’. 135, -yuae 
l., ἐπήχθην, usu. 2 a. ἐπάγην f.: 1. 
THOT. 
πίμπλημι (πλα-, πι-μ-πλα r! 65) 
pleo, fill, (esp. cp. w. év,) I; πλή- 
ow, °m. ]., ao., 2 a. po. ἐπλήμην 314 b 
(opt. ϑπλήμην Ar. Ach. 236, dmv. 
Crrjoo, &c.); “πέπληκα Pl. Apol. 
23 6, -σμαι or -μαι 8076, 3 ἢ. πεπλύ- 
gouatl., ἐπλήσθην f. In the com- 
pounds of πίμπλημι & πίμπρημι, the 


86 πίμπλημι 


μ is usu. omitted after -pm-: ἐμ- 
πίπλημι, imv, ἐμπίπλη Ar. Αγ. 1310 
[ἐμπίπληθι 335d", &. 311, pt. ἐμπι- 
πλείς Hipp. as fr. πλε-}; so πιπλάς 
171, Aisch. Ch. 360; but ipf. ἐν- 
επίμπλην. Cog. [πιμπλέω I. 322 a, 
πιμπλάνομαι, 1. 679,1] πληρόω- πλήθω 
be full (2 pf. πέπληθα, Theoc. 22. 38), 
whence πληθύω & πληθύνω. 

πίμπρημι (13 6, rpa-, see πίμπλημι) 
burn, esp. cp. W. ἐν; πρήσω °m., 
ao. a., “m. 1. [ἔπρεσε 134, 180}, 
Hes. Th. 856 ;] °aéapyka, -μαι ἃ 
-σμαι 307 e, [3 f. σπεπρήσομαι, Hat. 
6. 9,7] ἐπρήσθην, f.1. Cog. δπίμπρωΐζ, 
[πρήθω, 1. 589.] 

πινύσκω, πέπνῦμαι, 566 πνέω. 

πίνω (η 2, πο-, wi- b2) pdto, bibo, 
drink ; πίομαν (usu. ἢ; Hellen. πίε- 
σαι 331), later πιοῦμαι, 305 f, a, 2 ἃ. 
ἔπιον (imv. πίε & po. πῖθι Ar. Vesp. 
1489, [r. inf. πιέναι Hipp.,] 313 c*) ; 
πέπωκα, πέπομαι 310d, ἐπόθην Cf. 
Causal, ποτίζω & 

πιπίσκω 1k}, give to drink, po. 
or 1.; πίσω, [ao. a. Hipp., m. 1.; ἐπί- 
σθην 1.] 

πιπράσκω |. (r1k, repa-, πρα- 63), 
& πέρνημι n° po., sell ; [περᾶάσω, -dw 
821s, Φ. 454, a0.;] πέπρακα, -μαι 
[πεπερημένος ᾧ. 58], 3 f. πεπράσομαι, 
Vii. 1. 36, ἐπράθην, f. 1.: in Att., ch. 
supplied in pres. by πωλέω, & in fut. 
& aor. by ἀποδώσομαι & ἀπεδόμην. 

πίπτω (τ: ο2, πετ-, softened πεσ-, 
ef. 148}, πτε- c7) fall; πεσοῦμαι 
805 ἃ []. -ομαι, 2 ἃ. ἔπεσον [ἔπετον 
D. 169}, ἔπεσα m. 1., Rev. 1. 17; 
πέπτωκα, 512 ο, πέπτηκα 1., 2 pf. λέ. 
po. [πεπτεώς or -ηώς 325 4] πεπτώς 
320 d, Soph. Aj. 828. Po. cog. πίτνω 
or -éw Eur. Sup. 285. 

πλάζω (13, πλαγγ-) cause to wan- 
der, po. or 1. +, M. πλάζομαι wan- 
der; πλάγξομαι, ἔπλαγξα, m. 1.; 
ἐπλάγχθην, a. 2. Usu. πλανάω. 

πλάσσω shape, M.; “πλάσω, m. 
1., ao. ii. 6. 26 ; πέπλακα 1., -σμαι, 
ἐπλάσθην, Pl. Rep. 377 b, “ἢ, 1. 

πλέκω (b1, πλακ-) plecto, plico, 
PLAIT, twine, M. po. or l.; πλέξω m. 
1., ao.; [πέπλοχα or ὅ-εχα 312¢, 
Hipp.] πέπλεγμαι, ἐπλέχθην f., 2 ἃ. 
ἐπλάκην (υ. 1. -éxnv), f. 1. 

πλέω ([1, πλεξ-, πλευ- £7) sail, 


TABLES. 


πρίασθαι § 50.. 
42 σ, 809b; πλεύσομαι & πλευσοῦ- 
μαι806 4,ν. 7. 8,1.10, -owl., ἔπλευσα ;. 
πέπλευκα, -σμαι, -σθην, f. 1.: {πὸ & 
po. πλώω, πλώσομαι, πέπλωκα, KC., 
114, Hdt. 8. 10, 5; 2a. ἔπλων 313 Ὁ, 
Oy. 15, pt. ἐπι-πλώς Z. 291.] Der. 
πλωΐζω, Th. 1. 18, πλοΐζομαι 1. 
πλήσσω (11, πλὰγ-, πληγ- 5) strike 
(pr. ch. ep. w. ἐκ or ἐπί), ,,7.; πλήξω, 
m.1., a0., [2 a. πέπληγον m., ἐπέ- 
πληγον, 284e]; 2 pf. πέπληγα, vi. 1. 
5, -Ύμαι, ὃ f. πεπλήξομαι, Ar. Eq. 
272, ἐπλήχθην Υ., 2 a. ἐπλήγην (ἐξ- 
ἐπλάγην, κατ-επλάγην) f. Cog. ἐκ- 
πλήγνυμαι, Th. 4. 125. See τύπτω. 
πλύνω (g, πλῦν-) wash clothes (cf. 
λούω, vitw); πλῦνῷ m., ἔπλῦνα M.; 
πέπλῦμαι, ἐπλὔθην (1. -ὑνθην) f., 304 a. 
πνέω (f1, mver-, mvev- £7, mw-, 
142°) breathe, blow, 809 Ὁ; πνεύ- 
copa & mvevootua 305d, Ar. Ran. 
1221, -σω 1.,. ἔπνευσα ; “πέπνευκα, 
-σμαι or -μαι 1. [πέπνῦμαι pret. am 
wise, Ὥ. 377, imv. πέπνῦο 551}, 
Theog. 29, &c.], 5 ἐπνεύσθην 1., °F. 1. 
Cp. ἀνα-πνέω recover breath [2 ἃ. ὃ 5. 
ἄμ-πνυεν, 186, 9. Sm. 9. 470, imv. 
ἄμ-πνυε X. 222, nude 2 ἃ. m. ἄμ- 
πνῦτο 514 Ὁ, w. 349; la. p. ἀμπνύν- 
θην n}, EB. 697]. Cog. ποιπνύω puff, 
379 67]; πινύσκω or πινύσσω re}, 
make wise, ch. £., Aisch.; [1 a. or ipf. 
8 5. ἐπίνυσσεν ἘΞ. 249 ;] ἐπινύσθην 1. 
πνίγω (g, πιΐγ-) choke, v. 7. 25, 
esp. ep. w. ἀπό ὃ πνίξω m., ao. @.; 
πέπνιγμαι, Ar. Vesp. 511, 3 f. °xe- 
πνίξομαι 1., ἐπνίχθην 1., 2a. ἐπνίγην f. 
ποθέω desidero, desire, miss, A. Ὑ.; 
ποθήσω m., ἐπόθησα ἃ -εσα 310d; 
πεπόθηκα 1., -μαι]., ἐποθήθην 1. 
ποινάομαι punish ; -άσομαι 510 ἃ. 
πονέω, -ήσω (-έσω 1.-}, labor. 
πορίζω (232, πορ-) supply, M.; πο- 
plow, -ιῶ, m., ἐπόρισα M., 2 ἃ. po. 
ἔπορον [πεπορεῖν, v. Ll. πεπαρεῖν, 284 6, 
Pind. P. 2. 105;] πεπόρικα, -σμαι 
(8 5. πέπρωται it is fated, Σ. 329, pt. 
πεπρωμένος, Mem, 2. 1. 33), ἐπορί- 
σθην f. Cog. πορσύνω. 
πορπάω fasten ; cj. ν᾽. ἃ or ἡ, 310. 
πρᾶσσω (i}, rpay-) do [1τ.πρήσσω)], 
M. exact ; πράξω m., a0.; πέπραχα, 
2 pf. πέπρᾶγα have fared, -γὙμαι, ὃ f. 
πεπράξομαι, Ar. Av. 847, ἐπράχθην f. 
πρίασθαι buy; see 451 & ὠνέομαι. 


§ 50. προφητεύω 
προφητεύω, -εύσω, prophesy ; aug. 
ἐπροφ- or προεφ-, 282c, N.T., Lxx. 
πτάρνυμαι (n’, mrap-) sneeze, iii. 
2.9, 4.1.; @rrdpa, usu. 2 ἃ. érra- 
pov, p. 541, [m. Hipp.]; ἐπτάρην. 
πτήσσω (il, rra-, πτακ- 0, πτηκ- 
g) cower, crouch ; πτήξω |., ao., 2 a. 
Cérraxov, Aisch. Kum. 252 [9 ἃ. κατα- 
πτήτην 814, Θ. 186]; ἔπτηχα, -ηκα 
1., [2 pf. pt. πεπτηώς 325d, ΚΞ. 354, 
οἵ, πίπτω.] Cog. πτώσσω, Δ. 371, 
[πτωσκάζω, Δ. 372.] 
πτίσσω 12, pinso, pound ; ἔπτισα, 
Hadt. 2. 92; ἔπτισμαι, -σθην 1. 
πτὕρομαν fear, 1. Ἑ ; 2 ἃ. ἐπτὕρην. 
πτύσσω (i, πτυχ- or πτυγ- ἃ2) 
fold, M.; °wrtgw°m., ao.; ἔπτυγμαι, 
Hier. 2. 4, (or πέπτ- 280 ο,) 5 ἐπτύ- 
χθην, [2 ἃ. 5 ἐπτύγην Hipp. ] 
πτύω (ὃ) spuo, spit; πτύὔσω m., 
‘ao. a, Soph. Ant. 653; ἔπτυκα 1., 
-σθην, f. 1., [2 a. ἐπτύην Hipp. ] 
πυνθάνομαι (n°, πυθ-, πευθ- h), 
po. πεύθομαι, inquire, hear ; πεύσο- 
αν (r. -οῦμαι 305d), 2 a. ἐπυθόμην 
heres: 284e, ΖΦ. 50]; πέπυσμαι. 


P, § 146, 984. 


patve (h, ῥαν-, pad-) sprinkle, po. 
& τ. +; pave, ἔῤῥάνα [imv. ῥάσσατε 
v. 150], °m. 1; δἔῤῥαγκα Lxx., -ασμαι 
[3 p. ἐῤῥάδαται, -το, 329 a], -άνθην. 

parte (t, ῥαφ-) stitch; “pdrpo, 
ἔῤῥαψα m.; ἔῤῥαμμαι, Dem. 1268. 2, 
2 ἃ. ἐῤῥάφην, Eur. Bac. 243, δῇ, 1. 

ῥέζω (j?, pey- 05, see ἔρδω) do, 
po. +; ῥέξω, ἔῤῥεξα Pl. Leg. 642 ο, 
po. ἔρεξα 171, Eur. And, 838 ; [ἐῤῥέ- 
χθην, I. 250.] 

péw (f1, per-, pev- £2, ῥυ- 142°, ef. 
Lat. ruo) flow; ῥεύσομαι, -σω 1., 
éppevoa, but more Att. ῥνήσομαι, 
ἐῤῥύην (2f. & ἃ. p, or 2f. m. & nude 
2a. a.); ἐῤῥύηκα 311 ο, Isoc. 159 d. 

ῥήγνυμι (n7, Fpay-, pay- 141, ῥηγ- 
g) BREAK, I; ῥήξω [m.], ἔῤῥηξα m.; 
σἔῤῥηχα 1., 2 pf. ἔῤῥωγα am broken, 
312¢, éppnyuary., -xOnv r., 2 a. ἐῤ- 
ῥάγην f.: po. ἃ 1. ῥήσσω beat. Cog. 
ῥάσσω ἃ ἀράσσω, -Ew, smite; frango. 

piyew v, shudder, po.+; ῥῥύγήσω 
ao.; 2 pf. pret. @ptya P. 175. Cog. 
ῥυγόω, -dow, shiver (inf. ῥιγῶν or 
ῥιγοῦν 324 Ὁ); φρίσσω q. v.; frigeo. 


VERBS. 


87 


, - 
σκεδάννῦμι 


ῥΐπτω & ῥιπτέω (t12, ῥιφ-) throw; 
ἐν» ῥίπτασκον 8526-}] ῥίψω ao., 

2 ἃ. ἔῤῥιφον 1.:] ἔῤῥτφα, -ἰμμαι [inf 
ῥερῖφθαι 159 67), 3 f. ἐῤῥίψομαι 1., 
-ipOny °f., 2 ἃ. “ἴφην, f. 1. Cog. ῥι- 
πτάζω 379 Ὁ, ἐρείπω q. Vv. 

‘pvopat (ch. 7) = ἐρύομαι draw to 
one’s self, protect (also in Att., yet r. 
in prose) ; pUropar, Th. 5. 63, ao.; 
ἐῤῥύσθην 1. Nude ipf. 3. 5. ἔῤῥῦτο 
Soph. O. T. 1352, [3 p. ῥύατο 329 a, 
Σ. 515, pr. inf. ῥῦσθαι O. 141; iter. 
2 5. ῥύσκευ 332, 8529 ο, Q. 730.] 

ῥώννυμι (n®, ῥο-) strengthen ; “pare 
]1., a0.; ἔῤῥωμαι (tv. éppwoo farewell, 
Cyr. 4.5.33), ἐῤῥώσθην, Th. 4.72, £. 1. 


=. 


σαίρω (h, cap-) sweep; ἔσηρα, 
Soph. Ant. 409 ; 2 pf. pret. σέσηρα 
grin, Ar. Pax 620. Cog. capdw 1. 

σαλπίζω (15, σαλπιγγ-) sound a 
trumpet; ἐσάλπιγξα 571b; late σαλ- 
πίσω (-.@), 1 Cor. 15, 52, ao., ὅσε- 
σάλπισμαι & ὅ-ἰγμαι, 849 a. 

[σαόω & σόω, save ; see σώζω. 

σάσσωϊ, pack; [°rdow ao. Hipp.,] 
ἔσαξα 349a, Cic. 19. 11; σέσαγμαι, 
Ib., ἐσάχθην 1. 

σάω & σήθω sift, τ. & 1.; ἔσησα, &c. 

σβέννυμι (n°, σβε-) quench, M. be 
quenched, go out; σβέσω, ao. a. m., 
f. m. ὃ σβήσομαι 310d, (as mid, 2 a. 
ἔσβην᾽ 45h, 313d", I. 471, & pf. 
σἔσβηκα), ἔσβεσμαι, -σθην, f. 1. 

σείω, -σω, σέσεικα, ὅζο., shake, 44. 

σεύομαι & σόομαι, Ar. Vesp. 458, 
(σεξ-, σευ- £2, σῦ- 142°, σε- {1, σο- 
114,) rush, hasten, po. (8 5. σεῦται 
326e); 2 ἃ. ην. ἐσύμην 518}; ἐσύθην-Ἑ. 
[A. σεύω]., drive, urge; 1 ao. ἔσ- 
geva m. 306 a, 171 (1. °-evca); pret. 
ἔσσυμαι 284d, 2 ἃ. ὃ 5. ἀπ-εσσούὰ ? 
Hel. 1. 1. 28, Lac. for ἀπεσύη.] 

σήπω (g, σαπ-Ὶ) rot, trans.; σήψω 
Sao.; 2 pf. intrans. σέσηπα, B. 135, 
Civ. 5.12, -μμαι, ἐσήφθην 1., 2 a. 
ἐσάπην, Hdt. 3. 66, f. 1. 

civopat harm ; iii. 4. 16; [σινή- 
σομαι 311, Hipp., ἐσινάμην, Id.) 

σκάπτω (t, σκαφ-) dig; σκάψω 
80. ; ϑἔσκαφα, Isoc. 298 ἃ, -μμαι, 
-φθην 1., 2 ἃ. ἐσκάφην, °F. 1. : 

σκεδάννυμι (n°, σκεδα-) scatier (as 


88 


σκεδάννῦμι 


sub,, διασκεδάννῦσι, -υται, 816 ο) ; 
σκεδάσω, -ῶὥ, 305b, ἐσκέδασα °m.; 
ἐσκέδασμαι, -σθην, f. 1. Cog., ch. po. 
or 1., σκίδνημι n® Ὁ, [κεδάννῦμι e}, 
κίδνημι +, σκεδάω, κεδάω, κεδαίομαι.] 
σκέλλω (011, σκαλ-) dry, parch, 
ch. po. or 1., M. become dry ; σκελῶ 
1. [ἔσκηλα Ψ. 191]; as mid., 2 ao. 
ὁ ἔσκλην c® (τ. Ar. Vesp. 160) & pf. 
ἔσκληκα, (so f. 1. σκλήσομαι |.) 
σκέπτομαι t, specio, view; σκέψο- 
avao.; ἔσκεμμαι, 3 f. ἐσκέψομαι, Pl. 
ep. 392 ο, ἐσκέφθην r., 92 a. © ἐσκέ- 
ayy, 1.1. In Att., the pr. & ipf. 
were usu. supplied by σκοπέω v2, of 
which the other tenses were later. 
Cog. σκοπεύω, [σκοπιάζω. | 
σμάω smear, 120g: ἔσμησα m. 
σμύὕχω (cf. smoke) burn, po. or 1.; 
Céouvéa, I. 653; δἔσμνγμαι, ὃ -χθην, 
Theoc. 8. 90, 2 ἃ. ὁ ἐσμὕγην d?. 
σόομαι hasten, po.; see σεύομαι. 
σπάω draw, -σω, ἔσπακα, &c., 307. 
σπείρω (bh, σπαρ-) spargo, scat- 
ter, sow: σπερῶ, ἔσπειρα ἤν ΕΣ 
ἔσπαρκα ]., -ρομαι, Ages. 1. 30, -ρθην Ἱ, 
2a. ἐσπάῤην, Th. 2. 27, f. 1. 
σπένϑω pour a libation, M. inake 
a treaty ; omelow m. 156, ao. v. 55; 
σἔσπεικο, 1., (ἐσπενδ-μαι, ἐσπενσμαι 
148,156) ἔσπεισμαι, Th. 4.16, -σθην 1. 
σπεύϑω & σπουδάζω, hasten, 114b. 
στάζω (132, cray-) drop; στάξω l., 
ao.; [ἔσταγμαι, B. 271, | ὅ-χθην, 2 a. 
Οἐστάγην 1. 
στείβω or στίβω tread ; στείψω 1., 
Cao0., Soph.; ἐστίβημαι811, 14. Aj. 874. 
στείχω h (or στίχω) walk, po. or 
1.; [Céorecta, δ. 277, 2 a. ἔστιχον II. 
258. Cog. στιχάομαι, B. 92, A. 1.] 
στέλλω (b! 1, crad-) fit owt, send, 
M.; στελῶ, m.1., ἔστειλα m.; ἔσταλκα, 
«λμαι, 111. 2. 7, -AOnvr., 2a. ἐστάλην SF. 
στέργω love; στέρξω, m. 1., a0. α.; 
[2 pf. ἔστοργα, Hdt. 7. 104, ἔστερ- 
γμαι Emped., | ἐστέρχθην 1. 
στερέω ἃ στερίσκω (v, k?, στερ-) 
deprive ; στερήσω m., ἐστέρησα [-εσα 
v. 262]; ἐστέρηκα, -μαι, -θην f., 2 ἃ. 
po. ἐστέρην f., Eur. Ale. 200, 622. 
Also orép& ;, στέρομαι be deprived of, 
want, (f. στερῶ, στεροῦμαι, unless 
these are always ct. pr.) 
[oredpar stand to, 326e; see lor nu] 
στόρνυμι (n 7, στορ-, στορε- Vv) 


TABLES. 


ταράσσω § 50. 
sterno, STREW, ch. po., 1., or l., M. 
(also 1. στορέννῦ μαι); στορέσω, Att. 
°oropa, ἐστόρεσα nr., ἕξ. δ0 ; ἐστόρε- 
σμαι}., -σθην. Also στρώννυμι (στρο- 
οὅ); στρώσω, m.1., (ὃ στρωννύσω r. 
Luc.,) ἔστρωσα, m. 1.; ἔστρωκα 1., 
«μαι, Th. 2. 84, 5-θην 1., f. 1. 
στρέφω (03, στραφ-} twist,turn, Η͂. ; 
στρέψω m., 20.; “ἔστροφα]., ἔστραμ- 
μαι, iv. 7. 15, ἐστρέφθην τ. in Att., 
E. 40, [-ἀφθην D. I.,] 2 a. ἐστράφην 
ἢ, iii. 5. 1. Cog. στρωφάω & στροφέω 
ch. po., 8δ ἃ ; στρεβλόω, τρέπω. 
στυγέω (ν, στυγ-) hate, po., 1., ΟΥ̓ 
1.; στυγήσομαι will be hatefui, Soph. 
O. T. 672; ἐστύγησα, Eur. Tro. 705, 
[ἔστυξα, A. 502, 2 a. ἔστυγον κ. 1133] 
gi ba, -μαι]., -θην, Eur. Ale. 465. 
συρίζω & συρίττω [-icdw D. 1708] 
pipe, whistle, cf. susurro ; συρίξω m. 
1., ao. a., & συρίσω (-ιὦ) ao. 1., 349 a. 
cipw gq, drag, M.; cvpa l., ἔσῦρα, 
¢ Asch. Pr. 1065, m. 1.; ὃσέσυρκα ]., 
C_ouatl., 2a. ἐσὕρην, “f. 1. 
σφάζω ἃ σφάττω (349 i, 1, σφαγ-) 
slay ; σφάξω, ao. α., ©m. τ. 1. 8. 29; 
ἔσφαγμαι, λ. 45, -xOnv τ. Hat. 5. 5, 
2a. ἐσφάγην f., Eur. Ph. 933: 1. plp. 
ἐσφάκειν Dio ὦ. See φα-. 
σφάλλω (1, σφαλ-) fallo, trip, de- 
ceive ; σφαλῶ m., ἔσφηλα, 2 a. ἔσφα- 
λον m. 1. or?; ἔσφαλκα 1., -λμαι, 
-λθὴν 1. γ., 2 ἃ. ἐσφάλην f., Th. 6. 80. 
wate (z, σαο-, σω- ο}) save, M.; 
σώσω m., a0.; σέσωκα, Isoc. 410 ¢, 
-wat, oftener -σμαι, ἐσώθην f. [Ep. 
cada, -dow, A, 83, &c.; pr. imv. 2 5. 
& ipf. 3 5. (cdoe, ct. σάου, σῶ, 322 c) 
σάω ν. 230, IL. 363, swb. 2 5. (σαόῃς, 
σαοῖς, σῷς, 522 0) σόῳς, 3s. σόῳ, I. 
681, 424 (υ. 1. σόῃς, σόῃ, as fr. σόω): 
ct. σώω t. 430.] 


T. 


[τα-, Tay- 0, TAKE, seize, cf. tango, 
τείνω : imv. ἃ 5. (rae, cf. 120g) τῆ 
m. 219+, 2 Ῥ. τῆτε Sophr. 100 ; 2a. 
pt. τεταγών 284 6, A. 591.] 

ταράσσω ([:, ταραχ-) disturb ; 
ταράξω ηι., ἃο. α.; τετάραχα |. [pret. 
intrans. τέτρηχα ¢7 (-rpaa-, ct. -τρη-), 
H. 346], τετάραγμαι, ἐταράχθην f.: 
Opdoowc™! (rpaa, Apa, 159 h*), ἔθραξα, 
isch. Pr. 628, Pl. Parm. 130d, -x On». 


§ 50. 


τάσσω 


τάσσω, -ξω, τέταχα, Mic. 4. ὅ, ὅτο., 
arrange, 39; τετάχαται, ἐτετάχατο, 
τετάξομαι, Th. 8. 18, 5. 6, 71, ὁ ταγή- 
σομαιγ. 1. 
τέθηπα (4, θαφ-, 5124) be amazed, 
2 pf. pret., po., 1, or lL, ᾧ. 168; 
2 ἃ. érapov d1, π. 12. Cf. θάπτω. 

τείνω (h, τα-, Tev- bt ἢ) tendo, 
stretch, M.; τενῶ °m., ἔτεινα m.; τέ- 
τακα 304a, -μαι, λ. 19, ἐτάθην f. 
[Cog. τανύω +, -ὕσω, ὅο., nude pr. 
3s, τάνυται, P. 390, 393; τιταίνω, 
B. 390, a0. pe. τιτήνας. See τα-.] 

τελέω, -ἔσω, -ὦ, τετέλεκα, Pl. Apol. 
20a, &c.; finish, 42g. Cog. τελεόω, 
τελειόω, τελευτάω, & probably 

τέλλω (011, ταλ-) perform, raise, 
{po., exc. in comp., ch. w. ἀνά, ἐν, or 
ἐπί,) M.; °red@, om. 1., ἔτειλα ©m.; 
Onéradka l.; °réradpou, Cyr. 5. 5. 3: 
po. τελέθω arise, be, Kur, And. 783. 

τέμνω (n, ταμ-, τεμ- Ὁ) cut, [τά- 
ἄνω BE. 1. Ὁ., Hdt. 2. 65,] JL; τεμὼ 
Cm., 2a. ἔταμον m., I’. 94, more Att. 
ἔτεμον m., Th. 6. 7; τέτμηκα 308, 
«μαι, 3f. τετμήσομαι, ἐτμήθην f. (Cog. 
τμήγω, -ξω, ao. a., m. L, 2 a. δι- 
éruayov n. 276; 2a. p. ἐτμάγην 11. 
374, -ἤγην 1. Heyne & Bekker read 
τέμει, as pr., N. 707.] 

τέρπω (Ὁ, tapr-) please, satisfy, 
M.; τέρψω, m. po., ao. a. [m. 1., 2 a. 
γι. ἐταρπόμην, τεταρπόμην 284e, T. 
19 :] ἐτέρφθην, Mem. 2. 1. 24, f. 1., 
[ἐτάρφθην ζ. 99, 2 ἃ. ἐτάρπην, ὃ. 47, 
sub. 1 p. τραπείομεν 65, 828 c, 326d, 
T. 441.] 
᾿ [τερσαίνω (n°, rep-, τερσ- 0) torreo, 
dry (pr. 1.), M. & τέρσομαι 7. 124 ; 
τέρσω 1. 152d, ao. a. m. L, ἐτέρσηνα 
Il. 529; 2a. p. ἐτέρσην ζ. 98.] 

[rérpov ἃ érerpov, 2 a. as fr. τεμ- 
find, 584, a. 218, Hes. Th. 610. ] 

στετραίνω (ri n*, rpa-), 1. τιτράω 
& ϑτίτρημι, terebro, bore; τρήσω |., 
ao. α., °m. 1, [°rerpavéw Hdt. 3. 12, 
érérpnva, ε. 247,| °m. Ar. Th. 18, 
érérpava 1., 152¢; τέτρημαι, ἐτρήθην 
ἃ -ἀνθην ].: τιτραίνω & τετρήνω 1. or %. 
Cog. τορέω, τιτρώσκω, q. V. 

τεύχω (ἢ, τυχ-, τυκ- 42) prepare, 
make, po.+, M.; τεύξω m., ao., [2 a. 
τέτυκον m. 284 6 : τέτευχα, as P. μ. 
423, -γὙμαι +, β. 68, 3 f. τετεύξομαι, 


μι 


M. 345, ἐτεύχθην 1. +,] τέτυγμαι, &. 


VERBS. 


89 


τρέπω 


9, Eur. El. 457, ἐτύχθην. Cog. τιτύ- 


σκω τ} k® po., τυγχάνω, τίκτω " [pf. 
inf. τετευχῆσθαι to be armed, x. 104.] 
τήκω (g, Tax-) melt, THAW ; THE® 
[m. Hipp.], érnga [m. 1.]; 2 pf. 
intrans. τέτηκα, iv. ὃ. 15; τέτηγμαι 
l., ἐτήχθην τ., 2a. ἐτάκην, f. 1. 
[rue- grieve ; 2 pf. pt. rerinws 325 ἃ, 


I. 13, pf. p. 2d. τετίησθον, pt. τετι- 


nuévos, Θ. 447, 437.] 
τίθημι (13, θε-), put, θήσω, τέθεικα, 
Mem. 4. 4. 19, &c., 45: late τιθέω, 
τιθήσομαι, ἐτίθησα. For the pass. (not 
found in Hom.), κεῖμαι is often used. 
τίκτω (b? t,.rex-) beget, bring forth, 
pr. m. po.; τέξομαι (po. τέξω, ao. T.5 
for τεκεῖσθας see 305 a}, 2 a. Erexor, 
m. po. Δ. 59; τέτοκα Ven. 5. 13, 
τέτεγμαι (or -ογμαι ἢ) }., ἐτέχθην, f. 1. 
τιμάω, -ἤσω, &c., honor, 42: τετι- 
μήσομαι Lys. 189.11; for f. p., usu. 
τιμήσομαι. Cog. Tiw, Tivw, τιμωρέω. 
tive (7 π΄; n4, τι.) pay, expiate, 
M., ch. po. or 1., take payment, pun- 
ish; τίσω m., 20.; τέτικα, ὅ-σμαι, 
CéricOny: also M. τίνυμαι (less cor- 
rectly τίννυμαι) po. 1., or lL, T. 260, 
(A. 1.) Po. tlw (ἢ) pay honor to, 
m.Y.; [τύσω, a0. + ; pt. τέτιμένος v. 28.} 
τιτρώσκω (r1k®, τρο-) wound [r. 
τρώω, p. 293]; τρώσω [m.], a0. a3 
τέτρωκα |., -μαι, 11, 5. 33, 3 f. τετρώ- 
σομαι 1.. ἐτρώθην f. Cog. ropéw. 
τλάω (c°, ταλ-, rada- u, cf. Lat. 
tul-i) endure, dare, ch. po., pr. very 
1.5 τλήσομαι (1. τλήσω & ταλάσωῚ, 
ἔτλησα 1. [ἐτάλασσα, P. 166, m. 1.], 
2 ἃ. ἔτλην 313 Ὁ, A. 94, Cyr. 3.1.25 
τέτληκα Ar. Pl. 280 [2 pf. 1 p. τέ- 
τλαμεν, opt. &c. τετλαίην, τέτλαθει, 
τετλάναι, τετληώς, 2 plp. 1 p. ἐτέτλα- 
μεν, 820 6, 325d, v. 311, 18, 23, I. 
373.] Cog. τολμάω, [ὀτλέω or -εύω 1.} 
[τμήγω, -ξω, cut, po.; see τέμνω.] 
[°ropéw (v, rop-) pierce, pr. 1.» 
Hom. Merc. 283; ὅτορήσω r., 80., 
2 ἃ. €ropov, A. 236; τετόρημαι 1.;| 
redupl. f. τετορήσω 284g. Cog. To- 
pevw, τιτρώσκω, τετραίνω. 
τρέπω (b1, τραπ-) turn [τ. τράπω], 
M.; τρέψω m., ao., 2a. [ἔτραπον, HE. 
187] m.; térpopa, Ar. Nub. 858, 
later τέτραφα Dinarch. (cf. τρέφω), 
τέτραμμαι, 3f. °rerpdwouai, ἐτρέφθην 
[1. ἐτράφθην], 2 a ἐτράπην usu. as 


90 


τρέπω 


m., £. 1. Ἰρέπω has the six aorists, 
as, less surely or less simply, ἀγγέλ- 


Aw ἃ πλήσσω. Po. cog. τρωπάω, τρο- 


πέω, 355 ἃ, τραπέω. 

τρέφω (43, θραφ-, θρεφ- Ὁ) nowr- 
ἐδ, [Ὁ. τράφω], M.; (τρέφοιν 296} :) 
θρέψω m., a0., [2 ἃ. ἔτραφον usu. 
intrans. y. 28 ;] τέτροφα y. 237, 1. 


τέτραφα Polyb. (cf. τρέπω), τέθραμ- 


μαι (τεθράφθαι Pl. Gorg. δ2 ἃ, υ. 1. 
τετρ-), ἐθρέφθην Eur. Hec. 861, oft- 
ener 2 ἃ. ἐτράφην, f. 1. 

τρέχω (41, θρεχ-, δραμ- x) run; 
δραμοῦμαι (r. δραμῶ & θρέξω, comic 
COpéfouar Ar.), ἔθρεξα po. Τ., 2 ἃ. 
ἔδραμον ; “δεδράμηκα 311, 2 pf. po. 
ὁ δέδρομα, ε. 412, ὃ δεδράμημαι. Cog. 
τροχάζω, vii. ὃ. 46, [τρωχάω, δρομάω.] 

τρέω fear, flee; ἔτρεσα, i. 9. 6. 
Cog. terreo; τρέμω [τρομέω v? +] tre- 
mo, TREMBLE. 

τρίβω g, rub, τρίψω, σ᾽ τέτρίφα Ar. 
Lys. 952, τέτριμμαι [3 Ῥ. τετρίφαται 
300c, Hadt. 2. 98], &c., 88, 39. Cog. 
τείρω tero ; τρύω, τρύχω - tribulo. 

τρίζω (12, τριγ-) twitter, gibber, 
po., 1, or L., w. 5; ἔτριξα 1.; 2 γί. 
pret. térpuya, B. 314. An onoma- 
tope, like τρύξω murmur. 

τρώγω (b* ἢ, τραγ-) gnaw, eat raw 
food ; τρώξομαι, Symp. 4. 8, [5 ἔτρω- 
ξα,] 2a. ἔτραγον - “τέτρωγμαι. 

τυγχάνω (πὅ, τυχ-, τευχ- h) hap- 
pen, hit; τεύξομαι, ao. 1. r., [ἐτύ- 
xnoa 311, A. 106,] 2 a. ἔτυχον ; τε- 
τύχηκα, x. 88, Th. 1. 32, later rérev- 
xa, °rérevyua 1., δ ἐτεύχθην 1. Cog. 
τεύχω 4. v.; [». 1 ἃ. ἔτοσσα, ῬΙπᾶ.] 

τύπτω (t, τυπ-) strike, M. plangor, 
mourn; τυπτήσω 311, Ar. Pl. 21, 
γι. Y., [τύψω 1.,] ἔτυψα, N. 529, m., 
later ἐτύπτησα Aristl., 2 a. ἔτυπον Υ. 
Eur. Ion 767 [redupl. 284 6] ; τετύ- 
aryka l., τέτυμμαι, N. 782, Hdt. 3. 
64, τετύπτημαι]., ἐτυπτήθην & ἐτύφθην 
1., 2a, ἐτύπην po. ΟΥ̓ 1., Q. 421, f.? 
Of the verbs signifying to strike, the 
Att. use of τύπτω is especially in the 
pres. system; of πατάσσω, in the 
aor. act.; & of πλήσσω, in the perf. 
pass. & compound systems ; while 
“παίω has a freer range of the tenses : 
Πατάξαι ἢ πληγῆναι, to strike or be 
struck, Aristl. Rh. 1. 15. Térre.., 
καὶ... πατάξας Lys. 136. 22. 


TABLES. 


τύφω (d1g, θῦφ-) fumigate, smoke s 
τέθῦὕφα r., τέθυμμαι, 2 a. ὃ ἐτὕφην 9: 


¥. 


[ὑλάω ululo, HowL, bark, π. 9 : 
ὑλάσκω po., ὑλάσσω 1., ὑλακτέω, v. 18, 
Ven. 3. 5, [ὑλακάω & ὑλακτιάω 1.] 

ὑπ-ισχχνέομαι, undertake, promise, 
A. τ. 1.; ὑπο-σχήσομαι, 2 a. ὑπ- 
εσχόμην ; ὑπ-έσχημαι, ὑπ-εσχέθηντ.: 
po. or I. ὑπίσχομαι. See ἔχω. 

“vo rain, 571d, 6 ; "vow [m. as p. 
Hdt. 2. 14], 0a; δῦσμαι 307d, Ven. 
9. 5, ὕσθην, Hat. 3. 10. 


ᾧ, 


[φα-, φεν- Ὁ1 n, Kill, +; ἔφασα 1., 
2 ἃ. ἔπεφνον οὅ, 2846 ; πέφαμαι, E. 
531, -σμαι ]., 3 f. πεφήσομαι, Ο. 140: 
l. πέφνω, whence some accent 2 a. 
pt. as pres., πέφνων.] Cog. σφάζω. 

a ἔφαγον, see ἐσθίω cat. 

atvwh, dave, répayKa ° Dinarch., 
&c., show, shine, M. appear, 40 ; as 
v. l. 2 a. ἔφανον n.?; 2 a. p. iter. 
φάνεσκε 332g. Po. cog. [φαείνω, γ. 
2,| f. (φαενω) pavG? Ar. Eq. 300; 
[φάω, pf. p. πέφαται 3, 3 f. πεφήσεται 
P. 155, cf. ga-;] φαέθω, Soph. ΕἸ. 
824; πιφαύσκω, λ. 442, Asch. Ag. 23. 
Cog. φημί say, Sans. bhami 271d". 

Seopa (h, φιδ-) spare; φείσομαι 
a0., [πεφιδήσομαι, 2a. πεφιδόμην, 284 f ; 
πεφίδημαι 1., 311,] πέφεισμαι 1. 

φέρβω feed, nourish, M. po.+, Pl. 
Criti. 11ὅ ἃ ; [2 plp. ἐπεφόρβει Hom. 
Merc. 105.] Cog. 2, 

φέρω fero, BEAR, bring, M., [imv. 
2p. φέρτε 326 e:] fr. o- x, f. οἴσω 
Mu, 20. a. T., M.2, [inf. dva-oica, ct. 
ἀνῷσαι Hdt. 1. 157, imv. οἷσε 327 a ;] 
f. p. οἰσθήσομαι : fr. évex- x, ἐνεγκ- n°, 
1 a. ἠνέγκα m., 306a, 2 a. ἤνεγκον 
(preferred in inf. & pt.; but scarcely 
used in ind. exc. 1 5. po., or in imv. 
exc. 2 5., where 1 a. is r.: ᾿γὼ ἤνεγ- 
κον. “Hveyxas σύ; Ar. Th. 742), m. 
not in ind. & τ. Soph. O. C. 470; pf. 
ἐνήνοχα 281] ο, 812 ο, Isoc. 128d, 
ἐνήνεγμαι, ἠνέχθην f., iv. 7. 12: [fr. 
évex-, E. & I. 1 a. ἤνεικα m., 2 a. 
ἤνεικον Υ. p. 178 ; ϑένήνειγμαι, Hat. 


| 


8. 37, δήἠνείχθην.] Cog. φορέω v?, 


§ 50. φέρω 
-how (1. -€ow), &e. [pr. inf. φορῆναι 
335 b, φορήμεναι 888, O. 310] ; φρέω 
(po. 2 ἃ. dmv. ppés) ; [5 ἐνείκομαι.] 
φεύγω (h, puy-) fugio, flee ; φεύ- 
ξομαι ἃ -οῦμαι 305d, -gwl., ao. L, 
[l. f. φυγοῦμαι 305 ἃ], 2 a. ἔφυγον ; 
2 pf. πέφευγα,α. 12, |pt. πεφυγμένος 
a. 18,] ἐφεύχθην 1. Cog. φυγγάνω 
Asch. Pr. 513; [as fr. φυζάω, 2 pf. 


pt. mepugires ®. 6, πεφυζηώς ]., La. > 


p. φυζηθείς 1. 

φημί (φα-), 45u, 271s, & φάσκω, 
fa-ri, (a) say, affirm (this stronger 
sense belonging esp. to φάσκω, & the 
fut., aor., & mid. fr. pa-); ipf. ἔφα- 
oxov & (usu. as aor.) ἔφην ; M. pr. 
[2 p. φάσθε x. 562, imv. pao π. 168, 
φάσθω v. 100, inf. φάσθαι +, Aisch. 
Per. 700,] pt. φάμενος, Hel. 1. 6. 3, 
ipf. ἐφάμην ch. po. or |., A. 43; 

how (opt. 1. r.), ἔφησα (tv. want- 
ing); pf. p. [3 5. πέφαται Ap. Rh. 
2. 500,| mv. 8 5. πεφάσθω Pl. Tim. 
72¢, °épdOny Aristl. Int. 9. 9: (b) 
fr. (Fep- x, cf. Lat. verbum) ép- f, 
pe- οὅ [pr. a. (1 5. only) εἴρω h, ν. 7, 
m. 1., ipf. m. ε. 5423] f. ἐρῶ, Sm. 1.; 
εἴρηκα 281, -μαι, 3 f. εἰρήσομαι Th. 
6. 34, ἐῤῥήθην, -έθην r., [τ. εἰρέθην,] 
sub. ῥηθῶ, &c., Hdt. 8. 9, f. ῥηθήσομαι: 
(c) fr. (Fem-, Fecw-h) εἰπ-, 1 ἃ. εἶπα 5806 ἃ 
(ind. 2 5., ἃ imv. exc, 2 5.5 esp. used ; 
opt., inf., & pt. τ. in Att.), Cm. 1. or 
]., oftener (exc. as above) 2 a. εἶπον 
(εἴπω, -οιμι, -é, -eiv, -ὠν), °m.? 1, 
[w. syllabic aug., ἔξειπον, ἔειπον K. 
445, ἔειπα Pind. N. 9. 78.] (d) Cog. 
φατίζω & φημίζω ch. po.; φαίνω show, 
q. v.; [εἰρέω, Hes. Th. 38 ;] ἐρωτάω 
ask, q. ν.; [ἔπω 1. τ.; ἐσπ- ο, in pr. 
or 2 ἃ. imv. 2 p. ἔσπετε Β. 484, pr. 
m. ἔσπομαι 1.:] ἐνέπω q. ν. 

e. The forms with ᾧ omitted (45 υ), 
ἠμί [8 5. joe Sap. 48], ἣν, A, are used 
for greater vivacity or the metre. 
Some refer them to a distinct root, 
akin to the Lat. aio. The subject 
follows, if expressed : ἣν δ᾽ ἐγώ, quoth 
J, Ar. Eq. 634; ἢ δ᾽ ὅς § 518f; ἢ, 
he spake, A. 219; παῖ, jul, παῖ, παῖ, 
boy! I say, boy! boy! Ar. Nub. 1145. 
(ἢ) The pr. 2 5. is usu. written φῇς, 
as if ct. fr. φαείς, 120 g, [p 6a 297 b, 
£.149; ὃ 5. φή fr. φαεί or φησί, 108 ο, 
Anac. 41; D. φατί, 3 p. φαντί, 828.] 


VERBS. 


φρύγω 91 


(g) Φάσκω is most used in the ρέ., 
to supply the place of φάς (45 τ]. 
Hom. has only the ipf, N. 100. The 
pr. ind. is esp. rare. (h) The familiar 
forms from ép- & εἶπ- have associate 
presents, not only as above, but also 
in λέγω, ἀγορεύω (ch. in comp.), &c. 
φθάνω (ἃ E.; n}, φθα-) anticipate, 
M.1.; φθἄσω, Cyr. 5. 4. 38, oftener 
θήσομαι 310d, Th. 8. 12, ἔφθασα, 
Th. 1. 33, 2 a. ἔφθην 313 b, λ. 58, 
Th. 4. 4, [m. pt. φθάμενος E. 119 5] 
ἔφθακα, ἐφθάσθην |. 
φθείρω (h, φθαρ-, φθερ- Ὁ) corrupt, 
destroy, esp. cp. w. διά, 7]. ; φθερῶ 
m., ἔφθειρα, [f. ᾿ φθέρσω, Ν. 625, ao. 
1., 152d, δφθαρέομαι 1.;| ἔφθαρκα, 
f°Kur. Med. 226, 2 pf. ἔφθορα “Ib. 
349, ἔφθαρμαι, 2 ἃ. ἐφθάρην f. Cog., 
φθίνω πη: [i Ε., & τ. φθίω, B. 868], 
decay, consume (usu. intrans. exc. in 
fut. & ao.), ch. po., AZ.; φθίσω [i E., 
m.,| ao. a. [m. 1., 2 ἃ. “ἔφθιθον ἴα}, 
ε. 110 υ. 1.,] 2a. m. ἐφθίμην 313 Ὁ, 
Eur. Ale. 414, sub. &c. [φθίωμαι, 
σφθίμην 316 ο, 8 5. φθίσθω, Pbic bat, | 
φθίμενος - ἔφθϊἴκα 1., -μαι, υ. 840, -θην. 
Cog. φθινύθω po., φθινέω 1., φθέω ? 
λέω (ν, φίλ-), -σω, πεφίληκα, 
&e., love, 42: [φίλημι 335 b, φίλει- 
σθα 297 Ὁ, φιλήμεναι 333 6, X. 265 ; 
la. m. ἐφιλάμην 152, Εἰ. 61.] 
λαδ-, 2 ἃ. ἔφλαδον burst, Aisch. 
λέγω flagro, burn; φλέξω, ὅν. 1., 
ao. a. Aisch. Pr. 582 ; πέφλεγμαι 1, 
ἐφλέχθην, 2a. ὃ ἐφλέγην Sf. 1. Der. 
φλεγέθω po., P. 738, φλογίζω. 
φοβέω v2, -ήσω, πεφόβηκα, Kc., 
terrify, M. [& φέβομαι EB. 532] fear. 
φράζω (j1, dpad-) tell, M.; φράσω 
[in. |; a0:, [2 a. πέφραδον, ἐπέφραδον, 
284e;| πέφρακα Isoc. 10] ἃ, -σμαι 
|° πεφραδμένος 148 b, Hes. Op. 653], 
ἐφράσθην. [Cog. τ. φραδάζω, Pind. ] 
φᾧράσσω ἃ τ. φράγνυμι (i, τ, 
φραγ-}] fence, M. φράγνῦμαι ; mn. 
οφράξομαι 1., ἔφραξα m.; 2 pf. 5πέ- 
φρᾶγα (or -καὴ 1., -γμαι, Th. 1. 82, 
ἐφράχθην, °f..1., 2 ἃ. ἐφράγην 1., f. 1.: 
sometimes written dap for dpa, 145. 
φρΐσσω (i, φρικ-) shudder ; φρίξω 
l., ao. α., m.1.; 2 pf. pret. πέφρικα, 
A. 383, [pt. πεφρίκοντας 326b.] Cog. 
(Fpvy-, 139, 141) ῥιγέω q. ve. 
φρύγω g, frigo, roast ; Ἵφρύξω] a0. ; 


92 ᾿φρύγω 
πέφρυγμαι, ΤῊ. 6. 22, ἐφρύχθην 1., 
ἐφρὕγην τ. or 1.: 1. φρύσσω. Cog. 
φώγνυμι n’7, 1. [φώγω D., φώζω 1.; 
ἔφωξα & -woa Hipp.;] &c. 
φυλάσσω (i, φυλακ-), -Ew, © πεφύ- 
axa, &c., guard, M. beware ; [pr. 
a. imv. 2 p. προ-φύλαχθε 326e ;] 2 pf. 
πεφύλακα 1. Lxx. 
φύρω g, mix, knead, M.; ἔφῦρα |. 
[ἔφῦρσα 152d, σ. 21, m. 1.1; πέφυρ- 
μαι, [3 f. πεφύρσομαι 319, | ἐφύρθην, 
isch. Ag. 732, 2 ἃ. ἐφὕρην “f. 1. 
Cog. pipdw, -ἄσω - [φορὕνω & -ὑσσω.] 
ύω (Ὁ) produce, M. grow ; φύσω 
M., 20. A., 2a0. Epiv (φύω, φύην 316 ο, 
φῦναι, pis, cf. vv 45h) was born or 
made, became, hence am; πέφυκα 
pret., aim (by nature), Th: 4. 61, 
lemépixoy 326 b, 2 pf. 3 p. πεφὕᾶσι 
A. 484, sub. ὃ πεφύω, pt. πεφυώς, ε. 
477,] °épvdn 1. r., 2a. ἐφὕην, f. 1. 
Cog. φύτεύω, -εύσω, ἃ φιτὕύω, -tcw, 
plant ; Lat. fui. 


φώγνυμι [-γω, -f0,]: see φρύγω. 


Χ. 


σχάζω (jl, χαδ-, καδ- ἃ 3) drive back, 
M. ch. Ε., cedo, retreat (so A. iv. 1. 
16); [κεκαδήσω 284 f, χάσομαι, © ἔχα- 
oa, Pind. N. 10. 129, m.+, A. 535, 
2a. κέκαδον, m. A. 497.] 

χαίνω gape, 1. Anth.; see χάσκω. 

χαίρω (h, xap-) rejoice, M.; χαι- 
ρήσω 311 b, Ar. Pl. 64, ao. 1., xa- 
ροῦμαι 1. Lxx., [κεχαρήσω, -copat, 
2847, 1 ἃ. ἐχηράμην, ΞΙ. 270, 2 ἃ. 
ἐχαρόμην 1., κεχαρόμην 284 6, A. 256 :} 
κεχάρηκα, Hdt. 8. 42, [pt. κεχαρηώς 
325d, H. 312,| κεχάρημαι & κέχαρμαι 
po., Eur. Iph. A. 200, El. 1077, ἐχά- 
ρην, f.1. Cog. χαρίζομαι gratify. 

[xav8dve (n°, xad-, χανδ- ἡ, yevd- 
b) contain, +; (xevd-couar 156) χεί- 
mopar, σ. 17, 2a. ἔχαδον, A. 24; 2 pf. 
pret. κέχανδα, 6. 96.] Cog.?, 

χάσκω (k*, χαν-), 1. χαίνω h, hisco, 
gape; “xavotpar [χήσομαι ἴ], 2 a. 
éxavov, Δ. 182; 2 pf. pret. κέχηνα 
Ar. Av. 264. Der. χασκάζω 379 Ὁ. 

χέζω (1, xed-) caco, comic +3; χε- 
σοῦμαι 305 ἃ, “xécoua r., ἔχεσα m., 
2a. éxecov r. 327 a; 2 pf. °Kéxoda, 
κέχεσμαι ; Ar. 
. χέω (f1, χεξ-, xev- 2, χῦ- 142°) 


TABLES. t 


χράω § 50. 
pour, ch. ep. w. ἐκ, ἐν, σύν, &e., M., 
309b; f. °xém or xed 305 f, Ὁ, m., 
[χεύω B. 222,11 ἃ. ἔχεα m. 806, ἔχευα 
m., H. 86, 63, 2a. m. ἐχύμην 818, 
A. 526 ;] “κέχυκα l., -μαι, ἐχύθην f. 
(1. -€0nv f.): also χύω 1. (χύσω, &e.), 
χύνω 1., Acts 9. 22, xedw (pr.) po., 
ch. 1., (€xevoa). Cog. χόω q. v. 
χλιδάω τι, luxwriate, po. or 1.; 2 pf. 
σκέχλιδα. [Cog. xéxAdda pret., Pind.] 
χολόω, -dow, &c., anger; M. xo- 
λόομαι [χώομαν 621, T. 29, χώσομαι, 
ao. A. 64] be angry ; pret. κεχόλωμαι, 
a. 69, 3 f. κεχολώσομαι Ψ. 543. 

Χχόω ἃ later χώννῦμι n8, heap up ; 
χώσω, ao. a. [m.1.] ; “Kéxaxa, Dem. 
1279. 20, -σμαι, ἐχώσθην ft. ; Cyr. 7. 
3. 11, 16, 17. Cog. xéw q. v. 

[xparopéw v, avert, help, pr. 1. τ΄ ; 
χραισμήσω, T. 296, ao. Σ. 62, 2 ἃ. 
ἔχραισμον, &. 66; not inOd.] Cog., 

χράω (χρήσω, &c., 310a, 307 e; 
χράεις χρῇς 120g, 1. or 1. xpas Hat. 
4. 155, &c.) to supply need, — 

a.) The need of another, by Jend- 
ing ; M., one’s own need, by borrow- 
ing: κίχρημι r}, m. κίχρᾶμαι - [χρή- 
ow, Hdt. 3. ὅ8,] ao. a. m.; κέχρηκα 
1., δ΄ μαι, Dem. 817, 2: 1. κιχράέω. 

b.) The need of one who consults 
an oracle, by answering; M. one’s 
own need, by consulting an oracle : 
χράω, 72. χράομαι " χρήσω m., ao. 
a.; κέχρηκα ]., -σμαι or -μαι, Ἠαΐ. 7. 
141, ἐχρήσθην. Po. cog. χρήζω, Eur. 

6.) One’s own need, by wsing what 
isrequired: M7. χράομαι - χρήσομαι 
ao.; κέχρημαι, Hdt. 1. 42, ἐχρήσθην. 

ἃ. Impers. χρή (for χράει or nude 
χρῆσι, cf. φημί f), it supplies need, 
i. 6. at is useful or necessary, it must 
or ought to be; sub. χρῇ, opt. (xpe- 
b1) χρείη Aisch. Pr. 213, inf. χρῆναι 
nude, ἃ po. χρῆν Eur. Hee. 260, pt. 
neut. & indecl. (χράον, ct. 120 i) xpe- 
dv Th. 6. 18; ipf. 3 s. ἐχρῆν 163 Ὁ, 
oftener χρῆν 284¢; χρήσει Hat. 7. 8. 
(e) Cp. ἀπό-χρη [τ. ἀποχρᾷ Hat. 9. 
79], it fully supplies need, ἐξ suffices 
or contents ; inf. ἀπο-χρῆν Dem. 52. 
13, ipf. ἀπ-έχρη ; ἀπο-χρήσει, ἀπ- 
ἔχρησε. [So 1. ἀπ-εχρέετο, κατα-χρᾷ, 
-χρήσει, ἐκ-χρήσει, Hdt. 8. 14, 1. 164, 
3. 137.] (f) These or corresponding 


forms are also used personally : [Meg, 


§ 51. χράω 

χρῆσθα you must, 297 Ὁ :] ἀπό-χρη, 
-χρήσουσι, Ar. Av. 1603, Pl. 484, 
[ἐξ-έχρησε Hat. 8. 70 5] ἀπο-χράομαι 
content one’s self, Hdt. 1. 37. 

g. Forms fr. χράω sometimes agree 
in sense w. its cog. χρήζω [E. I. χρη- 
ttw, -ἴσω, 132, p. 121, 1. χρηΐσκομαι, 
Hdt. 3. 117] need, wish, 414¢: as, 
χρῇ Soph. Ant. 887 ; po. pret. κέχρη- 
μαι nerd, wise, Kur. Iph. A. 382, a. 
13, 3 f. κεχρήτομαι, Theoc. 16. 73. 

ἴω anoint, M.; χρίσω m., ao.; 
κέχρικα 1. Lxx., -ἰσμαι or μαι 307 e, 
Cyr. 7. 5. 22, ἐχρίσθην, f. 1. Cog., 
χρώζω & 1. χρώννῦμι (z, n°, xpo-) 
touch, color; éxpwoal.; “κέχρωκα ]., 
κέχρωσμαι, Eur. Med. 497, ἐχρώσθην, 
f. 1. Cog. xpotfw po., xpwrifw, xpai- 
γω (xpaF-) χράω or χραύω graze. 
[xdopar, be angry; see χολόομαι.] 


Ww, 


Yaw, “how, &e., rub, 120¢. 
Cog. ψήχω rub, ψαύω touch, ψάλλω 


VERBS. 


ὠνέομαι 99 
ψύχω breathe, cool; ψύξω ao.; πέ- 
Yuya 1. 280¢, ἔψυγμαι, -χθην f., 
Ven. 5. 8, 2 a. ἐψύχην or -γην 42, 
Ar. Nub. 151, f. 1. Mat. 24. 12. 


Ώ. 


ὠδίνω g, be in travail, A. 269; 
late ὠδινῶ ao., & ὠδινήσω 311, Lxx., 
80. ὦ. Ὧν. Pp. 

ὠθέω (ν, ὠθ-) push, M.; ipf. ἐώ- 
θεον m. 279 Ὁ (ὦθ- π., 1.,.1., & τ. in 
Att.) ; ὥσω ὅηι., & po. ὠθήσω, m. 1., 
ἔωσα m. [aoa m. E. 1., E. 19], ὥθησα 
Cm. 1.3 Sowa 1, -σμαι, Cyr. 7. 1. 36, 
-σθην f., (1. or 1. ὦσμαι, doOnv.) Der. 
ὠστίζομαι justle, Ar. Ach. 42. 

avéopat, v. 3. 7, buy (pr. r. as pass. 
Pl. Phedo 69 b); ipf. ἐωνεόμην 279b 
(av- 1., 1, & τ. in Att.); ὠνήσομαι 
vii. 2. 38, ἐωνησάμην or ὠνησάμην ch. 
1.; ἐώνημαν as mid. & pass., Lys. 108. 
26, 211. 1, -Onv as pass.: 2a. fr. πρια- 
x, ἐπριάμην 451, a. 430; 2 8. ἐπρίω, 
πρίασο, πρίω, Ar. Vesp. 1440, Ach. 


twitch, ψηλαφάω feel after. 870, 34. Cog. πιπράσκω sell. 


51. Remarks. a. In using the preceding List, it is important to 
observe carefully the punctuation, as showing with what words the ab- 
breviations, references, and various marks are connected; and also to dis- 
tinguish the small Roman letters of abbreviation (marked by periods, as f., 
l., Το, for future, late, rare), from mere letters of reference (not so marked, 
though periods may follow them for punctuation). If the latter immedi- 
ately follow figures, they refer (except s) to parts of sections or pages ; 
but otherwise, to the notation of stems in § 49, 340s. The articles on 
εἰμί, φημί, and xpdw, haye also division-letters. (Ὁ) If the abbreviation 1., 
r., E., I., or po. follows ao., f., or m., its force extends back to the pre- 
ceding word, unless arrested by [, (, or a comma. 


6. Thus, in the paragraphs on στέλλω and σφάλλω, | first denotes the 
union of consonant I with ἃ in the stem, to form AA; while the follow- 
ing 1. marks the form there noted, as date. "Εσῴφαλον preceding is likewise 
so marked, as no comma intervenes, but not στελῶ- while ἐστάλθην is 
marked as rare, and ἐσφάλθην as both late and rare. In the article on 
xéw, 1 denotes the dropping of F in the stem ; and f after 305, a part οἵ 
the section so numbered ; while f. following is an abbreviation for futwre, 
showing that the Aor. ἐχύθην and the late éyé@ymv have corresponding 
futures, χυθήσομαι and χεθήσομαι. It is also shown, that the Fut. xéw 
has only been found in composition ; and that the Fut. χεύω is dialectic, 
occurring in Homer. The sign + shows that yavddvw, though also enclosed 
in brackets, is not wholly excluded from the Attic (Ar. Ran. 260). The 
references to authors have been usually, but not exclusively, attached to 
the less familiar forms. Before a reference, ° marks the word as there 
compound, though sometimes simple. See Notes on page 67. 


~= 


94 


52. D. TABLE 


TABLES. 


OF NUMERALS. 


1. ADJECTIVES. 


1. Cardinal. 


Interrog. πόσοι; quot? how many ? 
Indefinite ποσοί, aliquot, some. 

Rel. Ind. ὁπόσοι, quotquot. 
Relative ὅσοι, quot, as many. 
Diminut. ὀλίγοι, pauci, few. 
Augment. πολλοί, multi, many. 
Demonst. τόσοι, tot, so many. 


εἷς, pla, ἕν, unus, one. 
β΄ δύο, δύω, duo, two. 

Γ τρεῖς, τρία, tres, three. 
τέσσαρες, -α, quatuor, four. 
πέντε, quinque, jive. 
ἕξ, sex, six. 
ἑπτά, septem, seven. 
ὀκτώ, octo, eight. 
évvéa, novem, nine. 
δέκα, decem, ten. 
ια΄ ἕνδεκα, undecim, eleven. 
ιβ΄ δώδεκα, duodecim, ¢welve. 
uy τρισκαίδεκα, δεκατρεῖς, tre- 

decim, thirteen. [decim. 
ιδ΄ τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα, quatuor- 
ué πεντεκαίδεκα, quindecim. 
is” ἑκκαίδεκα, sexdecim. 
ιζ΄ ἑπτακαίδεκα, septendecim. 
iy ὀκτωκαίδεκα, duodeviginti. 
ιθ΄ ἐννεακαίδεκα, undeviginti. 
κ΄ εἴκοσιί(ν, viginti, twenty. 
Ka εἷς καὶ εἴκοσι, εἴκοσιν εἷς, 

viginti unus, twenty-one. 
N rprdxovra, triginta, thirty. 
μ΄ τεσσαρἄκοντα, quadraginta. 

50 ν΄ πεντήκοντα, quinquaginta. 

60 ξ΄ ἑξήκοντα, sexaginta, sixty. 

70 ο΄ ἑβδομήκοντα, septuaginta. 

80 π΄ ὀγδοήκοντα, octoginta, 

90 φ΄ ἐνενήκοντα, nonaginta. 

100 ρ΄ ἑκατόν, centum, a hundred. 
200 σ΄ διακόσιοι, -αι, -α, ducenti. 
800 τ΄ τριακόσιοι, trecenti. 

400 υ᾽ τετρἄκόσιοι, quadringenti. 
500 φ΄ πεντακόσιοι, quingenti. 


, 


2. Ordinal. 


πόστος; quotus? which in order? 
or, one of how many ? 

ὁπόστος, quotuscumque, whichsoever 
in order. 

ὀλιγοστός, one of few. 

πολλοστός, one of many, or, one fol- 
lowing many. 


πρῶτος, -y, -ov, primus, first.. 
δεύτερος, -a, -ov, secundus, second. 
τρίτος, -n, -ov, tertius, third. 
τέταρτος, quartus, fourth. 
πέμηττος, quintus, ji/th. 
ἕκτος, sextus, sixth. 
ἕβδομος, septimus, seventh. 
ὄγδοος, octavus, eighth. 
ἔνατος, nonus, ninth. 
δέκατος, decimus, fenth. 
ἑνδέκατος, undecimus, eleventh. 
δωδέκατος, duodecimus, twelsth. 
τρισκαιδέκατος, tertius decimus, 
thirteenth. — 
τεσσαρακαιδέκατος; quartus decimus. 
πεντεκαιδέκατος, quintus decimus. 
ἑκκαιδέκατος, sextus decimus. 
ἑπτακαιδέκατος, septimus decimus. 
ὀκτωκαιδέκατος, duodevicesimus. 
ἐννεακαιδέκατος, undevicesimus. 
εἰκοστός, vicesimus, twentieth. 
εἰκοστὸς πρῶτος, unus et vicesimus, 
twenty-first. 
τριᾶάκοστός, tricesimus, thirtieth. 
τεσσαρᾶκοστός, quadragesimus. 
πεντηκοστός, quinquagesimus. 
ἑξηκοστός, sexagesimus, sixtieth. 
ἑβδομηκοστός, septuagesimus. 
ὀγδοηκοστός, octogesimus. 
ἐνενηκοστός, honagesimus. 
ἑκατοστός, centesimus, hundredth. 
διάκοσιοστός, ducentesimus. 
τριακοσιοστός, trecentesimus. 
τετρᾶἄκοσιοστός, quadringentesimus. 
πεντακοσιοστός, quingentesimus. 


§ 52 


600 x’ ἑξακόσιοι, sexcenti. 
ἑπτακόσιοι, septingenti. 
ὀκτακόσιοι, octingenti. 
900 7 ἐνακόσιοι, nongenti. 
χίλιοι, -at, -a, mille. 
δισχίλιοι, duo millia. 


700 y’ 
800 w 


1,000 
2,000 


10,000 κι μύριοι, -αι, -a, 


millia, ten thousand. 
δισμύριοι, viginti millia. 
centum 
nuillia, 100 thousand. 


20,000 κ 


100,000 ρ δεκακισμύριοι, 


3. Temporal. 


Inter. ποσταῖος ; on what day ? 


éxratos, on the sixth day. 


90 τὰ > OUR go bo μὶ 


5. Proportional. 
how 


Inter. ποσάπλάσιος ; 
many fold ? 
Dim. 


[ fold. 
Augm. πολλαπλάσιος, many 


. (ἴσος, equus, equal.) 

. διπλάσιος, diplus, twof. 

. τριπλάσιος, triplus. 

. τετραπλάσιος, quadru- 
plus, fourfold. 

. πενταπλάσιος, fivefold. 

ἑξαπλάσιος, sixfold. 

ἑπταπλάσιος, septuplus. 

ὀκταπλάσιος, octuplus. 

ἐννεαπλάσιος, ninefold. 

. δεκαπλάσιος, tenfold. 

. εἰκοσαπλάσιος. 

100. ἑκατονταπλάσιος. 

1,000. χιλιοπλάσιος. 

10,000. μυριοπλάσιος, 

10,000-fold. 


m Ο Db et 


SSOMNIAN 


1 
2 


. (αὐθήμερος, on the same day.) 
δευτεραῖος, on the second day. 
. τριταῖος, on the third day. 
τεταρταῖος, on the fourth day. 
πεμπταῖος, on the fifth day. 


. ἑβδομαῖος, on the seventh day. 
. ὀγδοαῖος, on the eighth day. 


NUMERALS. 


decem 
thousandth. 


4, 


II. ADVERBS. 


ποσάκις; quoties ? 
how many times ? 

ὀλιγάκις, paucies, few 
times. 

πολλάκις, many times. 


ἅπαξ, semel, once. 
δίς, bis, twice. 
τρίς, ter, thirice. 
τετράκις, quater, four 
times. 
πεντάκις, quinquies. 
ἑξάκις, sexies. 
ἑπτάκις, septies. 
ὀκτάκις, octies. , 
ἐνάκις, novies. 
δεκάκις, decies. 
εἰκοσάκις, vicies. 
ἑκατοντάκις, centies. 
χιλιάκις, millies. 
μυριάκις, decies mil- 
lies. 


95 


ἑξακοσιοστός, sexcentesimus. 
ἑπτακοσιοστός, septingentesimus. 
ὀκτακοσιοστός, octingentesimus. 
ἐνακοσιοστός, nongentesimus. 
Χχιλιοστός, millesimus, thousandth. 
δισχιλιοστός, bis millesimus. 
μυριοστός, decies millesimus, t¢en- 


δισμυριοστός, vicies millesimus. 
δεκακισμυριοστός, centies millesi- 
mus, hundred-thousandth. 


Multiple. 


Augm. πολλαπλοῦς, multiplex. 


a(dos)obs, simplex, simple, single. 
διπλοῦς, duplex, double. 

τριπλοῦς, triplex, triple. 
τετραπλοῦς, quadruplex, guadruple. 
πενταπλοῦς, quincuplex, quintuple. 
ἑξαπλοῦς, sextuple. 

_l€mratdots, septemplex, septuple. 
ὀκταπλοῦς, octuple. 


111. SuBSTANTIVES. 


ποσότης, quantitas, 
quantity, number. 

ὀλιγότης, paucitas, 
Jewness. 

πολλότης, multitiido. 


évds, μονάς, monad. 
Suds, duad. 
τριάς, triad. 
τετράς, TETPAKTUS, 
quaternion. 
πεμπάς, TevTas. 
éEds, hexade. 
ἑπτάς, ἑβδομάς. 
ὀκτάς, ὀγδοάς. 
ἐννεάς, ennead. 
δεκάς, decade. 
εἰκάς, score. οι 
ἑκατοντάς, century. 
χιλιάς, chiliad. 
μυριάς, myriad. 


96 TABLES, § 53. 


53. E. PRONOMINAL 


Obsolete Primitives are printed in capitals. Poetic, Late, and Dialectic Forms are not marked. 
Latin equivalents occupy the. 


Negative. Relative. 
ORDERS, I. TI. ἘΠ ὝΥ. V. Ni; 
_ CLASSES. Interrogative. Indefinite. Ob(Sub)jective. Definite. Indefinite. 
αἰ { Positive, τίς; tis, ILOZ οὔ(μήγτις ὅς qui ὅστις 
2 ΠΟΣ; "AMOZ οὐ(μη)δαμός ὅσπερ ὍΠΟΣ 
Ξ quis ? aliquis οὐ(μη)δείς ὅστε quicumque 
= % | Comparative,rérepos ; πότερος οὐ(μη)δέτερος ὁπότερος 
ae uter? 4 uter οὐ(μη)δοπότερος 
Εσὶ | Superlative, πόστος ; [neuter ὁπόστος 
Ξ (Quantity, πόσος, ποσός ὅσος ὁπόσος 
8 5 : quantus? aliquantus quantus quantus 
5 5 Quality, ποῖος ; ποιός οὐτιδανός οἷος ὁποῖος 
“5° qualis? qualis οὐ(μη)δαμινός qualis qualis 
ΜΙ | Age, Size, πηλίκος; πηλίκος ἡλίκος ὁπηλίκος 
οὐ | Country, ποδαπός; ὁποδαπός 
‘| Day, TooTatos ; ὁποσταῖος 
Whence, πόθεν; ποθέν μήποθεν ὅθεν ὁπόθεν 
unde ? ἀμόθεν οὐ(μη)δαμόθεν ἔνθεν undecum- 
alicunde unde _ [que 
οὐ(μη)δετέρωθεν ὁποτέρωθεν 
. | Where, ποῦ; πού οὔ(μήγπου οὗ, €v0a ὅπου 
8 ἀμοῦ οὐ(μη)δαμοῦ ὁσαχοῦ 
a 4 πόθι; ποθί οὔποθι nusquam ὅθι, va ὁπόθι 
ἐν ubi ? alicubi οὐ(μη)δαμόθι ubi ubiubi 
ποτέρωθι ; uspiam οὐδετέρωθι ὁποτέρωθι 
Whither, ποῖ; ποί οὐ(μη)δαμοῖ of ὅποι 
πόσε; duot οὐ(μη)δαμόσχε quo ὁπόσε 
quo ? aliquo quoquo 
δι οἱ ποτέρωσε; οὐ(μη)δετέρωσε ὁποτέρωσε 
Ξ ἜΠΗ or Place πῆ; qua ? πή οὔπη ἡ, ἧχι ὅπη 
Ξ ’ ποίᾳ; ἀμῆ οὐδέπη qua quaqua 
3 ποσαχῆ; aliqua οὐ(μη)δαμῆ ὁσαχῆ ὁποσαχῆ 
oj 8: Manner, &., πῶς; πώς οὔ(μήγπως ws ut ὅπως 
quomodo? ἀμῶς οὐ(μη)δαμῶς quomodo utcumque 
ποίως; ποσῶς οἵως ὁποίως 
ποτέρως; ov(un)derépws  qualiter ὁποτέρως 
ποσαχῶς; οὔ(μήγπω ὁσαχῶς 
πῶ; πώ οὐ(μη)δέπω 
General, πότε; ποτέ οὔ(μήγποτε ὅτε ὁπότε 
2 quando? aliquan-ov(uy)dérore quum quanddque 
E Specific, πηνίκα; * [do [nunquam ἡνίκα ὁπηνίκα 
« | Various, πῆμος; οὐ(μη)κέτι ἦμος, ἐπεί ὁπῆμος 
quando ? ἕως, ὄφρα 
~5. Number, ποσάκις; οὐδενάκις ὁσάκις ὁποσάκις 
quoties ? quoties quotiesque 


DERIVATIVE Nouns. ποσότης quantitas, ποιότης qualitas, πηλικότης, 
ἑτερότης, TavToTys, ὁμοιότης, ἰσότης, ovdévera, towers, ἀλλοίωσις, ὁμοίωμα, &c. 


§ 53. PRONOMINAL CORRELATIVES. 97 
CORRELATIVES. 
Of the Negative Forms, the Objective begin with ov-, and the Subjective with yuy-. 
space after or below some words. ς 
Definite or Demonstrative. Universal. ἣν 
VII. Vt. IX. Oe ΧΙ. : Of laeniity, 
Simple. Emphatic. Deictic, Distributive. Collective. Diversity, &e. 
ὁ, ΤῸΣ οὗτος hic ὅδε hic wdsomnis duds, αὐτός 
ἐκεῖνος οὑτοσί ὁδί ἄμφω ἄλλος 
ille hicce hicce ambo alius 
€repos ἑκάτερος ἀμφότερος 
alter alteruter uterque 
ἕκαστος αὐτότατος 
τόσος tan- τοσοῦτος τοσόσδε 
γυννός [tus τυννοῦτος τοσοσδί 
τοῖος talis τοιοῦτος τοιόσδε “παντοῖος ὅμοιος 
ἐκείνινος τοιουτοσί τοιοσδί omnigenus ἀλλοῖος 
τηλίκος τηλικοῦτος τηλικόσδε ὁμῆλιξ 
παντοδαπός ἀλλοδαπός 
αὐθήμερος 
τόθεν inde τουτόθεν ἑκάστοθεν πάντοθεν ὁμόθεν 
ἔνθεν hine ἐντεῦθεν ἐνθένδε ἑκασταχόθεν πανταχόθεν αὐτόθεν 
ἐκεῖθεν — ine hine éxdrepbey undique ἄλλοθεν 
ἑτέρωθεν inde inde ἑκατέρωθεν ἀμφοτέρωθεν ἀλλαχόθεν 
ἔνθα hic ἐνταῦθα ἐνθάδε {utrimque πανταχοῦ ὁμοῦ, αὐτοῦ 
ἐκεῖ illie hic hic ἑκασταχοῦ ubique ἀλλαχοῦ 
760: 101 [Ὁ ibi ἑκάστοθι πάντοθι αὐτόθι 
ἐκεῖθι ἐνταυθί ὧδε ἑκασταχόθε πανταχόθε ἄλλοθι 
ἑτέρωθι hic ἑκατέρωθι ἀμφοτέρωθε ἀλλαχόθι 
ἐνθάδε eco ἐνταυθοῖ ἑκασταχοῦ πανταχοῖ ὁμόσε 
ἐκεῖσε hue quocumque πάντοσε αὐτόσε 
- illue 60 ἑκασταχόσε πανταχόσε ἄλλοσε 
ἑτέρωσε ἑκατέρωσε ἀμφοτέρωσε ἀλλαχόσε 
τῇ ea ταύτῃ τῇδε πάντη ὁμῇ 
ἐκείνῃ hac hac .  ubique ἄλλῃ 
1146 ᾿ ἑκασταχῆ πανταχῆ ἀλλαχῆ 
τώς, ὥς ita οὕτως ὧδε 510 πάντως ὁμῶς 
ἐκείνως οὑτωσί wot omnino αὔτως 
τοίως 510 τοιῶσδε παντοίως ὁμοίως 
ἑτέρως ita taliter ἑκατέρως ἀμφοτέρως ὡσαύτως 
secus τοσαυταχῶς πανταχῶς ἄλλως 
τῷ, τόσως ἰοῦ modis πάνυ ἀλλοίως 
τότε tum ἑκάστοτε πάντοτε, ἄλλοτε 
tune semper διαπαντός alias 
τηνίκα τηνικαῦτα τηνικάδε [semper αὐτίκα 
τῆμος, νῦν τημοῦτος τημόσδε statim 
τέως, τόφρα αὖ, αὖθις 
τοσάκις τοσαυτάκις toties ἑκαστάκις ἰσάκις 
toties TOUTGKLS éxarepdxis ἀμφοτεράκις 


DERIVATIVE VERBS. ὁμοιόω assimulo, ἰσόω equo, ἀλλοιόω, ποσόω, ποιόω, 
ἑτεροιόω, οὐδενίζω, ἀμφοτερίζω, ἰσάζξω, ὁμοιάζω, ἑκατερέω, ἀλλάσσω, &c. 


98 


TABLES. 


§ 54, 


54. F. TABLE OF DERIVATION. 
A. Nouns (868 5). 


I. From Verss: denoting 
1. The Action, in -σις, -σία, -τις, 
τη, -ἃ, "ος (α. του), “TOS, -τῇ, 
-TUS, -μός, -μη, -ος (G. -€0s). 
. The Effect or Object, in -pa, -ον. 
3. The Doer, in -rys, -τήρ, -Tep, 
(F. -τρια, -τειρα, -τρίς, -τιΞ5,) 
-€US, -ός, -μων. 

4. The Place, Instrument, &c., in 
-τήριον, -τρον, -τβα. 

II. From ADJECTIVES : expressing 
the Abstract, in -ta (-ειὰ, -οιὰ), 
ΣῊ» (α. 17705), -σύνη, ος (6. -εο5), 
-ἄς (G. -ddos). 

Ill. From Orner Nouns: 

1. Patrials, in -τῆς (της, -ἤτης, 


-ἄτης, -ιάτης, -ιώτης " F. -τιΞ), 
-evs (F. -is). 

2. Patronymics, in -(Sns, -άδης, 
-ιάδης (F. -ls, -ἄάς, -uds), -lov, 
(Ε. -ιώνη, -w7) : ----ἰδοῦς (F. -167)). 

3. Female Appellatives, in. -ts, 
-αινα, -ειᾶ, -σσα (-ττα), -ἃ, -η. 

4. Diminutives, m -vov (-ίδιον, 
-dptov, -ύλλιον, -ὕδριον, -ὕφιον, 
&e.), -ίσκος (Ὁ. -ἰσκη), τὰς 
«ιδεύς, -f νη,-άκνη, -αλος, -ελος 
-thos, -υλλίς, -ύλος, Ke. 

5. Augmentatives, in -wv, -wvld, 

6. Place, Instrument, &c., in -arov, 
-εἰον, 375" Ν, 


Β. ADJECTIVES (378 5). 


I, From VERBS: in -ἰκός, -τήριος͵ 
-pwv, active ; -τός, -τέος, -νός, 
passive ; τυμος, implying Jjit- 
ness ; -pds, -ds, -ds. 

II. From Nouns: in -tos (-avos, 
~ELOS, τοῖος, τῷος, τυιο5), per- 
taining to; -ικός, -Kés, -ακός, 
-αἰκός, relating to ; -€0s, -ἵνος, 
-EN, material ; ivés, time or 


prevalence ; -ivos, τηνός, -ἄνός, 

patrial; -pds, -ερός, “ἢ ός, 

-αλέος, -ηλός, -ωλός, -εἰις, -ώδης, 

JSulness or quality. 

From ADJECTIVES AND AD- 
VERBS : 

1. As from Nouns. 

2. Strengthened Forms: 
parative, Superlative. 


III. 


Com- 


C. Pronouns (58, 2445, 377). 
D. VeERBs (378s). 


I. From N OUNS AND ADJECTIVES : 
in -éw, -εύω, -dw, to be or do; -de, 
-αίνω, -éve, to make ; -ἴζω, “ite, 
imitative, active, &e.; -ἰάω, ὺ 
desiderative; -w with penult 
strengthened, active, &c. 


II. From OTHER VERBS: in -σείω, 
desiderative; -ἴω, -oKw, -λλω, 
Srequentative, intensive, inceptive, 
causative, diminutive, &c.; redu- 
plicated. 


E. ADVERBS (380 5). 


_ 


. Oxsrique Cases or NouNS AND 
ADJECTIVES : 

1. Accusatives: of Nouns; Neut. 
Sing. and Plur. of Adjectives 
(esp. Comparatives and Super- 
latives). 

. Genitives, in -Bev, place whence ; 
του, place where ; -ns, &e. 

3. Datives, in -οι, -obt, “HO, -ἄσι, 
place where ; ἡ (- -m), -ᾳ (-a), -αι, 
τι, way, manner, place where, 
time when; &e. 


II. DERIVATIVES aoe τ τον 

Manner, in a θβας ηδόν, -δόν, 
‘Say, “ἄδην, Bay δες, {(),.εἰ,. 

. Time when, in -τε, - ίκα. 

. Place whither, in -σε, -δις. 

Number, in -dxts. 

PREPOSITIONAL FoRMS AND 
PHRASES : 

. Prepositions with their Cases. 

. Prepositions without Cases. 

. Derivatives from Prepositions, 
in -@, -θεν, -ωθεν, -τος, -Sov, &c. 


τὰ 


§ 55. ETYMOLOGY. 99 


55. G. SIGNIFICANT ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE. 


Nore. The term ‘ things’ is here used in its large sense, as including every object of 
sense, discourse, or thought; whether persons, material things, or mere abstractions- 
The term “‘ actions ’’ is used for poe, actions and states. 


Grand The Signs Classes. Orders. Subdivisions. 
Divisions. of Proper. 
f Nouns, Appellative. 
Collective. 
ὲ \ Common : 
f Things ? ) Substantial. 
’ SUBSTANTIVES, Ahatrant: 


Personal, 
Reflexive, 
Connective, ὅσο. 


’ Substantive f 


e Pronouns 
Essential ὁ ’ 


Elements. | Infinitives (Gerunds, Supines). 
iui Finite Verbs. 
ὃ II. Transitive Se 
| Actions ..’ 4 Infinitives. 
1 VERBS, Intransitive, Participles. 
¢ peas Definite. 
Articles, Indefinite. 
Cardinal. 
Numerals, ὁ Ordinal. 
/ Multiple, &c. 
: ( Possessive. 
{ Properties Tif. Demonstrative. 
of ADJECTIVES, ὁ Ὁ Connective 
Things, a αλθβαν νη ὁ Interrogative. 
Indefinite. 
Distributive. 
| Negative, &c. 
B. Participles. 
Descriptive marae Of Quality. 
Elements. | Adjectives, Of Circumstance. 
(Of Manner, { Demonstrative. 
Properties Of Place, 1 Connective. 
of IV. 7 Of Time, Interrogative. 
Actions or ADVERBS, Of Degree, } Indefinite. 
of other Of Number, | Negative. 
| Properties, &e. Emphatic, &c. 
( Relations V. 
of Prepositions, Of Place, Time, Action, Cause, &c. 
Things, C : 
opulative. 
Coordinate, | Adversative 
ae Alternative. 
Connective ὁ . 
Elements. Boats VI. Complementary. 
Sentences, ἡ CONJUNCTIONS, Conditional. ὁ. 
: Subordinate, { Concessive. 
Causal. 
: Final, &c. 


D. “ 
nae ah VII. 
Iintve } Emotions, Ὁ Iyrersecrions, Of Pleasure, Pain, Address, &c. 


Without its ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS, language could have no existence as rational discourse ; 
without its DESCRIPTIVE ELEMENTS, it would be vague and meagre ; without its CONNECTIVE 
ELEMENTS, it would be disjointed; and without its INSTINCTIVE ELEMENTS, it would want 
sensibility and passion. 


100 TABLES. — SYNTAX. § 56. 


TIL SYNTAX. 
A. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 


56. A thought expressed in words forms a SENTENCE (sen- 
tentia, thought). Synrax is the doctrine of sentences, as Ery- 
MOoLOGY, of words, OrTHOEPY, of vocal sounds, and OrtTHoG- 
RAPHY, of written characters. 


a. To analyze ὦ sentence is to divide it into its parts, observing their 
offices and relations. These parts, in Syntax, are of three kinds: in- 
‘cluded sentences, commonly called clauses ; phrases, expressive combina- 
tions of words, yet not sentences ; and single words, or those which in 
Etymology are so regarded: ‘He came when it was time’; ‘He came in 
good time’; ‘He came seasonably.’ 


I. SENTENTIAL ANALYSIS. 


57. 1. Every complete sentence has two chief or primary 
elements, the SuBsEcT and PREDICATE; and may have a third, 
the CoMPELLATIVE. ‘ 


a. The subject and compellative are those substartives in the sentence 
which denote most directly the persons or things spoken of (subject) or 
addressed (compellative) : ‘ Brethren, virtue ennobles.’ 

Ὁ. The term substantives is here employed, as commonly in Syntax, to 
include not only nouns, substantive pronouns, and infinitives (55), but 
whatever is used substantively ; as, an adjective or adverb denoting some 
person or thing, a phrase or clause forming an object of thought or re- 
mark, or any word spoken of as a word: ‘ Now’s the day’; ‘ Above 
twenty came’; ‘Go is a verb.’ See 68a, 70a, 491. 

6. The predicate is always a verb; and, of more than one, that which 
is most closely related to the subject in the expression of the thought. 
(d) As the essence of a sentence is predication, the predicate is often taken 
as a representative of the sentence. Thus a word which connects or 
modifies a sentence, is familiarly spoken of as connecting or modifying 
the verb of the sentence: ‘ But perhaps he will go.’ 


2. Sentences have also various minor elements : 


6.) Eaxponents, words which mark the offices or relations of sentences 
or their parts: ‘ He said that he went to Paris and Rome.’ See 65s. 

f.) Elements that are grammatically iadependent ; as, a participial 
phrase absolute, interjections, &c. : ‘ This said, he fell, alas /’ 

g.) Subordinate elements, or modifiers, which are joined with other 
elements to modify or limit them, i. 6. to affect in various ways their 
force or application: ‘ Dear brethren, true virtue always ennobles.’ 

h. A word which is modified by another, is termed its principal ; and 
this distinction of principals and modifiers applies not only to single 
words, but also to phrases and sentences. 


58. Mopiriers are of three kinds: (1) Worps or Prop- 
ERTY, i. e. Adjectives and Adverbs (55), including all words so 
considered ; (2) Mopiryinc Supstantives, including <Apposi- 
tives and Adjuncts ; and (3) DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

a. Mopiryine SuspsTANTIvEs. When, with one name οὗ. ἃ person 


§ 59. SENTENTIAL ANALYSIS. . 101 


or thing, another is connected for the sake of explanation, specification, 
description, or emphasis, the latter is said to be im apposition with the 
former, and is termed an APPosITIVE: ‘ Paul the apostle.’ All other 
modifying substantives are termed ADJuNcTS: ‘Saul of Tarsus.’ 

b. When two-names for the same person or thing are connected as 
above, that should be regarded as the appositive which is added for the 
sake of modifying the other, whatever may be its position: ‘George the 
King,’ or ‘ King George.’ It is not, however, always easy to determine 
this ; and two or more names are often so joined that they may be re- 
garded as forming one complex noun: ‘ Charles James Fox.’ 

e. An ADJUNCT, in respect to form, is either prepositional or nude ; 
that is, it is either joined to its principal by a preposition, which serves 
as an exponent of its relation ; or it is joined immediately, without a prep- 
osition. — In the first case, it is also termed exponential ; and in the sec- 
ond, immediate. In the sentence, ‘Give me the book,’ the adjuncts me 
and book are both nude, or immediate ; while in ‘Give the book to 
me,’ the adjunct me (or, prefixing the exponent, to me) is prepositional. 

d. As to its use, an adjunct is regarded either as completing the idea of 
its principal, or as denoting some circumstance respecting it ; and is hence 
distinguished as complementary or circumstantial (more briefly, as a com- 
plement or a circumstance). In ‘The son of Jesse slew Goliath with a 
sling,” ‘of Jesse’ and ‘Goliath’ are complements of ‘son’ and ‘slew,’ 
which would seem incomplete without them; while the less essential 
‘with a sling’ expresses a circumstance of ‘slew,’ viz. the instrument. 

e. A complement is distinguished as direct or indirect, according to the 
closeness of its relation. This distinction appears especially in the ob- 
jects of verbs, which form the most prominent class of complements. 

f. Among the most prominent circumstances, are those of place, time, 
cause, origin, material, motive, price, manner, means, degree, agency, kc. 

g. There is no line of division between complements and circumstances, 
or between direct and indirect complements ; and many adjuncts may be 
differently classed, according to the view which the mind takes of them. 

h. A MODIFYING CLAUSE performs the office of an adjective, adverb, or 
substantive (appositive or adjunct) in the sentence to which it belongs. 
See 62 b, h. (i) Hence, all modifiers are adjective, adverbial, or substan- 
tive, in their force ; and, as substantive modifiers, when they modify other 
substantives, are akin to the adjective, but when they modify verbs, ad- 
jectives, or adverbs, to the adverbial, ADJECTIVES and ADVERBS may be 
taken as the types of all modifiers. 


59. Some words have a double relation, which may be 
termed COMPLEX MODIFICATION. ‘Thus, 


a. A word modifying a verb, and thus partaking of an adverbial force 
(58 i), may also belong as an adjective, appositive, or adjunct, to the sub- 
ject or a complement of the verb: ‘He is esteemed wise.’ ‘ He stood 
erect.’ ‘They made him king.’ An adjective, &c., thus predicated of 
its subject, is termed a predicate adjective, &c. ; while others, joined with- 
out predication, are termed direct or asswmed (393 a, b). An assumed ad- 
jective is also called an epithet. A verb which can thus connect an ap- 
positive to its subject, is termed an appositional verb. ᾿ 

_b. A clause modifying the predicate is often incorporated in a parti- 
cipial form, and asswmed of the subject: ‘ Fearing this [as he feared this], 
he fled.’ See 62 a, d. : 

ὁ, When two adjectives belong to the same substantive, one sometimes 


102 TABLES. — SENTENCES. 889, 


exerts an adverbial force upon the other, or modifies the substantive taken 
with the other as a complex whole: ‘ Red hot iron’ ; ‘ All good men.’ 

d. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase, often gives a special em- 
phasis, or bears a special relation to a particular word in the sentence or 
phrase: ‘ Bless me, even ME also,’ Gen. 27.34. ‘He, HE surely, will go.’ 


GO. a. Any element, with all the words which are subordinate to it 
and aid in expressing its idea, forms a logical part bearing the name of its 
element, but distinguished by the addition of ‘part’ ; while the element 
itself is distinguished, if need be, by the addition of ‘word.’ The for- 
mer is also distinguished as ‘Zogical,’ and the latter as ‘grammatical’ 
(sometimes called the ‘‘ basis” of the logical part). In ‘Good men are 
wise,’ the subject-part, or logical subject (the subject as thought of), is 
‘Good men,’ containing the subject-word, or grammatical subject, ‘men’ ; 
and the predicate-part is ‘are wise,’ containing the predicate-word, or 
grammatical predicate (the word that expresses predication, and has the 
appropriate grammatical form and office) ‘are.’ 

b. The predicate-part may be resolved into the ATTRIBUTE and the 
COPULA. he ATTRIBUTE (attribiitus, ascribed) expresses the action, state, 
property, &c., ascribed to the subject; as ‘wise,’ above. The CopULA 
(Lat. tte, bond) is a substantive verb (a verb which simply expresses being), 
uniting the attribute withthe subject ; as ‘are,’ above: ‘The sun shines 
[ts SHINING].’ ‘ He fears [7s AFRAID].’ 


ur. OFFICES AND RELATIONS OF SENTENCES. 


61. A sentence is INTELLECTIVE (intellectus, understanding) 
or VOLITIVE (volo, ἐο will), according as it primarily expresses 
an act of the understanding, or an act of the will. 


a. An intellective sentence is DECLARATIVE Or INTERROGATIVE, accord- 
ing as it makes a statement, or asks a question: ‘He will go.’ ‘Will he 
go?’ (Ὁ) Interrogation is sometimes used rhetorically for strong statement. 
(0) A volitive sentence (also termed IMPERATIVE, from its mode) may 
express command, entreaty, exhortation, permission, or even supposition : 
‘Go.’ (4) A sentence of any one of these forms is termed EXCLAMATORY, 
when used for exclamation: ‘ How fast he goes!’ (e) Sentences of all 
these classes may be either POSITIVE or NEGATIVE; i. e. they may affirm 
or deny, require or prohibit, &c.: ‘1 will go.’ ‘Do not go.’ 

f. A declarative or interrogative sentence is ACTUAL, when it has re- 
spect to fact (what is, or is not, &c.) ; but CONTINGENT, when it has re- 
spect to contingency (what may be, or may not be, &c.). See 613s. These 
sentences may be also named from their modes and time (indicative, &c.) 


62. Sentences are connected with each other in four ways: 


a.) By INCORPORATION, in which the verb of one sentence is incorpo- 
rated in another sentence as an infinitive or participle (i. 6. as a substan- 
tive or adjective). — Such a sentence, as well as its verb, is termed éncor- 
porated, while sentences in which the predicate has a distinct form as a 
finite verb are termed distinct or finite. See 657 s. 

b.) By SUBORDINATION, in which one of the sentences, without losing 
its distinct form, belongs to the other as a part or circumstance (subject, 
object, condition, reason, result, time, &c.) ; and is therefore termed szbor- 
dinate, dependent, or included, while the other is distinguished as the 
chief, principal, or leading sentence or clause. —The two together form a 
COMPLEX SENTENCE; ‘Go, if you wish’; ‘ That he went, is strange.’ 


ὃ 09. METHODS OF INDICATION. 103 


c.) By coURDINATION, in which the sentences are joined by a connec- 
tive, but neither is subordinate to the other. Sentences so connected are 
termed coérdinate, and together form a COMPOUND SENTENCE. See d, e. 

d.) By SIMPLE SUCCESSION, in which one sentence directly follows an- 
other, without a connective (often referred to ellipsis, 68d): ‘Luther said 
this. He sat down.’— This form may be changed to codrdination, by 
supplying a connective (‘L. said this, and he sat-down’) ; often even to 
πῆρ (‘ When 1,. had said this, he sat down’), or the yet closer 
form of incorporation (‘ Having said this, L. sat down’). See 657s, 693. 

e. A sentence is termed sIMPLE, if it is neither complex nor com- 
pound ; and INDEPENDENT, if it is neither incorporated nor subordinate. 
(f) A sentence which according to its main division is compound, may 
have complex members, and the converse. (g) Parts of a sentence are also 
compound, complex, or simple, according as they consist of portions joined 
by codrdinate conjunctions expressed or understood, of portions joined by 
subordinate conjunctions, or of neither: ‘Asa and Eli gave more than 
ten dollars to John.’ A sentence containing a compound or complex part 
may usually be resolved into two or more clauses, by supplying words. 

h. A subordinate clause is usually declarative in form. It is termed 
ADJECTIVE (or relative), ADVERBIAL (final, conditional, concessive, causal, 
&c.), or SUBSTANTIVE (appositive, adjunct, &c.), according to its office or 
connective. See 58h, 66. (i) An incorporated clause, though always 
substantive or adjective in form, is often adverbial in force (665, 674). 

j. An independent sentence, whether simple or compound, with all its 
dependent clauses, forms a PERIOD, which may be further named accord- 
ing to its special character. If a dependent clause expresses a condition 
of the principal, the combination is called a HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD 
(ὑπόθεσις, supposition); the dependent clause being called the premise, con- 
dition, or protasis (προτείνω, to stretch forth) ; and the principal clause, the 
conclusion, or apodosis (ἀποδίδωμι, to give back). —Some of these terms 
are also applied to parts of other complex sentences. 

Κι Quorations, which form so important a class of substantive sen- 
tences, have two forms. In the first and more dramatic form, we simply 
repeat the words of another, without change or incorporation into our 
own discourse: He said, “41 will go.” This is termed Oratio REcTA, 
Direct Discourse or Quotation. In the second and more narrative form, 
we make such changes and insert such connectives as will render the quo- 
tation an integral part of our own discourse: He said, that he would go. 
This is termed OraTio Osiiqua, Indirect Discourse or Quotation (643 5). 
This distinction likewise applies to the thoughts and feelings of another. 

1. An incorporated clause does not usually require a separate analysis, 
except where, as in Latin and Greek, an Infinitive takes the place of an- 
other mode in Indirect Discourse. 


11. Mertrxops oF INDICATION. 


63. The offices and relations of sentences and their parts 
are indicated in three ways: (A) by the form of the words ; 
(B) by the arrangement ; and (0) by separate words, which act 
as signs or exponents of these offices or relations. 


A. INDICATION By Form. This has four chief objects : 

a.) To mark the connection of appositives, adjectives, pronouns, and 
verbs, with their subjects (i. 6. the substantives to which they refer), by a 
correspondence of form, termed AGREEMENT or CONCORD. See 76, 492 5. 


104 TABLES.— SYNTAX, § 63. 


b.) To mark, by appropriate forms, the offices and relations of substan- 
tives. This is done, in most languages, through the distinction of case. 
When the form of a substantive is determined by its dependence upon 
another word, it is said to be governed by that word ; and the influence 
exerted upon it is termed GOVERNMENT or REGIMEN. See 76. 

6.) To mark, by the form of an adjective or adverb, the degree in which 
its property is possessed (COMPARISON, 29, 256 s). 

d.) To mark the offices and relations of sentences, through the form of 
the VERB, the predicating word. See 57 ς, 30, 265 5. 

e. In agreement, the words which are connected are regarded, by a 
species of personification, as allies; in government, as ruler and ruled. 
(ἢ) Of nude adjuncts, those only which are complementary (58 ¢, d), are 
usually spoken of as goyerned. Prepositional adjuncts are commonly said 
to be governed by the prepositions ; and are called their complements, ob- 
jects, or, by a happier term, sequents. 

g- In the development of a language, new forms arise to express more 

cifically what has been generally expressed by some older form. This 
aie form thus becomes narrowed in its ye en regs sphere, and itself 
more specific in its expression. But habit, which is mighty everywhere, 
is peculiarly the arbiter of language ; — sit 

sus, 
Quem penes arbitrium est et jus et norma loquendi’”’;— 
and, wherever the new distinction is unimportant, there is a tendency to 
employ the old and familiar form in its original extent of meaning. The 
same is true of words and methods of construction. See 70 v. 


64. ΡΒ. ArRANGEMENT. a. Words are arranged for effect upon the 
understanding, the emotions, or the ear: im other words, the arrangement 
of a sentence may have for its object, (1) To exhibit the offices and rela- 
tions of the words; (2) To present the thought in an impressive manner ; 
(3) To produce an agreeable effect upon the ear. — That order which most 
effectually secures the first object is termed the logical order ; the second, 
the rhetorical order ; the third, the rhythmical order. 

b. In the LOGICAL ORDER, the verb is usually placed after the subject, 
and before the attribute, if this is distmct from the verb (60 b) ; and (οὗ 
a word which 7s governed by another is usually placed after it. (4) Words 
are often spoken of in Syntax, as following or preceding others, with refer- 
ence to the logical or usual order, without regard to their actual position. 


65. ©. ὕβε or Exponents. These mark the offices or relations (1) 
of words (meluding phrases), or (2) of sentences. 

1. Worp-ExPoNENTs are (a) those which mark the relations of ad- 
juncts (58 c), 1. 6. PREPOSITIONS (* case-links”) ; (Ὁ) CoNJUNCTIONS used 
as in 62g; (0) INTERJECTIONS marking address or exclamation (O, ah, 
484, 73 6) ; (d) MODAL siGNs (modus, manner), i. e. connective adverbs 
of manner used elliptically to limit the application of modifiers (‘I took 
him as a friend,’ 5898 ο, 711). The last may be parsed as connective ad- 
verbs by supplying ellipses, but most conveniently as mere signs uniting 
modifiers with their principals. 


66. 2. ΘΈΝΤΕΝΤΙΑΙ, Exponents are either CONNECTIVE (denoting 
the connection of sentences), or CHARACTERISTIC (marking their charac- 
ter, without connecting them). 

a. The CONNECTIVES may simply denote the relations of the sentences 
(consuNeTIONS, ‘‘clause-links,” 700s); or (Ὁ) they may also enter into 
their structure as pronouns or adverbs (CONNECTIVE PRONOUNS or AD- 
VERBS). A connective pronoun or adverb is either (c) relative (referring 


§ 68. FIGURES. — ELLIPSIS. 105 


to an antecedent, 549s), or (d) complementary (introducing a sentence 
used substantively, 563s). Thus, (a) that, if, until, though, (c) who 
(73 e) ; (d) what (73d). 

Connectives are either (e) primary (directly uniting the sentences), or 
(f) secondary (corresponding to the primary, ‘‘as the eye to the hook”) : 
‘He (f) both reads (6) and writes ;’ “ (6) Though he feared, (f) yet he went.’ 

g. The CHARACTERISTIC EXPONENTS (marking sentences as negative, 
interrogative, contingent, &c.) may be adverbs or pronouns: “ Who was it?’ 
‘It was not I.’ ‘I see no man.’ 


B. FIGURES OF SYNTAX. 


67. Those special forms of expression which are termed 
Ficgures or Syntax, may be referred to four great heads, 
Exuipsis, PLeonasmM, ENALLAGE, and HYPERBATON. 


a. FiguRES oF SYNTAX are associated and blended with those of 
RHETORIC; and some of the latter will be mentioned below. Both 
classes are more common in poetry than in prose; in colloquial, than in 
formal discourse ; and in the language of passion, than in that of narra- 
tive or argument. 

b. The use of wnauthorized constructions is termed soLEcIsM (from 
Σόλοικοι, dwellers in Soli, of Cilicia, famed for their bad Greek) ; of wn- 
authorized words, BARBARISM (βάρβαρος, barbarian) ; of antique words or 
constructions, ARCHAISM (ἀρχαῖος, ancient). A form of construction 
specially belonging to a particular language is called an IDIOTISM or 
ΙΡΙΟΜ (ἴδιος, peculiar) ; or, from the name of the language, a Hebraism, 
Hellenism or Grecism, Latinism, Anglicism, &c. 


68. 1. Exipsis (ἔλλειψις, defect) is the omission of words 
which are required for the most complete and regular expres- 
sion of the sense. 


1. These words are said to be understood. The omission may take 
place without any other change in the form of the expression ; or it may 
e attended with other changes, respecting either the words which are 
employed, or the forms of those words: ‘Will you go?’ ‘[I will go] 
Certainly’; or ‘ Yes’ [= I will go]; or, ‘No’ [= not]. See 69a. 
(2) There is a rhetorical figure called Omission, in which there is a pre- 
tence of omitting something, which is thus mentioned and often made 
more prominent: ‘ His crime and folly 1 forbear to mention.’ 

3. Ellipsis exhibits a striking paradox. It is generally true, that, the 
more essential a word is to the grammatical construction of the discourse, 
the more apt it is to be omitted ; for this reason, that it is the more 
readily supplied from the very necessity of the ease. Hence the frequent 
omission of the word to which another refers as its subject or by which 
another is governed, of the substantive verb, of the direct object of a 
transitive verb, &c.; in general, of words modified rather than modifiers, 
and of leading rather than swhordinate clauses. See 506, 5718, 476, 626. 

4, To ELLIPSIS are usually referred, by grammarians, all abbreviated 
and compendious forms of construction, however familiar (though the 
term Brachylogy [brief expression] would often apply more properly) : as, 

a.) Adjectives used substantively, and adverbs used substantively or ad- 
jectively (506 5, 526s): (Ὁ) Many forms of inscription, salutation, excla- 
mation, &c. (401, 670): (c) The construction of RESPONSIVES (words in 
the answer, corresponding to interrogatives in the question), and other 


106 TABLES, —- PLEONASM. § 68. 


forms of reply; as, ‘Who saw it?’ ‘JZ’ [saw it]: (4) AsyNpEToN 
(ἀσύνδετος, not bound together), the omission of a conjunction or other con- 
nective ; often greatly promoting energy and vivacity, as in Cesar's cele- 
brated despatch, Veni, vidi, vici, 7 came —saw— conquered. See 707. 
(6) APOSIOPESIS (ἀποσιώπησις, the becoming silent), the failure to finish 
a sentence, whether from design, diversion of thought, overpowering emo- 
tion, or any other cause ; as, ‘If you ever do this again So not 
unfrequently after a conditional clause (636 s). 

f.) Most cases of COMPOUND CONSTRUCTION (60). A word referring to 
a compound subject has either the form which is required by αἷξ the sub- 
stantives in the subject, taken together, or that which is required by onze 
of them, taken singly. In the former construction, named Syllepsis (σύλ- 
Anus, taking together), the word is said to agree with all the substantives ; 
in the latter, named Zeugma (ζεῦγμα, yoking), it is said to agree with 
one of the substantives, and to be understood with the rest. For ‘My 
heart and my flesh rejoice,’ Ps. 84. 2, an older version has, ‘ My heart and 
my flesh crieth out.’ See 495s. (g) The term zeugma is used, in general, 
to denote the connection of a word with a number of words, to a part of 
which only it is tae. in meaning, or in form (while, in sy/lepsis, it 
would suit the whole): ‘You are blind of ear, mind, and eye’ (Soph. O. 
T. 371). Cf. § 572b. ᾿ : 


69. u. PLEeonasM (πλεονασμός, redundance) is the use of 
more words than the sense requires. 


a. Pleonasm may consist in the simple repetition or insertion of words, 
or it may be attended with more important changes in the form of the ex- 
pression (cf. 68. 1; the limits of both Ellipsis and Pleonasm are very in- 
definite). (Ὁ) One of its common forms is emphatic repetition, in the same 
or in similar words (the latter specially named Synonymia): ‘ Never, 
never, NEVER!’ ‘Oh, spare me! pardon and forgive !’ 

c. Useless repetition is termed T'autology (ταὐτολογία, saying the same 
thing) : (4) a circuitous manner of expression, Periphrasis or Circumlocu- 
tion (περίφρασις circumlocutio, roundabout speaking) ; as loss of life, for 
death : (e) the expression of one thing as though it were two, Hendiadys 
(ἕν διὰ δυοῖν, one thing by two); as, ‘Whose nature and property is ever 
to have mercy’: (f) the use of more connectives than are needed, Poly- 
syndeton (πολύς, many ; cf. 68d); as, ‘ Whenne that,’ for ‘when,’ Chaue. 


70. 1. ENALLAGE (ἐναλλαγή, exchange) is the use of one 
word or form for another. — 1. As the wse of one word for an- 
other, it has respect either to the grammatical office of words, 
or to their segnification. 


a. The use of one part of speech for another is termed ANTIMERIA 
(ἀντί, instead of, μέρος, part): ‘Now ’s the day,’ Burns. Cf. 68 a. 

b. A figure by which a word is éwrned from its literal sense, is called 
a TROPE (τρόπος, twrning). The principal tropes (commonly classed as 
rhetorical figures, 67 a) are mentioned below. (6) The figurative sense of 
a word often becomes so familiar that we employ it without intending or 
being conscious of any figure: ‘a sweet temper,’ ‘works of taste.’ This 
use, in which the word has passed over from its primary to a secondary 
sense, is hence termed transitive (transeo, to pass over). 

d. In METAPHOR (μεταφορά, transfer), a word appropriate to one ob- 
ject is transferred to another, by reason of some analogy between them : 
‘Tell that fox,’ Lk. 18. 32. (e) Allegories are formed by extending and 


§ 71. ENALLAGE, HYPERBATON. 107 


combining metaphors. (ἢ) When inanimate or irrational objects are rep- 
resented as persons, the figure is termed Prosopopeia or Personification 
(πρόσωπον persona, person, ποιέω facio, to make); (g) when a speaker 
turns aside in his discourse so to address them (or to address absent per- 
sons as if present), it is termed <Apostrophe (ἀποστρέφω, to turn from) : 
‘Sing, O heavens ; and be joyful, O earth!’ Is. 49: 13. 

h. MEtTonyMy (μετωνυμία, change of name) gives to one object the 
name of another which is redated to it: as, crown, throne, and scepire, for 
sovereignty. (1) An abstract noun is often used for a concrete, for greater 
strength of expression, especially in apposition: ‘He is my defence. 

j. SYNECDOCHE (συνεκδοχή, comprehension) puts a part for the whole, or 
the whole for a part: keel, for ship ; steel, for sword. 

k. Irony (εἰρωνεία, dissimulation) is the use of a word for its opposite : 
hero, for coward. (1) A seeming contradiction, termed Oxymoron (ὀξύ- 
pwpos, keenly foolish), is sometimes made by uniting words of opposite 
signification : learned ignorance. 

m. A form of expression beyond the truth is termed Hyperbole (ὑπερ- 
Bory, throwing beyond); designedly short of it, Litotes (Atrérys, sim- 
plicity) ; more agreeable, .Huphemism (εὐφημισμός, use of good words). 
(n) A play upon words similar in sound but differing in sense, or upon 
the same word used in different senses, is termed Paronomasia (rapovo- 
pacla, comparison of names, pun); and (0) an imitation of the sense by 
the sound, Onomatopeia (ὀνοματοποιΐα, name-making ; certainly one of 
the most copious of the original sources of language). 


2. ENALLAGE, as the use of one form for another, is specially 
termed, 


p.) SyNnEsts (σύνεσις, wnderstanding), when the construction follows 
the sense or the conception of the mind, in disregard of grammatical form 
or of the reality of things (498s): (q) ATTRACTION (attractio), when a 
word is drawn from its appropriate form by the influence of another word 
(500, 552, 71b): (ἡ HYPALLAGE (ὑπαλλαγή, interchange), when two 
words interchange constructions (474 8) : (Ὁ ANACOLUTHON (ἀνακόλουθος, 
inconsistent), when there is a change of construction, so that two parts of a 
sentence do not agree (402, 504b): (ἃ) Vision (visio, seeing), when the 
present tense is used in speaking of past or future events, as if they were 
actually occurring before the eye (609): (v) RETENTION (retentio), when 
a form retains from its earlier extent of application a use afterwards 
assigned to another form (392a", 485, 576, 603s, 651s): (w) CHANGE OF 
NuMBER, GENDER, OR PERSON (488s, 501s). 


71. τν. HyprerBaton (imepBards, transposed) is a disregard 
of the common laws of arrangement. It is specially termed, 


a.) INVERSION, or ANASTROPHE (ἀναστροφή inversio, inversion), when 
words in a clause are inverted (chiefly for emphasis, euphony, rhythm, to 
bring similar or contrasted words nearer together, or to mark the connec- 
tion of sentences, 719 a, s). —The name Chiasma (χίασμα, imitation of x) 
is applied, when the arrangement in one pair of «Rind. words. tat 
words or expressions is inverted in a similar th ea POAC IPRA 
pair following. re 

b.) Proiepsts (πρόληψις, anticipation), when a word is placed in a clause 
earlier than that to which it properly belongs, or is otherwise anticipated, 
This is commonly due to attraction (70 q, 474, 657). 

c.) PARENTHESIS (παρένθεσις, insertion), when one sentence is inserted 


108 TABLES, — SYNTAX. § 71. 


within another, with which it has no grammatical connection: ‘This, 
mark me, is true.’ — The term may be likewise applied to any interrup- 
tion of the sense by the insertion of unessential words or clauses. 

4.) HysTEron PROTERON (ὕστερον πρότερον, the last first), when that 
which follows in the order of occurrence or nature, is placed first: ‘I was 
bred and born,’ Shaks. (e) CoNFUSED. ARRANGEMENT, when this term 
applies. (ἢ Tmxsis, see 388 ο. 


C. FORMS OF ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 


72. 1. For SENTENCES. 


1. Describe the Sentence: as, —It is Simple, Complex, or Compound 
[consisting of the Coérd., or Lead’g & Subord. Clauses —]; Pos. or Neg.; 


Infinitive, incorporated in the sentence — as a Substantive. 
Participial, es Pare Ἢ “4 ¢* an Adjective. 
iicctink Jeclarative, f Actual [Indicative, Past, et 
Finite, { ? ' Interrogative, | Contingent [Subjunctive, &c. tt 
Imperative, expressing command, entreaty, exclamatory, &c. ; 
lowing — by simple succession, or connected by — to — as a Coordinate 
Sentence, or as a Subordinate Clause, performing the office of a Substan- 
tive, Adjective, or Adverb. Remarks. 


2. Analyze the Sentence into its Grammatical or its Logical Parts, or both: 


h Remarks. 


Subject re atk, 
The Predicate fis —, modified by the 4" "Ort. t—» Which [is intro- 
Compellative ppositive 
Ρ 
Adjunct 


duced by —, and] is itself modified by —, and this by —, &c.; or by the 
Dependent Clause —, which performs the office of —, and consists of —. 
[Minor parts independent are the Interjection —, &c.] Remarks. 


ΠΟΥ, more fully, thus: The ως ea iret his —, containing the por yg 


Predicate, tc, }—» Modified by the Tear re ic, —» consisting of the 


roe —, [introduced by —, and] modified by —, &. [The Pred- 
icate-Part may be resolved into the Copula —, and the Attribute —.] 


73. Wnritren Anatysts. It is of great benefit, in the study of 
other languages, as of English, so to write the analysis of sentences, that 
the office of each word shall determine its place. Of the several methods 
that have been proposed for this, the following is suggested as the most 
simple in use, that is also minute : 

a. Write the several sentences under each other, prefixing symbols to 
mark their general offices and relations, and placing connectives in one 
column, subject-parts in another, predicate-parts in the third, and inde- 
pendent parts in a fourth. Write all modifiers (or their symbols, in the 
case of modifying clauses) wader the words which they modify, but indent- 
ed, that is, with the line beginning farther to the right. Exponents of 
the use of words are simply written with the words, in the same line. 
Compound parts, according to convenience, are either written as if simple, 
or with their elements under each other and connected by a brace (which 
may be extended below, to meet a common modifier). Words supplied 


§ 73. ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 109 


to complete the grammatical construction are underlined in writing 
(printed below as Italic, or, in Greek, with smaller type); while paren- 
> or brackets mark the repetition of a word in the scheme, to show 
a double office or relation (especially where a word in the subject or predi- 
cate part serves also as a connective). In complex modification, the modi- 
fier. is sometimes repeated ; but oftener written only once, in the place 
which shows its closest connection or is most convenient, its double office 
being shown, if desired, by a double mark. Space may be gained, if 
wished, by writing the article in the same line with its noun or with an- 
other modifier ; and time, by abbreviating words, or simply writing their 
initials. The article is sometimes even omitted. 

b. For sentences, the following symbols may be used: The capitals A, 
B, C, &c., for independent sentences (sentences of the 1st rank) ; the 
numerals 1, 2, 3, &c., for sentences immediately dependent upon these 
(2d rank) ; the small letters a, b, c, &c., for sentences dependent upon 
the latter (3d rank); the Italics a, ὃ, c, &c., for sentences of the 4th 
rank ; the last letters of the alphabet, z, y, x, &c., for those of the 5th 
rank ; these in Italics, for the 6th rank ; the middle letters, m, n, 0, &c., 
and m, ἢ, 0, &c., for the rare 7th and 8th ranks. If the sentence is in- 
terrogative, the sign ? may be added ; if imperative, ἵ ; if exclamatory, 
!; if quoted or parenthetic, the usual sign in part,” or ). The members 
of compound sentences, or of those which have prominent parts com- 
pound, may be distinguished by the use of accents (unless a separate no- 
tation is preferred): as A, A’, A”, &c. (read ‘‘ A,” ‘‘A prime,” ‘*A sec- 
ond,” &c.). The different kinds of modifiers may be distinguished by 
any convenient marks, or indices. An adjective modifier is marked below 
with °; an adverbial modifier, with ‘; a substantive modifier, with an 
angle, the opening turned up for an adjunct (Vv), and down for an apposi- 
tive (*). Judgment will, of course, be exercised in regard to the extent 
to which, in any exercise, the notation shall be carried. 

c. When minute analysis is not desired, some of its most important ob- 
jects may be rapidly obtained by symbolizing a period or paragraph, that 
is, by writing the symbols of its sentences in the order of occurrence (the 
symbol being repeated, when a clause is divided), with additional signs 
above or below to mark the offices of the sentences, and such punctuation 
as will best suit their connections. The examples below will be first sym- 
bolized, and then analyzed more fully, with the proposed arrangement and 
notation. —d. From Campbell’s Ode to the Rainbow: 

CONN. SUBJ. PRED. IND. 


μ᾿ 
"ἃ Α Ι ask Arch ΤῊ 
O4s not* triumphal? 
ag: * Philosophy’ (1°) 
ao ἘΞ proud® , 
ao es to teach” 
Ξ QS ¥ 
@ Ss > ὯΝ) 
“ὉΠ 5° 
wena - 1°| (that) |'That | fill’st 
Ss 2k . we sky’ 
< BS ge? the® 
στ Ξ Ξι ας i (a’) 
Hass a‘ | (when) | Storms | prepare 
ee ie = to part’ 
BE oS when‘ 
ΕΞ ea 2” | (what) | Thou | art 
= what** 


110 TABLES. — SENTENCES, § 73. 


e. How long, men of Athens, will you indulge in this guilty and, alas ! 
fatal supineness ? The clouds continually gathering and darkening above 
us, how can you hope that the storm will not at length burst upon the 
city? Beware of imagining, my fellow-citizens, that this ambitious 

orince and warrior, who delights in the severest toil if it may advance 
is schemes of conquest, will ever rest until he has reached the coveted 

goal, the subjugation of Attica, — that, having conquered the rest of 
Greece, he will cry ‘‘Enough!” and will offer us terms of honorable 
friendship. It is only through the strangest infatuation, be assured, that 
you can expect to escape, ah foolish dreamers ! though all others fall. 

A; B1; C2aa, 2b, 3¢, 3’; D(E) 4d. 

WS din: bh sce laced she TAL 
CONN. SUBJ. PRED. IND. 
A? You will indulge Men 

long* of Athens’ 

how* 
in supineness” 

this? 

guilty & fatal°jalas 
B? You can hope τ |The clouds fening® 
how gathering & dark- 
(1’) continually‘ 


v 
1ν |that |The storm will burst above us 
not‘ 
at length’ 
upon the city’ 
Ct Ye gio . fellow-citizens 
of imaginin my? 

ΤΕ 
ΩΝ ᾿παῦ' {Prince & warrior will rest 
this® ever 
ambitious® (b*) 
(a°) 
a° |(Who) |Who delights 
: in the toil¥ 
severest? 
| (a’) 
αὐ jif It may advance 
schemes” 
his” 
. of conquest’ 
b‘ juntil |He has reached 
the goal’ 
coveted°[ tion * 
the subjuga- 
of Attica’ 
3” |that |He will cry 
having conquered? { δ": 
the rest’ & will offer 
of Greece” us¥ 
termsY 
of friendship’ 
honorable? 


§ 73. WRITTEN ANALYSIS. 111 
¢” It as 
enough 
D It is 
(44) only* 
through infatuation’ 
; the strangest® 
Et) Ye be assured 
4* | that You can expect ah dreamers 
to escape’ foolish? 
_ @) 
da‘ though Others fall 
4119 


f. Κλέαρχε καὶ Πρόξενε, καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι οἱ παρόντες “ἕλληνες, οὐκ tore, ὅ τι 
ποιεῖτε. Ki γάρ τινα ἀλλήλοις μάχην συνάψετε, νομίζετε, ἐν τῇδε τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 
ἐμέ τε κατακεκόψεσθαι, καὶ ὑμᾶς οὐ πολὺ ἐμοὺ ὕστερον " κακῶς yop τῶν 
ἡμετέρων ἐχόντων, πάντες οὗτοι, ods ὁρᾶτε, βάρβαροι πολεμιώτεροι ἡμῖν ἔσον- 
ται τῶν παρὰ βασιλεῖ ὄντων. ‘*Clearchus and Proxenus, and the other 
Greeks present, you know not what you are doing. For, if you engage 
in any battle with each other, consider that this day both I shall be cut 
down, and you not long after me ; for, our affairs going ill, all these bar- 
barians, whom you see, will be worse enemies to us than those with the 


king.” Xen. An.i. 5. 16. 
Al; a2a2aa’,bzb. 
4 + ν are) 
CONN. SUBJ. PRED. IND. 
A Ὑμεῖς ἴστε rf ε kal II pdgeve 
ovK* καὶ "HAAnves 
(LY 2} οἱ ἄλλοιθ δ 
1Y [(ὅ τὸ Ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε οἱ κυρήγγνι 
ὅ τι" 
2t* γάρ Ὑμεῖς i A 
a”) 
av τέ | eye κατακεκόψεσθαι 
ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 
3 
a kal ὑμᾶς (κατακεκόψεσθαι, &c.) 
ὕστερον 
ἐμοῦ" 
πολύ" 
: οὐ" 
a |Et Ὑμεῖς συνάψετε 
μάχην" 
Twa? 
ἀλλήλοις" 
δ᾽ | yap Βάρβαροι [ἔσονται πραγμάτων 
TavTes?| ᾿πολεμιώτεροιϑ" τῶνϑ 
οὕτοιϑ ἡμῖν" ἡμετέρωνϑ 
(29) τῶν βαρβάρωνν ἐχόντωνο 
ὄντωνο κακῶς" 
παρὰ βασιλεῖ" 
2° }(oUs Ὑμεῖς ὁρᾶτε 
οὕς" 


112 TABLES. — ANALYSIS AND § 74. 


74 τι. For Greek Worps. 


Proper of the 1 Dec.) Mase. 
4 Common Sia i: “1 Fem. f SS aigsage ἐῶ er 
18 ἃ Collective "ἀρ Ἐξ Be fT Nent. [7 ? [Comp'd- 
Abstract, &c. Irregular, &c.) Com. 
Nom.) Sing.) the subject of — 
oy ay Stem —, Affix —; the oe mF } governed by — : Peau . 
Υ fas Dual) Gen. of —, &e., ‘ 
Pos. 
is an ADJECTIVE [in the Comp. } Degree, from — — — (compare), | 
ς Sup. 


Compounded of —, 


- Nom.) Sing.) Mase. . . 
, agreeing with — 
the — Ge} Pit Fen, ἢ used substantively, & Ἀν Rule. Remarks. 


1 ‘ 
of 2} Terminations (decline) ; aie front =~, ] Stem —, Affix — 


Personal 1 “ (Decline.) ry, 1 
—— is a Reflexive Ἴρκοκοῦν, [of the 2} Pers from——— ; shoo ek 
Relative, &c. 3 — 


Nom.) Sing.) Mase.) the subject of — 
Stem —, Affix —; the Gen. pict. Fem. ᾿ agreeing with -}, Rule. 


&e. J Dual) Neut.J gov’d by —, &c 
[It refers to —as its A μβῳ d a Rule ; and connects — - to — 1 Remarks. 


Transitive VERB, 

‘5g Deponent ““ ἐς (Conjugate) [Der’d from —,] (Stem — 

e "Contract ys 6. (om ? [(Comp’d of —, | \Stems — — 
VERB in μι, &e., 


Pres. Ind. Act. 
[Prefix —,] Affix —; the Impf. } su } aia \ (vary and inflect) ; 


Fut., &c.) Opt., &c.J Pass. 
( (if finite) the 1 Pers. Sing., &c., agreeing with —, : 
(if Inf.) having for its subject —, and {oaks pending ea 
‘ N Sing.) Mase. ΠΕ δὰ; aor. 
om. 
; Th Die Aa ὃ: agreeing with —, 
(if Part.) the ΠΝ pt} Neu ’ used substantively, δου" 
Interrogative Manner Pos. 
is an Demonstrative ΓΑ μαι of Place } {in the Comp. b Degree, 
Indefinite, &c Time, &c. Sup 


from — (compare); Der. from —, or Comp. of —]; modifying —, Rule. 
[It refers to — as its antecedent, and connects — to —.] Remarks. 


is a PREPOSITION [Der. or Comp. —], governing —, and marking its 
relation to — (a relation of place, time, agency, cause, &c. ), Rule. Remarks. 
[ Der. 

[Comp.—- 


ts i 


δἰ Seed isa ἃ Fy nal, & CONJUNCTION, ᾿ | connecting — to —, (and 


§ 75. | PARSING OF WORDS. 113 


denoting addition, opposition, comparison, &c., or introducing its clause as 
an end, condition, &c., or as used substantively), Rule. Remarks. 


is an InreRJECTION [Der. or Comp. —], (expressing emotion, &e,) 
and independent of grammatical construction (684). Remarks. 


75. Nores. a. When declension in full is not desired, give the Nom. 
and Gen. in Substantives and in Adjectives of 1 Term., and the different 
forms of the Nom. in Adjectives of 2 or 3 Term. (b) In conjugating, give 
the Theme, with the corresponding Fut. and Perf. if in use (to which it is 
also well to add the 2 Aor. if used) ; but sometimes, more fully, the leading 
tense of each system in use, The term ‘‘vary” is used above in a specific 
sense, to denote giving the different modes of a tense, or, as it is sometimes 
called, giving the synopsis of the tense ; and the term ‘‘inflect,” to denote 
giving the numbers and persons (in the Participle, declension, of course, 
takes the place of this). (c) After completing the formula above (which 
will be done with least danger of omission or delay, if a uniform order is 
observed), add such Remarks as may properly be made upon the form, 
signification, and use of the word ; as, in respect to contraction, euphonic 
changes of consonants, literal or figurative sense, the force or use of the 
number, case, degree, voice, mode, tense, &c. ; citing, from the Grammar, 
the appropriate rule or remark. (d) Some particulars in the forms above, 
which do not apply to all words, are inclosed in brackets ; and some di- 
rections or suggestions, in parentheses. 

e. It isa very useful exercise to write minute analyses of words ; some- 
times even marking the offices of the different parts of a flexible ending 
(12, 33). EE. g., the following verbs (mostly in compound forms), and the 
following compound nouns and adjectives may be written as below: ἐλύ- 
σατο, λελύκᾶσιν (37), ὥρισαν (39 d), ἠθέλησεν (311 b), κελευσθείητε (307 b), 
πεφιλήσομαι (42f), ἐδεδιδάχειν (50, διδάσκω), γεγονώς (50), τιμησάσθων 
(42); φιλοσοφίαν (Acc.) philosophy, ἄνοπλος (385 a), ἐργολάβου (387 a), 
ἀγνῶτες (386. 4), rupryevéow (383 a), λιθοβόλῳ (386. 1), νομοθέτας (386. 3), 
θεσφάτοις divinely appointed (383 c). 


PREFIX.|| STEM. | AFFIX, STEM | arn. 
| mi lod 
Ι o - | 2 : 
} Ee} ξὃὃ ΕΒ] ὦ 
ΠΕ ge > Ξ ra 9 g 
ἜΘ Τ᾿ Sell. : 3 ee rs 
gislsle slSlels|a |: a | ΕἸΣ eal 
asia é Φ 38/3] 9 Ὁ ΕΞ 8 [Ξ:Ξ9}8 
Ἀ ΕΞ 5 «Ἐξ 8 le} 188] a [ΕΞ 3} 
Δ ΙΞ δ᾽ δ] 5. |S aiels| αὶ le ΙΒ, 8 |<islelé 
ἐξ € 1rd | lo la το φιλ]ίο | copii ja ly | 
ἐξ λε λύ : K la lvoe |v ἄν οπλ ‘als 
€ Sp [0d] ilo fa lor épy jo | AaB ‘0 lo 
é e {OA} [|η Ilo te [r ν ἀ yo |. Ρ 
é κελ ev σ [θείη τε γνῶ 
a φιλ | o |o {μαι vat. of Ν eps 
ἐξ e | be|/d [δά |x} Hx fer ln AP sdpex’ ἢ ἢ }} 
! ve |g [θέ as 
é Wty’ 6 ο τ α [νς 
ἐν ΎΕε 40 τ uted γομ μὸν 
ἐν τι |ual jlo [ἀ ᾿σθων θε [σ | ba [τ lio [ες 


114 | TABLES. § 76. 


76. D. CHIEF RULES OF GREEK SYNTAX. 


I. An APposiTIVE agrees in case with its subject. § 393. 

II. The Sussect of a FINITE VERB is put in the Nominative. 400. 

III. SuBSTANTIVES INDEPENDENT OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION are 
put in the Nominative. 401. 

A. General Rule for the Genitive. THE Point or DEPARTURE AND THE 
CAUSE ARE PUT IN THE GENITIVE; or, The GENITIVE is used to ex- 

ress that oF or FROM which something is or is done. 403. 

IV. Words of SEPARATION and DISTINCTION govern the Genitive. 404. 

V. The ComparaTIVE DEGREE governs the Genitive. 408. 

VI. The orIGIN, souRCE, and MATERIAL are put in the Genitive. 412. 

VII. The THEME of DIscouRsE or of THOUGHT is put in the Gen. 413. 

VIII. Words of PLENTY and WANT govern the Genitive. 414. 

IX. The wHo ez of which a part is taken is put in the Genitive. 415. 

X. Words of SHARING, BEGINNING, and ToUCH govern the Genitive. 424. 

XI. The MOTIVE, REASON, and END IN VIEW are put in the Gen. 429. 

XII. Prick, VALUE, MERIT, and CRIME are put in the Genitive. 431. 

XIII. Words of s—ENSATION and of MENTAL STATE OR ACTION govern the 
Genitive. 432. 

XIV. The ΤΙΜῈ and PLACE in which are put in the Genitive. 433. 

XV. The AvTHOR, AGENT, and GIVER are put in the Genitive. 434. 

XVI. An ADJUNCT DEFINING A THING OR PROPERTY is put in the Gen- 
itive ; or, A SUBSTANTIVE, ADJECTIVE, Or ADVERB, as such, governs 
the Genitive. 435. 
ages ste Reg govern the Genitive, by virtue of an included substantive, adjective, or 

verb. * 
C. The Compounds of Alpha Privative govern the Genitive. 436. 

D. General Rule for the Dative Objective. Tue Ossect or APPROACH 
OR OF INFLUENCE IS PUT IN THE DATIVE; or, An INDIRECT OBJECT 
is put in the DATIVE ; or, The DATIVE is used to express that TO or 
FoR which something is or is done. 448. 

XVII. Words of NEARNEsS and LIKENESS govern the Dative. 449. 

XVIII. The oBsECT OF INFLUENCE is put in the Dative. 452. 

E. SuBSTANTIVE VERBS take a Dative of the possessor. 459. ; 

F. General Rule for the Dative Residual. AN ATTENDANT THING OR 
CIRCUMSTANCE, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, IS PUT IN THE DATIVE. 465. 

XIX. The MEANS and MODE are put in the Dative. 466. 

XX. The TIME and PLACE at which are put in the Dative. 469. 

XXI. The pirecr oBsEcT and the EFFECT of an action are put in the 
Accusative. 472. 

G. An adjunct simply considered as modifying a verb is put in the Accusative. 472. 
CAUSATIVES govern the Accusative together with the case of the included verb. 473. 
ADVERBS OF-SWEARING are followed by the Accusative. 476. 

XXII. The Accusative is used in specifying to what PART, PROPERTY, &c. 
a word or expression applies. 481. 

XXIII. Extent of TIME or SPACE is put in the Accusative. 482. 

XXIV. The Accusative is often used ADVERBIALLY, to express degree, 
manner, order, &c. 483. 

XXYV. The CoMPELLATIVE of a sentence is put in the Vocative. 484. 

J. AGREEMENT is commonly according to form, but often rather according to sense. 493. 

XXVI. An ADJECTIVE agrees with its subject in gender, number, and 
case. 504. 

XXVII. A PRONOUN agrees with its subject in gender, number, and per- 
son. 505. 


§ 76. | RULES OF SYNTAX. 115 


The RELATIVE commonly takes the case of the antecedent, when the relative clause limits 
or defines an antecedent in the Genitive or Dative, and the RELATIVE would properly 
be an Accusative depending upon a verb. 554 ; 

K. The repetition of the RELATIVE is commonly avoided, either by ellipsis, or by the 
substitution of a personal pronoun or of a demonstrative. 562. 

XXVIII. The ArricLeE is prefixed to SUBSTANTIVES, to mark them as 
definite. 520. : 
ΧΧΙΧ. A VERB agrees with its subject in nwmber and person. 568. 

L. The NEvuTER PLurRAL has regularly its vers in the singular. 569. 

M. The uses of the Voices are sometimes interchanged. 575. 

The Passive Voice has for its ΒύΒΕΟΤ a complement of the Active, commonly a direct, 
but sometimes an indirect complement. Any other word governed by the Act., and not 
in apposition with this, may remain unchanged with the Pass. THE SUBJECT OF THE 
Active is commonly expressed, with the Pass., by the Gen. with a preposition, 586. 

XXX. The DerinirE TENsEs express the action as doing at the time ; 
the INDEFINITE, simply as performed in the time ; and the CoMPLETE, 
as complete at the time. In the Indicative, this time is marked as 

PRESENT or FUTURE by the primary tenses, and as PAST by the sec- 

ondary ; in the other modes, it is not marked. 590. 

N. The uses of the TENsEs are often interchanged. 602. 


XXXI. The INDICATIVE expresses fact ; the SuBJUNCTIVE, present con- 

tingency ; and the OPTATIVR, past contingency. 613. 

0. The Sussunctive regularly follows a tense referring to present or future time ; and 
the ΟΡΤΑΤΙΨΕ, a tense referring to past time. 617. 

P. After ἃ FINAL CONJUNCTION, (a) an object of present forethought is expressed by the 
Subj., or (b) in the Future, by the Ind.; but (c) an object of past forethought, by 
the Opt., or (d), to mark it as now contrary to fact, by a prior tense of the Ind. 624. 

Q. In prohibitions with μή, the PREsENT is put in the Imperative, and the Aorist in 
the Subjunctive. 628. 

R. In the HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD, (a, b) if the PREMISE is presented as already decided in 
point of fact, it takes the INDICATIVE; (c) if it is presented as undecided, but with pres- 
ent expectation of decision, it takes the SussuncTIvE; (4) otherwise, it takes the OpTa- 
TIVE. In the first case, the CONCLUSION is commonly in the Ind. or Imv.; in the sec- 
ond, in the Fut. Ind. or an equivalent ; and in the third, in the Opt. with av. 681. 

8. A RELATIVE CLAUSE commonly uses the modes like other sentences to which it is most 
nearly akin. 640. 

T. The Oprative is the finite mode appropriate to Indirect Discourse in past time. 648. 

U. The uses of the Finrre Mopss are often interchanged. : 


XXXII. The ImpERATIVE is the most direct expression of an act of the 
will. 655. 
XXXII. The InFrnitIveE is construed as a neuter noun. 663. 
XXXIV. The SuBsect or THE INFINITIVE is put in the Accusative. 666. 
V. The InrinitiveE often forms an elliptical command, request, counsel, salutation, ex- 
clamation, or question. 670. 
Ww. aged ete hg are followed by the Infinitive; especially ὡς, ὥστε, οἷος, and 
ogos. ii. 
XXXV. A PARTICIPLE AND SUBSTANTIVE are put absolute in the Gen- 
itive ; an IMPERSONAL PARTICIPLE, in the Accusative. 675. 


X. A Particrpze is often preceded by ws or ὥσπερ, chiefly to mark it as subjective. 680. 

Y. IMPERSONAL VERBALS in -réov, or -réa, (a) govern the same cases as the verbs from 
which they are derived ; and (b) have sometimes the agent in the Accusative, instead 
of the Dative. 682. 


XXXVI. ApvERBS modify sentences, phrases, and words; chiefly verbs, 
adjectives, and other adverbs. 685. 
NEGATION, as desired, feared, or assumed, uses μή; but otherwise, ov. 686. 
XXXVII. Prepositions govern adjuncts, and mark their relations. 688. 
Z. A Preposition in composition often governs the same case, as when it stands by 
itself. 699. 
XXXVIII. ConsuNcTIONS connect sentences and like parts of a. sens 
tence. 700. 
The uses of the PARTICLES are often interchanged. 708. 
The INTERJECTION is independent of grammatical construction. 684 Ὁ. 


116 : TABLES. — PROSODY. | § 77. 


IV. PROSODY AND PRONUNCIATION. 
77. A. Tasur or Feet. 


The Numeral prefixed to each Class marks the number of Breves in its measure. 


1. ΓΣυλλαβὴ Βραχεῖα, Short Syllable, ~ perv. | 

2. [Συλλαβὴ Μακρά, Long Syllable, a pay. | 
Πυρῤῥίχιος, Pyrrhic, GMs μένε. 

3. Ἵαμβος, Iambus, Iamb, — μένω. 
‘Tpoxatos, Χορεῖος, Trochee, Choree, ete μῆκος. 
Τρίβραχυς, * Tribrach, Snes μένομεν. 

4, Δάκτυλος, Dactyl, tare δώσετε. 
᾿Ανάπαιστος, Anapest, sokgien ἐθέλω. 
Σπονϑεῖος, Spondee, coun σώζω. 
᾿Αμφίβραχυς, Amphibrach, Sar sone ἔδωκεν. 
Προκελευσματικός, Proceleusmatie, —~~~w~ _ deyduevos. 

5. Kpnrixés, ᾿Αμφίμακρος, Cretic, Amphimacer, —-— δώσομαι. 
Βακχεῖος, Bacchius, ἘΞ ΞΕΞΕ λέγωνται. 
᾿Αντιβάκχειος, Antibacchius, Bits σώζωμεν. 
Παίων αἱ > Peon I., —~~~ δωσόμενος. 
Παίων β΄ : Peon II., ~w—~~ ἐγείρομεν. 
Παίων Y; ἶ Peon 1Π|., φρο ζώσω σις COANTE. 
Παίων δ΄, Peon IV., ~~~—— θεοσεβής. 

6. XopiauBos, Choriamb, -οὡς,-.- σωζομένων. 
᾿Αντίσπαστος, Antispast, ~——~ ἐγείῤῥωμεν. 
AtiauBos, Diiamb, ~—~— σοφωτέρων. 
Διτρόχαιος, Ditrochee, —~—~  aivécaire. 
᾿Ιωνικὸς ἀπὸ μείζονος, Falling Ionic, ———~  fovndevere. 

᾿ ᾿Τωνικὸς am’ ἐλάσσονος, Rising Ionic, ~~—— ἐθελήσει. 
Μολοσσός, Molossus, eee μνηστήρων. 

7. ᾿Επίτριτος a ; Epitrite 1., ~——— ἐἐγείρωνται. 
᾿Επίτριτος β΄ 3 Epitrite IL., —~—— εὐπροσώπων, 
᾿Επίτριτος Ύ, Epitrite Ill. ———— εοἰἰἡγουμένων. 
Ἔπίτριτος 6’, Epitrite IV., .---.  , βουλεύσειε. 

8. Δόχμιος, Dochmius, ~——~ — ἐβουλευόμην. 
Δισπόνδειος, Dispondee, ———— λβουλεύσωνται. 


78. B. Merricat DESCRIPTION AND ANALYSIS. 


I. Give a general description of the Metre in which the Poem is written. 
11. Describe the particular Verse. 

., Dactylic Monometer ἢ Acatalectic consist- 

it ** Tambic, &c. Dimeter, &c. Catalectic, &c. ? ing of 3 &e. Heats 


[Mase ] Penthemim, 
The Ceesura is the [Fe Hephthemim, > after —. 
Pastoral, &c., 


which are —. 


Ill. Analyze by ere and) Feet. 


Spondee, Long Position, 
te Dactyl, Δὲ the 5 2, &e. Syllable gh ort by Nature, &c., Rule. 


§ 79. | PRONUNCIATION. 117 


79. C. Meruops oF PRONUNCIATION, 


fa. The directions here given do not apply to y before x, y, x, or &, 
where it is regarded as a nasal, having the sound of ng in king: ἄγγελος, 
λύγξΕ. Those for a, ἡ, and ὦ apply also to ᾳ, ἢ, and ῳ. See 137 ο, 109. 

b. Where consonants or the rough breathing are not specially noticed, 
it will be understood that they have the prevalent sounds of the corre- 
sponding letters in English: thus, B, δ, ἵν A, μη ν, ™, ρ, τ, Φ, Ψ, , pro- 
nounced like ὦ, d, z, 1, m, n, p, 7, t, ph, ps, h, in bud, zeal, phantom, rap, 
hops; Ὑ, κ, hard, like g, k, in keg; 0, & o, sharp, like th, x,-s, in sixth. 
The smooth breathing simply marks the absence of the rough. 

c. To avoid confusion, the terms protracted and abrupt are used below 
to mark what are commonly called, in English orthoépy, long and short 
sounds ; and the term ictus (Lat., stroke, beat), to denote that stress of 
the voice which in English we usually call accent. Any secondary ictus 
needed in long words, may commonly be placed as their formation and 
the ear seem to require. ] 


1. Ancrent Greek Metnop. ἃ. The pronunciation of every lan- 
guage, from the very laws of language, is in a continual process of change, 
more or less rapid. And in respect to the Greek, there is full internal 
evidence, both that its pronunciation had materially changed before its 
orthography became fixed, and that it has materially chained since. 
Therefore, as there is no art of embalming sounds, the ancient method can 
now only be inferred, and, in part, with much uncertainty. For the 
probable pronunciation of the simple vowels, see 107. (6) In the diph- 
thongs, the sounds of the two elements seem originally to have been sim- 
ply combined, and uttered with a single impulse of the voice. But the 
mode of representing Greek words in Latin (92b) shows that, in some 
diphthongs, one of these sounds was early lost or became obscure. (f) 
The consonants seem, in general, to have been pronounced like the cor- 
responding letters in English ; y, however, resembling the German guttu- 
ral ch more than the English ὦ, and doubled or combined consonants 
being both sounded. — For probabilities respecting the details of the An- 
cient Method, see ‘‘ History of the Greek Alphabet and Pronunciation,” 
by Professor Sophocles ; from whose Romaic Grammars, the following 
statement of Method 2 has been chiefly condensed. It shows how greatly 
the Greek, like the English, has been affected by the precession of vowels. 


2. Mopern Greek METHOD. g. Vowels: a like a in father; but 
after the sound of t, more like ὦ in peculiarity : € or av a little longer than 
6 11 men: υγ Ἢ, ; εἰ, οἱ, v, or vt, like ὁ in machine: o or ὦ nearly as o in 
obey : ov like 00 in moon. In av, ev, Hv, wv, the v has the sound of B be- 
fore B, y, δ, ἵν A, μὴ v, p, or a vowel; but otherwise, that of b: φεύγω, 
αὐτός, pronounced PéByw, ἀφτός. 

h. Consonants: B nearly as v (a little softer): y before the sound of ε 
or t, a little stronger than y in yes; otherwise guttural, very nearly like 
the German g in Tag: 8 like th in the: « like & (somewhat softened be- 
fore the sound of ε or ι) ; but after the sound of 2g, like g in go: Nand v 
like Zand x; but before the sound of 4, like Zi in filial, and ni in onion ; 
while final v in ἄν, ἐάν, ἐν, σύν, or the article, sounds like ng before « or 
ξ, and like m before @ or Ψ (τὸν καιρόν, σὺν πόλει pron. tong-gerdn, (sim- 
bdlt) : wr, , like p, ps; but after the sound of m, like ὦ, bs: o like 5 in 
so; but before B, γ, 5, £, A, p, v, p, like z (so even o final in the article, as 
τοὺς βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς, pron. tooz-vasilis tiz-yts): + like ¢; but after v, like 
ὦ (so even in initial + after dv, ἐάν, ἐν, σύν, or the article; as ἐν τιμῇ, 


118 TABLES, — PRONUNCIATION. ὁ 79. 


ron. en-dimt): nearly as f (a little softer): xy like the German ch. 
ee a, b, As in English, a consonant doubled is sounded but once. 

i. The rough breathing is silent; and the quantity of a vowel is not 
considered. The <ctus is placed according to the written accent. A pro- 
clitic is pronounced as if a part of the word which it precedes ; and an 
enclitic, as if a part of the word which it follows. The accent of an en- 
clitic is only regarded when the preceding word is accented on the ante- 
penult: thus λέλεκταί μοι has a secondary ictus on κται. 


3. Eneiish Mrrnop. j. Modern scholars have pronounced the Greek 
variously ; commonly according to the analogy of their respective lan- 
guages. Hence the following method, though not closely approaching 
the ancient, has been extensively used in England and this country : 

k. Simple Vowels: ἡ, v, ὦ, like e in mete, u in tube, ο in note (τυπτή- 
owv): ε, 0, like ὁ in et, o in dot ; but before another vowel, or at the end of 
a word, like e in real and ὁ in go (ἐν, λέοντε, τό) : α and t, in general, like 
a and ὁ in English ; when protracted, like @ in hate, ὁ in pine; when 
abrupt, like ὦ in hat, i in pin. At the end of a word, tis always pro- 
tracted ; but a, except in monosyllables, takes the sound of ain era: ἀντί, 
μία, τά. If ἃ or τ receives the ictus, whether primary or secondary, and 
is followed by a single consonant or {, it is protracted in the penult, but 
abrupt in any preceding syllable (except that a is here protracted, if the 
next vowel is € or « before another vowel): ἕξω - πατέρα, καταφιλέω " ταμῖας. 
See c.— P affects an abrupt vowel preceding, in the same way as 7 in 
English : ἅρμα, Ἑρμῆς, ὄρνις. 

1, Diphthongs: αν like the affirmative ay ; εἰ, ei in height ; οι, οἱ in vil ; 
vt, wt in quiet ; av,au in haul; ev and yy, ew in feud, Europe ; ov and wv, 
ou in thou: εἰδυῖαι, φεύγοι, αὐτοῦ, vig. See a. 

m. Consonants: o like 8 in so; but in the middle of a word before p, 
or at the end after ἢ or @, like αὶ (στήσας " κοσμίως, js): o and + never like 
sh: x like ch in chaos: ἕξ, ψ, like x, ps, in ox, lips; but, when initial, 
like z, 8 (Ξέρξης, ψυχή). Of two initial consonants which cannot both be 
peng: with ease, the first is silent ; a consonant doubled is sounded 

ut once ; and § is pronounced like p: ura, πτήσσω, pw. See a, Ὁ. 

n. In dissyllables, the 1cTUs is on the penult ; in polysyllabies, on the 

penult if Jong in quantity, but otherwise on the antepenult. ΐ 


4, ““ΟΟΝΤΙΝΈΝΤΑΙ, METHOD.” 0. Many of our scholars prefer ἃ 
method of pronouncing Greek more like that which prevails, though with 
much variety, upon the continent of Europe. This method, in the details 
of which there is not yet full agreement, appears to be taking, in our 
country, a form like the following : 

p. Simple Vowels: a, d, like a in father, fast (nearly as in man) ; ἢ, € ὁ 
in féte, men (or a in machine) ; t,t, ὁ in machine, pin (or direct); ὦ, ο, oin 
hope, hop (or obey) ; v, ¥, εὖ in tube, duet, or yet closer, like the French wu. 
Cf. 107. The distinction between vowels long and short by nature should 
be carefully observed : πρᾶγμα . δή, δέ. Ἶρις - λόγων - σῦς, cds. 

. Diphthongs: a like the affirmative ay (by some closer, like ai in 
aishe) ; εἰ, et in height ; οι, οἱ in oil ; w, wee in queen; av, ow in loud; εὖ, 
nv, ew in feud; ov, wv, ow in soup: εἰδυῖαι, αὐτοῦ, φεύγοι, vig. See a. 

τ. Consonants: ἵ like z (by some, like a soft dz): x, by some, like ch 
in chaos; by others, like the German guttural ch: χειμάζω. Every con- 
sonant should be pronounced, and with a uniform sound except y (a) ; the 
doubling of a consonant should be, at least, slightly marked; and ῥ 
should be rougher than p: μνᾶ, πτήσσω, βδέλλιον, ἔῤῥω. See b. 

t. The crus is placed according to the written accent. 


§ 80. GREEK APPENDIX. : 119 


80. ΠΑΡΑΡΤΉΜΑ ‘EAAHNIKON. 


fa. ὈΡΘΟΓΡΑΦΙΑ. Στοιχεῖα clements, γράμματα letters; ἐπίσημα. 
Φωνήεντα vowels: βραχέα short, μακρά long, δίχρονα doubtful, δίφθογγοι 
_ diphthongs. Σύμφωνα consonants: ἡμίφωνα semivowels, ὑγρά liquids, 
σύμφωνα διπλᾷ double consonants; ἄφωνα mutes, ψιλά smooth, μέσα mid- 
dle, δασέα rough. Συλλαβή syllable ; χρόνος quantity. 

B. ILvevpara breathings: δασύ rough, ψιλόν smooth. Τροσῳδίαι 
(τόνοι) accents: ὀξεῖα acute, βαρεῖα grave, περισπωμένη circumflex. Zrvy- 
pat points: τελεία στιγμή period, μέση στιγμή colon, ὑποστιγμή comma. | 


y ETYMOAOTIA. Ta τοῦ λόγου στοιχεῖα λέγονται ὧδε- [kira] 
ἄρθρον, ὄνομα, ἐπίθετον, ἀντωνυμία, ῥῆμα - [ἄκλιτα] ἐπίῤῥημα, πρόθεσις, 
σύνδεσμος, ἐπιφώνημα. [Κλίσις, σύγκρισις, συζυγία.] 

ὃ. Tod ὀνόματος αἱ πτώσεις ὀνομάζονται [εὐθεῖαι] ὀρθὴ ἢ ὀνομαστικὴ, 
κλητικὴ, [πλάγιαι] γενικὴ, δοτικὴ, αἰτιατική (179) " τὰ δὲ τρία γένη (174), 
ἀρσενικὸν, θηλυκὸν, οὐδέτερον " [τὰ δὲ τρία πρόσωπα, πρῶτον, δεύτερον, 
τρίτον.] ἸΤριπλοῦς δ᾽ ἐστὶν ὡσαύτως ὁ ἀριθμὸς, δηλαδὴ ἑνικὸς, δυϊκὸς, πλη- 
θυντικός (178). Tod ἐπιθέτου οἱ βαθμοὶ λέγονται θετικὸς, συγκριτικὸς, 
ὑπερθετικός (256). 

ε. Τρεῖς ἔχει διαθέσεις τὸ ῥῆμα, ἐνεργητικὴν, μέσην, παθητικήν (266) - 
καὶ ἐν ἑκάστῃ διαθέσει πέντε διακρίνονται ἐγκλίσεις, ὧν τέσσαρες μὲν παρεμ.- 
φατικαὶ, ὁριστικὴ, ὑποτακτικὴ, εὐκτικὴ, προστακτικὴ, μία δὲ ἀπαρέμ.- 
φατος * μέρος δὲ τοῦ ῥήματός ἐστι καὶ ἡ μετοχή (269). Οἱ χρόνοι τοῦ ῥή- 
ματος λέγονται ὧδε (267)° ἐνεστὼς, παρατατικὸς, μέλλων, [μετ᾽ ὀλίγον 
μέλλων,] ἀόριστος, παρακείμενος [ἢ συντελικός], ὑπερσυντελικός. [Αὖ- 
ξησις συλλαβικὴ καὶ χρονική, ἀναδιπλασιασμός, 277.] 

{. ΣΥΝΤΑΞΙΣ. Adyos ὀνομάζεται ἄθροισις λέξεων ἀκέραιον δηλοῦσα 
διάνοιαν. Ὑποκείμενον λέγεται τὸ περὶ οὗ ὁ λόγος " καὶ κατηγορούμενον ἢ 
κατηγόρημα, τὸ κατὰ τοῦ ὑποκειμένου "λεγόμενον (56b). Διὰ μόνου τοῦ 
ῥήματος κατηγορεῖταί τι. --- Μεταβατικὰ καλοῦνται τὰ ῥήματα τὰ τοιάνδε 
ἐνέργειαν δηλοῦντα, ἥτις ἐξ ἀνάγκης εἰς πρόσωπον ἢ πρᾶγμα διάφορον τοῦ 
ὑποκειμένου, τὸ παρὰ γραμματικοῖς ἀντικείμενον [object] λεγόμενον, μετα- 
βαίνει (58 c). 

ἡ. Παρεμφατικοῦ ῥήματος τὸ ὑποκείμενον τίθεται κατ᾽ ὀνομαστικήν (400): 
καὶ ταύτῃ συμφωνεῖ τὸ ῥῆμα κατ᾽ ἀριθμόν τε καὶ πρόσωπον (568). — ΠΙλει- 
ὄνων ὄντων τῶν τοῦ ῥήματος ὑποκειμένων καὶ ἑτεροπροσώπων, τίθεται τὸ 
ῥῆμα κατὰ τὸ ἐπικρατέστερον " νικᾷ δ᾽ ἀεὶ τὸ πρῶτον τὸ Sevtepov πρόσωπον, 
καὶ τοῦτο.τὸ τρίτον (496 d). 

θ. Σχῆμα ᾿Αττικόν, ἘΕἰώθᾶσι μέντοι οἱ ᾿Αττικοὶ πληθυντικὴν ὀνομα- 
στικὴν οὐδετέραν ῥήματι ἑνικῷ παρατιθέναι (669). 

., THs ἀπαρεμφάτου τὸ ὑποκείμενον τίθεται κατ᾽ αἰτιατικήν (670). 

κ, Τὸ ἐπίθετον καὶ ἡ μετοχὴ συμφωνοῦσι τοῖς εἰς ἃ ἀναφέρονται ὀνόμασι, 
κατὰ γένος, ἀριθμὸν, πτῶσιν (504). — ΠΠΙολλῶν τῶν ὀνομάτων ὄντων, τίθεται 
τὸ ἐπίθετον ἢ ἣ μετοχὴ πληθυντικῶς " ἐπὶ μὲν ἀψύχων, εἴτε ὁμογενῶν εἴτε 


10: TABLES. — GREEK RULES. : ὃ 80. 


ἑτερογενῶν (223 a), κατ᾽ οὐδέτερον γένος " ἐπὶ δὲ ἐμψύχων, τῶν μὲν Spoye- 
νῶν, κατὰ τὸ τοῖς ὀνόμασι κοινὸν γένος, τῶν δὲ ἑτερογενῶν, κατὰ τὸ ἐπικρα- 
τέστερον (496). 

A. “H ἀναφορικὴ λεγομένη ἀντωνυμία συμφωνεῖ τῷ ἑαυτῆς ἡγουμένῳ κατὰ 
γένος καὶ ἀριθμὸν καὶ πρόσωπον (505), — TS συντακτικῷ δὲ σχήματι ὃ κα- 
λεῖται ἕλξις ἢ ἔφελξις, ἕλκεται ἡ ἀντωνυμία εἰς τὴν πτῶσιν τοῦ ἡγουμένου " 
ἀντιστρόφως δ᾽ ἔσθ᾽ ὅτε καὶ ἡ ἀντωνυμία ἕλκει τὸ ἡγούμενον (684 ἃ, ὁ). 

μ. Ὀνόματα, τὰ μὲν πρὸς τὸ αὐτὸ πρόσωπον ἢ πρᾶγμα ἀναφερόμενα, 
ὁμοιοπτώτως τίθενται " τοῦτο δὲ ὀνομάτων πρόσθεσις καλεῖται (393). Τὰ 
δὲ πρὸς διάφορα ἄλλῳ ἄλλο ὑποτάσσεται ἐπὶ γενικῆς (48 a). 

ν. Γενικῇ συντάσσονται ἐπίθετα καὶ ῥήματα τὰ πληρώσεως (414), μεθέ- 
ξεως (424), ἐμπειρίας, ἐπιμελείας, μνήμης (432), ἐπιτυχίας (426 5), φειδοῦς 
(405 b) σημαντικὰ, καὶ τὰ τούτοις ἐναντία > πρὸς δὲ ἐκ τῶν ἐπιθέτων, τὰ εἰς 
-ἰκός λήγοντα (444), τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἀ- στερητικοῦ σύνθετα (486 b), καὶ τὰ παρα- 
θετικὰ (406 5), τὰ συγκριτικὰ δηλαδὴ καὶ ὑπερθετικὰ, καὶ τούτοις ἀνάλογα " 
ἐκ δὲ τῶν ῥημάτων, τὰ ἀρχικὰ (407) καὶ ὑπαρκτικὰ (487), τὰ ἐνάρξεως ἢ λή- 
ξεως σημαντικὰ (425, 405), καὶ τὰ τῶν αἰσθήσεων, πλὴν τοῦ δρῶ (432 a, h). 

ξ. Δοτικῇ συντάσσονται ἐπίθετα καὶ ῥήματα, τὰ ὁμοιότητος, ἀναλογίας, 

προσεγγίσεως, μίξεως, ἐναντιότητος, διηγήσεως, δόσεως σημαντικὰ, τά τε 
φιλικὴν ἢ ἐχθρικὴν πρός τινα διάθεσιν δηλοῦντα (450s). 
0 Αἰτιατικῇ συντάσσονται τὰ ἰδίως ἢ ἀμέσως μεταβατικὰ ῥήματα (472). 
Διπλῇ αἰτιατικῇ συντάσσονται τὰ ἱκετευτικὰ, τὰ παιδευτικὰ, τὰ ἐνδύσεως ἢ 
ἐκδύσεως σημαντικὰ, τὰ τὴν ἔννοιαν ἔχοντα τοῦ εὖ ἢ κακῶς λέγειν ἢ ποιεῖν 
(480 c). 

π. ‘O χρόνος ὁπότε ἢ ἐν ὦ γίνεταί τι, ἐκφέρεται δοτικῇ ἢ γενικῇ, εἴτε 
ἀπροθέτῳ εἴτε ἐμπροθέτῳ [without or with a preposition, 433, 469, 487]. 


P- ὅπον ἵσταται ἢ), νεῖται δοτικῆς (407); ἐμπροθέτου 
Ὁ τόπος ian τι, ἐκφέρ- γεμκῆς oe τε καὶ 
v οὗ γενικῆς . Se pecan. 
ΡΩΝ εται διὰ αὐπιρα κα (472 ὡς ἀπροθέτου 
σ. Td αἴτιον διὰ γενικῆς (410 5): 
διὰ δοτικῆς (466 a). 
Τὸ ὄργανον δὲ οὗ γίνεταί τι, ᾿νὲ ss es 
Ὁ τρόπος καθ᾽ ὃν γίνεταί τι, ᾿ διὰ δοτικῆς : 
Ἢ ἐκφέρεται 
Τὸ διαφορᾶς μέτρον διὰ δοτικῆς (468). 
Τὸ κατά τι δ αἰτιατικῆς (481). 
Τὸ ποσὸν τόπου 7) χρόνου δ αἰτιατικῆς (482). 
Τὸ ποσὸν ἐπὶ ἀνταλλαγῶν διὰ γενικῆς (431). 


τ. Τῇ δριστικῇ, ὡς θετικόν τι καὶ βέβαιον παριστώσῃ, πρέπει τὸ ἀπο- 
φατικὸν ΟΥ̓" ταῖς δὲ λοιπαῖς τῶν ἐγκλίσεων, αἱ οὐκ ὄντως τι ὃν παριστᾶσι, 
ἀλλά τι ὑποτιθέμενον ἢ προστασσόμενον ἢ εὐκτόν, πρέπει τὸ MH (731 a). 


END OF TABLES, 


INTRODUCTION. 


81. Tue Ancient Greeks were divided into three principal 
races : the Ionic, of which the Attic was a branch, the Dorie, 
and the Alolic. These races spoke the same general language, 
but with many dialectic peculiarities. 


82. The Anciznt Greek Laneuace (commonly called sim- 
ply the Greek) has accordingly been divided by grammarians 
into four principal Diatects, the Artic, Ionic, Doric, and 
AXOLIC. 

Of these the Attic and Ionic were far the most refined, and had far the 
greatest unity within themselves. The Doric and Holic were not only 
much ruder, but, as the dialects of races widely extended and united by 
ΤῸ common bond of literature, abounded in local diversities. Some of 
the varieties of the Doric or Aolic were separated from each other by dif- 
ferences scarcely less marked than those which distinguished them in 
common from the other dialects. Of the Molic, the principal varieties 
were the Lesbian, the Bceotian, and the Thessalian. The Doric, accord- 
ing as it was more or less removed from the Attic and Ionic, was char- 
acterized as the stricter or the milder Doric : the former prevailing in the 
Laconic, Tarentine, Cretan, Cyrenian, and some other varieties ; the lat- 
ter in the Corinthian, Syracusan, Megarian, Delphian, and some others. 


83. The Greek colonies upon the coast of Asia Minor and 
the adjacent islands, from various causes, took the lead of the 
mother country in refinement ; and the first development of 
Greek literature which secured permanence for its productions 
was among the Asiatic Jonians. This development was Epic 
Poetry, and we have, doubtless, its choicest strains remaining 
to us in the still unsurpassed Homeric poems. 

The language of these poems, often called Epic and Homeric, is the old 
Ionic, with those modifications and additions which a wandering bard 
would insensibly gather up, as he sang from city to city, and those poetic 
licenses which are always allowed to early minstrelsy, when as yet the 
language is unfixed and critics are unknown. The Old Ionic of the Epic 
poets was followed by the Middle Ionic of the Elegiac poets ; and this 
again by the New Ionic, found in the prose of Herodotus and Hippocrates. 

84. The next dialect which attained distinction in litera- 
ture was the AZolic of Lesbos, in which the lyric strains of 
Alczeus and Sappho were sung. But its distinction was short- 

COMP. GR. 6 


122 INTRODUCTION. § 84. 


lived, and we have scarce any remains of the dialect except 
some brief fragments. There arose later among the AXZolians 
of Beeotia another school of Lyric Poetry, of which the most 
illustrious ornament was Pindar ; who is commonly said, how- 
ever, but loosely, to have written in the Doric. . 


85. Meanwhile, the Athenians, a branch of the Ionian race, 
were gradually rising to such political. and commercial impor- 
tance, and to such intellectual pre-eminence among the states 
of Greece, that their dialect, the Attic, adorned by such drama- 
tists as Aischylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, and 
Menander, by such historians as Thucydides and Xenophon, 
by such philosophers as Plato and Aristotle, and by such ora-_ 
tors as Lysias, Aischines, and Demosthenes, became at length 
the standard language of the Greeks, and, as such, was adopted 
by the educated classes in all the states. It became the gen- 
eral medium of intercourse, and, with a few exceptions, the 
universal language of composition. Its diffusion was especially 
promoted by the conquests of the Macedonians, who adopted it 
as their court language. 

a. As its use extended, it naturally lost some of its peculiarities, and 
received many additions ; and thus diffused and modified, it ceased to be 
regarded as the language of a particular state, and received the appellation 
of the Common DIALecT or LANGUAGE. 

b. The pure Attic has been divided into three periods: the Old, used 
by Thucydides, the Tragedians, and Aristophanes ; the Middle, used by 
Xenophon, Isocrates, and Plato ; and the New, used by Demosthenes, and 
the other Orators of his time, and the later Comedians. The period of 
the Common dialect may be regarded as commencing with the subjection 
of Athens to the Macedonians. 

c. The exceptions to the universality acquired by the Attic dialect are 
found almost entirely in poetry. Here the later writers felt constrained 
to imitate the language of the great early models. The Epic poet never 
felt at liberty to depart from the dialect of Homer. Indeed, the old Epic 
language was regarded by. subsequent poets in all departments as a sacred 
tongue, the language of the gods, from which they might enrich their 
several compositions. 


d. The culture of the Athenians was so liberal, and their intercourse 
with other states so extensive, that not only Attic poets, but even prose- 
writers, felt at liberty to borrow some forms of expression which belonged 
more strictly to other dialects. 


86. Of the Doric dialect, in proportion to its wide extent, 
we have very scanty remains ; and of most of its varieties our 
knowledge is derived from passages in Attic writers, from mon- 
uments, and from the works of grammarians. In Greece it- 
self, it seems scarcely to have been applied to any other branch 
of literature than Lyric Poetry. In the more refined Dorian 
colonies of Italy and Sicily, it was employed in Philosophy by 


§ 89. DIALECTS. 123 


the Pythagoreans (Arch¥tas, Timeus, &c.), in Mathematics 
by the great Archimédes, in Comedy by Epicharmus and his 
successors, and in Pastoral Poetry (which was confined to this 
dialect) by Theocritus, Bion, and Moschus. 


87. In this grammar, an attempt is made to exhibit first 
and distinctly, under each head, the language in its standard 
form, that is, the Attic and the purer Common Greek ; and 
afterwards to specify the important dialectic peculiarities. It 
will not, however, be understood that everything which is 
ascribed to one of the dialects prevails in that dialect through- 
out, or is found in no other. 

a. This applies especially to the Doric and Molic, which, with great 
variety within themselves (ὃ 82), are closely akin to each other. By the 
term Molic, as employed by grammarians, is commonly denoted the culti- 
vated Aolic of Lesbos. : 

b. Grammar flourished among the Greeks only in the decline of their 
language, and the Greek grammarians usually treated the dialects with 
little precision. Whatever they found in the old Ionic of Homer that 
seemed to them more akin to the later-cultivated Aolic, Doric, or even 
Attic, than to the new Ionic, they did not hesitate to ascribe to those dia- 
lects.. Even in the common language, whatever appeared to them irreg- 
ular or peculiar, they usually referred to one of the old dialects. 


88. The wide diffusion of the Greek by the Macedonian 
conquerors, and subsequently the conquest of the Greek world 
by the Romans, much affected the purity of the later language, 
which became especially degenerate in the Byzantine period. 

a. The Macedonians, who had previously spoken a rude and semi- 
barbarous dialect of the Greek, retained and diffused some of the peculi- 
arities of their native tongue. These are termed Macedonic, or, some- 
times, from Alexandria, the principal seat of Macedonian, and indeed of 
later Greek culture, Alexandrine. Words and forms borrowed from the 
language of the Romans are called Latinisms. 

τ Ὁ. The Greek, as the common language of the civilized world, was em- 
ployed in the translation of the Jewish Scriptures, and the composition of 
the Christian. When so employed by native Jews, it naturally received 
a strong Hebrew coloring; and, as a Jew speaking Greek was called 
᾿Ἑλληνιστής (from ἑλληνίζω, to speak Greek), this form of the language has 
been termed the Hellenistic (or by some the Ecclesiastical) dialect. 

89. Since the destruction of the Eastern Empire by the 
Turks, the fusion of the Byzantine and Ecclesiastical Greek 
with the popular dialects of the different districts and islands 
of Greece has produced the Moprern GRrexx, or, as it is often 
called, by a name derived from the Roman Empire in the East, 
the Romaic. The Greek, therefore, in its various forms, has 
never ceased to be a living language ; and it offers to the stu- 
dent a series of compositions, not only including many of the 
highest productions of genius, but extending through a period 
of nearly three thousand years. 


BOOK I. 


ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 


Τραμμάτων re συνθέσεις 
᾿Εξεῦρον αὐτοῖς. 
Prometheus of Zschylus. 


CHAPTER TI. 
CHARACTERS. 


.90. Tuer Greek language is written with 
twenty-four letters, two breathings, three accents, four 
marks of punctuation, and a few other characters. 


I. For the Lerrers (called the Alphabet from Alpha, Beta, 
just as we speak of “the A, B, C”), see Table, ὃ 1. 


Remarks. 1. Dovsre Forms. Sigma /inal is written s; not 
final, «: as, στάσις. Many editors, without authority from manu- 
scripts, use the final form at the end of any word compounded with 
another: as, mposeisepers. The other double forms are used indif- 
ferently : as, βῆϑε or θῆθι. 

2. Licatures. Two or more letters are often united, except in 
recent editions, into one character, called a ligature (ligatiira, tie) : 
as, 8 forov, s (named ort Or στίγμα) for στ. See ὃ 3. 


91. 3. Numerat Power. To denote numbers under a thou- 
sand, the Greeks employed the letters of the alphabet, and three 
obsolete letters termed Episéma (ἐπίσημον, sign, mark), as shown i in 
§ 1, with the mark (") over them: as, a’ 1, ε΄ 10, ιβ΄ 12, pey 123. 
The first eight letters, with Vau, represented ‘the nine units ; the next 
eight, with Koppa, ‘the nine tens ; and the last eight, with San, 
the nine hundreds. The thousands were denoted by the same let- 
ters with the mark beneath : as, ε΄ 5, ε 5,000, «Ky or κ 23,000. 

a. Sometimes the Greek letters, like our own, denote ordinal numbers, 
according to their own order in the alphabet. In this way the books of 
Homer are marked : as, Ἰλιάδος A, Z, Q, The Iliad, Books 1, 6, 24. 


92. 4. Roman Lerrers. By the side of the Greek letters in 
§ 1, are placed the Roman letters which take their place when Greek 
words are transferred into Latin or English: as, Κύκλωψ Cyclops, 


§ 96. CHARACTERS. 7 125 


a. The letter y becomes ἢ, when followed by another palatal ; but, 
- otherwise, g (137 0) : as, ἄγγελος, Lat. angelus, Eng. angel, συγκοπή 

syncope, λάρυγξ larynx, Atyiva Aigina. 
' “pb. The diphthong ἂν becomes αὐ ; or, @; εἰ, ὃ or ὃ (before a consonant 
almost always 7); ov, @; and w, yi: as, Φαῖδρος Phedrus, Βοιωτία 
Beeotia, Νεῖλος Nilus, Δαρεῖος Darius, Μήδεια Medéa, Μοῦσα Misa, 
Εϊλείθυια Ilithyia. A few words ending in -ava and -ova are excepted : as, 
Μαῖα Maia, Τροία Troia or Troja; so also Αἴας Ajax. For q, y,, see 109. 


93. II. The Brearurnes are the Smooru or Sort (spiritus 
lenis: ᾽), and the Rouen (spiritus asper: ‘), also called the 
AsPIRATE (aspiro, to breathe). The first denotes a gentle emis- 
sion of the breath, such as is needed before the utterance of 
any initial vowel, but in most languages is not marked; the 
second, a strong emission, such as in English is represented 
by ἡ. 

a. The rough breathing becomes, in Latin and English, /, while the 
smooth is not written : as, "Exrwp Hector, *Epvé Eryx, Ῥέα Rhea. : 

b. One of the breathings is placed over every initial vowel. For its 
place over a diphthong, see 110. 

ec. An initial v has always the rough breathing to assist in its utterance 
(as in English an initial long w is always preceded by the sound of y ; 
thus, ds, ὑμεῖς, as, in English, wse, pronounced yuse, union) ; except in 
the Molic dialect, and in the Epic forms dupes, ὕμμι, dupe. 

d. An initial p requires, for its proper vibration or rolling, a strong 
aspiration, and is therefore always marked with the rough breathing : as, 
ῥέω.᾿ When p is doubled, the first p has the smooth breathing, and the 
second the rough (in Latin 771) : as, Πύῤῥος Pyrrhus. Some excellent 
editors, however, notwithstanding old usage and Latin analogy, now write 
pp without the breathings : thus, Πύρρος. 


94. III. The Accents are the Acutz (’), the Grave ( ), 


and the CrrcumrLex (“or”). For their use, see Prosody. 
See also ὃ. 


95. IV. The Marks or Punctuation are the Comma (, ); 
the Coton (+), taking the place of our colon and semicolon ; 
the Purtop (.); and the Nore or ΓΝΤΕΒΒΟΘΑΤΊΟΝ (;), which 
has the form of ours (72) inverted. 

To i some editors have judiciously added the Norr or ExcLaMa- 
TION (!). 

96. V. OrnerR*CHARACTERS. a. CoRONIS and APOSTROPHE. 
The mark (’), which at the beginning of a word is the smooth 
breathing, over the middle is the CoRONIS (κορωνίς, crooked 
mark), or mark of crasis, and at the end, the APOsTROPHE 
(124 b, 127): as, ταὐτά for τὰ αὐτά, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ for ἀλλὰ ἐγώ. 

b. The Hypuen, Di#resis, ΑΒΗ, and Marks oF PARENTHESIS and 
QUOTATION are used in printing Greek as in English. 

ὁ. Among the other signs used by critics and editors are Brackets [1], 


to enclose words of doubtful authenticity ; the OpELIsK (+ or —), to 
mark verses or words as faulty ; the AsTERISK (*), to denote that some- 


. 


120. HISTORY OF ORTHOGRAPHY. δ 96. 


* thing is wanting in the text; and Marxs or QUANTITY, viz. (~), to 
mark a vowel or syllable as long ; (7), as short; (© or ™), as ether long 
or short. 


HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGRAPHY. 


97. That the Greek alphabet was borrowed from the Phe- 
nician is abundantly established both by historical and by 
internal evidence. 


a. According to common tradition, letters were first brought into 
Greece by Cadmus, a Pheenician, who founded Thebes long before the 
Trojan war. In illustration, we present in § 2 the common Hebrew 
alphabet, which is substantially the same with the old Pheenician, placing 
by the side the corresponding Greek letters, and also the Latin. 


98. This borrowed alphabet received in the course of time 
important modifications. 


a. The original Pheenician alphabet had no proper vowels. The 
Greeks, therefore, employed as such those letters which, as representing 
various breathings or aspirate sounds, were nearest akin to vowels ; viz. 
A, E, F, H, 1, and Ὁ, 

b. The aspirate use of E and F still continuéd for a period, and hence 
these letters when employed as vowels were distinguished by the term 
ytror, smooth ; thus, Ἢ ψιλόν, Ὗ ytrdv. It will be observed that the 
last of these letters, when used as a vowel, was somewhat changed in 
form, and was put at the end of the old alphabet. 

ce. To the Phenician alphabet the Greeks added the aspirates ® and X, 
the double consonant Ψ, and the sign for long 0, 2, naturally placing 
them at the end. In distinction, the short ὁ was now termed Ὃ μῖκρόν, 


small 0; and the long ο, Ὦ μέγα, great O. 


ἃ. In the softening of the language, the labial breathing F, and also ? 
and 7, which were only rougher forms of K and 2, fell into disuse, and 
these letters were retained only as numeral characters ; F and ? in their 
proper places in the alphabet, but 7 -at the end. The Latin alphabet, 
which ours here follows, dropped 9, but-retained the other two, F and Q, 
in their proper places. 

‘e.. F (also named from its form the Digamma, i. 6. the double Gamma) 
is still found upon some inscriptions and coins, and performs an important 
office in the explanation of the forms of the language. Its restoration by 
Bentley to the Homeric poems has removed so many apparent hiatuses 
and irregularities of metre, that we cannot doubt its existence.in the time 
of Homer, though apparently even then beginning to lose its power. 


ΠΗ ΡΝ LT. 
FIGURES AFFECTING LETTERS AND SOUNDS. 


99. The letters and sounds in words are subject to many 
changes, called riaurEs, as affecting the form of the word. 
a. These changes may be either ewphonic, poetic, or dialectic. 


δ 105. FIGURES. 127. 


b. Euphonic changes are chiefly to avoid hiatus (the succession of dis- 
tinct vowels wi.hout an intervening consonant) ; to reduce the openness 
of vowels (107, 114 -- 116) ; to secure a proper rhythm ; and to prevent 
excessive or undesirable combinations of consonants, and difficult or less 
agreeable modes of beginning and ending words. 


100. In the earliest Greek of which we have traces, the 
prevalent method of preventing hiatus was by the insertion of 
consonants ; particularly F and Σ (as in Latin υ, 6, and 7), but 
also A, 6, &c. In the progress of the language, these inserted 
consonants extensively dropped out, and the more rapid method 
by contraction prevailed. 


101. To give to the discourse a proper flow and rhythm, 
especially in poetry, syllables are lengthened or shortened, 
united or resolved. 


102. To prevent undesirable combinations of consonants, 
or modes of beginning and ending words, letters are dropped, 
added, changed, and transposed. 


a. The names below ending in -thesis and -wresis are derived from com- 
pounds of τίθημι, to put, and alpéw, to take. 


103. Ficures (see ὃ 6). Addition and Subtraction. a. Pro- 
thesis (πρό, before ; less properly Prosthesis) adds one or more let- 
ters at the beginning of a word; Epenthesis (ἐπί, to, ἐν, in), in the 
middle ; and Paragoge (rapaywyn, a bringing beside), at the end: as, 
χθές ἐχθές, heri, yesterday ; ἀνρος ἀνδρός (18); εἴκόσι εἴκοσιν, twenty. 

b. By the extension of a vowel is meant its repetition, either in whole 
or in part, either before or after : as, ἕ éé, himself, φῶς φόως, light. 

6. Apheeresis (ἀπό, from) takes one or more letters from the be- 
ginning of a word; Syncope (συγκοπή, abridgment), from the middle ; 
and Apocope (ἀποκοπή, a cutting off), from the end: as, λείβω εἴβω, 
libo, to pour ; marépos πατρός, patris (18) ; ἀνά ἄν, up. 

ἃ. One form of Apocope has received the special name of Apostrophe 
or Elision (117). 

104. Lxchange. Metathesis (μετά, among, interchangeably), or 
Transposition, changes the order of letters; and Antithesis (ἀντί, in- 
stead of) substitutes one letter for another : as, ἔδαρθον ἔδραθον, τάσσω 
τάττω. ; 

a. When one letter thus becomes the same with an adjoining letter, 
the change is called Assimilation : as, συνλεγω συλλέγω, to collect. 


105. Union, ὧς. a. Syneresis (σύν, together) unites two vow- 
els (and thus two syllables) into one; and Diseresis (διά, apart), or 
Resolution, divides one yowel into two: as, νόος νοῦς, mind ; παῖς 
mais, boy. 

b. Syneeresis is divided into Contraction, Crasis, and Synizesis (117). 

6. Systole (συστολή, a drawing in) shortens a long vowel; and 
Diastole (διαστολή, a drawing out) lengthens a short one: as, ἑταῖρος 
Erapos, comrade, ξένος ξεῖνος, stranger. For Precession, see 107, 113s, 


VOWELS. — PRECESSION. § 106. 


MAD aoe LT 


VOWELS. 


106. The Greek has jive stmple vowels, and seven 
diphthongs. Each of the simple vowels may be 
either long or short, and each of the diphthongs 
may have eithér a long or short prepositive, or 
first vowel. 


a. Of three vowels, the short and long sounds are represented by 
the same letters (@, ἃ ; % τ; ὕ, 3); but of the other two, whose long 
sounds occur far more frequently, by different letters (ξ, 7; 6, 6). 

b. When speaking of letters, and not of sounds, we say that the 
Greek has seven vowels; and call ε and o the short vowels, because 
they always represent short sounds, ἡ and @ the long vowels, because 
they always represent long sounds, and a, «, and » the doubtful vow- 
els, because their form leaves it doubtful whether the sound is long 
or short. ; 


107. There is strong evidence, that, in general, these vowels 
were pronounced nearly as follows: a like @ in far, fast (not as in 
fate); ἡ, ε, like e in they, then (not as in mete); αὶ like ὁ in machine, 
pin (not as in pine); ὦ, o, like o in note, obey; υ like win rule, full 
(afterwards becoming closer, more like w in tube, or the still closer 
French w or German ii). They may hence be thus placed upon a 
scale of precession or attenuation. 


tion by the ἐδ .ι Least 
Scale of attenuat a See pening, 
Entire 
Openness. ee are 
Scale of a4, ὃ ὦ Least - 
ttenyat; Η 
uation by the lips, if Opening. 


a. In general, t and vare termed the close,and the others the open vow- 
els ; but α is more open than ε and ο, and t is somewhat closer than νυ. 

b. There is a strong tendency, in the progress of language, towards the 
attenuation, or closer pronunciation, of the open, especially the long open 
vowels (99). This change would be represented on the scale above by ἃ 
moving forward of the vowel from the left to the right ; and hence has 
been called precession (preecessio, going forward). Thus the open a of the 
old Greek became ἡ in the refined Ionic ; and this again in the Modern 
Greek has passed (as also v, εἰ, ἢ, ot, and w) into the closer sound of t. 


ΕΘ; ‘DIPHTHONGS. SYLLABICATION. 129 


108. In the Greek diphthongs, the voice always passes 
from a more open to a closer sound ; and the subjunctive, or 
last vowel, is always ¢ or v. δ + ta 


a. <A short prepositive left time for the full utterance of the subjunc- 
tive vowel, and the diphthong was then termed proper, as really combin- 
ing two sounds ; but a dong prepositive nearly or quite crowded out the 
sound of the subjunctive, and the diphthong was then termed improper, 
as though diphthongal only in appearance. 


109. After a long, 7, and w, the subjunctive « so lost its 
sound, that it was at last merely written beneath the pre- 
positive, if this was a small letter, and was then termed Jota 
subscript (subscriptus, written beneath). With capitals, it still 
remains in the line, but is not sounded. It is not represented 
in Latin, except that, in a few compounds of ὠδή, » becomes e@. 
Thus, ““Acdns or ἅδης Hadés, Θρῇσσα Thressa, “He or 9, where, 
*O5n or ὠδή Gd, song ; but τραγῳδία tragoedia, tragedy. 

a. Editors vary in the use of thet subscript, from different views of ety- 
mology, &c. : as, contract infinitive τιμᾶν or τιμᾷν, adverbial datives ὅπῃ 


or ὅπη, ᾿Αθήνῃσι or ᾿Αθήνησι. So some have improperly written épyva, 
πέφῃνα (40, as if made directly from φαίνω, instead of the root φαν-), &c. 


110. In diphthongs, except the three just mentioned (a, ῃ; 
and @), the breathings and accents are written over the second 
vowel, and thus often mark the union of the two vowels : as, 
αὐτή herself, but dirty cry ; ηὔδα he spoke, but ἤῦσε he shouted ; 
Αἵμων (4) Heemon, but “Ardys (a). 

a. If two vowels which might form a diphthong are pronounced sep- 
arately, the second is commonly marked, as above, with a dizresis ; 
though the place of a breathing, accent, or t often renders this needless, 
and it is then omitted by some : as in dur, ix OK, ληιζοίμην (109). 

b. In the table (4), the vowels, simple and compound, are divided into 
classes, according to the simple sound which is their sole or leading ele- 
ment, as 4 sounds, &c. ; and into orders, according to the length of this 
sound, or its combination with other sounds, as short vowels, ὅθ. Vow- 
els of the same class are termed cognate ; and those of the same order, co- 
ordinate. 


111. Syitasication. In Greek, a word has as many syl- 
lables as it has simple vowels or diphthongs: ποιέεαι has 
four. : 


a. The last syllable in a word is termed the wltima (ultimus, Zast) ; the 

last but one, the penultima or penult (pene, almost) ; and the last but 
two, the antepenultima or antepenult (ante, before). 
_ b. In the syllabication of a word, any consonant between two vowels 
is now joined by most editors with the latter ; and so even two or more 
consonants, — unless the first is a liquid, or the same with the second, or 
a smooth mute before its cognate rough, when it is joined with the former 
vowel (except in the case of pw) : as, ἐ-ψη-φί-σμε-θα, ἀ-στρά-πτω, ἐ-μνή- 
σθην - but ἔρ-γον, ἄν-τρον, ἄγ-χι (137 c), ἵππος, τάσ-σω, Bax-xos. 

ce. Words joined by crasis or elision are here regarded as a single word : 

COMP. GR. 6* I 


130 EUPHONIC CHANGES. — PRECESSION. § 111. 


as, ἀλ-λ᾽ of-5° ὅ-τι " so, in composition, ἐ-πά-νειμι (ἐπί, ἀνά, εἶμι). But the 
elements of a compound word not so joined are here treated as separate 
words : as, συν-είσ-ειμι. : 

112. A vowel preceded by a consonant is said to be zmpure 
(impirus, mixed, sc. with the consonant sound) ; otherwise, it 
is said to be’ pure. 

a. The same distinction is made in affixes beginning with a vowel ; 
and even the word itself and its stem are termed pure or impure, accord- 
ing as these affixes are preceded by a vowel or consonant. Thus, in συός 
(14) the o and affix os are pure, and the same term, by an extension of its 


use, is applied to the word and its stem ov-; while in γυπός (17) the o and 
os are impure, and the word itself and its stem γυπ- are so termed. 


113. The Greek vowels are subject to a great 
number of EKupnHonic CHANGES, which may be 
referred, for the most part, to two great heads, 
the PRECESSION OF VOWELS, and the UNION oF 
SYLLABLES. 


I, PRECESSION OF VOWELS. 


114. The great tendency in Greek to the 
attenuation of vowel sounds shows itself, 
1.) In the interchange of vowels. 


a. Precession especially affects a, as the most open of the 
vowels, changing it, when short, to ε and o; and, when long, 
to n, and sometimes to oa. 


b. Hence, these three vowels may be regarded as kindred, and are 
often interchanged in the formation and inflection of words. Thus, in the 
verbs τρέπω to turn, στρέφω to twist, we find the stem in three forms, 
τραπ- τρεπ- τροπ-, στραφ- στρεφ- στροφ-, as in the Eng. speak, spake, 
spoken, or in the equivalent Germ., where precession is carried still 
further, spreche, spricht, sprach, gesprochen ; and in ῥήγνῦμι to break, we 
find the forms ῥαγ- ῥηγ- pwy- (cf. frango, fregi). The change extends to 
diphthongs: thus, in πείθω to persuade, the forms πειθ- and ποιθ- ; 
σπεύδω to hasten, σπουδή haste ; μεσόγαια and μεσόγεια, interior. 

ce. This interchange is also illustrated by the connecting vowels in- 
serted in the inflection of words. Thus, in Dec. 1, the connecting vowel 
is a, but in Dec. 2, ο, for which in one case € appears (12). In the In- 
dicative active, the connecting vowel in the Aorist and Perfect is a (pass- 
ing, however, into ¢ in the 3d pers. sing. ; compare the Imperative λῦσον) ; 
while in the Present, Imperfect, and Future, it is o before a liquid, but 
otherwise €. So, in the Aor. optative, we find both at and ea. See 35. 


ἃ. The change of ε to the closer « abounds. especially in 
stems of the third declension : as, πολε- πόλις, city. Cf. ἥκω 
and poet. “tke, to come. The use of v for o or ὦ is especially 
LKolic : as, ὄνομα dvupa, name, χελώνη χελύνη, tortorse. 


§ 118. UNION OF SYLLABLES, — CONTRACTION. 131 


115. 2.) In the lengthening of the short 
vowels, and in the general laws of contraction. 
Thus, 


a. The long vowel is regarded as the short vowel doubled; that 
is, ἃ, ἡ; ὦ, U, t == Gd, €€, 00, ὕὔ, tt. In the formation of words, there- 
fore, the lengthening of a short vowel, or the union of two short 
vowels of the same class, should produce the cognate long. The 
close vowels obey this law: as, Χεῖος Χῖος, a Chian, payad(it)t vii. 3. 
32, (ὐὐγύβρικα, I have insulted. Cf. Lat. otii oti, curruum currim. 
But through precession, which especially affects the long open vow- 
els, d, unless it follows_e, ἐς p, or po, is usually lengthened, not to ἃ, 
but to the closer ἡ; and ee and oo commonly form, not ἡ and a, but 
the closer diphthongs e and ov, which are hence termed the corre- 
sponding diphthongs of e ando. Of. Lat. amaam amem (43). 


116. In Latin inflection, through precession and the interchange 
of kindred vowels, 6 takes extensively the place of a; 7 of €, ει, 0, οι, at, 
and even a; and wv of o and w; and they are often similarly contracted. 
This must be kept in mind, in comparing affixes and contractions. Thus, 
“as -es, τος -is, των -um, Dec. 3; -ats -is, Dec. 1 ; τοι -i, τοις -is, -o¢ -us, 
τον um, Dec. 2; and in verbs, -εἰς, -εἰ (Boeot. -ἰς, -t), -is, -it, - 9 (Dor. 
oes) -imus, -ere -itis, -erae -itur, -ovrat -untur, -a (in Perf. and Aor.) -i, 
-ag@a -isti. See 13, 36. 


II. UNION OF SYLLABLES. 


117. The most important changes belonging 
to this head are, A. ContTrRAcTION, which unites 
two successive vowels in the same word; B. Cra- 
SIS (κρᾶσις, nungling), which unites the jinal and 
imtial vowels of successive and closely connected 
words; and C. AposTRoPHE or ELIsIoN, which 
simply drops a final vowel before a word begin- 
ning with a vowel. 


a. All these forms may occur in the composition of words. 

b. In poetry, two vowels are often united in pronunciation, which are 
written separately. This union is termed synizésis (συνίζησις, placing to- 
gether), or synecphonésis (συνεκφώνησις, pronouncing together). Here, the 
first vowel (which may have commonly had a kind of semivowel force, 
like our y and w) is in most instances an EH vowel ; more rarely 1, a, 
oe 4s g. (using a mark employed by grammarians) πόλτως (as if pron. 
polyos). 


A. ConrTrRAcTIon. 


118. Contraction takes place in three ways; (a) by semple 
union, When + or v simply unites with the preceding vowel to 


132 VOWELS. — RULES OF CONTRACTION. - “$418. 


form a diphthong, as οἵ 0; (Ὁ) by union with precession, when 
the second vowel passes into ὁ or v, and then forms a diph- 
thong with the preceding, as ce εἰ, 00 ov ; and (0) by absorption, 
when one vowel is simply lost in the other, which, if before 
short, now of course becomes long (including the case in which 
both vowels are of the same class, 115 a), as ea η, 0a @, ἄδ a. 


d. In the-following general rules, a, ε, and ἢ are regarded as including 
the cognate diphthongs int. For the mode of writing t, when contracted 
with a long, ἢ; or ὦ, or absorbed in these, see 109. 

e. In the examples below, and in others similarly printed, the letters 
or syllables which receiye the change are inclosed in parentheses, and the 
result of the change follows in full-face type ; so that, in reading the forms 
of the word before and after the change, we first omit the full-face letters, 
and then the letters in the parentheses ; thus, /(di)@oros is an abridged 
mode of representing that ‘‘ δὶ becomes q, as ῥάϊστος ῥᾷστος." 


119. GENERAL Ruues. I. Two vowels which 
can form a diphthong unite without further 
change: as, ; 

yev(et)a, ax(di)ot (19); plai)aoros easiest, Oplhi)qooa, λ(ώϊγ)ῷστος 


best, véx(vt)ui (Epic), γήρ(ζτγαι (so Thiersch, Bekker, Kiihner in his latest 
grammar, &c., while others have written γήρᾳ, as if « were absorbed). 


120. 11. (a) a, before an # sound (ὃ 4), absorbs 
it; but, (b) after an / or another A sound, is it- 
self absorbed. (c) a, or (d) η, with an O sound, 


forms ὦ. ‘Thus, 

(a) τίμ(αε)ᾶ, τιμ(ἀει)ᾷ, τιμίἀηγᾶτε, τιμ(άγγᾷ, (42) 5 (Ὁ) γέν(εαγη, γέρ(αα)ᾶ 
(19), λύ(εα)ῃ, λύ(ηα)ῃ (37); (Cc) τιμ(άογῶμεν, τιμ(άω)ω, τιμ(άοι)ῷ, 
Tiu(dov)@ (42), ἠχ(όα)ώ, ἥρ(ωα)γω (19), (οὐα)ὠτός (17; while, in the 
Nom. sing., οὖας becomes οὖς by an absorption of the a, or by precession 
from the Dor. ὧς) ; (4) δηλ(όηγῶτε (42), διδ(ὀῃγῷ (45), ν(ηογωδός toothless. 
Cf: Lat. lyr(4é)@, am(aé)dre, am(ao)o, c(6a)6go, am(ai)dte (116). 

e. In Dec. 1, and the plural and dual of the common Dec. 2, contrac- 
tion imitates the forms of uncontracted words ; but in the Attic Dec. 2 
(200), it has throughout : as, χρυσ(έα)ῆ and διπλ(όη)ῆ, -ἣς; -ἢ, τῆν, -at, 
&c. (23; ef. φδή, 15) ; da7(éa)a (16) ; ἀγήρ(αα)γω (22). 

f. After a vowel, ea commonly becomes a ; as Πειραι(έα)ᾶ (220 6), Ἥρα- 
κλέ(εαγᾶ (19) ; but adjectives in -ufs and -vfs vary in the neuter pl. : as, 
from ὑγιής sound, εὐφυής clever, ὑγι(έαγᾶ and -ἢ, εὐφυ(έα)ᾶ and -ῆ. 

g. In the purer Attic, ἡ takes the place of & in the contract forms of 
four every-day verbs: rewdw to hunger, διψάω to thirst, xpdw to supply 
need, and fdw to live: as, πειν(άει)ῆ, χρ(ἀεγῆσθαι. Add κνάω to scratch, 
oudw to smear, and ψάω to rub. 

h. In the liquid Aorist, and in the Subjunctive and Imperative of 
verbs in -pt, ae and ay commonly become ἢ, unless + or p precedes : as, 
ἔφηνα, émidva (152) ; ἱστ(ἀῃγῇ, δρ(άῃγᾷ, ἵστ(αεγη (45). 

i. When a long is contracted with an O sound, there is usually inserted 
before the ὦ an ¢, which, however, is not treated in the accentuation as a 
distinct syllable (cf. 117 b) : as, vads (vws) νεώς (16), ᾿Ατρείδ(ἀο)εω (197 c). 
So sometimes, chiefly in the Ion. (135 a, 322), when the a is short. ᾿ 


8124, CRASIS. 133 


121. III. (a) ce becomes εὐ. (b) ¢ or o, with o, 
forms ov; but (c) with other O sounds is absorbed. 
(d) In other combinations not already given (119, 
120), ε 15. absorbed. Thus, 

(a) Pid(ee)er, φιλ(έει)εῖ (42), πόλ(εεε)εις (19), KA(EZes)ets (207) ; (Ὁ) de 
λ(έογοῦμαι, δήλ(οε)ου (42), ᾿Οπ(όεις)οῦς (17), v(dos)ous (16) ; (0) φιλ(έω)ῷ, 
φιλ(έοι)οῖ, φιλ(έουγοῦ, SyX(dw)@, δηλ(όοι)οι, δηλ(όουγοῦ (42), ὀστ(έφ)ῳ, 
ν(όφγῷ (16) ; (d) φιλ(ἐηγῆτε, φιλ(ἐῃγῇ (42), τιμ(ἠειε)ῇς, τιμ(ενγὴν (207 οὐ, 
ixO(ve)d (19), (ἑαυγαὑτοῦ (27). : 

e. In the dual of Dec. 3, εε becomes ἢ : as, γέν(εε)η (19). So, in the 
older Attic writers, in the Nom. plur. of nouns in -evs: as, ἱππέες ἱππῆς 
(by some incorrectly written -7s, 109 ἃ) Th. 6. 68, instead of the common 
ἱππεῖς. Cf. Lat. reé ré, mon(éé)Zre. For (oe) w, see 258 ο. 

122. Sprctan Russ. 1. a, taking the place of » before σ 
(156) is contracted like ε: as, in the affixes of the Accusative 
pl., (-ovs -oas) -ous, (-avs -aas) -as (13; cf. Lat. -oms -ds, -ams 
-is). Hence, in Dec. 3, the contract Nom. and Acc. pl. agree 
in form: as, πόλεες and πόλεας πόλεις, ἰχθύες and ἰχθύας ἰχθὺς 
(19), μείζους (22) ; cf. Acc. βόας βοῦς, οἷας οἷς (19). So, in Lat., 
Nom. and Ace. pl. sues, fructus, res. See 150. 


a. By a similar contraction with βόας βοῦς, we find also νᾶας ναῦς (19), 
‘ypdas γραῦς ; and in late writers, even Nom. pl. vais. For xoéds χοᾶς, 
see 220 e. 

123. 2. In a few cases, the first vowel of a diphthong in ¢ 
is absorbed, and the ¢ retained. Thus, (a) in verbs in -όω (not 
-ωμι), oe and on become ot: as, δηλόει δηλοῖ, δηλόῃ δηλοῖ (42). 
(Ὁ) In the 2d pers. sing., the affix -eae becomes not only -y 
(120 Ὁ), but, as a special Attic form, -εὸ : as, λύεαε Ady and 
λύει (37). (c) In a very few roots, aes becomes at, as ἀεικής 
αἰκής, unseemly. 

ἃ. For special contractions in the affixes of declension, see 7, 13 ; in 
the augment and reduplication, 7, 278 s. 

e. REMARK. Contraction is omitted in many words in which it might 
take place according to the preceding rules, particularly in nouns of the 
third declension, and in dissyllabic verbs in -έω ; and other forms of con- 
traction occur in the dialects, or rarely in the common language. 


B. Crasis. 


124. Crasis (1), for the most part, follows the 
laws of contraction, disregarding however an 
t final, which according to the best usage is not 
even subscribed. But often (2), without respect 
to these laws, a final, or (3) an initial vowel is 
entirely absorbed. 


134 VOWELS. —— CRASIS AND ELISION. δ 124, 


a. See examples below of these three forms, chiefly marked with cor- 
responding numbers. The first word, as the less important, is commonly 
most affected. Hence the rule above respecting v. 

b. Crasis prevails most in Attic poetry. It is commonly indicated (96) 
by the coronis ('), except when this mark is excluded by the rough 
breathing : as, τἀμά, οὑμοί. When an initial vowel has been simply ab- 
sorbed, the words are more frequently separated in writing: as, οἱ ᾽μοί. 
The same is sometimes done, when a final vowel has been absorbed. 
Hence, cases are often referred to apheresis and apostrophe, which prop- 
erly belong to crasis. For the change of a smooth mute to its cognate 
rough, when the second word is aspirated, see 161. For the accent, see 
Prosody, 773. 


125. The principal words in which the final vowel is sub- 
ject to crasis are the following : 

a.) The article ; in which (as in the particle roi, 126 y) the 
second form prevails before a: as, 

(1) ὁ ἐκ, becoming by crasis οὐκ " ὁ ἐπί, obi: of ἐμοί, obuol ὁ ὄρνις, οὕρνις " 
τῇ ἐμῇ, THUN. (2) ὁ ἀνήρ, ἁνήρ (less Att. ὡνήρ) " τῷ ἀνδρί, τἀνδρί > ἡ ἀρετή, 
apeTH* αἱ ἀγαθαί, ἀγαθαί τοῦ αὐτοῦ, ταὐτοῦ τοῦ ἡμετέρου, θἠμετέρου. (3) 
ὁ oivos, ᾧνος " οἱ ἐμοί, οἱ ᾽μοί - τοῦ ὕδατος, θοὔδατος. 

a. The neuter forms τό and τά are especially subject to crasis : as (1) 
τὸ ἐναντίον, τοὐναντίον " τὸ ἱμάτιον, θοὶμάτιον " τὸ ὕδωρ, Oovdwp* τὰ ὅπλα, 
θῶπλα. (2) τὸ ἀληθές, τἀληθές. (3) τὰ αἰσχρά, τᾷσχρά. 

b. In crasis with the article, ἕτερος, other, retains the old form ἅτερος : 
as, (2) ὁ ἕτερος, ἅτερος" τὸ ἕτερον, θἄτερον " τοῦ ἑτέρου, Odrépov. 

126. β.) The conjunction καί, and : as, 

(1) καὶ ἄν, κἄν " καὶ ἐν, κἀν " καὶ ἕτερος, χἄτερος " καὶ εἶτα, κᾷτα" καὶ ὁ, χὠ" 
καὶ οἱ, x@. (2) καὶ εἰ, xel- καὶ οὐ, κοὐ. (2, 8) καὶ ἡ ἄγχουσα, χἤγχουσα. 

γ.) The preposition πρό (chiefly in composition before ε and ὁ 
unaspirated) ; the interjection ὦ (especially before a); and a 
few other particles: as, 

προέδωκα προὔδωκα, mpdomros προῦπτος (é-, ὁπ-) " πρὸ ἔργου, προὔργου " 
ὦ ἀγαθέ, ὦ γαθέ: ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὦνθρωπε " ἤτοι ἄρα, ἠτᾶρα " μέντοι ἄν, μεντἄν " 
οὔτοι ἄρα, οὐτᾶρα - εἰ μὴ ἔχοιμι, εἰ μὴ Kou’ μὴ εὕρω, μὴ ὕρω. 

6.) Some forms of the pronouns : as, 

ἐγὼ οἶδα, ἐγῷδα " ἐγὼ οἶμαι, ἐγῷμαι " μοὶ ἐδόκει, μοὐδόκει " σοί ἐστιν, σοῦστιν" 
ὃ ἐφόρει, οὑφόρει" οὗ ἕνεκα, οὕνεκα " ὅτου ἕνεκα, ὁθοὔνεκα " ἃ ἄν, ἅν " ἃ ἐμέ, ἁμέ. 


C. ΑΡΟΞΤΈΟΡΗΕ, or ELIsIon. 


127. Apostrophe affects the short vowels 4, e, ¢, 
and o (in monosyllables only ε) ; and sometimes, 
in poetry, a in verbal affixes (chiefly passive) 
where it is treated as short in accentuation : as, 


τόδ᾽ ἔστ᾽ ἐκεῖν᾽ αἴνιγμ ὃ προσπόλου κλύω Eur. Hel. 788. Κλαύσετ᾽ dpa 
(κλαύσεται ἄρα) Ar. Th. 916. “Epxed’ ὡς (ἔρχεται, 161) Ib. 1178. Κολάσ᾽ 
ἔξεστι (κολάσαι, Inf. act.) Nub. 7. In Tragic dialogue, the elision of αι 
is rare: Λειφθήσομ ἤδη Soph. Ph. 1071. 


§ 130. DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 135 


a. For the sign of apostrophe (’), which has the same name with the 
figure, see 96. For the accentuation, see Prosody. 


128. Elision is most common, 
a. In the prepositions, and other particles of constant use : 


as, ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ (ἀπὸ, 161), ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνον, κατ᾽ ἐμέ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ, Gp’ οὖν, γ᾽ 
οὐδέν, μάλ᾽ ἄν, ὅθ᾽ ὁ (ὅτε δ), τάχ᾽ ἄν. So, in composition (where 
the sign’ is omitted), ἀνέρχομαι, διελαύνω, πάρειμι, ὅταν. 

b. In ἃ few pronouns, and in some phrases of frequent oc- 
currence : as, τοῦτ᾽ ἄλλο, ταῦτ᾽ ἤδη " γένοιτ᾽ ἄν, ἔσθ᾽ ὅπου (ἔστι), 
λέγοιμ᾽ ἄν, οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, φήμ᾽ ἐγώ. 


129. a. Elision is less frequent in t, than in the other short vowels 
above mentioned. Particularly, it is not elided by the Attics in περί, 
ἄχρι, μέχρι (8 164), or ὅτε (which might then be confounded with ὅτε) ; 
or, except rarely in poetry, in the Dat. sing., which might then be con- 
founded with the Acc. The forms which take v paragogic (163) are not 
elided in prose, except ἐστί" and in the Dat. pl., not even in Attic poetry. 

Ὁ. Elision is least frequent in Ionic prose. In Attic prose, it is found 
chiefly in a few words, but these often recurring. In poetry, where hiatus 
is more carefully avoided and the metre so governs, its use is far more ex- 
tended ; and here an especial freedom belongs to Comic and Epic verse. 

c. On some points in crasis and elision, critics differ. Thus, some 
regard the enclitics μοί, σοί, and τοί, and the possessive pronoun od, as 
affected by elision in Attic poetry ; but others, only by crasis. 

d. Both elision and the absorption of a vowel by crasis may occur at 
those minor punctuation-marks which the voice disregards ; and in poe- 
try, are sometimes permitted at the more important marks, even where 
the speaker is changed: as, νὴ Al’, ἔφη Mem. 2. 7. 43 ἥξω + ᾽πὶ τούτοις 
Eur. Rh. 157 ; τοὐπ᾽ ἔμ᾽. El. ὦ Id. Or. 1346. 


DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 


130. The dialectic variations in the vowels may be mostly 
referred to the heads of Precession, Union or RESOLUTION, 
QuANTITY, and INSERTION or OMISSION. 


I. Precession prevailed most in the soft Ionic, and least in 
the rough Doric and Aiolic ; while the Attic, which blended 
strength and refinement, held a middle place. E. g. 


a. Long a, for the most part, is retained in the Dor. and Mol., but in 
the Ion. passes into ἢ ; while the Att. preserves a mean: as, Dor. ‘duépa, 
Att. ἡμέραᾷ, Ion. ἡμέρη - Dor. δᾶμος, πᾶγά, wxirds, Att. and Ion. δῆμος, 
πηγή, ὠκύτης " Dor. and Att. σοφία, πρᾶγμα, Ion. σοφίη, πρῆγμα. So, 
even in diphthongs, Ion. νηῦς, γρηῦς, for ναῦς, γραῦς, and in Dat. pl. of 
Dec. 1, τῇσι, -ys, for -αἰσι, ταις. The use of long a produced, in great 
measure, the Dor. feature called πλατειασμός, broad pronunciation, which 
was imitated by the Attics in the lyric parts of their drama. 

b. Short α is retained by the Dor. and Aol. in some words, where, in 
the Att., it passes into €; and in some (particularly verbs in -éw) by the 
Att., where it becomes € in the Ion.. Thus, Dor. τρἄφω, φρᾶσί, ὅκα, ya, 
Att. τρέφω, φρεσί, bre, γέ - Att. dpdw, ἄρσην, Ion. dpéw, ἔρσην. 


. 


136 VOWELS. | § 130. 


ὃ. As the long of ε and o, or the contraction of εε and oo or o¢, the 
stricter Dor. prefers the long vowels ἢ and to the closer diphthongs a 
and ov; while, on the other hand, the Ion. is particularly fond of pro- 
tracting ε to ει, and o to ov or o. Thus, Dor. χήρ, δῶλος - Gen. of 
Dec. 2,. τῷ ὠρανῶ - Inf. εὑρῆν, ὑπνῶν - for χείρ, δοῦλος, τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, εὑρεῖν, 
ὑπνοῦν. Ion. ξεῖνος, μοῦνος, ποίη, for ξένος, μόνος, πόα. 

d. Other examples of precession or the interchange of kindred vowels 
(114) are the following ; in some of which, contrary to the general law of 
the dialects, the Ion. has a more open sound than the Att., or the Att. 
than the Dor. or Aol. : Att. ‘det, ᾿᾽δετός, ἑστίᾷ, θᾶκος, Ion. αἰεί, aierds, 
ἱστίη, θῶκος + Old Att. κάω, κλάω, Ion. and Com. καίω, κλαίω - Jon. τρά- 
πω, μέγαθος, μεσαμβρίη, ἀῤῥωδέω, Att. τρέπω, μέγεθος, μεσημβρία, ὀῤῥωδέω " 
Dor. and Ep. ai, Att. εὐ - Dor. θνάσκω, Ion. and Att. θνήσκω, Mol. θναί- 
oxw* Att. στρατός, ἑρπετόν, στόμα, Mol. στροτός, ὄρπετον, στύμα. 


131. IJ. Union or ΒΈΒΟΙΤΙΟΝ. A. The Contraction 
of vowels prevailed most in the vivacious Attic, and least in 
the luxurious Ionic. By the poets, it is often employed or 
omitted according to the demands of the metre. There are 
also dialectic differences in the mode of contraction, which, for 
the most part, may be explained by precession. LE. g. 


a. In contracting a with an O sound, the Dor. often prefers & to the 
closer ὦ ; in Dec. 1, regularly. Thus, Dor. *“Arpeldd, τἂν θυρᾶν (20 8), 
Ποτειδάν, πεινᾶντι, mparos, Mevédds, for ᾿Ατρείδου (uncontracted -do), τῶν 
θυρῶν (-dwyv), ἸΤοσειδῶν (-dwv), πεινῶντι (-dovrt), πρῶτος, Mevédews (-ἀο:). 

b. For the contraction of εε, and oo or οε, see 1806. With the Ionics 
and some of the Dorics, the favorite contraction of eo and εου is into εὖ, 
instead of ov. This use of ev for ov sometimes extends to cases where this 
diphthong results from a different contraction. Thus, φιλεῦμεν, φιλεῦ, 
ἐμεῦ, O€pevs, for φιλοῦμεν (-ἐομεν), φιλοῦ (-€ov), ἐμοῦ (-έο), θέρους (-€0s) + 
ἐδικαίευ, ἐδικαίευν, δικαιεῦσι, in Hdt. for ἐδικαίου (-οε), ἐδικαίουν (-οον). 

ο. The Dorics (but not Pindar), contrary to the general law of the dialect, 
commonly contract a with an # sound following, into ἢ : as, ἐρώτη, σιγῆν, 
λῇς, from épwrae, σιγάειν, λάῃς. Cf. 120g. 

d. In the contractions which follow the change of v before o (156), the 
Kol. often enrploys at and ov for Gand ov: as, Acc. pl. ταὶς τιμαίς, rols 
νόμοις, for Tas τιμάς, τοὺς νόμους - Nom. sing. of adj. and part. μέλαις, 
τύψαις, ἔχοισα, for μέλᾶς, τὐψᾶς, ἔχουσα + 3d pers. pl. of verbs, φαισί, 
κρύπτοισι, for φᾶσί, κρύπτουσι. The Dor. has here great variety, both 
employing the simple long vowels, the short vowels (as though v were 
simply dropped before o), the common diphthongs of contraction (122), 
and the Aol. diphthongs : thus, Acc. pl. τέχνᾶς and réxvds Theoc. 21.1; 
τοὺς λύκους and τὼς λύκος Theoc. 4. 11; εἷς and ἧς, one. 

e. The Ion. use of wv (written by some wv) for av in a few words, ap- 
pears, at least in some of them, to have arisen from a union of o and a to 
form ὦ : thus, for ταὐτό, ἐμαυτοῦ, Ion. τωὐτό, ἐμεωυτοῦ, from τὸ αὐτό, 
ἐμέο αὐτοῦ. Also Ion. θωῦμα, τρωῦμα (yet better τρῶμα), for θαῦμα, τραῦμα. 

f. The Ion. in a few cases employs contraction where the Att. omits it, 
particularly of oy into ὦ : as, ἱρός, ἔβωσα, for ἱερός, ἐβόησα. 


132. B. Vowels which appear only as diphthongs in the 
Attic are often RESOLVED in the other dialects, especially the 
Tonic and Aiolic, into separate sounds: as, εὖ, Ep. év, well. In 


Wainy 


§ 136 DIALECTIO VARIATIONS. i 


the Ionic, the resolution of εἰ, with ε prolonged, into ηΐ, is 
especially common: as, βασιληΐη, KAnis, for βασιλεία, κλ εἰς. 
a. The fondness of the Ion. for a concurrence of vowels leads it, in 


some cases, to change v to α (138) after a vowel (which, if previously a, 
now becomes €) : as, ᾿Αρισταγόρεα, ἐδυνέατο, for ᾿Αρισταγόραν, ἐδύναντο. 


133. C. In Crasis, the Doric and Ionic often differ from 
the Attic by uniting the o of the article with a and ae initial, to 
form and ῳ : as, τὸ ἀληθές, τὠληθές - οἱ αἰπόλοι, ᾧπόλοι. 

a. A few crases in Hom. and Hdt. are written by most editors with the 
coronis or the smootli breathing in place of the rough : as, ὁ ἄριστος, ὥρι- 
otros A. 288; ὁ αὐτός, wirds ΕἸ. 396; οἱ ἄλλοι, ὥλλοι 6 ἄνθρωπος, ὥνθρωπος. 

b. The concurrence of vowels in Hom. is often only apparent, as they 
were once separated by a Digamma; which, of course, forbade either con- 
traction, crasis, or elision. 

134. III. Quantity. For a short vowel in the Attic, the 
other dialects often employ a long vowel or diphthong, and the 
converse : as, lon. διπλήσιος for dumdaowos* Lon. εὐρέη, ἀπόδεξις, 
μέζων, ἕσσων, for εὐρεῖα, ἀπόδειξις, μείζων, ἥσσων + Dor. and Ep. 
ἕτἄρος for ἑταῖρος - 4120]. ᾿Αλκἄος, ἀρχἅος, for ᾿Αλκαῖος, ἀρχαῖος. 

a. The poets, especially the Epic, often lengthen or shorten a vowel 
according to the metre. A short vowel, when lengthened in Epic verse, 


usually passes into a cognate diphthong: as, εἰλήλουθας A. 202, wapat 
B. 711, πνοιή E. 697, εἰν a. 162, for ἐλήλυθας, παρά, πνοή, ἐν. 


135. IY. Appirion or Omission. Vowels are often em- 
ployed in one dialect which are omitted in another ; and here, 
as elsewhere, a peculiar freedom belongs to the poets, especial- 
ly the Epic. These often add or drop a vowel, and often 
double a vowel or insert the half of it (the short for the long), 
for the sake of the metre, particularly in contract verbs : as, 

évi and elvi.for ἐν " ἠλέ O. 128, for ἠλεέ B. 243 ; κρήηνον ἐέλδωρ, for 
κρῆνον ἔλδωρ, A. 41, φάανθεν, ἡβώωσα, ὁρόω, dpdas, γελώοντες, φόως, éé, 
ἐείκοσι, ἠέ, for φάνθεν, ἡβῶσα, ὁρῶ, ὁρᾷς, γελῶντες, φῶς, ἕ, εἴκοσι, ἤ. : 

a. The Jon. is especially fond of the insertion of €: as, Gen. pl. ἀν- 
δρέων, αὐτέων, for ἀνδρῶν, &c. ; 2 Aor. inf. εὑρέειν, for εὑρεῖν. 

b. The use of elision is extended in the dialects: as, in Hom., to the 
enclitics μοί, σοί, τοί, ῥά (by apheresis for dpa) ; to νυ in ὅτι and in the 
Dat., both sing. and pl. ; to the affix of declension -or in dée?’ ὀδύναι 
A. 272; and, as some think, to καί (χ᾽ ὁπόσα occurs Anac. 48. 7). 


136. In the Dor., Aol., and Ep., a particle often omits its 
final vowel before a consonant, with such assimilation of the 
preceding consonant as euphony may require: chiefly ἄρα, ἀνά, 
κατά, παρά, and ποτί " rarely ἀπό, ὑπό, and (in Aol.) wepi+ as, 

ἄρ σῴφωε, ἂμ βωμοῖσι, ἄγκρισις, ἀνστάς (166 a), κὰδ δύναμιν, Kaw φάλαρα 
(159 f), κὰκ κεφαλῆς, Kay γόνυ, κακχεῦϑαι, κὰρ ῥόον, κάλλιπον, καμμίξας, πὰρ 
Φηνί, wor τόν, ἀππέμψει, ὑββάλλενν, πὲρ σῶ. 

a. When three consonants are thus brought together, the first is some- 
times rejected ; as, κάκτανε, ἀμνάσει, for κάκκτανε, ἀμμνάσει. 


138 "CONSONANTS. § 136. 


_ . In some of these words, the final vowel was probably a euphonic ad- 
dition to the original form (102). Compare ἀπό and ὑπό (which has also 
the poetic form ὑπαί) with the Lat. ab and sub. The old form zpér, in 
accordance with the rule (160), became πρός and mpori, whence the Dor. 
and Ep. sort. 

c. From the close connection of the preposition with the following 
word, these cases are not regarded as making any exception to the rule in 
160. Compare 165d. The two words are often written together, even 
when there is no composition : as, καδδύναμιν, ποττόν. 

d. Some of these forms even passed into the Att. and into Jon. prose : 
as, κατθάνῃς Kur. Or. 308, ἀμβατῶν Mem. 3. 3. 2, ἀμπαύονται Hdt. 1. 181. 


\ 


CHAPTER IV. 


CONSONANTS. 


137. The Greek has eighteen CONSONANTS, 
represented by seventeen letters. 3 


~ a. In § 4, these consonants are arranged in CLASSES according to the 
organs which give them their distinctive character, as LABIALS, or lip- 
consonants, PALATALS, or palate-consonants, and LINGUALS, or tongue- 
consonants. They are also arranged in ORDERS, according to the method 
in which they are made by these and assisting organs, as SMOOTH MUTES, 
made by a simple closure of the organs ; MIDDLE MUTES, so called as in- 
termediate between the smooth and rough ; ROUGH MUTES, or ASPIRATES, 
in which the breath is sent strongly through the organs partially closed ; 
SPIRANTS (spirans, breathing), similarly formed, but with the organs more 
open, — one of these specially called a sibilant, from its hissing sound ; 
DOUBLE CONSONANTS, or compound sibilants, so named as combining a 
mute and simple sibilant ; NASALS, in which the passage through the 
mouth is closed, and the voice is sent through the nose ; and FLUENTS 
(fluens, flowing), so named from their flowing so easily with other con- 
sonant sounds ; while the nasals and fluents, all flowing sounds of various 
kind and degree, are classed together as LIQUIDS ; and all the consonants, 
except the MuTES (dumb in comparison with the others), are called sEMI- 
VOWELS, as intermediate in vocality between the vowels and mutes. 

b. Consonants of the same class are termed cognate ; and those of the 
same order, co-ordinate. The classes are sometimes named from the let- 
ters standing at the head: as, the π᾿ class, &c. ; so, w, K, and τ mutes. 
Some use the term guttural instead of palatal, and dental instead of lin- 
gual. Euphonic, dialectic, and other interchanges of consonants are most 
frequent in cognates ; and then, in co-ordinates. 

ce. The letter y performs a double office. When followed by another 
palatal, it is a nasal ; otherwise, a middle mute. As a nasal it has for 
its corresponding Roman letter ; as a middle mute, g (92 8). 

d. The double consonants were formed by the union of a mute with σ᾽; 
in Ψ and € the mute preceding, and in { the ow: as, yums yu, Kopaxs 
κόραξ (17), Θήβασδε Θήβαζε, to Thebes. 


§ 142. OLD SEMIVOWELS. — 139 


138. The early Greek speech appears to have had four 
semivowels which were not yet as fixed in their character as 
the consonants afterwards became, and which had correspond- 
ing vowels into which they often passed when the later laws 
of euphony forbade their use: viz., 3, corresponding to ε :. Ν, 
corresponding to a; F, corresponding to v, as v in Latin and w 
in English to uw ; and a palatal spirant corresponding to 4, as 7 
in Latin and y in English to ὁ, yet partaking perhaps, some- 
what more than these consonants, of the nature of a sibilant. 

a. The last seems to have had no character distinct from that of the 
vowel t (cf. 98 a), just as in the old Latin alphabet ὁ and 7 were written 
alike, and wand v. It will here be distinguished, so far as this seems im- 

ortant, by the use of the capital I, which should then be pronounced nearly 
like the semivowel y, or ὁ in valiant. It may be distinguished, in speak- 
ing, as the consonant, spirant, or semivowel I. Capitals are also some- 
times used to distinguish other consonants in an early unfixed state. 


139. In the progress of the language, these old semivowels 
met with various fortunes : 


1.) They became fixed as consonants: the old 3 as o (Lat. s ; yet 
in Lat. formation extensively represented by 7); the old N as ν 
(often in Lat. as m, which, however, ecthlipsis shows to have been 
a very weak consonant); F, especially in the older or less refined 
dialects, as β or Φ (in Lat. as v, f, or b; sometimes also in Eng. as 
10}: as, σῦς Sus, SWINE (cf. 141), λύραν lyram, LYRE, βρόδων Lol. for 
ῥόδων, of RosEs, Sap. 69 [19]. 

a. Cf. βούλομαι volo, to WILL, its and Bia vis, force, Bidw vivo, to live, 
φέρω fero, to BEAR, φάναι fari, to say, pap fur, thief. 


140. 2.) They were.simply dropped: as, between two vowels, 
F regularly, = often, and N and I sometimes: as, @rov ὧόν ovum, 
egg, Boras βόας boves, yeveros γένεος generis, Avera λύεαι lueris or 
luere, ἐλάσω ἐλάω, μείζονα μειζοα, πλείων πλέων More. 

a. So τ ἴῃ ἃ few, and δ in many words, of Dec. 8. See 207, 217. 

b. The two vowels were then often contracted : as, βοῦς, γένους (19), 
λύῃ or λύει (37), ἐλῶ (42), μείζω (22). 

141. 3.) They were changed into common breathings. So, be- 
fore an initial vowel, F regularly, and Σ in some words: as, ἕεσπερα 
ἑσπέρα Vespera, evening, Fie ἴδειν video, to see, Fowvos οἶνος vinum, 
WINE, Feap ἔαρ ver, Spring ; ais and ὗς sus, SWINE, σίστημι ἵστημι Sisto, 
to STAND, ἕξ SCX, SIX, ἑπτά septem, SEVEN, ἅλς sal, SALT, ὑπέρ super, 
over. Also F before initial p: as, Fpyyvupe ῥήγνῦμι frango, to BREAK. 

142. 4.) They were changed into their corresponding vowels, 
So F regularly, except as above; and the others in many forma- 
tions: as, vars ναῦς navis, ship, Bor Bod (19); γυπν γῦπα (160 e) ; 
φανσὼω φανέω φανῶ (152); ἡδίων ἡδίων, πλείων πλείων (260 s). 

a. Here contraction often takes place, as in most of the examples 
above ; and, after a liquid, ε and t are sometimes transposed and con- 
tracted with the preceding vowel: as, #yyedoa ἤγγειλα (152 b), pyrops 
ῥήτωρ (153) ; χερίων χείρων, ἀμενίων ἀμείνων (261), wedavla μέλαινα (233). 


140 CONSONANTS. — LIQUIDS. § 143. 


143. The PALATAL SPIRANT, or consonant I, with a con- 
sonant preceding, received yet other changes : thus, 


a.) With A, it was assimilated: as, μαλῖον μᾶλλον more. Cf. Lat. 
melius; and also ἄλλος alius, other, ἅλλομαι salio, to leap. 

Ὁ.) It united with τ to form o or ov: as, παντῖα πανσα πᾶσα (233), 
πλουτῖος πλούσιος rich, ἀθανασία (from ἀθάνατος) immortality. Hence, 
we often find σ᾽ for r before ε. 

c.) It united with a palatal or lingual mute (or, rarely, with a la- 
bial mute or a double palatal) to form oo (in later Attic rr) or ¢: as, 
ἡκίων ἥσσων ΟΥ ἥττων, Taylw τάσσω, κορυθίω κορύσσω, πεπίω πέσσω, 


ἀγχῖον ἄσσον " ὀλιγίων ὀλίζων, ἐλπιδίω ἐλπίζω. See 233, 261 Ὁ, 349. 
144, Liqus, from their flowing, semivowel character, 
often affect or are affected by adjoining vowels : 


1. Syncope. In some stems, the adjoining vowel is syncopated : 
as, μητέρος μητρός (210), power μίμνω to remain, ἤλυθον ἦλθον 1 came, 


. kekaAnka κέκληκα I have called. See also 140 for the syncope of tne 


liquid. 

1445. 2. Metathesis. In some cases, a liquid is transposed with 
a vowel, which is then often contracted with another vowel, or 
otherwise changed. In some of these, the liquid is evidently fleeing 
from combination with a following consonant. Thus, θάρσος θράσος 
boldness, βέβληκα (stem βαλ- Bra-) I have thrown. See also 142 ἃ. 


a. In the Dat. pl. of syncopated liquids of Dec. 3, and of ἀστήρ star, 
€ is transposed with p or v, and changed to a: as, πατερσι πατράσι (18). 


146. 3. Epenthesis, &c. a. When a simple vowel is brought by 
inflection or composition before an initial p, a smooth p is inserted : 
as, ἔῤῥωσα, ἄῤῥωστος, ἐπιῤῥώννῦμι, from ῥώννῦμι to strengthen (ἐ-, ἀ-) 
and ἐπί prefixed) ; but εὔρωστος (the diphthong εὖ prefixed). 

b. When, by syncope or metathesis, a nasal is brought before ἃ 
or p, the cognate middle mute is inserted or substituted: as, ἀνέρος 
(dvpos) ἀνδρός (18), μεσημερια μεσημβρία midday; Brooke (8. μολ- 
μλο- βλο-) to go, βροτός (8. μορτ- μροτ- βροτ-) mortalis, MORTAL. 


147. The following laws, mostly euphonic, are 
observed in the formation and connection. of 
words. | 


A. In tue Formation or Worps. 


I. Before a LINGUAL MUTE, a ζαδιαΐ or palatal 
mute becomes co-ordinate (137b); and a dngual 


mute, o: as, 

τέτρι(βτγπται, τέτα(γτγκται, πέπει(θτ)σται, κομι(δτ)στός (39); γρα- 
(φτὴ)πτός written, τυ(χτὴκ τός made, ψεύ(δτ)στης liar ; ἕ(πδ)βδομος seventh, 
ὄ(κδγγδοος eighth, γρά(φδ)βδην, βρύ(χδγγδην - ἐτρί(βθγφθην, ἐτά(γθγχθην, 
ἐπεί(θθγσθην, ἐκομί(δθ)σθην (39) ; ἐδεί(κθγχθην (45), ἐλεί(πθγ)φθην, ὠνομά- 
(τθησθην. Cf. Lat. scri(bt)ptus, re(gt)ctus, tra(ht)ctus, οἱαπ(α {) strum. 


- $152. EUPHONIC CHANGES. 14] 


: 4. Two agent mutes may remain together, if both belong to the stem : 
as, τάττω to arrange, ‘Aris Attic. 


148. II. Before μ, a labial mute becomes yp; 
a palatal mute, y; and a lingual mute, «: as, 


τέτρι(βμ)μμαι, πέπει(θμ)σμαι, κεκόμι(δμ)σμιαι (39) ; δέδει(κμγγμαι (45) ; 
ellen) ppa letter, τέτυ(χμ)γμαι, ὠνόμα(τμ)σμαι. Cf. Lat. se(em)gmen. 
a. If two p’s or two y's are thus brought before p, one of them is 


dropped : as, πέπείμπμ, μμμ)μμοαι, ἐλήχείγχμ; vye)ypae (41). 

b. This rule has exceptions, when the p does not belong to an affix of 
inflection, as ἀκμή point, ACME, δραχμή drachma, drachm, ἀτμός vapor, 
ῥυθμός rhythm ; and in the dialects, even when it does so belong, as in 
Hom. ἔδμεν we know, ἐπέπιθμεν, κεκορυθμένος, ἀκαχμένος. 


149. III. Before the ζοηβοιϑίῃῃ x, a labial or 
palatal mute unites with it in the cognate rough, and 
a lingual mute is dropped :. as, 


rérpu(Bxa)pa, τέτα(γκαγχα, πέπει(θκαγκα, κεκόμι(δκαγκα (39); δέδει- 
(κκα)χα (45), κέκο(πκα)γφα, γέγρα(φκα)φα, δεδίδα(χκαγχα, ὠνόμα(τκαγκα. 


150. IV. ν, before ἃ (a) labial or (b) palatal, is 
changed into the cognate nasal (4, 137 b); and (c) 
before a liquid, is assimilated (104 a): as, 


(a) συ(νπ)μπάσχω, ἐ(νβ)μβάλλω, συ(νφ)μφέρω, ἐ(νμ)μμένω, ἔ(νψ)μψῦχος - 
(Ὁ) ἐ(νκ)γκαλέω, συ(νγ)γγενής, συ(νχ)γχαίρω, ἐ(νξγγξέω - (0) ἔ(νλ)λλογος, 
συ(νργῤῥάπτω. Cf. Lat. i(up)mpello, imbibo, co(nl)l/oco, corrumpo. 

d. Before p in the Perfect passive, v commonly becomes σ᾽ or is 
omitted: as, mépa(vu)opar (40), κέκλιμαι (Pf. of κλίνω to bend). 

6. Before « in the Perfect active, ν was commonly omitted, or the form 
avoided, except by later writers: as, κέκρικα (Pf. of κρένω to judge) ; ; wépay- 
κα, Dinarch. 92. 4. 

f. In applying Rule IYV., enclitics are regarded as distinct words: 
thus, ὅνπερ, rérvye. 


151. V. Wo consonant should stand before o, ex- 
cept o itself This principle, from the great use 
of σ in formation, requires many changes: 


1,) Before o, a labial or palatal mute unites with it in the 
cognate double consonant ; and a lingual mute is dropped : as, 
γύ(πεο)ψ, GBs, xbpa(«s)&, al(ys)E, Opt(xs)—, cwua(rovor, ἐλπί(δεο)ς, 
κὀρυ(θοὺὴς (17) ; γρά(φσωγψω. Cf. Lat. du(cs)x, re(ys)z, ar(ts)s, lapi(ds)s. 
a. It will be seen that some of these changes are simply orthographic. 
152. 2.) In the Future and Aorist of quid verbs, the 
tense-sign σ is changed into e ; which (a) in the future is con- 
tracted with the following vowel, but (Ὁ) in the Aorcsé is trans- 
posed and contracted with the preceding vowel. See 142a. 


Thus, in the Fut. and Aor. of ἀγγέλλω fo announce, νέμω to distribute, 
κρίνῳ to judge, πλύνω to wash, and dépw to flay, — 


142 CONSONANTS. ὃ 152. 


(a) ἀγγελίσω, ἐω)ῶ, νεμίσω, ἐω)ῶ, κρινίσω, ἐω)ῶ, πλυνίσω, ἐωγῶ, δερίσω, ἐωγῶ " 
(0) ἤγγ(ελσα, εελα)ειλα, ἔνί(εμσα, ceua)epa, ἔκρ(σα, ιενα)γῖνα, ἔπλ(υνσα, veva) 
ὕνα, ἔδί(ερσα, εερα)ειρα. 

c. Here ae commonly passes into ἢ, unless t or p precedes (120h) : as, 
φαίνω to show, σφάλλω to trip, πιαίνω to fatten, περαίνω to complete (5. φαν-, 
opah-, miav-, mepay-); Aor. ἔφηνα (not ἔφῃνα, 109 a), ἔσφηλα, éridva, 
érépava. But ἰσχναίνω to make lean, κερδαίνω to gain, κοιλαίνω to hollow 
out, λευκαίνω to whiten, dpyaivw, to enrage, πεπαίνω to ripen, αἴρω to raise, 
and ἅλλομαι to leap, have here ἃ (in the two last becoming 1) in the Ind. 
through the augment: ἦρα, Subj. "ἄρω) ; τετραίνω, to bore, has ἢ ; and 
σημαίνω to give a signal, μιαίνω to stain, and καθαίρω to purify, both 4 
and & The use of ἃ in the liquid Aor. increased in the later Greek. 

d. A few poetic verbs retain the old forms with σ᾽ : as, κέλλω to land, 
κύρω to meet, ὄρνῦμι to rouse, φύρω to knead, F. and A. κέλσω, ἔκελσα, 
ὄρσω, ὦρσα, &c. Add these forms, mostly from Hom., ἦρσα, ἔλσα, ἔρσα, 
θέρσομαι, κέρσω, Exepoa, διαφθέρσω, ἤερσα. 

153. 3.) In the Nominative, the affix -s after p, and some- 
times after ν, is transposed as e, and absorbed (118 6) by the 
preceding vowel : as, 

᾿ W(aps, aep)ap starling ; πατίερς, εεργήρ, ῥήτ(ορς, oep)wp (18) ; παιίανς, 
αενγὰν pwan; λιμίενς, εενγ)ήν, δαίμ(ονς, οενγών (18). Cf. Lat. fu(rs)r, 
pate(rs)r, orato(rs)r ; lie(us)n, deemo(ns)n. 

a. Except in δάμαρ wife, where o is simply dropped., 

154. 4.) In liquids of Dec. 3, » is simply dropped before 
-σι in the Dative plural ; as, 

μέλα(σωσι (23) ; λιμέ(ζνσ᾽) σι, Saluo(var)or, ῥιζνσ) σί (18). For the Dat. 
pl. of syncopated liquids and ἀστήρ, see 145 a. 

155. 5.) In adjectives (not participles) in εἰς, ν becomes o 
before σ᾽ in the feminine, and is simply dropped before σὲ in the 
Dat. pl. : as, χαριενσα χαρίεσσα, χαριεντσι χαρίεσι (23). 

156. 6.) Otherwise, ν before o is changed into a, which is 
then contracted with the preceding vowel (142, 122) : as, 

Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fem., and Dat. Pl. μέλ(ανς, aas)as, πίαντς, 
avs, 151. 1, aas)as, πίανσα, 233, αασα)γᾶσα, πίαντσι, ανσι, αασι)ᾶσι (23) ; 
O(evrs, evs, eas)els, θίενσα, eaca)etoa, θ(εντσι)εῖσι, S(ovrs)ovs, δ(ονσα)οῦσα, 
δ(οντσι)οῦσι, δ(υντεο)ύς, δῦσα, δῦσι (26) ; /(ws)pts (18): Verbs in 3d Pers. Pl. 
lor (avo, αασι)ᾶσι, τιθ(ενσι)έᾶσι τιθεῖσι, διδ(ονσι)όᾶσι διδοῦσι, δεικν(υνσι)ύα- 
σι δεικνῦσι, (νσι)ᾶσι (45): Fut. σπίενδσω, cacw)elow, πίενθσ, εασ)είσομαι. 

a. The forms τιθέασι, διδόῶσι, and δεικνύῶσι were used by the Attics for 
the most part, and ἔῶσι uniformly, without contraction. 

Ὁ. In nouns, if v@ precede o, the v is retained: as, (ἑλμινθςὺὴ ἕλμως 
worm, ἕλμι(νθσι)νσι (yet others, ἕλμῖσι). It is also retained in some 
forms in -oat and derivatives in -ots, from verbs in -vw, as πέφανσαι from 
φαίνω (40), ἅδρυνσις from ἁδρύνω to ripen. Add the Homeric κένσαι, Ψ. 
337. Tor ἐν, σύν, πάλιν, and πᾶν, see 166. 

157. 7.) In cases not mentioned above, the combinations 
Ao and pe were permitted to stand ; except as o radical after p 
was softened in the later Attic to p: as, dAs SALT, sea; ἄρσην 
male, θάρσος boldness, New Att. ἄῤῥην, θάῤῥος. 


§ 160. EUPHONIC CHANGES. 143 


158. VI. Between two consonants, o m/flective 
is dropped, and ν is changed to a (102): as, 
τετρί(βσθ)ῷθαι, τέτριφθε, τετά(γσθγχϑαι (39, 147) ; ἐφθά(ρντγραται (142). 
This rule applies to cases where the first consonant is not removed by pre- 
vious rules. 


159. VII. If rough mutes begin two successive 
syllables, the jirst is often changed into its cog- 
nate smooth, especially (a) mm redupleations, or (b) 
when both letters are radical ; but (6) in the sec- 
ond person singular of the Aorist imperative passive, 
the second rough mute is changed: as, : 


(a) (φεφ)πεφίληκα (42) ; (χεχ)κέχρημαι - (θεθγτέθυκα (44) ; (θιθγτίθημι 
(45); (Ὁ) (θριχ)γτρυχός (17); (θαχ)ταχύς swift, (θρεχγτρέχω to run, 
(Oped)tpépw to nourish ; (c) λύ(θηθηθητι (37). 

ἃ. So ἀμπέχω (ἀμφὶ ἔχω) to cover: and in Aor. pass., ἐτέθην (45), érv- 
θην (44) ; but here in most words the aspiration remains, as even ἐθρέφθην. 

6. Upon the same principle, ἔχω becomes ἔχω" and whenever ἡ is 
reduplicated, the first becomes smooth, and, as it then cannot stand at 
the beginning of a word (93d), is transposed : as, pépipa ἔῤῥιφα. Yet 
we find, by a softening of the second p, ῥερυπωμένα §. 59. 

f. So, to avoid excessive aspiration, a rough mute is never preceded by 
the same rough mute, but, instead of it, by the cognate smooth : as, 
Σαπῴώ Sappho, Βάκχος Bacchus, ᾿Ατθίς (147 a) ; and, upon the same 
principle, Πύῤῥος (93d). See also the Epic κὰπ φάλαρα, κακχεῦαι (136). 

g. Aspiration is sometimes transferred : as, παθσκω πάσχω to suffer. 


160. VIII. The semivowels ν, p, and s are the 
only consonants that may end a word. Any other 
consonant, therefore, falling at the end of a word, 
is either (a) dropped, or (b) changed into one of 
these, or (c) assumes a vowel: as 

σῶμί(ατ)α, ἥπί(ατ)αρ, κέρ(ατ)ας (17); ἔλσ(ομ)ον, λύζοιμγοιμι, &du(er)e, 
ἔλυ(οντ)ον, A(ovr)ov, λϑίεθ)ε (37) ; τίθ(ημ)ημι, ἐτίθ(ημγην, ἐδίδ(ωτ)ω, 
στ(ηθγῆθι, δ(οθ)ός (45) ; μέλ(ιτ)ι mel, honey, γὙάλ(ακτ)α lac, milk ; φ(ωτ)ῶς 
light ; Voc. π(αιδ)αῖ, boy / “γύν(αικ)αι, woman! Cf. Lat. co(rd)r. 

d. Both the assumption and the change appear in -ov for -r, and -νσι 
for -vt, in the 3d pers. of verbs: as, tor(yr)nor, ἱστ(αντ)ᾶσι (45, 143 b, 
156). In applying this rule and the note below, € and are considered 
as combinations ending with ς (137 d). 

e. A word can end with two consonants, only when the last 
iS 7: aS, ἅλς" yi (yum), αἴξ (alys), κόραξ (17). Hence the for- 
mative ν of the Accusative is changed into a (142) after a con- 
sonant, except in a few cases, in which a lingual mute preced- 
ing ν is dropped : as, 

γύ(πνγπα, κόρα(κν)κα, πό(δν)δα " Kde?(dv)v and -8a, κόρυ(θνὴν and -θα (17). 


144 CONSONANTS. — FINAL LETTERS. § 160. 


f. As final » and τ or θ so extensively pass into v and s, they may be 
considered as having the same corresponding vowels : viz. a correspond- * 
ing to final p, and ε to final + or @ (138). 


B. In toe Connection or Worps. 


161. I. When a smooth mute is brought by 
(a) erasis or (b) elision before the rough breathing, it 
unites with it to form the cognate rough: as, 


(a) καὶ ὁ, χὠ " καὶ οἱ, xw* τὸ ἱμάτιον, θοἰμάτιον - τοῦ ἑτέρου, θἀτέρου " ὅτου 
ἕνεκα, ὁθοὔνεκα " (Ὁ) ἀπὸ οὗ, ἀφ᾽ οὗ + νύκτα ὅλην, νύχθ᾽ ὅλην " and in composi- 
tion, ἀφίημι (ἀπό, inut), δεχήμερος (δέκα, ἡμέρα), ἑφθήμερος (ἑπτά, ἡμέρα). 


162. II. Some words and forms end either 
with or without a final consonant according to eu- 
phony, emphasis, or rhythm. 


a. Such consonants are termed movable ; and in grammars and lexicons 
are often marked thus : efze(v), or εἶπείν. Before the digamma, they were 
of course not needed to prevent hiatus: δαῖέ ro EB. 4; οὐ FéOev A. 114. 


163. 1.) Datives plural in 1, and verbs of the third person 
an ε or simple ἐ, assume ν at the end of a sentence, or when the 
next word begins with a vowel : as, | 


Πᾶσι yap εἶπε τοῦτο " but, Εἶπεν αὐτὸ πᾶσιν. 
Πᾶσι λέγουσι τοῦτο" but, Πᾶσιν αὐτὸ λέγουσιν. 


a. So, likewise, adverbs of place in -ov (properly datives plural), the 
adverb πέρυσι, last year, the numeral εἴκοσι (commonly), the denionstra- 
tive -ἰ preceded by o (sometimes), the Epic case-ending -φι, and the 
Epic particles κέ, νύ, and vicgu: as, ἡ Πλαταιᾶσιν ἡγεμονία " εἴκοσιν ἔτη. 

b. So, also, in a few instances, chiefly poetic, the Plup. and Impf. 
3d Pers. in -e. (contracted from -ee) : as, ἤδειν " ἐν Eur. lon 1187, ᾽πεποί- 
θειν, οὐκ Ar. Nub. 1347, βεβλήκειν ὑπέρ ZH. 412; προσήειν ; Οὐδέπω Ar. 
Pl. 696, ἤσκειν εἴρια T. 388. The form with v became the common form 
in the Impf. 3d Pers. ἣν, was, and ἐχρῆν or χρῆν, ought, even before a 
consonant : as, ἣν dei. 2. 3, ἐχρῆν ταῦτα Cyr. 5. 5. 9. 

c. The v thus assumed is often called v paragogic (in Greek, ν ἐφελκυ- 
στικόν, attached). It is sometimes employed by the poets before a con- 
sonant to make a syllable long by position ; and in most kinds of verse, 
is used at the end of a line. In Ionic prose it is generally neglected ; but 
in Attic prose it is sometimes found even before a consonant in the mid- 
dle of a sentence, while, on the other hand, it is sometimes omitted in 
closely connected discourse, even where we point with a period. 


164. 2.) The adverb οὕτως, thus, commonly loses o before 
a consonant ; and ἄχρι and μέχρι, untel, often assume it before 
a vowel: as οὕτω φησίν - μέχρις od. 

a. Some other words have poetic or dialectic forms, in which a final v 
or ς is dropped or assumed : as, local adverbs in -Qev (poet., chiefly Ep., 
-Oe), numeral adverbs in -κις (lon. -κι), ἀμφίς, ἄντικρυς, ἀτρέμας, αὖθις, 
ἔμπας, πάλιν, ἄφνω(ς, ἐγώ(ν, εὐθύ(ς, ἰθύ(ς, μεσηγύ(ς. 


ὁ 168. SPECIAL RULES. — DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 145. 


C. Spreciat Rvtes. 


165. a. The preposition ἐξ, out of, has the form ἐκ before 
any consonant : as, ἐκ κακῶν, ἐκσεύω, ἐκγελάω, ἔκθετος, ἐκμάσσω. 


Ὁ. Soin Hom. the compounds ἀπέξ, διέξ, ὑπέξ, and commonly παρέξ " 
but not πάρεξ in Hdt. : as, ὑπὲκ κακοῦ N. 89 ; but πάρεξ δέ Hdt. 1. 14. 

ce. The adverb οὐ, not, before ἃ ae has the form οὐκ, 
which becomes οὐχ before the rough breathing : as, οὔ φησιν, 
οὐκ ἔνεστιν, οὐχ ὕει, οὐκέτι (imitated by μή, nod, in μηκέτι). ᾿ 

d. In these words, ἐκ and οὐκ may perhaps be regarded as the original 
forms. That in certain situations these forms are retained is owing to 
their close connection as proclitics, or in composition, with the following 
word, and therefore forms no real exception to the rule in 160. When 


orthotone, they conform to the rule, the one by assuming s, and the other 
by dropping x, except as it also takes the form ov xi. 


166. In composition, the preposition ἐν, ix, regularly re- 
tains its ν before p and «; σύν, with, drops its v before o fol- 
lowed by another consonant, and before ¢; but before o fol- 
lowed by a vowel, changes v to o ; while πάλιν, again, and πᾶν, 
all, vary in their forms: as, ἐνράπτω, ἐνσείω, ἔνρυθμος, yet also 
ἔρρυθμος . σύστημα (for σύνστημα), συζυγία - συσσεύω (for συνσεὐω), 
συσσιτία " παλίνσκιος and παλίσκιος, πάνσοφος and πάσσοφος. 

a. The Epic ἄν for ἀνά (136) here imitates ἐν " as, ἀνστάς, ἄνσχετος. 


DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 


167. A. The dialects often cnterchange consonants : chiefly, 


1. CoGNaTE Mutes (137 b): as, Ion. αὖτις, déxouar, for αὖθις, déxo- 
μαι" Aol. ἀμπί for ἀμφί. Compare ἄμφω and ambo, both, ἄγχω and ango, 
to choke, κύκνος and cygnus, swan, μίσγω and misceo, to mix. 

a. The Aol. and Ion. were both far less inclined than the Att. to aspi- 
ration (cf. 93.c). In the new Ion. the smooth mute remains before the 
rough breathing (161, 165c): as, ἀπ᾽ οὗ, δεκήμερος, οὐκ te. In some 
compounds, this passed into the Att. : as, ἀπηλιώτης (ἀπό, ἥλιος). 

b. Aspiration is sometimes transposed : as, Ion. κιθών, ἐνθαῦτα, ἐνθεῦ- 
tev, Καλχηδών, for χιτών, ἐνταῦθα, ἐντεῦθεν, Χαλκηδών. 

¢. The dialects also varied in the use of the breathings. In place of 
the rough, the Holic seems commonly, and the Epic often, to have used 
the smooth breathing or the digamma. In Homer we find the smooth 
for the rough particularly in words which are strengthened in some other 
Way : as, eBicyhos, οὖὗλος, ἠέλιος, Buses, for ἕκηλος, ὅλος, ἥλιος, ὑμεῖς. 


168. 2.) Co-orprnaTe ΝΌτΤΕΒ (187 b);: as, Ion. « for π' in inter- 
rogative and indefinite pronouns and adverbs : thus, xotos, κοῦ, κοτέ, for 
ποῖος, ποῦ, ποτέ" Dor., « for t in πόκα, ὅκα, τόκα, for πότε, ὅτε, τότε, and 
in similar adverbs of time ; Hol. πέμπε for πέντε quinque, jive, pip for θήρ 
fera, wild beast ; Dor. Ὑλέφαρον for βλέφαρον, δᾶ for γῆ, ὀδελός for ὀβελός, 
ὄρνῖχος for ὄρντθος. Compare λύκος and lupus, wolf, γλυκύς and dulcis, 
sweet, τίς and quis, who? and Lat. bis, bellum, fr. duis, duellum. 


COMP. GR. 7 J 


146 CONSONANTS, — DIALECTIC VARIATIONS, § 169. 


3.) Liquips: as, Dor. ἦνθον, βέντιστος, pivraros, for ἦλθον, βέλτιστος, 
φίλτατος " Ion. and Att. πλεύμων for πνεύμων pulmo, lung; lon. ply, Dor. 
viv. Cf. λείριον lilium, LILY. 

a. The interchange of ἃ with another lingual appears in ᾿Οδυσσεύς 
Ulixes, δάκρυον lacrima. 


169. 4.) o with other letters. E. g 

a. The Dor., Ion., and Old Att. oo passes, for the most part, in the 
later Att., into tr: as, τάσσω τάττω (39), γλῶσσα γλῶττα, tongue. Sor 
Att. for initial σ᾽ in a few words: as, σήμερον τήμερον, to-day. 

b. Dor. + for o: as, Ποτειδάν, ἔπετον, εἴκατι, for Ποσειδῶν, ἔπεσον, 
εἴκοσι. This appears especially in the 2d personal pronoun, and in the 
3d pers. of verbs: as, τύ, τέ, for ot, σέ (Lat. tu, te); φατί, φαντί, 
φέροντι, for φησί, φασί, φέρουσι (Lat. ferunt). See 160d. 

ce. Dor. o for v, and v foro: as, évdos for ἔνδον intus, within, évri for 
ἐστί est, is ; and in the verb-ending of 1st pers. pl. -pes for -pew (Lat. 
-mus), as λέγομες for λεγόμεν (Lat. legimus). 

ἃ. The Laconic often changes @ to o, and final s to p: as, παλεόρ Ar. 
Lys. 988, σιόρ, σέλω, for παλαιός, θεός, θέλω + πόϊρ for παῖς (Lat. puer, cf. 
Marcipor). Compare the marked correspondence of o and the Lat. τ; 
and in Lat., arbos and arbor, honos and honor. 


170. 5.) The Dovste Consonants with other letters : as, old ξύν, 
later and common σύν (in the Lat. cwm the o has been omitted instead 
of the x); Mol. Ψαπφώ for Σαπῴφώ " Mol. σκένος, σκίφος, for ξένος, ξίφος " 
Dor. ψέ, pir, for σφέ, σφίν " lon. διξός, τριξός, for δισσός, τρισσός. 

a. For ἵ, we find, in the ol. and Dor., σδ, 58, and ὃ : as, ὕσδος, με- 
λίσδω (137 d), παίδδω, μᾶδδα, Aevs, for ὄζος, μελίζω, παίζω, μᾶζα, Leds. 

b. Interchanges of consonants are sometimes poetic rather than dia- 
lectic, or simply took place in the progress οὗ the language. 


171. B. Consonants are often doubled, inserted, omitted, 
and transposed by the poets, especially the Epic, for the sake 
of the metre : as, 


ἔλλαβον, φράσσομαι, νέκυσσι, ὅσσος, ὅππως, ἔδδεισε, for ἔλαβον, ἕο. ; 
πτόλεμος, πτόλις, διχθά, νώνυμνος, ἀπάλαμνος, for πόλεμος, πόλις, δίχα, 
νώνυμος, ἀπάλαμος - ἔρεζον, Ὀδυσεύς, ᾿Αχιλεύς, φάρυγος, for ἔῤῥεζον, 
᾿Οδυσσεύς, ᾿Αχιλλεύς, φάρυγγος " κραδίη, κάρτιστοξ, βάρδιστος, ἀταρπός, for 
καρδία, κράτιστος, βράδιστος, ἀτραπός. . 

a. Similar changes are also dialectic, or took place in the progress of 
the language. E. g., the Holic, instead of lengthening a vowel before a 
liquid, often made the syllable long by doubling the liquid; as, ἔμμι for 
εἰμί to be, σπέῤῥω for σπείρω to sow, κρίννω for κρίνω to judge, ἔστελλα for 
Aor. ἔστειλα. Not unfrequently, that which is poetic in one dialect is 
used in the prose of another. 


BOOK IT. 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Ἔπεα πτερόεντα. 
Homer. 


172. Etymology treats of the INrLEcTION and 
ForMATION OF Worps: the former including 
DECLENSION, COMPARISON, and CONJUGATION ; 
and the latter, DERIVATION and ComposiTION. 


a. INFLECTION is variation in the form of a word to distinguish its 
different offices or relations (inflecto, to bend to, change). A word which 
is inflected has two parts: the one constituting its essence, and receiving 
no change except as euphony or emphasis may require ; the other circum- 
stantial, and varying according to its different offices and connections. 
The former is called the essential part, or, by a botanical figure, the sTEM 
or ROOT ; and the latter, from its producing the various forms of inflec- 
tion, the inflective part. , 


b. It is now common to limit the term root to primitive elements in 
the formation of words, while the term stem is not thus limited. Syl- 
lables or letters belonging to the root are termed radical ; and others, 
formative. 


6. Syllables or letters belonging to the stem are called essential ; and 
others, inflective. Of the latter, those which precede the stem are termed 
PREFIXES ; and those which follow it, ArrrxEs. Affixes are of two kinds: 
open, or vowel affixes, those which begin with a vowel ; and close, or con- 
sonant affixes, those which begin with a consonant. 


d. The last letter, or sometimes letters, of the stem, as marking its 
character, are called the STEM-MARK or CHARACTERISTIC ; and from this, 
words and stems are named mute, liquid, double-consonant, labial, pure 
(112a), &e. 


e. Byethe THEME of a word, is meant that form which is first given in 
grammatical inflection: as commonly, in declension, the Nominative 
singular, and, if the word has the different genders, the masculine ; in 
comparison, the Positive ; in conjugation, the first person singular of the 
Present indicative active, or, if the verb is deponent, middle (though some 
prefer the Present infinitive). 


148 ’ DECLENSION. § 173. 


CHAPTER I. 
PRINCIPLES OF DECLENSION. 


173. The two classes of SUBSTANTIVES (includ- 
ing Nouns and Substantive Pronouns) and ADJEc- 
TIVES (including the Article, Adjectives commonly 
so called, Adjective Pronouns, and Participles) are 
declined to mark three distinctions, GENDER, NuM- 
BER, and CASE. 


a. Adjectives receive these distinctions merely for the sake of conform- 
ing to the substantives to which they belong. 
- b. In grammars and lexicons, these distinctions are often marked by 
the appropriate forms of the article (with the interjection ὦ for the Voca- 
tive): thus, in ὁ ταμίας, or ταμίας, ὁ, steward, the noun is marked as 
masculine and in the Nom. sing. ; while in ὁ, ἡ τροφός, nurse, it is marked 
as. of the common gender, and in τὰ σῦκα, jigs, as neuter. 


174. A. GenpER. The Greek has three gen- 
ders; the Mascuuine, Feminine, and NEUTER. 


a.. Nouns which are both masculine and feminine are said to be of the 
common gender. In the case of most animals, it is seldom important to 
distinguish the gender. Hence in Greek, for the most part, the names 
of animals, instead‘of being common, have but a single gender, which is 
used indifferently for both sexes. Such nouns are termed epicene (ἐπέκοι- 
vos, promiscuous). Thus, ὁ λύκος wolf, ἡ ἀλώπηξ fox, whether the male 
or the female is spoken of. 

b. In words in which the feminine may either have a common form 
with the masculine or a distinct form, the Attic sometimes prefers the 
common form, where the Jonic and Common dialects prefer the distinct 
form : as, ὁ, ἡ θεός, god, goddess, and ἡ θεά or θέαινα, goddess. So, like- 
Wise, in adjectives. 


175. The masculine gender belongs properly to words de- 
noting males; the feminine, to words denoting females; and 
the neuter, to words denoting nether males nor females. In 
Greek, however, the names of most things without life are 
masculine or feminine, either from the real or fancied *posses- 
sion of masculine or feminine qualities, or from a similarity in 
their formation to other nouns of these genders. 

Thus, for the most part, the names of winds and rivers 
(from their power and violence), and also of the months, are 
masculine; and the names of trees, plants, countries, islands, 
and cities (regarded as mothers of their products or inhabitants) 


͵ 


§ 177. GENDER. 149 


are femme; while nouns denoting mere products, or imply- 
ing ¢nferzority (even though names of persons), especially dimin- 
utives, are neuter: as, 

ὁ ἄνεμος wind, ὁ Βοῤῥᾶς Boreas, ὁ ποταμός river, 6 Νεῖλος the Nile, 6 μήν 
month, ὁ Ἑκατομβαιών June—July ; ἡ συκῆ fig-tree, ἡ μηλέα apple-tree, 
ἡ ἄμπελος vine, ἡ βύβλος papyrus, ἡ χώρα country, ἡ Αὔγυπτος Egypt, 
ἡ νῆσος island, ἡ Σάμος Samos, ἡ πόλις city, ἡ Λακεδαίμων Lacedeemon ; τὸ 
σῦκον fig, τὸ μῆλον apple, τὸ τέκνον child, τὸ ἀνδράποδον slave, τὸ γύναιον, 
dim. of γυνή woman, τὸ παιδίον little boy or girl. 


176. The gender of nouns, when not determined by the 
signification, may be, for the most part, inferred from the form 
of the theme or stem, according to the following rules : 


I. In the rirst pecLEension (15), all words in -as and -ns are 
masculine ; and all in -a and -η, feminine : as, ὁ ταμίας, 6 ποιητής " 
ἡ τράπεζα, ἡ τιμή. 

II. In the sEconpD DECLENSION (16), most words in -os and 
-ws are masculine, but some are feminine or common; words in 
-ov and -wy are neuter : as, 6 χορός, ὁ νεώς " ἡ νῆσος, ἡ ἕως dawn ; 
6, ἡ θεός god, 6, ἡ ἄρκτος bear ; τὸ adv, τὸ ἀνώγεων chamber. 

a. Except when the diminutive form in -ον is given to feminine proper 
names : as, ἡ Λεόντιον, ἡ Γλυκέριον. 


177. III. In the THIRD DECLENSION (17 5), 


a.) All words in -evs are masculine ; all in -@ and -avs, femi- 
nine; and all in -a, -t, -v, τος, and -op, neuter; as, ὁ ἱππεύς, ὁ du- 
φορεύς amphora ; ἡ ἠχώ, ἡ ναῦς " τὸ σώμα, τὸ μέλι honey, τὸ ἄστυ, 
τὸ γένος, τὸ ἦτορ heart. 

b.) All abstracts in -της and -ts, and most other words in -ts 
are feminine : as, ἡ γλυκύτης sweetness, ἡ δύναμις power, ἡ ποίησις 
poesy, ἡ pis, ἡ πόλις. 

6.) All dabials and palatals, and all liquids (except a few in 
which p is the stem-mark) are either masculine or feminine. 
Except palatals, they are more frequently masculine. 


d.) Nouns in which the stem ends 


1.) in -wt-, -av-, -ev-, or -vt-, are masculine: as, ὁ γέλως, -wros, laugh- 
ter ; ὁ παιάν, -dvos, pean; ὁ λιμήν, -évos* ὁ λέων, τοντος, ὁ ὁδούς, ὁ γίγας, 
ὁ ἱμάς, -άντος, thong. Except τὸ οὖς, ὠτός, ear, τὸ φῶς, φωτός, light (both 
contracts), ἡ φρήν, φρενός, mind, ὁ, ἡ ἀδήν, -ένος, gland ; and a few names 
of cities (175) : as, ἡ Ῥαμνοῦς, -οῦντος, Rhamnus. 

2.) in -8-, -0-, or two palatals, feminine: as, ἡ λαμπάς, -ddos, torch, 
ἡ ἔρις, -ἰδος, strife, ἡ χλαμύς, -vdos, cloak ; ἡ κόρυς, -vOos, helmet ; ἡ σάλ- 
πιγξ, -vyyos, trumpet. Except ὁ, ἡ παῖς, παιδός, child, ὁ πούς, ποδός, foot ; 
ὁ, ἡ ὄρνις, -ἴθος, bird ; ὁ λύγξ, λυγκός, Lynx, and a few other double palatals. 

3.) in -ar-, or -d-, neuter : as, τὸ ἧπαρ, -aros, τὸ κέρας, -ἄτος, τὸ γέρας, 
-ἄος. 


150 DECLENSION. —- NUMBER. CASE. § 178. 


178. B. Numper. The Greek has three num- 
bers; the SineuLar, denoting one ; the PLURAL, 
denoting more than one; and the ΑΙ, (duilis, from 
duo, zwo), a variety of the plural, which may be 
employed when only two are spoken of. 


Thus, the singular ἄνθρωπος signifies man, the plural ἄνθρωποι, men 
(whether two or more), and the dual ἀνθρώπω, two men. 

a. The dual is most used in the Attic and Homeric Greek. The olic 
dialect (as the Latin, which it approaches the most nearly of the Greek 
dialects) and the Hellenistic Greek show scarce a trace of the dual (the 
New Testament, like the Modern Greek, none), except in δύο, two, and 
ἄμφω, both (Lat. duo, ambo). 


.179. C. Case. The Greek has five cases: the 
NoMINATIVE, GENITIVE, DATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, and 
VOCATIVE. : 3 


a. From the general character of the relations which they denote, the 
Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative are termed the direct, and the 
Genitive and Dative, the indirect cases. The cases are also distinguished 
as subjective, objective, and residwal. See 10, 14, and Syntax. 

b. The Nominative and Vocative are also termed casus recti, the right 
cases, and the other three, casus obliqut, the oblique cases. 


180. D. Metuops or DrecLtension. Words 
are declined, in Greek, by annexing to the stem 
certain AFFIXES (172 ἃ, 6), which mark the dis- 
tinctions of gender, number, and case. There 
are three sets of these affixes; and hence arise 
three distinct methods of declining words, called 
the FIRST, SECOND, and THIRD DECLENSIONS. 


a. The first of these methods applies only to masculine and femi- 
nine words; but the second and third, to words of all the genders. 
In some of the cases, however, the affixes vary, in the same declen- 
sion, according to the gender; so that, to know how a word is de- 
clined, it is necessary to ascertain three things: 1. its stem; 2. the 
declension to which it belongs ; and 3. its gender (173 Ὁ, 1748). 


Ὁ. If the theme (172 6) and gender do not determine the stem 
and declension, these are commonly shown, as in Latin, by adding 
the Genitive singular, or its ending. If the Genitive singular ends in 
-as or τῆς, or in τοῦ from a theme in -as or της, the word is of the first 
declension ; if it ends in -ov from a theme in -os or -ov, the word is of 
the second declension ; if it ends in -os, the word is of the third declen- 
sion. The stem is obtained by throwing off the affix of the Genitive ; 
or it may be obtained by throwing off any open affix (172 c). 


§ 183. METHODS. GENERAL RULES. 151 


Thus the nouns, ὁ ταμίας steward, ἡ οἰκία house, ἣ γλῶσσα tongue, ὁ δῆ- 
μος people, and ὁ “Apay Arab, make in the Gen. ταμίου, οἰκίας, γλώσσης, 
δήμου, and “ApaBos. From these genitives we ascertain that ταμίας, οἰκία, 
and γλῶσσα belong to Dec. 1, δῆμος to Dec. 2, and “Apay to Dec. 3. By 
throwing off the affixes -ου, -as, -ys, and -os, we obtain the stems ταμι-, 
olxt-, yAwoo-, Snu-, and ’ApaB-. The words are then declined by annexing 
to these stems the affixes in § 11. 


181. Each declension observes the following 


GrenerAL Rutes. 1. The masculine and feminine affixes are 
the same, except in the Nominative and Genitive singular of the 
first declension. The neuter has also the same affixes, except 
in the direct cases, singular and plural. ἡ 


2. In neuters, the three direct cases have the same form, and 
in the plural always end in a. 


3. The dual has but two forms: one for the direct, and the 
other for the zndzrect cases. 


4. In the feminine singular of the first declension, and in 
the plural of all words, the Vocative has the same form with the 
Nominative. 


182. a. The use of the Voc. as a distinct form is still further lim- 
ited. Few substantives or adjectives, except proper names and personal 
appellatives or epithets, are sufficiently employed in address to require 
a separate form for this purpose. Hence a distinct Voc. is scarce found 
in the participle, pronoun, article, or nwmeral. In respect to other words : 

Ὁ. Masculines of Dec. 1 are commonly names or epithets of persons, 
and therefore form the Voce. sing. 

ὁ. In Dec. 2, the distinct form of the Voc. is commonly used, except 
for euphony or rhythm : as,’Q φίλος, ὦ φίλος, my friend! my friend / Ar. 
Nub. 1167. Φίλος ὦ Μενέλαε A. 189. ᾿Ηέλιός τε Τ'. 277. To avoid the 
double ε, θεός, god (like dews in Latin), has, in classic writers, no distinct 
Voc. ; yet Θεέ St. Mat. 27. 46. 

d. In Dec. 3, few words, except proper names and personal appellatives 
and epithets, have a distinct Voc. ; and even in those which have, the 
Nom. is sometimes employed in its stead, especially by Att. writers : thus, 
Ὦ πᾶσα πόλι Ar. Ach. 971; but Ὦ πόλις Soph. Phil. 1213. 


183. The Table (12) exhibits the affixes as resolved into 
their two classes of ELemMents: J. FLexiste Enpines, which 
are significant additions, marking distinctions of number, case, 
and gender; and II. Connecting Vowets, which are chiefly 
euphonic in their origin, and serve to unite the flexible endings 
with the stem. 

a. These elements, when there is no danger of mistake, may be more 
briefly called Flexives and Connectives. The affixes are termed euphonic, 
when they have connecting vowels, and nude (nudus, naked), when they 
want them. Where the connectives were followed by other vowels, con- 
traction took place in one or another of its forms, though not always 
according to the common laws. See 7, 13. 


152 | DECLENSION. —— HISTORY. ° § 184. 


184. The tables (11 5) show, that, in regular declension, 


8.) The flexive of the Nom. sing. mase. and (except in Dec. 1) fem. is 
always s. 

b.) The Dat. has always t: in the sing., ending with this vowel ; in 
the plur., joining it with σ΄, and in the dual, with v. 

c.) The Acc. sing. (except in neuters of Dec. 3) always ends in ν, or its 
᾿ς corresponding vowel α (138) ; and the Acc. pl. masc. and fem. is always 
formed by adding s to the Acc. sing. (122, 156). 

d.) The Gen. pl. and dual always ends in v; which, in the plur., is 
preceded by @, and in the dual by ans diphthong. 

e.) In Dee. 1 and 2, the affixes are all open (172 6) and constitute a dis- 
tinct syllable. In Dec. 3, three of the afiixes, o, v, and σι, are close. 

f.) In the singular of Dec. 3, the direct cases neut., and the Voc. masc. 
and fem., have no affixes. 


185. The three Greek and first three Latin declensions 
correspond. The fourth and fifth declensions in Latin are con- 
tract varieties of the third. 


186. Ἐ. Hisroric View. a. The following view has much 
evidence in its support, though, from the very nature of the case, it can- 
not be established by direct testimony : (Ὁ, cy The Greek cases were at 
first only two, a Direct and an Indirect Case ; and these only singular and 
plural. (d) From the Direct Case, in the masculine and feminine genders, 
the Noninative and Accusative were formed by significant affixes, to dis- 
tinguish the subject and direct object of an action. (6, f) To mark indirect 
subjective relations, the Genitive was separated from the old Indirect Case, 
which then remained as a Dative. The different forms of the Gen. sing. 

oint to 6, or, with a euphonic vowel, 00, as its original affix. As, by the 
aws of euphony which afterwards prevailed, θ could not end a word (160), 
it was dropped, or became s, or assumed e (commonly written with v para- 
gogic, 164 4). (5) After the formation of a new and enlarged plural, the 
old plural with its two case-forms was restricted to a dual sense ; while 
the old Direct Case singular, in which the stem received no affix, was now 
left simply as a Vocative. 


187. a. To the primitive nude declension, now called the third, 
two others were afterwards added, having connecting vowels. (Ὁ) In the 
Nom. and Acc. sing. of these declensions, the primitive direct form, with- 
out s or v appended, was sometimes retained (197 b, 199). 


188.  Neuters, as denoting things without life, which can have no 
voluntary action, and therefore require less the distinction of subject and 
object, remained content with the single Direct Case. In the singular, 
this was the simple stem in Dec. 3 ; and in Dec. 2, toek the Acc. form, 
which suited the objective character of the gender. In the plural, instead 
of the old affix -e, it took the more objective -&, and with no connecting 
yowel. Observe here the striking analogy of the Latin throughout. 


189. a. The first declension appears to have arisen in the effort to 
obtain a distinct form for the feminine, with an appropriate connecting 
vowel. This vowel was commonly lengthened, unless contracted with a 
vowel following. (b) The feminine is distinguished from the masculine 
words admitted into this declension by the want of the strong flexive -s 
in the Nom. sing., and by the affix -os, instead of -o in the Genitive, 


§ 192. FORMS IN -ΦΙ, -OI, -OEN, &c. 153 


190. The prevention of hiatus by the insertion of aspirate conso- 
nants (the successors of the digamma or used like it), and by different 
modes of contraction (100), has given an especial variety of form, in the 
first and second declensions, to the Dative singular, which, as the primi- 
tive Indirect Case (186 6), originally performed the offices of both the 
Genitive and the Dative. Thus, we find, 

1.) The t appended with the insertion of , a natural successor of the 
digamma. This form is Epic, and from its being used as both Gen. and 
Dat., and in Dec. 2 even as plural, is evidently of great antiquity, It 
does not occur in names of persons, and is chiefly used where local rela- 
tions are spoken of. E. g. 

Dec. 1. ἐξ εὐνῆφι, from the bed, y. 405 ; ἀπὸ νευρῆφιν (163 a) Θ. 300 ; 
ἦφι βίηφι πιθήσας, trusting to his strength, X. 107; κεφαλῆφιν ἐπεὶ λάβεν 
Il. 762; ὡς φρήτρη φρήτρηφιν ἀρήγῃ B. 363; χερσίν re Bindi τε μ. 246 ; 
ἅμ᾽ hot φαινομένηφιν 1. 618, 682; κρατερῆφι βίηφιν ᾧ. 501; ἑτέρηφι II. 734 ; 
θύρηφιν ι. 238. 

Dec. 2. Ἰλιόφι κλυτὰ τείχεα, the famed walls of (or at) Troy, ᾧ. 295 ; 
ἐκ ποντόφιν w. 88 ; ἀπὸ πλατέος πτυόφιν N. 588; ἐπὶ δεξιόφιν N. 308 ; 
δακρυόφι πλῆσθεν, were filled with tears, P. 696 ; ἀπὸ πασσαλόφι, 2. 268 ; 
παρ᾽ αὐτόφι μ. 802 ; dud ὀστεόφιν μ. 45 ; θεόφιν μήστωρ ἀτάλαντος H. 366. 
So ἐσχαρόφιν ε. 59, and κοτυληδονόφιν ε. 433, as of Dec. 2, while the 
themes in use are ἐσχάρη of Dec. 1, and κοτυληδών of Dec. 3. 

a. The ¢ is likewise inserted in the Dative plural of a few words of 
Dec. 3, chiefly neuters,in -os ; and here serves to lengthen the preceding 
syllable. These forms were also used as both Gen. and Dat., and some- 
times with the force of the singular: as, κατ᾽ ὄρεσφι, down the mountains, 
A. 452; ἀπὸ στήθεσφιν, from the breast, R. 214 ; πρόσθ᾽ ἵπποιιν καὶ ὄχεσφιν 
E. 107; σὺν ὄχεσφι Il. 811; ὄρεσφι A. 474 (cf. A. 479) ; ὑπὸ κράτεσφι, 
under the head, K. 156 ; ᾿Ἐρέβεσφιν (probably the correct form for "Epé- 
βευσφι I. 572, &c.) ; ἀπὸ ναῦφι (o here diopped), from the ships, Il. 246. 


191. 2.) The t appended with the insertion of @. This form be- 
came adverbial (chiefly poetic), denoting the place where: as, οἴκοθι at 
home, ἄλλοθι elsewhere, αὐτόθι, ὅθι, ἹΚορινθόθι. It was mostly confined to 
Dec. 2; and, in the few instances in which it was made from nouns of 
other declensions, it still imitated the forms of this. Traces of its old use 
as the Indirect Case still remain in Homer: thus, Gen. Ἰλιόθι πρό, before 
Troy, 9. 561, οὐρανόθι πρό Τ'. 8, ἠῶθι πρό §. 86 ; Dat. κηρόθι I. 300. 

3.) Thee appended with the insertion of xy. This appears in the Epic 
$x for the adverbial Dative 4, where, A. 607. 

4.) The t contracted with the preceding vowel into at or οἱ (119). 
This simpler mode of contraction now scarcely appears except in adverbial 
Datives : as, χαμαί humi, on the ground, οἴκοι at home (but οἴκῳ to a house ; 
ef. Lat. domi and domus), πέδοι, Ἰσθμοῖ, of, ὅποι. Yet ἐν Ἰσθμοῖ Simon. 
Fr. 209 ; ἐν Πριανσιοῖ Insc. Cret. ; rot δάμοι Insc. Beeot. 

5.) The common form, in which the t is absorbed by the preceding 
vowel : as, Avp(a-c)q, οἴκ(ο-)ῳ, Ἰσθμῷ, τῷ δήμῳ. 


192. The forms of the Genitive in -o@ev or -Gev (186 e) remained in 
the common language only as adverbs, denoting the place whence : as, 
οἴκοθεν from home, ἄλλοθεν, αὐτόθεν, ᾿Αθήνηθεν. As examples of their use 
as decided Genitives, may be cited ἀπ᾽ οὐρανόθεν, from heaven, Θ. 365, ἐξ 
Αἰσύμηθεν Θ. 304, ἐξ ἁλόθεν . 335, Διόθεν O. 489; and. the pronominal 
forms ἐμέθεν, σέθεν, ἕθεν (27), which even occur in Attic poets. 


COMP. GR. 7 * 


154 , FIRST DECLENSION. § 193. 


CHAPTER II. 


DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 


193. The declension of adjectives is also here treated, so 
far as it corresponds with the declension of nouns. See 229. 


I. THE FIRST DECLENSION. 


(For the affixes and paradigms, see 11-15, 20; for the gender, 176.) 


194. The original affixes of Dec. 1 all had a as a connect- 
ing vowel (187, 189). In most of these, the a, if not contract- 
ed with a vowel following (183 a), was itself made long. Short 
a, however, remained in the singular, - 


1.) In the direct cases of feminines whose stem ended in o, 
a double consonant, Ad, or aw: as, μοῦσᾶ, μοῦσᾶν, τράπεζὰ (15), 
γλῶσσᾶ (or yAdrra, 169 a) tongue, ἅμιλλἄ contest, A€awa Lioness. 


a. Add a few others in -λα and -va; as, παῦλὰ rest, ἔχιδνὰ viper, μέ- 
ριμνᾶ care, δέσποινα mistress: and a very few in which p or a mute pre- 
cedes a; as, τόλμα cowrage, ἄκανθα thorn, δίαιτα mode of life. 

b. Add many feminines in -a pure and -pa, mostly having a diph- 
thong in the penult, and easily recognized by the accent. The principal 
classes are, (a) Polysyllables in -ea and -οια, except abstracts in -εἰα from 
verbs in -evw; as, ἀλήθειὰ ‘truth, εὔνοιὰ good-will, βασίλειά queen, but 
βασιλείᾳ reign, from βασιλεύω" (8) Female designations in -rpia ; as, 
ψάλτριὰ female musician: (vy) Dissyllables and some polysyllabic names 
of places ἴῃ -αια ; as, watd good mother, ‘Ioriad: (5) Words in -wa ; as, 
pid fly: (e€) Most words in -pa, whose penult is lengthened by a diph- 
thong (except av), by 3, or by 66 ; as, μάχαιρα sword, yépipa bridge. 

9. The accent commonly shows the quantity of final a in the theme. 
Thus, in all proparoxytones and properispomes it must be short by the gen- 
eral laws of accent ; while, by a special law of the declension, it is Zong in 
all oxytones, and in all parorytones in -a, Gen. -as, except the proper 

names Kigpa, Πύῤῥᾶ (Ὁ. €), and the numeral pla one. 


2.) In the Vocative of nouns in -της, and of gentiles and com- 
pound verbals in -ns : as, ναύτης (14), Πέρσης Persian, μυροπώλης 
(μύρον perfume, πωλέω to sell) perfumer; Voc. vatra, Mépoa (but 
Πέρσης Perses, a man’s name, Voc. Πέρση), μυροπῶλᾶ. 


195. In the singular, long a passed, by precession, into ἡ, 
unless preceded by ε, ε, p, or po (115 a): as, ναύτης, ναύτῃ, 
᾿Ατρείδη, μούσης, μούσῃ, δή, ὠδήν - but rapids, ταμίᾳ, θεά, θεᾶς, 
λύρα, λύρᾶν (14, 15), idea cdea, χρεία need, χρόᾶ color. 


§ 198. DIALECTIC FORMS. 155 


a. Long a likewise remains in the pures, πόξ grass, στοά porch, yia 
field, oxic gourd, xapiad walnut-tree, édad olive-tree, Ναυσικάα ; in ἀλαλά 
war-cry, ἐπίβδα, σκανδάλᾶ, γεννάδας ; and in some proper names, partic- 
ularly those which are Doric or foreign, as, A7jdd, Φιλομήλα, Λεωνίδας, 
Σύλλας * and it became ἢ after p or po in the words dépy neck, κόρη maid- 
en, κόῤῥη (lon. and Old Att. κόρση, 157) cheek, ἀθάρη pap, atOpy clear shy, 
poh stream ; in some proper names, as T7pys* and in compounds of pe- 
Tpéw, as γεωμέτρης land-measurer, geometer. In some words, usage fluc- 
tuates between long or short a and ἢ : as, πρύμνὰ and πρύμνη, stern. 


196. Contracts. A few nouns, in which the stem ends in 
a or e, and feminine adjectives in -ea and -oy, are contracted : 
as, pvda μνᾶ, “Eppeas ἙἭ ρμῆς, βορέας βοῤῥᾶς (p doubled), συκέα συκῆ, 
Jig-tree ; χρυσέα χρυσῆ, διπλόη διπλῆ. See 15, 23, 120 6. 


Dratectic Forms. 


197. a. In the affixes of this declension, the Doric dialect. retains 
throughout the original « ; while, in the singular, the Jonic has ἢ in most 
of those words in which the Aétic and Common dialects have long a, and 
even in some in which they have short a, particularly derivatives in -ed 
and -οιἄ (130): as, Dor. gid, ὠδᾶς, wig, ᾧδᾶν " Ion. λύρη, λύρης, λύρῃ, 
λύρην, ταμίης (yet Hom. has Ged): Ep. ἀληθείη, εὐπλοίη, New lon. ἀλη- 
Onin, win, for ἀλήθειἄ, εὔπλοιᾶἄ, mid. 

b. In words in -ns, the primitive Direct Case in -& is sometimes re- 
tained by Hom. and some of the other poets as Nom. (187 b), for the sake " 
of the metre or euphony: as, ὁ αὖτε Θυέστὰά B. 107 ; ἱππότὰ Νέστωρ 
B. 336 ; ἐυρύοπα Ζεύς B. 146; βαθυμῆτα Χείρων Pind. N. 3. 92. Com- 
pare Lat. nauwta, scriba. So in feminines in -ἢ, the poets sometimes re- 
tain the old short a in the Voc. : as, νύμφα φίλη I. 130 ; Ὦ Δίκα, Sapph. 

ὁ. The old Gen. affixes, -Gdo and dwv, which often occur in the Epic 
writers, were contracted as follows: (1) In the Ion., they were regularly 
contracted into -w and -wv, with the insertion of ε after a consonant, but 
commonly in the poets with synizesis (120i, 117 b): as, ’Arpeld(do, ὠ)εω, 
᾿Ατρειδ(άων, Gv)éwv - Bopédo Bopéw, ‘Epuciw O. 214, ἐυμμελίω A. 47. (2) 
In the Dor., & absorbed the following vowel, and the affixes became ἃ 
and ἂν (131 a): as, ᾿Ατρείδ(αο)ᾶ, “Arpecd(dwv)av. (3) In the Att., do and 
dwv were contracted into ov (by precession from ὠ, 115) and @v: as, 
"Arpeld(ao, w)ov, ᾿Ατρειδ(άων)ῶν. 

ἃ. In some masculines, chiefly proper names, the later Ion. has e& in 
the Acc. for ἣν : as Aewvidea Hdt. 8.15 (-nv Id. 7. 206), δεσπότεἄ Id. 1. 11. 


198. 4. The Dat. pl. in Hom. commonly ends in τῇσι or -ys before 
a vowel (which may be referred to apostrophe) : as θεῇσιν A. 638, θεῇς εἰς 
I’. 158. In a few instances, -ys precedes a consonant : as, σῇς καί A. 179, 
πέτρῃς πρός n. 279. We even find θεαῖς ε. 119, ἀκταῖς M. 284. 

b. Antique, Ion., and Dor. forms are sometimes found in Att. writers: 

1.) The Dor. Gen. in -é, from some nouns in -as, mostly proper names: 
as, ὀρνιθοθήρας, fowler, Τωβρύας, Καλλίας - G. ὀρνιθοθήρα, Τ᾽ωβρύα Cyr. 5. 
2. 14 (Γωβρύου Ib. 2). So all contracts in -ἂἃς : as, βοῤῥᾶς, α. βοῤῥᾶ. 

2.) The Ion. Gen. in -ew, from a few proper names in -ys: as Τ᾿ ήρης, 
Καμβύσης - G. Τήρεω Th. 2. 29, Καμβύσεω Cyr. 1. 2. 1. 

3). The old Dat. pl. in -atov, which is frequent in the poets. So, in 
Plato, τέχναισι Leg. 920 6, ἡμέραισι Pheedr. 276 b. 


LO Φ͵πππΠ 


156 SECOND DECLENSION. — DIALECTIC FORMS. § 199. 


1. THE SECOND DECLENSION. 


(For the affixes and paradigms, see 11-14, 16, 20; for the gender, 176.) 


199. The flexible endings of the Nominative and Accusa- 
tive singular are wanting (187 b), 


1.) In the theme of the article: thus, 6 for és. 
2.) In the neuter of the article and of the pronouns ἄλλος, 


αὐτός, ἐκεῖνος, and ὅς - thus, ro, ἄλλο, αὐτό, ἐκεῖνο, 6, for τόν, &e. 

a. In crasis with the article (125), and in composition with the defini- 
tives τοῖος, τόσος, τηλίκος, and rivvos, the neuter αὐτό more frequently be- 
comes αὐτόν " thus, ταὐτόν and ταὐτό, for τὸ αὐτό " τοιοῦτον and τοιοῦτο, 

3.) Frequently in the Accusative of the Attic declension 
(200), particularly in ἡ ἕως dawn, ἡ ἅχως threshing-floor, 6 λά- 
yos hare, ἡ Kéws, ἡ Kas, ἡ Tews, ὁ ἔΑλθως - thus, Acc. ἕω (only), 
λάγων and λάγω, "Adv. So, in the adjectives ἀγήρως (22), dva- 
πλεως full, ἀξιόχρεως competent. 


200. Conrracts. If the stem-mark (172d) is a, ε, or o, 
it may be contracted with the affix. See dynpaos (22), ὀστέον, 
νόος (16); and also 120 ο, 6,1, 121. The contract declension 
in -ως and -ων, from -aos and -αον, is termed by grammarians 
the Atize Declension from its prevalence among Attic writers, 
although it is far from being peculiar to them (87 b). 

a. If the stem-mark is longa, ε is inserted after the contraction (120i): 
as, vibs (vws) νεώς (16), ναοῦ (vw) vew, ναῷ (vw) νε ἢ, ναόν (νων) νεών. 

b. The number of words belonging to the Attic declension is small. 


In some of them, the uncontracted form does not occur, or oceurs only 


with some change. Thus εὔγεως, fertile, is the contract form of εὐγαος 
(fr. (γααγγῆ, poet. γαῖα, earth), in place of which we find the protracted 
εὔγαιος and evyecos. 


Drarectic Fors, 


201. a. The affix of the Gen. sing. -o-o (13), which was commonly 
contracted to -ov, or, in the Aol. and stricter Dor., to -w (130 c), was often 
prolonged by the poets, especially the Epic (sometimes even by the Tragic 
in lyric portions), to -ovo (called the Thessalian form, and not receiving 
elision) : thus, πόντου Ἰκαρίοιο B. 145; δόμου ὑψηλοῖο a. 126; οἷο δόμοιο 
a. 330; ποταμοῖο... ᾿Ανάπω Theoc. 1. 68 ; μαλακῷ χύόρτοιο Id. 4. 18. 

b. A single contraction, with the insertion of ε (120i), gives the Epic 
genitives Iler(doo)e@o A. 327, Πενελ(αοο)έωο (v. 1. -éovo) Ξ. 489. The 
poetic doubling of t gives the Epic dwal form in -oviv (so always in Hom.). 

c. The new Ion. has Gen. forms with ε inserted : as, πυρέων Hat. 2. 
36, Σουσέων Id. 5. 35. In some proper names in -os, these imitate Dec. 1: 
as, Κροῖσος, Kpoicew Hdt. 8. 122 (Κροίσου 1. 6); Barrew, Κλεομβρύότεω, 
Id. 4. 160; 5. 32. 

ἃ, The old Dat. pl. in -ovot is common in the poets of all classes, and 
in Ion. prose. So, even in Plato, θεοῖσι Leg. 955 6. 


hk Bel ἢ 


a 
: 
3 


§ 204. THIRD DECLENSION. — MUTES. 157 
Ill. THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
(For the affixes and paradigms, see 11-14, 17-21; for the gender, 177.) 


202. In this declension, the Nomirative, though regarded 


: as the theme of the word, seldom exhibits the stem in its sim- 
ple distinct form. This form must therefore be learned from 
the Genitive, or some case which has an open affix (172 ὁ). 


a. Special attention must be given to the euphonic changes which occur 


- in those cases which have either close affixes, or no affixes ; that is, in the 
Nom. and Voce. sing., in the Acc. sing. in -v (where the stem receives the 
same changes as in the theme), and in the Dat. pl. 


b. The change of v, the original flexive of the Acc. sing., into a, was so 


extensively required in this declension by the rule (160 6), that a became 
the prevailing affix, and was often used even after a vowel. It will there-. 
fore be understood that the affix is a, if not stated otherwise. 


Words of Dec. 3 are divided, according to the stem-mark, or 


characteristic, into Murss, Liquips, and Purss (172 d). 


A. Motes (17). 


203. LaABIALs AND Patatats. These are all masculine or 


feminine (117 ὁ). Except in the irregular γυνή, the theme ends 
‘in ψ or € (151), and the Voc. has no distinct form. 


a. Γυνή, woman, wife, which has its theme after the form of Dez. 1, 


‘and is accented as if dissyllabic throughout, is thus declined : 8. N. γυνή, 
Ὁ. γυναικός (accented as if pronounced yvacxés), D. γυναικί, A. γυναῖκα, 
BY. γύναι" P. N. γυναῖκες, G. γυναικῶν, 1). γυναιξί, A. γυναῖκας " &e. 


b. In the stem Opry-, θ becomes τ, exeept where x is changed (159 b). 


‘In ἡ ἀλώπηξ, -exos, fox, the ε of the stem is lengthened in the theme. 


204. Linavats. In these, the characteristic lingual can- 


“not remain in any case which has either a close affix or no affix 


(202 a); and if another consonant is thus brought before o or 


to the end of a word, further change may be required : as, 


é\mi(ds)s, Kdpu(Os)s, παι(δσι)σί, κλεῖϊ(δν)ν, (παιδ)παῖ, cGu(ar)a , λέο(ντὴν 


(17) ; ἕλμι(νθεὴνς (156 Ὁ) ; @B(r)s, ἥπα(τ)ρ (17): ἄνα(κτς, κε)ξ, ἄν(ακτ)α, 
: Sdua(prs)p, λέ(οντς;, ovs, οεν)ων, λέ(οντσ)ουσι (17). Cf. Lat. εοὐα([8)5. 


ἃ. Barytones in -ἰς and -vs form the Acc. sing. both in -v and less fre- 


“quently in -a: as, ἔρις, κόρυς (17), ὁ, ἡ ὄρνις bird, ἡ χάρις grace’; Acc. ἔριν, 


ὄρνιν (160 6), and poet. ἔριδα, ὄρνιθα, commonly Xdpcra as the name of a 


goddess, but otherwise χάριν. So κλείς (17), ὁ γέλως laughter, and the 
compounds of πούς foot, have both forms: κλείν and κλεῖδα, γέλωτα and 
γέλων ; see Οἰδίπους, δίπους (21, 22). 


b. If a distinct Voc. is needed, linguals obtain this by dropping the 


-stem-mark (160 a) : as, παῖ, λέον (17) ; [Ἄρτεμις Diana, νεᾶνις girl, τυραν- 


vis sovereignty, V. "Apreut, vedo, τυραννί Soph. O. T. 380. A few proper 
names in -ἂς, -avros, then change v as in the theme : as, “ArAds, Πολυδά- 
μᾶς, Υ. "᾿Ατλίαντ, av, αα)ᾶ, Πολυδάμα Hel. 6.1.5. The Voc. form ἄνα is 
used only in addressing a god, as Zed ἄνα I’. 351, Soph. O. C. 1485, 


158 | THIRD DECLENSION, — MUTES. ἢ 205, 


205. Srems ΙΝ -ντ-. When, by the dropping of τ, ν is 
brought before s in the theme, the s is changed, if an O vowel 
precedes ; but otherwise the v: as, A€(ovts, ovs, οεν)ων, γίγίαντς, 
avs, αας)ᾶς (17, 153, 156) ; λύ(οντο)ων, O(evrs)eis, λύσας, dvs (26). 

a. Except ὀδούς (17), and participles from verbs in -wpi: as, δίδους, 
δούς, fr. δίδωμι (45). Yet Ion. ὀδών Hdt. 6. 107. 


206. Neuter Linevats. In these the stem-mark is always 
τ, which, in the theme, is commonly dropped after pa, but 
- Otherwise gives place to s or p (160): as, odp(ar)a, φ(ωτὴ)ῶς, 
ἧπ(ατ)αρ (17); εἰδίοτ)ός (26). Cf. Lat. potm(at)a, co(rd)r. 

a. The τ is also omitted in pwéX(cr)e mel, honey ; in γάλ(ακτ)α lac, milk, 
which also drops k ; and in γόν(ατ)ν genu, knee, and ddp(ar)v spear, which 
have also v in place of a (cf. 224c). In the poet. ju(ar)ap day, p takes 
the place of τ after pa ; and in ὕδ(ατ)ωρ water, σκ(ατ)ώρ filth, wp fakes the 
place of ar. 


207. Contract Lincvats. a. A few linguals drop the stem-mark 
(140 a) before some or all of the open affixes, and are then contracted : as, 
κλεῖδας (κλεῖα5) κλεῖς + κέρ(ᾶτος, aos)ws (17) ; τὸ τέρας, prodigy, P. N. τέ- 
para τέρᾶ, G. τεράτων repay: ὁ χρώς, skin, S. D. xp(wri, wi)@ (in the 
phrase ἐν χρῷ). So, in Hom., from ὁ ἱδρώς sudor, sweat, ὁ γέλως laughter, 
ὁ ἔρως love, ὃ. D. ἱδρ(ῶτι)ῷ, γέλῳ, ἔρῳ - A. ἱδρ(ῶτα, wa)a, γέλω. 

b. These neuters are contracted in the stem: οὖς, ὠτός, car, fr. the old 
otas, οὔατος (17) ; στέαρ orip, tallow, G. orédros ornrés* φρέαρ well, G. 
φρέατος ( ἃ) φρητός. See 120 b, ο. 

c. So, usually, nouns and adjectives in -εἰς, τεντος, preceded by o or ἢ: 
as, ‘Oz(oevrs, deis)ots, -(6e)otvros (17), ὁ πλακ(όειςγοῦς cake ; τιμ(ήεις) ἢς or 
As (109 a), τιμ(ἠε)ῆσσα, τιμ(ῆενγῆν, honored. Add some in -ts, -t80s : as, 
ἡ dats dds torch, παρηΐς παρῇς check, pwts pus blister. 


B. Liqums (18). 


208. Mascunine anp Feminine Ligquips. In these the 
stem always ends in ν or p, except in dds (6 sal, salt, ἡ sea), of 
which the singular is rare in Attic prose. For the euphonic 
changes in the theme and Dat. pl., see 153, 154, 156, 145 a. 
In -vs of the theme, (a) the s is changed after an Μ΄ or O vowel ; 
(Ὁ) the ν, after « or v; and (c) after a, in nouns the s, but in 
adjectwes the v: as, 

(a) λιμίενς, cev) hv, Saiu(ovs)wv (18) ; ὁ αἰ(ωνε)ών eevum, age, ὁ μ(ηνεγήν 
mensis, MONTH ; (b) p(ws, cas)ts (18), ὁ Φόρκ(ῦνεγῦς Phorcys ; (0) mac(avs)av 
(18), μέλ(ανε)ᾶς (23). 

ἃ, Except ὁ xrels, κτενός, comb ; εἷς, ἑνός, one (25) ; the Ion. ὁ pels (as 
fr. 5. wev-, yet G. μηνός) for μήν month, Hdt. 2. 82; and ὁ μόσσυν, -vvos, 
wooden tower. In the pronoun 7%s (28), ν is simply omitted in the theme. 

e. Most words in -ts and -vs have a second, but less classic form, in 
- and -ὖν : as, pis and piv, Φόρκυς and Φόρκυν, ὁ δελφίς and δελφίν., 

f. In the Voce. of ᾿Απόλλων, -wvos, Apollo, Ποσειδῶν, -Gvos, Neptune, 
ὁ σωτήρ, -fpos, savior, Saye, -épos, brother-in-law, and of the personal 


; § 212. : ‘LIQUIDS. PURES. 159 


words in 210, the natural tone of address has thrown back the accent as 
᾿ far as possible, and shortened the last syllable of the stem if long : "Απολ- 
λον, Πόσειδον, σῶτερ, δᾶερ, ἄνερ, πάτξρ, θύγατερ, Δήμητερ. If the accent 
is not thrown back, oxytone nouns retaining v or p in the theme have no 
distinct Voc. : as, λιμήν, ὁ, ἡ αἰθήρ, -épos, ETHER. 

209. Nevrer Liquips. A few nouns in which the stem 
ends in p are neuter. They are, for the most part, confined to 
the singular; and require, in their declension, no euphonic 
changes of letters. E. g. πῦρ, πῦρός (14; v lengthened in the 

monosyllabic stem), vexrap, -dpos, nectar. 


a. In éap (Feap) ver, spring, and the poetic κέαρ cor, heart, contraction 
takes place in the stem: N. ἔαρ, poet. Hp, G. and D. ἔαρος, ἔαρι, oftener 
ἦρος, hpi: N. κέαρ, in Hom. always κῆρ, D. κῆρι. 


210. Syncopatep Liquips. I. In a few familiar liquids, 
a short vowel is syncopated before the stem-mark : viz., 


a. In these three, the syncope takes place before all the open affixes: 
ἀνήρ (5. dvep-, sync. dvp-, ἀνδρ-, 146b) man; κύων (s. κυον, sync. κυν-) 
canis, dog, also syncopated in Dat. pl. ; ἀρνός (s. dpev-, syne. ἀρν-) lamb’s, 
of which the Nom. sing. is not used, but in its place, ἀμνός agnus, of 
Dec. 2. See 18. 

b. These five are syncopated in the Gen. and Dat. sing. : πᾶτήρ (18 ; 5. 
πατερ-, πατρ-) FATHER; μήτηρ MOTHER, G. μητέρος μητρός, 1). μητέρι 
μητρί; Oyarnp DAUGHTER, Ovya(répos)tpds, θυγα(τέριγτρί - ἡ γαστήρ 
stomach, γασ(τέρος)τρός, γασ(τέριγτρί- ἡ Δημήτηρ Ceres, Ajun(repos)tpos, 
Ajun(rept)tpt, also Acc. Δήμη(τερα)τρα. 

ὁ. In these words, the poets sometimes neglect the syncope, and some- 
times employ it in other cases than those which are specified. 

d. Compare Lat. pater, pa(ter)éris ; mater, ma(ter)tris ; caro, carnis. 

211. Comparatives in -wy often drop the ν before a and ε in 
the sing. and pl., and are then contracted (140 b) : as, 

μείζονα μείζ(οα)γω, μείζονες uel f(oes)ous, μείζονας μείζους (22). Both forms 
are freely used, and even together: as, ἀμείνονας καὶ κρείττους i. 7. 8. 

a, A like contraction occurs in a few other words, particularly in the 
Ace. of ᾿Απόλλων and Ποσειδῶν (itself contr. fr. Ποσειδάων, 131 a) : ᾿λπόλ- 
Awva ᾿Απόλλ(ωα)ω (iii. 1. 6), Ποσειδῶνα Ποσειδῶ. See for both forms, of 
which the shorter is especially used with the article, Pl. Crat. 402d, e, 
404d, 405d. So, likewise, ὁ κυκεών mixed drink, Acc. κυκεῶνα, and poet. 
kuke® (x. 316, κυκειῶ A. 624) 5 ἡ γλήχων pennyroyal, A. γλήχωνα, γλήχω. 


C. Pures (19). 


212. The euphonic changes in the declension of pures may 
be mostly referred, (I.) to a special law of Greek declension, 
and (11.) to contraction. 


I. Spectra LAw or GREEK DecLension. The 
Short vowels, ε and o, can never remain in the stenr, either 
before the affixes -s and -v, or at the end of a word. 
Hence, 


160 THIRD DECLENSION. — PURES, § 213. 


213. <A.) Before the affixes -; and -ν, ε be- 
comes 7, 4, v, or ev; and o becomes ὦ or ov: thus, 


1.) ἃ. In masculine nouns, ε becomes ev in simple, and ἡ in 
compound words: as, 

Simple, ὁ ἱππεύς, -éws (19 ; stem ὑἱππε-), βασιλεύς king, Θησεύς Theseus ; 
compound, Σωκράτης, -eos (19; fr. σῶς entire, and κράτος strength), ’Apt- 
στοτέλης, Δημοσθένης (observe the difference in accentuation). 

Excerpt the simples Ἄρης, -eos, Mars, ὁ os, ceds, moth ; and the fol- 
lowing, in which ε becomes v or t, ὁ πῆχυς, -ews, A. πῆχυν (19), ὁ πέλεκυς 
axe, ὁ πρέσβυς elder (properly an adj.) ; ὁ ἔχις, -ews, viper, ὁ ὄφις serpent, 
_ πρύτανις president, and also κόπις, κόρις, μάρις, and ὄρχις. 

Ὁ. In feminine and common nouns, « becomes ε : as, ἡ πόλις, 
-ews, A. πόλιν (19), ἡ δύναμις power ; ὃ, ἡ μάντις prophet. 

c. In adjectives, ε becomes v in simple, and ἡ in compound 
words : as, - 

Simple, ἡδύς, -éos, A. ἡδύν (23), γλυκύς sweet, ὀξύς sharp ; compound, 
ἀκρατής, €os (4 not, κράτος strength), weak, τριήρης having three banks of 
oars, or, as a substantive (vais, vessel, being umderstood), trireme. 

Except a few simple adjectives, in which € beccmes ἢ : as, σαφής, -éos 
(22), πλήρης full, ὑγιής healthy, ψευδής false. 

4. If the last element of a compound ends in -evs, -ts, or -vs, its form is 
commonly retained: as in ἀρχ-ιερεύς high-priest, φιλό-πολις (Gen. -ews, 
πἰδος, or -tos, 218) patriotic, di-rnxus two cubits long (yet contracted in 
neut. pl., as if formed in -ys, 219 ; διπήχ(εα)η iv. 2. 28). 


214, 2.) In monosyliables, o becomes ov ; otherwise ὦ : as, 
βοῦς, Bods, A. βοῦν (19) ; but-4 αἰδώς, -dos, shame. 

a, This rule applies also to linguals in which o precedes the stem- 
mark ; as, πούς, ποδός (17), and its compounds ; but εἰδώς, -dros (26). 

b. In feminine nouns of more than one syllable, in which the stem ends 
in o, the affix ς is absorbed, as if ε (142a). Thus from the stem ἦχο- is 
formed the theme ἠχίος, οε)ώ (19). So ἡ πειθώ, -όος, persuasion, ἡ Λητώ, 
-όος, Latona, &c. Except, as above, αἰδώς, and the Ionic ἡ ἠώς dawn. In 
these words in -ὦ and -és, the plural and dual are very rare, and only 
formed according to Dec. 2: as, exw, N. pl. Aexol ; εἰκούς, (224a). 


215. B.) In cases which have no affix, ε char- 
acteristic becomes t, v, or ev, or else assumes a eu- 
phonic s; and o characteristic becomes oz or ov: thus, 


a.) If the theme ends in -ς, ε becomes es ; but, otherwise, 
is changed as in the theme: thus, Nom. neut. and Voc. σαφές 
(22), ἡδύ (23) ; Voc. Σώκρατες, πόλι, πῆχυ, immed (19). 

Ὁ.) In the theme of neuter nouns, ε assumes s, becoming 
itself o (114 b) : as, ro γένος, -eos (19), τὸ τεῖχος, -eos, wall, 

Excerpt τὸ ἄστυ, -eos, town (19), the Epic τὸ wii, -eos, flock, and a few 
foreign names of natural productions in -t, as τὸ πέπερι, -ews, PEPPER. 


; § 217. CHANGES OF STEM-MARK. 161 


c.) In the Vocative, ὁ becomes oi, if the theme ends in ὦ or 
_ -os; but ov, if it ends in τους : as, ἦχοῖ (19), αἰδοῖ (fr. αἰδῶς, 214); 
_ Boo (19); and in like manner, Οἰδίπου (21, 214 a). 


216. a. After the analogy of ε and o, a characteristic be- 
comes av in ἡ vais (8. va-) ship, ἡ γραῦς, ypads, old woman; and 
“assumes s in the theme of neuters: as, τὸ γέρας, -aos (19). 


For the declension of ναῦς, see 19, 21, 222f. That of γραῦς agrees with 
the Dor. forms of ναῦς, as first given, contracting ypdas into γραῦς (122 a). 


Ὁ. In the Accusative singular of pures, the inflective v be- 
comes a (202b), except when the theme ends in -as, τες, -vs, -avs, 
Or -ovs: aS, ἥρωα, ἠχόα, ἱππέα (19); σαφέα (22); but from ὁ λᾶς, 
stone, xis, ois (contracted from ὄϊς), πόλις, ἰχθύς, πῆχυς, ναῦς, βοῦς, 
Acc. λᾶν ; κίν, οἷν, πόλιν, ἰχθύν, πῆχυν, ναῦν, βοῦν (19). 


ὁ. Proper names in -ns, -eos, for the most part, admit both forms of the 
Acc. : as, Σωκράτης (19), A. Σωκράτη (Plat.), Σωκράτην (Xen.) ; 6”Apys, 
Mars, A.”Apyand”Apny. So ἥρως, A. ἥρων Hdt. 1. 167 (ἥρωα 2. 148). 


ἃ. When the stem-mark is changed to a diphthong before -s 
in the theme, the same change is made before -ot in the Dative 
plural ; as, ἱππεῦσι, βουσί, ναυσί (19). 


217. These changes in pures indicate the use of certain consonants, 
as F, Σ, A, in their early inflection, to prevent hiatus (100). Of these, F 
and = were afterwards (a) simply dropped between two vowels (140 ; hence, 
except as above, 216 ἃ, in the Dat. pl., originally ending im -eov, 12) ; but 
otherwise (Ὁ) the F, as v (142), formed a diphthong with the preceding 
vowel or (c) was absorbed by it ; while the = (4) remained where there 
was no affix, but (6) before the affixes -s and -v was absorbed, as if ς, by 
the preceding vowel. If the old stem ended in -eA-, three forms after- 
wards arose: (f) the A remained, and the ¢ became t throughout by pre- , 
cession (114 d) ; (g) the A was dropped, and ε became ¢ in the Nom., Ace., 
and Voce. sing. ; (h) the A was dropped, and ε became t throughout. Thus, 

(a) BoFos Bods bovis, ixO(uFos)Vos, ἱππί(εξεΞ)έες " yév(eZos)eos (fr. γένος 5 
ef. Lat. g&niis, gen&ris, 139), yép(aZos)aos (19); Acros Δίός (21; cf. Lat. 
divus and dius, and bowm for bovwm), ἡδ(εξος)έος (28) ; cap(eZos)€éos (22). 

(Ὁ) Bors Bots, Borv βοῦν, Bor Bod, ἱππ(εξεο)εύς, imm(eF)ed, ἱππεῦσι, vaFs 
vais navis, ναυσί (19). In adjectives, and in a few masculine and neuter 
nouns, short v takes the place of ev: as, HdeFs ἡδῦς, ἡδ(εε)ῦ (28) 5 
THX (eFs)Us, πῆχὕν, πῆχὕ, ἄστ(εε)ῦ (19). 

(0) ixOuFs ἰχθύς, ἰχθ(υε)ύ, but Dat. pl. ix Over; κιΕς (or xels, Kiihn.) κίς (19). 

(4) Nom. neut. cadeX σαφές (22), yév(eZ)os (€ passing into a kindred 
vowel, 114b), yép(ad)as (19); Voc. Σώκρατ(εξ)ες (19). The peculiar 
form of the Voe. of ἠχώ and αἰδώς (215 0) may have arisen from the change 
of s to its corresponding ε, and then contraction with precession (142, 
118 Ὁ) ; thus, #x(oz, οε)οῖ (cf. 214 Ὁ). 

{e) σαφεξς σαφής (22), Zwxpdr(eZs)ys (19), αἰδ(οΣς)ώς (214), ὁ μυδς μῦς 
Mis, mouse, G. μυΣός μῦος miris (a). For ἠχώ, see 214 Ὁ ; cf. ἠχοῖ (d). 

(f) Meyape-, Megarian, had two forms, Meyaper- masc., and with pre» 
cession MeyapiA- fem.; from the former we have Μεγαρεύς, -éws, Megarian 
man, and from the latter (δ retained and becoming the stem-mark), Meya- 
pls, -ἰδος, Megarian woman or land. This became the prevalent mode of 


COMP. GR. K 


162 THIRD DECLENSION. — PURES. § 217. 


declining feminines in -ts, if we except abstract nouns in -ovs. Especially 
many fem. adjectives, or words which are properly such, are thus declined. 

(g) πόλ(εδε)ις, πόλ(εδΔος)εως, πόλει, πόλιν, πόλι " πόλεις, &c. (19). This 
became the usual form of fem. pures in -ts, in the Att. and Comm. Greek. 

(h) This became the regular form of feminine pures in -ts in the Ionic 
(130): thus, Ion. N. -ἰς, G. -ios, D. -ic, commonly contracted into -7, A. 
ἂν, V. -i; Pl. N. -ies, sometimes contr. into -is, G. ων, D. -iot, A. “ας, 
commonly contr. into -is: as, πόλις, πόλιος, πόλι, πόλιν * πόλιες, -iwy, πό- 
λισι, πόλιας, -is. The t was also the prevalent vowel in the Doric. 


218. As might have been expected, the three last forms 
(f, g, h) are far from being kept entirely separate ; and are not 
wholly restricted to feminines (213 a,b, 215 Ὁ). Thus, 


1.) Some words exhibit both the lingual and the pure inflection, the 
latter especially in the Ionic and Doric, which were less averse than the 
Attic to hiatus (131s): as, ἡ τρόπις keel, G. τρόπεως, τρόπιος, and τρόπιδος " 
particularly proper names, as Ἶσις, G. -ἰδος, -cos Hdt. 2. 41, D. -ἰδι, Ἴστ 
Ib. 59; Θέτις, G. Θέτιδος Θ. 370, Ὁ. Θέτι Σ. 407. Compare 207, 211. 

2.) In some pures in -ts, the Attic adopts, in whole or in part (par- 
ticularly in the Gen. sing.), the Ionic forms: as, 7 τύρσις turris, tower, 
G. τύρσιος vii. 8. 12, but Pl. N. τύρσεις iv. 4. 2, τύρσεων Hel. 4. 7. 6, 
τύρσεσι Cyr. 7.5.10; ὁ πόσις spouse, (ἃ. -ἰος, D. -ec* ἡ μάγαδις, -ιος, 
a kind of harp, D. μαγάδι vii. 8. 82 ; ὁ, ἡ τίγρις tigris, tiger, G. τίἔγριος, 
and in later writers τίγριδος, Pl. N. τίγρεις, G. rhypewy* some proper 
names, as ὁ Συέννεσις, G. -ἰος, i. 2. 12, ὁ Ἴρις, G. -cos vi. 2.1; and the 
adjectives ἔδρις intelligent, νῆστις abstemious. In like manner, ἡ, ὃ ἔγχε- 
Aus (217 b) anguilla, eel, G. éyxédvos, Pl. N. ἐγχέλεις, α. ἐγχέλεων * τὸ 
πέπερι (215 b), G. -ews and -cos. 


219. II. Contraction. Most pures in -as, -ys, 
τος, and -ὦ are contracted in aij the cases that 
have open affixes ; but others, for the most part, 
only in the Nom. and Ace. pl. and Dat. sing. ; and 
some, if at all, only in the Ace. pi. 


a. See 19, and also σαφής (which ἡ τριήρης and like words, properly 
adjectives, follow, 218 ο), ὑγιής, and ἡδύς (22, 23). The common con- 
tractions are given in the tables ; and also some in brackets which are 
rare or doubtful. The contractions there shown are sometimes omitted, 
and others sometimes occur ; especially in the poets. 

b. Of nouns in -w, the uncontracted form scarcely occurs, even in the 
poets and dialects. So, in αἰδώς and Ads (214 b): G. -(oos)ods, D. -οἵ, 
A. -6, V. -of. Cf., in Lat., Didd, G. -diis (92 b), Ὁ. A. V. -do. 

6. In proper names in -κλέης, cont. -κλῆς (fr. κλέος renown), the Dat. 
and sometimes Acc. sing. are doubly contracted. See Ἡρακλέης (19) ; 
and for its Attic forms, Mem. 2. 1. 21-26. For the later Voc. “Hpaxnes, 
used in exclamations, cf. 208 f. 

ἃ. For the contraction of the Nom. pl. of nouns in -evs into ἧς, see 121. 

e. It is not as often that we wish to pass rapidly over a noun which is 
the subject of a sentence, as over one which is a mere object. Hence, as 
we observe from the tables, the Nominative plural is less frequently con- 
tracted than the Accusative. 

f. Compare the contracts in -vs, -vos, with the Lat. Dec. 4: 


- $221. CONTRACTION. DIALECTIC FORMS. 163 


᾿ ἄρκῦς, net, Vos, -vi, -ὔν" ῬΙ. -(ves)is, -υων, -vot, -(υαε)ῦς. 


Ἢ 


arcs, bow, -(ϊ]5)8, -wi, -ὥην; Pl. -(ues)is, -wwm, -ubus, -( 65) 8. 


220. In the Attic and Common Greek, the endings -eos, 
-ea, and -eas, instead of the common contraction, receive in cer- 
tain words a peculiar change, which lengthens the last vowel. 
This change‘takes place, | 

a.) In the Gen. sing. of nouns in -ts, -vs and -evs, and some- 
times of nouns in -ε and -v: as, πόλις, G. πόλεος πόλεως, πῆχυς, 
-ews, ἱππεύς, -éws, ἄστυ, -eos and -ews (19) 5 πέπερι; -ews (215 b). 
Also ὁ “Apns (213 a), G. "Apeos and "Apeas. 

Ὁ.) In the Acc. sing. and pl. of nouns in -evs: as, ἱππεύς, 
Ace. sing. imméa ἱππέᾶ, pl. imméas ἱππέᾶς. 

c. This change appears to be simply a less perfect and an earlier mode 
of contraction. From the accentuation of such words as πόλεως, it is evi- 
dent that the ε (as in Mevédews, 120 1) has not the full force of a distinct 
syllable. We may infer that it commonly united as a species of semivowel 
(cf. 117 Ὁ) with the vowel following, and thus lengthened it. 

ἃ. The poets sometimes complete the contraction by synizesis : as, Ba- 
σιλέως Eur. Ale. 240, ᾿Αχιλλέα Id. Iph. A. 1341. Instances also occur, in 
the Attic poets, of the unchanged Gen. in -eos, of the Acc. in -eé and 
-εἄξ, and of the Acc. sing. regularly contracted into 4: as, Νηρέος Eur. 
Ion 1082, πόλεος Id. Hec. 866 ; govéd Ib. 882 ; ξυγγραφῇ Ar. Ach. 1150, 
Ὀδυσσῆ Eur. Rh. 708, and even ἱερῇ Id. Ale. 25. The regularly con- 
tractcd Acc. pl. in -εἰς, instead of -εὔᾶς, is sometimes found in Attic writ- 
ers, and later became the common form: βασιλεῖς Mem. 8. 9. 10. 

e. If another vowel precedes, the € is commonly absorbed by the -ws, -d, 
and -ἂς : as, Πειραιεύς Pireeus, G. Πειρ(αιέως)γαιῶς, A. Πειρίαιέαγαιᾶ. 

f. Grammarians give the name Attic Genitive to the form in -ews ; and 
also to the Gen. pl. in -ewv when accented upon the antepenult, the accent 
then showing a like use of €; as, πόλεων (19). The regularly contracted 
πηχῶν occurs iv. 7. 16. 

g. The Gen. in -ews is also found in a few adjectives in -ts (213d) ; in 
ἥμισυς, half (G. -eos ; later -ews and -ovs, and also Neut. pl. -(ea)y) ; and, 
in later writers, in other adjectives in -vs (thus, βραχέως Plut.). 


Diatectic Forms. 


221. (A.) Dialectic changes affecting the AFFIX. 


a. In the poets, especially the Epic, the Acc. sing: sometimes ends in 
-a, in words in which it has commonly -v ; as, εὐρέα Z. 291, νῆα or νέα, 
πόληα, for εὐρύν, ναῦν, πόλιν + ἰχθύα Theoc, 21. 45. On the other hand, 


_ the New Ion. often forms the Acc. of nouns in -ώ or -ὡς, -όος, in -οῦν (in 


the Mol. and stricter Dor. των, 180 ¢) : as, Ἰώ 70, ἠώς dawn, A. "Toby, ἠοῦν. 

b. In the Gen. pl., the Ion. sometimes changes των to -ewv (135 a, cf. 
201 0) : as, xnvéwy Hdt. 2. 45, μυριαδέων, for χηνῶν, μυριάδων. : 

ὁ. In the Dat. pl., for the common affix -ov(v, the poets often employ 
the old or prolonged forms -εσι, -εσσι, and -σσι (186 f, ἢ, 171). Hom. 
uses the four forms, though -eot rarely. The forms -εσσι and -eou are 
also common in Dor. and Alol. prose ; and -εσι is used in Ion. prose after 
the stem-mark v. Thus, χερσίν A. 14, χείρεσσι Τ'. 271, xelpeot T. 468 ; 


164 THIRD DECLENSION. — DIALECTS. § 221. 


ποσί B. 745, ποσσί B. 44, πόδεσσιν Τ'. 407 ; ἔπεσιν B. 73, ἔπεσσι δ. 597, 
ἐπέεσσιν B. 753; δαιτυμόνεσι Hdt. 6.57. So, F dropped between two 
vowels (217 a), βόεσσι B. 481, νάεσσι Pind. P. 4. 98, ἀριστήεσσι A. 227. 

ἃ. In the Dual, the Epic prolongs -ow (as in Dec. 2, 201 b) to -oviv : 
thus, ποδοιῖν FZ. 228, Σειρήνοιϊν μ. 52. 


222. (B.) Dialectic changes affecting the stem, either sim- 
ply or in connection with the affix. 


a. Many changes result from dialectic preferences of vowels (130s): as, 
Ion. θώρηξ, νηῦς, γρηῦς, for θώραξ, &c.: Dor. ποιμᾶν, ὠκύταᾶς, νᾶες, for 
ποιμήν, &c. ; χήρ for χείρ; ὧς, βῶς, ἀχῶς, for οὖς, βοῦς, ἠ;ζοῦς ; for κλείς 
key, Dor. (κλάεις clavis) κλάΐς, Ion. κληΐς, Old Att. Krys. 

Ὁ. The dialects and»poets vary greatly in the extent to which they em- 
ploy contraction, and in the mode of contraction (131). The Epic has 

ere especial license. In the poets, contractions are often made by syni- 
zesis (117 b), which are not written. In respect to the usage of Homer, 
we remark as follows: (1) In the Gen. sing., contraction is commonly 
omitted, except in nouns in -é and -as, G. -dos. In a few instances, -εος is 
contracted into -evs (131 b), or synizesis occurs : as, ‘EpéBevs Θ. 368, θέρευς 
η. 118 ; Πηλέος A. 489, πόλίος B. 811. (2) In the Dat. sing., both the 
contracted and uncontracted forms are freely used in most words: as, 
γήραϊ and γήραι or γήρᾳ (119), τείχεϊ and τεΐχει; ἥρωϊ and ἥρῳ H. 453. 
See 21. The endings -w, -v, and -ov are almost always contracted : as, 
κνήστι A. 640, νέκυι II. 526, ἠοῖ I. 618. (3) The endings -ea, -ewv, and 
~eas are commonly uncontracted, except by _synizesis : as,Geocd‘a Τ᾽. 27, 
ἄλγέα Q. 7, νέα «. 283; στηθέων K. 95; πολέας A. 559. So rédiad 0. 560 ; 
but Τυδῆ A. 384, Ὀδυσῇ τ. 136 (21; so βασιλῆ Oracle in Hdt. 7. 220). 
(4) The ending -ees is used both with and, oftener, without contraction-: 
as, πρωτοπαγεῖς veorevyées E. 194. (5) The neut. plur. ending -aa, with 
scarce an exception, is contracted or drops one a (cf. 4) : as, xépa, δέπα, 
γέρα B. 237. The form with the single short a sometimes occurs in the 
Attic poets: as, «péé Ar. Pax 192.. 

6. In common nouns in -cbs, the characteristic €F before a vowel regu- 
larly becomes ἡ, in the Epic: as, ἱππῆος, ἱππῆες (21 ; ἱππεῖς A. 151, and 
βασιλεῖς Hes. Op. 246, are doubtful). Doubtful examples of this change 
appear in Hdt. (βασιλῆος, βασιλῆα, 7. 137, &c.) ; while the regular inflec- 
tion of these nouns in Ion. prose, and in the Dor., is in -έος, &c. In 
proper names in -ets, the Epic has much freedom in using the long or 
short vowel according to the metre. So in [Ἄρης and πόλις (21). These 
Ep. and Ion. forms are not wholly unknown to Att. poetry, or even prose. 

ἃ. In words whose root ends in ee-, the Epic often unites these vowels 
into ἢ (as regularly in proper names in -«Aéns), or into εἰ ; but sometimes 
ἘΠῊΝ the first € into εἰ or ἢ. In many instances, the root is shortened 

y the poets, or in dialectic prose, by dropping one ε. E. g., forms of 
κλέος, fame, and of its compounds in -ens, κλεῖὰ Hes. Th. 100, κλέα I. 
189, ἐϊκλεῖας Κα. 281, εὐκλέας Pind. O. 2. 168, ἀκληεῖς M. 318, ἀγακλῆος 
Il. 738, δυσκλέὰ B. 115 (so éiippeios Z. 508, ὑπερδέζ P. 330, but ἐπιδεέες 
Hdt. 4. 180 ; see σπέος and Πάτροκλος, 21). 

e. In κέρας and τέρας (207), the + is commonly omitted in dialectic 
Greek ; and then in these, as in other neuters in -as, -aos, the later Ionic 
often changes a into € except in the theme: as, xépeos, γέρεα, Hdt. 

f. In ναῦς (νας, navis, 217 b, 19, 21), the original a remains throughout 
in the Dor. ; but in the Ion. passes by precession either into ἢ, or with 
short quantity, especially in the later Ion., intoe. The Att. retains the 
a in the diphthong av, but has otherwise ἢ or ε (the latter having appar- 


es Sea ee ele ee 


ἌΤΗΝ τὺ 


§ 224. IRREGULAR NOUNS. — METAPLASTS. - 165 


ently been inserted in the Gen. sing. and pl. after the contraction of do 
and ἄω, 120i; and the Gen. dual having followed the analogy of the 
other numbers). In the Att. poets, the Ion. forms occur rarely, the Dor. 


oftener : as, νηός Eur. Iph. T. 1385, ναός Soph. Ant. 715. 


IV. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 


223. Irregularities in the declension of nouns, which have 


- not been already noticed, may be chiefly referred to two heads: 
variety of declension, and defect of declension. 


A. Variety oF DECLENSION. 


a. A noun may vary, (1.) in its stem; (2.) in its method of 


declension ; and (3.) in its gender (180). In the first case, it 
_ is termed a metaplast (μεταπλαστός, transformed) ; in the second, 


a heteroclite (ἑτερόκλιτος, of different declensions) ; in the third, 
heterogeneous (ἑτερογενής, of different genders). 
b. Words which have distinct double forms, either throughout or in 


part, are termed redundant. Those, on the other hand, that want some 
of the usual forms, are termed defective. 


224. 1. METAPLASTS. 


Metaplasm has mostly arisen from a change of the stem, in the progress 
of the language, for the sake of euphony or emphasis, chiefly by the pre- 
cession of an open vowel, or the addition of a consonant to prevent hiatus ; 
while, at the same time, forms have remained from the old stem, espe- 
cially in the poets and in the dialects. The double stem may be, 

a.) In ov- and in o- (cf. 140, 211): ἡ ἀηδών, -dvos, nightingale ; from 
the stem dndo-, G. ἀηδοῦς Soph. Aj. 629, D. ἀηδοῖ Ar. Av. 679 : ἡ εἰκκών, 
«ὄνος, image ; (8. εἰκο-) G. εἰκοῦς Eur. Hel. 77, A. εἰκώ Hdt. 7. 69; Pl. A. 
εἰκούς Ar. Nub. 559: ἡ χελιδών, -dvos, swallow ; (s. χελιδο-) V. χελιδοῖ, 

b.) In a- and in -e (ε- esp. Ion., 222 6) : τὸ βρέτας, -εος, wooden image, 
poet. : τὸ κνέφας, darkness, G. Ep. xvépaos, Att. κνέφους Ar. Eccl. 291. 

c.) In F- and Far-: τὸ γόνυ, γόνατος, genu, KNEE, and τὸ δόρυ, -aros 
(5. dopF-, dop- 140, δορυ- 142, dovp- 145, δορξατ-, Sopar-, dovpar-), spear. 


- For the forms of δόρυ, see 21. Those which occur of χόνυ correspond : 


Ion. and poet. γούνατος, -ara, -άτων, -ασι ; also poet. γουνός, γοῦνα, &c. 
4.) With and without a- final: ὁ κάλως, cable, (s.,xada-, Att. Dec. 2), 

G. κάλω - Ion. κάλος, -ov, ε. 260 and Hadt. ; in later Ep., Pl. κάλωες, το. 
6. Lingual and Pure: 6, ἡ 8pvis, bird, G. ὄρνιθος (Dor. sprtxos, 168), 


=D. ὄρνιθι, A. dpviv and ὄρνιθα: Pl. dpvibes, &c.; (s. dpve-) N. dpvis, A. ὄρνιν, 
#Pi. Ν. ὄρνεις, G. ὄρνεων, A. ὄρνεις and ὄρνις (218); also τὸ ὄρνεον, -ov: 
ὁ σής, moth, G. ceds and later σητός : ὁ χρώς, skin, surface, -wrds, -wrl 


(χρῷ, 207 a), &c. ; Ion. and poet. G. χροός, D. χροΐ, A. χρόα. 
f.) Variously. Double : Sopv§(d0s)ots and -ξός Ar. Pax 447, -00, spear- 
maker; Ζεύς (5. Zer-, Acr-, Zav-) ; see 21, and cf. Lat. Jupiter (Zed πά- 


_ tep I. 276), Jovis, divus: ὁ θεράπων, -ovros, attendant ; poet. A. θέραπα, 


N. pl. θέραπες Eur. lon 94: τὸ φάος, -εος -ovs Cyr. 4. 2. 26, light, 


; poet. ; contr. φῶς, φωτός : ὁ, ἡ φάρυγξ, -vyyos, poet. -ὕγος +. 373, throat : 
ὁ Φόρκυς, -ὕος and -dvos, Phoreys: ἡ χείρ, hand, G. χειρός and χερός, Ke. 


(for the common forms, see 18 ; for the rest, the poets and Ion. prose). 


166 IRREGULAR NOUNS, —- HETEROCLITE. § 224, 


g. ἡ Θέμις, Themis, as a common noun, right, law, G. Θέμιδος, Ep. 
Θέμιστος B. 68, Ion. Θέμιος Hdt. 2. 50, Dor. Θέμιτος Pind. O. 13. 11, also 
Pl. Rep. 380a. In the Attic, θέμις occurs mostly in certain forms of ex- 
pression, where it is used without declension, as an adjective or neuter 
noun: thus, θέμις ἐστί, it is lawful; pact... θέμις εἶναι, they say that it 
ts lawful, Pl. Gorg. 505d; τὸ μὴ θέμις, that which is not lawful, Asch. 

h. ἡ πνύξ (8. πυκν-, as in adj. πυκνός, crowded ; by met., from the dif- 
ficulty of appending s in the theme, πνυκ-), G. πυκνός and later πνυκός. 

i. Poetic, mostly Epic, forms (with the themes to which they are 
referred or allied, in parentheses): A. pl. Αἰθιοπῆας A. 423 (ὁ Αἰθίοψ, 
-oros, Ethiopian) ; ἡ 8@s Hes. Op. 354 (δόσις gift) ; G. λιβός Asch. Ch. 
292, A. λίβα Id. Fr. 49 (ἡ λιβάς Libation) ; ὁ λῖς O. 275 (λέων lion). 

j. Many prolonged forms are used in poetry or dialectic prose: as, 
᾿Αθηναία, σεληναία, ἸΤηνελόπεια, for AOnva Minerva, σελήνη moon, Πηνελόπη. 


225. 2. ἩΕΤΕΠΟΟΙΠΤΈΒ. 


a. Of the ΕἾΒΒΤ and Srconp DecLENsIons. Some personal nouns 
have forms both in -os and in -y or -as, particularly compounds of ἄρχω 
(where the form in -os is usually more Att.): as, ὁ γυμνασίαρχος and 
-dpxns, gymnasiarch ; ὁ ἀδολέσχης and -os, prater. 
pb. Of the First and Tuirp DEcLENsions: ὁ “Avdys, -ov, poet. ᾿Αἴδης, 
Hades ; Dec. 3, Ep. G. “Atdos, D. “Atvéc also. poet. ᾿Αϊδωνεύς, -éws, Ion. 
-hos: ἡ γυνή (203 a): ὁ λᾶας, contr. λᾶς, lapis, stone, G. λᾶος M. 462, 
and Adov Soph. O. C. 196, D. Aa, A. λᾶαν, Adv, and Ada, Pl. N. Ades, &c. 

c. Some personal derivatives have double forms in -rys, -του, and in 
-THP, -τῆρος, Or -τωρ, -τορος : as, οἰκητής, οἰκητήρ, and οἰκήτωρ, dweller. 

d. Add some proper names, mostly in -ys, of which a part admit a 
double formation throughout, as Θαλῆς, Θάλεω (198. 2 ; late -od) and Θά- 
Aros: but others only in part: as, Τισσαφέρνης, -ovs, but ὦ Τισσαφέρνη 
di. δ. 35; Στρεψιάδης, -ov, but ὦ Στρεψίαδες Ar. Nub. 1206. 

6. Add, also, the Epic Ὁ. pl. ἀγκαλίδεσσι 2. 555 (ἡ ἀγκάλη arm) ; 
D. ἀλκί (always in the phrase ἀλκὶ πεποιθώς) E. 299 (ἀλκή might) ; ἡ ἅρ- 
maf Hes. Op. 354 (ἁρπαγή robbery) ; D. ὑσμῖνι Θ. 56 (ὑσμίνη battle) ; A. 
φύγα (only in φύγαδε, to flight) 8. 157 (ἡ φυγή flight). 

f. Of the Srconp and Tuirp DECLENSIONS: τὸ δάκρυον and _ poet. 
δάκρυ (14), lacrima (168 a), tear, G. δακρύου, 1). δακρύῳ - Pl. N. δάκρυα, 
G. δακρύων, D. δακρύοις and δάκρυσι Th. 7. 75: τὸ δένδρον, -ov, and Ion. 
δένδρεον, tree; Dec. 8, D. dévdpa, A. dévdpos Hdt. 6.79; Pl. N. dévdpn, 
D. more Attic form δένδρεσι iv. 8. 2, Th. 2. 75, but δένδροις iv. 7. 9: 
ὁ μόσσυν, -dvos, wooden tower, D. μόσσυνι v. 4. 26; Dec. 2, 1). pl. μοσσύνοις 
Ib. : ὁ ὄνειρος and τὸ ὄνειρον, dream (fr. ὄναρ, 228 a),G. ὀνείρου and ὀνείρα- 
τος" Pl. ὀνείρατα and sometimes ὄνειρα : Πάτροκλος (21) : τὸ πῦρ, πυρός 
(14), fire; Dec. 2, Pl. N. πῦρά, watch-fires, D. ripots vii. 2. 18. 

g. Some contracts in -ovs of Dec. 2 have also forms, mostly late, like 
those of βοῦς (19) : as, ὁ νοῦς mind, ὁ πλοῦς voyage, G. vods, 1 Cor. 14. 19, 
πλοός Acts 27. 9, Ὁ. vot Rom. 7. 25 ; ἡ πρόχους ewer, D. pl. πρόχουσι Ar. 

h. Some verbals have double forms in -os, -ov, and -evs, -éws, or -τήρ, 
«τῆρος : as, ὁ πομπός and πομπεύς, guide, ὁ iarpés and poet. iarhp, healer. 

i. Add the poetic D. pl. ἀνδραπόδεσσι H. 475 (τὸ ἀνδράποδον slave) ; 
ὁ ἔρος Ξ. 315, A. ἔρον I. 92 (ἔρως, -wros, love); A. ota, only in οἴκαδε, 
homeward, Hom., and even in Att. prose, vii. 7. 57 (ὁ οἶκος house). 

j. Of the Attic Szconp and THirp DECLENSIONS: ἡ ἅλως threshing- 
floor, G. ἅλω, ἅλωνος, and poet. ἅλωος " also Ep. ἡ ἀλωή᾽ ἡ ἕως dawn (s.‘a-), 
G. ἕω, D. ἕῳ, A. ἕω (199) ; Dor. ‘aus (8. ᾽δο-), G. d(dos)ods* Ion. ἠώς, G. 
ἠοῦς, D. ἠοῖ, A. ἠῶ and ἠοῦν (221 a); ὁ Μίνως, -w and -wos, Minos. 


§ 227. HETEROGENEOUS AND DEFECTIVE. 167 


226. 3. Hererocenzous Nouns. 


The names of things without life naturally vary in gender, according 
to the conceptions formed by the mind (175). Hence there are many 
words in which two genders are associated, either throughout or in part ; 
chiefly the neuter, as the natural gender of things without life, with the 
masculine or feminine, the genders of personification. E. g. 

a. Of Dec. I. ἡ τιάρα or ὁ τιάρας Hdt. 1. 132, tiara or tiaras, turban. 

b. Of Dec. 11. ὁ δεσμός band, Pl. τὰ δεσμά, of δεσμοί, and poet. τὰ 
δέσματα " τὸ ζυγόν and ὁ ζυγός, yoke, Pl. τὰ ζυγά - ὁ otros corn, Pl. ra 
σῖτα - τὸ στάδιον stadium, Pl. τὰ στάδια and οἱ στάδιοι" ὁ σταθμός station, 
balance, Pl. οἱ σταθμοί and τὰ σταθμά stations, τὰ σταθμά balances: ὁ Τάρ- 
ταρος (ἡ Pind. P. 1. 29), Pl. τὰ Τάρταρα, Tartarus, Tartara. 

6. Things, when viewed collectively, seem least akin to persons ; and 
other masculines and feminines occur with which a neuter pl. is associated 
(chiefly in the poets and dialects) : ὁ δρῦμός thicket, ὁ ἔπαυλος stall, 6 ‘tds 
arrow, ἡ κέλευθος way, 6 κύκλος circle, ὁ ῥύπος filth, and others. 

d. Of Dec. III. τὸ Gop, dopos, poet., sword; A. pl. dopas? p. 222: 
τὸ πλῆθος, -cos, and less common ἡ πληθύς, -vos, fulness: τὸ καρᾶ and 
(Soph. Ph. 1457) κρᾶτα, head, poet., G. κρᾶτός (τῆς, Eur. El. 140), D. 
κρᾶτί and κἄρᾳ Soph. ΕἸ. 445, A. like N. and also mase. κρᾶτα Soph. Ph. 
1207, pl. paras Eur. Ph. 1149. The following forms are found in Homer : 
5. N. A. κἄρη, xdp II. 392, 


G. κάρητος καρήἄτος κρᾶτός κράτος κρῆθενλ. ὅ88 κἄρήνου 
D. κάρητι Ο. 75 καρήἄτι κρᾶτί μ.99 κράᾶδτιχ. 218 Mar. 12 
P.N. A. κάρα Cer.12 xapydra κρᾶταθ. 92 xpadraT. 93 ~ κάρηνα 
α. P. 487 κράτωνχ. 809 καρήνων 
D κρᾶσί, κράτεσφι, K. 152, 156 A. 44 


e. Of Dec. I. and II. τὸ δρέπανον and ἡ δρεπάνη, sickle ; ἡ ἑσπέρα, 
Ep. ὁ ἕσπερος, vespera and vesper, evening (also τὰ ἕσπερα p. 191): ἡ πλάνη 
and ὁ πλάνος, error ; ἡ πλευρά and τὸ πλευρόν, rid. ΑἿΣ 

f. Of Dec. I. and III. ἡ βλάβη and τὸ βλάβος, -εος, injury; ἡ δίψα and 
τὸ δίψος, thirst ; ἡ νάπη and τὸ νάπος, dell ; ἡ στέγη and τὸ στέγος, roof. 

g. Of Dec. 11. and 111. ὁ ἀστήρ, -epos, and τὸ ἄστρον, astrum, STAR ; 
dand τὸ σκότος (also ἡ σκοτία), darkness ; ὁ and τὸ σκύφος, cup. 


B. Derect or ΠΕΟΙΈΝΞΙΟΝ. 


227. a. Some nouns receive no declension, as the names of 
the letters, some foreign proper names, and a few other words, 
chiefly foreign : thus, τὸ, τοῦ, τῷ ἄλφα - ὃ, τοῦ, τῷ, τὸν ᾿Αβραάμ > 
τὸ, τοῦ, τῷ πάσχα, passover. A word of this kind is termed i- 
declinable, or an aptote (ἄπτωτος, without cases). 

b. A few shortened or foreign proper names, whose stem 
ends with a vowel, receive s in the Nom., v in the Acc., and, 
if the vowel admits it, an iota subscript in the Dat., but have 
no further declension : as, 

Trois (21) ii. 1. 3; ὁ Διονῦς. (ἔτ. Διόνῦσος, Bacchus), A. Διονῦν, G. D. 
V. Διονῦ - ὁ Μηνᾶς (fr. Mnvddwpos) Th. 5. 19, Ὁ. Myra, A. Μηνᾶν, G. V. 
Μηνᾷ - ὁ Μάσκας, Ὁ. Μάσκᾳ, A. Μάσκαν, G.V. Μάσκα, i. 5. 4. 


¢. Many nouns are defective in number. Thus, 


168 ADJECTIVES. § 227. 


1. Many nouns, from their signification, want the plural : as, 6, ἣ αἰθήρ, 
wether, τὸ ἔλαιον oleum, OIL, ἡ ταχυτής, swiftness. Proper and abstract 
nouns do not require a plural, except when employed as common nouns. 

2. The names of festivals, some names of cities, and a few other words 
want. the singular: as, τὰ Διονύσια the feast of Bacchus, αἱ ᾿Αθῆναι Athéne, 
Athens, οἱ Δελφοί Delphi, οἱ ἐτησίαι the trade-winds. 


228. Some nouns are employed only in particular cases, 
and these, it may be, occurring only in certain forms of ex- 
pression : as, 


a. Neut. Nom. and Acc. : ὄναρ sleep, dream, ὕπαρ waking, reality ; 
ὄφελος advantage ; τέκμαρ and Ep. τέκμωρ, mark: Poet., δέμας instar, body, 
form ; 480s pleasure ; δῶ (s. Swu-, 160) A. 426 (τὸ δῶμα domus, house), 
pl. Hes. Th. 933 ; κρῖ (5. κριθ-, cf. Bpt, ῥᾷ, 238 b) ©. 564 (ἡ κριθή barley). 

b. Neut. λίπα with oil, indecl., chiefly as Dat. ¢ 227; Du. N. and A. 
ὄσσε eyes, poet., M. 466, Pl. ὄσσων, ὄσσοις, Eur. Hec. 915, 1105. 

c. Fem. G. μάλης (μασχάλη, ala, axilla, arm-pit), in the phrase ὑπὸ μάλης, 
under the arm, secretly, Hel. 2. 3. 23; D. Sat (7) battle, Ep., N. 286. 

ἃ. Dat. λχιτί, Ep., 2. 352, A. sing. or pl. Aira’O@. 441 (τὸ λίνον linum, | 
LINEN) ; Voc. masc. and fem. ὦ μέλε, my friend, in familiar address, Ar. 
Lys. 157 ; Voc. ὦ τάν or τἂν (also written ὦ ᾽ταν or Grav), my good sir (ὁ 
érns, -ov, comrade), Attic, Pl. Apol. 25 ο. 

e. A word which is only employed in a single case, is termed a monoptote 
(μόνος single, πτῶσις case) ; in two cases, a diptote ; in three,-a triptote ; in 
four, a tetraptote. 


CHAPTER III. 


DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
(For paradigms, see 22 -- 26, 28.) 


229. Adjectives are declined like substantives, 
except so far as they vary their form to denote 
variation of gender (173s). In this respect, they 
are divided into three classes, adjectives of one, of 
two, and of three terminations. 


a. In adjectives of more than one termination, the masculine is regard- 
ed as the primary gender, and the stem, theme, and declension of the 
masculine, as the general stem, theme, and declension of the word. The 
mode of declining an adjective is commonly marked by subjoining to the 
theme the other forms of the Nom. sing., or their endings ; and, if neces- 
sary, the form of the Gen. sing. Thus, ἄδικος, -ov- σαφής, -és + μῶρος, 
"πᾶ, -ov* ὁ, ἡ δίπους, -οδος, τὸ δίπουν. 


230. I. Ansrctives or ONE TERMINATION are declined 
precisely like nouns, and therefore require no separate rules or 


o> ye avn A eS δὼ 


§ 233. OF TWO OR THREE TERMINATIONS. 169 


paradigms. They are chiefly confined to the masculine and 
' feminine genders, or even to one of these. E. g. 


Dec. 1, ὁ γεννάδας, -ov, noble, ὁ μονίας, -ov, solitary, ὁ ἐθελοντής, -οὔ, 
voluntary : Dec. 3, ὁ γυμνής, -ῆτος, light-armed ; ἡ μανιάς, -ἄδος, frantic, 


6, ἡ ἄπαις, -atdos, childless, 0, ἡ Spouds, -ddos, running, ὁ, ἡ ἥλιξ, -ἰκος, of 
the same age, ὁ, ἡ ἡμιθνής, -jros, half dead. 


a. In indirect cases of Dec. 3, where all the genders have the same 


form, such adjectives are sometimes employed in poetry (rarely in prose) 
“as neuter: as, μανιάσιν λυσσήμασιν, with frantic ravings, Eur. Or. 270; 
Spoudds κώλῳ, with swift limb. A neuter is sometimes supplied from a 
kindred or derived root: as, ὁ, ἡ ἅρπαξ, -ayos, rapacious, τὸ ἁρπακτικόν. 


231. Il. In Apsectives or Two Terminations (22), the 
masculine and feminine agree, but the neuter differs in those 
cases which have special neuter affixes. 


a. It is only in Dec. 2 and 3 that adjectives can have a neuter (176 5) ; 
and in Dec. 3, labials and palatals do not form it, on account of the maim- 
ing of the stem which this would require (160). 

' b. The neuter must have two distinct forms, and can have only two, 
one for the direct cases sing., and the other for the direct cases pl. (181). 
Hence, every complete adjective must have two terminations. A neut. 
pl. is sometimes given, though rarely, to adjectives which do not form the 


neut. sing. : as, τέκεα πατρὸς ἀπάτορα, ‘fatherless,’ Eur. Herc. 114. 


ce. In δίπους (22), and similar compounds of πούς, foot, the neut. sing., 
on account of the difficulty of forming it from the stem, is formed from 
the theme, after the analogy of contracts of Dec. 2 (23): thus, ὁ, ἡ rpl- 
mous, -οδος, three-footed, τὸ τρίπουν. Some of these compounds have sec- 
ondary, chiefly poetic, forms in Dec. 2: as, τρίπος X. 164, Ἶρις ἀελλόπος. 


| 232. III. Apsecrives or Turee Terminations (29 5) dif- 
fer from those of two in having a distinct form for the feminine. 


It is only in Dec. 1 that the feminine has a separate form. 
These adjectives, therefore, are of two declensions, adding the 


feminine forms of the first to the masculine and neuter of the 


second or third ; as follows : 
Rute 1. If the theme belongs to the second 
declension, the feminine affixes of the first are an- 


nexed to the simple stem. 


_ a. Ifthe stem ends in ε, 1, p, or po, the feminine is declined 
like θεά - otherwise, like 634 (15): as, μώρᾶ, μωρᾶς" σοφή, σοφῆς" 
χρυσέᾶ, διπλοή (23); φίλιος, -a, -ov, friendly, ἀθρόος, -a, -ov, dense ; 


᾿ καλός, -n, -dv, beautiful ; dios divus, divine, F. dia, Ep. and Lyr. 874. 


233. στε Il. If the theme belongs to the 


third declension, the feminine affixes of the first are 


annexed to the stem modified by the consonant 1: 

__a. After ε or a liquid, I became 1, which was contracted, 

either directly or through transposition, with the preceding 

vowel (142 a) : as, ἧδε- (ἡδε1-) ἡδεῖα, μελαν- (uedavI-) μέλαινα (23). 
COMP. GR. 8 


170 ADJECTIVES. | § 233. 


b. The I united with a preceding r to form o (143 Ὁ) : as, 
mavt- (mavtl- πανσ-) πᾶσα, χαριεντ- (χαριεντῖ- χαριενσ-) χαρίεσσα 
(23, 155, 1560) ; λυοντ- (λυονσ-) λύουσα, θεντ- (θενσ-) θεῖσα (26). 

c. In perfect participles, this o united, as ε, with a preceding 
o, to form vs: as, εἰδοτ- (εἰδοτ!- εἰδοσ- εἰδοε-, 142) εἰδυῖα (26). 

a. The o remained, if the o had already been contracted with another 
vowel : as, ἑσταοτ- ἑστωτ- ἑστῶσα (26). Here the neuter has not only the 
contracted éor(ads)és, but also the syncopated ἑστός. 

ἃ. If the stem, after these changes, ends in z or p, the femi- 
nine is declined like μυῖα - but, if it ends in σ or », like μοῦσα 
ΟΥ̓ τράπεζα : as, ἡδεῖᾶ, ἡδείᾶς - macd, πάσης - μέλαινἄ, μελαίνης (23). 

6. For the fem. termination -eté, the shorter -€% (a added to the simple 
stem) is commonly used in Ion. prose, and sometimes in Ep. and other 
poetry (sometimes Ion. -éy, especially in Hipp.) : as, βαθέα, εὐρέα Hdt. 1. 
178, Babénv Ib. 75, βαθέης E. 147. The poets, in a few instances, prolong 
-éa of the neut. pl. to -eta for the sake of the metre (134 a) : as, ὀξεῖα Hes, 
Sc. 348, ddeta Soph. Tr. 122 (so σκιόειν for σκιόεν, Ap. Rh. 2. 404), 


234. Of those words which belong to the general class of 

ADJECTIVES (173), the following have three terminations : 
1.) All participles ; as, λύων, θείς, λύσας, εἰδώς (26). 

a. In participles, which partake of the verb and the adjective, a distine- 
tion must be made between the stem, affix, connecting vowel, and flexible 
ending of conjugation, and those of declension : thus, in Gen. λύοντος, the 
stem of conjugation is Av-, and the affix -ovros~ while the stem of declen- 
sion is λυοντ-, and the affix -os. 

2.) All comparatives and superlatives in -os : 98, σοφώτερος, -a, 
-ov, wiser ; σοφώτατος, -n, -ov, wisest. 

3.) All numerals, except cardinals from 2 to 100 inclusive : 
as, διακόσιοι; -at, -a, two hundred, τρίτος, -y, -ov, third. 

4.) The artzcle and adjective pronouns (28), except ris (ris). 

5.) Of adjectives commonly so called, semples tn -os, -εἰς, and 
-vs, with some others: as, μῶρος, σοφός, χαρίεις, ἡδύς, πᾶς, μέλας 
(23) ; ἑκών, -οὔσα, -dv, willing ; τάλας, -awa, -αν, wretched, 

b. For the most part, simples in -os have three terminations, and com- 
pounds, but two. Yet some compounds have three, and many simples, 
porhientarly derivatives in -eos, -ἰος, and -tpos, have but two. Derivatives 

rom compound verbs, as being themselves uncompounded, especially 
those in -ἰκός, -τός, and -réos, have more commonly three terminations. 
A distinct fem. is most found in oxytones, and least in proparoxytones, 
In many words, usage is variable (d, e, f). ; 

6. Adjectives in -ws, of the Attic Dec. 2, have but two terminations : 
as, ἀγήρως (22), ὁ, ἡ εὔγεως, τὸ εὔγεων, fertile. For πλέως, see 236. 

ἃ. In words in which the fem. has commonly a distinct form, the form 
of the masc. is sometimes employed in its stead: as, Adjectives in -ος 
(particularly in Att. writers, 174 b), δῆλος Eur. Med. 1197, ἀναγκαίου Th. 
1. 2; Adjectives in -vs and -es (chiefly in the poets), ἡδύς μ. 369, γενεὰν 
θηλύν, female sex, Kur. Med. 1083 ; Comparatives, Superlatives, Partici- 
ples, and Pronouns (all rarely, except in the dual, 6), ἀπορώτερος Th. 5. 
110, ὀλοώτατος δ. 442, τιθέντες Misch. Ag. 560. 


§ 236. IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 171 


e. This use of the masc. form for the fem. is particularly frequent in 
the dual, in which, from its limited use, the distinction of gender is least 
important : as, τὼ χεῖρε, the two hands, vi. 1. 8 (the fem. form ra is 
especially rare, Soph. Ant. 769) ; τούτω τὼ ἡμέρα, these two days, Cyr. 1. 
2. 11; ἰδόντε καὶ παθοῦσα Soph. O. C. 1676 ; πληγέντε Θ. 455. 

f. On the other hand, a distinct form is sometimes given to the fem. in 
words in which it is commonly the same with the masc.: as, ἀθανάτη Κα... 
404, a’rouara iv. 3. 8. This use is especially Epic and Lyric. 

235. To some adjectives, feminine forms are supplied from 
a kindred or derived stem. ‘These forms may be either re- 
quired to complete the adjective, or they may be only special 
feminines, used (particularly in poetry and the dialects) by the 
side of forms of the common gender (174 b). The feminines 
thus supplied most frequently end in -ts, G. -ἰδὸς (217 f), but 
also in -as, G. -ados, in -eta, -expa, &c. Thus, 

a. Masculines in -ἧς of Dec, 1, and in -ets of Dec. 3, have often cor- 
responding feminines in -ts, -t60s. These words are chiefly patrials and 
gentiles, or other personal designations, and are commonly used as sub- 
stantives. Thus, ὁ πολίτης, -ov, belonging to a city (θεοὶ πολῖται Asch. Th. 
253), citizen, ἡ πολῖτις, -ἰδος - ὁ Μεγαρεύς, -έως, ἡ Meyapis, Megarian. 
pb. ‘The compounds of ἔτος year (in -ἡς; -es of Dec. 3, but sometimes in 
-ys, G. -ov of Dec. 1), have often a special fem. in -ts, -ἰδος : as, ὁ, ἡ érré- 
τῆς, τὸ ἑπτέτες, seven years old, and ἡ éwréris, -cdos. 

c. Some compounds in -1,s, -¢s have a poetic (particularly Epic) fem. in 
κεια : as, ἠριγενής, -és, early-born, ἡ ἠριγένεια A. 477; ἡδυέπεια, Hes. Th. 

ἃ ὁ, ἡ πίων, and ἡ πίειρα, τὸ πῖον, fat ; ὁ πρέσβυς, old, venerable, 
fem., chiefly poet., πρέσβα, πρέσβειρα, and πρεσβηΐς " ὁ, ἡ μάκαρ, and 
ἡ μάκαιρα, blessed, poet. ; and some others. 


236. IrrecuLaR ApJectives. Among the adjectives which 
deserve special notice are the following : 


a. μέγας great, and πολύς much (24). In these adjectives, the Nom, 
and Acc. sing. masc. and neut. are formed from the stems μεγα- and πολε-, 
according to Dec. 8. The other cases are formed from the stems μεγαλ- 
and πολλ-, according to Dec. 1 and 2. The Voc. μεγάλε occurs once, 
isch. Th. 822. From its signification, πολύς has no dual. In Hdt., the 
forms from πολλός prevail throughout, yet not exclusively. 

b. ὁ πλέως, ἡ whéd, τὸ πλέων, full. The masc. and neut. are formed 
from s. rda-, according to the Attic Dec. 2 (200) ; the fem. is formed from 
s. whe- (with Nom. pl. πλέᾳ in imitation of masc., according to some 
editors, Soph. El. 1405). Ion. πλέος plenus, Ep. πλεῖος, -n, -ov. So, 
likewise, in Att. writers, the neut. pl. πλέα Cyr. 7. 4. 6, and the pl. 
compounds ἔμπλεοι, ἔκπλεα. In like manner ἵλεα N. pl. from ἵλεως. 

c. ὁ πρᾶος (24; by some written πρᾷος, 109 a), méld, borrows fem. and 
plur. forms from mpais, which occurs Pind. Py. 3. 125. 

ἃ. ὁ, ἡ σῶς, τὸ σῶν, safe. In this adj., contract forms from s. ca- are 
blended with forms from s. σω- (contr. from cao-), belonging partly to 
Dec. 2, and partly to Dec. 3. Thus, 


ij τὸ 
S. N. (σαος)σῶς Ar. σῶος iii. 1. 32 σῶα Hel. | (caov)oav vii. 6. 
A. (σαον)σῶν Th. σῶον Lys. 109. 3 oGayDem. ( σῶον Hdt. [32, 
P.N. ii. 2. 21 σῶοι, (cGes) σῶς Dem. σῶαι Hdt. | (caa)oa Eur. 
A. Lue. σώους, (cas) σῶς Dem. 98. 24. σῶα Hel.1.1, 24. 


172 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. § 236. 


In Hom., forms from σόος prevail, τ. 300. With the above may be 
compared the Homeric (faos) ξώς E. 87, Acc. f% IL. 445, = ἑωός, ζωόν, 
living (iii. 4. 5). 


237. a. Some adjectives vary in the mode of declension 
from the same stem: as, 


Dec. 1 and 3, κελαινώπαν Soph. Aj. 954, and κελαινώπεσσι Pind. P. 4. 
377, dark ; Dec. 2and 8, ἀλάστωρ accursed, ἀλαστόροισιν Soph. Ant. 974. 

b. In compounds of γέλως laughter, and κέρας horn, we find both the 
Att. Dec. 2 and Dec. 3: as, φιλόγελως, -ων, G. τω and -wros, laughter- 
loving, Bovxepw παρθένου, “ heifer-horned,’ Aisch. Pr. 588. Shorter forms 
a pag according to the common Dec. 2: as, νήκεροι hornless, Hes. 

p- 527. 

c. Adjectives in -ts vary in declension like substantives (118). 

d. Among other examples of varied injlection, we notice the Homeric 
ὁ éis B. 819, and jis II. 464, good, brave, τὸ ἐύ, ed, and 4%, G. ἐῆος A. 393 
(cf. 222 ο), A. ἐΐν and jiv, G. pl. neuter ἐάων Q. 528 ; ὁ épinpos A. 266, 
trusty, Pl. ἐρίηρες, ἐρίηρας, I’. 47, 378 ; ὁ πολύῤῥηνος X. 257, rich in sheep, 
Pl. πολύῤῥηνες I. 154 (cf. πολύαρνι, 238d) ; αἰπὺς ὄλεθρος N. 773, Ἴλιον 
αἰπύ O. 71, Ἴλιος αἰπεινή N. 773, πόλιν αἰπήν N. 625, αἰπὰ ῥέεθρα Θ. 369, 
Πήδασον αἰπήεσσαν ᾧ. 87 ; ἀργῆτι I’. 419, ἀργέτι A. 818, ἀργῆτα and ἀρ- 
γέτα ; ἀργύφεον Σ. 50, ἄργυφον Ὦ. 621 ; πόλιν... εὐτείχεον A. 129, πόλιν 
εὐτείχεα Il. 57; Tpolny ἐριβώλακα I. 74, Τροίην ἐρίβωλον I. 829; πολύτλας 
ε. 171, πολυτλήμων σ. 819, πολύτλητοι λ. 88. : 


238.. Among DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES, we notice, 


a.) The following, chiefly poetic: ὁ, ἡ ἄϑακρυς, τὸ ἄδακρυ, fearless, 
Acc. ἄδακρυν (the other cases supplied by ἀδάκρῦτος, -ov) ; so πολύϑακρυς 
tearful ; ὁ πρέσβυς (for fem. see 235d) old, as subst. elder, ambassador 
(in the last sense G. πρέσβεως Ar. Ach. 93), A. πρέσβυν, V. πρέσβυ" PI. 
πρέσβεις, πρεσβῆες Hes. Se, 245, elders, ambassadors, G. πρέσβεων, D. 
πρέσβεσι, πρεσβεῦσιν Lyc. 1056, A. πρέσβεις, Du. πρέσβη Ar. Fr. 495 (the 
plur. in the sense of ambassadors was in common use ; otherwise, the 
word was almost exclusively poetic, and its place supplied by ὁ πρεσβύτης, 
old man, and ὁ πρεσβεύτης, ambassador) ; φροῦδος, -η, -ov, gone, which, 
with the Nom. throughout, has the Gen. φρούδου Soph. Aj. 264. 

b.) Poetic feminines and neuters, which have no corresponding masc. : 
as, ἡ πότνια A. 357 (sometimes πότνΩ v. 61) revered, τὴν πότνιαν, ai πότνιαι 
{yet πότνιε Orph. H. 10. 20) ; ἡ θάλεια rich, H. 475; ἀνδρολέτειρα man- 
destroying, ZEsch. Th. 314; κυδιάνειρα ennobling, A. 225; εὐρυάγυια wide- 
streeted, A. 52; evpvodeins Δ. 52; ἱπποδάσεια crested, P. 295; ἀμφιδάσειαν O. 

809 ; ἡ Ats and λισσή, μ. 79, y. 293 (akin to λεῖος smooth) ; τὸ Bpt (8. βριθ-} 
Hes. ap. Strab. 364 (βριθύς heavy) ; τὸ pa (5. ῥᾳδ-) Soph. Fr. 932 (ῥᾷδιος 
easy ; cf. δῶ, κρῖ, 228 a) ; τὰ ἦρα and ἐπίηρα, pleasing, y. 164, A. 572. 

c.) Poetic plurals which have no corresponding sing. : as, οἱ θαμέες K. 
264, and ταρφέες A. 387 (yet ταρφύς Asch. Th. 535), -efar, -éa, thick, 
Jrequent ; pvrdppares . . . ἵπποι II. 370; οἱ πλέες A. 395, τοὺς reas B. 
129 = πλέονες, πλέονας, more. 

4.) Poetic oblique cases which have no corresponding Nom. : as, τοῦ 
δυσδάμαρτος unhappily wedded, Esch. Ag. 1319 ; καλλιγύναικος having 
beautiful women, Sapph. (135), Ἑλλάδα καλλιγύναικα B. 683 ; πολύαρνι 
Θυέστῃ B. 106; πολυϑένδρεσσιν Eur. Bac. 560; ὑψικέρᾶτα πέτραν Ar. 
Nub. 597 ; χέρηϊ, χέρηα, also Pl. xépnes, xépna or xépera, A. 80, A. 400, 
&c. (as fr. xep- hand, 224f; under the hand of, subject), inferior, worse. 


§ 240. NUMERALS, —- ADJECTIVES. 173 


CHAPTER IV. 
NUMERALS. 


239. I. Numerat Apsectives. Of numeral adjectives, the 
principal are, (1) the CarpINAL, answering the question, πόσοι; 
how many ? (2) the OrDINAL, answering the question, πόστος ; 
which in order ? or, one of how many ? (3) the Temporat, an- 
swering the question, ποσταῖος ; on what day ?eor, in how many 
days ? (4) the Mutrire (multiplex, having many folds), show- 
ing to what extent anything is complicated ; and (5) the Pro- 
PORTIONAL, Showing the proportion which one thing bears to 
another. 


240. 1. Carprnar, The first four cardinals (25), and those 
above 100 are declined; the latter as adjectives of Dec. 2 and 1. 
The rest are indeclinable, Cf. the Lat. cardinals. 

a. Εἷς, from its signification, is used only in the sing. ; δύω, only in 
_the dual and pl. ; and the other cardinals only in the pl., except with col- 
lective nouns in such expressions as ἀσπὶς μυρία καὶ τετρακοσία, 10,400 in- 
Santry, i. 7. 10, ἵππον eee 8,000 horse, Hdt. 7. 85. 

b. Εἷς has two stems, év- and Its compounds οὐδείς and μηδείς 
(written, with more strength, οὐδὲ ας, μηδὲ εἷς) have a masce. plural. 

c. The common form of the second cardinal is δύο, shortened from the 
regular δύω. The Dat. pl. δυσί, found in late writers and Hipp., also 
occurs (?) Th. 8. 101. Both Sto. (δύω) and ἄμφω, both (which is placed in 
25, as partaking of the nature of a numeral, with that of an emphatic 
pronoun), are sometimes indecl. (in Hom. never otherwise) : as, δύο πλέ- 
θρων i. 2. 23, δύω κανόνεσσι N. 407, χερσὶν ἅμ᾽ ἄμφω Hom. Cer. 15. 

d. In the derivatives from évvéa, évva-, for éva-, is a less classic form. 

6. In τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα, and the later Sekarésoapes; δεκατρεῖς, the τρεῖς 
and τέσσαρες are declined: δεκατρεῖς, δεκατρία, δεκατριῶν " τοῖς τεσσαρσικαί- 
δεκα. Yet we sometimes find τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα, and later even τεσσαρακαί- 
dexa used as indeclinable ; as in Hdt. 1. 86, Mem. 2. 7.2. The com- 
pounds from 13 to 19, both cardinal and ordinal, are often written sep- 
arately : as, τρεῖς καὶ δέχαὶ i. 5. ὅ, τρία καὶ δέκα Hat. 1. 119, τέσσαρες καὶ 
δέκα " τρίτον καὶ δέκατον Th. 5. 56, τέταρτον "καὶ δέκατον, Tb. 81, πέντε ἢ 
ἑκκαίδεκα Cyr. 1. 4. 16, πέμπτῃ ἢ ἕκτῃ καὶ δεκάτῃ Hel. 4. 6.6; also ἕν 
καὶ εἰκοστόν ΤῊ. 8. 109 

f. The cardinals become collective or distributive by composition with 
σύν " as, σύνδυο bini, two together, or two at a time, vi. 3. 2, σύντρεις terni, 
t. 429, συνδώδεκα duodéni, Eur. Tro. 1076. The distributive sense is also 
expressed by means of the prepositions dvd, κατά, and, in some connec- 
tions, εἰς and émi: as, ἐξ λόχους ἀνὰ ἑκατὸν ἄνδρας, 6 companies, each 100 
men, 111. 4. 21 ; κατὰ τετρακισχιλίους, 4,000 at a time, 111. 5. 8; els ἑκατόν, 
100 deep, Cyr. 6. 3. 23 ; ἐπὶ τεττάρων, 4 deep, i. 2. 15. 


2. The Orpryat Nomeers are all derived from the cardinal, ex- 
cept πρῶτος, and are all of Dec. 2 and 1. They all end in -ros (Hng. 


174 NUMERALS.— ADVERBS AND SUBSTANTIVES.  § 240. 


-th), except δεύτερος, ἕβδομος, and ὄγδοος - and those from 20, up- 
wards, all end in -οστός (Lat. -esimus). 

3. The Trempora, Numsers are formed from the ordinals by 
changing the final -os into -aios, -d, -ov: as, τρίτος τριταῖος, v. 3. 2. 

4, The Muutirepte Numpers end in -πλόος, contracted -πλοῦς (Lat. 
-plex), and are declined like διπλόος, διπλοῦς (23). 

5. The Proportionan Numpers have double forms, in -πλᾶσιος, 
-ἃ, τον (Lat. -plus), and, more rarely, -πλασίων, -ov, G.-ovos. Thus 
the ratio of 2 to 1 is expressed by διπλάσιος duplus, or διπλασίων. 


241. II. ΝΌμεβαι, Apverss. a. The numeral adverbs which 
reply to the interrogative ποσάκις ; how many times ? all end in -άκις 
(Lat. -tes), except the three first: as, δεκάκις decies, ten times, évvea- 
καιεικοσικαιεπτακοσιοπλασιάκις 729 times, Pl. Rep. 578 6. 


b. These adverbs are employed in the formation of the higher cardinal 
and ordinal numbers: as, δισχίλιοι bis mille, 2,000, πεντακισχιλιοστός. 

c. Other numeral adverbs relate to division, order, place, manner, 
&e.: as, δίχα or διχῇ, poet. διχθά, in two divisions, τρίχα, -χῇν Or -χθά, 
in 3 dwvisions ; δεύτερον secondly, τρίτον thirdly ; τριχοῦ in 3 places. 

III. ΝΌΜΕΒΑΙ, Sussrantives. These, for the most part, end in 
-ds, -ados, and are employed both as abstract and as collective nouns. 
Thus, ἡ μυριάς may signify, either the number 10,000, considered ab- 
stractly, or a collection of 10,000. These numerals often take the 
place of the cardinals, particularly in the expression of the higher 
numbers: as, δέκα μυριάδες, ten myriads = 100,000, i. 7. 10. 


242. a. When numerals are combined, the less commonly pre- 
cedes with καί - but often the greater with or without cai: as, 


πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν, five and twenty, i. 4.2; τριάκοντα καὶ πέντε, thirty and 
Jive, ΤΌ. ; τετταράκοντα πέντε, forty-five, v. 5. ὃ ; σταθμοὶ τρεῖς καὶ éve- 
νήκοντα, παρασάγγαι πέντε καὶ τριάκοντα καὶ πεντακόσιοι, στάδιοι πεντήκοντα 
καὶ ἑξακισχίλιοι καὶ μύριοι, ii. 2. 6 ; σταθμοὶ διακέσιοι δεκαπέντε, παρασάγ- 
γαι χίλιοι ἑκατὸν πεντήκοντα πέντε, στάδια τρισμύρια τετρακισχίλια ἑξακόσια 
πεντήκοντα, Vii. 8. 26. See ν. 5. 4, and § 240 6. 

b. From the division of the Greek month into decades, the days were 
often designated as follows ; μηνὸς βοηδρομιῶνος ἕκτῃ ἐπὶ δέκα, upon the 
[6th after 10] 16th of the month Boédromion, Dem. 261. 12; ἀνθεστηριῶνος 
ἕκτῃ ἐπὶ δεκάτῃ, 1d. 279. 17 ; βοηδρομιῶνος ἕκτῃ μετ᾽ εἰκάδα, ‘the 26th,’ Id. 

ce. Instead of adding eight or nine, subtraction is often employed : as, 
νῆες. . . μιᾶς δέουσαι τεσσαράκοντα, forty ships wanting one [40 — 1 = 39], 
Th. 8. 7; ναυσὶ δυοῖν δεούσαις πεντήκοντα [50 — 2 = 48] Ib. 25. 

d. In fractions, the denominator may be expressed ; or, if it is only 
greater by one than the numerator, it may be understood : as, τῶν πέντε 
τὰς δύο μοίρας, 2, Th. 1. 10, τῶν δύο μερῶν, of 3, Ib. 104, τὰ πέντε μέρη, ΓᾺ 

6. The combinations of fractions with whole numbers are variously ex- 
pressed : thus, (a) τρία ἡμιδαρεικά, three half-darics, i. 6. 14 darics, i. 3. 
"21 : (8) Particularly in Herodotus, τρίτον ἡμιτάλαντον, the third talent a 
half one, i. e. 24 talents (so Germ. dritthalb), Hat. 1. 50 ; ἕβδομον ἡμιτά- 
λαντον + τέταρτον ἡμιτάλαντον = τάλαντα δέκα, 64 + 834 = 10, ΤΌ. (ef. Lat. 
sestertius, fr. semis-tertius) : (y) Less classic, δύο καὶ ἡμίσειαν μνᾶν, δύω Kal 
ἥμισυ δραχμαί, Poll. 9. 56, 62: (δ) ἐπίτριτον, a third in addition, i. 6. 14, 
Ae 3.9; ἐπίπεμπτον, 14, Ib.: (€) ἡμιόλιον, half as much again, i. e. 
15,1. 3. 21. 


§ 245. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 175 


CHAPTER V. 
PRONOUNS. 


I. SUBSTANTIVE (27). 


243. 1. ῬΕΉΒΟΝΑΙ, ἐγώ, ov, of These pronouns have 
special laws of declension. 


a. The analysis of these pronouns (27 e) shows that the numbers vary in 
the stem; that the connective is € in the sing. and pl., and @ in the dual ; 
that the Acc. sing. has no flexive (the primitive Direct Case remaining as 
Aecc., while the Nom., in the 1st and 2d Persons, has the peculiar forms 
ἐγώ and σύ, and in the 3d, from its reflexive use, early disappeared ; com- 
pare the Latin) ; that the Dat. pl. has the flexive of the old Indirect Case 
(186 0), except in the form σφίσι, where the connective ¢, in imitation of 
other forms of this case, becomes t ; and that, in the contraction of the 
connectives and flexives, € passes into its kindred o in the Dat. sing. 
(114b). The dual of the 3d Pers. was distinguished from that of the 2d, 
by the accent, and by remaining uncontracted. 

b. The pronoun οὗ is used both as a simple personal pronoun, and as a 
reflexive ; but in the common language not greatly in either sense. See 
Syntax. To complete its inflection, the Ep. σφωέ and σφωΐν, and the Ion. 
σφέα are added in 27 a. 


244. 2. REFLEXIVE, ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ These pro- 
nouns, from their nature, want the Nom., and the two first 
also the neuter. They are formed by joining the personal pro- 
nouns with αὐτός. 


a. In the plur. of the Ist and 2d Persons, and often of the 3d, the two 
elements remain distinct : ἡμῶν αὐτῶν. Otherwise, the old Direct Case 
of the personal pronoun unites with the forms of αὐτός ; while, in the 1st 
Pers., and often in the other two, contraction takes place: (ἐμε-αυτοῦ) 
ἐμαυτοῦ, σε-αυτοῦ σαυτοῦ, ἑ-αυτοῦ αὑτοῦ. 


3. RecrprocaL. This pronoun is formed by doubling ἄλλος, 
other: ἀλλήλων, for ἀλλάλλων. From its nature, it wants the 
Nom. and the sing., and is not common in the dual. 


245. 4. INDEFINITE, ὁ δεῖνα. This pronoun may be termed, 
with almost equal propriety, definite and indefinite. 


a. Itis used to designate a particular person or thing, which the speaker 
either cannot, or does not care to name ; in the language of Matthie, it 
‘‘indefinitely expresses a definite person or thing”: Τὸν δεῖνα γιγνώσκει ; 
Do you know Mr. So and So? Ar. Th. 620. ‘O δεῖνα τοῦ δεῖνος τὸν δεῖνα 
εἰσαγγέλλει, A. B., the son of C. D., impeaches E. F., Dem. 167. 24. In 
the sing. this pronoun is of the three genders ; in the plur. it is mase. 
only, and wants the Dat. It is sometimes indecl.: τοῦ δεῖνα Ar. Th. 262. 

b. The article is an essential part of this pronoun ; and it were better 
written as a single word, ὁδεῖνα. It appears to be simply an extension of 


176 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. § 245. 


the-demonstrative ὅδε, by adding -ἰν- or -ἰνα, which gives to it an in- 
definite force (cf. 253 b), making it a demonstrative indefinite. It belongs 
properly to the colloquial Attic, and first appears in Aristophanes. 


246. History. a. The distinction of person, like those of case and 
number (186 Ὁ, c), appears to have been at first only twofold, merely sep- 
arating the person speaking from all others, whether spoken to or of. 

b. To denote ourselves, we naturally keep the voice at home as much as 
is consistent with enunciation ; while we denote another by a forcible emis- 
sion of it, a pointing, as it were, of the voice towards the person. The for- 
mer of these is accomplished by-closing the lips and murmuring within, 
that is, by uttering ™m, which hence became the great root of the 1st per- 
sonal pronouns. The latter is accomplished by sending the voice out 
forcibly through a narrow aperture. This, according to the place of the 
aperture, and the mode of emission, may produce either a sibilant, a lin- 
gual, or a strong breathing. Hence we find all these as roots of the 2d 
and 3d personal pronouns. 

c. The p- of the 1st Pers. passed in the old plur. (which afterwards be- 
came the ΤΑ, 186 g) into the kindred ν- (cf. Lat. nos) ; and in the sing., 
when pronounced with emphasis, assumed an initial & which passed by 

recession into εξ. In the new plur., the idea of plurality was conveyed 
y doubling the p (ἀμμ-) ; or more commonly by doubling the & to ἢ 
(115 a), pronounced with the rough breathing (ἡμ»). 

d. From this the new plur. of the 2d Pers. appears to have been formed, 
by changing a, the deepest of the vowels, into u, the most protrusive (ipp-, 
Ὅμ-). With the exception of this imitative plural, the plur. and dual 
of the 2d and 3d Persons have the same root, in which plurality is ex- 

ressed by joining two of the signs of these persons (σῷ- = & + F, the 
latter remaining in the Lat. vos). In the separation of the two persons, 
the sign o- became appropriated to the pronoun of the 2d Pers. (but in 
the Dor., το, as in the Lat., and also in the verb-endings -τε, -rov, -tis) ; 
and the rough breathing to that of the 3d Pers. (in an early state of the 
language, this was F-, 247 ἃ ; in Lat. it became s-; while in the article 


we find both the rough breathing and t-, and in verb-endings of the 3d’, 


Pers. both o, and more frequently rt). 

e. In the Nom. sing., the subjective feree appears to have been ex- 
pressed by peculiar modes of strengthening ; in the Ist Pers. by a double 
prefix to the p, thus, é-y-o-u (the y being inserted simply to prevent hia- 
tus), which passed into (éyoa, 160 f) ἐγώ ; in the 2d Pers. by affixing F, 
which with the preceding € passed into ¥ (cf. 217 b) ; in the 3d Pers. per- 
haps by affixing A, before which precession took place (217 f), so that the 
form became (FvA, fA or tA, ἃ, 160) ἵ or % (an obsolete Nom. cited by 
Apollonius). With this Nom. there appears to have been associated an 
Acc. & or ἔν, of which wiv and viv are strengthened forms. 


247. Duiatects. The dialectic forms of the PERSonNaL PRo- 
NOUNS arise chiefly, 


a.) From variation of stem: as, Dor. and Mol. τ for σ- (169 Ὁ ; some- 
times Ep., or even Ion.), τύ tu, Sap. 1. 13, τέ te, Theoc. 1. 5, τοί A. 28, 
Hat. 1. 9 ; Mol. and Ep. r- for the rough breathing, ré Alc. 56 [84], Fo? 
Sap. 2. 1 (so originally in Hom., 98 6, 102 8) ; Dor. ‘ap-, dpp-, 20]. and 
Ep. d&pp-, ὑμμ- (130 a, 167 c), for Ap-, dp-, ἁμῶν, duly Theoc. (d, 6). 

b.) ΠΩ want of contraction, or from peculiar contraction (181 Ὁ) : ἐμέο 
K. 124, σέο Hdt. 1. 8, σῴφωέ A. 8 ; (with precession, in imitation of the 
Gen.) νῶϊ Δ, 418 ; σφωΐν A. 338: ued Hdt. 7. 209, σεῦ Id. 1. 9, εὖ T. 464. 


~ 


§ 249. HISTORY. DIALECTIC FORMS. 177 


c.) From lengthening or repeating the connective (184 a, 135): ἐμεῖο A. 
174, opetas ν. 213: €€ T. 171, éot N. 495, τεεῖο (v. 1. τεοῖο) Θ. 37. 

4.) From want of a connective: dués Alem. 58, ἄμμες ᾧ. 432, ὑμές Ar. 

e.) From the retention of primitive forms having no flexive: ami, ὑμέ, 
ὕμμε, Ar. Lys. 95, 87, 1076, ἄμμε A. 59, ὕμμε Ψ. 412, σφέ A. 111. 

f.) From the use of different endings : as, Gen. Ep. -θεν (192), ἐμέθεν, 
σέθεν, ἕθεν, A. 525; Acc. sing. -v, μίν A. 29, viv Pind. O. 1. 40 (246 6). 

g.) From the retraction of the accent, or shortening the last syllable, or 
both ; and also from an extension of enclitic use : ἥμιν (v. 1. ἡμῖν) A. 147, 
Huw (v. 1. ἡμῖν) X. 844, Fuas (v. 1. ἡμᾶς) π. 372; σφεων Σ. 811. Cf. i. 

h.) Add the strengthened Nom. forms éywv A. 76 (in Hom. only before 
a vowel), τύνη Εἰ. 485 ; and the Ion. Acc. neut. pl. σφέα Hdt. 1. 46. 

i. Some of these forms are also found in the Attic poets: as, ἐγών 
Zisch. Pers. 931; ἐμέθεν Eur. Or. 986, σέθεν Id. Alc. 51, ἕθεν sch. Sup. 
66 ; viv (often, and without distinction of number or gender) Id. Pr. 55, 
Soph. El. 486, μίν (rarely) Asch. Th. 453, ai! τι Tr. 388, σφέ (often ; 
also in sing.) Id. Ant. 44; ὕμμε Ib. 846, ἁμίν Asch. Eum. 347 ; ἡμίν or 
ἥμιν Soph. El. 17, 41, ὑμῖν or ὕμιν Id. Ant. 308, σφας Ib. 839. This re- 
traction of the accent belongs especially to Sophocles. 


248. Reriexive Pronouns. In these the New Ionic compounds 
the Genitive of the personal pronouns with the forms of αὐτός, contracting 
oav into wu (181 6) : éue(o-av)wurod, ἐμεωυτῆς, ἐμεωυτῷς. In Hom., the 
elements are always distinct : as, ἕμ᾽ αὐτόν A. 271, col αὐτῷ Τ'. 51, ὃ αὐτήν. 


II. ADJECTIVE (28). 


249, All the pronouns which are declined in 28, may be 
traced back to a common foundation in an old DEFINITIVE, 
which had two roots, the rough breathing and τ- (cf. 246 Ὁ, d), 
and which performed the offices both of an article and of a 
demonstrative, personal, and relative pronoun. 


a. To this definitive the Greeks gave the name ἄρθρον, artus, joint, 
from its giving connection to discourse, by marking the person or thing 
spoken of as one which had been spoken of before, or which was about to 
be spoken of further, or which was familiar to the mind. The Greek 
name ἄρθρον became, in Latin, ARTICULUS, small joint, from which has 
come the English name, article. 

b. This definitive, when used as a demonstrative, or simply as the 
definite article, naturally precedes the name of the person or thing spoken 
of ; but when used as a relative, usually follows it : as, οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ ἀνὴρ 
ὃν εἶδες, this is THE man WHOM you saw; τὸ ῥόδον ὃ ἀνθεῖ, THE rose 
WHICH blooms. Hence, in the former use, it was termed the prepositive, 
and in the latter, the postpositive article. When prepositive, it was so 
closely connected with the following word that its aspirated forms became 
proclitic. Compare the different uses of the Germ. der, the Anglo-Saxon 
se, the Eng. that, &c. 

c. In the progress of the language, the forms of this old DEFINITIVE 
became specially appropriated, though with many exceptions in the dia- 
lects and poets, and some even in Attic prose (see Syntax) ; and other 
pronouns arose from it by derivation and composition. The forms 
τός and τή of the Nom. sing. became obsolete. Special care is required 
in distinguishing the forms of ὁ, ὅς, οὗ, τίς, and tis. Forms which have 
the same letters may be often distinguished by the accentuation. 

COMP. GR. 8* 1, 


178 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. — DEFINITE. § 250. 


A. ΕΕΊΧΝΙΤΕ. 


250. 1. ARTICLE, 6, ἧ, τὸ The prepositive article, or, as it 
is commonly termed simply, the article, unites the proclitic 
aspirated forms of the old definitive, 6, 4, of, ai, with the r- 
Jorms of the neuter, the oblique cases, and the dual. 

2. RELATIVE, ὅς, 7, 6. The postpositive article, or, as it is 
now commonly termed, the relative pronoun, has the orthotone 
aspirated forms of the old definitive. See 786, 788 g. 


251. 3. IvERaTIVE, αὐτός, -7, -6. This pronoun appears to 
be compounded of the particle αὖ, again, back, and the old 
definitive rés (249 c). It is hence a PRONOUN OF RETURN (or, 
as it may be termed, an zteratiwe pronoun), marking the return 
of the mind to the same person or thing. 

a. The article and αὐτός are often united by crasis (125) : as, αὑτός, the 


same, ταὐτόν (199 a) or ταὐτό (Ion. τωὐτό Hdt. 1. 53, § 131 e), ταὐτοῦ, ταὐ- 
τά, for ὁ αὐτός, τὸ αὐτό, τοῦ αὐτοῦ, τὰ αὐτά. ΄“ - 


252. 4. Demonstrative. The primary demonstratives 
are οὗτος, this, compounded of the article and αὐτός - ὅδε, this, 
compounded of the article (declined as usual) and de, an in- 
separable particle marking direction towards ; and ἐκεῖνος, that, 
derived from ἐκεῖ, there (28 1). 

a. The definitives of quality, quantity, and age, τοῖος talis, such, 
τόσος tantus, 80 much, τηλίκος so old, and τύννος tautulus, so smali, are 
strengthened, in the same manner as the article, by composition with 
αὐτός and δέ: thus, τοιοῦτος and τοιόσδε, just such, τοσοῦτος and το- 
σόσδε, just so much, τηλικοῦτος and τηλικόσδε, τυννοῦτος. These com- 
pound pronouns are commonly employed, instead of the simple 
(which are chiefly poetic), even when there 15 no special emphasis. 

Ὁ. In these compounds with αὐτός, if the affix of the first element 
has an O vowel, it unites with ad- to form ov; but otherwise, rt is ab- 
sorbed: as, (6 αὐτός) οὗτος, (ἡ αὐτή) αὕτη, (τοῦ αὐτοῦ) τούτου, (τῆς 
αὐτῆς) ταύτης, (οἱ αὐτοί) οὗτοι, (αἱ αὐταί) αὗται, (τῶν αὐτῶν) τούτων" 
(τόσος αὐτός) τοσοῦτος, (τόσῳ αὐτή) τοσαύτη. 

6. To demonstratives, for the sake of stronger expression, an ¢ is 
affixed, which is always long and acute, and before which a short 
vowel is dropped, and a long vowel or diphthong regarded as short: 
as, οὑτοσί, αὑτῆϊΐ, τουτί, hicce, Fr. celui-ci, this here (28) ; ἐκεινοσί illic, 
Fr. celui-la, that there ; ὁδί, τοσουτοσί. 

ἃ. This t paragogic is Attic, and belongs especially to the style of con- 
versation and popular discourse. It was also affixed to adverbs: as, ov- 
τωσί, ὡδί, νυνί, ἐνταυθί, évrevOevi. So, in comic language, even with an 
inserted particle, νυνμενί Ar. Av. 448, ἐνγεταυθί Id. Th. 646, ἐνμεντευθενί. 


5. Possesstve. The possessive pronouns are derived in 
Greek, as in other languages, from the personal; and are 
arranged in 28 according to the person and number of the pro- 
nouns from which they are formed. 


§ 255. INDEFINITE. DIALECTS. 179 


B. INpDEFINITE. 


253. 1. The SIMPLE INDEFINITE is tis, which has two stems: 
τιν-, declined throughout after Dec. 3; and re-, declined in the 
Gen. and Dat. only, after Dec. 2 (except that the Gen. sing. 
imitates the personal pronouns) with contraction : thus, 


τίς, τί (the v omitted as in the theme, 208 d), rivés, &c. : G. τέο rou Cyr. 
8. 5. 7, τοῦ ; Soph. O. T. 1435, Ὁ. τέῳ τῳ A. 299, 1. 9. 7, τῶ ; Soph. El. 
679 ; and, in the compound, ὅτου ἱ. 9. 21, Asch. Pr. 170, ὅτῳ ii. 6. 23, 
Pl. G. ὅτεων ὅτων vii. 6. 24, 1). ὁτέοις rors Soph. Tr. 1119, ὅτοισε Ar. Eq. 
758 (so, rarely, τοῖσι; Soph. Tr. 984). See c, and 254 Ὁ. 


2. The INTERROGATIVES in Greek are simply the ¢ndefinites 
with a change of accent. See Syntax, 563 s. 


a. Thus, the forms of the indefinite ris (except the peculiar ἄττα, which 
is rarely used except in connection with an adjective, and which is never 
used interrogatively) are enclitic ; while those of the interrogative τίς are 
orthotone, and never take the grave accent. In lexicons and grammars, 
for the sake of distinction, the forms τὶς and τὶ of the indefinite are writ- 
ten with the grave aceent, or without an accent. See 784 a, 787 b. 

b. The stems te- and tw- may be traced back to the great pronominal 
root t-, here rendered indefinite by the additions made. 

6. The short t of ris, and the omission of v in τί, suggest an inter- 
mediate root ti-, formed from te- by precession, and afterwards increased 
by v (cf. 218). To this intermediate root may be referred, according to 
Dee. 2, the Mol. rig ; and Dor. neut. pl. (ria) σά (ef. 143 Ὁ) Ar. Ach. 757. 


254. 3. The composition of és with ris forms the RELATIVE 
INDEFINITE ὅστις, whoever, of which both parts are declined in 
those forms which have the root rw-, but the latter only in 
those which have the root re-; thus, οὕτινος, but ὅτεο ὅτου. 


a. Of the double forms of the Gen. and Dat., the longer prevail in Attic 
prose, and the shorter in Attic poetry. 

b. The form ἅσσα, Att. ἅττα (169 8) appears to be compounded of ἅ and 
the Dor. σά (253). In certain connections, it passed into a simple in- 
definite, and then, by a softer pronunciation, became ἄσσα, ἄττα. 

6. In ὅ τι a space is used to-distinguish it from the conjunction ὅτι. 


255. Drarectic Forms. a. Article (28i, ἢ. With οἱ and ai of 
the Nom. pl., the old forms τοί and ταί are also used, especially for the 
sake of metre, euphony, or emphasis, in the Dor. and Ion. (chiefly the 
Ep.) ; and, rarely, even in Att. poetry. 

b. Lterative. The New Ion. often inserts ε in αὐτός and its compounds, 
before a long vowel in the affix (135 a, .281): αὐτέων τουτέων Hadt. 2. 3. 

c. Demonstrative (281, m). The shorter κεῖνος is also used by the Att. 
poets for the sake of the metre ; and, according to some, even occurs in 
Att. prose, as Hel. 2. 3. 48. 

d. Possessive. Some of the forms in 28 n also occur in Att. poetry: as, 
ὅς, Teds, duds or duds (sometimes used for ἐμός, as in Eng. owr for my). 

e. Indefinite. For dialectic forms, see 28 0, 253c. Hom. and Hat. 
have also regular forms from Sorts. Some references are added: ὅτις 

= ὅστις, but the first part undeclined) Γ΄. 279 (ὅστις Τ'. 167), ὅ ττι (171) 
©. 408, reo Hdt. 1. 58, rev (131 Ὁ) B. 388, τέο; B. 225, τεῦ; Hdt. 5. 106, 
téoot; Id. 1. 37, ὁτέοισιν O. 491, ὁτέῃσιν Hdt. 2.66 v.1, ἄσσα τ. 218, ὅτι- 
vas O. 492 (οὕστινας A. 240), dooa Hdt. 1. 188." 


180 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 256. 


CHAPTER VI. 
COMPARISON. 


256. ADJECTIVES and ADVERBS have, in Greek, 
three degrees of comparison, the Positivz, Com- 
PARATIVE, and SUPERLATIVE. 


a. Comparative and superlative forms may be analyzed into the BASE, 
which is commonly the stem of the positive ; the CONNECTIVE, which 
varies according to euphony, metre, and other influences; and the 
DEGREE-SIGN, to which, in the adjective, are also attached the AFFIXES 
OF DECLENSION. See 29. 


I. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 


A. By -repos, -raros. 


- 


257. In adjectives, the comparative is usually 
formed in -tepos, -a, -ov, and the superlative in 
-ratos, -n, τον. In receiving these affixes, the end- 
ings of the theme are changed as follows: 

1.) -os, preceded by a long syllable, becomes 
-o-; by a short syllable, -o-: as, 

κοῦφος Light, κουφότερος, -d, -ον, κουφότατος, -ἡ, -ον. 
σοφός wise, σοφώτερος wiser, σοφώτατος wisest. 

a. A syllable before a mute and liquid is here regarded as long : as, 
opodpss vehement, σφοδρότερος, -ότατος. 

b. The change to -w- takes place to avoid the succession of too many 
short syllables. Epic verse admits only two short syllables in succes- 
sion. Some exceptions to the rule occur in the poets for the sake of the 
metre: as, κακοξεινώτερος v. 376, ebrexvwrare Kur. Hec. 620. 

c. Adjectives contracted in the theme are commonly contracted in the 
Comp. and Sup. : as, πορφύρεος πορφυροῦς, purple, woppup(€w)arepos. 

ἃ. Ina few words, -os is dropped ; and, in a few, it becomes 
-at-, -eo-, OF -to- : as, commonly, 

παλαιός ancient, madatrepos, -αἰτατος " φίλος dear, φίλτερος, φίλτατος " 
(-os -αι-) φίλος friendly, φιλαίτερῦς, -αίτατος " (-os -εσ--) ἐῤῥωμένος strong, 
ἐῤῥωμενέστερος, -έστατος " so most contracts in -οος, as ἁπλ(όὀος)οῦς simple, 
ἁπλ(οέσ)γούστερος * (-os -to-) λάλος talkative, λαλίστερος, -ἰστατος. 

e. Μέσος middle, and νέος new, have old superlatives of limited and 
chiefly poetic use in -aros: μέσατος midmost, Ar. Vesp. 1502, Ep. μέσ- 


caros Θ. 223, véaros novissimus, last, A. 712, Soph. Ant. 627. Cf. ἔσχατος, 
(xpbaros) πρῶτος, ὕπατος (262d) ; and Poet. μύχατος inmost, πύματος last. 


258. 2.) -es, and -ης of Dec. 3, become -ec- ; 
and -vs becomes -v-: as, 


§ 261. SECOND FORM. 181 


χαρίεις agrecable, χαριέστερος, -έστατος " Todp(yjets)\qs daring, Tod- 
μι(ηέσγήστατος (207 c) Soph. Ph. 984; σαφής evident, σαφέστερος, -ἐστα- 
τος * πένης poor, πενέστερος, -έστατος * ὀξύς sharp, ὀξύτερος, -UTaTos. 

a. In adjectives of Dec. 1, -ς becomes -to-: as, πλεονέκτης, τ-οὐ, Cov- 
etous, πλεονεκτίστατος. 


259. 4.) In adjectives of other endings, -repos 
and -ratos are either added to the simple stem, or 


to the stem increased by -εσ-, -ἰσ-, τος, or -w-: as, 
τάλας, -avos, wretched, taddvrepos, -raros*. so μέλας black, μάκαρ, 
blessed, paxdpratos > (-εσ--) σώφρων, -ovos, discreet, σωφρονέστερος, -έστα- 
τος " so most adjectives in τῶν " (-to-) ἅρπαξ, -αγος, rapax, rapacious, ap- 
παγίστατος " (-w-) ἐπίχαρις, -ἰτος, pleasing, émvxapitarepos, -ὦτατος. 

a. No part of inflection is less strictly bound by rule than comparison 
(while the poets have here, as elsewhere, especial freedom) ; and the forms 
above stated are sometimes interchanged or varied from regard to metre, 
euphony, brevity, &c.: as, πτωχός poor, -drepos and -ίστερος, Ar. Ach. 425 ; 
ὑβριστής insolent, -rérepos, -τότατος, v. 8. 3, 22 ; ἐπιλήσμων forgetful, ἐπι- 
λησμότατος, Ar. Nub. 790 ; πέπων ripe, πεπαίτερος Aisch. Fr. 244 ; ἄχαρις 
disagreeable, dxaptorepos v. 392; τθύς straight, ἰθύντατα, for the sake of 
the metre, 2. 508 ; φαεινός, shining, padvraros ν. 93. 


B. By -ἰων, -ἰστος. 


260. A few adjectives are compared by -ίων 
and -ἰστος, commonly adding these to the root of 
the word. ͵ 


a. In adducing examples, a noun or verb will sometimes be introduced, 
as showing well the base: κακός bad, κακίων, κάκιστος - ἡδύς pleasant 
(ἥδω to please), ἡδίων, -ἰστος - αἰσχρός shameful (αἶσχος shame), αἰσχίων, 
.χιστος " so ἐχθρός hostile, κυδρός glorious, poet., and in Sup. οἰκτρός piti- 
able (ἔχθος hatred, κῦδος glory, οἶκτος pity), ἐχθίων, κυδίων, οἴκτιστος " 
ἀλγεινός painful (ἄλγος pain), ἀλγίων, -γιστος " κερδαλέος gainful (κέρδος 
gain), poet. κερδίων, -διστος - καλός beautiful (κάλλος beauty), καλλίων, 
«ros: (BeAt-, akin to βέλος, weapon 3), βελτίων better, βέλτιστος best. 

b. This was an early method of comparison, retained in a few common 
words, and in poetic forms of some others. For the declension of com- 
paratives in -wv, see 22, 211. The t in -ίων is regularly long in the Att. 
poets, but short in the Epic and Doric. Yet ἥδζον Eur. Sup. 1101. 


261. The different forms of the Comp. in -ov are well ex- 
plained by reference to -Iwv as their common origin, and to the 
various changes of the consonant I. Thus, we notice, besides 


the use of the corresponding vowel 4, 

a.) Contraction (sometimes with transposition), or omission between 
two vowels (142, 140) : as, πολύς much (base πολε-, sync. πλε-), πλείων 
or πλέων more, πλεῖστος most, Lat. plus, plurimus ; μικρός small (ue-) 
μείων minor, rare poet. μεῖστος minimus ; ῥάδιος easy (ῥά-) ῥάων, ῥᾷστος 
(Ion. ῥηΐων, ῥήϊστος, δ. 565); (Aw-, akin to Dor. λῶ ἐο desire, neut. pl. 
Adia desirable, Theoc. 26. 32) λωΐων, B. 169, Att. λῴων, vi. 2. 15, λῷστος ; 
(ap-, dpe-, in ἀρετή virtus, valur, virtue) ἀρείων poet., braver, better, ἄρι- 
στος best ; (apev-, cf. amcenus) ἀμείνων better ; (xep- or xerp-, 238 d) χείρων 
(Ep. xepelwv A. 114) inferior, worse, xelpioros. 


182 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 261. 


b.) The change into ow (rr) or f (143 c), the preceding vowel, if short, 
now becoming long by nature: as, τἄχύς swift, (θαχ-, 159b; θαχτων) 
θάσσων or θάττων, τἄχιστος - ἔλαχύς Ep., small, ἐλάσσων, ἐλάχιστος * 
μακρός long (μᾶκ-, μηκ-), μάσσων poet., μήκιστος - κρατύς Ep., strong, 
(xpatIwv) κρείσσων, κράτιστος (κρέσσων, Hdt. 1. 66, κάρτιστος, A. 266, 
§ 134, 171) ; ὀχΐγος Jittle, ὀλχίζων Ep., ὀλίγιστος - μέγας magnus, great, 
μείζων major (Ion. μέζων Hdt. 1. 202), μέγιστος maximus. 

6. Some Comparatives have a double form in -ἰων and -σσων " as, 
βραδύς bardus, slow, Bpadiwy, Hes. Op. 526, βράσσων K. 226. 

ἃ. Of the Comp. forms πλείων and πλέων, the Attic uses more the 
former, especially in the contracted cases ; but in the neut. sing., prefers 
πλέον, especially as an adverb. It sometimes syncopates πλεῖον to πλεῖν, 
but only in such phrases as πλεῖν ἢ μύριοι, more than 10,000. Hat. pre- 
fers πλέων, often contracting eo to ev: as, πλεῦν, πλεῦνος. The Epic 
varies according to the metre. 

6. Most adjectives compared by -wv, -ἰστος, have also forms, often more 
common, in -Tepos, -τατος ᾿ as, ἀλγεινός, μακρός, μικρός, -drepos, -ότατος " 
βραδύς, παχύς, ταχύς, -ὕτερος, -ὕτατος - βέλτερος and βέλτατος, Aisch. ; 
φίλος, φίλτατος, Cyr. 4. 3. 2, φιλαίτερος, 1. 9. 29, φιλώτερος, Mem. 8. 11. 
18 ; φιλίων τ. 351, φίλιστος, Soph. Aj. 842. Other adjectives compared 
in both ways are αἰσχρός, ἐχθρός, οἰκτρός, βαθύς deep, βραχύς short, &e. 

f. New poetic or late comparatives are made by changing -@v into 
-ότερος or -Tepos * as, χείρων χειρότερος, μειότερος, μειζότερος " λωΐτερος. 


C. IrrecuLaAR CoMPARISON. 


262. Many adjectives (a) are defective or redundant in com- 
parison ; and some comparatives and superlatives are formed 
(b) from positives which are not in use, (c) from words which are 
themselves comparatives or superlatives, or (4) from other parts 
of speech. Some of these are usually referred to positives in 


use, which have a similar signification. Thus, 

(a) Only those words which express properties that may exist in dif- 
ferent degrees, are compared ; except in a modified sense, for hyperbole, or 
for comic effect: as, μόνος alone, μονώτατος alonest, most emphatically 
alone, Ar. Pl. 182. See c and ἃ. 

(b) Several forms, not strictly synonymous, are commonly referred to 
ἀγαθός, good: thus, ἀγαθός, ἀμείνων, ἄριστος " βελτίων, βέλτιστος " κρείσ- 
σων, κράτιστος * λῴων, A@oros* poet. φέρτερος, φέρτατος and φέριστος (late 
ἀγαθώτατος, Diod. 16. 85). So, χείρων and χείριστος are referred to κακός " 
ἥσσων, ἥκιστος, to κακός or pixpds* ἐλάσσων, ἐλάχιστος, to μικρός or 
ὀλίγος. See 260 α, 261 ἃ, b. 

(c) Double Comparison. ἔσχατος last, extreme, ἐσχατώτερος (Οὔτε γὰρ 
τοῦ ἐσχάτου ἐσχατώτερον εἴη ἄν τι Aristl. Metaph. 10. 4), ἐσχατώτατος, 
‘Hel. 2. 8. 49 ; ἐλάχιστος least, ἐλαχιστότερος less than the least, Ephes. 
8. 8; πρῶτος first, πρώτιστος first of all, B. 228. 

(4) Comparatives and Superlatives from other parts of speech. βασιλεύς 
king, βασιλεύτερος more kingly, a greater king, I. 160, βασιλεύτατος the 
greatest king, 1. 69 ; κλέπτης thief, κλεπτίστατος most adroit thief; κύων 
dog, xtvrepos more dog-like, more impudent, Θ. 483, κύντατος K. 503 ; 
αὐτός himself, αὐτότερος Epich. 2 (1), adréraros (ipsisswumus Plaut. Trin. 
4. 2) his very self, Ar. Plut. 83; ἄγχι or ἄγχον near, ἀγχότερος nearer, 
Hadt. 7. 175, ἄγχιστος Soph. O. T. 919 ; ἄνω up, ἀνώτερος upper, ἀνώτατος 
uppermost, Hdt. 2.125 ; ἠρέμα quietly, ἠρεμέστερος more quiet, Cyr. 7. 5. 


§ 264. OF ADVERBS. — HISTORY. 183 


63; προὔργου of importance, προὐργιαίτερος more important, Pl. Gorg. 
458 c, προὐργιαίτατος " ἐξ ex, out of, ἔσχατος (104) extrémus, uttermost ; 
πρό pre, before, πρότερος prior, former, πρῶτος (257 6) primus, first ; ὑπέρ 
super, OVER, ὑπέρτερος superior, ὑπέρτατος and ὕπατος suprémus, highest ; 
ὑπό (Ὁ) sub, sus-, below, ὕστερος later, ὕστατος last. : 


II. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 


263. Adverbs derived from adjectives are com- 
monly compared. by taking the neuter singular com- 
parative, and the neuter plural superlative of these 
adjectives ; but other adverbs by -τέρω and -τάτω : 


σοφῶς (fr. σοφός, 257) wisely, σοφώτερον more wisely, σοφώτατα most 
wisely ; ταχέως (ταχύς, 261 b) quickly, θᾶσσον, θᾶττον, τάχιστα - ἄνω up, 
ἀνωτέρω, ἀνωτάτω - ἑἕκάς afar, poet. and Ion. ἑκαστέρω, ἑκαστάτω. 

a. Adverbs from which adjectives are formed are sometimes compared 
in the first method : as, ὀψέ late, πρωΐ carly, ὀψιαίτερον, -rara, &c. (257 ἃ). 
So μάλα very, μᾶλλον (143 a), μάλιστα. 

b. The adverbial Sup. has sometimes the neut. sing. form, chiefly when 
denoting time or place : as, πρῶτον καὶ ὕστατον, first and last, Pl, Menex. 

ce. The adverbial termination -ws is sometimes given to the Comp. ; 
and, rarely, to the Sup.: as, yaXerwrépws more severely, Th. 2. 50, μειζό- 
vos Th. 4. 19, ξυντομωτάτως most concisely, Soph. O. C. 1579. 

d. Some adverbs vary in their comparison : as, ἐγγύς near, ἐγγυτέρω, 
ἐγγυτάτω" ἐγγύτερον, ἐγγύτατα " less Att. ἔγγιον, ἔγγιστα " ἄγχι or ἀγχοῦ 
poet. and Ion., near, ἄσσον A. 335 (148 0), ἄγχιστα Asch. Sup. 1036, 
ἀσσοτέρω (cf. 261 f) p. 572, ἀγχοτάτω Hdt. 2. 24. 


264. History or CompARIsoN. a. So far as we can trace com- 
parison in the Greek, it appears to have commenced with an emphatic 
annexation of the old article, in its strong form tos, to the stem of the 
positive, with a connecting vowel where needed : as, vé-a-ros, THE new 
one, i. ἃ. the newest ; μέσ-α-τος, THE middle one (257 6). So, in numer- 
als, rpl-ros λόγος, THE No. 3 book. 

b. This form was then strengthened by doubling the root of the 
article: -rr-os. And now two forms arose. The first + became o: 
-στ-ος (147) ; or a euphonic vowel was inserted ; -rat-os. Connectives 
were also prefixed according to need or preference. Thus from φίλος, φί- 
λιστος, and φίλτατος or φιλαίτατος ~ among ordinals, χιλιοστός. 

c. The comparative distinguishes or separates one person or thing from 
another in respect to the possession of some quality ; and this separation 
has been extensively expressed by a liquid prolongation of the adjective. 
In Greek, both, v and p were used for this purpose, with a connecting 
vowel, viz. o before v (cf. 114 ο), and ε before p. After the analogy of 
the superlative, I (ore) was prefixed to -ov- ; and τ, with the preceding 
connective, to -ep- : φιλίων, φίλτερος, φιλαίτερος. The two Greek forms 
are mingled in the Lat. -ior; and the r appears also in the Germ. and 
Eng. : longior, langer, longer. The Sanskrit has analogies to the forms 
of both Greek and Lat. comparison. Its prevalent form is Comp. -taras 
(-repos), Sup. -tamas (-τα-τος, -i-mus). 


184 CONJUGATION. — VOICE, § 265. 


CHAPTER V1. 


GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION. 


265. Verbs are conjugated, in Greek, to mark 
five distinctions: Voicr, TENsr, Mopr, NuMBER, 
and Person. Of these distinctions, the first shows 
how the action of a verb is related to its subject ; 
the second, how it is related to time; and the 
third, how it is related to the mind of the speaker, 
or to some other action. ‘The two remaining dis- 
tinctions merely show the number and person of 
the subject. 


a. These distinctions are marked by PREFIXES, by AFFIXES, and also, 
to some extent, by CHANGES IN THE STEM. See 80 5, 49. 


266. A. Voice. The Greek has three voices: 
the ActivE, ΜΙΌΡΙΕ, and Passive (30a). 


a. The Middle is so called as intermediate between the 
Active and Passive, representing the subject of the verb not 
only as acting, but also as, more or less directly, acted upon : 
as, from λούω, to wash, ἐλουσάμην J washed myself, I bathed. 

b. The mzddle and passive voices have a common form, ex- 
cept in the Future and Aorist. In Etymology, this form is 
usually spoken of simply as passive, or as middle. Even in the 
Future and Aorist, the distinction in sense between the two 
voices is not always preserved. 

c. The reflexive sense of the mzddle voice often becomes so 
indistinct, that this voice does not differ from the active in its 
use. Hence, in many verbs, either wholly or in part, the mid- 
dle voice takes the place of the active. This is particularly 
frequent in the Future. When it occurs in the theme (172 e), 
the verb is termed deponent (depdnens, as if putting off its 
proper sense to take that of another voice). E. g. 

1.) Verbs, in which the theme has the active, and the Future has the 
middle form: ἀκούω to hear, ἀκούσομαι" Balyw go, Bhoouars γιγνώσκω 
know, γνώσομαι - εἰμί be, ἔσομαι - μανθάνω learn, μαθήσομαι. 

2.) Deponent Verbs: αἰσθάνομαι to perceive, βούλομαι will, γίγνομαι 
become, δέχομαι receive, δύναμαι be able, ἥδομαι rejoice, οἴομαι think. 

d. A Deponent Verb is termed deponent middie, or deponent passive, 
according as its Aorist has the middle or the passive form. 


§ 267. TENSE. 185 


267. B. Tensr. The Greek has seven tenses: 
the Present, Imperrect, Future, Aorist, PEr- 
FECT, PLUPERFECT, and Future PERFECT. 


a. Tenses may be classified in two ways: I. with respect to 
the time which is spoken of; II. with respect to the relation 
which the action bears to this time. 


b. I. The tme which is spoken of is either, 1. present, 
2. future, or 3. past. The reference to time is most distinct 
in the Indicative. In this mode, those tenses which refer to 
present or future time are termed PRIMARY or CHIEF TENSES ; 
and those which refer to past time, SECONDARY OF HISTORICAL 
TENSES. 


6. II. The action is related to the teme, either, 1. as doing at 
the time, 2. as done in the time, or 3. as complete at the time. 
The tenses which denote the first of these relations are termed 
DEFINITE ; the second, INDEFINITE; and the third, COMPLETE. 
These constitute three great FORMATIONS, or classes of forms, 
in the Greek verb. 


d. The Aorist (ἀόριστος indefinite) represents an action 
simply as performed. Its place is chiefly supplied in the Latin 
by the Perfect. Thus ἔγραψα scripsi, J wrote. 


6. Of the Future Perfect (also called the Third Future, and 
in old grammars the Paulo-post Future), the simple form is 
found in only a few verbs ; and, with this exception, this tense 
and those which are marked in 30 as wanting, viz. the endefinite 
present and the definite future, are supplied by forms belong- 
ing to other tenses, or by participles combined with auxiliary 
verbs. 


f. For the general formation of the Greek tenses, see 31. 
Τὴ respect to the details of formation, they are naturally asso- 
ciated in six systems: 1. the Present, or Definite System, in- 
cluding the Pres. and Impf.; 2. the Puture System, including 
the Fut. Act. and Mid.; 3. the Aorzst System, including the 
Aor. Act. and Mid.; 4. the Perfect (or Perf. Act.) System, in- 
cluding the Perf. and Plup. Act. ; 5. the Perfect Passive System, 
including the Perf. and Plup. Pass. and Mid., and the Fut. 
Perf.; and 6. the Compound System, including the Aor. and 
Fut. Pass., which are formed with an auxiliary (274). Of these 
systems, the Ist belongs to the great DEFINITE FORMATION ; 
the 2d, 3d, and 6th, to the INDEFINITE ; and the 4th and 5th, 
to the compLete. For the so-called second systems, see 289 Ὁ. 


186 CONJUGATION, —- TENSE. MODE, § 268. 


268. In some verbs the sense of the complete tenses, by a 
natural transition, passes into that of other tenses ; and the 
PERFECT becomes, in signification, a Present ; the PruPERFECT, 
an Imperfect or Aorist ; and the Future PERFECT, a common 
Future. Thus, ἵστημι (45) to station, Perf. ἕστηκα (I have sta- 
tioned myself) I stand, Plup. ἑστήκειν J stood, Fut. Perf. ἑστήξω 
7 shall stand ; μιμνήσκω to remind, Perf. Pass. μέμνημαι (I have 
been reminded ) I remember, Plup. ἐμεμνήμην I remembered, Fut. 
Perf. μεμνήσομαι 7 shall remember. 

a. In a few of these verbs, the Pres. is not used, and the PeErF. is 
regarded as the theme. Such verbs, as having a preterite tense for the 
theme, are termed PRETERITIVE. In like manner, those Perfect systems 


in which the Perf. is used in- the sense of the Pres. may be termed, for 
convenience, preteritive systems ; and even a Perf. so used, a Preteritive. 


269. C. Mopr. The Greek has six modes: 
the InDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE, IMPERA- | 
TIVE, INFINITIVE, and PARTICIPLE. 


a. For a table of these modes, classified according to the character 
of the sentences which they form, see 30 ὁ. 

b. In the regular inflection of the Greek verb, the Pres. and Aor. 
have all the modes; but the Fut. and the Fut. Perf. want the Sub- 
junctive and Imperative; and the Perf., for the most part, wants 
the Subjunctive and Optative, except as supplied by compound forms, 
and likewise, in the active voice, the Imperative. 

c. The tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative are related to each 
other as present and past, or as primary and secondary, tenses (267 b); 
and some have therefore chosen to consider them as only different 
tenses of a general conjunctive, or contingent mode, calling the Pres. 
and Perf. Opt. the Imperfect and Pluperfect Conjunctive. With this 
change, the number and general offices of the Greek modes are the 
same with those of the Latin, and the correspondence between tle 
Greek conjunctive and the English potential modes becomes more 
obvious. In the Infinitive and Participle, the forms called Present 
and Perfect belong also to the Imperfect and Pluperfect. Without 
changing familiar names, the relations of the modes and tenses are 
illustrated by the arrangement in 37. The Imperative, from its very 
signification, cannot belong to a past tense. 


ἃ. The passive verbal adjectives in -τός and -réos (Lat. -tus and 
-ndus), as closely akin to participles, are often included in tables of 
inflection. In the form of the stem, they commonly agree with the 
Aor. in -@nv, except as a preceding mute is changed before τ (147): 
as, Operréos, fr. τρέφω to nourish, Aor. ἐθρέφθην. 


270. Ὁ. NuMBER AND Person. The numbers 
and persons of verbs correspond to those of nouns 
~ and pronouns (265). 


§ 273. NUMBER AND PERSON. HISTORY. 187 


a. The Imperative, from its signification, wants the first person; - 
the Infinitive, from its character as partaking of the nature of an ab- 
stract noun, wants the distinctions of number and person altogether ; 
and the Participle, as partaking of the nature of an adjective, has the 
distinctions of gender and case, instead of person. 

b. The 1st Pers. sing. of the Pres. ind., is commonly regarded as 
the THEME of a verb (172 6); while, in adding its meaning, the Eng. 
Inf. is more frequently used: as, Avw to loose (yet also, J loose, or 
simply, loose). The 5ΤῈΜ is obtained by throwing off the affix of the 
theme, or it may be obtained from any form of the verb, by throwing 
off the prefix and affix, and allowing for euphonic changes. A verb is 
conjugated by adding to the stem the prefixes and affixes in 35 and 36, 

c. Verbs are divided, according to the stem-mark, or characteristic, 
into Murs, Liquip, Douste Consonant, and Pure Verps; and, ac- 
cording to the affix in the theme, into VERBS IN τω, and VERBS IN -μι. 
For a full paradigm of regular conjugation, see Av@ (37); for shorter 
paradigms of the several classes of verbs, see 39 5. 


ἃ. In λύω, the v is short in the Perf., the Plup., and the Compound 
System ; but otherwise, long in the common language. In Homer, it is 
commonly short in the Pres. and Impf. 


271. Ἐπ Historic View. a. The following view is offered as one 
which has much in its support, and serves to explain the general phe- 
nomena of the Greek verb: (b) The distinction of person was at first only 
twofold, p being affixed for the 1st pers., and a lingual or sibilant for the 
other two (246, 249) ; and there were only two numbers, sing. and plur. 
(c) The 2d and 3d persons were then separated, the 2d taking in the sing. 
the affix ς (sometimes θ or o6), and the 3d, + ; while they took new plur. 
forms in -τε and -wr, the old plural now remaining as dual (cf. 186 g). 

ἃ. A secondary tense was formed by prefixing ¢ to denote past time, 
while the original form now became a primary tense, expressing present 
and future time (267 b, 277). (e) An objective voice was formed, chiefly by 
adding at or o, or by inserting @ (-r0- becoming -σθ-, 147 ; and -pev com- 
monly becoming -μεθα, 142) ; and the older form now became subjective, 
or active (30, 285). (f) For euphony, a connecting vowel was used in at- 
taching the affixes to stems ending with consonants, and this became 
the common mode of inflection even when the stem ended with a vowel. . 


272. a. The Infinitive, which is substantive in its use and commonly 
~ expresses either a direct or oftener an indirect object, took the objective 
endings of nouns, -v or -t, or uniting these, -vat, which became in the 
Pass. -(ν-σθ-αὐ σθαι (cf. 271 6, 154s). (Ὁ, ὁ) The Participle, which is ad- 
jective in its use, took the adjective endings -vrs in the Act., and -pevos 
(or in an older form, afterwards used rather as a verbal adjective, -ros) in 
the objective voice. (d) From the original mode (which now became Jn- 
dicative), the Subjunctive was formed by using ὦ and ἢ as connectives, to 
express present contingence ; and the Optative, by protracting a simple vowel 
to a diphthong in t, to express past contingence. (e) An Imperative was 
also formed, naturally preferring short forms in the 2 Pers., but prolong- 
ing the forms of the 3 Pers., through the use of a 


273. a. A few verbs formed only the old Primary and Secondary 
Tenses ; (b, c) but, in most verbs, a Future and Aorist were formed by 
adding o to the stem, the older tenses now becoming Present and Im- 


188 CONJUGATION. — HISTORY. § 273. 


perfect. The Aor. was marked by the use of a as a connecting vowel, 
while the Fut. took the connectives of the Pres. (d) In many verbs, a 
new Pres. and Impf. were formed from a new stem ; and in some of these 
verbs. the old Secondary Tense remained as an Aor. (2 Aor., 289 a) ; and 
in a few, the old Primary (305f), as a Future. (e) Three reduplicated 
tenses were formed to mark an action as completed : the Perfect, having, in 
the Act., its Ind. in -a, its Inf. in -εναι, its Part. in -ws, and Pres. affixes 
in the other modes ; the Pluperfect, having, in the Act., the connective 
ea, cont. n, by precession εὖ (while, in both these tenses, the objective 
affixes are nude) ; and the Futwre Perfect, having the affixes of the com- 
mon Future. 


274. a. A special Aor. and Fut. passive were formed by com- 
pounding the past and future tenses of εἰμί, to be, with the old passive 
participle in -ros (rt becoming 8), or in some verbs with an early stem 
(2 Aor. and Fut., 289). (Ὁ) The old objective Aor. and Fut. now became 
middle, and the two voices were so far distinct in form. 


275. Subsequent modifications were chiefly euphonic : 

a. By a law which became so established in the language as not to 
allow exception (160), and which strikingly distmguishes Greek from 
Latin inflection, the endings p, τῷ and @ could not remain. They were, 
therefore, either dropped, changed, prolonged, or both changed and pro- 
longed: as, édver ἔλυε, λυομ (-oa, 160 ἢ, 120) λύω, λυοιμ λύοιμι, ar 
φησί (45u, 143b). See 296 5. 

b. In some forms, o fell out between two vowels, which were then 
usually contracted (140): as, ἐλέγ(εσο, €0)ov, λέγ(οισο)οιο. 

c. A new form of the 3 Pers. plur. secondary was formed by changing 
-τ of the sing. into -σὰν (i. 6. by changing τ final into o, 160), and then 
affixing the plural sign v, instead of prefixing it, with the needed union- 
vowel, which here, as after o in the Aor., was a, 160, 273 b): thus, 
3 Sing. égar, Pl. ἔφασαν. Cf. the form in -erwnt, in the Lat. Perf. (139). 

d. In the Greek verb, there is a great tendency to lengthen a short 
vowel before an affix beginning with a single consonant (it being already 
long by position before those beginning with two consonants). It is 
natural that this should appear especially in the shorter forms ; hence, in 
the subjective more than in the objective, and in the sing. more than in 
the plur. or dual: thus, gay dame φημί, pas φής, par φησί (a) ; but Pl. 
papéev> ἔφην, Epipev: φάμενος (45 u). 


276. a. We observe THREE CORRESPONDING PERIODS in declension 
and in conjugation. The oldest inflection in both, that of Dee. 3, and of 
the nude Pres. and Impf. (followed by the Perf. and Plup. pass.), was 
without connecting vowels. The next in order, that of Dec. 2, and of the 
euphonic Pres. and Impf. (followed by the Fut.), took the connecting 
vowels o and ε (Lat. o and τ, 6 and ὃ ; while the latest form of simple in- 
flection, that of Dec. 1, and of the Aor. and Perf. act. systems, made use 
of a (Lat. ἃ or 7) as a connective. 

b. In the Perf. and Plup. act., we find a series of euphonic devices, 
to meet the alternate demands of pure and impure stems; and, as the 
result, four successive formations: 1. the primitive nude formation; 2. 
the formation in -a, -av; 3. the formation in -«a, -Kkav after a vowel ; 
4. the formation in -κα, -kav after a consonant (after a labial or palatal 
mute, softened to -d, -eiv, 149). The last formation nowhere appears in 
Hom., and the third only in a few words. See 289, 317s. 


ἣν 


§ 278. PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. —- AUGMENT. 189 


CHAPTER VIII. 
PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. 


277. The Greek verb has two prefixes: the 
AvueMENT and the REpUPLICATION (32). 


I. The AugMENT (augmentum, mcrease) pre- 
fixes ε- in the SECONDARY TENSES of the Indica- 
tive, to denote past time (271 d). 


a. If the verb begins with a consonant, the e- constitutes a 
distinct syllable, and the augment is termed SYLLABIC: as, 
Avw to loose, γνωρίζω recognize, ῥίπτω throw; Impf. ἔλῦον, ἐγνώ- 
ριζον, ἔῤῥιπτον (146) ; Aor. ἔλῦσα, ἐγνώρισα, ἔῤῥιψα. 

b. If the verb begins with a vowel, the ε- unites with it, and 
the augment is termed TEMPORAL. 

6. The syllabic augment is so named, because it increases the number 
of syllables ; the temporal (temporalis, from tempus, ¢ime), because it in- 
creases the time, or quantity, of an initial short vowel. For the syllabic 


augment before a vowel, see 279 Ὁ. The breathing of an initial vowel re- 
mains the same after the augment. 


278. ΓΕΒ ror THE TremporaL AuGMENT (7). a. The 
prefix e- unites with a to form η, and with the other vowels, if 
short, to form the cognate long vowels : as, 

᾿ἄδικέω to injure, ᾿ἀϑλέω contend, ἐλπίζω hope, “ἱκετεύω supplicate, ὀρθόω 
erect, “υβρίζω insult ; Impf. (éa)qdixour, ἤθλουν, (ἐε) ἤλπιζον, (ἐϊ ) τκέτευον, 
(ἐογώρθουν, (ἐὺ) ὑβριΐζον " Aor. ἠδίκησα, ἤθλησα, ἤλπισα, ‘Txérevoa, Ke. 

Ὁ. In like manner, the e- unites with the prepositive of the 
diphthong a, and also of av and o not followed by a vowel in 
the stem : as, 

airéw to ask, αὐξάνω increase, οἱἰκτίζω pity, οἴομαι think ; Impf. (éar) 
frou (109), ηὔξανον, ᾧκτιζον, φόμην " Aor. ἤτησα, ηὔξησα, ᾧκτισα, φήθην. 

c. In other cases, the e- is absorbed by the initial vowel or 
diphthong, without producing any change : as, 

ἡγέομαι to lead, ὠφελέω profit, exw yield, οἰωνίζομαι augur, οὐτάζω 
wound ; Impf. (ἑη) ἡγούμην, ὠφέλουν, εἶκον, οἰωνιζόμην, οὕταζον + Aor. ἡγη- 
σάμην, ὠφέλησα, εἶξα, οἰωνισάμην, οὔτασα. 

ἃ. But in verbs beginning with ev, a few beginning with on, εἰκάζω fo 
conjecture, and avalve to dry, usage is variable: as, εἴκα ἕον and in Att. 
also ἤκαζον, αὐάνθην and ηὐάνθην " εὔχομαι pray, εὐξάμην and ηὐξάμην " 
οἰστράω goad, οἴστρησα or ᾧστρησα Kur. Bac. 32. Ei is also changed in 
gew and ἥἤδειν (45 m, 46 a). on 


εἰ 
t 


190 PREFIXES. — AUGMENT. REDUPLICATION. § 279. 


279. a. The verbs βούλομαι to will, δύναμαι tobe able, and 
μέλλω to purpose, sometimes add the temporal to the syllabic 
augment, particularly in the later Attic : as, 

ἐβουλόμην and ἠβουλόμην, ἐδυνήθην and ἠδυνήθην, ἔμελλον and ἤμελλον. 
Like forms are found from ἀπολαύω enjoy, and παρανομέω transgress. 

b. In a few verbs beginning with a vowel, the e- constitutes 
a distinct syllable, with, sometimes, a double augment : as, 

ἄγνῦμι to break, ἔαξα " ἀνοίγω to open, ἀνέῳγον (278 Ὁ), ἀνέῳξα. Add 
ἁλίσκομαι to be captured, ἁνδάνω (lon. and poet.) please, δράω sce, οὐρέω 
mingo, ὠθέω push, ὠνέομαν buy, and some poetic, chiefly Epic, forms : as, 
-ἐῳνοχόει Δ. 3. 

c. In ἃ few verbs beginning with ε, the usual contraction of 
ee into εἰ takes place (121) : as, 

édw to permit, εἴων, εἴασα. Add ἐθίζω to accustom, ἑλίσσω roll, ἕλκω 
draw, ἕπω be occupied with, ἐργάζομαι work, ἕρπω and ἑρπύζω serpo, creep, 
ἑστιάω entertain, ἔχω have ; the Aorists εἶλον took, eica (Ion. and poet.) 
set, εἷμεν, εἵμην, εἵἴθην (45k, n) ; and the Plup. εἱστήκειν fr. Perf. ἕστηκα 
(45 f) stand. So εἰ from ἐΐ (119) in the ‘Aor. εἶδον, εἰδόμην (s. ἰδ-, 50), I saw. 

ἃ. An initial ε followed by o unites with this vowel, instead of uniting 
with the augment : as, ἑορτάζω to celebrate a feast, (ἑεολξώρταζον. So, in 
the Plup., égxew, and the poet. ἐώλπειν, ἐώργειν, fr. Perf. ἔοικα seem, 
ἔολπα hope, topya have wrought. 

6. The forms in Ὁ, ὁ, and d are to be referred, in part at least, to an 
original digamma or o (140): as, ἐξαξαν ἔαξαν y. 298, iv. 2. 20; (ἐξα) 
ἑάνδανε Hdt. 9. 5; ἐσερπον (eé)etprov Soph. O. C. 147, (ἐσεσ)εϊστήκειν 
(cf. 141). In a very few cases, a form resembling the augmented is found 
out of the Indicative: as, Part. xar-edéas Lys. 100. 5. 

f. An initial a, chiefly when followed by a vowel, remains in the aug- 
mented tenses of a very few verbs, mostly poetic: as, diw to hear, diov 
(yet ἐπήϊσε Hdt. 9. 93). See ἀναλίσκω (50). So ἑλληνίσθην (that the 
word Ἕλλην may not be disguised), Th. 2. 68, and in poetry ἑζόμην, καθε- 
ἑόμην, Asch. Kum. 8, Pr. 229. In these words ¢ is long by position. 


280. II. The RepupLicaTion (reduplico, Zo re- 
double) doubles the initial letter of the COMPLETE 
TENSES 7 all the modes, to denote completed action. 


a. Rue. Ifthe verb begins with a single consonant, or with 
a mute and liquid (except yv), the initial consonant is repeated, 
with the insertion of ε; but otherwise, the reduplication has 
the same form with the augment. In the PLupERFect, the 
augment is prefixed to the reduplication, except when this has 
the same form with the augment. Thus, 

λύω to loose, Perf. λέλὕκα, Plup. ἐλέλύὔκειν - γράφω write, γέγραφα, 
ἐγεγράφειν - Φιλέω love, πεφίληκα (19 a), ἐπεφιλήκειν - ῥαψῳδέω prac, 
ἐῤῥαψῴδηκα (159 6), ἐῤῥαψῳδήκειν - γνωρίζω (277 a), ἐγνώρικα, ἐγνωρίκειν " 
ζηλόω emulate, ἐξήλωκα " ψεύδομαι lic, ἔψευσμαι - ἀδικέω (278 a), ἠδίκηκα, 
ἠδικήκειν + αὐξάνω (278 b), ηὔξημαι + ἡγέομαι (278 ο), ἥγημαι " Opa (279 b), 
ἑώρᾶκα, ἑωράκειν " ἐργάζομαν (279 c), εἴργασμαι " elxa, εἵκειν (4 Κ). 


§ 282. IN COMPOUND VERBS. 191 


b. In a few cases, the first of two other consonants is repeated, espe- 
cially if there has been syncope: as, πετάννῦμι to spread (8. wera-, πτα-)} 
πέπταμαι" μιμνήσκω remind, μέμνημαι" κτάομαι acquire, κέκτημαι, 1. 7. 3, 
but also ἔκτημαι (properly Ion., as Hdt. 2. 42, yet Pl. Prot. 340d, e). 

c. Verbs beginning with BA, yA, and a few others vary: as, βλαστάνω 
to bud, βεβλάστηκα and ἐβλάστηκα + Ὑλύφω carve, γέγλυμμαι and ἔγλυμμαι. 
For ἔοικα, ἔολπα, ἔοργα, cf. 279 Ὁ, d; and for the Pret. οἷδα know, 278 ἃ. 

281. a. In five verbs beginning with a liquid, εἰ- or εἷ- 
commonly takes the place of the regular reduplication, through 
euphonic change : 

λαγχάνω to obtain by lot, εἴληχα and λέλογχα, εἴληγμαι" λαμβάνω take, 
εἴληφα, εἴλημμαι and λέλημμαι " A€yw collect, εἴλοχα, εἴλεγμαι and λέλε- 
Ὑμαι " μείρομαι share, εἵμαρμαι, εἱμάρμην " 5. ῥε- say, εἴρηκα, εἴρημαι. 

b. Some of these forms seem to have arisen from an omitted consonant 
(the rough breathing in εἵμαρμαι, as in ἕστηκα, pointing to an original σ᾽ ; 
cf. 141, 279 6). They weré sometimes imitated by late writers in the Aor. 
Pass.: παρειλήφθησαν Dion. H. 168. 3. 


c. Some verbs which begin with 4, ε, or 0, followed by a sin- 
gle consonant, prefix to the usual reduplication the two first 
letters of the root : as, ἀλείφω to anoint, ἀλήλιφα, ἀληλίφειν, ἀλή- 
Arupat* ἐλαύνω drive, ἐλήλακα, ἐλήλακειν + ὀρύσσω dig, ὀρώρυχα. 

d. This prefix is termed by grammarians, though not very appropri- 
ately (87 b), the Attic Reduplication. It seldom receives an augment in 
the Plup. (0), except in the verb ἀκούω fo heaw : ἀκήκοα, commonly ἠκη- 
κόειν (Hdt. ἀκηκόειν) ; so wpwpuxro vii. 8. 14. This reduplication prefers 
a short vowel in the penult: as, ἀλήλιφα, though ἤλειφα- ἐλήλυθα, PE. of 
ἔρχομαι (50). In ἐγρήγορα (éyelpw wake), v. 7. 10, the second consonant is 
also prefixed ; and in the Ep. ἐμνήμῦκε (ἠμύω bow) X. 491, € lengthened 
by an inserted consonant is used, instead of repeating ἡ. 


282. III. Prerrxes In Composition. 1. Verbs compounded 
with a preposition, receive the augment and reduplication after 
the preposition : thus, προσγράφω to ascribe, προσέγραφον, mpoaye- 
γραφα " ἐξελαύνω drive out, ἐξήλαυνον, ἐξελήλακα. 


a. Before the prefix ε-ν prepositions ending in a consonant which is 
changed in the theme, resume that consonant ; and those ending in a 
vowel, except περί and πρό, regularly suffer elision (128). The final vowel 
of πρό often unites with the e- by crasis (126 γ). Thus, ἐμβάλλω to throw 
in (150), ἐνέβαλλον - ἐκβάλλω throw out (165), ἐξέβαλλον - ἀποβάλλω throw 
away, ἀπέβαλλον " περιβάλλω throw around, περιέβαλλον - προβάλλω 
throw before, προέβαλλον and προὔβαλλον. 

b. A few verbs receive their prefixes before the preposition ; a few re- 
ceive them both before and after ; and a few are variable: as, ἐπίσταμαι 
to understand, ἠπιστάμην " ἐνοχλέω trouble, ἠνώχλουν, ἠνώχληκα " καθεύδω 
sleep, ἐκάθευδον, καθηῦδον, and καθεῦδον (278 ἃ). These exceptions to the 
rule are chiefly in those compounds in which the simple verb is not in 
common use, so that the composition is lost sight of. 

ce. Some derivative verbs, resembling compounds in their form, follow 
the same analogy : as, διαυτάω to regulate (from δίαιτα mode of life), διή- 
τῆσα and ἐδιήτησα, δεδιήτηκα > ἐκκλησιάζω hold an assembly (ἐκκλησία), 
ἐξεκλησία ζον, ἠκκλησία ζον, and ἐκκλησία ζον (ἐξεκκλησίασαν v. 1. Th. 8. 93) ; 
ἔπιστατέω command (ἐπιστάτης), ἐπεστάτει ii, 3. 11, 


192 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. — DIALECTIC USE. ὃ 283. 


283. 2. Verbs in which δυσ- 111, precedes a vowel which 
the augment changes (§ 278), commonly receive their prefixes. 
after this particle : as, δυσαρεστέω to be displeased, δυσηρέστουν. 
So, sometimes, with ed, well: evepyerew benefit, evepyerovy and 
εὐηργέτουν. ᾿ 

3. Other verbs in which there is composition, receive the 
augment and reduplication at the beginning : as, λογοποιέω to 
fable, ἐλογοποίουν " δυστυχέω fare wl, ἐδυστύχησα, δεδυστύχηκα " 
εὐτυχέω prosper, εὐτύχουν OY ηὐτύχουν (278 d). 

a. With, however, doubtful or rare variations ; as in some compounds 
of ποιέω : ὡδοπεποιημένη (Vv. 1. ὡδοποιημένη) v. 3. 1. 


DIALECTIC USE. 


284. a. It was long before the use of the augment as the sign of 
past time became fully established in the Greek. In the old poets it 
appears as a kind of optional sign, which might be, used or omitted at 
pleasure: thus, ἔθηκεν, θῆκε, A. 2, 55; ὡς ἔφατο, ὡς φάτο, A. 33, 188 ; 
ἔβαλε, Bare, A. 473, 480; ὀρώρει, ὠρώρει, Σ. 493, 498. Hom. regularly 
omits it with the dual in -rnv. The omission of the reduplication is rare 
in Hom., chiefly found in some preteritive forms : as, ᾿ἄνωγα command, 
a. 269 (so retained in Hdt. and Att. poets), ἕσμαι wear, w. 250, ἔρχαται 
II. 481. But in the Att. redupl., he does not always lengthen the second 
vowel : as, ἀλάᾶλημαι Ψ. 74, ἀλᾶλύκτημαι K. 94. 

b. This license continued in [onic prose in respect to the temporal aug- 
ment, and the augment of the Plup., and was even extended to the re- 
duplication when it had the same form with the temporal augment: as, 
ἄγον, ἦγον, Hdt. 1. 70, 3. 47; δέδοκτο Id. 5. 96; ἅφθη, ἅψατο, ἁμμένης, 
ἐργάζοντο, κατέργαστο, κατειργασμένου Id. 1. 19, 86, 66, 123. So, more 
rarely, in respect to the syllabic augment, and the reduplication having the 
same form : as, véee or ἐνόεε Hdt. 1. 155 ; παρεσκευάδατο, παρασκευάδατο 
Id. 7. 218, 219 ; and even, for euphony’s sake, ἐπαλιλλόγητο Id. 1. 118. 

ce. In respect to the augment of the Pluperfect, and of the impersonal 
ἐχρῆν, this freedom remained even in Attic prose : as, ἤδη τετελευτήκει; 
ἀποδεδράκει, Vi. 4. 11, 18, διαβεβήκει vii. 3. 20 (this omission of the aug- 
ment occurs chiefly after a vowel) ; ἐχρῆν Cyr. 8. 1. 1, oftener χρῆν Rep. 
A. 3. 6. Of the poets, the lyric approached the nearest to the freedom of 
the old Epic, while the dramatic, in the iambic trimeter, were confined 
the most closely to the usage of Attic prose. 

ἃ. For such forms as épetev B. 274, ἔδδεισεν A. 33, δείδοικα A. 555, see 
171, 134a. For Perf. εἶμαι τ. 72, ᾿ἀδηκώς, K. 98, ᾿ἀρημένος §. 2, cf. 279 ¢,f. 
For ῥερυπωμένα, &c., see 159e. On the other hand, we find, after the 
analogy of verbs beginning with 6, ἔμμορε A. 278, ἔσσυμαι N. 79. 

e. In the Epic language, the 2 Aor. act. and mid. often receives the 
reduplication, which remains through all the modes, while the Ind. ad- 
mits the augnient in addition (especially in case of the Att. redupl.) : as, 
δέδαε 0. 448, κεκάμω A. 168, κεκύθωσι £. 308, λελάχωσι H. 80, λελαβέσθαι 
5. 888 ; with the augment sometimes added, κέκλετο A. 508, ἐκέκλετο Ζ. 
66, πέφραδε ἘΠ 500, ἐπέφραδον K. 127, πέφνε N. 363, ἔπεφνε A. 3975 
Att. Redupl. ἤγαγεν A. 179, ἠγάγετο X. 116, ἄραρον M. 105, ἤραρε A. 
110, dpope B. 146. These are reduplicated at the end of the stem : ἦνΐ- 
πᾶπ-ον from 5. ἐνιπ-, B. 245, and ἠρύκἄκ-ον from épux-, ἘΠ. 321. 


ὃ 287. : AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. 193 


f. With some of these 2 Aor. forms, reduplicated Futures are associat- 
ed: as, κεκαδών A. 334, xexadjoe φ. 1533 πεπίθοιμεν A. 100, πεπίθοιτο 
K. 204, πεπιθήσω X. 223; πεφιδοίμην ι. 277, πεφιδήσεται O. 215. 

- g. Some of these reduplicated forms occur in Attic poetry : as, ἄρρεν 
Soph. El. 147, τετορήσω Ar. Pax 381. “Hyayor, and, less frequent, ἠγα- 
youn remained even in Attic prose : as, i. 3. 17, Eq. 4. 1. 


CHAPTER IX. 
AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. 


I. CLASSIFICATION AND ANALYSIS. 


285. The Arrixses of the Greek verb may be 
divided into two great CLASSES (98 5): 


I. The Supsxctive, belonging to all the tenses 
of the ACTIVE VOICE, and to the Aorist passive. 


II. The Oxisectrve, belonging to all the tenses 
of the MIDDLE VOICE, and to the Future passive. 

a. The affixes of the Aor. pass. are subjective, as derived from the Impf. 
of the verb εἰμέ, to be ; and those of the Fut. pass. are objective, as de- 
‘rived from the Fut. of this verb (274). Of the affixes which are not thus 
derived, the subjective represent the subject of the verb as the doer of the 
action, and the objective, as, more or less directly, its object (30 a). 

286. The affixes of the verb may likewise be 
divided into the following ORDERS: 


1. The Primary, belonging to the primary tenses of the In- 
dicative mode, and to all the tenses of the Subjunctive. 


2. The Srconpary, belonging to the secondary tenses of the 
Indicative, and to all the tenses of the Optative (267 b, 269 c). 


3. The Imperative, belonging to the Imperative mode. 
4. The Inrinitive, belonging to the Infinitive mode 
5. The Partictp1at, belonging to the Participle. 


287. These affixes may be resolved into the 
following ELEMENTS: A. TreNSE-Siens, B. Con- 
NECTING VoWELs, and Οὐ. FLEXIBLE ENDINes. 


a. See 32. When there is no danger of mistake, these elements may 
be simply called signs, connectives, and flewives or endings. 


COMP. GR. 9 M 


194 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. — TENSE-SIGNS. § 288, 


A. Tensz-Siens (32 g). 


288. The tense-signs are letters or syllables 
which are added to the stem in particular tenses, 
and to which the flexible endings are appended, 
either immediately or with connecting vowels. 


In the Fut. and Aor., act. and mid., and in the Fut. Perf., 
the tense-sign is -o-;*in the Perf. and Plup. act., it is -x-; in 
the Aor. pass., it is -Oe-; in the Put. pass., it is -θησ- ; in the 
other tenses, it is wanting : 

λύ-σ-ω, ἐλυ-σ-ἄμην, λελύ-σ-ομαι" λέλυ-κ-α, ἐλελύ-κ-ειν * λυ-θε-ίην + λυ- 
θήσ-ομαι - λύ-ω, ἐλυ-όμην, λέλυ-μαι, ἐλελύ-μην (37). : 


a. The sign -6e-, before a vowel, is contracted with it ; other- 
wise, except before vr, it becomes -θη- (275d): λυίθέ ὠ)θῶ, 
λυ(θε-ἰην)θείην " λυ-θέτντων, λυ(θε-ντο)θείς + ἐλύ-θη-ν, λύ-θη-τι. 


289. The letters κ and 6, of the tense-signs, are sometimes 
omitted. ‘Tenses wanting these letters are termed second ; and, 
in distinction, tenses which have them, though commonly later 
forms, are termed first: as, 1 Perf. πέπεικα, 2 Perf. πέποιθα - 
1 Plup. ἐπεπείκειν, 2 Plup. ἐπεποίθειν (39); 1“Aor. pass. ἡγγέλθην, 
2 Aor. pass. nyyéAnv: 1 Fut. pass. ἀγγελθήσομαι, 2 Fut. pass. 
ἀγγελήσομαι (40). See § 274, 276 b. 

a. The tense in the active and middle voices, which is termed the Sec- 
ond Aorist, is simply an old Present System retained (except the Pres. 
ind.) in an aorist sense, after the formation of a new Present System from 
a later form of the stem (273 d): thus, ἔλιπον and ἐλιπόμην (38) are formed 
from the old stem Aur-, in precisely the same way as ἔλειπον and ἐλειπόμην 
from the new stem λειτ-. 

b. We have thus, in the three voices, six additional tense-forms, con- 
stituting three systems: viz. (distinguishing the systems in the same way 
as their tenses), the Srconp Aorist SystEM, the Second PERFECT 
System, and the Sreconp CompounpD SysTEM. 

c. The regular or jirst tenses will be usually spoken of, where no dis- 
tinction is required, simply as the Aorist, the Perfect, &c. ; and their sys- 
tems, as the Aorist System, the Perfect System, &c. 

d. In each system, the form first presented in the tables and rules of 
inflection is regarded as the leading form: and whatever appears in this 
form of any verb in respect to the stem, or the tense-sign, or the union of 
the affix with the stem, will be understood as belonging also to the other 
forms of the system, if nothing appears to the contrary. 

e. In each tense, the stem, with the tense-sign and reduplication, if 
these are present, is termed the base of the tense, or the ¢ense-stem ; as in 
the Pres. of λύω, Av- ; in the Fut., Avo-; in the Perf. act., AeAvK-. 

f. The regular additions which are made to the base in the Fut. and 
Fut. Perf. throughout, and in the Subjunctive of every tense, are the 
same as in the Pres.: as, λύτω λύσ-ω, λύ-εις λύσ-εις." λύτ-ομαι λύσ-ομαι 
λυθήσ-ομαι λελύσ-ομας * Subj. AV-w AVo-w λελύκτ-ω, 


§ 293. CONNECTING VOWELS. 195 


B. Connecting Vowets (32h). 


290. The connecting vowels serve to unite the 
flexible endings with the stem or tense-sign, and 
assist in marking the distinctions of mode and 


tense. 

a. The Aor., Perf., and Plup. pass. have no connecting vowel in the 
Ind., Imv., Inf., and Part. With this exception, the regular formation 
is according to the following rules. But wherever these admit either an 
A vowel or another vowel, it will be understood that the 4 vowel belongs 
to the Aorist (273 b, c), and the other vowel to the remaining tenses ; and 
that, wherever they admit either an O or an E vowel, the O vowel is used 
before a liquid, and the H vowel before other letters (114 ὁ). 

b. The connective is regularly contracted with an a, €, or o preceding ; 
and also with the flexives -t, -at, and -o, except in the Optative. 

291. 1. In the INpicarive, the connective is -a- in the Aor. 
and Perf., -e- in the Plup., and -o- or -e- in the other tenses : 
Aor. ἐλύσ-α-μεν, ἐλυσ-ἀ-μην " Pf. λελύκ-α-τε > Plup. eAedAvc-ec-v> Pr. 
Av-o-pev, Av-e-re* Impf. ἔλυ-ο-ν, ἔλυ-ε-ς - Fut. Avo-o-wat, λύσ-ε-ται. 

a. In the sing. of the Pres. and Fut. act., the connectives, by simple 
protraction or the absorption of the flexives, became τω- and -a-: λύ(ο-μ, 
o-a)@, λύσω, AU(e-s)ers, λύσεις, AU(E-T, ε-ε)ει, λύσει. See 275 a, ἃ, 160 ἔ, 

b. In the 3 Sing. of the Aor. and Perf. act., -e- takes the place of -a-.: 
and in the 3 Plur. of the Plup., it commonly takes the place of -e-: 
ἔλῦσ-ε, NEAVK-€ - λελύκ-ε-σαν ΟΥ λελύκ-ει-σαν. ᾿ 

c. The original connective of the Plup. was -ea-, which remained in the 
Ton. (278 6) : as, ἤδεα &. 71, ἐγεγόνεε Hdt. 1. 11. An early contraction 
into -y- is especially old Att., but also occurs in the Ep. and Dor. : as, 
1 Sing. ἤδη Soph. Ant. 18 ; 28. ἤδης Ib. 447 ; 3S. ἤδη. Α. 70. By pre- 
cession (114 5) -ἢ- passed into -e-, which became the common connective, 
and in the 3Sing. is already found in Hom. (fr. -ee) : as, ἑστήκει Σ. 557. 

292. 2. The Supsunctive takes the connectives of the 
Pres. ind., lengthening -o- to -w- and -e- to -η- (δ 272 d ): Ind. 
and Subj. Av-@, λύστω - λύ-ει-ς λύῃ-ς, λύ-ει λύῃ, λύ-ομεν λύτω-μεν, 
Av-e-re λύη-τε, λύ(ο-νσι)ουσι λύ(ζω-νσι)ωσι " λύσ-ε-ται λύσ-η-ται. 

293. 3. The Oprarive has, for its connective, ¢ (the general 
sign of the mode, 272 d), either alone or with other vowels. 


Rute. If the tense has no connecting vowel in the Ind., and 
‘its base ends in a, e, or o, then the Opt. has -iy- in the subjective 
forms, and simply -t- in the oljectzve ; in other cases, it has -a:- 
or -or-: AvOe-in-v (37): ἱστα-ίη-ν, iota-i-unv, τιθε-ίη-ν, TiOe-i-pyy, δι- 
δο-ίη-ν, 8:50-i-pnv (45) ; λύσ-αι-μι, λυσ-αί-μην * AV-o1-pe, λυ-οί-μην, λύσ- 
οἱ-μι, λελυσ-οί-μην > Ὦοι-μι, δεικνύ οι-μι; δεικνυ οί-μην (4 ἃ, c, m). 

ἃ. In Optatives in -inv, the n is often omitted in the plural and 
‘dual, especially in the 3 Plur., where the longer form is much less 
‘used in classic Greek: ἱσταῖμεν, τιθεῖτε, διδοῖεν, ἱσταῖτον (45); λυθεῖεν 
(37); but παραδοίησαν ii. 1. 10, σωθείησαν Cyr. 8. 1. 2. ὃ 


7196 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. —€ONNECTIVES. ὃ 293. 


Ὁ. In contract active forms, the connective -o1- often assumes in 
the Pres., and sometimes in the Fut.: φιλέ-οι-μι, contr. φιλοῖ-με or 
φιλοίη-ν (42); φανοῖμι or φανοίην (40). 

c. The form of the Opt. in -ofny, for -οιμι, is called the Attic Optative, 
as especially used by Att. writers, though not confined to them : ἐνωρῴη 
Hadt. 1. 89, oixoinre Theoc. 12. 28. It is most employed in the sing., 
where it is the common form in contracts in -é and -όω, and still more in 
those in -éw. In the 3 Plur. it is very rare. Τῦ 15 also found in the 2 Perf., 

“as πεποιθοίη (38) Ar. Ach. 940, and in the 2 Aor. of the simple verb ἔχω 
to have, though its compounds have commonly the form in -ouw- σχοίη 
Cyr. 7. 1. 36, κατάσχοις Mém. 3. 11. 11. So ἰοίην (45m). 

d. The Aor. opt. act. has, in the 2 and 3 Sing. and the 3 Plural, a 
second and far more common form, in which the connective is that 
of the Ind. with εἰ prefixed: as, λύσ-εια-ς, λύσ-ειε, λύσ-εια-ν. 

e. This form, like many other remains of old usage, was termed by 
grammarians olic. It was little used in the Dor. It greatly prevailed 
in the Att. and Ion:, but not exclusively : μείνειας I’. 52, ψαύσειε Hdt. 3. 
30, ἄρξειαν Th. 6. 11; λέξαι Asch. Ag. 170, ἀποδέξαιεν Hdt. 8. 35. 

f. The Opt. avoided the immediate attachment of the short flexives -ν 
and -ντ to 1, and in: various ways. See above, and 296, 300. 


294. 4. In the Iwperative, the connective is -a-, -e-, or -o-; 
‘in the INFinitIve, it is -a- or -e-; in the PaRTICcIPLE, it is -a- or 
-o-: λυσ-ά-τω, λυσ-ἄ-σθων, λυ-έττω, λύ-ε-σθε, Av-d-vT@v* λύσ-α-σθαι, 
λῦσ-αι, λύ-ε-σθαι, λελυκ-ἔέ-ναι + λυσ-ά-μενος, λυσ-ό μενος, λύ(ο-ντο)ων. 

- a. In the Imv., -a- passes into the kindred -o- before the flexive -ν 
(114 b, c, 297 ὁ) : Ads(ad, av)ov. 

b. In the Inf. of the Pres. and Fut. act., -e- is lengthened to -e- 

(275 d): Av(e-v)eu-v, λύσ-ει-ν. 


©. Frexiste Enpines. 


295. The flexible endings (flexibilis, changeable) 
are the chief instruments of conjugation, marking 
by their changes the distinctions of person, number, 
woice, and, in part, of zense and mode. 

a. In the finite modes they are essentially pronowns, affixed instead of 
being, as in English, prefixed (271 b). They are exhibited in 32i. 
εὐ Ὁ, Where the secondary endings differ from the primary, they are usu- 

ally shorter, on account of the augment. 


296. 1 Sine.: - (μι, ν, *); -pat, -μην. The flexive -p, 
-after -a- connective, and, in primary forms, after -o- and -e- con- 
nective, is wanting ; after -o- and -a-, and in the nude Present 
(303 a), it becomes -ys; in other cases, it becomes ν (275 a): 

ἔλῦσ-α, OAV K-a, ἤδ-εα ἤδη (46 a) ; λύ(ο-μγω, λύ(ω-μ)ω * λύτοι-μι, λύσ-αι- 
ἐμὲ (298 ἢ), ἵστη-μι (45) ; ἔλῦ-ο-ν, ἐλελύὔκ-ει-ν (278 6), ἐλὕθη-ν, λυθείη-ν " 
φιλοίη-ν, φανοίη-ν (298 Ὁ) ; ἵστην, ἱσταίην (45). Cf. Lat. Ju(o-m)o, lui. 


§ 299. 2 FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. : 197 


_ a. In those cases in which the flexive -p is usually said to be wanting, 
it may still be regarded as virtually present in a vowel into which it has 
been changed or absorbed ; and so, in some cases, the flexive -r of the 
3 Pers. (p having passed into a, and τ into ε, 160 f, 291 a). 

297. 2 Sina. : -σ (σθα), -θ (0, s, ε, ν, *); τ-σαι, -σο. a. For 
-s, a stronger form was -σθα (271 ο ; cf. Lat. -ste and Eng. -st). 

b. This was retained as the common form in ἦσθα, ἔφησθα (451, u), and 
οἶσθα (46a); and was good Attic in ἤδεισθα, ἤδησθα (46a), and ἤεισθα 
(45m). Other examples are furnished by the poets (particularly in the 
Subj., by Hom.) : as, ἐθέλῃσθα A. 554, εἴπῃσθα T. 250 ; βάλοισθα O. 571, 
κλαίοισθα Ὡ. 619; τίθησθα ι. 404, δίδοισθα T. 270; ἔχεισθα, φίλεισθα, Sap. 

c. The πων. flexive -6 is dropped after -e- connective ; with 
-a- connective, it becomes -ον ; after a short vowel in the stem, it. 
becomes -s in the 2 Aor., but in the Pres. unites as ε with the. 
preceding vowel ; in other cases, it becomes -@ (275 a, 160 f): 

λῦίε-θ)ε (cf. Lat. Zue) ; λῦσ(α-θ)γον (294a; cf. 169 ο) ; θές, δός, ἕς (45h); 
tor(a-0, α-ε, 120 h)y, τέθ(ε-ε)ει, δίδ(ο-εγου, δείκν(υ-ε)υ (4 a) ; τρίβη-θι (38), 
λύθη-τι (159 c) ; γνῶθι, δρᾶθι (45h) ; ἔσθι, δέδιθι (46). 

ἃ. Φημί and εἶμι form the Pres. imyv. in -θι ; φᾶθί, ζθιι The poets 
and late writers sometimes give this form to yet other Presents in -pw ; 
and they sometimes shorten 670: and στῆθι, in composition, to Ba and στᾶ : 
bpvd Oe rouse, Z. 363, thd Oc be gracious ; κατάβα descend, Ar. Ran. 35. 

6. In the flexives -ca and -σο, σ is dropped between two vow- 
els, except in the Perf. and Plup. pass., and sometimes the nude’ 
Pres. and Impf. (275 Ὁ) : as, 

᾿λύ(ε-σαι, €-at)y or λύει (123 b) ; AU(e-o)ov, ἐλύ(ε-ογου, ἐλύσ(α-ογω (120s) ; 
λύ-σοι-ο, λύσ-αι-ο" λέλυ-σαι, λέλυ-σο, ἐλέλυ-σο" ἵστα-σαι, ἵστα-σο and 
ἵστ(α-ο)ω, τίθε-σαι and τίθ(ε-αι)ῃ, δίδο-σο and δίδ(ο-ογου, δ(ο-ο)οῦ (4 ο, ἃ, i). - 

.f. The contraction of -εαν into -εἰ is a special Attic form, which was 
much used by pure writers, especially the more colloquial, and which, 
after yielding in other words to the common contraction into -y, remained 
in βούλει, οἴει, and ὄψει, as the only good Attic. 

δ. The use of -αι for -a-o in the Aor. imy. seems to be an irregular con- 
traction with precession (118 b): λῦσ(α-σο, ἀ-ο)αι. 

_ h. In verbs in -μιν, -σσαν remained more frequently than -co. Exceptional 
cases occur, both of the retention and omission of the o, esp. in the poets. 


298. 3 SiNG.: -τ (σι; *) -τω ; -ται, -ro, -σθω. The flexive -τ. 
becomes -ou in the nude Pres., but elsewhere is omitted : as, 

ἵστ(η-τ)ησι, ἵστη, δίδωσι, ἐδίδω (45 a, Ὁ) ; ἔλν(ε-τ)ε, λύ(ε-τ, ε-ε)ει, ἔλυσε. 
See 27ὅ ἃ, 296 ἃ. ; 

a. In ἐστί (451), -t is naturally preferred to -σιὶ after o. 

299. 1 anv 2 Puur., with THE DuAL: -μεν, -μεθα (μεσθαλ) ; 
-τε; -σθε ; -τον, -σθον ; -την, -cOnv ; -των, -σθων. a. The 1 Pers. is 
the same in the plur. and dual, having, for its swbjecteve ending, 
-pev, and for its objective, -μεθα (2116 ; poet. -μεσθα) : λύο-μεν, 
λυότμεθα or, for the sake of the metre, λυό-μεσθα. 


Ὁ. The 1 Dual primary had a special form in -pe@ov, of which only three ~ 
classical examples have been found, all in poetry before a vowel : περιδώ- 
μεῦον Ψ. 485, λελείμμεθον Soph. El. 950, ὁρμώμεθον Id. Ph. 1079. 


198 CONJUGATION. — FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. § 299. 


ce. The 2 Plur. always ends in -e. The 2 Dual is obtained 
by changing this vowel into -ον ; and the 3 Dual, by changing 
it into -ov in the primary inflection, into -ν in the secondary, 
and into των in the zmperative: 2 Pl. Ave-re, ἐλύε-τε- 2 Du. Ave- 
τον, ἐλύε-τον " 3 Du. Averov, ἐλυέτην, λυέτων. 

d. The 2 and 3 Dual secondary were not always distinct in form : as, 
in Hom. 3 Pers. ἐτεύχετον N. 346, θωρήσσεσθον N. 301; in Attic, 2 Pers. 
elyéry Soph. O. T. 1511, ἠλλαξέτην Eur. Alc., εὑρέτην, ἐπεδημησάτην Pi. 

300. 3 PLUR.: -ντ (vor, Vv, εν, σαν), σντῶν ΟΥ̓ -T@cay ; -νταῖ, 
-ντο, -σθων or -σθωσαν. a. The flexive -ντ, in the primary tenses, 
becomes -vow. In the secondary, after -o- or -a- connective, it be- 
comes -ν ; after a diphthong in the Opt., -ev; but, otherwise, 
-σαν (275 a, c). 

λύ(ο-νσι, ο-ασουσι, λύσουσι, AEAUK(a-vor)Gor, λύωσι " ἱστᾶσι, τιθεῖσι 
(4 a) ; ἔλῦ-ο-ν, ἔλῦσ-α-ν + λύοι-εν, λύσαι-εν, λυθεῖ-εν > ἐλελύκε-σαν, ἐλύθη- 
σαν, ἵστα-σαν, ἔστησαν, ἔθε-σαν (45 Ὁ, ἢ). See 160, 143 b, 156, 298 f. 

b. In the Perf. and Plup. pass. of ¢mpure verbs, the 3d Pers. 
pl. is either formed in -αται and -aro (158) or, more commonly, 
supplied by the Part. with εἰσί and ἦσαν (451): as, ἐφθάρ-αται 
Th. 3. 13, from φθείρω (s. φθαρ-) to waste, τετριμμένοι εἰσί (39). 

6. The forms in -arat and -aro are termed Jonic. Before these end- 
ings, a labial or palatal mute must be rough ($, x), and a lingual, middle 
(δ) : as, from τρέπω (8. tpar-) to turn, (rerpam-vrat) τετράφαται Pl. Rep. 
533b; from τάσσω (39; τεταγ-νται) rerdxaraciv. 8. 5, ἐτετάχατο Th. 7. 4. 

d. In the Imy., the older and shorter forms in -ντων and 
-σθων (termed Attic, 87 Ὁ), are the more common. 

6. The forms in -τωσαν do not occur in Hom., and scarcely in Hdt. or 
the Dramatists : ἔστωσαν Hdt. 1. 147. They may have been later pre- 
ferred, as distinct in form from the Part. and 3 Du. In the less frequent 
ἔστων Cyr. 4. 6. 10, and trev Asch. Eum. 32 (451, m), the old plural 
form (afterwards the dual, cf. 186 g, 271 c) remained without change. 

301. INFINITIVE: -v, -vat, -ἰ ; -σθαι. The subjective ending, 
after -e:- connective, is -v; after -a- connective, -ἰ ; but otherwise, 
«ναι : λύ-ει-ν, AVo-et-v* λῦσ-α-ι (290 Ὁ) ; λελυκέ-ναι, λυθῆ-ναι " ἱστά- 
vat, δεικνύ-ναι, θεῖ-ναι, δοῦ-ναι (45). 

a. In the Pres. and Fut. act., the old form of the Inf. in -e-v prevailed, 


and obtained an t in the prolonged connective, in lieu of the Dat. sign t 
annexed in other forms. See 272a. 


302. PaARTICIPLE: -ντ-ς (r-s) ; -yev-os. In the Perf. act., ν 
(passing into a, and then by precession into ο, 142, 114) be- 
came a connecting vowel : -o-rs, for yrs. For the declension of 
the Part., see 26, 2328; for the Verbals in -τός and -réos, 269 ἃ, 
272 ©. 


303. Remarks. a. Affixes and forms which have no connecting 
vowel are termed nude; and others euphonic (183a). Tenses are so 


§ 305. UNION OF STEM AND AFFIXES, 199 


termed according to the affixes of the Ind. The REGULAR AFFIXEs of the 
verb are those which are assigned to the tenses in 35 and 36, the nude 
Pres. and Impf. and the Second Tenses excepted. These affixes are open 
in the Pres. and Impf., and close in the other tenses (172 ο)ἡ. The 2 Aor. 
act. and mid. has the affixes of the Impf. ind., and of the Pres. in the 
other modes (289 a), with some variation of accent and, in the nude form, 
of euphonic change (38, 297 c). The other Second Tenses have the affixes 
of the First, with the omission noted in 35, 36, 289. 

b. In the study of the Greek verb, the forms should be analyzed 
throughout, and the force of their parts carefully observed. The inflee- 
tion should be repeated, not by a simple act of memory, but by an intel- 
ligent combination of the elements ; which, few in number, produce. a 
great and beautiful variety of forms. 

c. Besides the full paradigm in 37, a briefer paradigm of strictly regu- 
lar conjugation is presented in παύω (34), though less approved forms with 
an inserted σ᾽ also occur (307 6). The leading forms of translation are add- 
ed, which the student will apply, with the requisite changes, to other 
verbs, while the details will appear more fully in Syntax. 


II. UNION WITH THE STEM. 


A. Consonant CHANGES. 


304. 1. When the close affixes follow a consonant, 
changes are often required by general laws: as, 
τρί(β-σωγψω, éra(y-ca)—a, πέπει(θ-σαι)σαι (151) ; τρι(β-τοο)πτός (147) ; 
ἐτετρί(β- μην)μμην (148); érerd(y-Kew) Xe (149) ; ἐπεφά(ν-κεν)γκειν (150) ; 
φα(ν-σω)νῶ, ép(av-ca)nva (152). See 39s. 

a. In the liquid verbs κλίνω to bend, κρίνω to judge, κτείνω to slay, 
τείνω to stretch, and πλύνω to wash, v is omitted before the affixes which 
remain close (152) ; except sometimes in poetry for the sake of the metre, 
and in late writers: κέκλιμαι, ἐκλίθην (ἐκλίνθη Z. 468) ; κέκρικα, éxplOnv. 

b. In other verbs, v characteristic, before p, more frequently becomes 
o, but sometimes becomes μι or is dropped : as, πέφασμαι (40) ; Enpatve 
to dry, ἐξήρασμαι, ἐξήραμμαι, and late ἐξήρᾶμαι. 


305. 2. Furure TENSE-SIGN, -c-. In the Fu- 
TURE ACTIVE and MIDDLE, changes affecting the 
tense-sign often bring together two vowels, which 
are then contracted : 

a. Attic Future. In Futures in -iow from verbs in -ἰζω of 
more than two syllables, the -c- becomes -e-: as, 

κομίι-σω, t-EW)L@, κομίι-σο, ι-εο)ιοῦμαι, κομίι-σε, ι-εε)ιεῖσθαι, κομ(ι-σων)ιῶν 
(39 d) ; καθιεῖν ii. 1. 4. So in καθέζομαι to sit, Fut. (5. €5-) καθε(δ-σο, 5-€0) 
δοῦμαι " and a few poet. or later forms: as, τε(κ-σε)κεῖσθαι Hom. Ven. 

Ὁ. Some Futures in -ἄσω and -έσω drop the -σ- : as, 


ἐλαύνω or ἐλάω to drive, F. €X(d-cw, d-w)a, ἐλ(άσεις)ᾷς, ἐλ(άσεινγἂν or 
ἐλᾶν, ἐλ(ἀσων)ῶν " τελ(έ-σω, é-w)@, τελ(έσει)εῖ, TEA(E-co, ἐ-ο)οῦμαι (42 g) ; 


200 FUTURE AND AORIST. TENSE-SIGNS. INSERTION. § 305. 


xéo pour, F. χ(έἐσω)έω, χ(έσεις, éecs)ets, x(éoo)éouar (cf. 309b). So in 
καλέω CALL, μάχομαι fight, ἀμφιέννῦμι clothe ; in all verbs in -ἀννῦμι, 
as σκεδάννῦμι scatter ; and sometimes in verbs in -άζω, βιβάζω make go. 

e.. This form of Futures in -ἄσω, -érw, and -ἴσω, is termed the Attic 
Future, from its prevalence in Attic writers. It is not, however, confined 
to them ; nor do they employ it without exception : xrepl@ 2. 334; κατα- 
γιεῖν, δικᾶν, Hdt. 1. 86, 97 ; ἐλάσοντας vii. 7. 55, τελέσουσιν Cyr. 8. 6. 3, 
koutow Ar. Pl. 768. It is rare in the Opt.: βαδιοίμην Ar. Pl. 90. 


d. Doric Fururs. A few verbs, in the Fut. mid. with an 
active sense, sometimes add e to -σ-, after the Dor. form (325 b) : 
wo to sail, F. πλεύσομαι and πλευ(σεο)σοῦμαι > φεύγω flec, φεύξομαι 
and φευξοῦμαι. Other Att. examples are κλαίω weep, véw no, swim, παίζω 
sport, πίπτω fall, πνέω blow, πυνθάνομαι inquire. So ἐσσεῖται B. 393. 

e. The Liquid, Att., and Dor. Futures, from their formation, are in- 
flected like the contract Pres. (42). In a few verbs, the Pres. and Att. 
Fut. have the same form : ἐλῶ, τελῶ, καλῶ. 

f. In a few verbs, the old Pres. remained as a Fut., after the formation 
of a new Pres.; or the poets used the same form as both Pres. and Fut. 
(273 a, d): as, éo Ole to eat, F. ἔδομαι, Ar. Nub. 121; πίνω drink, F. πίο- 
μαι Cyr. 1.3.9; ἀνύω accomplish, ἐρύω draw, τανύω stretch, also as Fut. 
A. 365, 454, φ. 174. For χεύω as Fut., 8. 222, see 50. 


306. 3. Aorist Tense-Sien. a. The sign of the Aor. is 
omitted in εἶπα said, ἤνεγκα bore, ἔχεα poured, ἔκεα poet., burned ; 
and in a few Epic forms, as ἔσσενα E. 208. See φημί, φέρω, χέω, 
καίω, σεύω, ἀλεύω, δατέομαι, in 50. For the Liq. Aor., see 152. -_ 

b. The Aor. borrows the Perf. tense-sign in ἔθηκα, ἔδωκα, and 
ἧκα (45). ' 

These Aorists are used by classic writers only in the Ind., and chiefly 
in the Sing. and 3 Plur., the other forms being supplied by the 2 Aor. : 
ἐδώκατε vii. 7.10. In the Middle, the Att. has only the Ind. ἡκάμην. 
(Eur. El. 622) ; while other dialects add ἐθηκάμην, K. 31, θηκάμενος Pind. 
P. 4. 52. Late writers extend the use of forms with «.in these verbs, and, 
sometimes substitute forms with o: Subj. δώκωσι Asop. 78 ; δώσῃ Jn. 
- -c, These peculiar. forms in -κα, called 1 Aor. from the connective a, are 
euphonie extensions of the 2 Aor., after the analogy of the Perf. The flex-. 
ive -p passed into a, which became a eonnecting vowel ; and then x was 
inserted to prevent hiatus (cf. 276 Ὁ, 320): &0(n-v, n-a)n-K-a, ἔθηκας. 


307. 4. INSERTION OF c. In many pure verbs, 
σ is inserted before the regular passive affixes be- 
ginning with μ, τ, or θ. 

a. This insertion is usual after a short vowel, and (b) fre- 
quent after a diphthong ; but (c) not after a simple long vowel. 
(d) Exceptions, however, occur both ways ; and (e) some verbs 
are variable. Thus, 


(a) omaw to draw, Pass. Pf. ἔσπᾶ-σ-μαι, ἔσπασαι, ἔσπα-σ-ται, ἐσπά- 
σ-μεθα, ἐσπα-σ-μένος, A. ἐσπά-σ-θην, F. σπα-σ-θήσομαι * τετέλε-σ-μαι, ἐτε- 
λέσθην, τελεστέος (42 g) ; (Ὁ) σέσει-σ-μαι, ἐσείσθην, σειστός (44) ; ἐπεπλεύ- 
σ-μὴν (42 δὴ) ; κελεύω command, κεκέλευ-σ-μαι, κεκέλευσται, ἐκελεύσθην * 


§ 310. “METATHESIS. VOWEL CHANGES. 201 


(c) rerlunuat, φιλητός, ἐδηλώθην (42f); (d) AAT uae, ἐλύθην (37) ; βεβού- 
λευμαι, ἐβουλεύθην (43) ; ydw heap, κέχω-σ-μαι, ἐχώσθην ; (6) δράω do, δέ- 
δρᾶμαι, rarely δέδρασμαι, ἐδράσθην - κλείω shut, κέκλειμαι and κέκλεισμαι, 
ἐκλείσθην " μέμνημαι remember, ἐμνήσθην " χράομαι use, κέχρημαι, ἐχρήσθην. 

f. The o is attracted most strongly by θ. When o is thus inserted in 
the Perf. or Plup., the 3 Plur. wants the simple form (300 b): ἐσπασμένοι 
εἰσί, σεσεισμένοι ἦσαν. 


308. 5. Meraruesis. In a few liquid verbs, the concur- 
rence of consonants is avoided by transposing the stem-mark 
(145 ; cf. 152): as, βάλλω to throw, κάμνω labor, τέμνω cut ; Pf. 
BéBAnka, κέκμηκα, τέτμηκα, for βέβαλκα, Xe.; βεβλημαι, ἐτμήθην. 


Β. ογνει, CHances. 


309. 1. Contraction. The regular open af- 
fixes are contracted with a, ε, or o preceding. 


a. Verbs in which this contraction takes place are termed ConTRACT 
Verss or, from the accent of the theme, Perispomena. In distinction, 
other verbs are termed Barytone Verbs (768). 

b. The verbs κάω to burn, and κλάω weep, which have likewise the 
forms καίω and κλαίω, are not contracted. Dissyltabie Verbs in -έω ad- 
mit only the contractions into εἰ : as, πλέω sail, πλέεις πλεῖς, πλέει πλεῖ, 
πλέομεν, πλέετε πλεῖτε, πλέουσι. Except δέω bind (thus distinguished from 
δέω need), τὸ δοῦν, τῷ Sodvre Pl. Crat. 419a,b; and a few rare cases. 

c. The Inf. is now commonly regarded as contracted from the old form 
in -ev (301 a) : τιμ(α-εν)ᾶν, rather than τιμ(α-ειν)ᾷν, φιλ(ε-εν)εῖν, δηλ(ο-εν)οῦν-. 
See 109a. The contract Ind. and Subj. of verbs in -é@ agree in form. 


310. 2. VowrL LENGTHENED. Before the 
regular close affixes, a short vowel is commonly 
lengthened (a becoming ἡ, unless preceded by ε, «, 
p, or po, 115a): as, 

Tide, τιμήσω, τετίμηκα, ἐτιμήθην > φιλέω, ἐφίλησα, φιλήσομαι, πεφίλη- 
pat, πεφιλήσομαι " ϑηλόω, ἐδηλωσάμην, ἐδεδηλώμην (42) ; ti honor, poet., 
τίσω, erica’ pio produce, φύσω, πέφῦκα᾽ ἐάω, ἐάσω, εἴᾶσα - ἑστιἄω, 
εἱστίακα (279 c) ; Onpaw, ἐθηράθην (42 5) ; ἀκροἄομαι hear, ἀκροάσομαι. 

a. A few verbs vary from the rule in respect to the use οὗ & or ἡ : thus, 
& becomes ἡ» in τιτράω bore, and tenses from ypa- to supply need (F. τρή- 
ow, χρήσω, χρήσομαι) ; ἄ, ἴῃ ποινάομαι avenge one’s self, wa- acquire (ποι- 
νάσομαι, πέπάμαι) ; ἃ and μ in θοινάω feast, πορπάω fasten, and ἀλοάω 
thresh : θοινάσομαι Eur. Cycl. 550, ἐκθοινήσομαι Aisch. Pr. 1025. 

b. In the Perf. of τίθημι and (npr, ε becomes εἰ " τέθεικα, εἶκα, εἶμαι (45). 


c. In some verbs, the short vowel is retained ; and (4) some 
are variable: as, 

(c) σπάω to draw, σπἄσω, ἔσπᾶκα " τελέω, ἐτέλεσα, τετέλεσμαι (42 δὴ ; 
ἀρόω plow, ἀρόσω, ἠρόθην - (4) δέω bind, δήσω, ἔδησα, δέδεκα, δέδεμαι " 
θύω, θύσω, τέθὕκα (44) ; λύω (37); δύω sink, δύσω, δέδῦκα, ἐδὔθην. 

COMP. GR. 95 : 


202 CONJUGATION. — VOWEL CHANGES. . $310, 


e. Verbs in -ἀννῦμι and -ἐννῦμι, and stems in Ac-, or in v- after a short 
syllable, for the most part retain the short vowel: as, σκεδάννῦμι scatter, 
σκεδ(ἄσω, 305 b)a, ἐσκέξᾶσα - κορέννῦμι satiate, ἐκόρεσα, κεκόρεσμαι " yeAd@ 
laugh, yehdcouat, ἐγελάσθην - ᾽᾿ἄνύω accomplish, dvicw, ἠνὕκα. 

f. The short vowel is least retained before o in the tense-sign, and 
most before 6. 


311. 3. VoweL InserteD. The regular close 
affixes are annexed with the msertion of ἡ, 


8.) To double consonant stems, except those which end in a 
labial or palatal mute not preceded by o, and those which end in 
a lingual mute preceded by a liquid : as, 

αὔξω, αὐξ-ἤ-σω, ηὔξ-η-μαι, ηὐξ-ή-θην > bw to boil, ἥψ-η-σα " ἔῤῥω go 
away, ἤῤῥηκα - μέλλω delay, μελλήσω (41); ὄζω smell, ὥζησα " βόσκω 
feed, βοσκήσω" but πέμπω, πέμψω" ἄρχω, ἦρξα" σπένδω, σπείσω (41). 

b.) To liquid stems in which a diphthong precedes the stem- 
mark ; and to a few in which e precedes : as, 

ούλομαι to will, βουλ-ή-σομαι, βεβούλ-η-μαι " χαίρω rejoice, χαιρήσω " 
ἐθέλω or θέλω wish, ἐθελήσω or θελήσω - μέλω concern, ἐμέλησα, ἐμελήθην " 
ἐρ- inquire, ἐρήσομαι " μένω remain, F. μενῶ, but Pf. μεμένηκα (cf. 150 6). 

6.) Τὸ ἃ few other stems : as, 

δέω to need, δε-ή-σω, δεδέ-η-κα + EVSw sleep, εὑδήσω" οἴομαι think, oljco- 
μαι, φήθην " οἴχομαι depart, οἰχήσομαι. 

d. Ina few verbs, ε is inserted instead of ἡ (cf. 510 0) : as, ἄχθομαι to 
be vexed, ἀχθ-έ-σομαι, ἠχθέσ-θην - μάχομαι fight, μαχ(ἐσογοῦμαι (305 b), 
ἐμαχεσάμην, μεμάχημαι. 

e. In most of these cases, the vowel is obviously inserted for the sake 
of euphony, to prevent undesired combinations of consonants. That the 
vowel should be commonly ἢ» rather than ¢, results from 310, 


312. 4. In the Srconp Perrect System, the 
common affixes are annexed with these changes 
in the preceding syllable : 


a.) Short a, ε, or v, before a single consonant, is lengthened 
(a commonly becoming ἡ, unless preceded by e or p, 115 a): 


ίνω, (8. pav-) πέφηνα, ἐπεφήνειν (40) ; θάλλω to bloom, τέθηλα - but 
κράζω cry out, (κρὰγ-) κέκρᾶγα - κρίζω creak, (xpiy-) κέκριγα " μυκάομαι 
bellow, (μῦκ-) μέμῦκα. After the Att. reduplication, the short vowel com- 
monly remains: as, ἐλήλῦθα (281 ἃ, 134 a). 
b.) € becomes o, and εἰ (lengthened from 1) becomes o : as, 
κτείνω to kill, (xrev-) ἔκτονα" δέρκομαι see, poet,, δέδορκα - λείπω 
(Atm-, λειπ-) leave, λέλοιπα, πέποιθα (39) ; ἔολπα, ἔοικα, οἶδα (280 c). 


c. This change of an Z to an O vowel is also found in ῥήγνῦμν ἐο break, 
2 Pf. ἔῤῥωγα ; andin the 1 Perf. System of a few verbs : as, τρέπω to turn, 
τέτροφα - κλέπτω steal, κέκλοφα > πέμπω, πέπομφα (41) ; δέδοικα (46 ὃ). 

d. A few Perfects obtain an Ὁ vowel in the penult by a less simple 
change or by insertion ; and in a few dialectic forms, the change or inser- 
tion appears in the Pass. : as, ἄγω to lead, Pf. ἦχα, later ἀγή-ο-χα " ἐσθίω, 


$315. -MI FORM. 203 


poet. ἔδω, eat, ἐδήδ-ο-κα, Ep. ἐδήδομαι - οὔχομαι (311 ο), ofy-w-Ka or ᾧχωκα 
(278d) ; (ἐθ-) εἴωθα J am wont, pret. ; Pass. dwproy. 272, for ἤερτο, ἐπώ- 
χατο M. 340, ἀφέωνται Mat. 9. 2 (see ἀείρω, ἐπέχω, ἵημι, 50). 


C. -MI Form (45). 


313. In some verbs, chiefly pure with a short stem- 
mark, the Present and Imperfect are nude (303). 


a. From the affix in the theme, these verbs are named 
VERBS IN -pe (270 ο) ; and this mode of inflection is called the 
-ut form, a name extended to the nude inflection of all tenses 
which have regularly a connecting vowel. 


b. The 2 Aorist from a pure stem commonly retains the 
primitive nude form, whatever may be the form of the theme : 
as, ἔβην, ἔδρᾶν, ἔγνων, ἔδυν (45 ἢ). 

c. If astem in ι- otherwise takes this form, it has commonly a con- 
nective before a flexive beginning with v: ἐσόσντων, ἱ-έ-ναι, ἰών (45 τη). 

ἃ. The verbs in -pt are few in number, but include some of the most 
common words in the language. They are subject to many defects and 
irregularities. The most complete are ἵστημι, τίθημι, igus, and δίδωμι (45). 

6. For the 1 Sing. οἴομαι 7 think, Impf. φόμην, the nude forms οἶμαι, 
ᾧμην, are commonly used, especially when the verb is parenthetic: μάλ᾽, 
οἶμαι, ἐρῶντες τούτου, greatly desiring this, methinks, iii. 1. 29. 


314. Before the nude affixes, the short stem-mark 


is lengthened (& becoming ἡ, unless preceded by p, 
115; and %, εἰ); 

a.) In the Jndicative sing. of the Pres, and Impf. act.: as, 

ἵστημι, τίθης, δίδωσι, δείκνῦμι (8. iord-, τιθε-, διδο-, δεικνῦ-) ; torny, érl- 
θην, ἐδίδως, ἐδείκνυ " εἶμι (5. ἴ), εἶ, εἶσι (45 a, b, τη). 

b.) Ina few Middle forms, mostly poetic : as, 

δίζημαι to seek, throughout ; ὠνήμην, 2 A. of ὀνίνημι benefit. 

9.) In the 2 Aor. act. throughout, except before yr (275 d) : 

ἔστην, ἔδρᾶν, ἔγνων, ἔδῦν (5. ord-, δρᾶ-, yvo-, δῦ-) ; ἔστημεν, στῆθι, στῆ- 
vat, δρᾶναι, ἔγνωσαν, γνῶθι, δῦναι; στάντων, γνόντων, γν(οντε)ούς (45h). 

d. Exc. The short vowel remains in the 2 Aor. οἵ τίθημι, δίδωμι, ἀπᾶ. 
inut, except in the Inf., where it is changed to its corresponding diph- 
thong (115 a) : ἔθεμεν, ἔδομεν, εἶμεν (s. θε-, δο-, é-, augmented εἰ-, 279 ὁ ; 
for the sing., see 806 ο) ; θές, δός, ἕς - (Oevrs) Geis: θεῖναι, δοῦναι, εἷναι 
(45h, Κ). Except, also, the poet. ἔκταν slew, and Ep. ofrdv wownded. 


315. The forms of verbs in -» sometimes take 
the place of the -μὲ forms : particularly, 


a.) In verbs in -vpt, which may be regarded as having a second but less 
Attic theme in -ὕω : ὀμνύω, δεικνύουσι (a frequent form in the 3 Plur, 
Pres.), vi. 1. 31, 2. 2, δεικνύει Cyr. 6. 1. 7, Geixvve Pl. Phasdr. 228 6, δει- 


204 CONJUGATION. — VERBS IN -MI. § 315... 


κνύων Mem. 1. 3. 1; so Impf., chiefly in Sing. and 3 Plur. (ὥμνυον Th. 5. 
19). This form was rare in the Pass. and Mid.: κατεμιγνύοντο vii. 2. 3. 
b.) In the sing. of the Impf. act., if the stem-mark is e oro. The con- 
tract forms in 45b are the more common, except ἐτίθουν. So ters, ἵει 
(45k). We even find by imitation (or precession from ἵην, 115), 1 Sing. 
iew (ἠφίειν Pl. Euthyd. 293 a) ; also 3 Plur. ἠφίουν Ise. 60. 19, ἀπεδίδουν. 
6.) In the Opt. mid., by the frequent use of -οι- for -a- when not in the 
initial syllable: τιθοίμην, ἱοίμην (45, n); and, in composition, 2 Aor. 
συνθοῖτο, mpootro, i. 9. 7, 10. So Opt. act. ἀφίοιτε Pl. Apol. 29 ἃ (4 Κ). 


316. a. The Subj. of verbs in -μὲ agrees with the common 
form, except in contracting ay into ἡ, and og into ῳ (120h, 
123 a): as, 


ior (d-w)&, tor(d-ys)qs, ἱστ(ά-ηγῆτε, ἱστ(ά-ωγῶμαι, ἱστ(ά- γῇ " τιθ(έ-ωγῶ, 
710(é-ns) 9s * 5c5(d-w)@, διδ(ό-ῃς) ῷς, δ(ό-ωγῶμαι, δ(ό-ῃγῷ. 

b. In like manner, oy is sometimes found in the Opt. for οιη ; chief- 
ly, but not wholly, in the later Greek : as, ἁλῴη & 183 (ἁλοίην X. 253); 
βιῴην (2 Aor., thus distinguished from the Att. Pres., 298 ὁ) Ar. Ran. 

6. Ina few instances, the Subj. and Opt. of verbs in -vps are irregularly 
formed, or supplied by the Ind. : thus, used as Subj., διασκεδάννῦσι. δια- 
σκεδάννυται Pl. Pheed. 77 ἃ, Ὁ, ξώννυνται w. 89 ; Opt. (having the common 
μι form, with t absorbed, 293) δ(υ-ι)ύην (45 h), din σ. 348, φύη Theoe. 15. 
94, éxdduev IL. 99, πήγν(υ-ῦτο Pl. Phed. 118 a, δαινῦτο Q. 665, δαινύατο 
(for -ῦντο) σ. 248. So φθίμην (as for φθιιμην)ὴ x. 51, φθῖτο X. 330. 

d. In the Opt. act., the forms without ἡ (293 a) naturally prevail more 
in the longer Pres., than in the shorter 2 Aor. 


D. Compiete TENSES. 


317. The complete tenses are wholly wanting in many 
verbs. They are more used in the passive than in the active 
system, and more by /ater than by earlier writers. The use 
of their simple forms is chiefly limited, except in preteritive 
systems (268), to the Purr. anp Puup. INDIC., INF., and PART., 
other needed forms being commonly supplied by the Perr. 
PART. with the aualary εἰμί. χε ; 


a. The. Perr. 5087. and opt. are chiefly so supplied : Subj. 
λελυκὼς ὦ, λελυμένος ὦ " Opt. λχελυκὼς εἴην, λελυμένος εἴην. 

b. The Perf. act. may also form these modes by inflection, especially 
-when used as a Pres.: as, ἑστήκω, vi. 5. 10, éo7&, Pl. Gorg. 468 b, ᾿ 
ἑσταίην, ψ. 101, Sediw, Rep. A. 1. 11 (46d, b), πεποιθοίην (293 ὁ) ; εἰλή- 
gwow Pl. Pol. 269 Ὁ, πεπτώκοι v. 7. 26, πεποιήκοι Th., βεβλήκοιεν Id. 

c. In the Perf. pass., these modes have a simple form in only a few 
pure verbs: as, κτάομαι to acquire, prpvicKe remind, καλέω call ; Pf. P. 
or M. κέκτημαι 1 have acquired, I possess, μέμνημαι I remember, κέκλημαι 
T have been called, I am named (268) ; Subj. xexr(n-w)@uat, κεκτῇ, κεκτῆς- 
ται Symp. 1. 8, μεμνῶμαι, Pl. Phil. 81 ἃ ; Opt. κεκτ(η-ι)γήμην, κεκτῇτο Pl. 
Leg. 731 ¢, μεμνήμην Q. 745, μεμνῇτο Ar. Pl. 991, κεκλήμην, κεκλῇο Soph. 
Ph. 119 (292, 293); also κεκτ(η-οὐ)ῴμην, κεκτῴμεθα Eur. Heracl. 282, 
μεμνῴμην, μεμνῷο i. 7. 5 (v. 1. μεμνῇο, μέμνοιο), μεμνῷτο Cyr. 1. 6. 3 (cf. 
315 ὁ). -So Subj. (βαλ-, Bra-) βεβλῆσθε Andoc.; Opt. λελ(υ-)ῦντο σ. 238. 


§ 320. ἢ COMPLETE TENSES. : 205 


318. The Perf,; in its proper sense, may have the mprra- 
TIVE in the 8 Pers. ; but otherwise, this mode belongs only to 
those Perfects which aré used in a Present sense (268, 46). 


a. In the active voice, the Perf. imv. is very rare, except in the nude 
form of the 2 Perf. (320) : ἄνωγε, κεκράγετε (320 [), γέγωνε Eur. Or. 1220, 
BeBnxérw Luc. Hist. Sc. 45, éouxérw 10. 49. The Imv. act. λέλυκε 15 in- 
serted in 37, not as itself used, but to represent such forms as these. 


319. The simple form of the Future Perrscr is found in 
only a small number of verbs; and is especially rare in liquids, 
in verbs beginning with a vowel, in verbs in -μι; and in those 
which form the Perf. pass. in -σμαι : πεφύρσεσθαι Pind. N. 1. 
104, εἰρήσεται Cyr. 7. 1. 9, λελήσεται (Pf. λέλησμαι) Eur. Alc. 


a. The Fut. Perf. is frequent in those verbs only in which it is used as 
a common Future (268). Its Participle is scarcely found in classic Greek. 

b. Of the active form, only two examples belong to Attic prose, both 
formed from preteritives, and both giving rise to equivalent middle forms : 
Pf. ἕστηκα I stand, τέθνηκα I am dead, Fut. Pf. ἑστήξω and ἑστήξομαι. 
I shall stand, τεθνήξω and τεθνήξομαι. Other examples of the Fut. Pf. 
mid. with the Perf. act. are κέκλαγγα . scream, κεκλάγξομαι Ar. Vesp. 
930, κέκρᾶγα I cry, κεκράξομαι Ar. Ran. 265. See 284 f, g. 

c. The Fut. Perf. unites the base of the Perf. with Future affixes ; and 
a vowel lengthened before the tense-sign -o- in the Fut. is also length- 
ened in the Fut. Perf. : as, δέω bind, δήσω, δέδεμαι, δεδήσομαι. 


320. Nupe Forms. a. In the 2 Perr. and Puvup., the 
connecting vowel is sometimes omitted in the Jnd. plur. and 
dual (276 b). When this omission takes place, then commonly, 
(b) the Ind. sing. is supplied by forms from a longer base (cf. 
306 c) ; which forms likewise occur in the plur. and dual, but 
less frequently ; (c) the Subj., Opt., Imp., and Inf. are formed 
after the analogy of. verbs zn -μὲ ; (d) the Part. is contracted, if. 
the characteristic is a oro. Thus, ~ 


(a) ἕστα-μεν, δέδι-μεν, (ἴδ-μεν, 148) ἔσμεν ii. 4. 6, (ἰδ-τε, 147) tore, (ἰδ- 
vot, ὃ becoming o in imitation of the other persons) ἔσᾶσι" (Ὁ) ἕστηκα, 
ἑστήκειν, δέδοικα, olda (bases ἑστα-, ἑστηκ- ; δεδι-, δεδοικ- ; ἰδ-, οἱδ-, εἰδε-) ; 
ἑστήκασιν Δ. 484, ἑστήκεσαν... ἕστασαν Cyr. 8. 8. 9, ἐδεδοίκεσαν ili. 5. 
18, οἴδαμεν Pl. Alc. 141 ὁ ; (c) ἑστῶ - ἑσταίην, εἰδείην - ἕσταθι, δέδιθι, ἴσθι 
ii. 1. 18 ; ἑστάναι iv. 5. 7, δεδιέναι (313 0), εἰδέναι - (4) ἑστ(α-ὠς)ώς i. 3. 2, 
BeBp(o-ws)ws, 2 Pf. Pt. οἵ βιβρώσκω eat. See 46. 

e. The Perfects of θνήσκω to die, Balyw go, and τλα- bear, τέθνηκα, Bé- 
βηκα, and τέτληκα have associated nude forms, partly poet., closely akin 
to those of ἕστηκα. So γέγονα, 2 Pf. of γέγνομαι to become, and μέμονα 
I am eager, have nude poet. forms from the shorter bases yeya-, μεμα-. 

f. In a few nude poet. forms of impure verbs, τ passes into 0: ἄνωγα 
I command, pret., Imv. ἄνωγε Eur. Or. 119, and ἄνωχθι Id. Ale. 1044, 
dveryérw B, 195, and ἀνώ(γ-τωγχθω A. 189, ἀνώγετε ψ. 132, and ἄνωχθε 
Eur. Rh. 987 ; xéxpaya (319b), Imv. κέκραχθι Ar. Vesp. 198, κεκράγετε 
Ib. 415, and κέκρα(γ-τεγχθε Ar. Ach. 335 ; éyelpw rouse, 2 Pf. ἐγρήγορα. 
Iam awake, Imv. 2 pl. ἔγρήγορθε Σ. 299 : πάσχω suffer, 2 Pf. πέπονθα, 
2 pl. wém(ovd-re, ονσθε, 147, 159 g, 151 s)oobe I’. 99. See 274a. 


206 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. — DIALECTS. § 321. 


DIALECTIC FORMS (48). 


A. ConrrAcTION. 


321. Forms which are contracted in the Attic (and which 
are also commonly contracted in the Doric, but often with a 
different vowel of contraction) more frequently remain wncon- 
tracted in Ionic prose, while the Epic has great freedom in the 
employment of either wacontracted, contracted, or variously pro- 
tracted forms. 


a. Here belong, particularly, Contract Verbs in -άω, -éw, and -όω (309), 
the Liquid, Att., and Dor. Fut. (305), the Aor. Pass. Subj. (288 a), the 
Subj. of Verbs in -μι (316), and the 2 Sing. in -at and -o (297 e). In 
these forms, the first vowel is commonly either (I.) a, (II.) ε, or (III.) o. 


322. I. Tur First vowELa. a. In the Ionic, thea is commonly 
contracted or changed into ε (a change sometimes found in the Dor.,130b,d); 
and when @ with an O vowel is contracted into ὦ, ε is often inserted (135, 
120i). Thus we find, as various readings, ὁρῶντες, ὁρέοντες, and ὁρέωντες, 
Hat. 1. 82, 99. So ὡρέομεν, χρέεσθαι, χρᾶσθαι, ἐχρέωντο, éxpéovro, xpéw, Id. 
Subj. of Verbs in -μι, δυνεώμεθα Hdt. 4. 97, 2 Aor. στέωσι Id. 3. 15, Béw- 
μεν 7. 50, κτέωμεν x. 216. Seec. (Ὁ) In the 2 Sing., the termination 
-ao commonly remains: as, éxpjoao Hdt. 1. 117, ἐπίσταο 7. 209. 

6. In the Epic, extended forms are made by doubling the vowel of con- 
traction, either in whole, or in part (i. e. by inserting one of its elements, 
or its corresponding short vowel, commonly o with ὦ, and & with a, 135) ; 
and sometimes by prolonging a short vowel, particularly ¢ used for a to 
ει : as, dpdw, contr. ὁρῷ I'. 234, extended ὁρόω Εἰ. 244, dpdwre A. 347, ὁρό- 
woat A. 9, dp(deus)Gs A. 202, ὁράᾳς H. 448, ἐμνώοντο B. 686; μνάασθαι a. 
39, δρώωσι o. 324; δρώοιμι 317; Att. Fut. (805 Ὁ) éAdwor N. 315, ἐλάαν 
ε. 290, κρεμόω H. 83: 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -μι, στῇ σ. 334, στήῃ E. 
598, στείομεν O. 297, στήετον σ. 183, βείω Z. 113. (ἃ) So in Ion. prose, 
in imitation of the Ep., κομόωσι Hdt. 4.191; Dor. κομόωντι Theoc. 4. 57. 
(e) If the flexive begins with τ, a is not prefixed : as in ὁρᾶ-τε, ὁρᾶ-ται. 

f. The Doric sometimes contracts a with an O sound following into 
ἃ; and commonly a with an # sound following into ἡ (131 a, 0) : as, 
πεινᾶντι Theoc. 15, 148; 1 Aor. 2 sing. ἐπάξα Theoc. 4. 28, for ἐπήξαο, 
τῷ ; τολμῇς Id. 5. 35, ὁρῆτε 110. The latter contraction appears in some 
Ion. prose-writers ; and in some Ep. Du. forms, as συλήτην N. 202. 


323. II. Tue First VoweEt ες a. In Ionic PROSE, contraction 
is commonly omitted, except as eo and eov often become ev: as, ποιέω 
Hdt. 1. 38, ποιέεις 39, ἐποίεε 22, ποιεόμενος 73, ποιεύμενος 68, ποιεῦσι 131; 
Fut. σημανέω Id. 1. 75, ἀμυνεῦσι 9.6; Aor. Subj. ἀπαιρεθέω Id. 5. 65, 
θέωσι 4. 71 (316 a) ; 2 Sing. βούλεαι, τεύξεαι, Id. 1. 90, éyéveo 35, ἔθευ 7. 
209. (Ὁ) In like manner, εο, used for ao (322 a), may become ev: as, εἰρώ- 
τευν Hdt. 3.140. Soin the Dor., ἠρώτευν Theoc. 1. 81; γελεῦντι 90. 

ce. The Epic commonly omits contraction, if the last vowel is ὦ, @, ot, 
ἢ» or ἢ (except in the Aor. pass. subj., and in the Perf. subj. εἰδῶ) ; but 
otherwise employs or omits it according to the metre (εο and eov, when 
contracted, re lathe becoming ev. Synizesis is frequent when ¢ precedes 
a long O vowel, and sometimes occurs in eov, and even in eat. The Ep., 
also, often protracts € to εἰ) and sometimes doubles the vowel of contrac- 


§ 326. CONTRACTION. TENSE-SIGNS, CONNECTING VOWELS. 207 


tion ἡ. Thus, φιλέοι o. 305, φιλέωμεν 0. 42, φιλέῃσιν o. 70, πειρηθῶμεν X. 
381, εἰδῶ A. 515; φιλεῖ B. 197, φιλέει 1. 342, ἔῤῥει P. 86, ἔῤῥεε N. 539, ἔσῃ 
τ. 254, ἔσεαι A. 568, ἔσσξαὶ £ 33; φράζεο E. 440, φράζευ δ. 395, Kadeov 
6. 550, καλεῦντο B. 684 ; vecxeiw A. 359, éredelero A. 5; Aor. Pass. Subj. 
δαμείω σ. 54, δαμήῃς, v. 1. δαμείῃς, I’. 486; 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -μι, 
θείω II. 83, ἀνήῃ B. 34, θέωμεν w. 485, θείομεν A. 1438. 

d. After the analogy of the contract Pres., the lon. often extends the 
2 Aor. Inf. in -etv, as if formed by contraction, to -éew: as, ἰδέειν, φυγέ- 
ew, ἑλέειν, Ψ. 4638, B. 393 (φυγεῖν 401), A. 205, Hdt. 1. 32, 1, 36. 

e. In the Ion., εε followed by a distinct vowel, sometimes becomes εἰ; 
or loses one €: as, μυθ(έ-εαι)εῖαι 0. 180, μυθέαι β. 202, νεῖαι Δ. 114, ald(é- 
eo)eto 2. 503, πωλ(έ-εο)έο δ. 811, φοβέο Hdt. 7. 52 (φοβεῦ 1. 9). 

f. For the Doric contraction of εο and eov into ev, and, in the stricter 
Dor., of εε into ἢ, see 131 Ὁ, 180 ὁ : ἐλέγευ Theoe. 1. 86, μάχευ 113, ἐῤῥευν 
2. 89, εὗσα 76; ποίη Ar. Lys. 1818. So, in Hom., ἀπειλήτην λ. 313. 


324. III. Tur rrrst vowet o. a. Here the Ionic and Doric 
usually employ contraction, following the common rules, except that the 
Ion. sometimes uses ev for ov, and the Dor. and ᾧ for ov and ot (131 b, 
130 ¢): as, δικαιεῦσι Hdt. 1. 188, μαστιγῶν Epich. 19 [1]. - 

Ὁ. The Dor. ὦ is likewise used by other dialects in ῥιγόω to be cold, 
and in the Ion. ἱδρόω sweat: as, ῥιγῶν Ar. Vesp. 446, pry Pl. Gorg. 

ce. The Epic sometimes protracts the o to ὠ, and sometimes employs 
the combination ow after the analogy of verbs in -άω (322 ὁ) : as, ἱδρώοντα 
>. 372, dpdwow ι. 108 ; 2 Aor. Subj. γνώω ἕ. 118, δώῃ μ. 216, δώῃσιν A. 324, 


Β. Tense-Siens, anp Unton or Srem anp Arrrx. 


325. a. In verbs in -ζω, the Dor. commonly employs € for σ᾿ in the 
Fut. and Aor.: as, καθίξας Theoc. 1. 12, for καθίσας from καθίζω, χαρίξη 
5. 71, ἐκόμιξαν Pind. N. 2. 31. This change appears also in a few other 
verbs in which short a precedes : as, yeAdéas (fr. γελάω, 310 6) Theoc. 7. 

b. In the Fut. act. and mid., the Dor. commonly adds to the tense- 
sign εν which is then contracted with the connecting vowel : as, (¢-cé-w) 
go Theoc. 1. 145, (ᾳ-σέ-ομαι) ἀσεῦμαι 3. 38, ποησεῖς 8. 9. See § 305d. 

c. For the doubling of o by the poets, especially the Ep., see 171. 

d. The omission of the tense-sign -κ- is extended, particularly in the 
Epic ; where we specially notice the Perf. Participles in -és pure. In 
these, the vowel preceding -@s is more frequently lengthened ; and the 
Part. is then declined in -éros or -@ros, according to the metre. If the 
preceding vowel remains short, the form in -@ros is commonly required. 

hus, κεκμηότας A. 801, xexundra x. 31, πεπτεῶτα ᾧ. 503. See 320. 

e. In the fem. of the Perf. Part., the Ep. sometimes shortens the ante- 

penult on account of the verse: as, λελᾶκυϊα μ. 85 (λεληκώς X. 141). 


C. ConnectiInG VOWELS. 


326. a. For the 2 Sing. and Inf. affixes -es and -ev, the Dor. has 
sometimes the old short forms -es and -ev (291 a, 294 b) ; and sometimes 
prolongs these to -ys and -nv: as, cuplodes, συρίσδεν, Theoc. 1. 3, 14, 
yapvey Pind. O. 1. 5; εὑρῆν, χαίρην, εἰπῆν, Theoc. 11. 4, 14. 1, 19. 

b. The Dor. and Hol. sometimes give to the Perf. the connecting vowel 
of the Pres. (276 a), especially in the Inf.: as, δεδοίκω Theoc. 15. 58, for 
δέδοικα, πεποίθει 5. 28; Inf. δεδύκειν Id. 1. 102, τεθνάκην Sap. 2. 15; 


2082 - CONJUGATION. — DIALECTS. § 326. 


Part. κεχλάδοντας Pind. Instances likewise occur, in the Ep., of the Perf. 
pene over into the form of the Pres., and of the Plup. into that of the 
mpf.: as, κεκλήγοντας M. 125; ἐμέμηκον ι. 439, érépixov Hes. Th. 152. 

c. In this way new verbs arose, not confined to the Ep.: as, fr. ἄνωγα, 
ἀνώγω order, O. 43, Hdt. 7. 104, Impf. ἤνωγον I. 578 (ἠνώγεον H. 394), 
F. ἀνώξω π. 404, A. ἤνωξα, Hes. Se. 479 ; fr. ὥλεκα, ὀλέκω destroy, Σ. 172. 

d. Where the Ind. has a short connective, the Ep. often retains this in 
the Subj. (292. 2), for the sake of the metre: as, ἀγείρομεν A. 142, ἴομεν 
B. 440, φθίεται T. 173, μίσγεαι B. 232, εἴδετε O. 18, λάβετον K. 545. 

e. The poets, especially the Epic, much extended the use of nude af- 
fixes in the Pres., Impf., and 2 Aor.; introducing them into euphonic 
systems, and even using them after a diphthong or a consonant, chiefly 
in the Pass. and Mid.: as, ἀνύω, ἐρύω, τανύω (305 f), Pres. rdvirar P. 3938, 
ἔρυσθαι ε. 484; Impf. ἤνὕτο ε. 243, “avuro, "ἄνυμες, Theoc. 2. 92, 7. 10; 
σεύω shake, orev- stand, purpose, σεῦται Soph. Tr. 645, στεῦται I’. 83, 
στεῦνται Asch. Pers. 49, στεῦτο X. 583; φέρω bear, φυλάσσω watch, 
Imv. φέρτε I. 171, (s. pudak-) φύλαχθε (cf. 320 f) Hom. Ap. 538 ; ἅλλο- 
μαι leap, γίγνομαι become, δέχομαι receive, plyvipr mix, Spvipr rouse ; 
2 Aor. Ind. ἄλτο A. 532, ἔγεντο Theoc. 1. 88, ἐδέγμην ι. 518, déxro O. 88, 
ἔμικτο a. 433, ὦρτο Asch. Ag. 987; Imv. δέξο T. 10; δέχθε Ap. Rh. 4. 
1554, ὄρσο Δ. 204; Inf. δέχθαι A. 23, ὄρθαι Θ. 474; Pt. δέγμενος B. 794. 


327. The 1 and 2 Aor. forms are united, 


a.) In poetic, chiefly Ep., Aorists which have the tense-sign -o- with 
the connectives -o- and -e-: as, Balvw go, δύω sink, tkw come, οἱ-(φέρω) 
bear, Spvipr rouse ; Aor. Ind. ἐβήσετο v. 75, δύσετο H. 465, tov HE. 473 ; 
Imv. βήσεο EB. 109, oice x. 106, ὄρσεο 1᾽. 250, contr. ὄρσευ A. 264. 

b.) In forms, chiefly Alexandrine and Hellenistic, which attach the 
connectives and flexives of the 1 Aor. to 2 Aor. bases: as, ἐλθ- (ἔρχομαι) 
come, €d- (aipéw) take, ebp- (εὑρίσκω) find, ὀσφρ- (ὀσφραίνω) smell ; Aor. 
ἤλθατε Mt. 25. 36, ἦλθαν Acts 12. 10, ἀνειλάτο Ib. 7. 21, εὕρατο Ap. Rh. 
4, 1133, ὄσφραντο Hdt. 1. 80. See 306. 

_e. These tenses of mixed formation are usually classed as 1 or 2 Aor., 
according to the connective: 1 A. ἦλθαν, 2 A. lor. 


D. ἘΠΕΧΙΒΙΕ Enpines. 


328. a. 1 anv 3 Persons. The old flexives -τ and -vr, prolonged 
to -τι and -ντι, remained in the Dor., which had also -pes for -pev (Lat. ¢, 
nt, mus ; 169 Ὁ, c): as, dart Theoc. 1. 51, τίθητι ὃ. 48, τρέψοντι 6. 36; 
εἴδομες Theoc. 2. 25, δεδοίκαμες 1. 16 (Pind. uses the form -μεν). 

Ὁ. Epic forms of the Subjunctive, with -p and -r prolonged to -pr and 
-σι, are not unfrequent : as, ἐθέλωμι A. 549, ἴδωμι Σ. 63, ἐθέλῃσιν A. 408. 


329. The change of v into a (142) is extended, especially in 
the Ion. 


a. Here, the 3 Plur. endings -érat and -ἅτο, for -vrat, -vro (300 c), are 
usual in the Opt., and the Perf. and Plup. ind., and are also employed in 
the Impf., 2 Aor., and nude Pres. ind. Before these endings, a short 
vowel in the stem is not lengthened (310), except in the poets for the sake 
of the metre, the connective -e- is used instead of -o- (290 a), a and some- 
times εἰ become ¢, and consonants are changed according to 300c. Thus, 
οἰκέαται Hdt. 1. 142, for ᾧκηνται - ἕαται T. 134, εἵαται (184 a)B. 137, aro 
H. 414, for ἧνται, ἦντο.: πεφοβήατο P. 206 ; ἐβουλ(ο-ντογέατο Hdt. 1. 4; 


§ 333. ‘FLEXIBLE ENDINGS: 209 


δυν(α-νται)δέαται 1d. 2.142; κ(ει-ν)έαται A. 659, ἐκέατο Hat. 1. 167 (so, 
with an intervening consonant, ἐρηρέδαται Ψ. 284, épnpédaro η. 95, from 
ἐρείδων) ; τετρίφαται (τριβ-, 39) Hdt. 2. 93, ἐσκενάδατο 7. 67 (so, as if from 
verbs in -ζω, ἐληλάδατο η. 86, ἐῤῥάδαται v. 354, -ro M. 431 ; βουλοίατο Hdt. 
1. 8, πειρῴατο 68, γευσαίατο 2. 47. (Ὁ) The Opt. forms in -aro are like- 
wise used by the Att. poets: as, defalaro Soph. Cid. C. 44. 

6. In a few cases, the poets seem to have simply dropped v between 
two consonants, in the 3 Plur.: as, κεχείμ(αν-νται)ανταν φρένες Pind. P. 9. 
57, 5€50(k-vra)krav. . φυγαί Id. Bac. 1350. Cf. 158. 

. d. For the Impf. ἐτίθην and ἦν, the Ion. has ἐτίθεα Hdt. 3. 155, and 
ha B. 818, unaugmented ἔα A. 321, Hdt. 2.19. So ἔας Hdt. 1. 187, je 
A. 381, éare Hdt. 4. 119, ἔασαν 9. 31. Cf. 306 ο. 


- 330. The flexives of the 3 Pur. are interchanged, espe- 
cially in the Alex. and Hellen. Greek, and the Ep. and Dor. 


poets : thus, 

a.) Alex. and Hellen., -ἂν for -ἄσν of the Perf., and -oav for -v or -ev : 
as, πέφρικαν Lyc. 252, ἔγνωκαν Jn. 17. 7 (so ἔοργαν Hom. Batr. 179) ; 
ἐσχάζοσαν Lyc. 21, ἤλθοσαν Ps. 79. 1, ποιήσαισαν Deut. 1. 44. 

b.) In the Ep. and Dor. poets (sometimes imitated by the. Att.), the 
older -v for -oav. (275 0) : as, Aor. Pass. ἤγερθεν for ἠγέρθησαν, A. 57, 
τράφεν 251, φάανθεν 200, ἔκρυφθεν Eur. Hipp. 1247 ; -μι Form, ἔσταν AL 
535 (ἔστησαν N. 488), tev M. 33, τίθεν Pind. P. 3. 114,ἔφῦν ε. 481. 


331. 2 Pers. a. In the Subj. 2 sing., the uncontracted -you (or 
shorter -eat, 326 d) commonly remains in the Ep., and sometimes in Ion. 
prose : as, ἵκηαι Z. 143, ἴδηαι Hdt. 4.9. Cf. 323. . 

b. The Ep. sometimes drops o in the Perf. and Plup. pass.: as, μέμνηαξ 
®, 442, contr. μέμνῃ O. 18, Theoc. 21. 41, βέβληαε Εἰ. 284, ἔσσυο Il. 585. 
τ ¢. On the other hand, in theS. 8., we find the σ᾽ retained in some con- 
tract forms, and in the Presents having the sense of the Fut. πέομαι, φά: 
γομαι (305f): as, καυχ(άεσα)ᾶσαι Rom. 2. 17, πίεσαι, φάγεσαι Lk. 17. 8. 

332. IrerativE Form. a. The Ep., to express with more 
emphasis the idea of repeated or continued action, or sometimes 
perhaps for metrical effect, often formed the Impf. and Aor. in 

.“OKOV, -σκόμην. 

b. This form, called the iterative (itéro, to repeat), and akin to the Lat. 
formation in -sco, also appears in Ion. prose, and rarely in Dor. and Att. 
poets. (c) Of the connectives of the Impf. and Aor., it used -e- and -a- 
(290 a), (d) sometimes dropping the -e- after a or ἐν and (6) rarely using 
-a- for -e-. (Ὁ) It was almost strictly confined to the Ind. sing. and 
3 plur., where it was inflected as an Impf. (-σκον, -σκες, -oxe, &c.), but 
commonly without the augment, which was now less needed. (g) Be- 
fore the -σκ-, a short vowel was not lengthened. Thus, 

(c, f) Impf. ἔχεσκον I was in the habit of carrying, N. 257, ἔχεσκες Ez 
472, éxeoxe 126, Hdt. 6. 12, 3 pl. ἔχεσκον δ. 627, for εἶχον, -es, -€, -ov ; 
ὑφαίνεσκεν she kept weaving, B. 104, φέρεσκε Theoc. 25, 138, ἐμισγέσκοντο 
v. 7; 2 Aor. ἔδεσκε Τ΄.. 217, yevéoxero X. 208 ; 1 Aor. (only poet.), στρέψα- 
σκον Σ. 546, μνησάσκετο A. 566; (d) ἔασκες for εἴας, T. 295, καλέεσκε & 
402, καλέσκετο O. 338; (e) ῥίπτασκον O. 23; (g) (wv) δόσκον I. 331, 
(ἣν) ἔσκον H. 158, ἔσκεν Aisch. Per. 656, (ἐφάνη) φάνεσκεν A. 64. 


333. Inrinirive. a. In the Inf., instead of -ναι, the Dor. and Hol, 
commonly retain the old ending -v (272 a), or, with the Ep., reduplicate 
this ending to -pev,which may be still farther prolonged to -pevaw. ; 


COMP, GR. N 


210 STEM OF THE VERB. § 333. 


b. Thus the Aol. forms the Aor, pass. inf. in -nv, the Dor. in -ἣμεν, 
and the Ep. (which also employs the common form) in -ἤμεναι : as, μεθύ- 
σθην Alc. 28 [29], λασθῆμεν Theoc. 2. 18, ὁμοιωθήμεναι A. 187. 

ce. In other tenses, the nude Inf. has commonly in the Dor. the form 
-pev, in the Hol. -ν and -μεναι, and in the Ep. -vat, -pev, and -μεναι : as, 
θέμεν Theoc. 5. 21, A. 315, θέμεναι Insc. Cum., B. 285, θεῖναι A. 26 (cf. 
A. 57), γνώμεναι a. 411; νίκᾶν (335 b) Ale. 86 [15]; τεθνάμεναι Q. 225, 
ἔδμεν A. 719, ἔδμεναι N. 273. So ἑστάμεναι Hdt. 1.17. Before -pev and 
τμεναι, a short vowel in the 2 Aor. does not pass into a diphthong (314 d). 

d. In like manner the non-Attic poets employ, for -ev (originally -ev, 
294 Ὁ), the prolonged -έμεν and -έμεναι : as, ἀκου(εν)έμεν A. 547, Pind. O. 
8. 44, Theoc. 8. 83, ἀκουέμεναι A. 380, ἀξέμεν Ψ. 111, ἀξέμεναι 50. 

e. Verbs in -d@ and -éw have a contract form in -ἤμεναι : as, γο(ά-εν)ή- 
μεναι =. 502, πεινήμεναι v. 137, καλ(έ-ενγήμεναι K. 125, πενθήμεναι σ. 174. 


334. Parricrete. For the Fem. -ovoa, the Laconic uses -wa : as, 
ἐκλιπ(οῦσαγῶα, κλεῶα, θυρσα(ζουσῶν, 170 αὐδδωᾶν, Ar. Lys. 1297, &c. 


ἘΠ. VeERps IN -pt. 


335. a. The Ion. and Dor. employ more freely than the Att. the 
forms with a connecting vowel (315), especially in the Pres. sing. of verbs 
whose characteristic is € or 0: as, τιθεῖς Pind. P. 8. 14, τιθεῖ a. 192, Hat. 
1. 188, διδοῖς I. 164, διδοῖ 519, Hdt. 1. 107, διδοῦσιν B. 255 ; tora Hat. 4. 

b. On the other hand, the Hol., Dor., and Ep. retain the form in -μι 
in some verbs, which in the Att. and in Ion. prose have only the form in 
τῷ : as, κάλημι Sap. 1. 16, ὅρημι 2. 11, νίκημι Theoc. 7. 40, for καλέω, &c. 

c. The Ion. changes a characteristic before another a to ε (cf. 322 a), 
and sometimes inserts ε before a (135 a): as, ἱστίαασι, Ἰδθ)έᾶσι Hat. 5. 
71, δυνέαται (329 a), ἱστέαιτο 4. 166. So, in the nude Perf., éoréare 5. 49. 


CHAPTER X. 
STEM OF THE VERB. 


336. The stem of the Greek verb, although 
not properly varied by inflection, yet received many 
changes in the progress of the language. .These 
changes affected the different tenses unequally, so 
that there are but few primitive verbs in which the 
stem appears in only a single form. 


a. The earliest form in which the stem of a verb appears is briefly called 
the prime or old stem ; and other forms, later or modified stems. If a later 
form appears in the Present System, this is called the new stem ; and any 
intermediate forms, middle stems. 

b. The 2 Aor. and 2 Compound Systems are widely distinguished from 
the others by their attachment to the original form of the stem ; and the 


§ 339, DEFECTIVE AND REDUNDANT VERBS. 211 


Pres. System no less by its inclination to depart from this form. The 
other systems differ comparatively little from each other in the form of 
the stem. If the verb has three stems, they are commonly formed from 
the middie. If it has only two stems, they are sometimes formed from the 
earlier, sometimes from the later, and are sometimes divided : as, in τάσ- 
ow (39), old stem tay- ἐτάγην τέταγμαι ἐτάχθην τέταχα ἔταξα τάξω, new 
stem τασσ- τάσσω ; in oft fo rol, 0. 5. σαπ- ἐσάπην, τι. 5. σηπ- σέσημ- 
μαι ἐσήφθην σέσηπα ἔσηψα σήψω σήπω ; in φεύγω flee, ο. 5. φυγ- ἔφυγον 
πέφυγμαι, τι. 8. φευγ- ἐφεύχθην πέφευγα ἔφευξα φεύξομαι φεύγω. 

6. The tenses may be arranged, with respect to the degree in which 
they exhibit the departure of the stem from its original form, as in 47 ; 
which shows a general table (with a few exceptions) for verbs having three 
forms of the stem. 


337. Many verbs are DEFECTIVE, either from the want of a 
complete formation, or from the disuse of some of their forms, 


a. In both cases, the defect is often ἐπὶ gee by other verbs having the 
same signification. In the poets, especially the older, we find many frag- 
ments of verbs belonging to the earlier language. These occur often in 
but a single tense, and sometimes in only a single form of that tense ; as, 
8 Sing. ἔβραχε rang, A. 420, dédro (8. dea-) appeared, §. 242. 

338. On the other hand, many verbs are REDUNDANT, 
either through a double formation from the same stem, or the 
use of forms from different stems. It should be observed, how- 
ever, that two or more forms of the same tense, with few ex- 
ceptions, either, : 

(a) Belong to different periods, dialects, or styles of composition: thus, 
κτείνω, and later κτίννῦ μι (50), to kill; καίω (44), A. P. ἐκαύθην, and Ion. 
éxdnv> πυνθάνομαι, and poet. πεύθομαι (50), inquire. . 

(Ὁ) Differ in their wse : thus, 1 Pf. πέπεικα, transitive, J have persuad- 
ed, ἃ Pf. πέποιθα, intransitive, J trust (39); πέφαγκα I have shown, 
πέφηνα I have appeared (40); 1 A. ἔστησα, trans., J placed, 2 A. ἔστην 
intrans., J stood (45). The second tenses are more inclined than the first 
to an intransitive use. 

Or, (c) Are supplementary to each other. See 306 b, 320. 

d. From the various changes which take place in the stem, many verbs, 
together with their common themes, have others, either older, derived, or 
collateral. In regard to some forms, it seems doubtful whether they should 
be rather viewed as redundant forms of the same verb, or as the forms of 
distinct but kindred verbs. Themes derived from the same root are 
termed cognate. 


339. The changes in the stem of the Greek 
verb are of three kinds, EUPHONIC, EMPHATIC, and 


ADOPTIVE. 


a. The same or similar terms are applied to the modified stems which 
result ; while special names have also been given to some of their more 
common forms. 

b. The dialects increase greatly the number of these changes, especially 
of the euphonic: as, τάσσω, new Att. τάττω (169 a) ; ὁράω, Ion. ὁρέω. 

c. In the following sections of this chapter, and in some of the tables, 
small Roman letters, and figures annexed, are used to mark classes of 
stems and their subdivisions : as, a, al, b?, 


212 THE "VERB, — PRIME AND MODIFIED STEMS. § 340. 


I. Prime Stems (a). 


340. 1. Prime Stems may be roots, either (a*) giving rise 
to modified stems, or (a?) remaining alone ; or they may be 
derived stems, either (8) giving rise to other stems, or (a*) re- 
maining alone. 


Thus, (a1) the root tt-, to pay (itself found in the poet. Pres. riw), gives 
rise to the stems τιν- and τινυ-» used in the later Presents rivw and poet. 
tivtuat ; while (a?) the root éArr-, to cause to hope, remains alone in the 
Ep. verb ἔλπω. But these. verbs have derivatives in the nouns ἐλπίς 
hope, and τιμή honor ; and from these are taken derived stems for new 
verbs: viz., (a®) ἐλπιδ-, giving rise to ἐλπιζ- in the Pres. ἐλπίζω to hope ; 
and (a*) τιμα-» the only stem of the verb τιμάω to honor. 

2. Most verbs which have only the prime stem are derivative pure 
verbs : as, τιμάω, φιλέω, δηλόω (42). 

3. Most roots are monosyllabic, and have a short vowel. Hence these 
became rules for the stem of the 2 Aor.; and some changes appear even 
in this stem, either for conformity to these rules, or to enable the tense 
to take the old nude inflection (818 θ). See 342. 2, 3, 353a. <A very 
few forms from stems otherwise modified are used as 2 Aorists: as, 2 A. 
éripov, commonly ἔτεμον (341), cut. See 327. 

4. The 2 Aor. System (except in a few defective forms, 337 a) belongs 
only to verbs which have more than one stem ; and so, with very few ex- 
ceptions, the 2 Compound System. Few verbs have both systems, and 
comparatively few have either ; though among these are some of the most 
common verbs in the language. 

- 


II. Evrnonic STEms. 
_ $41. Euphonic changes in the stem are chiefly the following: 


Ὁ. Precession (Attenuated Stems). In some stems, a-vowel 
is changed by precession, (b*) & becoming e¢, (b*) ε or o, « (chief- 
ly when consonants are annexed to the stem), (5) ἅ, @, &ce.: as, 

(0) 2 Aor. P. ἐδἄρην, Pr. A. ϑέρω flay; ἐπλἄκην, πλέκω plait; ἐτρα- 
any, τρέπω turn ; (02) 2 A. ἔτεκον, Pr. tixtw bring forth, beget ; ἀμβλόω 
and ἀμβλίσκω miscarry ; (03) 2 A. ἔτρἄγον, Pr. (rpay-) τρώγω cat. 


342. c. Conrraction, Syncope, METATHESIS, ANTITHESIS 
(103 5). 


1. Some stems (91) are contracted: as, ἀείδω G8w sing, ἀΐσσω drow 
rush, κληΐω κλήω old Att. (later κλείω, cf. 222 8) shut. 

2. Some stems are (c?) syncopated in the theme, chiefly in cases of redu- 
plication ; (68) others, in the 2 dor. (340. 8) ; and (c*) others, in other 
tenses : as, (02) 2 A. ἐγενόμην, Pr. (γιγεν-) γίγνομαι become (cf. Lat. gigle]- 
mo); ἔπετον (Dor.), πίπτω fall ; μένω and poet. μίμνω remain ; (08) (eyep-; 
éyp-) ἠγρόμην awoke ; (ct) καλέω CALL, Pf. (κλε-) κέκληκα, κέκλημαι. 

3. In some stems there is transposition, chiefly by changing the place 
of a liquid. This occurs (c5) in the theme; (c®) in the 2 Aor.; (οἷ) in 
other tenses: as, (c5) 2 A. ἔθορον, Pr. (θρο-) θρώσκω leap ; ἔθανον, (Ova-) 
θνήσκω die; (c®) (rad-, τλα-) ἔτλην endured, (σκαλ-, σκλα-) ἔσκλην became 
dry, (Sapx-) ἔδρᾶκον saw (340. 8); (οἴ) BEBAnKa, κέκμηκα (308). 

_ 4. (οὖ, The substitution of one letter for another is chiefly presented 
under other heads (341, 343, &c.).. 


§ 348, EUPHONIC AND EMPHATIC STEMS. 213 


343. d. OmITTING OR ADDING ASPIRATION. 1. Some stems 
(41) are changed to avoid a double aspiration : as, (θρεφ-) τρέφω, 
(Opex-) τρέχω, (€x-) ἔχω, (θε-) ἐτέθην, (Ov-) ἐτύθην (159 Ὁ, ἃ, e). 

2. A few stems (4) have both yer and meet forms : as, 
βρύχω and βρύκω ; ψύχω cool, 2 A. P. éfvyny and ἐψύὕύγην. 

344. 6. In some stems, a consonant is (6) dropped or (623) 

added for the sake of euphony or the metre : as, 


γίγνομαι, become, (yvo-, yeyvo-) γιγνώσκω [g]nosco, KNow, later softened 
forms γίνομαι, γινώσκω ; λείβω, poet. εἴβω, pour. In other verbs, the in- 
sertion of a consonant, especially v, renders a syllable long, and thus relieves 
the succession of short syllables, particularly in objective forms. See 351. 


345. ἢ (Digamma Verbs, &c.) In some verbs, the (f*) 
dropping or (f?) change of F, or (f*) of o, has led to different 
forms of the stem (140s) : as, 

(πλεξ-, πλε- ΕἸ, πλευ- f?) πλέω, πλεύσομαι (42 8); (θεΕ-) θέω run, θεύσο- 
μαι" νέω swim, »γεύσομαι" (xeF-, X€-» χευ-, χυ-) χέω pour, Aor. @xea, Ep. 
éxeva, A. P. ἐχὕθην ; καίω (44): (cex-, σχ- 68, σχε- οὗ, éx- 141, ἐχ- dl) ἔχω 
have, F. (éx-cw) ἕξω, 2A. ἔσχον, Imv. oxés - (cer-, om-c3, ἐπ-, σεσπ- 
284 6, ἑσπ-) ἕπω be busy with, 2 A. ἔσπον, ἐσπόμην, poet. ἑσπόμην, 

ΤΙ. EMPHATIC, OR PROTRACTED STEMS. 

346. Most mpure stems and many pure stems 
are PROTRACTED in the Present System, to express 
with more emphasis the idea of continued, or per- 
haps, in some cases, of ¢ransitive action. This pro- 
traction takes place, (A.) by lengthening short 
vowels ; (B.) by adding syllables or letters. 


347. A. By LENGTHENING SHORT VOWELS; 
either (g) to cognate LONG VOWELS (Long Vowel 
Stems); or (ἢ) to DipHtHONGS (Diphthong Stems): 


(1.) In mute verbs, ἅ becomes ἡ ; in Liquid verbs, and in some 
mute verbs, tand v are simply lengthened ; in other cases, the 
short vowel is usually changed to a diphthong. (2.) In mute 
verbs, the change commonly extends to all the regular tenses 


(303 a). Thus, 


og) 2A. P. ἐσἄπην,. ἐτἄκην, Pr. σήπω rot, τήκω melt ; ἐκλένην, κλίνω 
ie ἐτρίβην, τρίβω (39) ; ἐσὕρην, σύρω drag ; ἐτύφην, τύφω fumigate. 

(h) Fut. pave, καθᾶρῶ, Pr. φαίνω (40), καθαίρω purify ; σπερῶ, σπείρω 
sow; τενῶ, τείνω stretch; 2 A. ἔλζπον, ἔπιθον, Pr. λείπω, πείθω (98 5). 


348. B. By ADDING SYLLABLES OR LETTERS. 
These may be annexed, mserted, or prefixed (32). 


Πα, The CONSONANTS ANNEXED or INSERTED are the consonant 
τ (with the resulting changes, 143), ox, v, τ, 6, &c. 


214 THE VERB. —EMPHATIO STEMS. § 349, 


349. Tora Form. i. The consonant 1 unites (11) with a— 
palatal mute, or less frequently (i?) with a lingual or (1°) labial 
mute, to form oa (in later Att. rr, 169 a) : as, 

(i!) 2A. P. ἐτἄγην, ἐμἄγην, Pr. τάσσω or τάττω (39), μάσσω knead ; 
φυλᾶκ-, φυλάσσω guard ; (12) βλίτ-, βλίττω take honey; κορῦθ-, poet. Ko- 
ρύσσω arm; (15) F. (wer-cw) πέψω, Pr. πέσσω or πέττω cook. 

j. The I unites (j') with a lingual mute, or less frequently 
(75) with a palatal mute, (15) a double palatal, or (j*) a labial 
mute, to form ¢: as, 

(j}) ppad-, φράζω tell ; Svopdr-, ὀνομάζω name ; (j7) 2 A. ekpityor, 
ἐσφἄγην, Pr. κράζω cry, σφάζω or σφάττω slay; στενἄχ-, στενάζω groan ; 
(293) κλαγγ-, κλάζω clang ; (j*) vie-, νίζω, later vlrrw, wash. 

1 (for k, see 350). The I unites with A, to form AA: as, 

F. βᾶλῶ, σφαλῶ, στελῶ, Pr. βάλλω throw, σφάλλω deceive, στέλλω send. 

a. Palatals in -ω are mostly onomatopes (words formed to imitate 
sounds). Some verbs in -{w or -σσὼ have both palatal and lingual forms. 

B. Linguals in -{w are very numerous, particularly those in -ἰζω. They 
are mostly derivatives, wanting the second tenses and, by reason of 
euphonic changes, nowhere showing the stem in its prime form. This 
may often, however, be ascertained from a cognate word. It ends most 
frequently in ὃ, and may be assumed to do so, if the contrary does not 
appear: as, ὁριδ-, ὁριζ- (39 d). 

γ. Most linguals in -{# may be practically regarded as having but a 
single form of the stem, with { as the stem-mark. And in some, (2) the 
stem may be regarded as having for an added consonant simply {, either 
(21) alone or (22) with a vowel (the modified stem marked with z, to avoid 
double notation) : as, (z!) πρίω, and later mpltw, to saw; οὐτάω and ot- 
τάζω wound, poet.; (22) 2 A. ἔπορον, Pr. πορίζω furnish. 

350. k (for 1, see 349). Inceprive Form. In this form, 
-ox- is annexed, (k!) either alone, or (k*) with a vowel, com- 
monly «. When -σκ- alone is added, (k*) a consonant preceding 
is dropped or (k*) transposed, or (k°) rarely unites with the σ, 
excluding the x; while a vowel preceding, particularly o, (k°) 
may be lengthened or (k") changed to. Thus, 

(k1) F. ἀρέσω, μεθύσω, Pr. ἀρέσκω please, μεθύσκω intoxicate ; (k”) 2 A. 
“εὗρον, Pr. εὑρίσκω find ; (k®) ἔχανον, χάσκω (151) gape ; ἔλακον, λάσκω 
sound, utter, poet.; ἔπαθον, (παθσκ-, 151, 159g) πάσχω suffer; (κ΄, ®) 
ἔθορον, (θορσκ-) θρώσκω leap, ἔθανον, (θανσκ-) θνήσκω die (342. 3) ; (ἢ 
ἀλεκ-, (ἀλεκσκ-) ω ward off; (k") ἀμβλόω and ἀμβλίσκω (841) ; 2 A. 
(Gdo-) ἑάλων, ἁλίσκομαι to be taken. So from r. pty-, with transposition, 
may be formed (μιγσκ-) μίσγω mix; cf. Lat. misceo, (mics)mixtum. | 

a. These verbs correspond in form and sometimes in force to the Lat. 
inceptives in -sco: as, γηράσκω senesco, grow old, ἡβάσκω pubesco (379 b). 


351. n. Nasat Form. In this, ν is added, either alone, 
or with a vowel (chiefly as -ἄν-, -vi-, or -ve-). 

1. When -ν- alone is added, (n') it commonly follows the 
former stem-mark, which, (n*) if a short vowel, often becomes 
a long vowel or diphthong; but (n*) sometimes precedes it 
(chiefly a in a few poetic forms) : as, 


§ 354. I, N, T, &C., ANNEXED. 215 


(n!) 2 A. ἔδακον, Pr. Sdxvw dite (47) ; ἔκαμον, κάμνω labor; ἔτεμον, 
τέμνω cut; (n®) ἔπιον, πίνω, drink, (8¥-) ἔδῦν, Sivw enter; (Ba-) ἔβην, 
sto go; é\aw, commonly ἐλαύνω, drive; (n®) F. Sapdsw, poet. Pr. 

apvaw or δάμνημι subdue ; (περᾶ-; wepva-) πέρνημι poet., sell. 

2. There are three ways of adding -ἄν- : (n*) without further 
change, chiefly to double-consonant stems (already long) ; (n°) 
with ν enserted before a characteristic mute, to lengthen a short 
syllable (344) ; (n°) with -av- prolonged to -αιν- or -av-: as, 

(n*) αὔξω and αὐξἄᾶνω (41); 2 A. ἔβλαστον, βλαστἄνω bud ; ἔδαρθον, 
δαρθάνω sicep; ἥμαρτον, ἁμαρτάνω err; (n°) ἔλἄθον, λανθάνω lie hid ; 
ἔμαθον, μανθάνω learn; ἔλαβον, λαμβάνω (150) take ; ἔτυχον, τυγχάνω 
happen ; (n°) (ὀσφρ-) ὠσφρόμην, ὀσφραίνομαι smell ; κερδ-, κερδαίνω gain ; 
ἔκιχον, Ep. κύχάνω, Att. κιγχἄνω n°, v. 1. κίχάνω, find. 

3. When -νυ- is added, the preceding syllable is by rule 
long. Hence, while -νυ- can be (n’) annexed without further 
change to consonants (chiefly palatals and liquids), (n°) the v zs 
doubled after a short vowel (o also becoming @): as, 

(εἴ) 2A. ἐμίγην, μίγνυμι mingle ; ἔπταρον, πτάρνὕμαι sneeze ; οἴγω and 
οἴγνῦμι open ; F. ὄρσω, ὄρνῦμι rouse ; (ἀγ-) ἄξω, ἄγνῦμε break ; (n*) κερὰ- 
ow, κεράννῦμι mix; σβέσω, σβέννύμι extinguish; Kopéow, κορέννῦμι 
satiate ; (ζο-) ζώσω, ζώννῦμι gird ; χόω, and later χώννῦμει, heap up. 

4. (n°) After a diphthong (securing in itself a long syllable), a lingual 
or liquid is dropped before -vv- : as, δαιτ-, ϑαίνῦμι feast ; κτείνω, later 
κτείνῦμι kill. In ὄλλῦμι (ὀλ-, dAvv-) destroy, v is assimilated. 

5. (nl) A few stems receive -ve-: as, 2 A. ἱκόμην, ἱκνέομαι, and poet. 
“κάνω n®, come ; 1 A. éktoa, Kivéw kiss ; Bbw and Bivéw stop up. 

352. +t (for o, see 354). Tau Form. In this, r is added, 
either (t*) alone, chiefly to labial stems, or (t?) with a vowel: 

(t!) 2 A. ἐκόπην, κόπτω cut; ἐτύπην, τύπτω beat ; ἐβλάβην, βλάπτω 
(147) hurt ; ἐκρύβην, κρύπτω hide ; ἐβάφην, βάπτω dip ; ἐῤῥάφην, ῥάπτω 
stitch ; ἔτεκον, τίκτω (341); ἀνύω and dvitw accomplish ; (t?) ἐῤῥίφην, 
ῥίπτω and ῥιπτέω throw ; 1 A. (wex-) ἔπεξα, πεκτέω comb, 

353. q (for p, see 356). Tueta Form. In this form, 
which is chiefly poetic, @ is annexed, (q') either alone, or (q*) 
with a vowel, commonly a or e. (q*) A short vowel in the 
stem is oftener lengthened before 6. Thus, 

(q1) πελάω and πελἄάθω approach, poet.; (43) φλέγω, poet. φλεγέθω, 
burn; (θαλ-) θάλλω 1, poet. θαλέθω flourish ; φθίνω, poet. φθινύθω, consume ; 
ἔδω, poet. (ἐδθω 147) er Ow, comm. ἐσθίω, cat ; (45) véw and νήθω, spin. 

a. A few verbs obtain, in this form, a 2 Aor. with a short penult 
(340. 3): as, διώκω pursue, ἐδιώκαἄθον + εἴκω yield, εἴκαθον. These extended 
Aorists, which are chiefly poet., are regarded by some as Present Systems. 

354. o. A few stems receive other consonants, either (o*) 
alone, or (o*) with vowels: as, 

(01) ἀμερ-, ἀμέρϑω and dpelpw h, deprive, poet.; δίω and δείδω ἢ, fear, 
Ep.; verbs and τρύχω wear out ; paw and phyw rub; véw and poet. vAXw 
swim ; (07) &w to be sated, Ep. A. (ἀδε-) ᾽᾿ἄδησα > tx Ow and ἐχθαίρω hate, 
mostly poet.; κύλζω, κυλίνδω n3, and κυλινδέω, roll. 


-216 THE VERB, — EMPHATIC AND ADOPTED STEMS. § 355. 


355. u,v, w (for r and t, see 357, 352). ΤΙ. 
VoweEL Form. VOWELS ANNEXED to protract the 
stem are chiefly (u) α and (v) e, but (w) some- 


times others: as, 

(u) 2 A. @yoor, γοάω bewail ; epixov, pixdouar low ; ἔμακον, μηκάομαι 
bleat ; ἃ Pf. BeBpvya, βρύχάομαι roar (onomatopes, as also BAnxdouat, 
balo, Germ. bliken, bleat) ; (v) γέγηθα, γηθέω poet., rejoice ; 2 A. ἔκτυπον, 
κτυπέω crash ; F. (δοκ-) δόξω, δρκέω seem, think ; (ὧθ-) dow, ὠθέω push ; 
(w) ἕλκω, late ἑλκύω draw ; (op-, ὀμνυ- nn", ὁμο-) ὄμνῦμι swear, F. ὀμόσω. 

a. (u*, v7) When a is affixed, ε in the preceding syllable usually be- 
comes ὦ ; but when ε is affixed, 0: as, τρέπω, poet. τρωπάω and τροπέω, 
turn ; στρέφω, chiefly poet. στρωφάω and στροφέω, twist. 


356. p, r (for q, see 353). LI. Prerorma- 
TIVES lengthening the stem consist chiefly of (r) 
three kinds of reduplication ; and (p) the few others 
may be rather euphonic than emphatic: as, 

(p) σπαίρω and ἀσπαίρω gasp ; δύρομαι and ὀδύρομαι lament. 

357. τ. Repupiicatep Stems. Reduplication in the stem 
is most frequent in verbs in -με and -σκω. It is of three kinds: 

1. ((ἢ Proper, prefixing the first letter with -t- (rarely with 
-e-) to stems beginning with a single consonant, with a mute and 
liquid, or with μν- : as, 

(S0-, διδο-) δίδωμι, (θε-, θιθε-, 159 a) τίθημι (45) ; (χρα-» xexpa-) κίχρημι 
lend ; (wha-, πι-μ-πλα-, 344) πίμπλημι fill, (πρα-) πίμπρημι burn; 2 A, 
ἔδαον poet., διδάσκω teach; pay (45h), διδράσκω run; (γνο-) ἔγνων, 
,. γιγνώσκω k®, know ; F. (rpa-) τρήσω, terpatvw bore. Cf. Lat. gigno ,sisto. 

2. (x?) Artic, prefixing the two first letters to stems begin- 
ning with a short vowel followed by a single consonant : as, 

(ap-) ἀραρίσκω fit, poet.; (ἀχ-, ἀχαχ-, 1594) ἀκαχίζω afflict, Ep. 
So, with the familiar vowel of reduplication t, in place of the initial vowel 
repeated, (dva-) dvivnus benefit ; ἀτάλλω and ἀτιτάλλω rear, poet. 

3. (05) Improper, simply prefixing « with the rough breathing 
to stems not included above: as, (ora-, σιστα-, 141) ἵστημι, (ἑ-, 
i-€) ἴημι (45); 2 A. ἐπτάμην, ἵπταμαι fly. 


IV. ApopTrep STEMs. 
(For t, see 852; u, v, w, 3553 z, 349.) 


358, x. Some themes, to complete their inflec- 
tion, adopt tenses from stems that appear to be 
radically distinct : as, 

aipéw take, 2 A. (ξλ-) efAov ; ἔρχομαι come, F. (ἔλυθ-, ἐλευθ- h) ἐλεύσομαι, 
2 Pf. ἐλήλυθα ; ἐσθίω eat, 2 A. ἔφαγον ; ὁράω see, F. (ὀπ-) ὄψομαι, 2 A. 
(i8-, 279 c) εἶδον; τρέχω run, 2 A. ἔδραμον; φέρω bear, F. οἴσω, Pf. 
(évex-) ἐνήνοχα ; ὠνέομαι buy, 2 A. ἐπριάμην (45 1). 


§ 361. FORMATION OF WORDS. 217 


CHAPTER XI. 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 


359. a. The Greek, like all other original languages, is the 
development, according to certain natural laws, of a small num- 
ber of germs, or primary elements. These elements (termed by 
botanic figure roots or radicals) have a significance which is not 
arbitrary, but founded upon instinctive principles of the human 
constitution. 

b. If a word contains only one radical, either with or with- 
out formative elements (172 Ὁ), it is termed simple ; but, if 
more than one, compound. Of simple words containing the same 
radical, that which appears to have been the earliest is called 
the primitive ; and the others, derwatwes. 

c. Of those words which are commonly distinguished as primitive and 
derivative, some are directly related to each other as parent and child ; 
while others are merely formations from the same radical, which, however, 
may have a simpler form in the one than in the other. The parent of a 
word is sometimes called dts primitive, even when it is itself the child of 
an older word. So the term stem is sometimes extended to the essence 
of a word which is not inflected (172 a). 

360. The stem of a primitive sometimes remains unchanged 
in a derivative ; but it is commonly modified, chiefly by annex- 
ing significant syllables or letters. These are termed a@forma- 
twes ; while the afformative, with the affix of the theme if this 
is added, may be distinguished as the sufiz. 

Thus, in ἄροτρον plough and λύτρον ransom, the stems apo- and Av- of the 
verbs ἀρόω to plough, λύω to loose, are modified by the addition of the affor- 
mative -rp-, which denotes instrument or means ; and thus give rise to the 
new stems ἀροτρ- and Avtp-, to which again the affix of inflection -ov is 
added, making the themes dpo-rp-ov δα λύ-τρ-ον. These words are more 
briefly said to be formed by adding to the primitive stems the suffix -rpov. 


361. Derivation shows also many euphonic changes, espe- 
cially such as take place before the affixes of verbs: thus, 


a.) Changes of consonants: as, τρί(β-τ)πτης rubber. Cf. 304. 

b.) Precession or the use of a kindred vowel: as, (βασιλε-) βασιλεύς 
king, βασιλικός kingly ; λέγω to speak, NMyos speech. Cf. 312. 

9.) The lengthening of a short vowel, or the insertion of σ᾽ or ἢ : as, 
ποιέω to compose, months poct ; σείω to shake, σει-σ-μός a shaking, shock ; 
αὔξω to increase, αὐξ-η-τικός augmentative. Of. 307, 310, 311. Even an 
initial vowel is sometimes lengthened : as, ἦθος (20w) usage, wpehéw (ὄφε- 
dos) to help. 

4.) Contraction, Syncope, Metathesis, &c.: as, ἄεισμα ἄσμα song ; καλέω 
to call, (κλε-) κλητήρ summoner; τέμνω to cut, τμῆσις cutting. Cf. 342. 

e. A union-vowel is often inserted. 


COMP. GR. 10 


218 DERIVATION, ᾿ § 361. 
I. FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 


362. Simple words are divided in respect to their forma- 
tion into three.classes: (a) those which consist of the mere 
radical, without change, except for euphony or emphasis ; (b) 
those which have, in addition, merely the affixes of inflection ; 
(0) those which receive further modifications. 


4. The Rules and Remarks which follow have respect chiefly to ‘the 
last class. 

e. Words derived from verbs are called VERBALS ; from nouns (whether 
substantive or adjective, according to the old classification), DENOMINA- 
TIVES ; from pronouns, PRONOMINALS. 

f. Many derivative nouns are properly adjectives used substantively. 


A. Nouns. 


363. I. From Verzs. Nouns formed from verbs (or from 
common radicals, 359 ὁ) denote, 

1.) The acTION or ABSTRACT IDEA of thé verb. These are 
formed by adding to the stem of the verb, 


a.) -σις (Gen. -σεως, fem.), or -σίᾶ (Gen. -olds, f.): as, μιμέ-ομαι to 
imitate, μίμη-σις imitation ; πράσσω (τ. mpay-) to act, πρᾶ(γ-σιο)ξις action ; 
θύω to sacrifice, θυσία sacrifice ; δοκιμάζω to try, δοκιμασία trial. 

b.) -n, -a (G. -ys, -ds, f.): as, φεύγω (1. φυγ-) to flee, φυγ-ἡ flight ; 
τρέφω to nourish, τροφή nourishment ; χαίρω (r. xap-) to rejoice, xap-a joy. 

c.) -os (G. -ov, m.): as, πλέω to sail, πλόος sailing, voyage. 

ἃ. -ros (G. -rov, m.), -tTy (G. -rys, f.) and Ion. -τύς (ἃ. -τύος, f.) : as, 
kwkv-w to wail, κωκῦ-τός wailing ; βιόω to live, βιοτή and βίοτος life. 

e.) -μός (G. -μοῦ, m.), or -μη (G. -pys, f.): as, ὀδύρ-ομαι to lament, 
ὀδυρ-μός lamentation ; μέ-μνη-μαι to remember, μνή-μη remembrance. 

f.) τος (6. -e0s, n.): as, κήδ:ομαι to care, κῆδ-ος care. 

g. Other suffixes appear in ὁ γέλως, -wros, laughter, ὄλεθρος destruc- 
tion ; ἡ ἀλγηδών pain (cf. Lat. cupido), δύναμις, -ews, power, &c. 

h. From the tendency of abstracts to pass into concretes, verbals of 
Class 1 often express not so much the action itself, as an effect, object, 
circumstance, &c., of the action, and thus blend with other classes: as, 
γραμμή line, δόσις gift, λάχος share. 


364. 2.) The Errsct, or opsect of the action. These are 
formed by adding to the stem of the verb, 

a.) -pa (G. -paros, n.): as, πράσσω to do, πρᾶγ-μα (τὸ πεπραγμένον fac- 
tum, thing done) deed ; σπείρω to sow, σπέρμα thing sown, seed. 

b. Other suffixes appear in τὸ δῶρον gift, πέταλον leaf, βέλεμνον missile. 


365. 3.) The porR. These are formed by adding to the 
stem of the verb, 


a.) -τῆς (6. -του, m.): as, ποιέω to compose, ποιητής poeta, poet. 

b.) -τήρ (ἃ. -τῆρος, m.) or -rwp (G. -ropos, m.): as, σώξω to save, σω- 
THp servator, savior; στ. pe-, to speak, ῥή-τωρ orator, speaker. (0) The 
feminines corresponding to Classes a. and Ὁ. end in -τριᾶ or -τειρἄ (pro- 
paroxytone, (ἃ, -ds), or in -tpls or -τις (G. -t80s) : as, ποιήτρια poétria, 
poetess, σώτειρα servatrix, female deliverer, προφῆτις prophetess. 


$368. NOUNS. | 219 


d.) -ets (G. -éws, m.): as, ypdd-w to paint, ypad-evs painter. 

e.) -ds (G. -οὔ, m. f.): as, τρέφω to nourish, τροφός nurse. 

f.) -μων (ἃ. -povos, m.): as, ἡγέ-ομαι to lead, ἡγε-μών leader. 

g. Other suffixes appear in ὁ τέκτων, -ovos, workman, τρόχις, runner, &e. 


366. 4.) The PLACE, INSTRUMENT, or other means or cir- 
cumstances of the action. These are formed by adding to the 
stem of the verb, 


a.) -τήριον (G. -ov, n.), more frequently expressing place: as, ἀκροά- 
ouat to hear, ἀκροα-τήριον auditorium, place of hearing, auditory. 

b.) -tpov (ἃ. -ov, n.), or -τρᾷ (G. -ds, f.), more frequently expressing 
means : as, ξύω to curry, ξύστρον and ξύστρα currycomb, ἄροτρον plough. 

c. Other suffixes appear in τὸ κλεῖθρον bar ; ὁ στέφανος crown ; ke. 

4. Nore. Suffixes of verbals are annexed, in general, with the same 
euphonic changes as the similar affixes of inflection (361): i. e. those be- 
ginning with o follow the analogy of -ocw of the Fut. or -oat of the Perf. 
pass.; those beginning with p and τ, of -par and -ται of the Perf. pass. ; 
and those beginning with a vowel, of the 2d Perf. 10 is convenient to re- 
member, that verbal nouns following the 1st Pers. sing. of the Perf. pass. 
more frequently denote the thing done; the 2d, the doing ; and the 34d, 
the doer. Thus, 


πε-ποίη-μαι, πε-ποίη-σαι, πε-ποίη-ται, 
ποίη-μα, poem, ποίη-σις, Poesy, ποιη-τής, poet. 


367. II. From Anpsrctives. Nouns formed from adjec- 
tives (or from common radicals, 359 6) usually express the 
ABSTRACT of the adjective, and are formed in, 


a.) -(a (G. -Cas, f.), or oftener, if the stem ends in ε or 0, -ιᾶ forming, 
with the stem-mark, -eud or -ovd: as, cop-ds wise, cop-la sapient-ia, wis- 
dom ; ἀληθής, -έ-ος, true, ἀλήθεια truth ; εὔνο-ος, kind, etvou kindness. 

b.) -tys (G. -τητος, f.), from adjectives in -og and -ὖς : as, ἔσος equal, 
ἰσότης equalitas, equality ; ταχύς swift, ταχυτής celeritas, swiftness. 

c.) -σύνη (G. -ns, f.), from adjectives in τος and -wv: as, δίκαιος just, 
δικαιοσύνη justice ; σώφρων discreet, σωφροσύνη discretion. 

ἃ.) -os (G. -εος, n.), chiefly from adjectives in -vg: as, βαθύς deep, 
.Bd00s depth ; εὐρύς broad, edpos breadth ; ταχύς (b), τάχος speed. 

e.) -ds (G. -άδος, f.), from numerals : as, δύο two, duds duad ; τριάς. 


368. III. From Orner Nouns. Nouns derived from 
other nouns are chiefly, 


1.) Parriats, and similar words denoting persons related to 
some object. These end in, 


a.) -τῆς (G. -rov, τη.) and -τις (G. -τιδος, f.; 235 a), with the preceding 
vowel long in patrials (-irys, -τήτης, -ἄτης, -ιἄτης, -τιώτης) and also in other 
nouns in urns, -ἰτις : as, Σύβαρις Sybaris, DuBapirys, a man of S., a Sy- 
barite, Συβαρῖτις, a woman of S.; Αἰγινήτης, Πισάτης, Σπαρτιάτης, Σικε- 
λιώτης, a man of Afgina, &c.; τόξον bow, τοξότης archer, τοξότις archeress. 

Ὁ.) -εὖς (G. -éws, m.) and -ἰς (G. -{80s, f.; 217 f): as, Μέγαρα Megara, 
Μεγαρεύς Megarian man, Meyapis M. woman; φάρμακον drug, φαρμακεύς 
dealer in drugs, sorcerer, φαρμακίς sorceress ; ἵππος equus, ἱππεύς eques. 
_ ¢ A PATRIAL NOUN (patria, native land) denotes a person belonging 
to a particular cowntry ; a GENTILE NOUN (gens, nation), one belonging 
to a particular nation. Adjectives have like distinctions. 


220 DERIVATION. — NOUNS. § 369. 


369. 2.) Parronymics (so called from contaming the fa- 
ther’s or an ancestor’s name, πατρὸς ὄνομα). These end in, 


a.) -8ys (G. -δου, m.) and -s (G. -80s, f.), preceded by -d- if from 
names in -tos or of Dec. 1, but otherwise by -t- (-i8ys uniting with a pre- 
ceding ε or 0): as, Bopéds Boreas, Bopeddns son of B., Βορεᾶς daughter of 
B.; Θέστιος, Θεστιἄδης, Θεστιᾶς * Πρίαμος, Πριαμίδης, Πριαμῖς " Κέκροψ, 
Κεκροπίδης, Κεκροπίς + Πηλεύς, -έως, Πηλείδης Pelides ; Ἡρακλείδης (19 b) ; 
Λητώ, -50s, Λητοίδης. The Ep. often uses the form in -ἰάδης after a long 
syllable, for the sake of the metre : Φηρητιάδης, B. 763 ; Πηληϊάδης, A. 1. 

b.) -ίων (G. -lwvos, rarely -fovos, m.) and -τώνη or -ἴνη (G. -ης; f.), 
only poetic : as, Κρόνος Satur®, Kpoviwv, ~iwvos or tovos, son of S., A. 397; 
Πηλεύς, Πηλεΐων, v. 1. -εἰων, A. 188 ; ᾿Ακρίσιος, ᾿Ακρισϊώνη, daughter of A., 
=. 319 ; “Adpyoros, ᾿Αδρηστίνη E. 412. The poets even blend the forms 
a. and b.; and use other freedoms: as, fr. Λάμπος, Λαμπετίδης, O, 526. 


370. 3.) Femate Appe.uatives. These end in, ~ 


a.) -us (G. -\80s), chiefly from masculines of Dec. 1, and from those in 
-e0s : as, δεσπότης master, δεσπότις mistress (also δέσποινα, cf. Ὁ). - 

b.) -αινᾶ (G. -ys), chiefly from masculines in τῶν : as, λέων, -ovros, 
leo, lion, λέαινα lezena, lioness ; τέκτων, -ovos, artisan,” réxrawa. 

c.) -ειᾶἅ (G. -elas) : as, βασιλεύς rex, king, βασίλεια regina, queen. 

4.) -σσᾶ (-ττᾶἄ, 169a; G. -ns), from several endings of Dec. 3: as, 
Κίλιξ, -ἰκος, Cilician, Κίλ(ικϊα, 143. chooa: ἄναξ, -xros, sovereign, ἄνασσα. 

e.) -α, -n, &c.: as, θεά goddess (cf. Ὁ) ; ἀδελῴός brother, ἀδελφή sister. 
See also 235, 365 c, 368, 369. 


371. 4.) Diminurtives (sometimes expressing affection, often 
contempt). These end in, 


a.) τιον (G. -lov, n.), with a syllable often prefixed (-ίδιον, -άριον, 
-bdALov, -ύδριον, -ύφιον, &e.) ; (Ὁ) -ίσκος (6. -ov, m.), -ίσκη (6. -ἡς, ἴ.) : as, 
παῖς puer, child, Diminutives, παιδίον little child, παιδίσκος, παιδαρίσκος, 

uerulus, puellus, puerciilus, young boy, little boy, παιδίσκη puella, puel- 
ila, young or little girl, παιδάριον, παιδαρίδιον, παιδαρύλλιον, παιδισκάριον * 
Ὦ Σώκρατες, ὦ Σωκρατίδιον, O Socrates ! dear Socky /! Ar. Nub. 222. 

c.) -is (G. -ἴδος and -ἶδος, f.): as, πίναξ tabula, table, mwakis, -ἰδος, 
tabella, tablet ; νῆσος isle, νησίς, -ἶδος, islet ; κρήνη fons, fowntain, κρηνίς. 

d.) -ιδεύς (G. -έως, m.; of the young of animals): as, ἀετός eagle, ἀετι- 
devs caglet ; λαγώς hare, λαγιδεύς ; also vids, viideds grandson. 

e.) -lyvn, -άκνη, -ἅλος, -ἐλος, -έλη, -ἴλος, -υλλίς, -ὗλος, «ὕλη, &e.: as, 
πόλις city, πολίχνη" πίθος wine-jar, πιθάκνη " κόκκος kernel, κόκκαλος * 
σκοπός peak, σκόπελος scopilus ; νέφος nubes, cloud, νεφέλη nebila ; ναύ- 
της sailor, ναυτίλος nautilus (Jittle sailor); ἀκανθίς finch, ἀκανθυλλίς. 

f. Some diminutives (especially in -vov) have lost their peculiar force : 
thus, θήρ, commonly in prose θηρίον wild beast. 


372. 5.) Avementatives, words implying increase or large- 
ness, either of number, size, or degree. These end in, 


a.) -wyv (G. -wvos,m.). This ending may express either a place, an 
animal, or a person, in which any thing exists in nwmbers, or in large 
size or degree : as, ἄμπελος vine, ἀμπελών vinetum, vineyard, ἱππών (ios) 
horse-stable, γνάθος jaw, γνάθων glutton. Cf. Lat. Naso, -dnis, Big-nose. 

b.) -a€ (G. -ἄκος, m.), applied, like the preceding, to persons and ani- 
mals, but harsher in its expression : as, πλοῦτος wealth, πλούταξ a rich 
churl. So λάβρος greedy, λάβραξ sea-wolf. Cf. Lat. adj. loguax, rapax. 


§ 375. ADJECTIVES. i. 221 


B.. ADJECTIVES. 


373. Adjectives derived from verbs express, in general, relations 
(active or passive in their character) to the actions or states denoted by the 
verbs ; and those derived from nowns express relations to the persons or 
things denoted by the nouns. But, from their very nature, relations are 
distinguished with less precision than things or actions ; and, to some ex- 
tent, the offices stated below blend with each other. 


374. I. From Verss. These end in, 


a.) -ἴκός, -ἤ, -dv, active: as, dpxw to rule, ἀρχ-ικός able to rule; γβάφω 
to describe, γραφικός descriptive, graphic. This ending is more frequently 
preceded by τ (cf. 365 ἃ, b): as, ποιητικός (ποιέω) poetic. See 375 Ὁ. 

b.) -τήριος, -d, -ov, active (rhp + vos, 365 Ὁ, 375 a): as, σώζω to save, 
σωτήρ, σωτήριος saving, preservative. Cf. Lat. ora-tor-ius. 

c.) -tpos, -ov (or -n, -ov), implying fitness, both active and passive, and 
annexed after the analogy of different verbal nouns: as, τρέφω, τροφή 
(363 b), τρόφ-ιμος fitted to impart or to receive nourishment, nutritious, vig- 
orous ; χρήσιμος (χράομαι, χρῆσι) fit for use. 

d.) -pwv, -μον (G. -povos), active: as, éheéw to pity, ἐλεή-μων compas- 
sionate ; μνήμων (μέμνημαι) mindful ; νοήμων (νοέω) thoughtful. 

e.) -τός, -h, -dv, passive, signifying that which ἐδ done, either as a mat- 
ter of fact (like the Lat. Part. in -tus or -sws), or more commonly as a 
matter of habit or possibility: as, ὁράω to sce, ὁρᾶ-τός visus, seen, visibi- 
lis, visible ; φιλητός amatus, amabilis. See 269 ἃ, 272 ο. 

f.) -réos, -d, -ov, passive (269 d), expressing necessity or obligation (like 
the Lat. Part. in -ndus) : as, ποιέω to make, ποιη-τέος faciendus, that is to 
be made. Often in neut. as impers.: γραπτέον scribendum. 

g.) -vds, -h, -dv, passive (compare the Part. in -pevos): as, σέβω to 
revere, (ceB-vbs, 148 c) σεμνός revered, ποθεινός (ποθέω) longed for. 

h.) -pds (-d, -dv), -as (G. -ἄδος), -ds, &c.: as, xaddw to slacken, χαλα- 
pos slack ; φέρω to bear, φοράς fruitful ; λέγω to choose, λογάς chosen. 


375. II. From Nouns. These have the following end- 
ings, with, in general, the significations that are annexed : 


a.) -Los, pertaining to; if a vowel precedes, commonly uniting with it 
in a diphthong (-avos, -etos, -ot0s, -wos, -vos), and often, without respect 
to this, assuming the form -eos (Ion. -fies, 132), especially from names 
of persons and animals (iv. 5. 31). Many patrials (properly adjectives, 
but often used substantively) belong to this class. Thus, οὐρανός heaven, 
ovpdv-wos-ccelestis, pertaining to heaven, heavenly ; ᾿Αθηναῖος (Αθῆναι) Athen- 
ian ; θεῖος (θε-ὁς) divine, ‘Apyetos Argivus ; Ὁμήρειος (Ὅμηρος) Homeric. 

b.) -ixds, -h, -όν (commonly -κός or -ἄκός after t or v, while -atos often 
makes -dixés), relating to. These adjectives in -«és are often formed from 
words that are themselves derivative. They apply to things rather than 
to persons. When used of the latter, they commonly signify related to in 
quality, or fit for, and are mostly derived from personal appellations. 
Thus, τέχνη art, τεχν-ικός relating to art, artistic, πολεμικός (πόλεμος) bel- 
licus, military ; νεᾶνι-κός (vedvias) youthful, Λίβυς Libyan, Λιβυκός per- 
taining to the Libyans ; ᾿Αχαιός Achwan, Axdikés. See 374 a. 

c.) -€0s, -a, -ov, and -tvos, -y, -ov (proparoxytone), denoting material, 
-en : as, χρῦσός gold, xpic-eos aur-éus, golden ; ξύλ-ινος (ξύλον) wooden. 

4.) -ἵνός, seldom -tvds, expressing time or prevalence: as, ἠρ-ινός (fp) 
vernus, vernal, πεδινός (πέδον) level, dpewds (ὄρος, -e-os) mowntainous. 

_ @.) -tvos, -ηνός, -Gvds, patrials, from names of cities and countries out 


222 _ DERIVATION. —— PRONOUNS. — «$375. 


of Greece : as, Tapavr-ivos (Tdpas, -avros) Tarentine, Kugfixcnvds (Κύζικος) 
Cyzicene, Σαρδιᾶνός (Σάρδεις) Sardian. Ct. Lat. Latinus, Romanus, &c. 

ἢ.) -pds, -epds, -npds, -adéos, -ηλός, -ωλός, -εἰς (-εσσἅ, -ev, G. -evros), 
-ὦδης (-ες, G. -εος, contr., as most think, fr. -o-adhs, fr. εἶδος form), &e., 
expressing fulness, quality, &c.: as, αἰσχρός (αἶσχος) shameful, φοβερός 
(φόβος) fearful, πονηρός (πόνος) painful, θαρσαλέος (θάρσος) cowrageous, 

476. III. From Apsrctives anp ADVERBS. a. From some 
adjectives and adverbs, derivatives are formed in the same man- 
ner as from nouns: thus, καθαρός clean, καθάριος cleanly ; ἐλευ- 
θέριος (ἐλεύθερος liber) liberalis, liberal; θηλυκός (θῆλυς), feminine. 

b. The adjective has in Greek, as in other languages, two 
strengthened forms, of which one may be termed dual, apply- 
ing to an object as one of two, and the other plural, applying 
to an object as one of a number (commonly more than two). 
The most obvious examples of these strengthened forms are 
the comparative and superlative degrees, commonly so called. 

6. Other examples of the comparative or dual strengthened form are, 
(1) the correlatives πότερος; whether of the two? ποτερός, ἕτερος (formed 
from the 3d Pers. pron. as the positive, or, as some think, from the 
numeral εἷς) one of the two, οὐδέτερος, ὁπότερος, ἑκάτερος, ἀμφότερος (see 58, 
and compare the Lat. wter, neuter, alter, and the Eng. whether, either, 
neither, other) ; (2) the following, implying a consideration of two objects or 
relations : δεξιτερός (poet.) dexter, right (rather than left), ἀριστερός sinister, 


left, δεύτερος second, ἡμέτερος noster, owr (rather than yours), ὑμέτερος 
vester, your (and, extending the analogy, o@érepos their). 

d. Other examples of the superlative or plural strengthened form are, 
(1) the correlatives πόστος; which in order? or, one of how many? ὁπόστος, 
ἕκαστος (58) ; (2) all ordinals except δεύτερος ; see 240. 2, 264. 


C. PRONOUNS. 


377. For the formation of the most common pronouns, see 
244s, The Greek abounds in correlative pronouns and ad- 
verbs (53). 


a. In respect to many of these, it will be observed that, when they be- 
gin with -, they are indefinite, or interrogative (with a change of accent) ; 
with τον definite or demonstrative ; with the rough breathing, relative 
definite ; and with om-, relative indefinite: as, πόσος ; how much ? ποσός 
of a certain quantity, τόσος, τοσοῦτος, and τοσόσδε (252 a), so much, ὅσος 
as much, ὁπόσος how much soever ; πότε; when? ποτέ at some time, τότε 
then, ὅτε when, ὁπότε whensoever. 


D. VERBS. 


-378. I. From Nouns anp Apsectives. Of these the chief 
endings and prevailing significations are as follows : 


a.) -έω, -edw, and (mostly from nouns of Dec. 1) -άω, ἐο be or do that 
which is pointed out by the primitive: as, φίλος friend, φιλ-έω to be a 
friend, love, βασιλεύω (βασιλεύς) regno, reign, τιμάω (τιμή) honor. 


§ 380. VERBS. ADVERBS. 228 


b.) τόω (mostly from words of Dec. 2), -afvw and -ὕνω (mostly from 
adjectives), to make that which is pointed out by the primitive : as, δῆλος 
evident, δηλ-όω to make evident, σημαίνω (σῆμα) signify, ἡδύνω (ἡδύς) sweeten. 

c.) -ἴζω, and (chiefly when formed from words which have a or ἢ in the 
last syllable, or when preceded by t, ef. 369 a, 375 Ὁ) -ἀζω ; from names 
of persons or animals, imdtative (denoting the adoption of the manners, 
language, opinions, party, &c.) ; from other words, used in various senses, 
but mostly active: as, Μηδ-ίζω (Μῆδος) to imitate or favor the Medes, ‘E)- 
Anvitw speak Greek, πλουτίζω (πλοῦτος) make rich, δικά ζω (δίκη) judge. 

4.) -tdw, rarely -ἄω, expressing desire (Desideratives), or morbid state : 
as, μαθητής disciple, μαθητ-ιάω to wish to become a disciple, Ar. Nub. 183. 

e. τῷ with simply a strengthening of the penult, more frequently 
active : as, καθᾶρός pure, καθαίρω to purify, μαλάσσω (μαλᾷᾶ κός) soften. 

f. Other endings appear in κονίω (κόνις) to bedust, δακρύω (δάκρυ) weep, 
φεύζω (φεῦ) and οἰμώξω (οἴμοι) wail, οἰκτείρω (otkros) pity, &c. 


379. 11. From Oruer Verss. These are, 


a.) Desideratives, formed in -oelw, from the Fut.: as, γελάω to laugh, 
yeraceiw wish to laugh, πολεμησείω (πολεμέω) wish for war, Th. i. 33. 

b.) Various prolonged forms in -ζω, -σικω, -AA@, &c., sometimes frequen- 
tative or intensive, as, ῥίπτω jacio, to throw, ῥιπτά ζω jacto, throw to and fro, 
στένω sigh, στενάζω sigh deeply, airéw ask, αἰτίζω beg ; sometimes incep- 
tive (350 a), as, ἡβάω to be of age, ἡβάσκω become of age ; sometimes causa- 
tive, as, μεθύω to be intoxicated, μεθύσκω intoxicate ; sometimes diminutive, 
as, éfarardw cheat, ἐξαπατύλλω (cf. 371) cheat a little, hwmbug, Ar. Eq. 
1144; but often scarce differing in force from the primitive form (336 κ᾿ 


E. ADVERBS. 


380. Most adverbs belong to the following classes : 


I. OsiiquE Cases or Nouns anp ADJECTIVES, employed as 
circumstantial adjuncts (see Syntax). With an adjective thus 
employed, a noun is strictly to be supplied. Many of these 
oblique cases have antique forms, and many belong to themes 
that are not in use. Thus, 


a.) ACCUSATIVES : as, δωρεάν as a gift, gratis, ἀκμήν at the moment, 
χάριν in gratiam, for the sake of, δίκην instar, like ; and the Neut. sing. 
and pl. of adjectives, especially Comparatives and Superlatives (263). 

b.) GENITIVES, (1) in -θεν (192), denoting the place whence ; (2) in 
-ov, denoting the place where : as, οὗ [sc. τόπου or χωρίου] in which place, 
where, αὐτοῦ there, ὁμοῦ in the same place, οὐδαμοῦ nowhere ; (3) in -ης : 
as, αἴφνης (and ἐξαίφνης, 382 a; so Lat. repente and derepente) of a sudden. 

4.) Darives, (1) in -οι, -οθι of Dec. 2 sing., and in -yot(v, -ἄσι(ν, of 
Dec. 1 pl., denoting the place where (in adverbs in -ov derived from pro- 
nouns, this commonly passes into the idea of whither ; cf. the familiar use 
of where, there, &c., in Eng.) : as, ᾿Αθήνησι at Athens, Πλαταιᾶσι at Pla- 

. tee, θύρᾶσι at the door ; (2) in -y (-y), -a (-a), -αι of Dec. 1, and in -t of 
Dee. 3, denoting way, place where, or time when: as, ταύτῃ [sc. ὁδῷ] in 
this way, thus, |sc. χώρᾳ] in this place, here, πανταχῇ every way, every- 
where, πεξῇ on foot, ἰδίᾳ privately, χαμαί humi, on the ground, πάλαι in 
olden time, ἕκητι by the will of, ἴφι (ts, 190) with might, A. 38, ἄγχι near. 

ἃ. For the old Dat. forms -οι, -οθι, -at, and -nov (for which -ἄσι was 
common after εν t, or p, 115 a), see 187, 191, 198. The adverbial Dat. is 


224 DERIVATION. COMPOSITION. § 380. 


usually written with t subsce., when it has the same form in common 
Greek with a noun or adj. so written, and some carry the use of this 
ιν still farther (109 a). 

e. Some pronominal or kindred adverbs are strengthened by the inser- 
tion of -ἄχ- : as, ἀλλαχοῦ and ἀλλαχῇ elsewhere, πανταχῆ (c). See 58. 


381. II. Derivatives sicniryine, (1.) Manner, in, 


a.) -ws, from adjectives. The adverb may be formed by changing v of 
the Gen. pl. into ς : as, σοφός, G. pl. σοφῶν, wise, σοφῶς sapienter, wisely ; 
ταχύς, ταχέων, swift, ταχέως swiftly. 

b.) -ηδόν or -δον (perhaps kindred with εἶδος, form), chiefly from 
nouns ; τδὴν or -άδην, chiefly from verbs (those in -ἄάδην conforming to 
366d; and -8a: as, πλινθηδόν (πλίνθος) like bricks, Hdt. 2. 96, βοτρῦδόν 
(Bérpus) in clusters, B. 89, κρύβδην or -da (κρύπτω) secretly. These ap- 
pear to be Acc. forms (cf. 380 a): Sing. fem. -δην, neut. -δον and pl. -δα. 

c. τ-ἴ or -el, especially from imitative verbs (378 ¢ ; -{w becoming -στί), 
and in compounds of ἀ- privative, αὐτός, and πᾶς - as, Μηδιστί like the 
Medes, “Ἑλληνιστί in the Greek language; ἀμεσθί (μισθός) without pay, 
αὐτοχειρί (χείρ) with one’s own hand, ravinuel (δῆμος) with the whole 
people. These appear to be Dat. forms (cf. 380 c). 

d.) -§ mostly from palatal stems: as, dva-ulyviuc (τ. pry-, 351. 3) to 
mix up, ἀναμίξ confusedly, pellmell, παραλλάξ (παρ-αλλάσσω) alternately. 


(2.) Time WHEN, in -re (Dor. -xa, 168), or, for more specific 
expression, in -ika: as, ἀλλότε (ἄλλος) at another time, αὐτίκα 
(αὐτός) at the very moment. See 58. 

(3.) PLACE WHITHER, in -σε (which appears to be a softened 
form of -δε, 382a, or at least kindred with it): as, weddce to the 
ground, Eur. Bac. 137, = πεδόνδε Soph. Tr. 786 ; ἐκεῖσε thither. 


382. III. PrerostrionaL Forms AND PHRASES: as, 


a.) Prepositions with their Cases, (πρὸ ἔργου) προὔργου before the work, 
to the purpose, παραχρῆμα upon the affair, immediately, (δὲ δ) διό on ac- 
count of which, wherefore, (ἐν ποδῶν ὁδῷ) ἐμποδών in the way of the feet, 
Θήβαξζε (from Θήβας and -de, an inseparable preposition denoting direction 
towards, 137 d), poet. Θήβασδε Ψ. 679, to Thebes, ᾿Αθήναζε to Athens. 

b. Prepositions used without Cases, πρός [sc. τούτῳ] in addition to this, 
besides, Fisch. Pr. 73 ; ἐν [sc. rotrous} meanwhile, Soph. Ὁ. T. 27. 

c. Derivatives from Prepositions, ἄνω (ἀνά) up, κάτω down, εἴσω, ἔξω, 
πρόσω, later πόῤῥω porro ; ἔνδον (381 b), ἐντός intus, ἐκτός extra. 

ἃ. These adverbs in τ΄, with Comparatives and Superlatives in -répe 
and -τάτω, as well as πώ yet, ὀπίσω behind, &c., have the Dat. form. 


Il. FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS. 


383. In the union of two words to form a compound, 


A.) The Frrst worD has commonly its stem-form with sim- 
ply euphonic or imitative changes. These changes, besides 
those which the general rules of orthoépy require, consist chiefly, 

a.) In the addition of a wnion-vowel (termed the composition-vowel), 
which, after a substantive or adjective, is commonly -o-, but sometimes 
-ἢ-) ταῦ, τις, -ov-, or -ai-; and, after a verb, -0-, -€-, or -t-; as, μυθ-ο- 


§ 386. FIRST AND LAST WORDS. 225 


γράφος (μῦθ-ος, γράφω) fable-writer, θανατ-η-φ ὄρος death-bringing, ποδ-ἃ- 
νιπτήρ foot-bath, πυρ-ἴ- γενής fire-born, ὁδ-οι- πόρος wayfarer, μεσ-αι- πόλιος 
half-gray ; λειπ-ο-ταξία (λείπ-ω, τάξι5) leaving one’s post, ἀρχ-έ-χορος 
(dpx-w) chorus-leading, τερπ-ι-κέραυνος (τέρπ-ω) delighting in thunder. 

b.) In the contraction of this vowel with an adjoining vowel : as, (dpe- 
i-Barns, fr. ὄρος, -e-os, and Batvw) ὀρειβάτης mountain-ranging, (νᾶ-ο-κόρος, 
fr. va-ds and κορέω, 120 i) νεωκόρος temple-sweeper, (γα-ο-μετρια) γεωμετρία. 

c.) In the addition of σ᾿, commonly connected by a union-vowel either 
to the succeeding or preceding word, and sometimes even to both: as, 
παυ-σ-ἄνεμος (παύ-ω, ἄνεμος) wind-allaying, vav-cl-ropos navigable, θε-οσ- 
εχθρία impiety, ταμ-εσί-χρως (τέμνω, 840. 8) flesh-cutting, A. 511. 

d.) In using a shorter form, sometimes, perhaps, suggested by the 
theme, or another stem: as, αἱμ-ο-βαφής (αἷμα, -aros, βάπτω) blood- 
bathed, αἰ-πόλος (até, alyés) goat-herd. So, for ἥμισυς half, the old short 
stem ἧμι- is commonly used : ἡμι-θνής, half-dead, hul-ovos mule. 

e.) In conforming to the theme with respect to vowel-change, &c.: as, 
βου-κόλος (βοῦς, Bo-ds) ox-herd, ναυ-πηγός ship-wright, πολί-αρχος. 

f.) It results from these changes or from direct adoption, that the first 
word has sometimes the form of one of the cases: as, Nom. νικη-φόρος 
bringing victory, ἀγορᾶ-νόμος clerk of the market ; Gen. veds-ouxos ship- 
house ; Dat. νυκτι-πόλος roaming by night, Eur. Ion 718. See 388 Ὁ. 

384. If the first word is a particle, it is commonly un- 
changed except by the general laws of euphony. 

a. For crasis in πρό, see 1267; for elision in prepositions, 127 5. 
Api, like zrepi, often retains its vowel. In the other prepositions, the 
elision is rarely omitted, except in the Ion., particularly in the Ep. be- 
fore some words which begin with the digamma: as, droreeiy I. 309. 


385. Some particles occur only in composition, and are 
hence called inseparable. Of these the most important are, 


a.) &-, commonly denoting privation or negation, and then called a- 
privative, as, ἄ-παις without children, &-copos unwise ; but sometimes de- 
noting union, likeness, or intensity (the result of concentration), and then 
termed a- copulative, as, ἀ-κόλουθος (κέλευθος way) going the same way, 
following, ἄ-βρομος (Bpéuw) loud-shouting, ἀ-τενής (τείνω) strained ; 
while this prefix appears to be sometimes ewphonic (356). ᾿Α- privative 
has commonly its full form av- before a vowel, except where F or & has 
been lost ; and is akin to ἄνευ without, to the Lat. in-, and to the Eng. 
and Germ. wn-: ἄν-οπλος (ἄνευ ὅπλων) in-ermis, wn-armed, a-Féxwy A. 557 
(Bek.), Att. ἄκων, unwilling. ᾿Α- copulative (also a-, as in ἁ-πας all to- 
gether) appears to be akin to dua together. 

b.) vy-, akin to av- privative (Lat. and Old Eng. ne): as, νή-ποινος 
(ποινή) wn-avenged, (vn-aveuos) νήνεμος wind-less, calm. 

c.) Svo-, dl, mis-, wn-: as, δύσ-φημος ill-omened, δυσ-τυχία mis- 
Jortune, dvo-datuwv un-happy, Δύσπαρις accursed Paris, T. 39. 

d.) The intensive ἀρι- (kindred with dpe-, 261] 4), by precession épt-, 
{a- and 8a-, all mostly poetic : as, dpl-daxpus very tearful, Asch. Per. 947, 
€pi-douros loud-sounding, T. 50, §d-mdovros per-dives, very rich, Hdt. 


386. B.) The form of the Last worp depends upon the 
part of speech to which the compound belongs. 

1. If the compound is a NOUN or ADJECTIVE, it commonly 
takes the most obvious form which is appropriate to the class 
of words to which it belongs. 

COMP. GR. 10* ο 


226 COMPOSITION, _ § 386, 


a. Often the last word, if itself a nown or adjective, undergoes no 
change : as, ὁμό-δουλος con-servus, fellow-slave, μακρό-χειρ longi-manus, 

Ὁ. If the last element is a verb, the compound adjective or masculine 
substantive ends commonly in, 

1.) -os. This ending (which is far the most common) has both an 
active and a passive sense, distinguished, for the most part, by the accent, 
which, if the penult is short, the active compound commonly takes upon 
the penult, but the passive upon the wntepenult: as, λιθο-βόλος (λίθος, 
βάλλω) throwing stones, Th. 6. 69, λιθό-βολος stoned, Eur. Ph. 1063. 

2.) -ἧς (-es, G. -eos) : as, εὐ-πρεπής becoming, air-dpxns self-sufficing. 

3.) -ys or -as (G. -ov), and -np or -wp, denoting the agent (365): as, 
vouo-Gérns legislator, ὀρνιθο- θήρας bird-catcher, μηλοβοτήρ shepherd. 

4.) -s: as, ἀ-γνώς, -ὥτος (yvo-, 357. 1) unknown, ἀ-δμής, -ἣτος untamed. 

6. In compounds of this class, if the last word begins with &, ¢, or o, 
followed by a single consonant, this vowel is commonly lengthened to ἢ 
or @: as, στρατηγός (στράτος, ἄγω) general, δυσήλατος (δυσ-, ἐλαύνω) hard 
Sor driving, ἀνώνυμος (ἀ-, ὄνομα, 114d) nameless. The Att. uses the Dor. 
ἃ in some compounds of ἄγω : as, A\oxa yds captain, i. 7. 2. 


387 τι. Ifthe compound is a VERB, it is important to ob- 
serve that, with few exceptions, verbs are compounded directly 
and without change with prepositions only ; and that, in other 
cases, compound verbs have the form of derivatives from com- 
pound nouns or adjectives existing or assumed. 


a. Thus, λαμβάνω, to take, unites directly with the prep. ἀνά up, to 
form ἀναλαμβάνω to take up; but it cannot so unite with the noun ἔργον 
work, and hence the idea to take work, contract, is expressed by épyo- 
λαβέω, derived from the compound verbal ἐργο-λάβος contractor. So the 
verb compounded of ἵππος horse, and τρέφω to feed, is ἱπποτροφέω from 
ἱπποτρόφος horse-keeper. Sometimes the form of the verb happens not to 
be changed in passing through the compound verbal: thus, from σῖτος 
and ποιέω, is formed σιτο-ποιός bread-maker, and from this again σιτο- 
ποιέω to make bread. 


388. 2. Words formed by the direct union of others (as ἐργολάβος, 
ἱπποτρόφος, 387 a) are called direct compounds; and derivatives from 
these (as ἐργολαβέω, ἱπποτροφέω) are called indirect compounds (the term 
compound extended beyond its strictest sense). 

b. When the component words are joined without change except from 

the general laws of orthoépy, the composition is termed loose (Gr. παράθεσις 
putting side by side), as liable to separation ; but when they are joined 
with further change, it is termed close (Gr. σύνθεσις putting together), as 
forming an inseparable word : thus, loose, or parathetic compounds, ἀνα- 
λαμβάνω, Διόσ-κοροι sons of Jupiter, Ἑλλήσ-ποντος sea of Helle, ’Apyt-piros 
dear to Mars ; close, or synthetic compounds, ἐργο-λάβος, σιτο-ποιός. 
_ ¢. Loose compounds are sometimes separated by other words, especially 
particles. This figure is called Z'mesis (τμῆσις cutting). Thus, ἀπὸ λοι- 
γὸν ἀμῦναι (= λοιγὸν ἀπαμῦναι), to ward off death, A. 67; ἐκ δὲ πηδήσας, 
and leaping forth, Eur. Hec. 1172. 

d. The loose connection of the preposition with its verb (as if a modi- 
fying adverb) also explains 387 a, the intervention of prefixes (282), and 
the position, permitted by the Epic, of the preposition after its verb : as, 
ὀλέσας ἄπο, for ἀπολέσας, having lost, ι. 534. 

e. A compound is distinguished as double, triple, quadruple, &c., ac- 


ὃ 390. VARIOUS DISTINCTIONS. — LOOSE COMPOUNDS. 227 


cording to the number of words of which it is composed : as, double, 
ὑποῤῥέω to flow under; triple, ὑπεκρέω flow from under; quadruple, 
ὑπεκπρορέω flow forth from under, §. 87. The extent to which the Greek 
permitted composition was sportively illustrated by Aristophanes in a 
seventy-eight-syllable compound, which follows, with Dr. Donaldson’s 
translation : λεπαδο-τεμαχο-σελαχο-γαλεο-κρανιο-λειψανο-δριμ-υποτριμματο- 
otpto-mapaolv. 1. πρασο]- μελιτο- κατακεχύυμενο - κιχλ - ETL - κοσσυφο- φαττο- 
περιστερ-αλεκτρυον-οπτ-εγκεφαλο-κιγκλο-πελειο-λαγωο-σιραιο-βαφη-τραγανο- 
πτερύγ-ων, ‘a fricassee consisting of shellfish-saltfish-skate-shark-remain- 
ders-of-heads-besprinkled-with-sharp-sauce-of-laserpitium-leek-and-honey- 
thrushes-besides-black birds-pigeons-doves-roasted - cocks - brains - wagtails- 
cushats-haresflesh-steeped-in-a-sauce-of-boiled-new-wine-with-the-cartilages- 
and-wings,” Eccl. 1169 5. 


389. There is a loose form of composition, in which a 
PRONOUN or PARTICLE is attached to a word with which it is 
sometimes really and sometimes only apparently combined in 
sense. 


1. The orthography here varies, the words being sometimes written 
together, especially if the last is an enclitic, and sometimes separately. 

2. Among the chief words that are thus affixed to others are, 

a. The INDEFINITE PRONOUN τὶς : as, ὅστις (or ὅς Tes) whoever, οὔτις 
no one, εἴτις if any one. Cf. Lat. quisquis, nequis, siquis. 

The following PARTICLES: b. ἄν (Ep. κέ or κέν, Dor. κά), contingent 
or indefinite : as, ὅς ἄν whoever, ὅταν or ὅτ᾽ ἄν, ὁπόταν, ἐπειδάν (ἐπεὶ δὴ ἄν), 
whenever, whensoever, &c. 

ce. γέ (Dor. ya) at least, emphatic : as, ἔγωγε (accent drawn back) 7 at 
least, σύγε you surely, τοῦτό γε this certainly, ἐπεί ye since at least. See 
247 ἢ, and cf. Lat. egomet, twmet, equidem. 

d. δή now (shorter form of ἤδη) : as, ὅστις δή whoever now, viv δή just 
now. 

6. δήποτε (δή wore) ever now: as, ὁστισδήποτε whosoever now ? τί δή- 
ποτε; what in the world ? 

f. ἢ surely, indeed : as, rin (Att. τιή) or τί ἢ; why surely? ὁτιή be- 
cause indeed, ἐπειή or ἐπεὶ ἢ since indeed. 

g. οὖν (contr. fr. ἐόν, it being so ; see εἰμί, 50) then, therefore, yet, often 
added to an indefinite pronoun or adverb to strengthen the expression of 
indefiniteness : ὁστισοῦν whoever then, ὁπωσδηποτοῦν howsoever now then. 

h. πέρ (shorter form of περί) very, particularly, just : as, ὅσπερ who in 
particular, ὥσπερ just as, οἱόσπερ, ὅτιπερ, ὅθενπερ. Cf. Lat. parwmper. 

i. ποτέ at any time, ever, often added to interrogatives to strengthen 
the expression : as, τί ποτέ ἐστι τοῦτο; [what at any time is this ?] what 
in the world is this? or, what can this be? Ep. τίπτε (syne. fr. τί ποτε). 

j. τέ, the simplest sign of connection, and hence often joined to other 
connective words, before their use was established, to mark them as such. 
In the Ep. and Ion. this is found to a great extent: and even with an 
intervening particle, as ὅς ῥά re O. 411, rawep re Hdt. 1.74. In the 
Att., it has remained in dre and ὥστε, as, οἷός τε able, possible, and ἐφ᾽ 
ᾧτε on condition that. ; 

3. With some of the forms above, compare the Lat. quicumque, quan- 
documque, quisque, uterque, ubique, quisnam ? quisguam, utpote, ὅτο. 


390. For the mutual and external relations of the elements of com- 
pound words, see 722 s. 


VERS, 
Vig “οτος ate 


Library. 


OF Califorals: 
Μύθους ὑφαίνειν. 
™ Homer. 


391. SynTAx, as the DOCTRINE OF SENTENCES, 
treats either of the offices and relations of words 
as arranged in sentences, or of the offices and 
relations of these sentences themsélves. 


392. The Greek is one of those languages whose syntax 
exhibits the greatest freedom and variety. 


CHAPTER I. 
SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 


I. AGREEMENT OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 


393. Rure I. An AppositivE agrees in case 

with its subject. — Apposition may be 

(a) Direct: Παρύσατις. . ἡ μήτηρ, Parysatis, the mother, i. 1. 4. 
(Ὁ) Predicate: Ta δὲ ἄθλα ἦσαν στλεγγίδες, and the prizes were flesh- 
combs, i. 2.10. “Hs αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε, of which he had made him 
satrap, i. 1. 2. Ὄνομα αὐτῷ εἶναι ᾿Αγάθωνα Pl. Prot. 315e. (0) Modal: 
Λαβὼν Τισσαφέρνην ὡς φίλον, taking T. asa friend, i. 1.2. (d) Parti- 
tive: Οὗτοι. . ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει, these say, one one thing, and another 
another, ii. 1.15. (e) Of generic and specific terms, especially of com- 
mon and proper nouns: Ὁ ‘Matav8pos ποταμός, the river Meander, i. 2. 7. 
“Avdpes στρατιῶται, gentlemen soldiers, i. 8.3. (f) Of a noun and a pro- 
noun : ᾿Αλκιβιάδης. . κἀκεῖνος ἠμέλησεν, A., he also neglected, Mem. 1. 2. 
24. (g) Of a sentence and word (396), &c. 

ἢ. Appositives, more frequently, agree with their subjects in gender 
and number, as well as in case: ᾿Επύαξα, ἡ Συεννέσιος γυνὴ, τοῦ Κιλίκων 
βασιλέως, H., the wife of S., the king of the Cilicians, % 2. 12. 


§ 397. SYNTAX. R, I. — APPOSITION. 229 


394. a. Exursis. The appositive or the subject may be omitted, 
when it can be supplied from the connection : Λύκιος ὁ Πολυστράτου [80. 
vids], L., the son of P., iii. 3. 20. Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥκω παρὰ σέ 80. ἐγώ], J, 
T., have come to thee, Th. 1. 1857. © ΩΣ 

b. The sign of modal apposition (commonly ὡς, as) is often omitted : 
Διφθέρας, ἃς εἶχον σκεπάσματα, the skins which they had as coverings, i.'5. 10. 

c. SyNnEsis. An appositive sometimes agrees with a subject which is 
implied in another word: ᾿Αθηναῖος ὧν πόλεως τῆς μεγίστης, being an 
Athenian, a city the greatest, Pl. Apol. 29 ἃ (here πόλεως agrees with ᾿Αθη- 
νῶν, of Athens, implied ἴῃ ᾿Αθηναῖος). ᾿Αφίκοντο eis Koriwpa, πόλιν Ἑλ- 
ληνίδα, Σινωπέων ἀποίκους [referring to πολίτας, implied in rdw] v. 5. ὃ. 


395. a. In ParTITIVE APPOSITION, the statement of the parts is 
not always complete ; and sometimes the appositive denotes that which is 
closely related to the subject, rather than properly the same person or 
thing, even in part. With a participle, it may take the place of the Gen. 
absolute, in expressing some circwmstance, as cause, manner, &c. Thus, 
Oi ξύμμαχοι τὰ δύο μέρη .. ἐσέβαλον, the allies, two thirds of them, in- 
waded, Th. 2.47. Ἐφλεκτα δὲ τὰ πρόθυρα αὐτῶν, φοίνικος μὲν αἱ θύραι 
πεποιημέναι, their portals are easily sct on fire, the doors being made of the 

palm-tree, Cyr. 7. 5. 22. ᾿Οδυρμὸς πολὺς, ἹΡαχὴλ κλαίουσα, Mat. 2. 18. 
- pb. Hence by a poetic, especially Epic, construction, an appositive is 
used to specify the part affected: Βούλει πόνον μοι τῇδε προσθεῖναι χερί ; 
do you wish to impose labor on me, viz. on this hand? Eur. Heracl. 63. 
Σθένος EuBaN ἑκάστῳ καρδίῃ, imparted strength [to each one, to the heart] 
to the heart of each one, A. 11. ᾿Αγαμέμνονι ἥνδανε θυμῷ A. 24. j 

c. Some relations may be expressed either by an appositive or an ad- 
junct ; and one of these constructions is sometimes used where the other 
would seem more appropriate: Τούτου τὸ εὖρος δύο πλέθρα, of this the 
breadth is two plethra, i. 2. 5; but, Tod δὲ Μαρσύου τὸ εὗρός ἐστιν εἴκοσε 
kal πέντε trodav, and the breadth of the M. is twenty-five feet, Ib. 8. Ποτα- 
pos. . εὖρος δύο πλέθρων Ib. 23. Δέκα μναῖ εἰσφορά-: but, Δυοῖν μναῖν πρό- 
σοδον, Vect. 3. Πόλν Tpolyy A. 129; but, Tpotns ἱερὸν πτολίεθρον a. 2. 


396. a A word, in apposition with a sentence not used substantively, 
is commonly in the Accusative, as expressing the effect of the action ; but 
is sometimes in the Nominative, as if an inscription marking the character 
of the sentence : ‘Piper . . ἀπὸ πύργου, λυγρὸν ὄλεθρον, will hurl thee from 
a tower, a sad fate, Q. 735. Στέφη μιαίνεται, πόλει τ᾽ ὄνειϑος καὶ θεῶν ἀτι- 
pla, our garlands are profaned, a dishonor to the city, and an insult to the 
gods, Kur. Heracl. 72. Ἑλένην κτάνωμεν, Μενέλεῳ λύπην mexpdy Id. Or. 

b. This use of the Nom. and Acc. may be often explained by attraction 
to the subject or object of the verb. Cf. 395 a. 

c. ANACOLUTHON. Apposition is sometimes prevented by a change of 
construction : as, Myrpi τ᾽, "EptBovav λέγω, to my mother, Eribea I mean 
(for Myrpi τὶ ᾿Εριβοίᾳ, to my mother E.), Soph. Aj. 569. See also 402. 


II. USE OF THE CASES. 


397. Cases serve to distinguish the relations 
of substantives. These relations are regarded, in 
Greek, (1.) as either DIRECT or INDIRECT, and (11.) 
as either subjective, objective, or residual. 


230 SYNTAX. RB. IL, IIl.— USE OF THE CASES. § 397. 


1. Of these distinctions, the first is chiefly founded upon the 
directness with which the substantive is related to the verb of 
the sentence. The principal DIRECT RELATIONS are those of 
‘the subject and direct object of the verb, and that of direct ad- 
dress. Other relations are, for the most part, regarded as 
INDIRECT. 


11. The second distinction is founded upon the kind or char- 
acter of the relation. The relation is, 


1. SuBJEcTIVE, when the substantive denotes the souRcE, or 
SUBJECT, of motion, action, or influence ; or, in other words, 
THAT FROM wHicH ANY THING COMES. 

2. OBJECTIVE, when the substantive denotes the END, or OB- 
JECT, of motion, action, or influence ; or, in other words, THAT 
TO WHICH ANY THING GOES. 


3. Resmpvuat (residuus, remaining), when it is not referred 
to either of the two preceding classes. 


398. a. The latter of the two distinctions appears to have had 
its origin in the relations of place, which relations are both the ear- 
liest understood, and, through life, the most familiar to the mind. 
These relations are of two kinds; those of motion, and those of Resv. 

b. Motion may be considered with respect either to its source or 
its END; and both of these may be regarded either as direct or in- 
direct. We may regard as the pirEcT source of motion, that which 
produces the motion, or, in other words, that which moves; as 
the INDIRECT souRcE, that from which the motion proceeds; as the 
DIRECT END, that which receives the motion, or that to or into which 
the motion immediately goes ; and as the INDIRECT END, that towards 
which the motion tends. 

6. By a natural analogy, the relations of action and influence in 
general, whether subjective or objective, may be referred to the rela- 
tions of motion; while the relations which remain without being 
thus referred may be classed together as relations of rest. These 
residual relations, or relations of rest, may likewise be divided, ac- 
cording to their office in the sentence (397), into the direct and the 
indirect. : 

d. We have, thus, six kinds of relation, each of which, with a sin- 
gle exception, is represented in Greek by an appropriate case, denot- 
ing in general as follows: 


1. Direct ReELATIons. 


1. Subjective. ΤῊΝ Nominative. That which acts. 
2. Objective. Tue Accusative. That which is acted upon. 
8. Residual. Tse Vocative. That which is addressed. 


u. Inprreot ΒΕΙΑΤΙΟΝΒ. 


1. Subjective. ΤῊΝ Genitive. That from which any thing proceeds. 
2. Objective. Tue Datrve. That towards which any thing tends, 
3. Residual. Tue Dartive. That with which any thing is associated. 


ῖ 


§401. ... NOMINATIVE, 231 


399. a. For the historical development of the Greek cases, see 
186s. From the primitive indirect case (which remained as the Dat.), a 
special form was separated to express the subjective relations, but none to 
express the objective. The primitive form, therefore, continued to express 
the objective relations, as well as all those relations which, from any cause, 
were not referred to either of these two classes ; and hence the Dat. is 
both an objective and a residual case. 

b. In the Latin case-system, which so closely resembles the Greek, 
there is a partial separation of the indirect oljective and residual, or, as 
they are termed in Lat., DATIVE and ABLATIVE cases. 

c. A more important difference between the two languages appears in 
the extensive use of the Lat. ABLATIVE. The Romans were more con- 
trolled than the Greeks by the power of habit, while they were less ob- 
servant of the minuter shades of thought, and niceties of relation. Hence, 
even after the full development of the Lat. case-system, the primitive in- 
direct case continued to retain, as it were by the mere force of possession, 
many of the subjective relations. 

d. As most verbs express action, and the Active is the leading voice, 
the use of the NoMINATIVE as the subject of a finite verb became so 
established, that it extended to verbs of state as well as of action, and to 
the Passive no less than the Active voice. 

e. The Nominative, from its high office as denoting the subject of 
discourse, became the leading case, and was regarded as the representative 
of the word in all its forms (its theme, 172e). Hence it was employed 
when the word was spoken of as a word, or was used without grammatical 
construction (401). 

f. There are no dividing lines either between DIRECT and INDIRECT, or 
between subjective, objective, and residual relations. Some relations seem 
to fall with equal propriety under two, or even three heads, according to 
the view which the mind takes of them. Hence the use of the cases not 
only varies in different languages, and in different dialects of the same 
language, but even in the same dialect, and in the compositions of the 
same author. 

g. A case may sustain the same relation to more than one word in the 
sentence : as, a ἕψοντες ἤσθιον, they boiled and ate flesh, ii. 1. 6. 


A. Tue ΝΟΜΙΝΑΤΊΨΕ. 


400. Rute ll. The Supsect oF A FINITE VERB 


is put in the Nominative: as, 

᾿Επειδὴ δὲ ἐτελεύτησε Δαρεῖος, καὶ κατέστη els τὴν βασιλείαν Apratéptns, 
Τισσαφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον, and when now Darius was dead, and 
Artaxerxes was established in the royal authority, Tissaphernes accuses 
Cyrus, i. 1. 3. 


401. Rue DI. SusBstantives INDEPENDENT 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION are put in the 
Nominative. 


Notre. The Nom. thus employed is termed the Nominative indepen- 
dent or absolute (absoliitus, released, free, sc. from grammatical fetters). 


To this rule may be referred the use of the Nominative, 


252 SYNTAX. Β. A., IV.— GENITIVE. § 401. 


a.) In the inscription of names, titles, and divisions: as, Κύ- 
ρου ᾿Ανάβασις Cyri Expeditio, The Haxpedition of Cyrus ; 
Βιβλίον Πρῶτον Liber Primus, Book First. 


Ὁ. In exclamations: as, Θάλαττα, Θάλαττα, the Seal 
the Sea! iv. 7. 24. °Q δυστάλαιν᾽ ἐγώ, O wretched me! Eur. 


9.) In address. —'The appropriate case of address is the 
Voc. (186g). But there is often no distinct form for this 
case, and even when there is, the Nom. is sometimes employed 
in its stead (182). : 


1. The Nom. is particularly used, when the address is exclamatory or 
descriptive, or when the compedlative is the same with the subject of the 
sentence : Ἱππίας ὁ καλός τε καὶ σοφός, O Hippias, the noble and the wise ! 
Pl. Hipp. Maj. 281. Χαῖρε, ὁ βασιλεύς Mat. 27. 29. 


2. To the head of descriptive address belong those authoritative, con- 
temptuous, and familiar forms, in which the person who is addressed is 
described or designated as if he were a third person (and in which οὗτος is 
often used) : Οἱ δὲ οἰκέται, . . ἐπίθεσθε, but the servants, do you put, Pl. 
Cony. 218 b. Ὁ Φαληρεὺς... οὗτος ᾿Απολλόδωρος, οὐ περιμενεῖς, The Pha- 
lerian there, Apollodorus, stop! wont you? Ib. 172 ἃ. 


3. In forms of address which are both direct, and likewise descriptive 
or exclamatory, the Voc. and Nom. may be associated : Ipdfeve καὶ of 
ἄλλοι of παρόντες “EXAnves, O Proxenus and the other Greeks present, i. 5. 
16. Κύριε, vids Δαβίδ Mat. 20. 30. Ὦ φίλος, ὦ φίλε Βάκχιε Eur. Cycl. 


402. AwnacontutHon, &c. From the office of the Nom. in 
denoting the subject of discourse, and from its independent 
use, it is sometimes employed where the construction would 
demand a different case : as, 

a.) In the introduction of a sentence : Ὑμεῖς δὲ, . . viv δὴ καιρὸς ὑμῖν 
δοκεῖ εἶναι; You then, . . does it now seem to you to be just the time ? vii. 
6. 87. ᾿Επιθυμῶν ὁ Κῦρος. ., ἔδοξεν αὐτῷ, Cyrus desiring, . . it seemed 
best to him, Cyr. Μωυσῆς οὗτος, . . οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί γέγονεν αὐτῷ Acts 7. 40. 

b.) In specification, repetition, or description: "Αλλους δ᾽ ὁ μέγας .. 
Νεῖλος ἔπεμψεν: Σουσισκἄνης, Πηγαστᾶγών, x. τ. X., and others the vast 
Nile hath sent ; Susiskdnes, P., &c., Jisch. Per. 33. Θυγάτηρ μεγαλή- 
topos "Hertwvos, "Herlwy, ὃς ἔναιεν Z. 395. Τὰ περὶ Πύλον ὑπ᾽ ἀμφοτέρων 
κατὰ κράτος ἐπολεμεῖτο" ᾿Αθηναῖοι μὲν... περιπλέοντες Th. 4. 29. 

6.) In speaking of names or words as such : ἸΤροσείληφε τὴν τῶν πονη- 
ρῶν κοινὴν ἐπωνυμίαν συκοφάντης, he has obtained the common appellation 
of the vile, ‘‘sycophant,” Aischin. 41. 15. 


B. THe GENITIVE. 


403. THAT FROM WHICH ANY THING PROCEEDS 
(398 d) may be resolved into (1.) Phat from which 
any thing proceeds, as is POINT OF DEPARTURE; and 
(πι.) That from which any thing proceeds, as tts CAUSE. 


§ 405. OF DEPARTURE. — OF SEPARATION. 233 


Hence the Greek Genitive is either: (1.) the Grnt- 
TIVE OF DEPARTURE, or (1.) the GENITIVE OF 
Cause; and we have the following general rule 
for subjective adjuncts (397) : | 
Rute A. Tue. Point or DEPARTURE AND THE 


CAUSE ARE PUT IN THE GENITIVE. 


a. The Genitive of departure is commonly expressed in English by 
the preposition from ; and the Genitive of cause, by the preposition of. 
b. Hence the rule may take this general form : 


The GENITIVE is used to express that oFr or 


FROM which something is or is done. 


c. The relations here denoted are, however, sometimes translated by 
other prepositions, and sometimes without a preposition. 


1. Genittve or DEPARTURE. 


404. Departure may be either in place, in time, or in 
character. Hence, 


Rute IV. Words of SEPARATION and DISTINC- 
TION govern the Genitive. 


(1.) Genitive of Separation. 


405. a. Words of ΒΕΡΑΒΑΤΙΟΝ include those of removal and 
distance, of exclusion and restraint, of cessation and failure, of 
abstinence and release, of deliverance and escape, of protection and 
Freedom, &¢.: as, 


“Χωρίζεσθαι ἀλλήλων, to be separated from each other, Pl. Conv. 192 ¢. 
Χωρὶς τῶν ἄλλων, apart from the rest, i. 4.13. Σώματος δίχα Cyr. 8. 7. 
20. Διέσχον ἀλλήλων, were distant from each other, i. 10. 4. 115,800 wie 
αὐτοῦ, far from him, i. 3. 12. Ei θαλάττης εἴργοιντο, if they should be ex- 
cluded from the sea, Hel. 7. 1. 8. ἹΚωλύσειε τοῦ καίειν, he would prevent 
them from burning, i. 6. 2. Tod πρὸς ἐμὲ πολέμου παύσασθαι, to cease 
from the war against me, i. 6. 6. Οὗτος μὲν αὐτοῦ ἥμαρτεν, this man 
missed him, i. 5.12. Σῶσαι κακοῦ, to save from evil, Soph. Ph. 919. 

b. Words of sPARING imply refraining from, and those of CONCEDING, 
RESIGNING, REMITTING, and SURRENDERING, imply parting with, or re- 
tiring from. Hence, τῶν μὲν ὑμετέρων ἡδύ μοι φείδεσθαι, it is my pleasure 
to spare your property, Cyr. 3. 2. 28. Κἀκεῖνος ὑπεχώρησεν αὐτῷ τοῦ θρό- 
vou, and he [Sophocles] conceded to him {Aschylus] the throne, Ar. 

ce. The Gen. denoting that from which motion proceeds is, in prose, 
commonly joined to words not in themselves expressing separation by a prep- 
osition ; but in poetry, often without a preposition (cf. 450 Ὁ): Aduev. . 
φέρουσαν, bringing from the house, Soph. El. 324. Tovode παῖδας γῆς 
ἔλᾷν, to drive these children from the land, Kur. Med. 70. Βάθρων terrace, 
rise from your seats, Soph. O. T. 142. (d) So that from which action begins : 
Ὕμνησαν Διὸς ἀρχόμεναι, they sang beginning from Jove, Pind. N. 5. 48. 


234 SYNTAX. R. V., VI, VII, VIII.— GENITIVE. ὃ 405. 


e. In a few rare phrases, the Gen. without a preposition denotes that 
from which time is computed (forward or back): Mer ὀλίγον δὲ τούτων, 
and [after a little from these things] ὦ little after these things, Hel. 1. 1. 2. 


(2.) Genitive of Distinction. 

406. a. Words of vistinction include those of difference 
and exception, of superiority and inferiority, &c.: as, 

Διώρισται τέχνης, is distinct from the art, Pl. Polit. 260¢. ᾿Ηλέκτρου 
οὐδὲν διέφερεν, differed in nothing from amber, ii. 8. 16. Πᾶσαι πλὴν Μι- 
λήτου, all except Miletus, inl. 6. Διάφορον τῶν ἄλλων πόλεων, superior 
to the other states, Mem. 4. 4. 15. Πλούτου ἀρετὴ διέστηκεν PI. 

b. Acttropat, to be left behind [ from or by, 405, 434 Ὁ], to come short of, 


governs the Gen. in these, and various derived or kindred senses : Πλήθει 
- + ἡμῶν λειφθέντες, [left behind us] inferior to us in number, vii. 7. 31. 


407. Words of suprRiority include, 


1.) Words of authority, power, precedence, and pre-eminence : 


᾿Ανθρώπων ἄρχειν, to rule men, Cyr. 1.1.3. *Eyxparets . . πάντων, 
sovereign over all, v. 4.15. “Hyetro τοῦ στρατεύματος, led the army, iv. 
1, 6. Πρεσβεύειν τῶν πολλῶν πόλεων, to take rank of most cities, Pl. Leg. 


408. 2.) Adjectives and adverbs in the comparative degree 
(as denoting the possession of a property in a higher degree), 
and words derived from them. 

Rute V. The Comparative DEGREE governs 
the Genitive: as, 


Κρείττονι ἑαυτοῦ, more powerful than himself, i. 2. 26. Τῶν ἵππων 
ἔτρεχον θᾶττον, they ran faster than the horses, i. ὅ. 2. ᾿Ἐμοῦ ὕστερον, 
[later than] after me, i. 5. 16. “Ὑστέρησε τῆς μάχης, came after the battle. 

a. So the other degrees,*if used in the sense of the Comparative : Σεῖο 
.. μακάρτατος, more completely happy than you, r. 482. 


409. 3.) Multiple and proportional words (240) : as, 
ΠΠολλαπλασίους ὑμῶν αὐτῶν, many times your own number, 111. 2. 14. 


π. GENITIVE OF CAUSE. 


410. To the head of CausE may be referred, 
(A) That from which any thing is DERIVED, MADE, 
SUPPLIED, or TAKEN; (8) That which exerts an 
influence, as an EXCITEMENT, OCCASION, or CON- 
DITION ; (C’) That which produces any thing, as 
its ACTIVE Or EFFICIENT CAUSE; and (D) That 
which CONSTITUTES any thing WHAT IT IS. 


411. A. That from which any thing is DE- 
RIVED, MADE, SUPPLIED, or TAKEN. To this divis- 


§ 414, OF ORIGIN AND MATERIAL. OF SUPPLY. 235 


ion belong, (1) the Genitive of Origin, (2) the Gen- 
tive of Material, (3) the Gemitive of Supply, and (4) 
the Genitive of the Whole, or the Gemtive Partitive. 


1 and 2. Genitive of Origin and of Material. 


412. Ruie VI. The oORIGIN, SOURCE, and 


MATERIAL are put in the Genitive : as, 


Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο, of D. and P. are born 
two children, i. 1.1. Tod δ᾽ ἔφυν, from him 1 sprang, Eur. Iph. T. 4. 
Ti ἀπολαύσαις ἂν τῆς ἀρχῆς ; what advantage should you derive from your 
authority ? Cyr. 7. 5. 56. Polvixos μὲν αἱ θύραι πεποιημέναι, the doors 
being made of the palm-tree, Ib. 22. Otvos φοινίκων ii. 3. 14 (cf. i. 5. 10). 

a. The Gen. of source or material occurs, especially in the Epic poets, 
for other forms of construction, particularly the instrumental Dat. : as, 
Πρῆσαι δὲ ὃς δηΐοιο θύρετρα, burn the gates with raging fire [from fire, 
as the source], B. 415. Χεῖρας νιψάμενος πολιῆς ἁλός, having washed his 
hands [with water from] in the foaming sea, B. 261. 


413. That of which one discourses or thinks may be regarded as the 
material of his discourse or thoughts ; thus we speak of the matter of dis- 
course, a matter of complaint, the subject-matter of a composition, &c. 
Hence, not unfrequently, both in immediate dependence upon another 
word, and even in the introduction of a sentence, 


Ruut VII. The THEME OF DISCOURSE OR OF 
THOUGHT is put in the Genitive : as, 


Tod τοξότου οὐ καλῶς ἔχει λέγειν, ὅτι, x. τ. r., it ts not well to say of 
the bowman, that, &c., Pl. Rep. 489 Ὁ. Διαθεώμενος αὐτών, ὅσην μὲν χώ- 
ραν... ἔχοιεν, observing in respect to them, how great a country they have, 
ii. 1.19. Τῆς δὲ γυναικὸς, ef . . κακοποιεῖ, but in respect to the wife, if 
she manages ill, Hic. 8. 11. Κλύων σου, hearing of thee, Soph. O. C. 307. 


414. 3. Genitive of Supply. 
Supply may be either abundant or defective. Hence, 


στε VIII. Words of PLENTY and want gOv- 
ern the Genitive : as, | : 


a. OF PLENTY. θηρίων πλήρης, full of beasts, i. 2.7. Μεσταὶ σίτου, 
full of corn, i. 4.19. AupOépas . . ἐπίμπλασαν χόρτου, they filled the 
skins with hay, i. 5.10. Τούτων ἅλις, enough of these things, v. 7. 12. 

b. OF WANT. ᾿Ανθρώπων ἀπορῶν, wanting in men, i. 7. 3. Σῴφενδο- 
vytav . . δεῖ, there is need of slingers, iii. 3. 16. Otwv ἂν ἐλπίδων ἐμαυτὸν 
στερήσαιμι, of what hopes I should deprive myself, ii. 5.10. Μιᾶς Séov- 
σαι τεσσαράκοντα, 40 less 1 (8 242c). Φίλων ἔρημος, devoid of friends. 

c. The Gen. which belongs to δέομαι and χρήζω as verbs of want may’ 
be retained by them in the derived senses, to desire, to request, to entreat : 
Οὕτινος ἂν δέησθε, whatever you may desire, i. 4.15. Δικαίων δεῖσθαι, 
to request what is reasonable, Cyr. 8. 3. 20. Μακροῦ χρήζειν βίου, to desire 
long life, Soph. Aj. 473. 


236 SYNTAX. R. IX. — GENITIVE PARTITIVE. § 415. 


4. Genitive Partitive. 


415. Rute ΙΧ. The wHoue or WHICH A PART 


IS TAKEN is put in the Genitive : as, 
“Hpac τοῦ ὅλου στρατεύματος, half of the whole army, vi. 2. 10. 

416. ‘The partitive construction may be employed, 

a.) To express quantity, degree, condition, place, time, &e., 
considered as a limitation of a general idea, or as a part of an 
extended whole (especially with a neuter adjective or an ad- 
verb) : ᾿ 

ae δ᾽ ὕπνου λαχών, obtaining a little [of] sleep, 111. 1. 11. ’Ev τοι- 
οὕτῳ... τοῦ κινδύνου προσιόντος, in such imminent danger [in such a degree 


of], i. 7. 5. Ὁ & eis τοῦθ᾽ ὕβρεως ἐλήλυθεν, ‘to such a pitch of insolence,’ 
Dem. 51. 1. “Hy μέσον ἡμέρας, it was midday, i. 8. 8. See 420 a, Ὁ. 


b.) In presenting the whole as the sum of all the parts; in 
‘denoting the whole and a part ; and in denying of all the parts : 


Ἔν τοῖς ἀγαθοῖσι δὲ πάντ᾽ ἔνεστιν σοφίας, in the good dwell all the quali- 
ties of wisdom, Kur. Alc. 601. ᾿Ἡμιόλιον.. οὗ πρότερον ἔφερον, half 
{and the whole of what] as much again as they before received, i. 8. 21. 
Τούτων... οὐδένα οἶδα, 7 know none of these, Cyr. 7. 5. 45. 


417. a. The whole is sometimes put in the case which belongs to 
the part, the part agreeing with the whole instead of governing it ; chiefly 
when different parts are successively mentioned (cf. 393 ἃ, 395 a): ᾿Ακού- 
ομεν ὑμᾶς . . ἐνίους σκηνοῦν ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις, we hear that you, some of you, 
quarter in the houses [for ὑμῶν ἐνίους), v. 5. 11. Δίδυμα τέκεα πότερος. ἄρα 
πότερον aiudéer; ‘which of the two?’ Eur. Ph. 1289. 

b. It is often at the option of the writer whether he will employ the 
Gen. partitive or a simpler form of construction ; and one form is some- 
times found, where the other would rather have been expected. The two 
forms are sometimes combined: Et7 οὖν θεὸς, εἴτε βροτῶν ἦν, whether he 
was a god, or one of mortals, Soph. El. 199. 


418. According to Rule IX., a word referring to a part, 
whether substantive, adjective, adverb, or verb, may take with it 
a Gen. denoting the whole. Thus, 


I. SUBSTANTIVES : Τὸ τρίτον μέρος τοῦ... ἱππικοῦ, the third part of the 
cavalry, Cyr. Tar πελταστῶν τις ἀνήρ, ὦ certain man of the targeteers.. 

a. When place is designated by mentioning both the cowntry and the 
town, the former, as the whole, may be put in the Gen., and may precede 
the latter: Oi ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐστράτευσαν τῆς Θεσσαλίας ἐπὶ Φάρσαλον, the A. 
marched to Pharsalus [of] in Thessaly, ΤῊ. 1. 111. ᾿Αφίκετο τῆς ᾿Αττικῆς 
ἐς Οἰνόην πρῶτον, came upon Attica first at Ginoé, Th. 2. 18. 

b. The Gen., in all cases in which it is strictly partitive, may be re- 
garded as properly depending upon a substantive denoting the part ; and 
therefore the use of this Gen. in connection with adjectives, verbs, and 
adverbs, may be referred to ellipsis or synesis : Πολέμου, καὶ μάχης οὐ pe- 
τῆν [sc. μέρος] αὐτῇ (421 ἃ ; cf. ἀγαθοῦ τινός μετέσται... μέρος Cyr. 2. 3. 6). 
Τῆς γε οὐδαμοῦ, 1. 6. ἐν οὐδενὶ μέρει τῆς γῆς (420 8). 

c. If the substantive denoting the part is expressed, and that denoting 
the whole is a form of the same word, the latter is commonly omitted : 
Τρεῖς ἄνδρες τῶν γεραιτέρων [sc. ἀνδρῶν], three men of the more aged, v. 7. 


ὃ 423, WITH SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS, VERBS, 237 


419. II. Apsectives. a. The Article, and Adjective Pronouns: 
Tods μὲν αὐτῶν ἀπέκτεινε, τοὺς δ᾽ ἐξέβαλεν, slew some of them, and banished 
others, i. 1. 7. Tév ἄλλων ᾿Βλλήνων τινές, some of the other Greeks, i. 7. 

b. Adjectives of Number: Ets τῶν στρατηγῶν, one of the generals, vii. 
2.29. Ἡμῶν δ᾽ οὐδείς, none of us (416 b), iii. 1. 16. 

c Superlatives, and-words derived from them (by virtue of the includ- 
ed adjective, cf. 408); and the other degrees when kindred in force : Ἔν 
τοῖς ἀρίστοις Περσῶν, among the best of the Persians, i. 6.1. Tév. . ἀν- 
θρώπων ἀριστεύσαντες [= ἄριστοι γενόμενοι], being the best of the men, Mem. 
8. 5. 10. Ὦ φίλα γυναικῶν, O [beloved of] dearest of women, Kur. Alc. 460. 

ἃ. Participles: Σὺν τοῖς παροῦσι τῶν πιστῶν, with those present of his 
faithful attendants, i. 5.15. Καὶ τῶν ἄλλων τὸν βουλόμενον i. 3. 9. 

e. Other Adjectives : "Ἔχων τῶν ὀπισθοφυλάκων τοὺς ἡμίσεις, having half 
of the rear-quard. Tods ἀγαθοὺς τῶν ἀνθρώπων, the good among men, AY. 

f. Those adjectives which are most frequently employed to denote a 
part are termed partitives. A neuter adjective used substantively is often 
so employed. See 416a. 


420. III. Apverss. a. Of Place and Time, used literally or fig- 
uratively (416 a) : Οὐδ᾽ ὅπου γῆς ἐσμὲν οἶδα, J know not where on earth 
{upon what part of the earth] we are, Ar. Av. 9. Tydod γὰρ οἰκῶ ran, 
ἀγρῶν, I dwell [in a remote part of the country] far from town, Ar. Nub. 
138. Ἐνταῦθα ἤδη ef τῆς ἡλικίας, you are now at that point of life, Pl. 
Rep. 328 c. Ὁπηνίκα... τῆς ὥρας, at whatever point of time, iii. 5. 18. 
Πρόσω δὲ τοῦ ποταμοῦ προβαίνειν, to advance far into the river, iv. 3. 28. 

Ὁ. Of State or Condition, especially with the verbs ἔχω and ἥκω (416 a): 
Τῆς τύχης yap ὧδ᾽ ἔχω, I am thus in [have myself in this state of | fortwne, 
Eur. Hel. 857. Πῶς οὖν ἔχεις δόξης ; [in what state of opinion] of what 
opinion are you? Pl. Rep. 456d. Πῶς ἀγῶνος ἥκομεν ; how do we come 
on in the strife [with what progress of the strife] ? Eur. El. 751. 

c. Of the Superlative Degree: ᾿Αφειδέστατα πάντων ἐτιμωρεῖτο, he pun- 
ished most unsparingly of all [he of all, 418 b] i. 9. 13. 

421. IV. Vzrzs. The Genitive partitive, in connection 
with a verb, may perform the office either of a subject, an ap- 
positive, or a complement ; taking the place of any case which 
the verb would require, if referring to the whole. See 418 b. 

1.) The Gen. Partitive as a Subject. (a) Of a Finite Verb: Bist δ᾽ at- 
τῶν, ods οὐδ᾽ ἂν... διαβαίητε, there are some of them, which you could not 
puss, ii. 5, 18. ἸΠολέμου, καὶ μάχης οὐ μετῆν αὐτῇ, of war and battle, 
there fell to her no share, Cyr. 7. 2. 28. (Ὁ) Of an Infinitive : ᾿Επιμιγνύναι 
σφῶν, that some of them mingled, iii. 5.16. “Quero προσήκειν οὐδενὶ ἀρχῆς, 
he thought that [a share of | authority belonged to no one, Cyr. 8. 1. 37. 

422. 2.) The Gen. Partitive in the place of an Appositive is most 
common with substantive verbs, but is likewise found with other verbs, 
particularly those of reckoning, esteeming, and making : Οὐκ ἐγὼ τούτων 
εἰμί, [ am not one of these, Cyr. 8. 3. 45. Ὕλας μακάρων ἀριθμεῖται, Hylas 
is numbered as one of the blest, Theoc. 13. Μουσικῆς . . τίθης λόγους ; Pl. 

423. 3.) The Genitive Partitive is used as ἃ Coinplement, 

a. Generally, with any verb, when its action affects not the 
whole object, but a part only : as, 

AaBévras τοῦ βαρβαρικοῦ στρατοῦ, taking a part of the barbarian army, 
i. 5.7. Tév κηρίων... ἔφαγον, ate of the honeycombs, iv. 8. 20. 


238 SYNTAX. R. X., XI, XII, —GENITIVE PARTITIVE. § 424, 


424. 8.) Particularly, with verbs which, in their ordinary 
use, imply divided or partial action. 

ΝΟΤΕ. The Gen. partitive may be connected with other parts of speech 
upon the same principle. Hence the rule is expressed in a general form. 


Rutrt X. Words of SHARING, BEGINNING, and 
TOUCH govern the Genitive. 


1. Words of sHarine include those of partaking (part- 
taking), imparting, obtaining by distribution, &c. Thus, 

Τῶν κινδύνων μετέχειν, to share in [have a share of] the dangers, Hel. 2. 
4.9. Tijode κοινωνῶ τύχης, 1 partake of this fortune, Eur. Med. 303. 
Τῶν εὐφροσυνῶν μεταδιδόντες, imparting our joys, CEc. 9. 12. 

425. 2. The BEGINNING is, of course, only part of the work: 

Tod δὲ λόγου ἤρχετο, he commenced his address, iii. 2.7. Φυγῆς ἄρχειν, 
to begin flight, 1b. 17. So ἐξάρχω, κατάρχω, καθηγέομαι, io begin; &e. 

a. The partitive idea appears also in such expressions as Mevotor . . 
τῆς πορείας, being in the middle of the way, Pl. Pol. 265 b. 

426. 3. TovcH may be regarded as a species of partial 
action, affecting only the point of contact. To this head be- 
long, either by direct connection or by obvious analogy, verbs 
of laying hold of, hitting, meeting with, &c. Thus, 

“ἽἌπτεσθαι τῆς κάρφης, to touch the hay, i. 5.10, ᾿Εἰπιλαμβάνεται αὐτοῦ 
τῆς irvos, lays hold of his shield-rim, iv. 7.12. Φεραύλα τυγχάνει, hits 
P., Cyr. 8. 3. 28. ᾿Ανδρῶν ἀγαθῶν παιδὸς ὑπαντήσας, having met with the 
son of brave heroes, Soph. Ph. 719. Μέσσου δουρὸς ἑλών I. 78. 

a. Hence, the part taken hold of is put in the Gen., in connection with 
other forms of construction : "Ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης τὸν ᾿Ορόντην, they took 
Orontes by the girdle, i. 6. 10. Nw. . ψαύειν χερός Eur. Herc. 968. 

_b. To the analogy of verbs of touch may be referred expressions like 
the following: Τῆς κεφαλῆς xarédye, he broke [was fractured in] his head. 


427. 4. Several words of obtaining, attaining, and receining, 
govern the Genitive, from their referring primarily either to 
distribution or to touch. Thus, 


Ἵνα τῆς προσηκούσης μοίρας λαγχάνῃ, that it may receive its proper por- 
tion, Pl. Leg. 903 6. KdAnpovopety οὐδενός, to inherit nothing, Dem. 1065. 
25. Tar δικαίων τυγχάνειν, to obtain your rights, vii. 1. 30. 


428. B. That which exerts an influence as an 
EXCITEMENT, OCCASION, or CONDITION. To this 
division belong the following rules, respecting, 
1. the motive, reason, and end in view; 2. price, value, 
merit, and crime; 3. the sensible and mental olyect ; 
and 4. time and place. 


a. The Gen. so employed is often translated by other prepositions than 
of and from, especially by for ; and sometimes without a preposition. 


] 


§ 431. OF MOTIVE, EASON, PRICE, ὅσ. 239 
1. Genitive of Motive, Sc. 


429. Rute XI. The MOTIVE, REASON, and 
END IN VIEW are put in the Genitive. 


To this rule may be referred the use of the Gen., both in 
regular construction and in exclamation, to express the person 
or thing, on account of which, in consequence of which, for the 
sake of which, in honor of which, or to affect which, any thing 
is done, said, felt, or existing. Thus, 

a. With VERBS: Μισθοῦ ὑπηρετοῦντες, serving [from, or on account 
of ] for hire, Cyr. 6. 2. 87. Τούτου σε. . ζηλῶ, on this account I envy 
you, Ib. 8. 4. 23. Μηδὲν αὐτῶν καταθείς, paying nothing for them, Ib. 3: 
1. 87. Φίλου δείσας. . ἣ χαὐτοῦ, fearing [on account of | for a friend or 
even himself, Soph. O. T. 234. Ταύτης ἱκνοῦμαί σε, I beseech you for her 
sake, Kur. Or. 671. Ἱκετεύω σε τῶνδε γουνάτων, ‘by these knees,’ Id. 

b. Wirn ApsEcTIVES : Evéaiuwv . . τοῦ τρόπου, happy [by reason of } 
From his character, Pl. Pheedo 58 6. *Q μακάριε τῆς τέχνης, Ar. Av. 1423. 

ce. WiTH ADVERBS: Πενθικῶς δὲ ἔχουσαν τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ, in mourning for 
her brother, Cyr. 5. 2.7. Χαλεπῶς φέρειν αὐτῶν Th. 2. 62. 

d. Wir Nouns: ’Qditvas αὐτοῦ προσβαλών, causing pangs on his ac- 
count, Soph. Tr. 41. Tevelov τοῦδ᾽... λιτάς, entreaties by this beard, Eur. 

e. WitH.INTERJECTIONS: Φεῦ τοῦ ἀνδρός, Alas for the noble man! 

f. In Simple EXcLAMATION: Τῆς τύχης, My ill-luck / Cyr. 2. 2. 8. 


430. a. The Genitive of the END ΙΝ view is put with 
some words of direction, claim, and dispute. Words of direc- 
tion include those of avming at, throwing at, going towards, and 
reaching after. Thus, 


᾿Ανθρώπων στοχάζεσθαι, to take aim at men, Cyr. 1. 6. 29. Αὐτοῦ xep- 
μάδας . . ἔῤῥιπτον, they threw stones at him, Eur. Bac. 1096. Ewes Πελ- 
λήνης πέτεσθαι, to fly straight for Pellene, Ar..Av. 1421. Τίς yap αὐτῷ 
ἐστιν ὅστις τῆς ἀρχῆς ἀντιποιεῖται ; for who is there that disputes with him 
the sovereignty [makes for the sovereignty in opposition to him]? ii. 1. 11. 

b. The student cannot fail to remark the ease with which verbs of 
motion pass into those of simple effort and desire (432 ὁ). Thus, tepat, 
and, more commonly, ἐφίεμαι, to send one’s self to, rush to, strive for, seek, 
desire ; ὀρέγομαι, to reach after, strive for, seek, court, desire: Δόξης ἐφιε- 
μένοις, eager for glory. ᾿Ορέξασθαι τῆς ὁμιλίας αὐτοῦ, to seek his company. 


2. Genitive of Price, Merit, &c. 


431. Rure XII. Prick, VALUE, MERIT, and 
CRIME are put in the Genitive. 


a. PRICE: Ἵππον, dv. . ἀπέδοτο πεντήκοντα ϑαρεικῶν, the horse, which 
he had sold for fifty darics, vii. 8.6. Δόξα δὲ χρημάτων οὐκ ὠνητή, glory 
is not to be bought for money, Isoc. 21 b. 

b. VALUE AND MERIT: “Aétoc τῆς ἐλευθερίας, worthy of freedom, i. 7. 3. 
Πολλοῦ ἄξιος τῇ στρατίᾳ, worth much to the army, iv. 1. 28. Tis ἀξίας 
τιμᾶσθαι, to estimate at the true desert, Pl. Apol. 36 e. 


240 SYNTAX. R. XIII, XIV., XV.—GEN. OF MENTAL OBJECT. ὃ 431. 


ὃ, Crime: ᾿Ασεβείας φεύγοντα, accused of impiety, Pl. Apol. 88 ἃ. 
Διώξομαί σε ϑειλίας, J will prosecute you for cowardice, Ar..Kq. 368. 

ἃ. The Gen. (chiefly θανάτου) is sometimes used to express the punish- 
ment (regarded either as the desert of the crime, or as the end in view in 
judicial proceedings) : Θανάτου δὲ οὗτοι κρίνουσι, these pronounce sentence 
of death faajadge worthy of]. Ὑπῆγον θανάτου, ‘on a capital charge.’ 


3. Genitive of Sensible or Mental Object. 


432. The object of sensation, thought, or emotion may be 
regarded as its exciting cause, and, in this view, may-be put in 
the Genitive. Hence, ἢ 


Rute XI. Words of SENSATION, and of MEN- 
TAL STATE Or ACTION govern the Genitive : as, 


a. Ov SENSATION : Zlrov ἐγεύσαντο, tasted of food, iii. 1. 3. Οἴνου... 
ὀσφραίνεσθαι, to smell wine, v. 8. 3. Θορύβου ἤκουσε διὰ τῶν τάξεων ἰόν- 
τος, ‘ heard a murmur,’ i. 8. 16. 

b. OF PERCEPTION, KNOWLEDGE, REFLECTION, EXPERIENCE, and 
Hasit: ᾿Επιβουλῆς οὐκ ἠσθάνετο, he did not perceive the plot, i. 1. 8. 
᾿Αλλήλων Evvlerav, understood each other, Th. 1. 8. ᾿Ενθυμοῦ δὲ καὶ τῶν 
εἰδότων, consider those who know, Mem. 3. 6. 17. Πειρώμενοι ταύτης τῆς 
τάξεως, making trial of this order, iii. 2. 38. εν 

ce. OF MEMORY: Τούτων οὐδεὶς μέμνηται, these things no one remen bers, 
v. 8. 25. Τούτων ἐμέμνητο, made mention of these, vii. 5. 8. Μή μὶ ava- 
μνήσῃς κακῶν, do not remind me of my woes, Eur. Ale. 1045. Tov πάροιθε 
μὲν λόγων λαθώμεθα, Let us forget the former words, Eur. Hipp. 288. 

ἃ. Or CARE AND CONCERN: Κήδεσθαι Σεύθου, to care for Seuthes, vii. 
5. 5. Ἰούτου σοι δεῖ μέλειν, of this [there must be to you a care} you must 
take care, Cyr. 1. 6. 16. ᾿Αμελεῖν ἡμῶν αὐτῶν, to be careless of ourselves, 
i. 3.11. Μὴ μεταμέλειν σοι τῆς ἐμῆς δωρεᾶς, that it may not repent thee 
(old Eng.) 9 Poa gift to me, Cyr. 8. 3. 32 (epentance or regret being after- 
concern). λασσομένους τῶν νεῶν, careful of the ships, Th. 4. 11. 

δ. OF DestRE: “Epa@vres τούτου, desiring this, iii. 1. 29. Χρημάτων 
ἐπιθυμεῖ, [sets his mind upon, cf. 430 Ὁ] desires booty, iii. 2. 39. 

f. Or Various Emotion : Ἄγαμαι λήματος, 7 admire the spirit, Kur. 
Rhes. 244. Ὑμῶν... θαυμάζω, J wonder at you, Hel. 2. 3. 53. Ods οὐκ 
ἂν ἀνασχέσθαι αὐτοῦ βασιλεύοντος, who would not endure him us their 
king, ii. ἃ. 1. Ὧν ἐγώ σοι οὐ φθονήσω, which I shall not grudge to you. 

g. The idea of hearing passes, by an easy transition, into that of 
obedience (obédio, to give ear to, listen to, obey, fr. ob and audiv). Hence, 
words of obedience often govern the Gen. (cf. 455 g): Τούτους. . βασιλέως 
οὐκ ἀκούειν, that these did not obey [or were not subject to] the king, iii. 5. 
16. Ὕπήκοοι τῶν Μοσσυνοίκων, subject to the M., v. 5.1. | 

h. Verbs of sight commonly govern the Acc.; and many verbs which 
are followed by the Gen. according to this rule, sometimes or often take 
the Ace. (especially of a neuter adjective) : Hi8opev τοὺς πολεμίους, we 
have seen the enemy, vi. 5.10. Kydtw βοήν, Ihearacry. See 472b,d. 


4. Genitive of Time and Place. 


433. The time and place in which any thing is done may 
be regarded as essential conditions of the action, or as co- 
operating to produce it. Hence, 


§ 434. OF TIME, PLACE, AUTHOR, ὅσ, 241 


Rute XIV. The ΤΙΜῈ and PLACE IN WHICH 
are put in the Genitive (cf. 469, 482): as, 


a. TIME : Ὥιχετο τῆς νυκτός, he went in the night, vii. 2.17. Tower δὲ 
τοῦτο πολλάκις τοῦ μηνός, ‘many times [in the] a month,’ Cyr. 1. 2. 9. 
Eire νυκτὸς δέοι τι, εἴτε καὶ ἡμέρας, ‘ whether [in the] by night or by day,’ 
iii. 1. 40. Βασιλεὺς od μαχεῖται δέκα ἡμερῶν (cf. év.. ταύταις ταῖς ἡμέραι5), 
the king will not fight [within] for ten days, i. 7. 18. Πολλοῦ χρόνου, 
Maxpod χρόνου, Χρόνου συχνοῦ, for a long time, i. 9. 25; &e. 

b. PLAcE: Αὐτοῦ (sc. τόπου] μείναντες, remaining in that place, i. 10. 
17. Ἢ otx”Apyeos fev; was he not in A.? y. 251. Ποτέρας τῆς χερός; 
Ἐν δεξιᾷ cov. On which hand? On thy right. Fur. Cycl. 681. 

c. This use of the Gen., to denote the place where, rarely occurs in 
prose, except in those adverbs of place which are properly genitives 
(380 Ὁ)": οὗ, αὐτοῦ, ὁμοῦ, οὐδαμοῦ, Kc. Cf. 469 b. 

d. This Gen. is sometimes employed, chiefly in the Epic, to denote the 
place upon, over, or through which any ms Τὶ moves : Ἔρχονται πεδίοιο, 
they advance [in] upon the plain, B. 801. lov éxwiccerat, Soph. 

e. The ideas of place and time are combined in some expressions which 
relate to journeying (Fr. journée, a day’s-march, fr. Lat. diurnus, fr. dies, 
day) : ‘“Erraxaldexa yap σταθμῶν τῶν ἐγγυτάτω οὐδὲν εἴχομεν, ‘[in] during 
the last seventeen day’s-marches,’ ii. 2. 11. 

f. The idea of cause appears especially in such expressions as Adoew . - 
τρία ἡμιδαρεικὰ τοῦ μηνός, to pay three half-darics a month, 1. 3. 21. 


434. (C. That which produces any thing, as 
its ACTIVE Or EFFICIENT CAUSE; or, in other 
words, that dy which, as its author, agent, or giver, 
any thing is made, written, said, done, bestowed, &c., 
or from which any thing is obtained, heard, learned, 
mgured, requested, demanded, &e. 


To this division, which refers chiefly to persons, belongs the following 
rule, which will of course be understood as applying only to adjuncts. 


Genitive Active. 


Rute XV. The AvTHOR, AGENT, and GIVER 
are put in the Genitive: as, 


a. With Verbs of Obtaining, Receiving, Hearing, Learning, Inquiring, - 
. Requesting, &c.: Ταῦτα δέ σου τυχόντες, obtaining this of you, vi. 6. 32. 
Epot ἀκούσεσθε πᾶσαν τῆν ἀλήθειαν, you shall hear from me the whole 
truth, Pl. Apol. Μάθε δέ pov καὶ τάδε, learn from me this also, Cyr. 

b. With Passive Verbs and Verbals : Πληγεὶς θυγατρὸς τῆς ἐμῆς, smit- 
ten by my daughter, Kur. Or. 497. Φίλων ἄκλαυτος, wnwept o,” friends, 
Soph. Ant. 847. ᾿Αγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ, beloved of God, Rom. 1. 7. — This use 
= the Set is rare in prose, and is most frequent with the Participle or 

erbal. 

ο. With Substantives : Ξενοφῶντος Κύρου ᾿Ανάβασις, Xenophon’s Ex- 
pedition of Cyrus. “Hpas ἀλατείαις, wanderings caused by Juno, isch. 
Pr. 900. Πολέμων φθορά, destruction by wars, Pl. Leg. 741 a. 


COMP. GR. 11 Ῥ 


242 SYNTAX. R. XVI.— GENITIVE CONSTITUENT. § 435. 


435. D. That which constitutes any thing 
WHAT IT IS. ΤῸ this head may be referred what- 
ever serves to complete the idea of a thing or prop- 
erty, by adding some distinction or characteristic. 


Genitive Constituent. 


Rute XVI. An ADJUNCT DEFINING A THING 
OR PROPERTY is put in the Genitive : as, 

Τὸ Μένωνος στράτευμα, the army of Meno, i. 2. 21. 

a. Substantives simply denote things (including persons) ; and adjec- 
tives and adverbs, properties. Hence, if an adjunct is simply viewed as 
modifying a substantive, adjective, or adverb, it is put in the Gen.; and 
Rule XVI. might be thus expressed : ; F 


A SUBSTANTIVE, ADJECTIVE, or ADVERB, as 
such, governs the Genitive. 


b. If, on the other hand, the particular nature of the modification is to 
be expressed, another case may be required ; so that the same substantive, 
adjective, or adverb may either be followed by the Gen. as the generic 
case, or by the Dat. or Acc. as a more specific case. See 442a, 463, Χο. 


436. a. The THING OR PROPERTY DEFINED may be either distinctly 
expressed by its appropriate word, or may be involved in another word : 
as βασιλεύς in βασιλεύω (442), πλησίον in πλησιάζω (445c). Hence, 


Rute B. <A word may govern the Genitive, by virtue of an 
included substantive, adjective, or adverb. 


b. Adjectives in which a substantive is compounded with ἀ- privative 
(385), have often a Gen. defining the substantive : as, Γήρως &dtra, free 
Jrom the pains of age, Soph. See 446b. Hence the special rule, 


Rute C. Compounds of a-Privative govern the Genitive. 


6. The verbs ὄζω to smell, wvéw to breathe, and προσβάλλω to emit, may 
take a Gen. defining a noun implied in these verbs or understood with 
them : Ὄ ζουσι πίττης, they smell of pitch [emit the smell of pitch], Ar. 
Ach. 190. Μύρου πνέον, breathing of myrrh, Soph. Fr. 147. 

ἃ. Some adverbs govern the Gen., as originally substantives (380), or 
by virtue of an included substantive : Τοῦδε τοῦ φόβου χάριν (or ἕνεκα), 
on account of this fear, Soph. El. 427, &c. So δίκην, δέμας poet., after 
the manner or form of, like, ἕκητι poet., by the will of, κύκλῳ around, &e. 


437. A Genitive defining a substantive (a) is often con- 
nected with it through an appositional verb. Less frequently, 
(b) its connection is modified or strengthened by an adjective or 
adverb. These constructions may be often explained by ellipsis. 

(a.) Πρόξενος . . ἢν [sc. ἄνθρωπος] ἐτῶν ws τριάκοντα, P. was [a man] of 
about 30 years, ii. 6. 20. See 440, 443, and cf. 422. (b.) “Iepds ὁ χῶρος 
τῆς ᾿Αρτέμιδος, the spot is sacred to Diana [consecrated to be Diana’s], v. 3. 


18. ᾿Ιδίων ἑαυτοῦ κτημάτων, of his own acquisitions, Pl. So with οἰκεῖος 
proprius, own, ἐπιχώριος customary, κοινός comminis, common, &e. 


§ 441. OF PROPERTY. OF RELATION. 243 


6. The Gen. is often used in emphatic periphrasis, particularly with χρῆμα 
thing (446 a) and, by the poets, with ὄνομα name, δέμας body, κάρα head, 
σχῆμα form, and similar words :*Q φίλτατον... ὄνομα Πολυνείκους, O deur- 
est [name of P.] P., Eur. δΔέμας ᾿Αγαμέμνονος, for’ Ayapéuvova, Id. 

_d. A substantive governing the Gen., or (6) the Gen. itself, is some- 
times used instead of an adjective, especially by the poets and Hellenistic 
writers: (4) Χρυσὸν... ἐπῶν, the gold of words, ἴον "πη χρυσᾶ, golden words, 
Ar. (0) Πάθη ἀτιμίας, [passions of baseness] base passions, Rom. 1. 26. 

438. Euipsis. a. A substantive governing the Gen. is 
often understood, particularly words denoting domestic relation 
or abode (vids son, οἶκος house, &c.), and such as the context sup- 
plies : as, 

Γλοῦς ὁ Tau, Glus, the son of Tamos, ii. 1. 3. Βυρσίνης τῆς Ἱππίου [sc. 
γυναικός,] B., the wife of H., Ar. Φοιτῶν εἰς διδασκάλου [sc. οἶκον], resoré- 
ing to the house of a teacher, P|. Ale. "Ev ᾿Ασκληπιοῦ [se. ἱερῷ temple] Mem. 
3. 13. 8. ᾽Εν Αἰδου Soph. Ant. 654 (cf. Eiv"Acdov δόμοις 1241). 

b. Instead of simple ellipsis, the possessor is sometimes put in the case 
belonging to the thing possessed, chiefly in comparison: as, “Apuara. . 
ὅμοια ἐκείνῳ [= τοῖς ἐκείνου ἅρμασι], chariots like [him] his (chariots), Cyr. 

439. An adjunct defining a THING either expresses a prop- 
erty of that thing, or points out another thing related to it. An 
adjunct defining a PROPERTY points out a thing related to that 
property. Hence the CONSTITUENT GENITIVE is either, (1) the 
Genitive of Property, or (2) the Genitive of Relation. 


1. Genitive of Property 


440. a. The GENITIVE OF PROPERTY expresses dimension, 
age, quality, &c. (often expressed by an adjective, 435 d) : 

Ποταμὸν ὄντα τὸ εὖρος πλέθρου i. 4. 9, a river being [of] a plethron in 
width (cf. ἸΤοταμὸν τὸ εὖρος πλεθριαῖον i. 5. 4, and see 395 ὁ). Πρὶν εἴκοσιν 
ἐτῶν εἶναι, before he was [of 20 years] 20 years old, Mem. See 437 a. 

Ὁ. Except in the predicate, the Gen. of strict gwality is chiefly poetic or 
Hellen. (437 e): Ὅσοι τῆς αὐτῆς γνώμης ἦσαν, as many as were of the same 
mind, Th. Zrodida . . τρυφᾶς, ὦ [dress of daintiness] dainty dress, Eur. 


_ 2. Genitive of Relation. 


441. The GENITIVE OF RELATION, in its full extent, in- 
cludes much that has been already adduced under other and 
more specific heads. The relations which remain to be con- 
sidered are chiefly, (a) those of domestic, social, and civil life ; 
(8) those of possession and ownership ; (y) that of the object of 
an action to the action or agent ; (δ) those of time and place ; 
(e) those of specification, explanation, and emphasis ; while yet 
others are left for observation. 

The Genitives expressing these relations may be termed, (a) the Gen. 


of social relation, (B) the Gen. possessive, (y) the Gen. objective, (8) the 
Gen. of local or temporal relation, (€) the Gen. of specification, &e. 


244 SYNTAX. R. XVI.— GENITIVE OF RELATION. § 442, 


442. «a. Genirive or Socrat RELaTIon. Ὁ τῆς βασιλέως γυναι- 
kbs ἀδελφός, the brother of the king's wife, ii. 3.17. Βασιλεύων [= βασι- 
λεὺς ὧν, 4806 ἃ] αὐτῶν, being their king, v. 6. 37 (cf. 407). . Teirwy . . τῆς 
Ἑλλάδος, a neighbor of Greece; Tods ἐκείνου ἐχθίστους, . . τοὺς Kipov 
φίλους, his worst foes, the friends of C.; 111. 2. 4, 5. Cf. 450 a, 456. 

a. To this analogy may be referred the use of the Gen. for the Dat., 
with some adjectives denoting near connection or correspondence (even com- 
pounds of σύν, ὁμοῦ, Kc.): Συγγενὴς τοῦ Κύρου, related to Cyrus, or 
a relative of Cyrus, Cyr. Ζεὺς ὁμέστιος βροτῶν, Jupiter dwelling with mor- 
tals, Soph. Ἰούτων ἀντίῤῥοπον, cownterpoising these, Dem. Cf. 450s. 

b. In some of the examples falling under this head, an adjective may 
be regarded as used substantively. 


443. 8. GENITIVE PossEssIVE. a. The Genitive posses- 
sive denotes that to which any thing belongs as a possession, 
power, right, duty, office, quality, characteristic, ἕο. Thus, 


Τὰ Συεννέσιος βασίλεια, the palace of S., i. 2. 23. Ἦσαν αἱ ᾽Τωνικαὶ πό- 
Aes Τισσαφέρνους, the Lonian cities belonged to T., i. 1. 6. Tov μὲν γὰρ 
νικώντων τὸ κατακαίνειν, τῶν δὲ ἡττωμένων τὸ ἀποθνήσκειν ἐστί, for it is 
the part of victors to kill, but of the vanquished to die, iii. 2. 39. 

b. A neuter adjective used substantively takes the Gen. possessive, in 
connection with some verbs of praise, blame, wonder, and the like: Τοῦτο 
ἐπαινῶ ᾿Αγησιλάου, I commend this in Agesilaus [this characteristic of 
Agesilaus], Ages. “Ev cov δέδοικα, one thing [of you} in you I fear, Eur. 

ce. An adjective sometimes supplies the place of the Gen. possessive 
(435 ἃ) : Τὸ βασίλειον [-- «βασιλέως] σημεῖον, the king's ensign, i. 10. 12. 


444. γ. Genitive Opsective. If an action, instead of 
being predicated by a verb, is simply presented in a substan- 
tive, adjective, or adverb, then its object is usually expressed 
by the Genitive (instead of an Acc., Dat., or preposition with 
its case, as with a verb, 435a,b). Thus, 


a. Genitive of the Direct Object: Ὃ φρούραρχος τὰς φυλακὰς ἐξετάζει, 
the commander reviews the guards, Ec. 9.15; but, Kipos ἐξέτασιν ποιεῖται 
τῶν “Ἑλλήνων, C. makes a review of the Greeks, i. 7.1; Τῶν τοιούτων 
ἔργων ἐξεταστικόν, fitted to review such matters, Mem. 1. 1. 7. Δάθρα (or 
κρύφα) δὲ τῶν στρατιωτῶν, without the knowledge of the soldiers, 1. 3. 8 
(οἵ, Aabety αὐτὸν ἀπελθών 17), ἕο. ᾿Αρετῆς διδάσκαλος Pl. Meno 93 ὁ. 

b. Genitive of the Indirect Object: Ἑϊὔχεσϑαι rots . . θεοῖς, to pray to the 
gods, iv. 3.13; but, Θεῶν εὐχάς, prayers to the gods, Pl. Phedr. 244 8. 
Τὴν τῶν κρεισσόνων δουλείαν, subjection to the stronger, Th. 1. 8. 

c. Genitive for a preposition with its case: ᾿Απέβη és τὴν γῆν, descended 
upon the land ; but, Ἔν ἀποβάσει τῆς γῆς, in a descent upon the land, Th. 

ἃ. ~In like manner, the Gen. is employed with nouns, to denote rela- 
tions, which, with the corresponding adjectives, are denoted by the Dat. : 
Τῆς τῶν “Ελλήνων εὐνοίας, from good-will to the Greeks, iv. 7. 20 (cf. Εὖὔ- 
vous δέ σοι ὦν Vii. 3. 20). ᾿Ανδρὸς εὐμένειαν Soph. O. C. 631. 

e. A participle may so perform the office of a substantive or common 
adjective, as to take the Gen. objective: “OF ἐκείνου τεκών, his father, Kur. 

f. To the Gen. of the direct object may be referred the Gen. with airvos 
and its derivatives : Ὃ ἐμὸς ἔρως τούτου αἴτιος, my desire is [causative οὕ} 
the cause of this, ii. Τούτων οὐ σὺ αἰτία, you are not responsible for this, He. 

g. The Gen. in its more active uses (when employed to denote agent, 


§ 448. POSSESSIVE, OBJECTIVE, LOCAL, &C. 245 


possessor, &c.) has received the special designation of the Gen. subjective, 
in distinction from the Gen. objective. They may both modify the same 
word: Τὴν Πέλοπος μὲν ἁπάσης Πελοποννήσου κατάληψιν, Pelops’s seizure 
of all Peloponnesus, Isoc. 249 ἃ. Adjectives taking the place of the Gen. 
are, in like manner, used both subjectively and objectively. 


445. 8. Genitive or Locan or Temporal RELATION. a. With 
Substantives : Tédrov ἔλέους, place for pity, Polyb. 1. 88. Τριῶν ἡμερῶν 
ὁδόν, a three days’ march, ii. 2.12. Terevriy τοῦ βίου, end of life, i. 1. 1. 

b. With Adjectives. ᾿Ἐναντίος ἵστασ᾽ ἐμεῖο, stand opposed to me, N. 448. 
Τάμου ἤδη ὡραία, now of proper age for marriage, Cyr. 4. 6. 9. 

c. With Adverbs. The Gen. is used with many adverbs of place and 
time: ᾿Εἰγγὺς παραδείσου, near a park, ii. 4.14. ᾿Εγγὺς μυρίων, nearly 
10,000, v. 7. 9. Μέχρι ἑσπέρας, until evening, Cyr. 1. 4. 23. 


446. « GENITIVE OF SPECIFICATION, EXPLANATION, or 
Empuasis. This makes the statement more precise or em- 
phatic, by adding a more specific name, or by showing in what 
sense or with what special application (¢ respect to what) the 
statement is made, or by repetition, &c. 

Note. In some of these uses, the Gen. rather denotes a relation be- 
tween two expressions for the same thing, than between two different things. 


In some cases, an appositive might be substituted for it ; and in others, 
we might regard the Gen. as in apposition with a substantive implied. 

a. With Substantives. Τροίης πτολίεθρον, city or Troy (395 ὁ ; ef. urbs 
Rome). Θανάτου τελευτάν, the end [of life] in death, or simply, death, 
Kur. Med. 152 (cf. ὃ 445 a). Tupdvvov χρῆμα, a [thing of a tyrant] vile 
tyrant, Pl. Rep. ὅ67 6. “Yds χρῆμα μέγιστον, a monster of a boar, Hat. 

b. With Adjectives. Nedraros .. γόνοιο, youngest of birth, T. 409. 
Πληγῶν ἀθῷον, free from the punishment of blows (436 b), Ar. Nub. 1413. 
“Amats δέ εἰμι ἀῤῥένων παίδων, 7 aim childless [οἵ] as to male children, Cyr. 

ce. With Adverbs. ᾿Ασφαλῶς τῆς δεῦρ᾽ ὁδοῦ, safely as to his journey 
hither, Soph. O. C. 1165. Cf. 420 b, 429 ¢. 

ἃ. With Verbs (436 a). Τῆς ἔπωβελίας . . κινδυνεύοντα [= ἐν κινδύνῳ 
ὄντα], being in danger of the prescribed fine, Dem. 835. 14. Tddov. . 
ἀτιμάσας, having denied the honor of burial, Soph. Ant. 21. 

e. With words of number or quantity, the Gen. is often used to specify 
the class or kind: ἹΚαπίθην ἀλεύρων, two quarts of flour, i. 5. 6. 


447. GeNERAL REMARK. Great care is requisite in dis- 
tinguishing the various uses of the Genitive. 


C. Tue DativE OBsEcTIvE. 


448. ‘THAT TOWARDS WHICH ANY THING TENDS 
may be resolved into (1.) That towards which any 
thing tends, as an OBJECT OF APPROACH ; and (Π.) 
That towards which any thing tends, as an OBJECT OF 
INFLUENCE. Hence the Dative Objective is either 


246 SYNTAX. R. D., XVII. — DATIVE. § 448, 


(1.) the Dative or Approacn, or (11.) the DATIVE 
oF INFLUENCE; and we have the following general 
rule: - . 

Rute D. THe Opsect or APPROACH OR OF 
INFLUENCE IS PUT IN THE DATIVE; 


or, in other words, since neither approach nor influence are 
regarded as direct action, 


An Inprrect OBJECT IS PUT IN THE DATIVE. 

a. The Dat. of approach is commonly expressed in English by the prep- 

osition fo, and the Dat. of influence, by the prepositions to and for ; 

both, in Latin, by the Dative. An imitation of 403 b would give to the 
rule this form : 


The Dative is used to express that To or FOR 
which something is or is done. 


Ὁ. The relations here denoted are, however, sométimes translated by 
other prepositions, especially by with ; and sometimes without a prepo- 
sition. . ; 

6. The Dat. of approach may denote either person or thing ; the Dat. of 
influence oftener denotes person. 

4. The DativE OBJECTIVE is the converse of the GENITIVE ; the Dat. 
of approach contrasting with the Gen. of departure, and the Dat. of in- 
Jluence with the Gen. of cause. See 397, 398, 403. 


1. Dative or APPROACH. 


449. Approach, like its opposite, departure (404), may be 


either in place, in time, or in character. Hence, 
Rute XVII. Words of NEARNESS and LIKENESS 
govern the Dative. 


(1.) Dative of Nearness. 


450. a. Words of nearness may imply either being near, 
coming near, or bringing near ; and to this class may be referred 
words of union and mixture, of companionship and intercourse, 
of meeting and following, of sending to and bringing to, Xe. : as, 

Πελάσαι... τῇ εἰσόδῳ, to approach the entrance, iv. 2. ὃ. Οἴνῳ κεράσας 
αὐτήν, having mixed it with wine, i. 2.13. “Enpovrar ὑμῖν, they wili fol- 
low you, 111. 1. 36. Διάδοχος Κλεάνδρῳ, successor to C., vii. 2. 5. Τείτων 
οἰκῶ τῇ “Ἑλλάδι, 1 dwell a neighbor to Greece, ii. 8. 18 (cf. 442). ᾿Επορεύετο 
εὖ ἅμα Τισσαφέρνει, marched in company with T., 11. 4. 9. 

b. So words which become words of nearness through their application : 
Κύρῳ ἰέναι, to go to C., i. 2. 26. Πίπτοντος πέδῳ, falling to the grownd, 
Soph. El. 747. Πέμπων αὐτῷ ἄγγελον, sending a messenger to him, i. 3. 8. 


§ 454, OF APPROACH. OF INFLUENCE. 247 


(2.) Dative of Likeness. 


451. a. Words of likeness include those of resemblance, 
assimilation, comparison, identity, equality, &c. : as, 

Ὅμοιοι τοῖς ἄλλοις, like the rest, vi. 6.16. Φιλοσόφῳ μὲν ἔοικας, you 
resemble a philosopher, ii. 1.13. ᾿Εμὲ δὲ θεῷ μὲν οὐκ εἴκασεν, but me he 
did not liken to a god, Apol. 15. Τὸ ἀληθὲς ἐνόμιζε τὸ αὐτὸ τῷ ἠλιθίῳ εἷναι, 
he thought sincerity to be the same with folly, 11. 6. 22. 


b. Many derivatives or compounds of σύν, ὁμοῦ, ὁμοῖος, and ἔσος, govern 
the Dat. by this rule. 


mw. Dative or INFLUENCE. 


452. The Dative of Influence expresses a person 
or thing which is affected by an action, property, 
&c., without being directly acted upon. 


Nore. Influence has every variety and degree. On the one hand, it 
may be so immediate, that it can scarcely be distinguished from direct 
action, and the Dat. expressing it is used interchangeably with the Acc.; 
and, on the other hand, it may be so remote, that it can scarcely be ap- 
preciated, and the Dat. expressing it might have been omitted without 
impairing the sense. 


Rute XVIII. The opsect oF INFLUENCE is put 


in the Dative. 
The Dative is governed, according to this rule, by, 


a.) Words of appREss, including those of call and command, 
of conversation and reply, of declaration and confession, of ex- 
hortation and message, of oath and promise, of reproach and 
threatening, &e. : 

Οὗτος Κύρῳ εἶπεν, this man said to C., i. 6.2. Κλεάρχῳ ἐβόα, called 
out to C., 1.8.12. Διαλεχθέντες ἀλλήλοις, having conversed with each 
other, ii. 5. 42.. Αὐτῷ pavrevrds, pointed out to him by oracle, vi. 1. 22. 

453. 0.) Words of ADVANTAGE and DISADVANTAGE, includ- 
ing those of benefit and injury, of assistance and service, of favor 
and fidelity, of necessity and sufficiency, of fitness and unfitness, 
of convenrence and trouble, of ease and difficulty, of safety and 
danger, ec. : 

“Χρήσιμα... τοῖς Κρησί, useful to the Cretans, iii. 4.17. ᾿Ανθρώποισιν 
ὠφελήματα, benefits to men, Asch. Pr. 501. Φίλοις ἀρήγειν, to succor 
friends, Cyr. 1. 5.18. Παρύσατις... ὑπῆρχε τῷ Κύρῳ, P. favored C., i. 
1. 4. “Eye τινι ἐμποδών εἰμι, am I in the way [to] of any one? v. 7. 10. 
Τῇ ἡλικίᾳ ἔπρεπε, it swited his age, i. 9.6. Ot μοι, Woe to me! Alas! 

454. 0.) Words of appearance, including those of seeming, 
showing, clearness, obscurity, &e. : 

Πᾶσι δῆλον ἐγένετο, it became evident to all, Hel. 6. 4. 20. Αδηλον 


μὲν παντί, obscure to every one, vi. 1. 21. Ἢν καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις φανῇς οἱόσπερ 
ἐμοὶ δοκεῖς εἶναι, if you appear to others such as you scem to me to be, Cyr. 


248 SYNTAX. R. XVIII, E.— DATIVE OF INFLUENCE. ὃ 454. 


d.) Words of CAUSE, DESTINY, OBLIGATION, and VALUE: 

᾿Αγαθῶν αἴτιοι ἀλλήλοις, authors of good to each other (444 f), Cyr. 8. 5. 
24. Ilémpwra σοί, it is fated to you, Msch. Pr. 815. Tots στρατιώταις 
ὠφείλετο μισθός, pay was due to the soldiers, i. 2.11. Βασιλεῖ ἂν πολλοῦ 
ἄξιοι γένοιντο (431 Ὁ), would be worth much to the king, ii. 1. 14. 

6.) Words of civine, including those of granting, offering, 
paying, distributing, supplying, &e. : 

Δίδωμί σοι ἐμαυτόν, 7 give myself to you, Cyr. 4. 6.2. Avavetpar τοῖς 
στρατηγοῖς, to distribute to the generals, vii. 5. 2. Etwep ἐμοὶ ἐτέλει τι 
Σεύθης, uf S. paid me anything. Θεοῖς δωρήματα, gifts to the gods, Ar. Nub. 

455. f.) Words of opposition, including those of contention, 
dispute, enmity, resistance, rivalry, warfare, το. : 

Λιμὸν ὑμῖν ἀντιτάξαι, to oppose to you famine, ii. 5.19. "Epttowra of 
περὶ σοφίας, contending with him in skill, i. 2. 8. Ἰπαλλάδι τ᾽ ἔριν, a dis- 
pute with P., Kur. ᾿Αντίοι ἰέναι τοῖς πολεμίοις, to go against the enemy, i. 
8. 17. Οὐδεὶς αὐτῷ ἐμάχετο, no one fought with him, Ib. 23. 

_. g-) Words of YIELDING, SUBJECTION, and WORSHIP, including 
those of homage, obedience (cf. 432 g), prayer, sacrifice, ἄς. : 

Πάντα τοῖς θεοῖς ὕποχα, all things are subject to the gods, ii. 5. 7. "Eyot 
οὐ θέλετε πείθεσθαι, you are not willing to obey me, i. 3. 6. ᾿Εάν μοι πει- 
σθῆτε, if you will listen to me, i. 4.14. EtiyeorOar τοῖς... θεοῖς, to pray 
to the gods, iv. 3. 13. “H@ve τῷ Διί, sacrificed to Jupiter, vii. 6. 44. 

456. h. Words expressing a MENTAL ACT or FEELING, 
which is regarded as going out towards an object ; as those of 
Friendship and hatred, pleasure and displeasure, joy and sorrow, 
contentment and envy, belief and unbelief, trust and distrust, &c.: 

Κύρῳ φιλαίτερον, more friendly to C., i. 9. 29. Totras ἥσθη Κῦρος, 
C. was pleased with these, i. 9. 26. Ὧν ἐμοὶ χαλεπαίνετε, for which you 
are angry with me (429 a), vii. 6. 32. Xalpas .. φίλοις ἀγαθοῖς, you 
delight in good friends, Mem. ᾿Ἐϊπίστενον γὰρ αὐτῷ, they trusted him, 1. 

457. i.) Words expressing the act or POWER OF EXCITING 
EMOTION : as pleasure, displeasure, care, fear, Ke. : 

᾿Αρέσκειν ὑμῖν, to please you, Cyr. 3. 3. 39. Ἐμοὶ μελήσει, i shall be 
fa care to me} my care, i. 4.16. Merapére μοε, 2 repent, Cyr. See 482 ἃ. 

458. 1.) VerBaL ADJECTIVES in -rés and -réos. With these 
the Dat. is used to express relation to an agent (for which, in 
Eng., to or for can be used, though other forms of expression 
are frequent) : 

Θαυμαστὸν πᾶσι, wonderful to all, iv. 2. 15. Ἵνα μοι εὐπρακτότερον 77, 
that it may be easier for me to effect, ii. 3. 20. Tlorauds . . ἡμῖν ἐστι ϑια- 
Baréos, there is a river for us to cross [to be crossed by us}, ii. 4. 6. “Hyiv 
εὖ πάντα ποιητέα, everything [is for us to do] should be done by us, iii. 1. 35. 


Nore. So rarely other verbals: Τοῖσι δυστυχοῦσιν εὐκταία θεός, Eur. 


459. k.) Supsranrivs Verbs implying possession (in forms 
of expression which may be variously translated). 


§ 462 OF POSSESSOR, AGENT, ἃ, 249 


Rute E. Substantive Verbs take a Dative of the Possessor : 


ἘἘνταῦθα Κύρῳ βασίλεια iv, here [there was a palace to C.] C. had a pal- 
ace, i. 2.7. Tots δὲ ὑποψία μὲν ἣν, they had a suspicion, or they suspected, 
i. 3.21. Ὑπάρχει yap viv ἡμῖν οὐδέν, we have now nothing, ii. 2. 11. 
᾿Ανάγκη δή μοι [se. ἐστί), 1 am now compelled, i. 3.5. Πόλις... 7 ὄνομα 
Σιττάκη, a city [to which there was the name] named S., ii. 4. 13. Δρό- 
μος ἐγένετο τοῖς στρατιώταις, [to the soldiers there came to be a running} 
the soldiers began to run, i. 2.17. “Kori ἀνθρώπῳ... βλέπειν, [it is toa 
man to look] a man can look, Symp. 4. 58. Νῦν σοι ἔξεστιν vii. 1. 21. 

Nore. The relation is sometimes defined by a participle or adjective 
of mental state, joined with the Dat.: ᾿Εκείνῳ βουλομένῳ ταῦτ᾽ ἐστί, these 
things are [to him willing] according to his will, or agreeable to him, Hel. 
4.1. 11. Νικίᾳ προσδεχομένῳ fv, were as N. had expected, Th. 6. 46. 


460. 1.) And, in general, words expressing any action, 
property, &c., which is represented as being to or for some 
person or thing: 


IIporivw σοι, I drink to you, vii. 3. 26. Kevordguov αὐτοῖς ἐποίησαν, 
they made for them a cenotaph, vi. 4. 9. Μέγιστον κόσμον ἀνδρί, the great- 
est ornament to a man, i. 9. 23. Ὥρα Fv ἀπιέναι τοῖς πολεμίοις, it was time 
for the enemy to withdraw, iii. 4. 34. ᾿Εγὼ σιωπῶ τῷδε; I be silent for 
this fellow? Ar. Ran. 1134. Λοιπόν μοι εἰπεῖν, left for me to say, ii. 2. 29. 


461. m. A Dative or THE AGENT is sometimes joined with 
passive verbs, chiefly with the Perfect and Pluperfect : 


Πάνθ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται, all things have been done by us, i. 8. 12. Ei δέ τι 
καλὸν... ἐπέπρακτο ὑμῖν, if any honor had been gained by you, vii. 6. 32. 
Tots"EXAnor μισοῖντο, would be hated by the Greeks [hateful to them], Th. 

Notre. This use seems to have come chiefly from the possessive use of 
the Dat. (459). Thus, τοῦτό μοι γέγραπται, hoc mihi est scriptum, [this zs 
to me written, I have this written] I have written this, or this has been 
written by me. So the possessive has passed into the active idea, in the 
use of the auxiliary in our own and in other languages: J have it written, 
I have written it (Germ. Ich habe geschrieben, Fr. J'ai écrit, &c.). 

462. Remarks. 1. The remoter relations expressed by 
the Dat. (452 N.) are various, having respect to place, time, 
sensation, thought, feeling, expression, action, &c. They may be 
expressed (a) directly by a substantive in the Dat., with which 
(b) a participle is often joined ; (c) by the participle with its 
subject omitted ; or (d) by an elliptical form of construction, 
in which the Dat. is preceded by as, as : 

Πόλις ἐν δεξιᾷ ἐσπλέοντι [sc. τινί or σοί], a city on the right to one sail- 
ing in, or as you sail in, Th. 1. 24 (cf. vi. 4. 1). Τὸ μὲν ἔξωθεν ἁπτομένῳ 
σῶμα οὐκ ἄγαν θερμὸν jv, ‘to the external touch,’ Th. 2. 49. Ei γενναῖος, 
ὡς ἰδόντι [sc. φαίνει], ‘as you appear to one beholding,’ ‘in appearance,’ 
Soph. 0. C. 75. Καίτοι o ἔγὼ ᾿τίμησα τοῖς φρονοῦσιν εὖ, “ [101] in the 
judgment of the wise,’ Soph. Ant. 904. Κρέων γὰρ ἣν ζηλωτὸς, ὡς ἐμοὶ [se. 
ἐδόκει}, ‘as it seemed to me,’ ‘in my opinion,’ Ib. 1161. 

e. The Dat. is termed ETHICAL, when it is introduced, not as an essen- 
tial part of the sentence, but to render it more emphatic or subjective, by 
referring to some one as interested (ἠθικός, relating to the state of mind). 
The pronouns of the 1st and 2d Pers. are especially so used: Μέμνησό pot, 

comp. GR. 11* 


250 SYNTAX. ΒΕ. F., XIX. — DATIVE RESIDUAL. § 462. 


μηδέποτε ἀναμένειν, remember [for me], I pray you, never to defer, Cyr. 1. 
6. 10. Νοσεῖ δέ μοι πρόπας στόλος, the whole nation is sick {for me], alas 4 
Soph. 0. Τ. Τί σοι μαθήσομαι; what shall I learn for you? Ar. Nub. 

ft. The use of the Dat. with a participle in defining time, especially pre- 
vails in Hdt.: Θνομένῳ οἱ... ὁ ἥλιος ἀμαυρώθη, while he was sacrificing, &c. 


463. 2. Words governing the Gen. sometimes take a Dat. 
in its stead, to express the exertion of an influence : 


“Hyetro δ᾽ αὐτοῖς ὁ κωμάρχης, and the bailiff led the way for them, i. 6. 
guided them, iv. 6.2. Tadiowr. . ἀνάσσω, Iam lord [to] of the T., a. 181. 
Δαρὸν yap οὐκ ἄρξει θεοῖς, he will not long rule the gods, sch. Totow 
ἀφείλετο νόστιμον ἦμαρ, he took away [for] from them the day of return, 
a. 9. Θέμιστι. . δέκτο δέπας, O. 87. édpevyev ἐλπὶς τῶνδέ μοι, ‘has 
fled [for] from me,’ Eur. Ta ἄκρα ἡμῖν. . προκαταλαμβάνειν i. 8. 16. 


464. 3. A Dat. depending upon a verb is often used instead 
of a Gen. depending upon a substantive : 


Οἱ... ἵπποι αὐτοῖς δέδενται, the horses are tied for them, = οἱ ἵπποι αὖ- 
τῶν δέδενται, their horses are tied, iii. 4. 35. Tots βαρβάροις τῶν τε πεζῶν 
ἀπέθανον πολλοὶ, [for] of the barbarians, many of the foot were slain, iii. 4. 
5. Ἡ... τοῦ παντὸς ἀρχὴ Χειρισόφῳ ἐνταῦθα κατελύθη vi. 2. 12 (ef. 8. 1). 

a. The Dat. for the Gen. is sometimes joined directly with a substan- 
tive, chiefly the Dat. of'a personal pronoun : Οἱ δέ σφι Bées . . οὐ παρεγί- 
vovro, [the oxen for them] their oxen did not come, Hat. 1. 31. 

b. A Dat. is sometimes joined with a substantive, where the sense is 
more fully expressed by supplying a participle or adjective : ᾿Απόβλεπε.. 
πρὸς τὴν νέαν ἡμῖν πόλιν, look upon the new state [planned] for us, Pl. 

c. Except as above, substantives governing the Dat. are commonly 
derived from verbs or adjectives so construed. . 


D. Tue Dative RESIDUAL. 


465. The Dative Residual is used in expressing 
adjuncts, which are not viewed as either subjective 
or objective (897 5). It simply denotes direct rela- 
tion, without specifying the character of that rela- 
tion; or, in other words, it denotes mere association 
or connection. Hence we have the general rule: 


Rute F. An Atrenpant THING or CircuM- 
STANCE, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, 1S PUT IN THE 
DATIVE. 


a. In accordance with this rule, the Dat. is sometimes used in express- 
ing an adjunct, which, upon a more exact discrimination of its character, 
would be expressed either by the Gen. or Acc. (399a, f). 

b. The Dative RestpuAL is commonly expressed in Lat. by the Abla- 
tive ; in Eng. most frequently by the preposition with, but likewise by the 
prepositions at, in, by, through, &c. Cf. 403 a, 448 a. 


§ 468. INSTRUMENTAL AND MODAL. 251 


c. The Dative Residual may be resolved into (1.) the Iy- 
STRUMENTAL and Mopau .Darive, and (11) the ΤΈΜΡΟΒΑΙ, and 
LocaL Dative. . 


1. INSTRUMENTAL AND Mopat Dative. 


466. Rute XIX. The means and MODE are 
put in the Dative. 


INSTRUMENTALITY and MODE may be either external or internal, and 
MODE may apply either to action or condition. Hence, to these heads may 
be referred, 


1.) The instrument, force, or other means, with which any 
thing is done, or through which it comes to pass : 


᾿Ακοντίζει τις παλτῷ, one shoots with a dart, i. 8. 27. Σχεδίαις διαβαί- 
γοντες, crossing with rafts, i.5.10. Ἑφείποντο. . ἱππικῷ, pursued with 
cavalry, vil. 6. 29. Θανάτῳ ζημιοῦν, to punish with death, Cyr. 6. 3. 27. 
᾿Αποθνήσκει νόσῳ, dies through disease, vii. 2. 32. Ἑϊὐνοίᾳ ἑπομένους, ii. 6. 

a. MEANS and CAusg, to some extent, cover the same ground. Hence 
some of the examples above, and others like them, might be referred to a 
Dative or CAvseE (for which the Gen. could be used, 465 a).. 

Ὁ. Xpdopar, to wse [to supply one’s need with, 50], takes the Dat. 
(originally of means): TQ ὄψῳ σίτῳ χρήσεται, he will use meat as bread 
(394 b), Mem. 3.14. 4. (c) So the compounds ἀπο-χράομαι, &c.; and 
sometimes νομίζω, after the analogy of χράομαι: Φωνῇ . . νομίζουσι, Hat. 


467. 2.) a. The way or manner, in which any thing is done 
or affected, together with attendant circumstances; and also (b) 
the respect in which any thing is taken or applied : 


(a) Οὐ γὰρ κραυγῇ, ἀλλὰ σιγῇ .. προσήεσαν, they advanced not with 
clamor, but in silence, i. 8. 11. Ὥσπερ ὀργῇ ἐκέλευσε, he commanded, as 
in anger, i. 5. 8. ᾿Ελαύνων... ἱδροῦντι τῷ ἵππῳ, riding with his horse in 
a sweat, i. 8.1. Τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ ἐπορεύθησαν, in this manner they marched. 

(Ὁ) Πλήθει γε ἡμῶν λειφθέντες, inferior to us in [respect to] number 
(406 b). TH φωνῇ τραχύς, rough im voice, ii. 6.9. Πόλις. . Θάψακος 
ὀνόματι; ‘by name,’ i. 4. 11. Τῇ ἐπιμελείᾳ περιεῖναι i. 9. 24. 

c. The pronoun αὐτός is sometimes joined to the dative of an associated 
object to give emphasis ; and the preposition σύν, which is otherwise com- 
mon with such adjuncts, is then usually omitted : Μὴ ἡμᾶς αὐταῖς ταῖς 
τριήρεσι καταδύσῃ, lest he should sink us, triremes and all [with the tri- 
remes themselves], 1. 3. 17. Cf. Ξ. 498 and T. 482. 


468. 3.) The measure of difference, especially with the 
Comparative : 


᾿ΕἘνιαυτῷ πρεσβύτερος, older by a year, Ar. Ran. 18. Πόλι λογίμῳ ἡ 
Ἑλλὰς γέγονε ἀσθενεστέρη, Greece has become weaker by an illustrious city, 
Hat. 6. 106. Χρόνῳ μετέπειτα πολλῷ Hdt. 2.110. So often a neut. 
adjective (μακρῷ by far, ὀλίγῳ by little, &c.): Οὐ πολλῷ δὲ ὕστερον, not 
{later by much] long after, ii. 5. 32. “Ὅσῳ δὲ μᾶλλον πιστεύω, τοσούτῳ 
μᾶλλον ἀπορῶ, [by how much] the more I believe, [by so much] the more I 
am at ὦ loss, Pl. Rep. 368b. See i. 5. 9. Minor anno, Hor. 


252 SYNTAX. ΒΕ. XX., XXI.—DAT. OF TIME, ac. ὃ 469. 


u. TEMPORAL AND Loca, Dartve. 


469. Rute XX. The ΤΙΜῈ ‘and PLACE 47 WHICH 
are put in the Dative (cf. 433, 482): as, 


a. ‘TIME (in prose, chiefly in stating some day, night, month, season, 
year, or festival, as the time at which an event occurred) : Τῇ πρώτῃ δὲ 
ἡμέρᾳ ἀφίκοντο, the first day, they came, iv. 8.1. Τῷ δ᾽ ἐπιόντι ἔτει, ᾧ ἣν 
᾿Ολυμπιὰς, ἡ τὸ στάδιον évixa Kpoxivas, the following year, in which was 
the Olympic at which C. won the foot-race, Hel. 2. 3.1. "Opa ἔτους Th. 

b. Puack (in prose, chiefly in adverbs of place which are properly da- 
tives, 380c ; and in stating some town or Attic deme, as the place at which 
an event occurred) : ταύτῃ and τῇδε [sc. χώρᾳ] in this region, here, iv. 5. 
36, vil. 2. 13; ἥπερ where, ii. 2. 21; κύκλῳ in a circuit, around, i. 5. 4; 
οἴκοι at home, i. 1.10. Ta τρόπαια τά re Μαραθῶνι καὶ Σαλαμῖνι καὶ 
Πλαταιαῖς, the victories at M. and S. and P., Pl. Menex. 245a. Κείμενον 
πέδῳ Αἴγισθον Eur. El. 763. Μίμνει ἀγρῷ λ. 188. Αἰθέρι ναίων B. 412. 

c. This Dat., while αὐ expresses its general idea, is often translated by 
in, on, &c.; or without a preposition. 

d. To the LocAL DATIVE may be referred the usé-of the Dat., chiefly 

poetic, to denote persons among whom, or in whom any thing occurs: Δύ- 
vapuv ἀνθρώποις ἔχειν, to have power among men, Eur. Bac. 310. 


E. Tue Accusative. 


470. ‘The local idea upon which the uses of 
the Accusative are based (398), appears to be the 


idea of that into which an action goes. 

a. Locally viewed, as the Gen. is the W hence-Case, the Dat. Residual 
the Where-Case, and the Dat. Objective the Whither-Case, so the Ace. is 
the Whereinto-Case (10). 

b. Under the local form of conception, an action is conceived of as 
going towards or to an indirect object, but into a direct object ; or, in famil- 
iar grammatical language, this is regarded as the receiver of the action. 
(c) In another view, the action passes into its effect. (d) It goes, ina 
special sense, into the part affected. And (e), in going through an object, 
it necessarily goes into successive parts. Hence, 


471. Upon this general idea, are based (1.) the Accusative 
of Direct Object, (11.) the Acc. of Effect, (πι.} the Acc. of 
Specification (specifying the particular part, property, ke. affect- 
ed), and (1v.) the Ace. of Extent (denoting the space, time, cc. 
through which anything extends). (0.) In some uses, which 
may be referred to these heads or to its generic office (472 a), 
the Acc. has been termed Advertial. 


1,0. AccusaTIVE oF Drrect Opsect AnD Errecr. 


472. Rute XXI. The prrect opsect and the 
EFFECT of an action are put in the Accusative: as, 


ὃ 474. ACOUSATIVE OF DIRECT OBJECT, &C. 253 


Λαβὼν Tire νην, taking T.,1.1.2. Ἑήρήνην ποιῆσαι, to make 
peace, Ages. 1. 7. Ὕπώπτευε τελευτήν, i. 1. 1. 

a. The term action .is here used to denote that which is signified by a 
verb ; since the verb, from its prevalent use, is grammatically regarded 
and treated as the word of action (cf. 485a). And as the direct is more 
generic than the indirect, it results that 


(Rute G.) An adjunct simply considered as modifying a verb 
-is put in the Accusative. Hence, 


b. Many verbs may take the Acc. as the generic case, which, according 
to preceding rules, govern the Gen. or Dat. as more specific cases : Ilpo- 
έχουσιν οἱ ἱππεῖς ἡμᾶς, the cavalry swrpass us (406), 111. 2.19. Σὲ αἰσθέ- 
σθαι, to perceive you (432), ii. 5. 4. Φίλους ὠφελεῖν, to benefit friends 
(453), Cyr. 1. 4. 25. Ἕκτορα εἶπε, spake to H. (452a), M. 60. Seee. 

c. The same principle applies to circumstantial adjuncts (485 6). (ἃ) 
This generic use of the Acc. is far more frequent in respect to ¢hings than 
persons, since the relations of the former are less varied and require less 
careful discrimination. For like reason, and also to distinguish the gen- 
der (181. 1), it is most frequent of all in the neuter adjective used sub- 
stantively (478 a, 488 ἃ). (6) It is sometimes chosen for distinction from 
a Gen. or Dat. modifying the same verb: as cod θαυμάζω (432 f), but τού- 
του σε θαυμάζω (429 a), or τοῦτό cov θαυμάζω (443 b). 

f. As many Greek verbs govern the Gen. or Dat. while the correspond- 
ing verbs in Eng. govern the Objective case ; so many verbs governing the 
Ace. in Greek are translated into Eng. with a preposition : "Opvupr θεοὺς 
καὶ θεάς, I swear by gods and goddesses, vi. 6.17. Ἡμᾶς... εὖ ποιῶν, 
doing well by us. Pvdarrépevov . . ἡμᾶς, guarding against ws, ii. 5. 3. 

g. With verbs of motion, the place where it ends is commonly expressed 
with a preposition ; but sometimes, chiefly in the poets, as a direct ob- 
ject : ᾿Αφίξεται τόπον ὑλώδη, will come to a woody spot, Ven. 10. 6. Σὲ 
πέμψαι φάος, to send you into the light, Eur. Alc. 456. Κνίση δ᾽ οὐρανὸν 
ἷκε, the savor ascended to heaven, A. 317. (h) This construction applies 
less frequently to persons: Μνηστῆρας ἀφίκετο, came to the suitors, a. 332. 

i. The poets sometimes even join an Acc. of the place with verbs of 
standing, sitting, or lying (as implying occupation): “Eornke πέτραν, 
stands on ὦ rock, Kur. Sup. 987. ἸΤρίποδα καθίζων Φοῖβος Ib. 956. 

j. This rule primarily applies only to the adjuncts of verbs (a). Verbal 
adjectives and nouns, however, sometimes take the Acc. by virtue of the 
included verb: Σὲ... φύξιμος, able to escape you, Soph. Ant. 788 ; cf. Ἦ 
μὴ φύγω σε; Id. El. 1503. Τά re μετέωρα φροντιστής, a student of the 
heavens, Pl. Apol. 18 b ; cf. Τῶν μετεώρων φροντιστής Symp. 6. Cf. 477 a. 


473. a. Causatives govern the Acc., together with the 
case of the included verb : as, 


Μὴ μὶ ἀναμνήσῃς κακῶν, do not remind me of [cause me to remember] 
my woes (432c), Kur. Τάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, ‘made you drink’, 1 Cor. 3. 2. 

b. The verbs Set and χρή are sometimes construed by the poets as 
causatives: Σὲ det Wpoundews, you have need of [it needs you of |] a Pro- 
metheus, Hisch. Pr. 86 (414b). Σὲ χρὴ .. αἰδοῦς, you have need of mod- 
esty, y. 14. So χρεὼ ἔσται (as if a Fut. of χρή, 475 Ὁ) &. 322. 


474. ATTRACTION. a. A word which is properly construed other- 
wise, sometimes becomes the direct object of a verb by attraction, espe- 
cially in the poets. This sometimes results in hypallage (an interchange 


254 SYNTAX. R. XXI,— ACCUSATIVE OF THE EFFECT. § 474. 


of construction) : Εἰ δέ p’ ὧδ᾽ del λόγοις ἐξῆρχες [= μοι λόγους or λόγων], 
af you had always begun your addresses to me thus, Soph. El. 556. 

b. A verb, of which the proper object or effect is a distinct sentence, 
often takes the subject (or some other prominent word) of that sentence in 
the Acc., by attraction : “Hide: αὐτὸν, ὅτι μέσον ἔχοι, he knew [him] that 
he occupied the centre, i. 8. 21. (0) Nor is this anticipation confined to 
the Acc.: Βαρβάρων ἐπεμελεῖτο, ws πολεμεῖν τε ἱκανοὶ εἴησαν, he took care 
that the barbarians should be prepared for war,i.1.5. See 402a. 


475. Pernipnrasis. a. The place of a verb is often supplied by an 
Ace. of the kindred noun joined with such verbs as ποιέω (or more fre- 
quently ποιξομαι), ἄγω, ἔχω, τίθημι, &c.: Κῦρος ἐξέτασιν καὶ ἀριθμὸν τῶν 
Ἑλλήνων ἐποίησεν [= ἐξήτασε καὶ ἠρίθμησε τοὺς “Ἑλληνας], Ο΄. made a review 
and numbering of [= reviewed and numbered] the Greeks, i. 2. 9. 

b. These and like periphrases sometimes take an Acc. by virtue of the 
implied verb: ᾿Ανϑδράποδα ἁρπαγὴν ποιησάμενος [= aprdcas], having made 
seizure of slaves, Th. 8. 62. Σῆμα τιθεὶς (= σημαίνων) . . νίκην, Θ. 171. 


476. Exuipsis. 1. The verb which governs the Acc. is 
sometimes omitted ; particularly, : 


a.) In EMPHATIC ADDRESS or EXCLAMATION: Οὗτος, ὦ σέ τοι [sc. λέγω 
or καλῶ], You there, ho! you I mean, Ar. “Id, id, Avyelas μόρον ἀηδόνος 
[sc. ποθῶ], oh, oh [I long] for the fate of the melodious nightingale ! Aisch. 

Ὁ.) In ENTREATY: Μὴ, πρός σε θεῶν [sc. ἱκετεύω], τλῇς με προδοῦναι, 
I beseech you by the gods, do not forsake me,. Kur. Alc. 275. Observe the 
hyperbaton, which is freyuent in earnest entreaty. 

c.) In PROHIBITION: Μὴ τριβὰς ἔτι [sc. ποιεῖτε, No more delays! 

4.) In swEARING : Οὐ, τόνδ᾽ “Odvprrov [sc. ὄμνυμι, 472 f], No / by this 
Olympus ! Soph. Ant. 758. Οὐ, τὰν Διὸς απάν Id. Kl. 1063. — By 
this ellipsis may be explained the use of the Acc. with the particles v4, 
vat, and μά (of which the two first are affirmative, and the last, unless 
preceded by vai, commonly negative), according to the following rule : 


Rute H. ADVERBS OF SWEARING are followed by the Acc. : 

Νὴ Ala, Yes, by Jupiter! i. 7.9. Ναὶ τὼ Σιώ vi. 6. 34. ᾿Αλλὰ, μὰ 
τοὺς θεοὺς, οὐκ ἔγωγε αὐτοὺς διώξω, but, by the gods, I will not pursuc them, 
i. 4.8. Nai μὰ Ala, Yes, indeed / v. 8. 6. 

e.) Some familiar verbs : Ὁ τὸν κάνδυν [sc. ἔχων ; in later writers], he 
with the cloak, Luc. D. C. 9. 

2. The Acc. required by a transitive verb is sometimes omitted: cf. 
Διατελέσαι τὴν ὁδόν, to finish the way, iv. 5. 11, and πρὸς ὕδωρ βούλοιτο 
διατελέσαι i. 5. 7 ; ᾿Ελαύνοντος τὸν ἵππον, riding his horse, and Iapedav- 
vovros, Cyr. 8. 3. 28, 29. Λύκιος ἤλασε i. 10. 15. . 

8. An elliptical or unusual construction of a verb and Acc. is sometimes 
employed, especially by the poets, for energy or brevity of expression : 
Φιλότητα... τάμωμεν, let us strike friendship [a victim in pledge of friend- 
ship], I’. 94 (cf. foedus ferire). Cf. 4745, 479. 


Accusative of the Effect. 


477. The Errect of a verb includes whatever the agent 
does or makes. Hence any verb may take an Acc. expressing 
or defining its action. The Acc. thus employed may be either 
(1) a noun kindred, in its origin or signification, to the verb ; 


§ 480. DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 255 


or (2) a neuter adjective used substantively; or (3) a noun simply 
defining or characterizing the action. 


1. Kinprep Novn (with this, the verb is often translated by a more 
general word): Εὐτύχησαν τοῦτο τὸ εὐτύχημα, they had [succeeded] gained 
this success, Vi. ὃ. 6. Φυλακὰς φυλάξειν, to keep guard, ii. 6.10. ‘Qs 
ἀκίνδῦνον βίον ζῶμεν, how secure a life we live, Eur. Med. 248. 

a. In like manner, an adjective sometimes takes an Acc. of the kindred 
noun : Σοφὸς ὧν τὴν ἐκείνων σοφίαν, being wise with their wisdom, PI. 

b. It will be observed, that usually an adjective is joined with the Acc. . 
of the kindred noun, and the whole phrase is an emphatic substitution for 
an adverb : Ὥς ἀκίνδῦνον βίον ζῶμεν = ‘Qs ἀκινδύνως ζῶμεν. This adjective 
not unfrequently occurs with an ellipsis of the noun: Td Περσικὸν ὠρχεῖτο 
[sc. 8pxnua], he danced the Persian [dance], vi. 1.10. See 478. 


478. 2. Neuvrer ApsEcTIVE (commonly translated by supplying 
a noun, or by an adverb): Τοιαῦτα μὲν πεποίηκε, such acts has he com- 
mitted, or thus has he acted, i. 6.9. Λέγεις οὐκ ἀχάριστα, you speak 
pleasantly enough, ii. 1. 18. Kyémrov βλέπει [sc. βλέμμα], he looks [a 
thievish look] thievish, Ar. Vesp. 900. ᾿Ανέκραγέ re πολεμικόν vii. 3. 33. 

a. This construction of the neuter adjective is very extensive in its use, 
and often occurs where a substantive would be constructed differently 
(472d): Ὀσφραίνει τι; Tod ψύχους, ‘Do you smell any thing?’ “ The 
cold.’ It is closely allied to the adverbial use of the neuter adjective (483). 


479. 3. Derinitive Noun. Ἡ βουλὴ... ἔβλεψε νᾶπυ, the senate 
looked mustard, Ar. Eq. 629. Mévea πνείοντες, breathing courage, T. 8 
(‘‘ breathing united force,” Milt.). ‘Peirw γάλα, let it flow milk, Theoc. 


Double Accusative. 


480. 1. A word may take as many adjuncts, in the same 
or different cases, as the sense requires. Thus, 


2. Many verbs govern TWO ACCUSATIVES, which may be, 


a.) The DIRECT OBJECT and the EFFECT, im apposition with each other 
(393) ; as with verbs of making, appointing, choosing, esteeming, naming, 
dividing, &c.: Βασιλέα σε ἐποίησαν, they made you king, vii. 7. 22. Στρα- 
τηγὸν δὲ αὐτὸν amédeke, he had appointed him general, i. 1. 2. Πατέρα ἐμὲ 
ἐκαλεῖτε, you called me father, vii. 6. 88. Κῦρος τὸ στράτευμα κατένειμε 
δώδεκα μέρη, C. divided the army into twelve parts (393 4), Cyr. 7. 5. 18. 

b.) The DiIrREcT oBJECT and the EFFECT, not in apposition; as with 
verbs of doing, saying, &c. (a neuter adj. often expressing the effect, 478 a): 
Ei ris τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ κακὸν ποιήσειεν αὐτόν, if any one had done him any good 
or evil, i. 9.11. ᾿Αποτίσασθαι δίκην ἐχθρούς, to wreak vengeance on his 
foes, Kur. Heracl. 852. Ὅταν... ἀλλήλους τὰ ἔσχατα λέγωσιν, when they 
say the worst things of each other, Mem. 2. 2. 9. 

c.) Two ΟΒΥΈΟΥΒ differently related, but which are both regarded as 
DIRECT ; as with verbs of asking and requiring, of clothing and unclothing, 
of concealing and depriving, of persuading and teaching, &c.: Κῦρον αἰτεῖν 
πλοῖα, to ask vessels of Cyrus, or to ask Cyrus for vessels, i. 3. 14. Tov 
δῆμον ὑμῶν χλαῖναν ἤμπισχον, they clad your people in a mantle, Ar. Lys. 
1156. Myro με κρύψῃς τοῦτο, do not hide this from me, Aisch. Pr. 625. 
“Huds δὲ ἀποστερεῖ τὸν μισθόν, but us he robs of our pay, vii. 6.9. Σὲ 
διδάσκειν τὴν στρατηγίαν, to teach you the military art, Mem. 3. 1. 5. 


256 SYNTAX. R. XXII., &C. — ACCUSATIVE. § 481. 


mm. ACCUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION. 


481. Rute XXII. The Accusative is used in 
specifying to what PART, PROPERTY, &c., a word or 
expression applies : | : 


The force of this Acc. is expressed in Eng. by as to (κατά, secundum), 
though other forms of translation are more frequent : Tw χεῖρε δεδεμένον, 
[bound as to the hands] with his hands bound, vi. 1. 8. Ποταμὸς, Κύδνος 
ὄνομα, εὖρος δύο πλέθρων, awriver, Cydnus by name, two plethra in breadth, 
i. 2. 23. Tdvra κράτιστος, best in every thing, i. 9. 2 (cf. 416 Ὁ). 

a. When a verb is in this way followed by two accusatives, the con- 
struction (which is most frequent in Epic poetry) may be often referred to 
partitive apposition : Tévye. . Ala ὀστέα θυμός T. 406. See 395 b. ; 

b. An Ace. of specification sometimes introduces a sentence : Τὰ μὲν 
γὰρ παρελθόντα, ὑμεῖς μὲν Kipov niéjoare, as to the past, you have exalted 
C., Cyr. 8. 6. 23. Τοὺς ἀγρονόμους τούτους, . . ὀνείδη φερίσθωσαν Pl. Leg. 


Iv. ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT. 


482. τι XXIII. Extent oF TIME oR 
SPACE is put in the Accusative : as, 


a. TIME: “Epewev ἡμέρας ἑπτά, mansit dies septem, he remained 
[through] seven days, i. 2. 6. ᾿Εδάκρῦε πολὺν χρόνον, he wept a long time, 
i, 8. 2. Ἔπλεον ἡμέραν καὶ νύκτα vi. 1. 14. Evtkoow ἔτη γεγονώς, viginti 
annos natus, twenty years old, Mem. 3. 6. 1. Ὃς τέθνηκε ταῦτα τρία ἔτη, 
‘these three years,’ Lys. 109. 12. (Ὁ) So sometimes repeated time, as 
implying extent: Τὴν ὥρην ἐπαγινέειν σφι alyas, to bring them goats at 
the proper hour (each day), Hdt. 2. 2. (c) In stating a period ending with 
the present, an ordinal number is often used: "Evarny ἡμέραν yeyaunue- 
νην, having been married [the ninth day] nine days, iv. 5. 24. 

d. Space: ᾿Εξελαύνει διὰ Φρυγίας σταθμὸν ἕνα, παρασάγγας ὀκτώ, he 
advances through P. one day’s-march, eight parasangs, i. 2. 6. Μυρίας 
ἔμεγε κατὰ γῆς ὀργυιὰς γενέσθαι, that I may be 10,000 fathoms under 
ground, vii. 1. 30. Τὸ βέλος αὐτῶν καὶ διπλάσιον [sc. διάστημα] φέρεσθαι, 
that their missile is sent double the distance, ili. 3. 16. 

e. In the simple designation of time and place, the GENITIVE common- 
ly expresses the time and place im which (433), the DATIVE, at which 
(469), and the AccusaTIVE, through which ; the Gen. and Acc. differing 
like ὧν and through, but both containing the idea of extension ; the Dat., 
like af, not containing this idea, but simply presenting the when or where 
as if a point in time or space. To some extent, however, the offices of the 
cases blend with each other ; and the more on account of their generic 
uses. See 48 6. 


v. ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE. 


483. Rute XXIV. The Accusative is often 
used ADVERBIALLY, to express degree, manner, order, 
&c.: as, | 


§ 485. OF SPECIFIOATION, EXTENT, ὅσ. VOCATIVE. 257 


Τόνδε τὸν τρόπον, in this way, or thus, i. 1.9. Κίρκην . . μιμήσομαε 
πάντας τρόπους, ‘every way,’ Ar. Pl. 302. Tédos δὲ εἶπε, [at the end] 
Jinally he said, ii. 3. 26. ᾿Αρχὴν μὴ πλουτῆσαι, ‘in the first place,’ ‘ at 
all (with negatives),’ vii. 7. 28. ᾿Εἰμὴν χάριν, for my sake, Eur. Hec. 874. 

a. This rule applies especially to the Acc. neut. of adjectives, both sing. 
and plur.: Td ἀρχαῖον, formerly, i. 1.6. Ta pév.., τὰ δὲ, partly. ., 
partly, iv. 1.14. Μικρὸν ἐξέφνγε τὸ μὴ καταπετρωθῆναι i. 3. 2. 

b. An Acc. neut. pronoun is sometimes used to denote that on account 
of which something is done (especially an end in view) : Ταῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ ἔσπευ- 
δον, [on account of these things] therefore I made haste, iv. 1. 21. ἽΑ δ᾽ 
ἦλθον, what I came for, Soph. O. C. 1291. Τί τὰ πυρὰ κατασβέσειαν, 
‘why,’ vi. 3. 25. (ὦ So with χρῆμα, thing, expressed: Tt χρῆμα κεῖσαι ; 
why do you lie there ? Eur. Heracl. 633. 

ἃ. An adjective may be used adverbially in the Acc. fem., with an . 
ellipsis of ὁδόν way, or ὥραν season: Συντάττεσθαι τὴν ταχίστην, to form 
[in the quickest way] immediately, i. 3. 14. Τὴν πρώτην τρέχειν χρή, we 
must first run, Ar. Th. 662. So μακράν a long way, &e. . 


F. Tue Vocative. 


484. Rurm XXV. The Comprnnative of a 
sentence is put in the Vocative. 


a. The usual sign of address, in Greek, a8 in so many lan- 
guages, is ὦ. It is commonly employed in prose, except (b) in 
abrupt or familiar address ; and (0) is frequent in poetry. (d) 
It is commonly followed by the emphatic word in the address, 
unless (e) this has already preceded ; and is (f) sometimes 
doubled for special emphasis. 

(a) Ὦ Parive, θαυμάζω, O Phalinus, I wonder, ii. 1.10. (Ὁ) Κλέαρχε 
καὶ II pdgeve, . . οὐκ ἴστε ὅ τι ποιεῖτε, Clearchus and Proxenus, you know not 
what you do, i. 5. 16. (ὁ) Ὦ ᾿Αχιλεῦ A. 74. (4) Ὦ θαυμασιώτατε ἄνθρω- 
πε, O most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. Ὦ κάκιστε ἀνθρώπων ᾿Αριαῖε ii. 5. 
39. (6) Θαυμάσι᾽ ὦ Κρίτων Pl. (f) ἾὮ τέκνον ὦ γενναῖον Soph. Ph. 799. 

g. The term of respectful address to ἃ company of men is ἄνδρες, with 
which may be likewise connected a more specific appellation : ‘Opare μὲν, 
ὦ ἄνδρες, you see, gentlemen, iii. 2. 4. “Avdpes στρατιῶται, i. 3. 3. 


REMARKS ON THE CASES. 


485. It is important to distinguish not only the specific 
offices of the cases, but also their generic uses. Thus, 


a. The Nom. is the generic case for substantives independent of gram- 
matical construction (401) ; while the Voce. is the specific case for address, 
and the other cases are also used in exclamations (429 e, f, 453, 476.a). — 
Hence the union of the Nom. and Voce. is not deemed a violation of the 
laws of agreement. An appositive with a Voc. is usually in the Nom. 

b. The Gen. is the generic case for the adjuncts of substantives, adjec- 
tives, and adverbs ; and thus may even express direct or indirect objects, 
more specifically expressed by the Acc. or Dat. (435, 444). 

c. The Dat. is the generic case for a thing or circumstance simply 
‘viewed as an accompaniment (465). 


COMP. GR. Q 


258 SYNTAX. —- REMARKS ON THE CASES. § 485. 


d. The Acc. is the generic case for the adjuncts of verbs, and thus ex- 
presses much which is also expressed by the Dat. or Gen. (472a, b). It 
often expresses as simple object, what is expressed by the Dat. as the object 
of approach or influence, or by the Gen. as the point of departure or the 
cause: ᾿Αφαιρεῖσθαι τοὺς ἐνοικοῦντας “Εϊλληνας τὴν γῆν, to deprive the Greek 
inhabitants of their land (480 c), i. 8. 4 ; Ὃ τοῖσιν ἀφείλετο νόστιμον ἦμαρ 
(463) ; Τῶν ἄλλων ἀφαιρούμενοι χρήματα, taking money from others (405), 
Mem. 1.5.3. Also, with a Gen. of the thing, or with a preposition (487), 
᾿Αφαιροῦνται... abrods δὲ τῆς ὠφελείας, deprive themselves of the benefit, 
Ven. 6.4; “Awd τῆς ὀργῆς τὴν ἀκαλήφην ἀφελέσθαι, to take away the nettle 
Srom his temper, Ar. Vesp. 883 (with ἐκ, Ven. 12. 9). So the Acc. of effect 
may be supplied by another case: ᾿Ακίνδῦνον βίον fGuer (477. 1). Ζῶσαν 
ἀβλαβεῖ βίῳ, living with unharmed life (modal Dat., 467), Soph. El. 650. 

e. If ἃ circumstance is merely viewed as modifying a verb, it is put in 
the Acc.; if simply viewed as an accompaniment, in the Dat.; but if 
viewed as having some causal relation, in the Gen. These differences of 
view, and the prevalence of different analogies, have led to much variety 
of construction. Thus, (a) MANNER: Τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον vi. 5. 6, To αὐτῷ 
τρόπῳ iv. 2. 13, in the same manner (488, 467). (8) MEASURE OF DIF- 
FERENCE : Θυμοειδέστεροι δὲ πολύ, much more spirited (483), iv. 5. 36 ; 
TIoAA@ δὲ ὕστερον (468) ; Τοσοῦτον i. 8. 13; Τοσούτῳ 1. 5.9. (y) RE- 
spect: Πλῆθος ὡς δισχίλιοι, about 2,000 in number, iv. 2.2; Κύδνος 
ὄνομα (481); Πλήθει... λειφθέντες, Θάψακος ὀνόματι (467 b); Newraros 
.. γόνοιο (446 ; cf. 418). (8) Parr AFFECTED: Τὼ χεῖρε δεδεμένον 
(481) ; Vavew χειρός, to take by the hand (426 ἃ). (ὁ Time: Τὸ λοιπόν 
ii. 2. 5, Tot λοιποῦ (433 a), afterwards; Τέλος, at last (483) ; Χρόνῳ 
ποτὲ εἶπεν, [with time] at length he said, Hel. 4. 1. 84. (Ὁ Cause: 
Totr’ ἐφικόμην, on this account I came (483 Ὁ), Soph. O. T. 1005 ; Totrov 
σε. . ζηλῶ (429 a) ; Τῷ, wherefore (466). 


486. The construction belonging to a word in its primary sense and 
form (a) is extensively retained in figurative or secondary senses, and in 
composition (414 ο, 427, 482 g, &c.) ; but (Ὁ) is often changed to another 
more appropriate. Thus, (c) many verbs become transitive through a sec- 
ondary sense, or through composition with a preposition, even though the 
preposition may not itself govern the Acc.: Κίνδῦνον ἐξέστησαν, they 
shrunk from danger, Dem. 460. 2. In the same way, (d) other verbs from 
transitive become intransitive : Olkrw ἐνδῶτε, you may [give in] yield to 
pity, Th. 3. 37. 


487. a. Most of the relations expressed by the cases may be more 
definitely expressed by the aid of prepositions. This definiteness was 
naturally more sought in prose than in poetry, and more in the later than 
in the earlier Greek. 

b. The use of a preposition, or of one case rather than another, often 
avoids ambiguity, or distinguishes from other adjuncts, or gives emphasis, 
or favors the metre, or promotes euphony, &c. ὃ 


III. USE OF THE NUMBERS, GENDERS, AND PERSONS. 


488. Novumpers. 1. The Srveunar is sometimes used for 
the Plural in the Greek, as in other languages, to give to the 
‘expression greater individuality or unity : Tov Ἕλληνα, the Greek 
(= the Greeks), Hdt. 1. 69. Τὸν πολέμιον, the enemy, Th. 5. 9. 
Ἕρπει δάκρυον ὀμμάτων amo, the tear trickles from my eyes, Soph. 


§ 491. NUMBERS AND GENDERS. 259 


a. A chorus, from its unity and the action of the coryphwus as its rep- 
resentative, is more fre πα τὰ denoted by the singular (sometimes inter- 
changed with the plural) : “Hpiv μὲν ἤδη πᾶν τετόξευται βέλος, μένω δέ, 
every shaft has now been shot by us, and 1 watt, isch. Eum. 676. ᾿ 

c. Some imperatives, used like interjections, are singular, though more 
than one are addressed : "Aye δὴ, ἀκούσατε, Come now, hear, Apol. 14. 

ἃ. In Greek, as in Eng., some nouns related individually to more than 
one, may be either singular or plural: Κράτιστοι.. τὴν ψυχήν, strongest 
in heart, Th. 2. 40 (or ras ψυχάς, in their hearts ; cf. Mem. 4. 1. 2). 


489. 2. The use of the Piurat for the Singular is particular- 
ly frequent in Greek, especially in abstract nouns, in neuter ad- 
jectives used substantively, in the names of things composed of 
distinct parts, and in vague expressions for persons or things. 


Ψύχη καὶ θάλπη καὶ πόνους φέρειν, to endure cold, and heat, and labor 
[in repeated instances], iii. 1. 23. Ta δεξιὰ τοῦ κέρατος, the right [portions 
of the wing, i. 8. 4. Ta Συεννέσιος βασίλεια, the palace [royal buildings 
of Syennesis, i. 2. 23. Rv τοῖσδε τόξοις, with this bow. 

b. An individual sometimes speaks of himself in the plural (with which 
the sing. may be combined), as if others were associated with him, especially 
in poetry ; and (c) a woman speaking of herself in this indefinite way, uses 
the masculine of the plur., as the generic gender (490 b) : (Ὁ) Αἰδούμεθα 
γὰρ τὰ λελεγμένα por, J am ashamed of what I have said, Kur. Hipp. 244. 
Ταῦτα πειρασόμεθα διηγήσασθαι, these things we will endeavor to relate (the 
author’s plural), Cyr. 1.1.6. (c) Ἡμεῖς κτενοῦμεν, οἵπερ ἐξεφύσαμεν, I will 
slay, who bore them, Id. Med. 1241. 

d. The plural for the sing. in neuter adjectives used substantively is 
especially frequent in their appositive use, in adjective pronouns, and in 
verbals in -réos and -τός - Ὅταν μέν τι ἀγαθὸν ἔχωσι, παρακαλοῦσί με ἐπὶ 
ταῦτα, whenever they have anything good, they invite me to [these things] 
this, Symp. 4. ὅθ. Πάτροκλος, ὅς σοι πατρὸς qv τὰ φίλτατα, P., who was 
thy father's best-beloved, Soph. Ods οὐ wapadoréa τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐστίν Th. 


490. ΟἜΝΡΕΒΒ. 1. The Mascurine is the generic gender 
for persons as such ; and hence is not only used when males are 
included, but even for females only in some indefinite or general 
forms of expression (489 ὁ). See Mem. 2. 7. 2 5. 


a. Where there are different forms for the two sexes, the masc. is also 
the form common to both : Οἱ καλοί, the beautiful (whether men or women). 

Ὁ. When the mase. is applied to a woman, the expression becomes still 
more indefinite if the plural is used : Ξὺν ots 7 οὐ χρῆν μ᾽ ὁμιλῶν, consort- 
ing with those |= her] with whom I ought not, Soph. O. T. 1184. 


491. 2. The Neurer is the generic gender for objects of 
thought considered without respect to personality (simply as 
things) ; and hence may even apply to persons so considered. 


a. Infinitives, clauses used substantively, and words or phrases spoken of 
as such, ave naturally regarded as neuter: Οὐ τὸ ζῆν περὶ πλείστου ποιη- 
τέον, ἀλλὰ τὸ εὖ ζῆν, not TO LIVE és to be valued most highly, but TO LIVE 
WELL, Pl. Crito 48 Ὁ. Δῆλον ἢν ὅτι ἐγγύς που βασιλεὺς ἣν, it was evident 
that the king was somewhere near, ii. 3.6. Td MH καὶ τὸ OT προτιθέ- 
μενα, the NoT and the No prefixed, Pl. Soph. 257 b. 


260 SYNTAX, R. J.— AGREEMENT, § 491. 


b. So clauses, phrases, or words, not used substantively, are accounted 
as neuter in any reference that may be made to them : ᾿Εἰνηδρεύσαμεν, 
ὅπερ ἡμᾶς καὶ ἀναπνεῦσαι ἐποίησε, we ambushed, which enabled us to take 
breath, iv. 1. 22. Φρόνιμός τε καὶ ἀγαθὸς ὁ ἄδικος, ὁ δὲ δίκαιος οὐδέτερ 
the unjust man is both wise and good, and the just man neither of these, Pl. 

ec, As infinitives and clauses so often want strict singleness of concep- 
tion and even of form, attributes and pronouns referring to them are often 
plural (489 a) : ᾿Αδύνατα ἣν ἐπιχειρεῖν, it was impossible to undertake, Th. 
1. 125. ᾿Εβοήθησαν τῇ Λακεδαίμονι, καὶ ταῦτα [sc. ἐποίησαν] εἰδότες, they 
aided L., and that [they did] knowing, Ages. 1. 88. 


” 
AGREEMENT IN NuMBER, GENDER, &c. 


492. The following table presents, for comparison, the gen- 
eral rules of agreement : . 


An APPOSITIVE ) agrees CASE. 
An ADJECTIVE with ) GENDER, Numper, and Case. 
A PRoNoUN its sub- ) GENDER, NuMBER, - and PERSON. 
A VERB ject in NUMBER, - and PERSON. 


a. These rules have the same general foundation, aud to a great extent 
the same modifications and exceptions. 


b. The agreement of an attribute with its subject is far less strict than 
that of an epithet ; and the agreement of the pronoun is still less strict. 
c. The use of the masculine form as feminine in adjectives and pro- 


nouns of three terminations (234 d, e) is not to be regarded as an excep- 
tion to the laws of agreement. 


493. Ruiz J. Agreement is commonly according to form, 
but often rather according to sense. See 70 p. 


494. 1. The Dvat and Puurat, as different modes of de- 
noting two (178), very often agree with each other, or are 
interchanged : 

Παῖδες δύο two children, τὼ παῖδε the two children, i. 1.1. Τῶν ἀνδρῶν 
Vi. 6. 29, τὼ dvdpe-30, rods ἄνδρας, . . τούτων, . . τὼ ἄνδρε 31, &e. Προσ- 
ἔτρεχον δύο νεανίσκω, two young men came running up, lv. 3. 10. Ἐγε- 
Aacdrny οὖν ἄμφω βλέψαντες eis ἀλλήλω, both laughed, looking, éc., Pl. 

a. In the old poetic language, a few passages occur in which the Dual 
appears to retain its application to more than two (186g, 271¢): Ξάνθε τε 
καὶ σύ, ἸΤόδαργε, καὶ Αἴθων Adurre τε δῖε, viv wo. . ἀποτίνετον Θ. 185. 


495. 2. In compounp construction, both syllepsis and 
zeugma are common. See 68 f. 


496. In syuxpsis, (a) the combined number may be the 
dual, if only two are spoken of; but is otherwise the plural 
(with an exception in the verb, 569 b).— (b) For persons of 
both sexes, the combined gender is the masculine (490) ; (c) for 
things, or persons and things,* it is the neuter (though it may 


* Classed together as objects of thought (491). Zeugma, however, is 
here more common. 


§ 499. COMPOUND CONSTRUCTION, SYNESIS. 261 


be another gender, if all the subjects agree in that). — (4) The 
combined person, as in Lat. and Eng., is the jirst, if that is in- 
cluded in the subjects ; the second, if that is included and not 
the first ; but otherwise the third. Thus, 

(a) Σωκράτει δμιλητὰ γενομένω Κριτίας τε καὶ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης πλεῖστα κακὰ 
τὴν πόλιν ἐποιησάτην, C. and A., who had been associates of S., brought 
very many evils upon the city, Mem. 1. 2.12. ᾿Απολελοίπασιν ἡμᾶς Ξενίας 
καὶ Πασίων, X. and P. have left us, i. 4. 8. (Ὁ) Hide πατέρα τε καὶ μητέρα 
καὶ ἀδελφοὺς καὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα αἰχμαλώτους γεγενημένους, he saw fa- 
ther, and mother, and brothers, and his own wife taken captive, Cyr. 3. 1. 6. 
(c) Πλίνθοι καὶ ξύλα καὶ κέραμος ἀτάκτως μὲν ἐῤῥιμμένα οὐδὲν χρήσιμά ἐστιν, 
bricks, wood, and tiles, thrown together in confusion, wre of no use, Mem. ὃ. 
1. 7. (d) ᾿Εγὼ καὶ σφὼ... πεπλήγμεθα, I and you both are smitten, Kur. 
Alc. 404. Οὐ od μόνος οὐδὲ of σοὶ φίλοι. . ἔσχετε Pl. Leg. 888 b. 

e. Syllepsis is sometimes found, where the relation of the subjects to 
each other is disjunctive: Ei δέ K Αρης ἄρχωσι μάχης ἢ Φοῖβος T. 138. 


497. In zevema, the agreement is sometimes with the most 
prominent substantive, sometimes with the nearest : as, 


Βασιλεὺς δὲ καὶ of σὺν αὐτῷ διώκων εἰσπίπτει, the king and those with 
him, pursuing, attack, i. 10. 1 (cf. διαρπάζουσι 2). ᾿Απαλλαγέντες πολέμων 
καὶ κινδύνων καὶ ταραχῆς, els ἦν... καθέσταμεν, delivered from the wars, 
perils, and trouble, in which we are now involved, Isoc. 163 b. 

a. Zeugma is the common construction of the adjective used as an 
epithet. It is least frequent in the pronoun. 

b. In the construction of the verb, zeugma is especially frequent when 
the verb precedes or directly follows the first subject : Κύρου ἀποτέμνεται 
ἡ κεφαλὴ καὶ χεὶρ ἡ δεξιά, the head of C. is cut off, and the right hand, 
i. 10.1. Σύ τε yap Ἕλλην εἶ καὶ ἡμεῖς, for you are a Greek, and we also. 


498. 3. Synesis. The agreement is sometimes with a 
subject umplied in another word, especially a Genitive implied in 
an adjective (commonly a possessive) : 


Td σὸν [= σοῦ] id δώρημα, tuum solius donum, [your gift alone] the 
gift of you alone, Soph. Tr. 775. Tawa [= ἐμοῦ] δυστήνου κακά, the ills 
of wretched me, Id. O. C. 344. Τῆς ἐμῆς ἐπεισόδου, ὃν μήτ᾽ ὀκνεῖτε, of my 
approach, whom do not fear, Ib. 730. Τοῖς ἡμετέροις [= ἡμῶν] αὐτῶν φί- 
λοις, our own friends, vii. 1. 29. 


499. 4. Words may also agree according to sense, 


a.) With Collective Nouns, and other words used collectively : Td πλῆ- 
Bos ἐψηφίσαντο, the majority voted, Th. 1. 125. See f. . 

b.) With the plural used as singular (especially ἡμεῖς for ἐγώ) ; and 
with the singular used as plural, or so modified as to render the idea plu- 
ral: ΠΠεπόνθαμεν,  . . κενὴν κατέσχον ἐλπίδα, we have suffered, [yes 1] who 
cherished a vain hope, Kur. Iph. A. 985 (see 489 b). Δημοσθένης μετὰ τῶν 
fvotpatnyav... σπένδονται, 7). with his colleagues makes a truce, Th. 3.109. 

c.) Nouns figuratively used to denote persons, and others in which the 
gender does not follow the sex: Τόδ᾽ ἔρνος... κατθανόντα, this scion [son] 
slain, Eur, Bac. 1307. Medéa ψυχὰ, 8s. . ἥσθη Soph. Ὦ φίλτατ᾽, ὦ περισ- 
σὰ τιμηθεὶς τέκνον, O dearest, O most fondly cherished son, Eur. Tro..735. 

d.) With a noun forming a periphrasis with a genitive or adjective : 
Φίλτατ᾽ Αἰγίσθου Bia, dearest majesty of At., Asch. Ch. 893. ᾿Ελθὼν nih 
βίη ‘Hpaxreln, the mighty Hercules coming, A. 690. 


262 SYNTAX. ΒΕ. XXVIL, XXVII.— ATTRACTION, ac. § 499. 


e.) In general, with words for which others might have been used, or 
with which others are implied (as inhabitants with places, crews with ves- 
sels, troops with commanders, &c.): Πᾶσα δὲ γέννα [= λαός] Φρυγῶν .". 
δώσων, the whole race of the Phrygians, about to offer, Eur. Tro. 531. Φεύ- 
yer. . ἐς Κέρκῦραν, ὧν αὐτῶν εὐεργέτης, he flees to Corcyra, being a benefactor 
of theirs, Th. 1. 186. Πεντήκοντα τριήρεις . . οὐκ εἰδότες Ib. 110. 

f. A double construction sometimes occurs, chiefly with intervening 
words. Thus, a collective noun may take a singular with reference to the 
united whole, and then a plural with reference to the individuals compos- 
ing that whole ; &c.: Ἡ δὲ βουλὴ ἡσυχίαν εἶχεν, ὁρῶσα... ., καὶ οὐκ &yvo- 
οὔντες, the senate remained quiet, seeing. ., and not ignorant, Hel. 2. 3. 55. 


500. 5. Arrraction. An appositive often attracts from 
the regular form of agreement: 

Td μέσον τῶν τειχῶν ἦσαν στάδιοι τρεῖς, the distance between the walls 
was three stadia, i. 4.4. ‘Ent widas: .. ἦσαν δὲ ταῦτα (for αὗται) δύο τείχη, 
to the gates ; now these were two walls, i. 4. 4. 

a. This construction occurs chiefly where the true subject is more 
remote or in a different clause ; and might be often referred to ellipsis or 
inversion : “Eorias, οὗ (sc. χωρίου] οὔτε ὁσιώτερον χωρίον, the hearth, than 
which [spot] there is no holier spot, Cyr. 7. 5. 56° δ 

b. The attraction is sometimes from an appositive te its subject : Ἥλιος 
.. πάντων λαμπρότατος, the sun, the brightest (sc. thing] of all things, 
Mem. 4. 7. 8 (where the more regular λαμπρότατον, in the gender of the 
Gen. partitive, might also have been used). Indus fluminum maximus. 

c. A word is sometimes attracted from its true subject by a noun gov- 
erning the latter, chiefly in the poets: Tdde νεῖκος ἀνδρῶν ξύναιμον [for 
ξυναίμων), this [kindred strife] strife of kindred men, Soph. Ant. 793. 

501. 6. CHance or Number. The number is often changed 
for the sake of individualizing or generalizing the expression, 
especially when a distributive or indefinite pronoun is used : 

ἤΑΛλλους δ᾽ ἐκέλευε λέγειν, διὰ τί ἕκαστος ἐπλήγη, he bade the rest say, 
on what account each one had been struck, v. 8.12. Ἢν δέ τις τούτων τι 
παραβαίνει, ζημίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπέθεσαν, if any one transgresses any of these 
laws, they have set a penalty for [them] him, Cyr. 1. 2. 2. 

a. When the subject is divided or distributed, the verb sometimes agrees 
with the whole, and sometimes with one of the parts: “On ἐδύναντο ἕκα- 
oros, where they each could, iv. 2.12. ᾿Ανεπαύοντο δὲ, ὅπου ἐτύγχανεν 
ἕκαστος, they rested where each one happened to be, iii. 1. 3. 

502. 7. NEUTER ADJECTIVES are used in connection with 
words of different gender and number (commonly as apposi- 
tives ; cf. 489 d, 491): 

Φοβερώτατον δ᾽ ἐρημία, solitude is the most terrible thing, ii. 5. 9 (cf. 
=uuBovdy ἱερὸν χρῆμα Pl. Theag. 122 b). “Eyovye φίλτατον πόλις, to me 
the state is the dearest olject, Kur. Med. 329. Τί οὖν ταῦτα ἐστίν ; what 
then [are these things] is this? ii. 1. 22. 


503. 8. A CHANGE OF PERSON sometimes takes place, 

a.) From the union of direct and indirect modes of speaking, especially 
in quotation : “Ayour’ ἂν μάταιον ἄνδρ᾽ ἐκποδὼν, ὃς. . κάκτανον, take out of 
the way a senseless man, me, who have slain, Soph. Ant. 1339. 

Ὁ.) From a speaker's addressing a company, now as one with them, and 
now as distinct from them: AavOdvew ὑμᾶς εἰς ὅσην ταραχὴν 7 πόλις ἡμῶν 
καθέστηκεν" ξοίκατε yap .., οἵτινες τεθύκαμεν Isoc, 141d. 


§506.° ADJECTIVE AND PRONOUN. 263 


CHAPTER II. 
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE AND PRONOUN. 


I. AGREEMENT. 


(See 492s: for the union of the Dual and Plural, 494 ; for Compound 
Construction, 495s; for Synesis, 498s ; for Attraction, 500; for change 
of Number and Person, 501 s.) 


504. Rute XXVI. An ApdJEcTIVE agrees with 
its subject in gender, number, and case. 


a. The word adjective is here used in its largest sense (173): Παράδεισος 
μέγας ἀγρίων θηρίων πλήρης, a large park full of wild beasts, i. 2.7. ἸΙόλιν 
οἰκουμένην, μεγάλην καὶ εὐδαίμονα, an inhabited city, large and flourishing, 
Ib. Te παῖδε ἀμφοτέρω, both the children, i. 1.1. ἸΤοξότας Κρῆτας δια- 
κοσίους, 200 Cretan archers, i. 2.9. Ταύτην τὴν πόλιν Ib. 24. 

b. ANACOLUTHON. An adjective sometimes differs in case from its sub- 
ject, through a change of construction. This occurs chiefly in the pariiciple, 
as less closely joined to the subject, and especially with intervening 
words : [ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς [= ἐψηφίσαντο) . ., érixadotvres, it seemed best to 
them [they voted], alleging, Th. 3. 36. Αἰδώς μ᾽ ἔχει [= αἰδοῦμαι) ἐν ἡ 
τῷδε πότμῳ τυγχάνουσα, I am ashamed, being in this state, Eur. Hec. 970. 


505. Rute XXVII. A Pronovn agrees with 
its subject in gender, number, and person. 


a. By the subject of a pronoun is meant the substantive which it repre- 
sents. The rule, therefore, has respect either to substantive pronouns, or to 
adjective pronouns used substantively: Βασιλεὺς τῆς μὲν πρὸς ἑαυτὸν 
[i. 6. βασιλέα) ἐπιβουλῆς οὐκ ἠσθάνετο, the king did not perceive the plot 
against himself, i. 1. 8. ᾿Απὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς, ἧς [sc. ἀρχῆς] αὐτὸν σατράπην 
ἐποίησε, from the government, of which [government] he had made him 
satrap, Ib. 2. Πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφὸν, ws ἐπιβουλεύοι αὐτῷ. Ὃ dé πείθεται, Ib. 8. 

b. A pronoun, for the sake of perspicuity or emphasis, is often used in 
anticipation or repetition of its subject, or is itself repeated : Ketvo κάλλτον, 
τέκνον, ἰσότητα τιμᾶν, that is nobler, my son, to honor equality, Eur. Ph. 
535. Βασιλέα... det αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι ii. 4. 7. Οἷμαι δέ σοι... ἔχειν ἂν ἐπιδεῖ- 
gai σοι (Ec. 8. 16. (0) Intervening clauses often lead to this repetition. 

d. Homer often uses the personal pron. οὗ, with its noun following: 
Ἥ pw ἔγειρεν Ναυσικάαν εὔπεπλον, who aroused [her] the well-clad N. 


II. OBSERVATIONS ON THE ADJECTIVE. 


506. 1. Exupsis. The subject of the adjective is often 
omitted, especially if it is a familiar word, or supplied by the 
context. The words most frequently omitted are, 

a.) MASCULINE, ἀνήρ or ἄνθρωπος, man, χρόνος time: Συντάξαι δὲ ἕκα- 
στον τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ [sc. ἄνδρας], that each one should arrange his own [men], 
i, 2.15. Cf. ἐν τούτῳ i. 10. 6, and ἐν τούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ iv. 2. 17. 

Ὁ.) FEMININE, γυνή woman, γῆ or χώρα, land, 686s way, ἡμέρα day, 
χείρ hand, γνώμη opinion, μοῖρα portion, τέχνη art, ὥρα season: Ἢ Ki- 


264 SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVE, § 506. 


λισσα [sc. γυνή] i. 2.12. Τὴν λοιπὴν [sc. ὁδὸν] πορευσόμεθα, we shall march 
the rest of the way, iii. 4. 46. "Ev δεξιᾷ [sc. χειρί], on the right, i. 5. 1. 

c.) NEUTER, πρᾶγμα or χρῆμα, affair, thing, μέρος part, πλῆθος col- 
lection, body, στράτευμα military force, κέρας wing of an army, Ywplov 
place, ground, γένος or εἶδος, class, sort, nature: Ta ἡμέτερα, our affairs, 
i. 3. 9 (cf. τὰ ᾿Οδρυσῶν πράγματα vii. ἃ. 32). Τὸ κοινὸν [sc. πλῆθος], the 
[public body] cowneil, v. 6. 27. Τὸ δὲ εὐώνυμον, the left wing, i. 2. 15. 

d. In cases of familiar ellipsis, the adjective is commonly said to be 
used substantively. 

e. The substantive omitted is sometimes contained or implied in an- 
other word : ᾿Αμυγδάλινον ἐκ τῶν πικρῶν [sc. ἀμυγδάλων], of almonds (the 
bitter kind), iv. 4.13. Tewpyety τὸν μὲν πολλήν |[sc. γῆν] Ar. Ecel. 592. 

f. Many words which are commonly employed as substantives are 
properly adjectives, or may be used as such: ᾿Ορόντης δὲ Πέρσης ἀνήρ, 
Orontes, a Persian man, i. 6.1. “EXAnv’ és οἶκον, to a Greek home, Eur. 
“Ἑλλάδος γῆς Soph. These words, as substantives, are commonly ap- 
pellations of persons or countries, ἀνήρ, γυνή, γῆ, &c., being understood. 


507. 2. Use or ΤῊΝ Neuter. The substantive use of the 
neuter adjective exhibits itself in a variety of forms : 


a. In the sing., a neuter adjective with the article has often the force 
of an abstract, or (b) collective noun ; while (c) the plur. rather denotes 
particulars of the kind specified : (a) Td δ᾽ ἁπλοῦν καὶ τὸ ἀληθὲς ἐνόμιζε 
τὸ αὐτὸ τῷ ἠλιθίῳ εἶναι, but [the sincere and true thing] sincerity and truth 
he thought to be the same with {the foolish] folly, ii. 6. 22. (Ὁ) Τὸ “Ἑλλη- 
νικὸν πᾶν, the whole Greek race, Hdt. 7. 139.. Neuters in -ἰκόν are espe- 
cially so used. (c) Τὰ... “Ἑλληνικά, the Affairs of Greece, Th. 1. 97. 

d. Neuter adjectives (both with and without the article) are used with 
prepositions to form many adverbial phrases : "Ἐν ye τῷ φανερῷ, openly, i. 
3. 21. Διὰ ταχέων, rapidly, i. 5.9. Διὰ παντός, throughout, vii. 8. 11. 

6. The neuters πλεῖον or πλέον, μεῖον or ἔλαττον, ὅσον, μηδέν, and τὶ 
are sometimes used as indeclinable adjectives or substantives ; and (f) from 
this, sometimes pass into an adverbial use: Mupiddas πλεῖον ἢ δώδεκα, 
myriads more than twelve in number, v. 6. 9 (cf. Κρῆτες πλείους ἢ ἑξήκοντα 
iv. 8.27). ἽΑλυν, οὐ μεῖον δυοῖν σταδίοιν, the H., not less than two siadia in 
breadth, v. 6.9. ᾿Αποκτείνουσι τῶν ἀνδρῶν οὐ μεῖον πεντακοσίους, non minus 
quingentos, vi. 4. 24. Πελτασταὶ ὅσον [-- τοσοῦτοι ὅσοι] διακόσιοι, targeteers 
as many as (or about) 200, vii. 2. 20. ᾿Απέχοι ὅσον παρασάγγην, ‘about a 
parasang,’ iv. 5. 10. Kpeloow τῶν τὸ μηδὲν, better than those that are noth- 
ing, Eur. Δοκούντων εἶναι τί, appearing to be something, Pl. 


508. 3. An adjective (a) sometimes agrees with a substan- 
tive, instead of governing it in the Genitive partitive ; and (Ὁ) 
often so governs it, instead of agreeing with it. In the latter 
construction, the adjective is either in the same gender with the 
substantive, or else in the neuter (commonly the neut. sing.). 

(a) Περὶ μέσας νύκτας, about midnight [the middle of the night], i. 7. 1 
(cf. ἐν μέσῳ νυκτῶν Cyr. 5. 3. 52). «Διὰ μέσης δὲ τῆς πόλεως, per urbem me- 
diam, i. 2. 23. Τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα, the rest of the army, Ib. 25. 

(Ὁ) Μηδὲ τὰ σπουδαῖα τῶν πραγμάτων [for πράγματα], μηδὲ τοὺς εὖ φρο- 
νοῦντας τῶν ἀνθρώπων [for ἀνθρώπους], neither virtuous actions [the virtu- 
ous of actions], nor wise men [the wise of men], Isoc. 24d. Aapapd- 
τητός τι, [something of distinction] some distinction, Th. 7. 69. 


δ 511. USE OF DEGREES. - 265 


509. 4. Adjectives are often used for adverbs and adjuncts, 
and; by the poets, even for appositives, and dependent clauses ; 
to express, 


a.) Time: IIporépa Κύρου... ἀφίκετο, she arrived before C., i. 2. 25. 

b.) PLACE: Σκηνοῦμεν ὑπαίθριοι [= ὑπὸ τῆς αἰθρίας iv. 4. 14], we en- 
camp in the open air, v. 5.21. So demonstrative pronouns (especially ὅδε 
in poetry) : Πολλὰ δ᾽ ὁρῶ ταῦτα | = ταύτῃ, 469 Ὁ], πρόβατα, I sce here many 
sheep, iil. 5. 9. Ὥς ἁνὴρ ὅδε, as the man is here, Soph. O. Ὁ. 32. 

c.) MANNER: ZuveBdddovTo . . πόλεις ἑκοῦσαι, cities contributed will- 
ingly, i. 1.9. Eérovro ἄσμενοι, sequebantur leti, vii. 2. 9. 

4.) Errect: Εἰὔφημον | = ὥστε εὔφημον εἶναι]... κοίμησον στόμα, hush 
your mouth to silence [so that it should be silent], Aisch. Ag. 1247. 

e.) VARtIouS RELATIONS AND CIRCUMSTANCES: Ἄλλοι δὲ ἦσαν ἑξα- 
κισχίλιοι ἱππεῖς, ‘besides,’ i. 7.11. Ἐβύλιναι πεποιημέναι, made of wood, 
v. 2.5. ἹΠολύδακρυν ἁδονάν, the joy of many tears, Kur. El. 126. 

f. This use of the adjective sometimes modifies the sense. Compare 
πρῶτον τοὺς θεοὺς ἐπαινῶ, primum deos laudo, first (before doing anything 
else), I praise the gods, with πρῶτος τοὺς θεοὺς ἐπαινῶ, primus ceos laude, 
I first (before any one else) praise the gods, and πρώτους τοὺς θεοὺς ἐπαινῶ, 
primos deos laudo, J praise the cops first (before praising others). 


Ul. USE OF THE DEGREES (256s). 
(The following observations apply both to ADJECTIVES and ADVERBS.) 


510. 1. Words are compared not only by dnflection, but 
also by the use of adverbs denoting more and most : as, of 


Μᾶλλον φίλον, magis gratum, more agreeable, Soph. Ph. 886. Τοὺς μά- 
λιστα φίλους, the most friendly, vii. 8.11. Ὦ πλεῖστα μῶροι Soph. El. 1326. 
a. The two methods are sometimes united for emphasis or perspicuity 
(cf. 202 ο, 512): Θανὼν δ᾽ ἂν εἴη μᾶλλον εὐτυχέστερος ἢ ζῶν, dying he 
would be happier, far happier than living, Eur. Hee. 377. ; 


511. 2. The comparative is commonly construed with the 
particle 7, than, or with the Genitive of distinction ; and the 
SUPERLATIVE, with the Genitive partitive : as, 

Φιλοῦσα αὐτὸν μᾶλλον ἢ . . ᾿Αρταξέρξην, loving him more than A. (magis 
quam), i. 1. 4. Ἵππων θᾶττον (408). ᾿Αρίστοις ἹΠερσῶν (419 c). 

a. The Comp. is sometimes construed with other particles, which com- 
monly strengthen the expression through the union of two forms of con- 
struction (cf. 510 a): Κάλλτον.. πρὸ τοῦ φεύγειν, more honorable than to 
Jice {honorable in preference to fleeing], Pl. Phedo 99a. Πέρα τοῦ δέον- 
Tos σοφώτεροι, wiser than is proper [wise beyond what is proper], Pl. Gorg. 

b. The construction of the Gen. with the Comp. is often elliptical : 
᾿Αθλιώτερόν ἐστι μὴ ὑγιοῦς σώματος μὴ ὑγιεῖ ψυχῇ συνοικεῖν, ἐξ is more 
wretched to live with a diseased soul than [to live with] a diseased body. 

By a mixture of the two methods of construction which belong to the 
Comp., —(c) When a numeral, or other word of quantity, follows πλεῖον, 
μεῖον, or ἔλαττον, ἤ is sometimes omitted, though the Gen. is not em- 
ployed (the Comp. being now construed as an adverb) : ᾿Αποκτείνουσι τῶν 
ἀνδρῶν οὐ μεῖον πεντακοσίους, ‘not less than 500’ (507 6). (d) To the Gen. . 
governed by the Comp., a specification is sometimes annexed with 4: Τί 
τοῦδ᾽ ἂν εὕρημ᾽ εὗρον εὐτυχέστερον, ἢ παῖδα γῆμαι βασιλέως ; what happier 
Jortune could I have found than this, [than] to wed the daughter of a king? 

COMP. GR. 12 : en 


266 SYNTAX. — USE OF DEGREES. $512. 


512. 3. The positive is sometimes added to the superlative 
for the sake of emphasis : as, 
Ὦ κακῶν κάκιστε, O vilest of the vile, Soph. Ο. T. 334. 


a. By doubling the Pos. or the Sup., we obtain similar forms of expres- 
sion, the one less and the other even more emphatic than the above : 
Δειλαία δειλαίων (419 ὁ). *Eoxar ἐσχάτων κακά, Soph. Ph. 65 (cf. 262 c). 

b. From the doubling of the Sup., as in the last example, appears to 
have arisen the phrase ἐν rots, which is used to modify the Sup.; and, as 
an adverbial expression, without change of gender : ᾿Εν τοῖς [sc. πρώτοις] 
πρῶτοι, [among the first also first] among the very first, Th. 1. 6. 

6. The numeral εἷς is sometimes used with the Sup., to render the idea 
of individuality prominent : as, Δῶρα δὲ πλεῖστα . ., εἷς γε ὧν ἀνὴρ, ἐλάμ- 
Bave, he received the most presents, [at least being one man] for ἃ single in- 
dividual, i. 9. 22. Urbem unam mihi amicissimam, Cie. 


513. 4. Certain special forms of comparison deserve notice: 


a.) The Comp., with a Gen. expressing hope, duty, power of description, 
&c.: Μεῖζον ἐλπίδος, majus spe, [greater than our hope] above hope, Asch. 

b.) The Comp. followed by ἢ κατά, or sometimes ἢ πρός - as, Meifw, ἢ 
κατὰ δάκρυα (sc. ἐστιν}, [greater than is in accordance with tears] too great 
Jor tears, Th. 7. 75. (ὁ) Sometimes with an Inf. added: Meifw. . ἢ xa? 
ἐμὲ καὶ σὲ ἐξευρεῖν, too great for me and you to discover, Pl. Crat. 392 Ὁ. 

d.) The Comp. followed by ἢ ὥστε (or ds) and the Inf. (sometimes an- 
other mode): Βραχύτερα ἠκόντιζον 7) ws ἐξικνεῖσθαι, they shot [a shorter dis- 
tance, than they must that they may reach] too short a distance to reach, 
lii. 3. 7. Μεῖζον ἢ ὥστε φέρειν Mem. 3. 5.17. (e) We likewise find the 
Inf. without ὥστε or ὡς, and also the Pos. for the Comp.; Té yap νόσημα 
μεῖζον ἢ φέρειν, for the malady is too great to bear, Soph. Ταπεινὴ ὑμῶν ἡ 
διάνοια ἐγκαρτερεῖν, your mind is too weak to persevere, Th. 2. 61. 

f.) The Comp. and Sup. (for the most part joined with αὐτός) followed 
by a reflexive pronoun, to denote the comparison of an object with itself ; 
the Comp. representing it as above what it has been or would be in other 
circumstances, and the Sup. representing it as at its highest point : *Av- 
δρειότερος γίγνεται αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ, he becomes more manly [himself than him- 
self] than he was before, Pl. Rep. 411 ¢. “Iv αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ τυγχάνῃ βέλτιστος 
ὦν, where he [happens to be the best specimen of himself] can do his best, 
Eur. Ant. 20. (g) To the Comp. thus construed, ἃ specification is some- 
times annexed with ἤ (511d): Αὐτοὶ ἑαυτῶν [Oapparewrepol εἰσιν), ἐπειδὰν 
μάθωσιν, ἢ πρὶν μαθεῖν, they have themselves more confidence when they have 
learned, than they had before learning, Pl. Prot. 350 a. 

ἢ.) Zwo comparatives connected by %, to deriote that the one property 
exists in a higher degree than the other : Στρατηγοὶ πλείονες ἢ βελτίονες, 
generals more numerous than good, Ar. Ach. 1078. 

i.) The omission of μᾶλλον before ἤ : Βούλομ᾽ ἐγὼ λαὸν σόον ἔμμεναι (se. 
μᾶλλον] ἢ ἀπολέσθαι, I wish the people to be safe, rather than perish, A. 117. 


514. 5. The comparative and superlative are often used 
without an express object of comparison. In this case, the SUPER- 
LATIVE znereases the force of the positive, while the COMPARATIVE 
may either increase or diminish it, according to the object of 
comparison which is implied. Thus, 


Ὦ θαυμασιώτατε ἄνθρωπε, O most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. Τὴν ταχί- 
στην, immediately, iii. 3.16. Πλείω [sc. τοῦ δέοντος] λέλεκται, [more 


δ 517. USE OF THE ARTICLE, 267 


than is proper] too much has been said, Eur. Ale. Maxpérepov . . διηγή- 
σασθαι, it is [longer than it might be] rather long to relate, Pl. Cony. 203a. 
a. The Comp. and Sup., when used without direct comparison, are said 
to be used absolutely ; otherwise, relatively. In the former use, the Comp. 
is often translated into Eng. by the simple Pos., or by the Pos. with too 
or rather ; and the Sup. (‘‘Sup. of Eminence”), by the Pos. with very. 


515. 6. The degrees are more freely imterchanged and 
mixed, than in English. It may be however remarked in gen- 
eral, that the use of a higher degree for a lower renders the 
discourse more emphatic, and the converse, less so. Thus, 


Ταύτην μάλιστα [for πολὺ μᾶλλον) τῆς κόρης ἀσπάζεται, this she chooses 
Sar rather than the virgin, Eur. Iph. A. 1694. ᾿Αξιολογώτατον τῶν προ- 
γεγενημένων, [the most remarkable of those which had preceded it] more 
remarkable than any which had preceded it, Th. 1. 1. ᾿Ωκυμορώτατος 
ἄλλων A. 505. ᾿Ανέκραγον πάντες ws ὀλίγας [sc. πληγὰς] παίσειεν, they all 
cried out that he had given him too few blows, v. 8. 12. Θὲ πολλοί, the 
[many] most, Mem. Πολλὰ ὧν οὐ βέλτιον αὐτοῖς στέρεσθαι, ‘not well for 
them,’ Cyr. (so, especially in negation or interrogation, ἄμεινον, χεῖρον, &c.). 


. IV. USE OF THE ARTICLE. 


A. Broap User. 


516. 1. Eric. The article (6, 4, τό) appears, in the Epic 
language, as ἃ GENERAL DEFINITIVE, performing the office not 
only of an article as usually understood, but still more frequently 
of a demonstrative, personal, or relative pronoun (249 5) : as, 


Ὃ γέρων, the old man, A. 33; Τά τ᾽ ἄποινα, this ransom, 20; Td σὸν pé- 
vos, that wrath of thine, 207 ;“O yap ἦλθε, for he came, 12 ; Τόν, whom, 36. 

Norte. These uses are intimately allied, inasmuch as, — (a) The art., as 
usually understood, is simply a less emphatic form of the demonstr. pron.; 
and so, for the most part, the personal pron. of the 3 Pers. (but used as a 
substantive). Cf. ““ 7 λαΐ man whom you see,” and ““ The man whom you 
see”; ‘** Those that love me,” and ‘‘ 7’hem that love me,” Prov. 8. 17, 21. 
(B) The demonstr. pron. used connectively becomes a relative: ‘* Blessed 
are they that mourn.” = 

In Epic poetry, — (a) The article, in its proper use as such, is commonly 
not expressed. The same omission prevails to a great extent in other 
kinds of elevated poetry. (b) When used as a personal pronoun, it is most 
frequently connected with the same particles as in Attic Greek (518) ; and 
is not unfrequently followed in the same sentence by the substantive to 
which it refers : Ἡ δ᾽ ἕσπετο Παλλάς, and she, Pallas, followed, a. 125. 
Αἱ δ᾽ ἐπέμυξαν ᾿Αθηναίη τε καὶ Ἥρη A. 20. Cf. 505d. (ὦ) As a demon- 
strative, it sometimes follows its substantive before a relative : Συνθεσιάων 
τἄων, ἃς ἐπέτελλε, those instructions which he gave, E. 319. (4) The article 
when used as a personal or demonst. pron. has sometimes, from its position 
(518 f), or for the sake of the metre, the same form in the Nom. with the 
common relative : “Os yap δεύτατος ἦλθεν, for he returned last, a. 286. 


517. 2. Ionic anp Doric.’ In the later Ion. and in the 
Dor. writers, this extended use of the article was, in great 


268 SYNTAX. —- ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. $517. 


‘measure, retained. LE. g. in Hdt., the relative has in the Nom. 
sing. and pl. the forms ὅς, 7, τό, οἵ, at, τά - and has elsewhere the 
το forms of the article, except after prepositions which suffer 
elision, in the phrases of time, ἐν 6, ἐξ οὗ, ἐς 6 (or οὗ), μέχρι (or 
ἄχρι) οὗ, and in some doubtful readings. 


518. 3. Artic. The use of the article as a demonstrative 
and personal pronoun remained in Attic Greek, (a) in connec- 
tion with μέν and δέ; (Ὁ) in poetry with γάρ ; and (c) as the 
subject of a verb, after «ai, and : 


(a) Ὃ 8&[sc. ἀδελφὸς] πείθεται, and he [the brother] 5 perswaded, i. 1. 8. 
Ἔκ δὲ τῶν (the common order after a prep.) μάλιστ᾽ ἐγώ, and of them I 
most, Soph. O. C. 741. (Ὁ) Ὃ yap μέγιστος αὐτοῖς τυγχάνει δορυξένων, for 
he [Phanoteus] is the greatest of their allies, Soph. El. 46. (6) Kai τὸν 
ἀποκρίνασθαι λέγεται, und it is said that he answered, Cyr. 4. 2. 18. 

d. The article with μέν and δέ is commonly used for contradistinction, 
and we may translate ὁ pév.., 6 δέ, this. ., that, the one. ., the other, 
one. ., another, &c.: Ὃ μὲν μαίνεται, ὁ δὲ σωφρονεῖ, the one is mad, the other 
ts rational, Pl. Phieedr. 2448. Oi μὲν διώκοντες . ., of δ᾽ ἁρπάζοντες, these 
pursuing . ., and those plundering, i. 10. 4. Ἔν μὲν ἄρα rots συμφωνοῦμεν, 
ἐν δὲ τοῖς οὔ, in some things we agree, and in others not, Pl. Pheedr. 263 b. 

e. Ὁ δέ, when used as a pronoun in the Nom. (even without 6 μέν pre- 
ceding), commonly denotes a different subject from that of the preceding 
sentence. The exceptions belong especially to the Epic and Ionic. 

f. The prociitics in the nominative (δ, ἣ, οἱ, at) require, from the very 
laws of accent, that the particle, in connection with which they are used, 
should follow them. If, therefore, it precedes, they become orthotone, or, . 
in other words, take the forms which commonly belong to the relative 
pronoun (250). This change takes place with καί uniformly, and with δέ 
when it follows ἢ for ἔφη (45 u): Καὶ ὃς ἐθαύμασε, and he wondered, i. 8. 
16. Kai οἱ εἶπον vii. 6. 4. Ἦ δ᾽ ὃς, ὁ Γλαύκων, said he, i. e. Glauco, Pl. 


519. In its r- forms, this use of the article also occurs, (a) 
before the relatives és, ὅσος, and οἷος ; (Ὁ) in some special forms 
of expression ; and (c) sometimes, through poetic imitation of 
the earlier Greek ; while (4) the tragedians even give these 
forms to the relative pronoun : 


(a) Tod ὃ ἔστιν, of that which is, Pl. Phedo 92d. Καὶ τὸν ὃς ἔφη, he 
who said, Lys. 167.15. Προσήκει καὶ μισεῖν τοὺς οἷόσπερ οὗτος, it ἐδ proper 
to hate {those such as] such men as this, Dem. 613. 9. 

(Ὁ) Ἡρὸ τοῦ (also written προτοῦ) before this ; τῷ therefore (cf. 466. 1) ; 
τό ye, followed by ὅτι - the article doubled with καί or 4: Πρὸ τοῦ παῖς 
ἦσθα, you were once a child, Pl. Ale. 109 6. Οἱ πρὸ τοῦ φίλοι, former 
Sriends, Kur. Med. 696. To. . σκεπτέον, therefore we must consider, Pl. 
Theet. 179d. Τό ye εὖ οἶδα, ὅτι. ., this I well know, that . ., Pl. Euthyd. 
291a. Ei τὸ καὶ τὸ ἐποίησεν ἄνθρωπος οὑτοσὶ, οὐκ ἂν ἀπέθανεν, tf this man 
had done this and that, he would not have died, Dem. 308. 3. 

(Ὁ) Τὸν... φθίσον, him destroy, Soph. O. T. 200. Tatv μοι μέλεσθαι, 
take care of these for me, 1b. 1466. 

(d) Τὸν θεὸν, τὸν νῦν ψέγεις, the god, whom you now blame, Eur. Bac. 
712. (ὁ) This substitution of the το for the aspirated forms (250) in 
tragedy, scarce occurs, except to avoid hiatus, or lengthen a short syllable. 


§ 522. R, XXVIII, — THE ARTICLE PROPER. 269 


f. On the other hand, the aspirated forms are sometimes found with 
μέν and δέ for the τ- forms (518 a, d) : Πόλεις Ἑλληνίδας, ἃς μὲν ἀναιρῶν, 
els ἃς δὲ τοὺς φυγάδας κατάγων, ‘some destroying, and to others,’ Dem. 
248. 18. So, Ὁτὲ μὲν. ., ὁτὲ δέ, sometimes . ., at other times, Th. 7. 27. 


B. THe ARTICLE PROPER. 


520. Rute XXVIII. The Arricte is prefixed 
to SUBSTANTIVES, to mark them as dejinite. 


a. The Greek article, in its specific and later developed use as an article 
proper, corresponds in general to the definite article in our own and other 
modern languages. It is often, however, when used substantively, and 
sometimes when used adjectively, translated into Eng. by a demonstrative 
pronoun (527). With a participle following, it is most frequently trans- 
lated by a relative and verb, preceded, if no antecedent is expressed, by a 
personal or demonstrative pronoun. 

b. The article may be separated from its substantive by words modify- 
ing the latter (523 a), by particles which cannot stand first in the clause 
(as μέν, δέ, γάρ, γέ, τέ, δή), by the pronoun tis in Ionic, and sometimes 
by other words: Τῶν ris Περσέων, one of the Persians, Hdt. 1. 85. 


521. A substantive used ῬΕΡΙΝΙΤΕΠΥ is either employed in 
its full extent, to denote that which 1s known, or, if not employed 
in its full extent, denotes a defihite part. 


a. Compare, ‘‘ Man is mortal,” where man is used in its full extent. of 
application, to denote every individual of a known race, and is therefore 
definite ; ‘‘ The man whom we saw,” where man is not used in its full ex- 
tent of application, but is yet definite as denoting a particular and known 
individual ; and ‘‘If a man love me” (Jn. 14. 23), where man is indefi- 
nite, simply denoting any one of the race. 

b. The article, according as it is joined with the substantive in the first 
or a second of these uses, is distinguished as the generic or the limiting 
article. 


1. Generic Article. 


522. A substantive employed in its full extent, to 
denote that which is known, may be, 


a.) A substantive used generically, i. 6. denoting a whole class or kind ; 
as ἡ γυνή, woman (for the whole sex), of ἄνθρωποι, men (all men), of ᾿Αθη- 
vaio, the Athenians (the whole nation) : Ὁ ἄνθρωπος ““ ἄνθρωπος " dvoud- 
σθη, man was named ἄνθρωπος Pl. See 5383 c. (Ὁ) To this head may be 
referred substantives used distributively, which consequently take the 
article : Κῦρος ὑπισχνεῖται. . τρία ἡμιδαρεικὰ Tod μηνὸς τῷ στρατιώτῃ, C. 
promises three half-darics {the month to the soldier| a month to each soldier, 
i. 3. 21. If ἕκαστος, each, is expressed, the article may be used or omitted. 

6.) A substantive expressing an abstract idea ; as ἡ ἀρετή, virtue. 

4.) An infinitive or clause used substantively, or a word spoken of as 
such: Διὰ τὸ φοβεῖσθαι, through fear, v. 1. 13. Τὸ ὄνομα ὁ ἄνθρωπος Pl. 

6.) The name of a monadic object (one which exists singly in nature, or 
is so regarded ; μογαδικός single) ; as ὁ ἥλιος, the sun, ἡ σελήνη, the moon. 


270 SYNTAX. —GENERIC ARTICLE, § 522, 


f.) The name of an art or science : Ἢ ἱἰατρικὴ καὶ ἡ χαλκευτικὴ καὶ ἡ 
τεκτονική, medicine and brasiery and carpentry, GQic. 1.1. See 533 ¢. 
_g.) A proper name, which has been before mentioned or implied, or 
which is well known : Διὰ Φρυγίας"... τῆς Ppvylas πόλιν, through Phrygia; 
ες ὦ city of said P., i. 2. 6,7. Ὑπὲρ τῆς Ελλάδος, in behalf of Greece ὦ 
(their native land), i. 3. 4. See 523h, 533 ἃ. 

h. Proper names appear the rather to take the article, from their being 
so extensively, in their origin, either adjectives used substantively (506 f), 
or common nouns used distinctively (530). Thus, Ἢ Ἑλλάς [sc. γῆ], [the 
Greek land] Greece. (i) The adjective construction is frequent in the 
names of rivers ; and is sometimes found in other names of places, where 
the gender and number permit : Ὁ Μαίανδρος ποταμός i. 2. 7. 


2. Lnmiting Article. 


523. 1. A substantive not employed in tts full ex- 
tent may be rendered defimte by a limiting word, 
phrase, or clause. ) 


a. (OrnDER OF Description.) A limiting word or phrase is usually 
placed, either (1) between the article and its substantive, or (2) after the sub- 
stantive with the article repeated, or (3) as in the second order, but with the 
article omitted before the substantive ; while these different positions may 
be repeated or combined : ‘O ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ, or ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἀγαθός, or ἀνὴρ ὁ ἀγα- 
θός, the good man. Td βασίλειον σημεῖον (448 ο). Tods μὲν γὰρ κύνας τοὺς 
χαλεπούς, savage dogs, v. 8. 24. Σταθμῶν τῶν ἐγγυτάτω ii. 2.11. Tod 
τῆς τοῦ ξαίνοντος τέχνης ἔργον, the work of the carder’s art, Pl. Pol. 281 ἃ. 
Tas μεγάλας ἡδονὰς καὶ τὰ ἀγαθὰ τὰ μεγάλα Cyr. 3. 3. 8. 

b. (ORDER OF STATEMENT.) On the other hand, words and phrases 
not belonging to the definition or description of the substantive, but to 
that which is said about it in the sentence, regularly either (4) precede the 
article, or (5) follow the substantive without a repetition of the article: 
᾿Αγαθὸς ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός (se. ἐστιν}, the man is good. Ὅτι κενὸς ὁ 
φόβος εἴη, καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες σῶοι, that the fear was groundless, and the gen- 
erals safe, ii. 2.21. Ψιλὴν ἔχων τὴν κεφαλήν, having the head bare, i. 8. 6. 
Ἔν τῇ ἀγορᾷ μέσῃ, in the midst of the forum, Dem. 848. 13 (508 a ; but Τὸ 
μέσον στῖφος, the centre division, i. 8. 18). Td κέρας ἑκάτερον vil. 1. 23. 

c. A modifying Genitive has, however, much freedom of position, and 
other adjuncts are less strictly bound by these rules than adjectives or 
appositives. A limiting Genitive not only takes the first three orders 
according to the rule, but often the 5th order, and sometimes (chiefly for 
emphasis) the 4th ; while the Gen. partitive, which regularly takes the 
order of statement, sometimes takes an order of description : Tod δὲ κύκλου 
ἡ περίοδος, the length of the circutt, iii. 4.11. Τῇ τελευτῇ τοῦ βίου 1. 9. 30. 
Tots Ἑλλήνων πλουσιωτάτοις Th. 1. 25. (d) A prepositional adjunct takes 
the 5th order more freely after a verbal, or when another modifier has taken 
the place between the article and substantive : “H ξυγκομιδὴ ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν és 
τὸ ἄστυ, the crowding from the country into the city, Th. 2. 52. 

e. Some modifiers may be placed in either of the two classes (b), accord- 
ing to the view which is taken of them : Πᾶσαν τὴν ὁδόν, all the way, i. 5. 
9 (or τὴν πᾶσαν ὁδόν, the whole way ; without the art., πᾶσα μὲν ὁδός, every 
way, ii. 5.9). Οἱ πάντες ἄνθρωποι, Πάντες of ἄνθρωποι, all men, v. 6. 7; 
(ec. 17. 8 (πάντας ἀνθρώπους Cyr. 7. 5. 52). So ἅπας, σύμπας, ὅλος whole. 


- 


§ 526. © LIMITING ARTICLE. 271 


f. The use of the article with some adjectives, in representing a part as 
definite, should be observed : ᾿Αμφικράτης καὶ ἄλλοι, A. and others, iv. 2. 
17. ᾿Ἐπορεύθησαν, 7 ot ἄλλοι, ‘ the others,’ ‘the rest,’ Ib. 10. ΑΔλλο δὲ 
στράτευμα, and another army, i. 1.9. Td ἄλλο στράτευμα, the rest of the 
army, i. 2. 25. Πολὺ τοῦ στρατεύματος, ‘much of,’ iv. 1.11. Td μὲν 
δὴ πολὺ τοῦ Ἑλληνικοῦ, ‘the greater part,’ i. 4.13. Πολλοί, many, iv. 
6. 26. Oi πολλοί (515). So often with superlatives and ordinals. See 419. 

g. A clause limiting a substantive commonly begins with the relative 
pronoun ; and is usually placed according to order 5th, by which the im- 
mediate junction of the article proper and the relative (originally one, 
249 5) is avoided. If it precedes the substantive, it commonly excludes 
the article. Thus, "Awd τῆς ἀρχῆς, ἧς αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε (505 a). 
Οὗτοι, ods ὁρᾶτε, βάρβαροι, these barbarians whom you 866 (524 b), i. 5. 16. 

h. A proper name followed by an article in agreement with it, is rarely 

preceded by another, except with special demonstrative force. 

i. In the third order, the substantive is sometimes jirst introduced as 
indefinite, and then defined ; and this subsequent definition sometimes 
respects simply the kind or class. ILoddol δὲ στρουθοὶ of μεγάλοι, and 
many struthi, the large ones, i. 6. ostriches, i. 5. 2. 

1. When the substantive is preceded or followed by successive modijica- 
tions, the article is sometimes repeated with each: Ta τε τείχη τὰ ἑαυτῶν 
τὰ μακρὰ ἀπετέλεσαν, they completed their own long walls, Th. 1. 108. 

k. A modification is sometimes divided between two positions (oftenest 
the 1529 and 5th): Tots φήναᾶσι θεοῖς ta τε ὀνείρατα, to the gods who had 
sent the dream, iv. 3.13. Περσῶν τοὺς ἀρίστους τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν éxrdi. 6. 4. 


524. Remarks. 1. It is common to employ the article 
even when the substantive is rendered definite (a) by a posses- 
sive or (Ὁ) demonstrative pronoun : 


(a) Ὃ ἐμὸς πατήρ, my father, i. 6.6. To νόμῳ τῷ ὑ,ιετέρῳ vii. 3. 39. 

(Ὁ) The pronouns οὗτος and ὅδε, as themselves beginning with the 
article (252), do not take it immediately before them, and ἐκεῖνος follows 
their analogy. These pronouns are therefore placed according to 523 b, 
except when separated from the article by another modifier : Ταύτας ras 
πόλεις, these cities, Τόνδε τὸν τρόπον, ᾿Εκείνης τῆς ἡμέρας, Τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον, 
1.1, 8,9; 7.18; 6. 9. Ἢ στενὴ αὕτη ὁδός, this nareow way, iv. 2. 6. 

6. In prose, when the article is omztted with a demonstrative pronoun 
and a common noun (except as in 533, and in some special deictie uses, 
543 s), the pronoun is regularly employed as a subject, and the nown as an 
attribute : "Ἔστι μὲν yap πενία αὕτη σαφής, this is manifest poverty, Ue. 8. 


525. 2. Upon the same principle, the article is prefixed 
to words and phrases, which are joined with a proper name or a 
personal pronoun to give definiteness or emphatic distinction : 


Tov βασιλεύοντα ᾿Αρταξέρξην, [the reigning Artaxerxes] Artaxerxes the 
king, i. 1.4. Μένων ὁ Θετταλός i. 2.6. Σὺ... ὁ πρεσβύτατος Cyr. 4. ὅ. 
,ν ὃ: If, on the other hand, no distinction is designed, ihe article is omitted : 
Ξενοφῶν ᾿Αθηναῖος, X., aa Athenian, i. 8. 15. Παταγύας ἀνὴρ Πέρσης Ib. 1. 

526. 3. An adverb preceded by an article has often the 
force of an adjective. This construction may be explained by 
supposing the ellipsis of a participle, commonly &v or γενόμενος : 

Tov viv χρόνον, the [now time] present time, vi. 6. 18 (Tov ὄντα viv χρό- 
voy Eur. lon 1949), Tod τότε βασιλέως, the then king, Cyr. 4. 6. 3. 


272 SYNTAX, — LIMITING ARTICLE. § 526. 


a. Soa prep. with its case: Tot ἐν A ts χρηστηρίου, the Delphic ora- 
ele, Cyr. 7.3.15. "Apuevia. . ἡ πρὸς ἑσπέραν, Western Armenia, iv. 4. 4. 

b. This adjective may again, like any other adjective, be used either 
substantively or adverbially (527 5, 529). 


527. 4. The substantive which is modified is often omitted, 
as a familiar word or supplied by the context ; and in the former 
case, the article is commonly regarded as used substantively with 
the word or phrase following (506 d, 520 a) : 

Τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως [se. ἀνδρῶν], of those from the king, i. 8.5. Td πέραν 

τοῦ ποταμοῦ, the opposite side of the river, tii. 5. 2. Ὃ μηδὲν dv (507 6). 
a. The phrases ei ἀμφί and of περί, followed by the name of a person, 
commonly include the person himself, with his attendants or associates ; 
and sometimes, by ἃ species of vague periphrasis, denote little more than 
the person merely : Οἱ δὲ ἀμφὶ Τισσαφέρνην, {those about I'.} 7. and those 
with him, itt. 5. 1 (cf. Τισσαφέρνης καὶ of σὺν αὐτῷ Ib. 8). Of περὶ Κέκροπα 
fi. e. Κέκροψ) Mem. 3. 5. 10. So Ot μετὰ ᾿Αριαέου i. 10. 1. 


528. 5. When the neuter article is used substantively with 
a word or phrase following, (a) the precise idea (as, in English, 
of ‘thing’ or ‘things’) must be determined from the connection, 
and (b) not unfrequently the whole expression may be regarded 
as a periphrasis for an included substantive : 

(4) Τὰ τοῦ γήρως, the evils of old age, Apol. 6. Ta περὶ Upotévov, the 
Sate of Proxenus, ii. 5. 81. Ta παρ᾽ ἐμοὶ ἐλέσθαι ἀντὶ τῶν οἴκοι, to prefer 
remaining with me to returning home, i. 7. 4. Of. 507. 

(Ὁ) Τὸ τῆς τύχης, the course of fortune, = ἣ τύχη, fortune, Eur. Alc. 
785. ᾿Επήνει τὰ βασιλέως, extolled the king, Hel: 7. 1. 38. 
᾿ 529. 6. The NevTErR accusative of the article is often used 
in forming adverbial phrases, in connection with, 

a.) Adjectives (483 a) : Td πρῶτον, at first, i. Td πρότερον, before, iv. 

b.) Adverbs (526 b): Td πάλαι [sc. ὄν}, fas to that which was of old] 
anciently, Pl. Τὸ gpécber, before, i. 10. 10. Toturarw, back, vi. 6. 38. 

c.) Prepositions followed by their cases : Τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦδε, [as to that after 
this] henceforth, Cyr. 5. 1. 6. Td πρὸς ἑσπέραν, to the west, vi. 4. 4. 


530. π΄. A substantive not employed in tts full 
extent may also be definite (a) from previous men- 
tion, mutual understanding, general notoriety, or emphatie 
distinetion ; (Ὁ) from contrast ; and (6), in general, 
from the connection in which it is employed : as, 


(a) Θορύβου ἤκουσε..., καὶ ἤρετο τίς ὃ θόρυβος εἔη, he heard a noise, and 
inquired what THE NOISE was, i. 8, 16, Τὸν ἄνδρα ὁρῶ, 7 see THE MAN, 
᾿ ἃ, 8. 26. ᾿Ανακαλοῦντες τὸν προδότην, exclaiming, ‘the traitor !’ vi. 6. 7. 

(Ὁ) Contrast may give a degree of definiteness to expressions which are 
otherwise quite indefinite ; and may even lead to the employment of the 
article with the indefinite pronoun tis: Ἵππους .., τοὺς μέν τινας Tap 
ἐμοὶ, τοὺς δὲ τῷ Κλεάρχῳ καταλελειμμένους, horses, some with me, and others 
left by C., iii. 8.19. So with numerals denoting part of a whole: Ta 
δύο μέρη, [the two parts from three, 242 4] two thirds, Th. Cf. 518 a. 


§ 533. PREVIOUS MENTION, CONNECTION, &C. 273 


(ὦ ᾿Επειδὴ δὲ ἐτελεύτησε Δαρεῖος, καὶ κατέστη εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν ’Apra- 
ξέρξης, ‘had succeeded to the throne [56. of Persia],’ i. 1. 3. 

ἃ. A substantive is often definite as denoting that which is natural, 
usual, wecessary, proper, &c., in the circumstances : "Ev μὲν τῇ ἀριστερᾷ 
χειρὶ Td δόρυ ἔχων, ἐν δὲ τῇ δεξιᾷ βακτηρίαν, (Clearchus) having in the left 
hand his spear, and in the right a staff (the spear a part of his regular 
equipment, but not the staf), ii. 8. 11. Seee. : 

e. With substantives which are rendered definite by the connection, 
a possessive or genitive pronoun is often implied in the article : Tisoadépyys 
διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν, 7’. accuses C. to [the] his brother, 1. 


531. From a reference to something which precedes or is 
mutually understood, or for emphasis, the article may be even 
joined, (a) with an tnterrogative pronoun, (Ὁ) a personal pro- 
noun, (0) a pronoun of quality or quantity : 

(a) "AAAa.. θέλω co. . διηγήσασθαι... Ta ποῖα; “I will relate to you 
other things.” ‘‘[The what ἢ] What are they?” Ce. 10.1. (Ὁ) Tov ἐμέ, 
the me, i. 6. me, of whom you speak, Pl. Tov ἑαυτόν, [the himself} his 
great self, 1d. (ὁ) Td τοιοῦτον ὄναρ, such a dream as this, iii. 1. 13. 

d. The article is often joined with a round number used for comparison 
or general statement (especially with ἀμφί) : Εἰ μὲν τῶν μυρίων ἐλπίδων 
μία τις ὑμῖν ἐστι, {7 you have one chance in [the] ten thousand, ii. 1. 19. 
Πελτασταὶ δὲ ἀμφὶ τοὺς δισχιλίους, targetcers about [the] two thousand, i. 


532. Osservations. 1. The article is sometimes found 
without a substantive, through anacolithon or aposiopésis : 


Ἣ τῶν ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων , εἴτε χρὴ κακίαν εἴτ᾽ ἄγνοιαν... εἰπεῖν, the 
—, whether I should say cowardice or folly of the other Greeks, Dem. 


533. 2. Omission or THE ARTICLE. With substantives 
which will be readily recognized as definite without the article, 
it is often omitted ; particularly with 


a. ) Proper names, and other names resembling these from their being fa- 

miliar titles of persons or otherwise specially appropriated (522) : Πρὸς Κῦ- 
pov, IIpds τὸν Κῦρον, Ὁ δὲ Κῦρος, Κῦρος δὲ, i. 1. 6, 7, 10; 2. 5. Ἅμα ἡλίῳ 
δύνοντι, “Aua τῷ ἡλίῳ δυομένῳ, ii. 2. 13, 16. (Ὁ) Hence βασιλεύς, in its 
familiar application to the King of Persia, commonly wants the article. 
. 6.) Abstract nouns, names of arts and sciences, and nouns used gener- 
ically (522) : Ktpos . ., ὕψος δὲ, Td edpos . ., καὶ τὸ ὕψος, in breadth . ., 
and in height, ii..4. 12; iii. 4.10. Τεωργίαν re καὶ τὴν πολεμικὴν τέχνην᾽ 
(ic. 4. 4. Θεοσεβέστατον.. ζώων ἄνθρωπος Pl. Leg. 902 Ὁ. Distributively, 
Eva ἀπὸ φυλῆς, one from [a tribe] each tribe, Hel. 2. 4. 24. 

d.) Familiar designations of place, time, and related persons or objects ; 
Εἰς τὸ ἄστυ, His ἄστυ, into the city [‘into town”’], Hel. 2. 4.1, 7. “Eas 
(ἑσπέρα) ἐγένετο, it was morning (evening), ii. 4. 24; iv. 7. 27. So with 
πόλις city, ἀγρός country, γῆ land, οἷκος house, νύξ night, πατήρ father, 
γυνή wife, παῖς child, σῶμα body, πούς foot, δόρυ spear, ἀσπίς shield, &c. 

e.) Ordinals and Superlatives (523 f): Καὶ τρίτον ἔτος τῷ πολέμῳ ἐτε- 
λεύτα, ‘the third year,’ ΤῊ, Εἰς Ἰσσοὺς, τῆς Κιλικίας ἐσχάτην πόλι i. 4.1. 

f. The article is more freely omitted, as in Eng., when two or more 
nouns are coupled together ; and also after a preposition or governing 
adverb : Ἡλίου τε καὶ σελήνης καὶ ἄστρων καὶ γῆς καὶ αἰθέρος, of sun, moon, 
ϑέαγϑ, &e., Pl. Crat. 408 4. Θαυμάσιαι τὸ κάλλος καὶ τὸ μέγεθος, wonderful 
Sor beauty and size, ii. 8.15. Ὑπὸ κάλλους καὶ μεγέθους ἀδιήγητον Cyr. 

COMP. 68. 12* Bia 


274 | SYNTAX. — PRONOUNS. § 534. 


534. 3. The subject of the sentence, from its distinctive prominence, 
has the article more frequently than an adjunct; while a predicate ap- 
positive commonly wants it, as simply denoting that the subject is one (or 
more) of a class. Hence the article is often useful in distinguishing the 
subject, and sometimes appears to be used especially for this purpose : Μὴ 
φυγὴ εἴη ἡ ἄφοδος, lest the departure should be a flight, vii. 8. 16. ᾿᾽Εμπό- 
ριον δ᾽ ἣν τὸ Xwplovi. 4.6. Ta δὶς πέντε δέκα ἐστίν, twice five is ten. 

4, When words or phrases are coupled by conjunctions, they are more 
closely united in conception, if only a single article is used ; less closely, 
' if the article is repeated: Τοὺς πιστοὺς καὶ εὔνους καὶ βεβαίους, the faithful, 
Sriendly, and steadfast, i. 9. 30. Τῶν Ἑλλήνων καὶ τῶν βαρβάρων, of the 
Greeks and of the barbarians, i. 2. 14. 


VY. OBSERVATIONS ON THE PRONOUNS. 


535. a. Of the observations which follow, many apply 
equally to PRONOUNS and ADVERBS of the same classes. 

b. In the use of pronouns, especially those first presented below, it is 
important to distinguish between the stronger and weaker forms of ex- 


pression ; that is, between those forms which are more distinctive, emphat- 
ac, or prominent, and those which are Jess so. 


A. Prrsonat, Rertextve, AND PossesstvE (27s). 


536. 1. The PERSONAL PRONOUNS (a) are commonly omit- 
ted in the Nom. (as implied in the affixes of the verb, 271), 
except for emphasis or distinctness of reference. (b) If needed 
in the Nom. of the 3d Pers., they are supplied by the article, 
or, as a stronger form, by the demonstrative pronoun. (c) They 
are also omitted in the other cases, when understood from the 
connection, more freely than in English. (d) In the weaker 
form for these cases, they are enclitic in the Ist and 2d Per- 
sons sing., and are commonly supplied in the 3d Person by 
αὐτός; while (6), in the stronger form, they are orthotone 
throughout, and are supplied in the 3d Pers. by the article or 
still stronger demonstrative. Thus, 

"Anavra σῶα ἀπέδωκά σοι, ἐπεὶ καὶ σὺ ἐμοὶ ἀπέδειξας τὸν ἄνδρα, I gave 

ou back everything safe, when you also had shown to me the man, v. 8. 7. 
O δὲ ἐμπιπλὰς ἁπάντων τὴν γνώμην ἀπέπεμπε [sc. αὐτούς], and he dismissed 
them, satisfying the wish of all, i. 7. 8. Οὔτε σὺ ἐκείνας φιλεῖς, οὔτε ἐκεῖ- 
ναι σέ, neither do you love them, nor they you, Mem. 2. 7.9. “Ἢδ᾽ οὖν 
θανεῖται, she then will die, Soph. Ant. 751. *Eyo μὲν, ὦ ἄνδρες, ἤδη ὑμᾶς 
ἐπαινῶ ὅπως δὲ καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐμὲ ἐπαινέσετε, ἐμοὶ μελήσει, ἢ μηκέτι με Κῦρον 
voulgere i. 4. 16. Τούτῳ συγγενόμενος ὁ Κῦρος, ἠγάσθη τε αὐτόν i. 1. 9. 

537. 2. In REFLEX REFERENCE, the distinctive and emphatic 
forms are those of the so-called reflexives (244); while the 
forms of the common personal pronouns and of αὐτός are also 
used as weaker forms, chiefly when the reference is both ἐπ- 
direct and unemphatic. | 


§ 539. PERSONAL, REFLEXIVE, AND POSSESSIVE. 275 


*Epavre ye δοκῶ συνειδέναι, to myself at least I seem to be conscious, vii. 6. 
11. Αἰσχύγεσθαί por δοκῶ, [I seem to myself to be] I feel ashamed, i. 7. 4. 
᾽Ορόντας, . . dv wero πιστόν οἱ εἶναι, ταχὺ αὐτὸν εὗρε Κύρῳ φιλαίτερον, ἢ 
ἑαυτῷ, O. soon found the man whom he believed to be faithful to him, more 
a friend to C. than to himself (Q.), i. 9. 29. 

a. Ifa pronoun used reflecively and its subject are both related the most 
closely to the same verb or participle, the former is termed a direct reflex- 
ive ; (Ὁ) but otherwise, ¢udirect : (a) Obs ἐγὼ .. κατεθέμην ἐμοί, which I 
laid up for myself, i. 3. 3. (Ὁ) Ipdrrere ὁποῖον ἄν τι ὑμῖν οἴησθε μάλι- 
στα συμφέρειν, do whatever you think will most benefit yourselves, ii. 2, 2. 

c. A common reflexive or personal pronoun is sometimes used for the 
reciprocal pronoun : Ἣμῖν αὐτοῖς διαλεξόμεθα, we will confer with each 
other, Dem. 1169. 5. “Empdéauev .. πρὸς ἡμᾶς εἰρήνην, we made peace 
with each other, Dem. 30.16. Φθονοῦντες ἑαντοῖς μισοῦσιν ἀλλήλους Mem. 


538. 3. In the stronger form, (a) the Gen. possessive of the 
personal pronoun is commonly supplied in the Ist and 2d Per- 
sons, and sometimes in the 3d, by the possessive adjective 
(252. 5); and (b) so, of the reflexive plural, with the addition 
of αὐτῶν, while (c) a like substitution in the sing. is poetic : 

(a) "Epds δὲ ἀδελφός, frater meus, a brother of mine (cf. τὸν ἀδελφόν, 
fratrem, 530 6), i. 7. 9. Tovds ἡμετέρους φίλους, our friends, Ib. 7. Tay 
ὧν τέκνων, his children, Soph. Tr. 266. (Ὁ) Tots ἡμετέροις αὐτῶν φίλοις 
(498). (c) "Epov (ἑὸν) αὐτοῦ χρεῖος, my (his) own interest, B. 45; a. 409. 

d. This substitution is sometimes made for the Gen. in its other uses 
with substantives, even the Gen. objective (444 g): Td σὸν λέχος, the mar- 
riage you talk of, Soph. Ant. 573. Φιλίᾳ τῇ σῇ, love to you, vii. 7. 29. 

e. In Attic prose, the only possessive pronoun for the 3 Pers. is σφέτε- 
pos, which is used reflexively, and with no great frequency ; while the 
poetic or dialectic ὅς, ἑός, and odds (28 e, n) are very rarely used except 
as reflexive. 

f. The weaker form of the Gen., from its want of distinctive emphasis, 
is rarely preceded by the article, and therefore follows the rule of position 
in ὅ24 Ὁ ; while the stronger form of the Gen., and the possessive adjective 
follow the rule in ὅ28 ἃ : Τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ, Td μὲν ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα, his (own) 
body, i. 9. 23. (6) The Gen. of αὐτός, however, in its stronger, and espe- 
cially its reflexive uses, may take the position of éavrod. 


539. 4. The third person being expressed demonstratively 
in other ways, the pronoun οὗ became simply a retrospective 
pronoun, i. e. a pronoun referring to a person or thing pre- 
viously mentioned. 


As such, it performed the office both (a) of an wnemphatic reflexive, and 
(Ὁ) of a simple personal pronoun ; rarely (c), in Epic, of a general reflexive, 
without respect to person. (d) This last use appears oftener in its deriva- 
tives (even in the Attic, in ἑαυτοῦ and odérepos). — (a) See 537. 2, a. 
(Ὁ) Συνέφασάν ot, they agreed with him, Cyr. 3. 2. 26. (ὦ) Eto μὲν οὐδ᾽ 
ἠβαιὸν ἀτύζομαι, 1 tremble not in the least for [one’s self] myself, Ap. Rh. 
2. 635. (ἃ) Δώμασιν οἷσιν ἀνάσσοις, may you rule [one’s own] your own 
house, a. 402. Δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἀνερέσθαι ἑαυτούς, we ought to ask ourselves, Pl. 
Phedo 78b. Τῶν σφετέρων φρουρίων, our fortresses, Cyr. 6. 1. 10. 

e. Some of the forms of οὗ are used with great latitude of number and 
gender. Thus, (a) ply and νίν commonly sing., but also plur. (B) σφέ 


218 SYNTAX, — PRONOUNS. — ΑΥ̓ΤΟΣ. § 539... 


properly plur., but also (especially in the tragic poets) sing. (y) odiv 
rarely sing. (δ) € commonly sing. mase. and fem., but sing. neut. A. 236, 
plur. Hom. Ven. 268. (€) So the derived possessives : éés, their, Hes. ; &c. 

f. The place of οὗ as a reflexive is commonly supplied in Attic prose by 
ἑαυτοῦ, and as a simple personal pronoun, by αὐτός. 


B. AYTOS (251, 280). 


_ 540. The pronoun αὐτός marks a return of the mind to the 
same person or thing. _This return takes place, 


a.) In speaking of REFLEX ACTION or RELATION. Hence αὐτός 
is used with the personal pronouns in forming the REFLEXIVES. 
See 244. 

b.) In designating a person or thing as THE SAME which has 

‘been previously mentioned or observed. When thus employed, 
αὐτός (like the corresponding same in English), being used for 
distinction, is preceded by the article (523 a) « 

Ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνήρ, rarely ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ αὐτός or ἀνὴρ ὁ αὐτός, idem vir, the same 

. man. TH δὲ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ, and upon the same day, i. ὅ. 12. See 451. 


6.) For the sake of empHasis, one of the most familiar modes 
of expressing which is repetition. When αὐτός is thus employed 
in connection with the article, it is placed in the order of state- 
ment (523) : 


Αὐτὸς ὁ ἀνήρ, less freyuently ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτός, vir ipse, the man himself. 
Αὐτὰ τὰ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν ξύλα, the very wood from the houses, ti. 2. 16. 

d. The emphatic αὐτός is joined with pronouns in both their stronger 
and their weaker forms (commonly preceding them) ; and (e) is often used 
in the Nom. with a pronoun wnderstood. (4) Αὐτῷ por ἔοικεν, Αὐτῷ ἐμοὶ 
. . δόξει, it seems (shall seem) to myself, Pl. Pheedo 60 ο, 91a. Αὐτοῦ τού-- 
tov ἕνεκεν, on this very account, iv. 1. 22. Soin adverbs: Αὐτοῦ ταύτῃ, 
in this very place, on the spot, Hdt. 1.214. (e) Αὐτὸς σὺ ἐπαίδευσας, Αὐτὸς 
ἐπαίδευσας, you yourself educated, ic. 7. 4, 7. Αὐτοὶ καίουσιν iii. 5. 5. 

f. In like manner, αὐτός is used without another pronoun expressed, 
in the oblique cases of the third person: Δῶρα ἄγοντες αὐτῷ τε καὶ τῇ γυ- 
vatkl, bringing presents both for himself and for his wife, vii. 3. 16. 
(g) From the gradual extension of this use to cases in which there was no 
special emphasis, appears to have arisen the familiar employment of αὐτός 
in the oblique cases, as the common pronoun of the third person (536 a). 
In this unemphatic use, αὐτός must not begin a clause. 

ἢ. Sometimes (chiefly in the Epic), αὐτός occurs in the oblique cases, 
with the ellipsis of a pron. of the Ist or 2d Pers.: Αὐτῶν yap ἀπωλόμεθ᾽ 
ἀφραδίῃσιν, we were undone by our own folly, x. 27. Αὐτήν [sc. σέ] § 27. 

i. In the later Greek (6. g. the S. S.), αὐτός sometimes appears in the 
Nom., simply as a strong pronoun of the 3d Pers.: Ὅτι αὐτοὶ παρακληθή- 
σονται, for they shall be comforted, Mat. 5. 4. 

j. The emphasis of αὐτός sometimes lies in mere contradistinction. 


541. The emphatic force of αὐτός has led to some special 
uses (see also 467 ὁ): : 


§ 544, DEMONSTRATIVE. 277 


a.) Χώρει αὐτός, he goes [himself only] alone (solus), iv. 7. 11. (Ὁ) Av- 
τοὶ Ἕλληνες, οὐ μιξοβάρβαροι, ‘pure Greeks,’ Pl. Menex. 245d. (c) ᾿Αλλά 
τις αὐτὸς ἴτω, ‘of his own accord,’ sponte, P. 254. (d) Οὐκ αὐτὸ δικαιο- 
σύνην ἐπαινοῦντες, not praising justice in and of itself, Pl. Rep. 363 a. (e) 
IIpés αὐτῷ τῷ στρατεύματι, [by the army itself] close to the army, i. 8. 14. 
(f) Αὐτὸς ἔφα (Pythagorean), ipse dixit, [himself] the Master said it. (5) 
After an ordinal : Περικλέους δεκάτου αὐτοῦ στρατηγοῦντος, P. command- 
ing [himself the tenth] with nine colleagues (Fr. lui dixiéme), Th. 1. 116. 

h.) A reflexive is frequently preceded by αὐτός, agreeing with the same 
subject ; and the two pronouns are often brought into close connection, in 
disregard of the natural order: Αἰσχύνεις πόλιν τὴν αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ, you dis- 
grace your own city (539 d), Soph. O. C. 929. See 513 f. 


C. Demonstrative (28, 252). 


542. 1. Of the primary demonstratives, the more distant 
and emphatic is ἐκεῖνος, 1116, that ; the nearer and more familiar 
is οὗτος or ὅδε, hic, this : 

᾿Ἐὰν ἐκείνοις δοκῇ, καὶ τούτους κακῶς ποιήσουσι, if those should wish it, 
they will even injure these, Pl. Phedr. 291 ο. 

a. The two may be combined to mark the connection of the MORE 
REMOTE with the NEARER; as of the past with the present, of a saying with 
its illustration, of that which has been mentioned with that which és pres- 
ent before us, &c.: Totr’ [sc. ἐστὶ] ἐκεῖν᾽ οὐγὼ ᾽λεγον, this is that which ἢ 
said, Ar. Ach. 41. Τοῦτ᾽ ἐκεῖνο, κτᾶσθ᾽ ἑταίρους, ‘his [15] verifies that pre- 
cept, ““ Gain friends,” Eur. Or. 804. Hee illa Charybdis, Virg. 

b. Οὗτος sometimes marks the ordinary or familiar, and ἐκεῖνος the 
extraordinary : "Ἔχοντες τούτους τε τοὺς πολυτελεῖς χιτῶνας, having on the 
rich tunics which they are in the habit of wearing, i. 5. 8. Τὸν ᾿Αριστείδην 
ἐκεῖνον, that remarkable A., Dem. 34. 20. Tle Demosthenes, Cie. 


543. τι. The pronouns οὗτος and ὅδε have in general the 
same force, and the choice between them often depends upon 
euphony or rhythm: Τούτω φιλεῖν χρὴ, τώδε χρὴ πάντας σέβειν, 
these we must love, these all must revere, Soph. El. 981, Yet 
they are not without distinction. 

a. Οὗτος, as formed by composition with αὐτός, is properly a pronoun 
of identification or emphatic designation (it may be regarded, as a weaker 
form of ὃ αὐτός, the same, 540b) ; while ὅδε, arising from composition 
with δε, is strictly a deictic pronoun (δεικτικός, from δείκνῦμε to point out), 
pointing to an object as before us (see 252). Hence, 


544. 1.) For reference to that which precedes or is con- 
tained in a subordinate clause, οὗτος is commonly used ; but for 
reference to that which follows and is not contained in a sub- 
ordinate clause, ὅδε : 

Τεκμήριον δὲ τούτου καὶ τόδε, and of this (which has been stated), this 
(which follows) is also a proof, i. 9. 29. Ovrot, ods ὁρᾶτε, βάρβαροι (523g). 

To the retrospective character of οὗτος may be referred, 


a.) Its use preceded by καί, in making an addition to ὦ sentence, the 
pronoun either serving as a repetition of a substantive in the sentence, or, 
in the neuter Acc. or Nom. (commonly plur., 491 0), of the sentence itself : 


278 SYNTAX, —PRONOUNS. § 544, | 


Eévous προσήκει σοι πολλοὺς δέχεσθαι, Kal τούτους [sc. δέχεσθαι) μεγαλο- 
πρεπῶς, it becomes you to entertain many guests, and these magnificently, 
Cc. ᾿Ἐβοήθησαν τῇ Λακεδαίμονι, καὶ ταῦτα [sc. ἐποίησαν] εἰδότες (491 ὁ). 

b.) The use οὗ τοῦτο and ταῦτα in assent; Δεῖ ὑπάρχειν καὶ δυνατούς. 
.. Ἔστι ταῦτα. ““ἼΠΟΥ ought also to be competent.” ‘‘ This is so.” Pl. 


545. 2.) Ὅδε surpasses in demonstrative vivacity; but οὗτος 
in emphatic force and in the extent of uts substantive use : 


Ἢ τόνδε φράζεις ; Τοῦτον, ὅνπερ εἰσορᾷς. ‘‘Is THIS the man you speak 
of?” ‘*The VERY MAN, whom you behold.” Soph. O. T. 1120. 

a. To the deictie power of ὅδε may be referred the very frequent use of 
this pronoun by the Epic and Dramatic poets for an adverb of place (509 b), 
especially by the latter, in bringing a new person upon the stage. 


546. 3.) In the emphatic designation of the jirst and _sec- 
ond persons by a demonstratwwe, (a) the first person, as the nearer 
object, is regularly denoted by ὅδε (the speaker pointing, as it 
were, to himself, 543 a); and (Ὁ) the second, by οὗτος, which 
expresses impatience, authority, contempt, familiarity, &e., and 
(c) is used in address, both with and without ov (401. 3): 

(a) Μὴ θνῆσχ᾽ ὑπὲρ τοῦδ᾽ ἀνδρὸς, οὐδ᾽ ἐγὼ πρὸ σοῦ, do not you die for this 
man {for me], nor yet J for you, Eur. Alc. 690. (Ὁ) Οὑτοσὶ ἀνὴρ οὐ παύ- 
σεται φλυὰάρῶν, this man [you] will not cease trifling, Pl. Gorg. 489 Ὁ. 
(c) Οὗτος σὺ, ὦ πρέσβυ, Heus tu, senex, [This you, or You there, 509 b], 
Ho there! old man! Soph. 0. T. Οὗτος, ri σεμνὸν. βλέπεις ; Eur. Alc, 


547. 1. Other compounds of αὐτός and δε (252) are dis- 
tinguished in like manner with οὗτος and ὅδε : 
Ὁ Κῦρος ἀκούσας τοῦ Τωβρύου τοιαῦτα, τοιάδε πρὸς αὐτὸν ἔλεξε Cyr. 


D. InperinitE (28, 253 5). 


548. Of the indefinite pronouns, the most extensive in its 
use is τὶς, which is the simplest expression of indefiniteness or 
general reference. 


a. Tis is variously translated : any, some, certain, a, one, &c.; Lat. 
aliquis, &c.; while it may be sometimes omitted in translation. 

b. Ts more frequently follows the word with which it is most closely 
joined ; but may also precede it, yet not so as to commence a sentence. 
Sometimes, however, it begins a clause ; and sometimes separates closely 
connected words : Τί οὖν, τις ἂν εἴποι, ταῦτα λέγεις ; Why then, one might 
say, do you mention these things? Dem. 13. 6. See 520 Ὁ. 

e. The singular τὶς commonly refers to an individual (some one, a cer- 
tain one) ; but sometimes to more than one (some, 488), or even to any 
one concerned (every one). The extent of the reference is sometimes marked 
by εἷς (οὐδείς, μηδείς), ἕκαστος, πᾶς, ἢ οὐδείς, &c. ᾿Ανθρωπός Tis ἠρώτησε, 
a certain man asked, ii. 4.15. Θεῶν tis, some one of the gods, v. 2. 24. 
Muse? τις ἔκεινον, there are those who hate him, Dem. 42.17. Εὖ μέν τις 
δόρυ θηξάσθω, let each one sharpen well his spear, B. 382. “Ἑϊκαστός τις 
φοβούμενος, cach one fearing, Cyr. 6.1. 42. Adverbially, οὐδέν τι (Mem. 
1. 2. 42), μηδέν τι, not [as to any one thing] at all, ob πάνν τι vi. 1. 26, Χο. 

ἃ, Τὶς often marks indefiniteness of nature, character, quality, quantily, 


§ 550. INDEFINITE AND RELATIVE, 279 


number, degree, &e. ‘O σοφιστὴς τυγχάνει ὧν ἔμπορός τις ἢ κάπηλος, the 
sophist is [ἃ certain] ὦ kind of trader or huckster, Pl. Prot. 818 96. Ἐγώ 
τις, ws ἔοικε, δυσμαθής, 7 am, methinks, symewhat stupid, Pl. Rep. 358 a. 
Ἡμέρας μὲν ἑβδομήκοντά τινας, some (i. 6. about) seventy days, Th. 7. 87. 

e. Tis may be used to give a certain vagueness to a proper name, or a 
noun having the article : Hapa ΣΧ άρωνί τινι, with a certain Charon, Hel. 

f. Tis is sometimes emphatic, and may be then written as orthotone (yet 
editors here differ) : Ηὔχεις τὶς εἶναι, you boasted that you were somebody. 

g. An indefinite form of expression is sometimes employed for a d2finite : 
Ποῖ τις τρέψεται ; whither can one [= 1] turn, Ar. Th. 603. (h) So a 
definite for an indefinite, as ἴδοις dv, you [= one] might sce, Pl. Conv. 177¢. . 


HE. Revarive. 


549. 1. Relatives refer to an antecedent either as definite 
or as indefinite ; and are, hence, divided into the DEFINITE and 
the INDEFINITE RELATIVES : 

Ἠελίου ὃς πάντ᾽ ἐφορᾷ, of the Sun, who secth all things, \. 109. ᾿Η γεμόνα 
αἰτεῖν Κῦρον, ὅστις... ἀπάξει, to ask C. for some guide who would conduct 
them, 1.38.14... * 

a. INDEFINITE RELATIVES are formed, either from the definite relatives 
by adding τὶς or a particle (commonly ἄν), or from the simple indefinites 
by prefixing ὅς (in the shortened form 6-): ὅστις or ὃς ἄν whoever, ὁποῖος 
of what kind soever, ὁπόσος how much soever, ὁπότε whensoever. See 
254, 377, 389. (b) The use of an indefinite relative is sometimes explained 
by resolving it into an indefinite pronoun and a relative, the indefinite 
part seeming to belong more strictly to the antecedent clause : "ἔστιν 8 τι 
σε ἠδίκησα ; is there aught in which I have wronged you? i. 6. 7. 

550. wu. For one relative, another is sometimes used as a 
simpler, more familiar, or more expressive form. This use may 
be sometimes explained by e/lzipsis. Thus, 

a.) A DEFINITE for an indefinite relative : Ος ἑώρα ἐθέλοντας κινδυνεύ- 
ew, τούτους καὶ ἄρχοντας ἐποίει, whomsoever he saw willing to incur danger, 
thesc he made rulers, i. 9. 14. 

b.) An INDEFINITE for a definite relative : Ὁρᾶτε δὲ τὴν Τισσαφέρψους 
ἀπιστίαν, ὅστις λέγων..., see the perfidy of T., [one] a man who saying. ., 
iii. 2. 4. See 549b.-—The use of an indefinite relative referring to a 
definite antecedent belongs particularly to those cases in which the relative 
clause is added, not to distinguish, but to characterize, thus representing 
the antecedent as one of a class. 

c.) A SIMPLER RELATIVE for one of quantity, quality, &c.: ᾿Επιθυμεῖν 
τοιαύτης δόξης ἧς [= οἵας] πολλοὶ rvyxdvoucu, to desire such glory [which] 
as many obtain, Isoc. 408 d. “ἕωσπερ ἂν ἧς ὃς [= τοιοῦτος οἷος] εἶ, as long 
as you are what [= such, as] you are, Pl. Phedr. 243 6. 

d.) A RELATIVE OF QUANTITY, QUALITY, &c., for a simpler relative : 
Ταῦτα... χρὴ ποιεῖν, ὅσα [for ἃ, or sc. τοσαῦτα] ὁ θεὸς ἐκέλευσεν, you must 
do these things, [as many as] which the god has commanded, iii. 1. 7. 

e.) A RELATIVE ADVERB for a relative pronoun, chiefly in designations 
of place, time, and manner ; Ris χωρίον, ὅθεν ὄψονται θάλατταν, to a place 
[whence] from which they would behold the sea, iv. 7. 20. 

f. After the plural of πᾶς all; ὅστις and ὃς ἄν are regularly used in the 
singular, and ὅσοι, ὁπόσοι, and of in the plural: ᾿Ασπάζεται πάντας, ᾧ ἂν 
περιτυγχάνῃ, he salutes all [whomsoever] whom he may meet, Pl. Rep. 
566d. Πᾶσιν, οἷς ἐτύγχανεν, ἐβόα, he shouted to all whom he met, i. 8. 1. 


280 SYNTAX. — RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 551. 


551. mi. Exiests. A word which belongs both to the 
antecedent and to the relative clause, is commonly expressed 
in but one ; more frequently in the earlier clause, yet often in 
the later ; while it may be omitted in both, if it is a word which 
will be readily supplied : as, 


a.) A VERB or PARTICIPLE: Ὅ τι ἂν δέῃ [80. raoxew], πείσομαι, J will 
suffer whatever I must [suffer], i. 3. 6. 

b.) A PREposITION : *Ev τρισὶ... ἔτεσιν, [sc. ἐν] οἷς ἐπιπολάζει, in three 

years, in which he has the upper hand, Dem. 117. 16. 
' 6) The Sussecr or THE RELATIVE. Relative pronouns belong to the 
class of adjectives (173), and, as such, agree with a substantive expressed 
or understood ; while a form of this substantive, or of one corresponding 
to it, is also the antecedent of the relative : Οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἀνὴρ, ὃν εἶδες 
ἄνδρα, this is the man [which man] whom you saw. But elliptic forms 
are far more common: Οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἀνὴρ, ὃν εἶδες, Οὗτός ἐστιν, ὃν εἶδες ἄν- 
dpa, Οὗτός ἐστιν, ὃν εἶδες - or, with the antecedent clause preceding (an 
order more frequent in Greek than in Eng.), Ὃν εἶδες, οὗτός ἐστιν, &c. 

"Awd τῆς ἀρχῆς, ἧς [sc. ἀρχῆς] αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε (505 a). ᾿Απο- 
πέμψαι πρὸς ἑαυτὸν [sc. τὸ στράτευμα,]} ὃ εἶχε στράτευμα, to send back to 
him the force which he had [what force he had], i. 2. 1. Κῦρος δὲ ἔχων ois 
εἴρηκα, C’. having the men whom I have mentioned, Ib. 5. 


d. Ifthe relative and its subject are in the same clause, the latter is 
commonly put at the end, as though the rest of the clause were regarded 
as modifying it like an adjective. See 523g. (6) The adjective character 
of a relative clause is sometimes made more prominent by placing it be- 
tween a substantive and its article : Τοὺς ὁποιουσδήποθ᾽ ὑμεῖς ἐξεπέμπετε 
στρατηγούς, [the WHAT SORT YOU SENT OUT generals] the generals such as 
you sent out, Dem. 276. 10. : 

f. A demonstrative or indefinite pronoun or adverb is very often omitted 
in the antecedent clause, as implied by the relative ; but the simple ellipsis 
of the relative pronoun itself, which is so common in Eng., is not allowed 
in the Greek. Compare the ellipses in, Σὺν [sc. τούτοις] οἷς μάλιστα φι- 
᾿ λεῖς, with those [se. whom] you love best (cum 115 quos), i. 9. 25. 


g. Indefinite relatives are often used elliptically in expressing a condi- 
tion or circumstance : Δόθ᾽, ἥτις ἐστί, give τέ [to her, being whoever she is, 
ἡ, 6. let her be whoever she may], whoever she may be, Soph. El. 1123. 

1) This has led to their use as mere indefinites (commonly with οὖν or 
ἦγ): Μηδ᾽ ὁντιναοῦν μισθὸν [= μισθόν τινα, ὅστις οὖν etn] προσαιτήσας, not 
demanding any pay whatever [it might be], vii. 6. 27. “Ὅτου δὴ παρεγ- 
υήσαντος, some one {whoever it might have heen] having suggested it, iv. 7. 4. 

i. Observe the ellipses in such expressions as (a) ὅσαι ἡμέραν (united, 
ὁσημέραι), quot diebus o7 quotidie, [on as many days as there are] dwiiy, 
ὅσον μῆνες, quot mensibus, monthly. (B) Ὠκύμορος . . ἔσσεαι, ot’ ἀγορεύεις, 
you will be short-lived, {according to such things as] from what you say, 
=. 95. (γὴ Otos ἐκείνου θυμὸς ὑπέρβιος, οὐκ ἐθελήσει, with [such a spirit 
as is] that violent spirit of his, he will not be willing, X. 262. 


552. iv. Arrraction. The intimate relation of clauses 
connected by a relative pronoun or a kindred particle, often pro- 
duces an ATTRACTION, sometimes simply affecting the position or 
form of particular words, and sometimes even uniting the two 
clauses into one. Thus, 


§ 554. , ELLIPSIS, ATTRACTION. — 281] 


553. 1.) Transfer. A word or phrase is often made a - 
part of the relative, instead of the antecedent, clause ; and some- 
times the two clauses are blended in their arrangement : 


Ἔστιν ὅτῳ ἄλλῳ [for ἄλλος ὅτῳ] . . πλείω ἐπιτρέπεις ; is there [to whom 
else] any other to whom you entrust more ? Cic. 3.12. Adyous ἄκουσον, obs 
σοι δυστυχεῖς ἥκω φέρων, hear the sad tidings which I bring you, Kur. 
Or. 853. Οὗτοι, ἐπεὶ εὐθέως ἤσθοντο τὸ πρᾶγμα, ἀπεχώρησαν, these, when 
they understood the matter, immediately withdrew, Hel. ὃ. 2. 4. Ὃν ἐγὼ 
ἀπεκεφάλισα ᾿Ιωάννην, οὗτός ἐστιν Mk. 6.16. See 554s. 

a. The SUPERLATIVE is often so placed, particularly in expressions of 
(Ὁ) time and (c) possibility ; and with a frequent ellipsis of the word de- 
noting possibility : 

(a) Δοῦλον, dv εἶχε πιστότατον, ἔπεμψεν (De servis, quem habuit fidelis- 
simum, misit, NVep.), he sent the most faithful servant that he had. “Apxe- 
σθαι ἐπίσταμαι, ὥς τις καὶ ἄλλος μάλιστα ἀνθρώπων, I know how to obey [as 
even any other man knows at the best] as well as any other man, i. 3. 15. 

(Ὁ) Πειρασόμεθα παρεῖναι, ὅταν τάχιστα διαπραξώμεθα [for π. τάχιστα, 
ὅταν δ.], we shall endeavor to be present [most quickly when] as soon as we . 
have accomplished, Cyr. 4. 5. 33. ᾿Επεὶ ἦλθε τάχιστα, ἀπέδοτο, as soon as 
he had come, he sold, vii. 2. 6. ‘Os τάχιστα ἕως ὑπέφαινεν, ἐθύοντο iv. 3. 9. 

(c) "Hyayov . . ὁπόσους ἐγὼ πλείστους ἐδυνάμην, I have brought [the 
most that] as many as I could, Cyr. 4. 5. 29. Ἔχων ἱππέας ὡς ἂν δύνηται 
πλείστους, bringing [horsemen so as he could the most] as many horse as 
he could, i. 6.3. AauBdvew .. ὅτι πλείστους, to take as many as pos- 
sible, i. 1. 6 (ὅτι the neut. of ὅστις, according to whatever may be, or is 
possible ; though words denoting possibility are not expressed with it). 
Ὡς μάλιστα ἐδύνατο ἐπικρυπτόμενος, [concealing it as he best could] as 
secretly as he could, i. 1. 6. ᾿Ελαύνων ὡς δυνατὸν ἣν τάχιστα, riding as 
fast as was possible, Cyr. 5. 4.3. Ὥς μάλιστα Cyr. 1. 6.19, quam maxime, 
as much as possible. Ὅτι τάχιστα vii. 2. 8, as quickly as possible. 


ἃ. In the more elliptic of these constructions, ὡς, ὅτι, ὅπως, &c., are 
treated simply as adverbs strengthening the superlative. 


554. 2.) Assimilation. a,b. The RELATIVE often takes the — 
case of its antecedent ; (c) far less frequently, the ANTECEDENT, 
the case of a relative following. 


REMARK. The former, from its special frequency in Attic Greek, has 
been distinguished as Attic, and the latter as Inverse Attraction. 

(a) Attic Attraction. This is the common construction, when the rela- 
tive clause limits or defines an antecedent in the Gen. or Dat., and the 
relative would properly be an Acc. depending upon a verb: ᾿Απὸ τῶν πό- 
λεων, ὧν [for as] ἔπεισε, from the cities which he persuaded, Th. 7.1. Σὺν 
τοῖς θησαυροῖς, ots ὁ πατὴρ κατέλιπεν, with the treasures which my father 
left, Cyr. 8. 1. 88. “Apxovras ἐποίει ἧς κατεστρέφετο χώρας 1. 9. 14, Χει- 
μῶνός ye ὄντος οἵου λέγεις V. 8.3. Μήδων μέντοι, ὅσων ἑώρακα Cyr. 1. 3. 2. 

Nore. If this ANTECEDENT is a demonstrative pronoun, it is commonly 
omitted (551 f): Σὺν [se. τούτοις] οἷς ἔχω, with those whom I have, vii. 3. 48. 

(b) The Dat. and even Nom. are rarely attracted in like manner : Ὧν 

= ἐκείνων, οἷς] ἠπίστει, πολλούς, many of those whom he distrusted, Cyr. 

5. 4. 89. Βλάπτεσθαι ag ὧν [= τούτων, ἃ] ἡμῖν παρεσκεύασται, to be in- 
jured by those things which have been prepared by us [in respect to which 
preparation has been made by us], Th. 7. 67. — When the subject of ἃ 
verb is attracted, the verb, if retained, becomes impersonal. 


282 SYNTAX. —~ RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 554, 


(c) Inverse Attraction. The antecedent is here treated, except in position, 
as if a part of the relative clause ; and sometimes omits an article, as if 
supplied by the relative (cf. 523 g): ᾿Ανεῖλεν αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Απόλλων θεοῖς οἷς 
[= τοὺς θεοὺς, ols] ἔδει θύειν, Apollo made known to him [to what gods] the 
᾿ς gods to whom he must sacrifice, 111. 1.6. Τάσδε [= Aide] δ᾽ ἅσπερ εἰσο- 

pgs, . - χωροῦσι πρὸς σέ, these whom you behold, come to you, Soph. Tr. 

d. Assimilation appears also in adverbs: ’Ex δὲ γῆς, ὅθεν [= od] προῦ- 
keto, from the ground [whence] where it lay, Soph. Tr. Inverse, Βῆναι 
κεῖθεν [= κεῖσε], ὅθεν περ ἥκει, to return thither, whence he came, Id. O. C. 


555. 3.) Condensation. The two clauses may be condensed 
ento one by the omissign of a substantive verb either (a) from the 
antecedent clause or (8) from the relative clause. 


(a) FROM THE ANTECEDENT CLAUSE. a. After a demonstrative pro- 
noun or article, the RELATIVE is also omitted, and the ANTECEDENT takes 
its place in the construction. This form of condensation is particularly 
frequent in questions, exclamations, and denials, especially with the poets : 
Ti τόδ᾽ αὐδᾷς [= Τί ἐστι τόδε, ὃ αὐδᾷς]; what is this, which you say ? Kur. 
Ale. 106. Τί τοῦτ᾽ ἀρχαῖον ἐννέπεις κακόν ; what is this old evil of which 
you speak ? Soph. O. T. 1033: Τοῦτο μὲν οὐδὲν θαυμαστὸν λέγεις Pl. Prot. 

b. An exclamation without a verb and a relative clause may be united 
in like manner : Τοὺς ἐμὸς ἔδε πατὴρ θανάτους aixets [= Ὦ θάνατοι aixeis, 
ods ἴδε πατὴρ ἐμός] ! the cruel death my father saw! Soph. El. 205. 

ὁ. Expressions like the following are still more elliptical : Ἔνθα ἡ Τρι- 
πυργία [= ἐστὶ χωρίον, ὃ T.] καλεῖται, where there ts a place, which is 
ealled Tripyrgia, Hel. 5. 1. 10. - Ἔν ᾧ καλοῦμεν τὸ ζῇν Pl. Phedo 107 c. 


556. (B) FroM THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. a. This occurs chiefly 
with a relative of comparison (οἷος, ὅσος, or ἡλίκος), which then, with 
any substantive or adjective in agreement, is assimilated to the cor- 
responding demonstrative (expressed or understood) ; and the whole is 
construed as an adjective, sometimes even taking the article before it : 
Χαριζόμενον οἵῳ σοὶ ἀνδρί [= ἀνδρὶ τοιούτῳ, οἷος σὺ εἶ], obliging a man 
such as you are [a sUCH AS you man], Mem, 2. 9. 8. Οἱ δὲ οἷοί περ ὑμεῖς 
ἄνδρες, but [the sucH AS YoU men] men like you, Cyr. 6. 2. 2 (cf. Tovds οἷος 
οὗτος ἀνθρώπους Dem, 421. 16). Ὄντος τοῦ πάγου οἵου δεινοτάτου [= τοι- 
ovrou, οἷός ἐστι δεινότατος], the cold being [such as is most dreadful] of the 
most intense kind, Pl. Conv. 220 b. — But if a substantive following οἷος 
as above is in a different number, it remains in the Nominative: Neavias 
δ᾽ οἵους [= τοιούτους, οἷος] σύ, young men such as you, Ar. Ach. 601. 


b. Some constructions may be explained either by the ellipsis of a sub- 
stantive verb, or by the change of a finite verb to an infinitive depending 
upon this adjective : Ὅπως . . μὴ τοιοῦτοι ἔσονται οἱ πολῖται, οἷοι πονηροῦ 
τινος ἢ αἰσχροῦ ἔργου ἐφίεσθαι, that the citizens should not be such as {they 
would be] ἐο desire any wrong or base act [or, such as would desire], Cyr. 
Ὅσον μόνον γεύσασθαι ἑαυτῷ καταλιπών, leaving for himself only [830 much 
as] sufficient to taste, vii. 8. 22. Ὅσα μέντοι ἤδη δοκεῖν αὐτῷ, but [according 
to so much as now seemed to him,] so far as he could now judge, Th. 

ὁ. Through their frequent use as above, with the ellipsis of the cor- 
responding demonstratives, οἷος and ὅσος (particularly the former with 
τέ, 389 j) came to be treated as mere adjectives of 4 7 or quantity : 
Οἷοί re ἔσεσθε ἡμῖν cuuwpadtac;. . Ἵκανοί ἐσμεν. ‘‘ Shall you be [such as 
to] able to co-operate with us?” “Weare able.” y. 4.9. Οὐκ οἷον τε ἣν... 
διώκειν, [the state of things was not such as it should be to pursue] {ὦ was 


§ 559, CONDENSATION, COMBINATIONS. 283 


not possible to pursue, iii. 3.9. Adyous οἵους els τὰ δικαστήρια, speeches 
[such as for] adapigd to courts of justice, Pl. Euthyd. 272 ἃ. 

ἃ. In this construction, ὅσος is especially used in the neuter form ὅσον, 
as indeclinable ; and often substantively or adverbially (507 6) : Ὅσον ὅσον 
στίλην, a mere, mere bit, Ar. Vesp. 213. ᾿Ελείπετο τῆς νυκτὸς ὅσον σκοταί- 
ous διελθεῖν, enough of the night remained for them to cross in the dark, iv. 
1. 5. Ὅσον ἀποζῆν, sufficiently for subsistence, Th. 1. 2. 


557. 4.) A RELATIVE PRONOUN may take the place of 
a definitive (personal or demonstrative pronoun, or article), and 
a connective particle. 


a.) When the DEFINITIVE belongs to the jirst clause. In this kind of 
attraction, the pronoun is commonly either governed by a preposition or ad- 
verb, or is itself used adverbially : *E¢ ᾧ [= ἐπὶ τούτῳ, ὥστε] μὴ καίειν τὰς 
κώμας, upon this condition, that they should not burn the villages, iv. 2.. 19 
(cf. Emi τοῖσδε, ὥστε Th. 3.114). “Ed ᾧ τε [= ἐπὶ τούτῳ, ὥστε] πλοῖα 
συλλέγειν, in order that we might collect transports, vi. 6. 22. Μέχρι οὗ 
[= τοῦ χρόνου, ὅτε] εἶδον, wntil [the time when] they saw, v. 4. 16 (cf. Mé- 
χρι τοσούτου, ἕως Th. 1. 90). Μέχρι (ἄχρι) οὗ [= τοῦ χωρίου, ἔνθα], to the 
region where, as far as, 1. 7. 6. Ἔξ ὅτου (οὗ, οὗ Te), ex quo, since, vii. 8. 4. 

a. The Attic poets sometimes use οὕνεκα, and Hdt. μέχρι οὗ (ὅτου), as 
compound adverbs governing the Gen.: Γυναικὸς οὕνεκα, for the sake of a 
woman, Asch. Ag. 828. Μέχρι ὅτευ πληθώρης ἀγορῆς, Hdt. 2. 173. 


558. £8.) When the pEFINITIVE belongs to the second clause: Tis 
οὕτω μαίνεται, ὅστις [= ὥστε ἐκεῖνος] οὐ βούλεταί σοι φίλος εἷναι ; who is so 
mad that he does not wish to be your friend? ii. ὅ. 12. ᾿Απόρων ἐστὶ..., 
οἵτινες ἐθέλουσι, it is the part of those without resource {that they should 
wish] to wish, ii. 5. 21. Οὐκ ἔστιν οὕτω μῶρος, ὃς θανεῖν ἐρᾷ, Soph. Ant. 


a. Akin to this construction is the extensive use of the relative in ex- 
planation, or the assignment of reason or purpose : Θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, ὃς. . 
didws, you act strangely, [who give] that you give, or in giving (qui des), 
Mem. 2. 7.13. Ὅπλα κτῶνται, οἷς ἀμυνοῦνται τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας, they prepare 
arms, [with which they will repel] that with these they may repel assailants, 
Ib. 1.14. Καὶ πόλει πέμψον tw’, ὅστις σημανεῖ, send some one to the city, 
to give notice, Kur. Iph. T. 1208. “Ayyedov ἧκαν, ὃς ἀγγείλειε γυναικί, they 
sent a messenger to tell the woman (qui nunciaret), ο. 458. Equitatum 
premittit, qui videant, Ces. 

b. RELATIVE ADVERBS likewise exhibit this form of attraction : Εὐδαί- 
μων... ὡς [= ὅτι οὕτως] ἀδεῶς καὶ γενναίως ἐτελεύτα, happy that he died so 
fearlessly and nobly, Pl. Pheedo 58 6. 


559. 5.) This attraction so unites some words, that the 
combinations are freated as complex pronouns or adverbs : 


a.) "Kore with a relative, the verb remaining unchanged, whatever 
might be its appropriate number, tense, or mode: ἔστιν of (al, ἅ, ὧν, ols, 
ais, οὕς, ἅς " in questions οἵτινες; &c.), sunt qui, [there are who] some ; 
ἔστιν ὅτε or ἔσθ᾽ ὅτε, est quando, [there is when] sometimes, ii. 6. 9 ; ἔστιν 
ἔνθα, est ubi, in some places, Cyr. 7. 4. 15 ; ἔστιν ὅπου (ws, ὅπως, ἧ, ὅθεν, 
&c.). Προὐβάλλοντο πρέσβεις πρῶτον μὲν Xewpicopor . ., ἔστι δ᾽ ot καὶ Ξε- 
νοφῶντα, they proposed as ambassadors, first C., and some also [there were 
also some who proposed] X., vi. 2. 6. “Horiy οὕστινας ἀνθρώπων τεθαύ- 
μακας ; are there any men whom you have admired ? Mem. I. 4, 2. 


΄Ξ 


284 SYNTAX. R. K, — PRONOUNS. — RELATIVE. § 559. 


b.) The relative followed by βούλει, and agreeing with the antecedent 
in any case (cf. Lat. qguwi-vis, qui-libet): Περὶ Πολυγνώτου, ἢ ἄλλου ὅτου 
[= ὅντινα] βούλει, respecting P., or any other one whom you please, P). 

ce.) Ὅστις od (sometimes ὃς οὐ) after οὐδείς or tis: Οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐκ 
ἀφέξεται, there is no one, who will not refrain (nemo non), Ven. 12. 14 (ef. 
Οὐδεὶς ἦν, ὅστις οὐκ ᾧετο Hel. 7. 5. 26). Οὐδεὶς ὃς οὐχὶ τῶνδ᾽ ὀνειδιεῖ, 
every one of these will reproach, Soph. Ὁ. T. 878. Οὐδένα κίνδῦνον [= οὐ- 
dels κίνδυνος ἣν,] ὅντιν᾽ οὐχ ὑπέμειναν, there was no danger which they did 
not meet, Dem. 295. 7. Οὐδενὸς ὅτου οὐ, Οὐδενὶ ὅτῳ οὐ, Pl. See also 556. 


560. Remark. Forms oF COMPARISON are especially liable to 
attraction and ellipsis (cf. 438 Ὁ, 511 b) : Μόνοι τε ὄντες ὅμοια ἔπραττον, 
ἅπερ |= ἐκείνοις, ἅπερ] ἂν wer ἄλλων ὄντες, ‘ [like things, which] things 
like to those which’ (cf. idem qui) v. 4. 34. 


561. v. A RELATIVE sometimes introduces a clause which 
(a) has another connective or a participle absolute, or which (b) 
is properly codrdinate (as imperative, interrogative, &c.); and, 
on the other hand, a coORDINATE CLAUSE sometimes (c) takes 
the place of a relative clause, or (4) is used in continuation of tt: 


(a) Πολλὰ ἂν εἰπεῖν ἔχοιεν ᾿Ολύνθιοι νῦν, ἃ τότ᾽ εἰ προείδοντο, οὐκ ἂν ἀπώ- 
λοντο, the Olynthians could now mention many things, which had they then 
Soreseen, they would not have perished, Dem. 128. 17. 

(Ὁ) Ψῆφον dud ἡμῶν... “Ἢ κρινεῖ τί χρῆμα ; ‘* The vote concerning us.” 
**| Which will decide what ?| And what will this decide?” Eur. Or. Κά- 
τισον . . φυλάκους, ot λεγόντων, station guards, and let them say, Hdt. 1. 89. 

(ὁ) "Eéerdoa . . ᾽Οδυσσέα, ἢ Σίσυφον, ἢ ἄλλους μυρίους ἄν τις εἴποι, to ex- 
amine Ulysses, or Sisyphus, or [one might mention ten thousand others} 
ten thousand others whom one might mention, Pl. Apol. 41 Ὁ. 

(d) Κῦρον δὲ μεταπέμπεται ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς, ἧς αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε, καὶ 
στρατηγὸν δὲ αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε i. 1. 2. This construction is adopted chiefly 
to avoid the repetition of the relative, in accordance with Rule K. 


562. Rute Κα. The repetition of the relatwe is commonly 
avoided, either by ellipsis, or by the substitution of a personal 
pronoun or of a demonstrative : as, 

᾿Αριαῖος δὲ, ὃν ἡμεῖς ἠθέλομεν βασιλέα καθιστάναι, καὶ [sc. @] ἐδώκαμεν καὶ 
[sc. παρ᾽ οὗ] ἐλάβομεν πιστά, A., whom we wished to make king, and to 
whom we gave and from whom we received pledges, iii. 2. 5. Ὃ ἀνὴρ ὃς 
συνεθήρα ἡμῖν, καὶ σύ μοι μάλα ἐδόκεις θαυμάζειν αὐτόν, the man who hunted 
with us, and whom you seemed to me greatly to admire, Cyr. 3. 1. 38. 

a. The relative is sometimes strengthened by a personal pronoun or a 
demonstrative in the same clause ; especially, after a Hebrew idiom, in the 
Hellenistic : “Hv χρῆν σ᾽ ἐλαύνειν τῆνδε, whom you ought to drive [her], 
Eur. And. 650. Οἷς ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἀδικῆσαι, to whom it was given [to them] 
to hurt, Rev. 7. 2. “Ὅπου τρέφεται ἐκεῖ Rey. 12. 14. 


Ἐς ComMpleMENTARY AND INTERROGATIVE. 


563. 1. From the connective, and, at the same time, 7- 
definite character of the complementary pronouns and adverbs, 
their proper forms are such as belong to indefinite relatives 
(549 a). But, when there is no danger of mistake, there is 


§ 565. COMPLEMENTARY AND INTERROGATIVE. 285 


often employed, for the greater brevity and vivacity, in place 
of the full compound form, one or the other element, either the 
relative or the indefinite. Of these, the latter is far the more 
frequently used, but with this distinction from the indefinite in 
its proper sense, that the accentuation of the compound form is 
retained, as far as possible. Thus, 

ὅστις, τίς, ὅς, quis, who, what ; ὁπόσος, πόσος, ὅσος, quantus, how much ; 
ὁπότε, πότε, bre, quando, when ; ὅποι, ποῖ, of, quo, whither ; &e. 

Πρὶν δῆλον εἶναι, 8 τι of ἄλλοι “Ἕλληνες ἀποκρινοῦνται, piv δῆλον εἶναι, τί 
ποιήσουσιν οἱ ἄλλοι στρατιῶται, before it is known what the other Greeks will 
answer (soldiers will do), i. 4. 14,18. ‘Qs δηλοίη, ods τιμᾷ i. 9. 28. 

564. 2. The indefinites thus employed and accented are 
termed in Etymology, from the most prominent of their offices, 
INTERROGATIVES (253. 2, 377). As complementary words, they 
were employed in indirect question; and hence appears to have 
arisen their use as direct interrogatives, through an ellipsis. 

Thus, from the indirect question, Εἰπὲ, τίνα γνώμην ἔχεις περὶ τῆς πο- 
pelas, say, what opinion you have concerning the march (ii. 2. 10), by the 
omission of εἰπτὲ, comes the direct question, Τίνα γνώμην ἔχεις περὶ τῆς πο- 
ρείας ; what opinion have you concerning the march 3 

a. In other languages, as the Lat., with those derived from it, and the 
Eng., the complementary use of the simple relatives has prevailed ; and 
hence, in these languages, the general identity of the relatives and the inter- 
rogatives (qui, quando, ubi, unde, who, which, when, where, &c.). 

b. In direct question, the Greek employs only one of the two shorter 
forms above mentioned, but in exclamation it employs both : Οἴμοι, πά- 
rep, τί εἶπας ! οἷά μ᾽ elpyacar! O my father, what have you said ! how you 
treat me! Soph. Tr. 12038. “Ὅσα πράγματα ἔχεις) Cyr. 1. 3. 4. 

ce. The neuter τί unites with several particles to form elliptical ques- 
tions ; which, with various specific offices, serve in general to promote the 
vigor and vivacity of the discourse, commonly introducing other questions: 
Ti γάρ [sc. ἔστιν, or λέγετε] ;.. ἐμποδών εἰμι; What, indeed? Am I in the 
way? v. 7.10. Τί οὖν; What then? v. 8.11. Τί δέ; Ti δή; Tl δῆτα; 

d. A COMPLEMENTARY PRONOUN or ADVERB, used as an echo to an in- 
terrogative, has, for distinction’s sake, its full form: Τίς yap ef; [sc.’ Epw- 
τᾷ] Ὅστις; Πολίτης χρηστός. ‘*Who are you ?” Be you ask] WHO ? 
A good citizen.” Ar. Ach. 594. Οὗτος, τί ποιεῖς; Ὅ τι ποιῶ; “Ho! 
what are you doing?” ‘‘What am I doing?” Id. Ran. 198. 


565. 3. CoNnDENSATION. a. Expressions like θαυμαστόν 
ἐστιν ὅσος (ὅσου, ὡς, Xe.), ἐξ is wonderful how much, &c., may be 
condensed into complex adjectives or adverbs; θαυμαστὸς ὅσος, 
θαυμαστοῦ ὅσου, θαυμαστῶς ὡς, Wwe. (cf. 555, 559): 

Θαυμαστὴν ὅσην περὶ σὲ προθυμίαν ἔχει, it 1s wonderful how much re- 
gard he has for you (mirum quantum studium), Pl. Ale. 161 ἃ. Mera 
ἱδρῶτος θαυμαστοῦ ὅσου Id. Rep. 350d. Oavpacras ὡς ἐπείσθην, I was 
wonderfully convinced, 1d. Phedo 92a. ᾿Αμήχανον ὅσον χρόνον, an in- 
conceivably long time, Ib. 80c. ‘Yamepduas as χαίρω Id. Conv. 173 ¢. 

b. A complementary word may take the place of a connective particle 
and a demonstrative (cf. 558): Κατοικτείρων τήν τε γυναῖκα, οἵου ἀνδρὸς 
[= ὅτι τοιούτου ἀνδρὸς] στεροῖτο, commiserating the wife [what a husband 
she had lost] that she had lost such ὦ husband, Cyr. 7. 3. 13. 


286 SYNTAX. -- ἌΛΛΟΣ AND ἝΤΕΡΟΣ. § 566. 


566. The Greek idiom (a) admits a greater freedom than 
the English, in the construction and position of both INTERROGA- 
TIVE and COMPLEMENTARY WORDS, especially in connecting them 
with dependent words and clauses ; and even (b) allows the 
use of more than one in the same clause : 


(a) Τί... ἰδὼν ποιοῦντα, ταῦτα κατέγνωκας αὐτοῦ; [having seen him do- 
ing what, do you] what have you seen him do, that you thus judge of him? 
Mem. 1. 3.10. Ὅταν τί ποιήσωσι, νομιεῖς αὐτοὺς σοῦ φροντίζειν ; [when 
they have done what, will you think] what must they do, before you will 
think that they care foryou, Ib. 4. 14. “Iva τί [sc. γένηται] ταῦτα λέγεις ; 
[that what may be] with what intent, or why, do you say this? 1d. Apol. 

(b) Τίς τίνος αἴτιός ἐστι, γενήσεται φανερόν, it will become evident who is 
guilty (and) of what, Dem. 249. 8. Τίς πόθεν cis; who are you (and) 
whence? a. 170. Λεύσσετε, .. οἷα πρὸς οἵων ἀνδρῶν πάσχω Soph. Ant. 940. 


G. ἌΛΛΟΣ AND “ETEPOS. 


567. ‘These pronouns are not only used retrospectively, but 
also prospectively and distributively : that“is, they may denote, 
not only a different person or thing from one which has been 
mentioned, but also, from one which 7s to be mentioned ; or — 
they may, in general, denote a difference among the several 
individuals or parties which compose the whole number spoken 
of ; but ἕτερος commonly with reference to two objects or sets 
of objects only. Compare alius and alter. 


For modes of translation, see the following examples of ἄλλος, ἕτερος, 
and their derivatives, as used, (a) RETROSPECTIVELY. Ἱκανὸν ἔργον ἑνὶ 
ἕψειν κρέα, ἄλλῳ ὀπτᾶν, ἄλλῳ δὲ ἰχθὺν ἕψειν, ἄλλῳ ὀπτᾶν, it is work enough 
Sor one man to boil meat, for another to roast it, &c., Cyr. 8, 2. 6. Μεί- 
vavres δὲ ταύτην τὴν ἡμέραν, τῇ ἄλλῃ ἐπορεύοντο, ‘on the next,” ili. 4. 1. 
(b) PROSPECTIVELY. Οὐδὲν ἄλλο πράξαντες ἢ δῃώσαντες, having done noth- 
ing else than ravage, Hel. 7.4.17. (0) PRospECTIVELY and RETROSPEC- — 
TIVELY. ἔΑλλος ἄλλον εἷλκε, one drew up another (alius alium), v. 2. 15. 
Ὁ ἕτερος τὸν ἕτερον παίει, the one strikes the other (alter alterum), vi. 1. 5. 
(d) DistripuTIvety. άλλοι ἄλλοθεν, [different persons in different di- 
rections] some in this direction, and others in that, i. 10.13. Οὗτοι... ἄλλος 
ἄλλα λέγει, these say, one one thing, and another another (393 ἃ, 489d). 
Eixagov δὲ ἄλλοι ἄλλως, alii aliter, 1. 6. 11. 

e. The Greek idiom oddly permits these pronouns (esp. ἄλλος) to be 
used with reference to a larger class than the grammatical subject ex- 
presses : Bées . . καὶ πρόβατα ἄλλα, oxen and [other sheep ! 7. 6. other ani- 
mals, viz. sheep] also sheep, vii. 8. 48. “Exrodev ἄλλων μνηστήρων, (Mi- 
nerva was placed) apart from the rest, the switors, a. 132. See 509 6, 515. 

f. The neuter ἄλλο is often used prospectively with τί, τὶ, οὐδέν, or 
μηδέν, with the ellipsis of a verb, commoniy ποιῶ, πράσσω, πάσχω, εἰμί, 
or γίγνομαι - Τί ἄλλο οὗτοι [se. ἐποίησαν] ἢ ἐπεβούλευσαν ; what else have 
they done but plot against us? Th. 8. 89. Οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ .. ἐθεᾶτο, he did 
nothing but gaze, Cyr. 1. 4. 24. El. . μηδὲν ἄλλο ἢ μετενέγκοις Ib. 6. 39. 

g. Hence the phrase of confident interrogation, ἄλλο τι [sc. ἔστιν] ἤ, or 
the ἤ omitted, ἄλλο τι (also written ἄλλοτι), nonne, [is it any thing else 
than] is dé not certain that : "AXXo τι ἢ οὐδὲν κωλύει; is it not certain that 
nothing forbids? iv. 7. 5. “Addo τι οὖν οἵ ye φιλοκερδεῖς φιλοῦσι τὸ κέρδος; 
do not then, surely, the covetous love gain? Pl. Hipparch. 226 e. 


§ 571. SYNTAX. ἢ. XXIX., L. —= VERB. 287 


CHAPTER TIFF. 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 


I. AGREEMENT OF THE VERB. 


(See also 492s; for the union of Dual and P1., 494; for Compound Con- 
struction, 495s; for Synesis, 498s; for Attraction, 500; for change of Num- 
ber and Person, 501, 503; for construction with the Gen. Partitive, 421.) 


568. Rute XXIX. A Vers agrees with its 
subject in number and person : as, 

᾿Εγὼ λήψομαι, I shall take, i. 7. 9. Σὺ ὁρᾷς, tu vides, ii. 1. 12. "Hodé- 
ve. Δαρεῖος, D. was sick ; Ὕμεϊς δόξετε, you will seem; Διειχέτην τὼ φά- 
λαγγε, the two lines were apart; i. 1.1; 4.15; 8.17. But, 

569. Rute L. The Nevrer Puiurat has regularly its 
VERB in the singular ; as, 

Ta ἐπιτήδεια ἐπέλιπε, provisions failed, iv. 7.1. Πλοῖα δ᾽ ὑμῖν πάρεστιν, 
you have vessels, v. 6. 20. : 

a. Exceptions to Rule L not unfrequently occur ; chiefly, when things 
that have life are denoted, or when the idea of plurality is prominent, or 
in the non-Attic poets for the sake of the metre. ᾿Ενταῦθα ἧσαν τὰ Συεν- 
νέσιος βασίλεια, here was the palace of S. (489), i. 2. 23 (Βασίλεια ἢν 7). 
Ὑποζύγια νέμοιντο ii. 2.15 (Ὑ. ἐλαύνετο iv. 7. 24). Ta τέλη... ἐξέπεμψαν, 
the magistrates sent forth, Th. Φανερὰ ἦσαν καὶ ἵππων καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἴχνη 
πολλά i. 7.17. “Horav δὲ ταῦτα δύο τείχη i. 4. 4ἅ. “ἔργα γένοντο A. 310. 

b. A compound subject with which a neut. pl. adjective agrees, is here 
commonly treated as if itself a single neuter plural (see 496 c). 

c. A few passages occur, in which this rule applies to the dual asa 
form of the plural (494) : Ὅσσε δαίεται, the eyes burn, ¢. 131. 


570. When the verb precedes, it is sometimes singular, as 
if its subject were as yet undetermined, though a masc. or fem.° 
plural follows. In Attic, this use is almost confined to ἔστι and 
ἦν (cf. the use of 2 est and i y a in Fr., and of ἐξ is in Eng.). 

"Hors δὲ ἑπτὰ στάδιοι ἐξ Αβόδου ἐς τὴν ἀπαντίον, it is seven stadia from 


Abydos to the opposite shore, Hdt. 7. 34. “Hor. . ἄρχοντές τε καὶ δῆμος ; 
are there both rulers and people ? Pl. Rep. 462 e. 


‘a. A few other examples of the Nom. pl. mase. or fem. with a verb in 
the sing. occur in the poets : “Yuvor . . τέλλεται, hymns become, Pind. Ol. 
571. Exuiesis, &c. 1. The supszct of the verb is com- 
monly omitted, (a) if it is sufficiently indicated by the affix of 
the verb with the context, and is without emphasis ; or (b), if it 
is a pronoun of the third person, referring to an agent implied 
in the verb itself, or (0) to persons in general, or (d) vaguely to 
some power, thing, or condition of things. In the last case 
the verb is commonly termed impersonal. Thus, | 


288 SYNTAX. ΒΕ. XXIX.— VERB. — ELLIPSIS. § 571. 


(a) “Exel δὲ ἠσθένει Δαρεῖος. ., ἐβούλετο, when 7). was sick, he wished, i. 1.1. 


(b) ᾿Επεὶ ἐσάλπιγξε [sc. ὁ σαλπιγκτής], [when the trumpeter blew] at the 
sound of the trumpet, 1. 2. 17 (cf. iv. 3. 32). ᾿[Εἰκήρυξε τοῖς Ἕλλησι [86. ὁ 
κήρυξ], proclamation was made to the Greeks, iii. 4. 36. 

(c) Δέγουσιν, φασίν, dicunt, aiunt, they (men, people) say. Τοῦτον 
παθεῖν ἔφασαν (cf. TofevOjvai ris ἐλέγετο) i. 8. 20. Ὅπερ πάσχουσιν ἐν 
τοῖς μεγάλοις ἀγῶσι, as men are affected in great crises, Th. 7. 69. 

(d) “Ye, vibe, pluit, ningit, ἐξ rains, it snows. "Exel συνεσκότασε, 
when it grew dark, Cyr. 4. 5.5. Μάχης Set, there is need of a battle, ii. 
3. 5 (see 473 b). Meéde μοι τούτων, [there is to me a care] 7 take care of 
these, ic. 11. 9 (482d, 457). Merapéde μοι, me poenitet, 7 repent, Cyr. 

e. An impersonal verb,*from its very nature, is in the 3d pers. sing.; 
and an adjective joined with it is in the newt. sing., or in the neut. plur. 
Jor the sing. (489 ἃ, 491c¢.) As it expresses an action or state without 
predicating it of any particular person or thing, its force may be commonly 
expressed by a kindred noun with a substantive (or other appropriate) verb: 
Δεῖ [= χρεία ἐστὶν] λόγων, opus est verbis, there is need of words, Cyr. 6. 
1.7. «Παρεσκεύαστο, preparation had been made, Th. 4. 67. 

f. A verb is often introduced as impersonal, of which the subject is 
afterwards expressed in an Inf. or distinct clause : ᾿Ἑδόκει αὐτῷ ἤδη πορεύ- 
εσθαι, it now seemed best to him to march, i. 2.1. Οὐκ ἣν λαβεῖν, [it was 
not for any one to take them] ἐξ was not possible to take them, i. 5. 2. 


572. 2. The suBSTANTIVE VERB is very often omitted, espe- 
cially if it is merely a copula; most freely in the forms ἐστί and 
εἰσί. Its omission is particularly frequent with verbals in -réos, 
in general remarks and relative clauses, and with such words as 
ἀνάγκη, εἰκός, θέμις, καιρός, ὥρα, δῆλος, δυνατός, οἷός τε, ῥάδιος, χαλεπός : 

Tovro οὐ ποιητέον [sc. ἐστίν], hoc non faciendum, this must not be done, 
i. 3. 15. Ὁ μέγας ὄλβος οὐ μόνιμος, great prosperity is not permanent, Eur. 
Or. 340. Ποταμὸν, οὗ τὸ εὖρος στάδιον (cf. οὗ ἣν τὸ ebpos), a river, of which 
the width was a stade, i. 4.1. Ὥρα λέγειν, tt is time to say, i. 3. 12. 

a. Other verbs may be omitted, if supplied by the context, or readily 
understood from the connection ; especially in familiar expressions, and 
familiar verbs, as of coming, going, doing, saying, giving, &c.: Οὔτε σὺ 
ἐκείνας φιλεῖς, οὔτε ἐκεῖναι σέ (sc. φιλοῦσι, 536]. Ἢ ἅμαξα τὸν βοῦν [se. ἕλ- 
" κει], “ΤΊ cart before the horse,” Luc. Ὦ φίλε Φαῖδρε, ποῖ δὴ καὶ πόθεν ; 
Dear P., whither now (are you going) and whence (do you-come)? Pl. 

Ὁ. A verb expressed sometimes suggests a different, and even an oppo- 


site verb: ᾿Αμελήσας ὧνπερ οἱ πολλοί [sc. ἐπιμέλονται}, neglecting what the 
most seek, Pl. Apol. 36 Ὁ. 


573. 3. Personal for Impersonal Construction. a. A verb, 
of which the proper subject is an Jnfinitive or distinct clause, 
often takes for a Nom. the subject of that Inf. or clause. In 
this case, (Ὁ) the Inf. sometimes becomes a Part.; and (c) an 
adjective may be sometimes translated by an adverb, Thus, 

(a) Aéyerat ᾿Απόλλων ἐκδεῖραι Μαρσύαν, A. is said to have flayed M., 
= λέγεται, ᾿Απόλλωνα ἐκδεῖραι Μαρσύαν, it is said, that A. flayed M., 1. 2. 
8 (cf. 1. 8. 7). Δῆλοι ἦσαν, ὅτι ἐπικείσονται, it was evident that they would 
attack, v. 2.26. Δίκαιός εἰμι ἐγὼ κολάζειν, it is just that I punish, Ar. Nub. 


1434. Πολλοὶ δὲ ἐπίδοξοι. . πείσεσθαι, many are likely to suffer, Hat. 6. 
12. 


§ 576. PERSONAL CONSTRUCTION. VOICES. 289 


(b) Ὁ μὲν οὖν πρεσβύτερος παρὼν ἐτύγχανε [= ἐτύγχανε τὸν πρεσβύτερον 
παρεῖναι}, the elder happened [being] to be present, i. 6. ἐξ happened that the 
elder was present. ᾿Αρκέσω θνήσκουσ᾽ ἐγώ, {2 will be enough that I die. 

(c) Δῆλος ἣν ἀνιώμενος, tt was manifest that he was grieved, or, he was 
manifestly grieved. Στέργων δὲ φανερὸς ἦν οὐδένα, he evidently loved no one. 

d. This construction may occur in a dependent clause, and (e) is not 
confined to the finite verb ; while (f) sometimes the two modes of con- 
struction are combined : (4) Ἦσαν δ᾽ αὗται τετρακόσιαι, ws ἐλέγοντο, dua- 
ξαι, these wagons were 400, as [they were said to be] was said, i. 10. 18. 
(6) Αὐτοῦ ὀλίγου ϑδεήσαντος καταλευσθῆναι, when he had wanted little of 
being stoned to death, i. 5. 14. (f) Ἔδοξεν αὐτῷ, βροντῆς γενομένης, σκη- 
πτὸς πεσεῖν eis τὴν πατρῴαν οἰκίαν, καὶ ἐκ τούτου λάμπεσθαι πᾶσαν, ‘a 
thunderbolt seemed to fall, and [it seemed] that the whole house blazed.’ 


574. 4. The verb ἔφη is often separated from its subject by some of 
the words quoted ; and is often thrown in pleonastically : ‘‘ Bi λέγεις,᾽ ἔφη, 
“ὦ Σιμμία," ὁ Κέβης, ‘‘ You speak well, S.,” said C., Pl. Phedo 77 ὁ. 
᾿Αποκρίνεται ὁ Χειρίσοφος" ““ Βλέψον,᾽᾽ ἔφη, ““πρὸς τὰ Spy,” iv. 1. 20. 


II. USE OF THE VOICES. 
(For a general view, see 30, 266.) 


575. Rutz M. The uses of the voices are sometimes 
enterchanged. 


1. A transition of meaning sometimes gives to one voice the 
force of another voice of a different verb. Thus we find, 


a.) The active for the passive: Ed ἀκούω to hear agreeably, and hence, 
from the bewitching sweetness of praise, to be spoken well of: εὖ ἀκούειν 
ὑπὸ... . ἀνθρώπων, to be praised by men (bene audire), vii. 7. 23. ᾿Απέ- 
θανεν ὑπὸ Νικάνδρου, he [died] was killed by N., v. 1.15. Οὕτως ἑάλω, it 
was thus taken, iii. 4,12. See κτείνω, aipéw, 50. ᾿᾿Ασεβείας φεύγοντα (431 c). 

b.) The mipp.e for the active: Kérrw smite, κόπτομαι smite one’s self 
through grief, hence bewatl. Tiw pay, rlvopar take payment, punish. 

9.) The MIDDLE for the passive : ᾿᾿Α΄πώλοντο ὑπό τε τῶν πολεμίων, [per- 
ished] were destroyed by the enemy. ᾿Ακούσομαι κακός, I shall be called vile. 

ἃ.) The passtve for the middle: ’"Exmdayeiod ce, [struck out of my 
wits by fear] fearing you, Soph. “Ow ἀτυχθείς, alarmed at the sight, Z. 468. 


576. 2. As the middle and passive had at first the same  . 


form throughout, and were afterwards separated in the Aor. 
and Fut. only (scarcely in the latter till after the age of Homer), 
it was but natural that the earlier freedom of use should some- 
times prevail, especially in poetry, over the later distinction, 
This occurs chiefly in the use of a shorter for a longer form : 
a.) In the use of the Future MIDDLE for the Future passive (oftener 
in pures than in mutes, rarely in the contract Fut., 305): Οἱ δὲ ἀγαθοὶ 
τιμήσονται, the good will be honored, Th. 2. 87 (τιμηθήσονται 6. 80). Φι- 
λήσεαι, you will be kindly received, a. 123. Ἑϊρξόμεθα, we shall be ex- 
cluded, vi. 6.16. ᾿Ονειδιεῖσθε, you will be taunted, Soph. O. T. 1500. 
b.) In the use of the Aorist PAssIvE for the Aorist middle. This 
occurs chiefly in deponents (206 60), and in other verbs in which the proper 
COMP. GR. 13 8 


290 SYNTAX. ΒΝ: — ‘VOICES. ~~ $576, 


passive is wanting or rare : as (M. marking verbs which have also an Aor. 
mid., less common or differing in sense), (a) Deponents Passive, ἄγαμαι M: 
(ἠγάσθη τε αὐτόν, he admired him, i. 1. 9, τὸν δ᾽ ὁ γέρων ἠγάσσατο, him 
the old man admired, T. 181), βούλομαι will, δύναμαι μ. be able, ἐπίστα- 
μαι understand, οἴομαν M. think ; (B) Other Verbs, δέω (δεηθῆναι. Κύ- 
pov, to have requested C., i. 2. 14), patvw M. madden, στρέφω μ΄. turn. 

c. A few verbs belonging under b, extend the middle force to a Fut: 
pass.: διαλέγομαι (διαλέξομαι Isoc. 233 ο, διαλεχθήσομαι Id. 195 ο, 7 will 
discourse), ἄχθομαι M., ἥδω M. (Οὐκ ἀχθεσθήσῃ wo; . . Ἡσθήσομαι. 
“Will you not be displeased with me?” ““1 shall be pleased.” Cyr.). 

d. The use of the Aor. mid. as passive (except through simple transi- 
tion of meaning, 575) is rare. It scarcely occurs, except in the 2 Aor. 
(originally the Impf. mid. and pass., 278 4) : Δουρὶ τυπεὶς ἢ βλήμενος ἰῷ, 
struck by a spear or shot by an arrow, Δ. 191. Karéoyero ἔρωτι Eur. 


A. ACTIVE. 


577. In many verbs, the active voice is both transztive, 
and intransitive or reflexive, in its use; or both causative and 
immediate. (a) In some, the double use belongs to the same 
tenses ; but (Ὁ) in others, to different tenses, the intransitive 
sense falling especially to the complete tenses and 2 Aor. 
(c) In some verbs, the intransitive or reflexive use may’ be 
explained through the ellipsis of a noun or pronoun (476. 2): 


(a) Στρέψαντες τὸ ἄγημα, turning the corps, Lac. 11.9. Zrpépavres 
ἔφευγον, turning they fled, iv. 3. 32 (cf. στραφέντες ἔφευγον iii. 5. 1). 

(Ὁ) Τοὺς λόχους καθίστατε, station your companies, Cyr. 6. 3. 26. Προ- 
φύλακας καταστήσαντες, having stationed sentinels, iil. 2.1. Karé 
eis τὴν βασιλείαν, His τὴν βασιλείαν καθέστηκεν, was (is) established on the 
throne, i. 1. 8, Cyr. 5. 2. 27. ᾿Απολώλεκεν, has destroyed, iii. 1. 38. 
᾿Απόλωλεν, has perished, Symp. 1. 15. See also, for intrans. 2 Aor. and 
1 Pf, βαίνω, δύω, σβέννῦμι, σκέλλω, φύω, 50; and for intrans. 2 Pf., chiefly 
preteritive, ἄγνῦμι, éyelpw, μαίνω, ὄρνῦμι, πείθω, πράσσω, σήπω, τήκω, 50, 

(c) Ταύτῃ μὲν οὐκ ἣγεν, he did not [lead his army] advance in this direc- 
tion, i. 10. 6 (cf. ἄγοιμι τὸ στράτευμα Vii. 2. 25). Héov7 δούς [sc. ἑαυτόν], 
giving [himself] up to pleasure, Eur. Οὕτω δὲ ἔχει, thus [it has itself] the 
matter stands, v. 6.12. ᾿Ἑἰϊδήλωσε, showed itself, 11. 2. 18. 

d. "Exo used reflexively with an adverb is commonly equivalent to ar 
with an adjective :’ AOduws ἔχοντες = ᾿Αθῦμοι ὄντες, being disheartened. The 
poets even join ἔχω with an adj.: Ἔχ᾽ ἥσυχος, [hold still] be quiet, Eur. | 


B. MIppie. 


578. The middle voice, like the active, may be either tran- 
sitive or intransitive. Its reflexive sense is far from being uni- 
form either in kind or force. It not only varies in different 
verbs, but often in the same verb when used in different con- 
nections ; and is extensively not expressed in translation, but 
left to be understood. It is, 


a.) Direct ; so that the middle is equivalent to the active with the . 
Ace, of a reflexive pronoun: Aotrar [= λούει ἑαυτόν], lavatur, he 18 wash- 


§ 583. ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. ᾿ | 297 


ing himself, or bathing, Cyr. 1. 8. 11, Πάντες μὲν ἠλείφοντο, they all 
anointed themselves, Hel. 4. 5. 4. «Δνόμην, ὑπέλυσα δ᾽ ἑταίρους, ι. 463. 


579. ».) Inpreecr ; so that the middle is equivalent to the active 
with the Dat. or Gen. of a reflexive pronoun: Στρατηγοὺς μὲν ἑλέσθαι 
[= ἑλεῖν ἑαυτοῖς} ἄλλους, τὰ δ᾽ ἐπιτήδεια ἀγοράζεσθαι, to [take for them- 
561γ685] choose other generals, and buy (for themselves) provisions, i. 3. 14. 
Tlatéa . . σὲ ποιοῦμαι, 7 make you my son, Cyr. 4. 6. 2. Ὅτι περὶ πλεί- 
στου ποιοῖτο, that he [made it to himself] esteemed it of the utmost con- 
sequence (582), i. 9. 7. Tpirny ἐσηγάγετο γυναῖκα... τὴν δευτέρην ἀπο- 
πεμψάμενος, he took to himself a third wife, having [sent from himself] 
divorced the second, Hdt. 6. 63. Κῦρον δὲ μεταπέμπεται, he sends for 
Cyrus (to come to himself), i. 1. 2. Τοῦτον φυλάττεσθαι, tv watch him 
for your own safety, to be on your guard against him, i. 6.9. ᾿Αποδί- 
δομαι [give up for one’s own profit], 801, τίθεμαι or γράφομαι νόμον make 
a law for one’s self ; βουλεύομαι give counsel to one’s self, deliberate ; τυμω- 
péopar take vengeance for one’s self, punish. See xpdw 50. 


580. c.) ΒΕΟΙΡΕΟΟΑΙ, ; so that the middle is equivalent to the 
active with a reciprocal pronoun: Μαχόμενοι καὶ βασιλεὺς καὶ Kipos, 
‘fighting with each other,’ i. 8. 27. "Audi ὧν εἶχον διαφερόμενοι, “ quar- 
relling,’ iv. 5.17. Διηλλάξαντο [τοὺς ἵππους], exchanged, Cyr. 8. 3. 32. 
— Hence the middle is extensively used in expressing actions which imply 
MUTUAL RELATION ; as those of agreement and contention, of greeting and 
companionship, of intercourse and traffic, of question and answer, &e. 


S81. 4.) Cavsarrve; so that the middle denotes what a person 
procures to be done for himself : ᾿Εγὼ γάρ σε ταῦτα... ἐδιδαξάμην, 7 had 
you taught these things, Cyr. 1. 6. 2. Θώρᾶκα ἔποιήσατο, she had ὦ corse- 
let made, Ib. 6.1. 51. . Μισθόω let for hire, μισθόομαι [have let to one’s 
self] hire: πλοῖον μισθωσάμενος vi. 4.13. ᾿Αποδώσουσιν οἱ δανεισάμενοι 
τοῖς δανείσασι, the borrowers shall pay the lenders, Dem. 926. 13. — The 
active is often so used, as in other languages, without the reflex reference. 


582. 4.) SuBsEcTIVE; so that ‘the middle represents the action as 
more nearly concerning the subject, than the active (cf. 579). Thus, 
(a) it may mark the close connection of the agent with that which is 
acted on ; (B) if the active is a cawsative verb, the middle may form the 
corresponding immediate ; (y) if the active expresses an external or phys- 
ical action, the middle may express the analogous internal or mental action ; 
(8) if the active Se a person as having a particular office, condi- 
tion, or character, the middle may represent him as making it more his 
own by acting in accordance with it. 

(a). “Exw have (in general), ἔχομαι have hold of, cling to: ἑξόμεθα αὐτοῦ, 
we shall keep hold of him, vii. 6. 41. AapBdvw take, λαμβάνομαι take 
hold of. See 426. (B) Γεύω make another taste, γεύομαι taste for one’s 
self (432a). Tladw cause to cease, παύομιοι cease: ἔπαυσε μὲν τούτων Tod- 
λούς Mem. 1. 2. 2; ταῦτα εἰπὼν ἐπαύσατο. 3.12. Φοβέω frighten, φοβέ- 
opar fear; φαίνω show, φαίνομαι appear. (y) Σκοπέω view, σκοπέομαι 
consider (see v. 2. 20); ἀγάλλω adorn, ἀγάλλομαι pride one’s self; φράζξω 
tell, φράζομαι tell one’s self, reflect. (8) ἸΤολιτεύω, ταμιεύω, be a citizen 
(steward), πολιτεύομαι, Taprevopar, act the citizen (steward), manage state 
(or other) affairs: ταμιεύεσθαι, to parcel out (as a steward), ii. 5. 18. 


583. Remarks. 1. If the reflex action is direct, it is oftener ex- 
pressed by a reflexive pronown with the active, or sometimes middle ; and. 


292 | SYNTAX, — PASSIVE VOICE. Ἂς 8 588, 


in other cases, the pronoun is often added to make the expression more 
plain or emphatic : “Exeivos ἀπέσφαξεν ἑαυτόν, he slew himself, Dem. 127, 3. 
Ἑαυτὸν ἐπισφάξασθαι, that he slew himself, i. 8. 29. ᾿Επισῴαλεστέραν αὐ- 
Tip. . κατεσκεύακεν ἑαυτῷ, he has rendered tt less secwre for himself, Dem. 


584. 2. As the Future so extensively denotes purpose (what a per- 
son will please himself by doing), it is the most subjective of the tenses ; 
and hence, in so many verbs (266 6), the middle here takes the place of 
the active. (a) In some of these, the Fut. act. is not used at all; and 
(0) in others, only as a second, usually later. or less common, form. 
(c) In some, the action of the body is thus connected with the state of 
the mind. E. g. (a) γιγνώσκω and οἶδα know, μανθάνω learn, εἰμί be, πά- 
oxw suffer, θνήσκω die, λαγχάνω and τυγχάνω obtain ; (Ὁ) βιόω live, πνέω 
breathe, ἁμαρτάνω err, δείδω fear, Taw endure, θαυμάζω wonder, péw flow, 
τίκτω bear ; (0) ἀκούω hear, dpdw see, ἄδω sing, Bodw shout, γελάω laugh, 
yodw wail, κλαίω weep, ὄμνῦμι swear, ἐσθίω and τρώγω eat. See 50. 


585. 3. In many cases, the reflex reference is so obvious, or so in- 
distinct, that it may be either expressed or omitted without affecting the 
sense ; that is, the active or the middle may be employed at pleasure : 
Tlodd φέροντες, Μικρὸν φερομένων, bringing much (little), Mem. 3. 14. 1. 
*Eodyaye γυναῖκα, ᾿Εἰσηγάγετο γυναῖκα, take (took) a wife, Hdt. 5. 40, 
6. 63.— In some verbs, the use of the mid. form is poetic, especially Epic. 


C. PASSIVE. 


586. The passive voice has for its sunsEcT a complement 
of the active, commonly (a) a direct, but sometimes (Ὁ) an in- 
direct complement. (0) Any other word governed by the 
active, and not in apposition with this, may remain unchanged 
with the passive. (ἃ) The SUBJECT OF THE ACTIVE is expressed, 
with the passive, by the Gen. with a preposition (commonly ὑπό, 
but sometimes ἀπό, ἐξ, παρά, or πρός), or (e), less frequently, by 
the simple Gen. or Dat., or (f) yet more rarely (chiefly in poetry, 
especially Ep.), by the Dat. with ὑπό. Thus, 


(a) Act. governing Acc. Περιεῤῥεῖτο δ᾽ αὐτὴ ὑπὸ τοῦ Μάσκα, it was 
surrounded by the Mascas [= περιέῤῥει δ᾽ αὐτὴν ὁ Μάσκας, the M. sur- 
rounded it}, i. 5. 4. (Ὁ) Act. governing GEN. Κατεφρονήθην br αὐτοῖν, 
I was despised by them [= κατεφρονησάτην pov, they despised me,) Pl. 
Act. governing DAT. Οὐκέτι δὲ ἀπειλοῦμαι, GAN ἤδη ἀπειλῷ ἄλλοις, 7 am 
no longer threatened, but I now threaten others (452 4), Symp. 4. 31. 

(Ὁ Ἵππέων ὁ λόφος ἐνεπλήσθη, the height was filled with horsemen (414), 
i. 10.12. Ei θαλάττης εἴργοιντο (405). δΔοθῆναί ot ταύτας, that these 
should be given to him (454 6), i. 1. 8. ΜΜουσικὴν . . παιδευθείς, musicam 
doctus, having been taught music (480c), Pl. But Στρατηγὸν δὲ αὐτὸν 
ἀπέδειξε πάντων (480 a), becomes Στρατηγὸς δὲ πάντων ἀπεδείχθη, 1. 9. 7. 

(4) “Ὑπὸ δούλου ἄρχεσθαι, to be ruled [under] by a slave, Pl. Lys. 208 ὁ. 
Τινῶμαι “ ἑκάστων ἐλέγοντο, opinions were expressed [from] by each, Th. 
3. 36. Ἔκ βασιλέως δεδομέναι, given [from] by the king, i. 1.6. ΤΠ 
πάντων ὁμολογεῖται, Ὁμολογεῖται πρὸς πάντων, it is conceded by all, i. 9. 1, 
20. (ὁ) See 484, 461. (ἢ Ὑπὸ τῷ πατρὶ τεθραμμένος, brought up 
{under} dy his father, Pl. Rep. 558d. ᾿Εφόβηθεν ὑφ᾽ “Exropt O. 637. 


§.591, RULE XXX, —- USE OF THE TENSES. 293 


587. Remarks. 1. When the active has more than one com- 
plement, it is commonly determined which shall be the subject of the 
passive by one or the other of the following preferences : (a) The passive 
prefers, as its subject, a direct to an indirect complement of the active. 
(b) The passive prefers, as its subject, the name of a person to that of 
a thing. If these preferences conflict, sometimes the one prevails, and. 
sometimes the other. (a) Odpaxes αὐτοῖς ἐπορίσθησαν, they were furnished 
with breastplates (464 ὁ). (Ὁ) Ot τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐπιτετραμμένοι τὴν φυλα- 
κήν, those of the Athenians who had been intrusted with the guard, Th. (cf. 
τοῖσι ἐπετέτραπτο ἡ φυλακή, to whom the guard had been intrusted, Hadt.). 

2. The latter preference often leads to the construction in § 481. 


588. 3. The passive is sometimes the converse of the middle rather 
than of the active; and hence deponents may have a passive: Μισθωθῆναι 
δὲ οὐκ ἐπὶ τούτῳ ἔφασαν, ‘that they had not been hired,’ i. ὃ, 1 (581). 
Odpaxas εὖ εἰργασμένας, corsclets well made, Mem. 3. 10. 9. 


589. 4. Ifan active or middle which has no complement is changed 
to a passive, it becomes, of cowrse, IMPERSONAL (571d); and it may be- 
come so, with an indirect complement : ὙὙπῆρκτο δ᾽ αὐτοῦ, a beginning of 
it had been made [= ὑπῆρξαν αὐτοῦ, they had begun tt], Th. 1. 98. Μάτην 
ἐμοὶ κεκλαύσεται, 1 shall have wept in vain, Ar. Nub. 1486, . 


III. USE OF THE TENSES, 
(For a general view, see 30b, 267.) 


590. Rute XXX. The DEFINITE TENSES ex- 
press the action as doing αὐ the time; the IN- 
DEFINITE, simply as performed in the time; and 
the COMPLETE, as complete at the time. In the In- 
dicative, this time is marked as PRESENT or FUTURE 
by the primary tenses, and as past by the secondary ; 
in the other modes, it is not marked. 


a. Hence the tense forms of the Indicative are distinguished, in gen- 
eral, as chronic (χρονικός relating to time) ; and those of the other modes, 
as-achronic (ἀ- not). The Ind. Pres, and Impf. (more fully named Pres- 
ent Imperfect and Past Imperfect, since that which is doing is still unfin- 
ished) unite, for the other modes, in a tense which is simply imperfect ; 
and in like manner, the Ind. Perf. and Plup. (which might properly be 
termed Present Perfect and Past Perfect) unite in a tense which is simply 
perfect. Another tense is commonly a Past Aorist (Indefinite, 267 d) in 
the Ind., but simply an Aorist tense in the other modes; and there are 
two Futures, a Futwre Aorist or Indefinite, and a Future Perfect, which, 
in respect to absolute time (607), are achronic out of the Indicative. 


A. DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 


591. The indefinite tenses present a simple (as it were, a 
momentary) view of the action as an undivided whole; the 


294 SYNTAX. R. XXX. — TENSES. § 591. 


definite tenses present a more extended view of it as in pro- 
gress (begun, going on, possibly never completed). 

a. The former are distinguished in general as narrative, and the latter 
as descriptive tenses. If action is conceived of as motion in a straight line, 
the definite tenses may be said to present a side view of-this line, so that 
it is seen in its full length ; but the indefinite tenses to present only an 
end view of it, so that it appears as a mere point. -Thus, 


Definite View : ἔγραφε, Indefinite View : ἔγραψε, 
scribebat, he was writing, scripsit, he wrote. 


592. Hence the action is represented, 


1.) By the definite tenses, as continued or prolonged ; but 
by the Aorist, as momentary or transient: or by the former, as 
a habit or continued course of conduct ; but by the latter, as a 
single act : 


Τοὺς μὲν οὖν πελταστὰς ἐδέξαντο οἱ βάρβαροι καὶ ἐμάχοντο " ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐγ- 
γὺς ἦσαν οἱ ὁπλῖται, ἐτράποντο - καὶ οἱ μὲν πελτασταὶ εὐθὺς εἵποντο διώ- 
κοντες " the barbarians received the targeteers (momentary) and fought with 
them (continued) ; but when now the hoplites were near, they turned to 
Jlight (momentary) ; and the targeteers immediately followed pursuing 
them (continued) ; v. 4. 24. Λαβών..., ἔχων, having taken (momentary), 
having (continued), i. 1. 2. ᾿Επεὶ δὲ εἶδον αὐτὸν, οἵπερ πρόσθεν προσεκύ- 
νουν, καὶ τότε προσεκύνησαν, when those saw him who previously used to 
bow before him (habit), they bowed even then (single act), i. 6. 10. 

a. Any dwelling of the mind upon the agent, mode, or circumstances of 
an action, or any attempt at graphic description, inclines to the use of the 
definite tenses ; ᾿Απεκρίναντο (Κλέαρχος δ᾽ ἔλεγεν), they answered (and Cle- 
archus was the speaker), ii. 3. 21. 

b. In the IMPERATIVE, the momentary character of the Aor. is peculi- 
arly favorable to vivacity, energy, and earnestness of expression : ᾿Ακού- 
σατε οὗν μου πρὸς θεῶν, hear me, then, by the gods! v. 7. 5. 

c. The Aor. sometimes gives more vivacity or force to the sequel of an- 
other tense : “Os τε καὶ ἄλκιμον ἄνδρα φοβεῖ καὶ ἀφείλετο νίκην, who puts to 
Hight the valiant man, and SNATCHES victory from his grasp, P. 177. 

d. In verbs denoting state, the Aor. usually expresses entrance into the 
state (becoming), and the definite tenses continuance in it (being): Bact- 
λεῦσαι ἄνδρα τυφλὸν, . . ἐπὶ τούτου βασιλεύοντος, that a blind man became 
king, and while he was reigning, Hdt. 2. 187. So βουλεύω, πλουτέω, I am 
senator, rich, ἐβούλευσα, ἐπλούτησα, I became senator, rich. 


593. 2.) By the definite tenses, as doing at the time of, or 
until another action ; but by the Aorist, simply as done im tts 


own time : 

*ExropetOnoav σταθμοὺς τέτταρας, ἡνίκα δὲ τὸν πέμπτον ἐπορεύοντο, εἶδον 
βασίλειόν τι, they made four day’s-marches, and while they were making 
the fifth, they saw a palace, iii. 4. 23. 

594. 3.) By the definite tenses, as begun, attempted, 
designed, or imminent (doing, not done) ; but by the Aorist, as 
accomplished (done) : 


ᾧ 598. DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. . ἫΝ 295 


. Κλέαρχος rods αὑτοῦ στρατιώτας ἐβιάζετο ἰέναι + οἱ δὲ αὐτόν τε ἔβαλλον. 
.. Μιωρὸν ἐξέφυγε τὸ μὴ καταπετρωθῆναι, ὕστερον δ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἔγνω, ὅτι οὐ δυνή- 
σεται βιάσασθαι. C. attempted to force his soldiers to proceed ; but they 
began to stone him. He narrowly escaped being stoned to death (the com- 
pletion of their act) ; and afterwards, when he saw that he should not be 
able to prevail by force (to accomplish his attempt). i. 3. 1s. _”HareBov 
αὐτοὺς, kal obs ἔπεισα, J tricd to persuade them, and those whom I succeeded 
in persuading, Cyr. Δῶρα ϑίδωσι, he (is for giving) offers gifts, I. 261. 
a. Hence the definite tenses are often used with a negative to deny the 
attempt as well as the accomplishment of an action: Κλέαρχος οὐκ ἀνεβί- 
Batev ἐπὲ τὸν λόφον, C. did not undertake to march upon the hill, i. 10. 14. 
_ b. A person is often spoken of as having done what he has attempted to 
do: Δίκαια γὰρ τόνδ᾽ εὐτυχεῖν κτείναντά με; ‘having slain me,’ Soph. 


595. 4.) By the definite tenses, as ὑμέγοαμοίογψ ; but by 


the Aorist, as conclusive : 


_ Ἠρώτων Κῦρον, . . ὁ δ᾽ ἀπεκρίνατο, they asked Cyrus, and he answered, 
i. 38. 20. ᾿Ακούσαντες ταῦτα ἐπείθοντο καὶ διέβησαν i. 4. 16. 
a. Verbs of asking, inquiring, commanding, forbidding, deliberating, 
attempting, endeavoring, besieging, and some others, are introductory in 
their very nature, and hence incline to the use of the definite tenses. 


596. Fururr. The dim, shadowy future has little occasion 
for precise forms to mark the state of the action. It is com- _ 
monly enough to mark the action simply as future. 

a. Hence the inflection of most verbs has but a single Fut., the in- 
definite ; leaving the definite and complete Futures, if they require to be 
distinguished from this, to be expressed by a Participle and substantive 
verb (267 6) : Σκῦρος ἐξαρκοῦσά μοι ἔσται τὸ λοιπόν, Scyros shall hereafter 
content me (continued, 592), Soph. “Avépa κατακανόντες ἔσεσθε, vii. 6. 36. 


597. In Greek, as in other languages, the Fut. furnishes. indirect 
and variously expressive forms for the IMPERATIVE: (a) Affirmation, Ὡς 
οὖν ποιήσετε, καὶ πείθεσθέ μοι, thus [you will do] do, and listen to me, Pl. 
Prot. (Ὁ) Negation, Οὐ κλέψεις, tho shalt not steal, Rom. 13. 9. Μηδὲν 
τῶνδ᾽ ἐρεῖς, not a word of this! Aisch. Th. 250. (0) Question, "Age τις... 
τὸν βοτῆρα; [will] let some one bring the herdman, Soph. O. T. 1069. 
(4) Negative Question, Οὐκ ἄξεθ᾽ ws τάχιστα; καὶ... ἄφετε μόνην, [will you 
not] carry her away instantly, and leave her alone, Soph. Ant. 888. 
(e) Doubly Negative Question, Οὐ μὴ λαλήσεις, GAN ἀκολουθήσεις ἐμοί; 
[Won't you not talk] Don’t talk, but follow me, Ar. Nub. 505. 


. 598. a. A future action may be represented more expressly as close 
at hand, or as connected with destiny, necessity, will, purpose, expectation, 
&c., by the verbs μέλλω, ἐθέλω or θέλω, βούλομαι, Set, χρή, &c., with the 
Inf. This Inf. may be Pres., Aor. or Fut., according to the view taken 
of the action in respect to definiteness and nearness: Μέλλω γὰρ ὑμᾶς δι- 
δάξειν, I am about to teach you, Pl. ‘O σταθμὸς ἔνθα ἔμελλε καταλύειν, 
the station where he was to halt, i. 8.1. Οὐκ ἐθέλω ἐλθεῖν, 1 am not will- 
ang to go, or I will not go, i. 3.10. Βουλεύεσθαι, ὅ τι χρὴ ποιεῖν Ib. 11. 
b. The ideas of destiny, necessity, purpose, &c. are often expressed by 
the simple Fut. Especially is the Fut. Part., both with and without ds, 
used continually to express purpose, particularly with verbs of motion : 
ΤΊ διαφέρουσι. ., εἴ γε πεινήσουσι Kal διψήσουσι ; what advantage have 
they, if they must hunger and thirst? Mem. Οἷσθ᾽ οὖν ὃ δράσεις, do you 


296 8YNTAX. 8. XXX.— TENSES.— COMPLETE.  § 598, 


know what you must do? Eur. Συλλαμβάνει Kipor ὡς ἀποκτενῶν, he ap- 
prehends C. [as about to put him to death] with the design of putting him 
to death, i. 1. 3. "᾿Ἐπεμψέ τινα ἐροῦντα, he sent one to say, ii. 5. 2. 

6. Instead of the Fut. Part., the Pres. is sometimes employed to denote 
purpose, according to 594, especially with verbs of motion : Tair’ ἐκδικά- 
Lov ἦλθον, I went to avenge this wrong, Eur. Sup. 154. 


B. CoMPLETE. 


599. a. While the indefinite tenses represent the action 
simply as performed im the time contemplated, the complete 
tenses represent it as already finished (as having been already 
performed) at the time contemplated. In the former, the view 
is directed to the action simply; in the latter, it is specially 
directed to the completion of the action, and to the state conse- 
quent upon its performance. Hence arise two special uses of 
the complete tenses: (b) the one to mark emphatically the 
entire (often emmediate) completion or terménation of an action ; 
(c) the other, to express the continuance of the effects of an action. 

(4) Τοιαῦτα μὲν πεποίηκε, such things has he done, i. 6. 9. (Ὁ) Ἢ φεύ- 
yew. . ἣ ταχὺ κατακεκαῦσθαι, cither to flec, or to be quickly and utterly 
consumed, Cyr. (οὐ Εἶπον τὴν θύραν κεκλεῖσθαι, they commanded the door 
{to be closed and to remain so} to be kept closed, Hel. “Ὅμηρον ἔγωγε μά- 
λιστα τεθαύμακα, Homer I have most admired (as I still do), Mem. 1. 4. 3. 

ἃ. The Perf. παν. commands the completeness of the action ; and hence 
may forbid its continuance, or may command emphatically its full (often 


instant and final) performance: Tatra. . πεπαίσθω, Jet [so much have been 
played] the sport end here, Pl. ἹΠεπειράσθω, let a full trial be made, Ar. 


G00. a. As the object of the complete tenses is to ascribe the conse- 
quences of the action, rather than narrate it, the transition in § 268 is 
natural and easy ; and we find verbs in different stages of the transition. 
Compare the Pres., Aor., and Preteritive, in examples like the following: 
Θνήσκω, 7 am dying, Eur. Alc. 284; εθνᾶσιν of θανόντες, those who 
have died (the past event) are dead (the state consequent upon the event), 
Ib. 541. (0) The preteritive use has a far wider extent than is commonly 
recognized. In some verbs, however, it is dialectic or doubtful: βεβήκει, 
she ascended, or had ascended, A. 2213; βεβλήκει, he hit, or had hit, HK. 66. 


601. Forure Perrecr. a. The Fut. Perf. expresses the 
sense of the Perf. with a change of the time; that is, it rep- 
resents the state consequent upon the completion of an action 
as future. (b) As it carries the mind at once over the act 
itself to its completion and results, it is sometimes used to ex- 
press a future action as immediate, rapid, or decisive. (6) In 
some verbs these uses pass, more or less decidedly, into a pre- 
teritive use (268). _ 
_ (8) Οὐ μήν roe μέλεος εἰρήσεται αἶνος, your praise (already spoken) shal’ 

not have been spoken in vain, Ψ. 795. Οὐδεὶς... μετεγγραφήσεται, ἀλλ, 
ὥσπερ ἣν τὸ πρῶτον, ἐγγεγράψεται, no one shall be enrolled (the simple act) 


§ 604. INTERCHANGE, —’GENERIO USE. 297 


elsewhere, but shall remain enrolled (the state consequent upon the act of 
enrolment) as he was at first, Id, Eq. 1370. (Ὁ) Noulgfere. . ἐμέ τε κατα- 
κεκόψεσθαι, καὶ ὑμᾶς οὐ πολὺ ἐμοῦ ὕστερον, be assured that I shall be im- 
mediately cut down, and you not long after, i. 5.16. (c) Πᾶν εἰρήσεται, 
the whole [shall have been] shall be stated, Hdt. 4. 16 (cf. aabove). Ilerpa- 
σεται, he shall be sold, vii. 1. 36 (the classic Fut. pass. of πιπράσκω, 50). 


C. INTERCHANGE. 


602. Rutz N. The uses of the TENSES are often inter- 
changed. 


a. This may be referred (1.) to generic use, especially where the forma- 
tion is defective ; (11.) to gnomic use; (I11.) to varied use in respect to 
relative and absolute time ; (1v.) to a conception of the mind varying from 
the reality of things, or to the choice of a less direct form of expression. 

b. From the order in which the Greek tenses were historically devel- 
oped (271s), the Pres., in its widest generic sense, includes all the tenses ; 
the Impf., all the past tenses ; the Fut., all the future tenses ; the Aor., 
all the indefinite and complete tenses, except those that are future ; and 
the Perf., all the complete tenses. 

c. The distinction of generic and specific belongs not merely to the 
tense-forms, but also to the ideas_which these forms represent. Thus the 
idea of PRESENT TIME, which applies specifically only to the passing 
moment, extends in its generic application to any period including this 
moment ; and we speak of the present month, the present century, &c. In 
its widest extent, therefore, it includes all time. (d) Hence general truths 
or statements, existing states or habits, and oft-recurring facts, belong ap- 
propriately to present time: Tleret τοι κόρος ὕβριν, satiety begets insolence, 
Theog. 153. A tense so employed to convey a general truth or state- 
ment is termed gnomic (γνωμικός sententious). . 


603. 1 Generic Uss. 1. Existing tenses are used 
generically to supply the places.of those that are wanting. 


a. The place of a Present Indefinite is commonly supplied by the-Pres. 
Definite, as the generic present tense; but (b) sometimes, with stronger 
expression, by the Aor., as the generic indefinite tense. The latter, as the 
tense for the momentary, belongs especially to the vehement utterance of 
lively feeling or quick thought (chiefly in 1 sing.). Thus, (a) Τὸν ἄνδρα 
ὁρῶ, 7 sce the man, i. 8. 26. (Ὁ) “Ἔσθην ἀπειλαῖς, ἐγέλασα ψολοκομπίαις / 
I smile at your threats, I laugh at your fury! Ar. Eq. See 608 ἃ. 

c. In some verbs, (a) the Pres. supplies the place of a Fut.; or (B) the 
Impf., of an Aor.: (a) see 305f, 826 ο, 609¢; and elu, νέομαι, xéw, Bidw, 
διδάσκω, κεῖμαι, in 50. (B) Ἦν was, yew went, ἔφην said (ἔφησα differing 
in sense, 50), &c.: Πέρσης μὲν ἔφη εἶναι, he said that he was a Persian, iv. 
4, 17 (ὁ δὲ εἶπεν Ib. 18). ᾿Απήει and ἀπῆλθον, deserted, i. 9. 29. 


604. 2. The definite tenses may express continuance (a) through 
a period coming down to their proper time (where we use the Perf. or 
Plup.) ; or (b) through a period extending on from this time (where the 
Fut. might be used): (a) Σ᾽ ῴῷν ξυνοικῶ πόλλ᾽ ἔτη, J [am] have been living 
with you many years, Ar. Pl. 487. Tair ἄρ ἐφυλάττου πάλαι, this then 
you had been guarding against so long, Ar. Eq. 125. (Ὁ) Mévopev ἕως ἂν 
. - ληφθῶμεν ; [do we wait] shall we wait until we have been taken ? Th. 


COMP. GR. 185 


298 SYNTAX. R. N.— INTERCHANGE OF TENSES. ὃ 605. 


605. 3. Unless the attention is specially directed to the 
effect of an action, the generic Aor. more frequently supplies the 
place of the specific Perf. and Plup. (602 b), as a more familiar, 
more vivacious, and often a shorter or more euphonic form : 


Νυνὶ δὲ Θετταλοῖς. . ἐβοήθησε, and now it has aided the Thessalians, 
Dem. 22. 7. Ταύτην τὴν πόλιν ἐξέλιπον οἱ ἐνοικοῦντες, this city its inhab- 
itants had left, i. 2. 24. Νῦν δ᾽ ἦλθον, 7 have now come, a. 194. 

a. This use prevails most in the active, as the voice which gives most 
prominence to the action itself (599 s) ; and is there especially frequent in 
the participle: Σιυλλέξας στράτευμα, ἐπολιόρκει Μίλητον, having collected 
an army, he besieged M.,i- 1.7. Τοῦτον διαβὰς ἐξελαύνει i. 2. 6. 

b. The Aor. is so used in immediate connection with the Perf. or 
Plup., especially as a sequel (cf. 592 c): ᾿Αποδεδρακότες πατέρας καὶ μητέ- 
pas, οἱ δὲ καὶ τέκνα καταλιπόντες, having run away from fathers and moth- 
ers, and others having even left children, vi. 4. 8. 

c. The use of the Aor. rather than the Plup., especially prevails after 
temporal and causal connectives, and in other dependent clauses : ᾿Επεὶ 
δὲ συνῆλθον, ἔλεξε, when they had assembled, he spake, Cyr. 6. 2. 18. 


606. u. Gyomic Use. Past and future tenses may be 
used gnomically, as well as the Present (602 c). 


a. If we can say ‘‘ The wisest err” (the most general expression of the 
truth), we can also say ‘‘ The wisest have erred” (the lesson of experience), 
or ‘* The wisest will err” (a forethought for the future). Thus, Ὃ ἐπιεικὴς 
ἀνὴρ. . τὸ τεθνάναι οὐ δεινὸν ἡγήσεται, the good man will not account death 
an evil, Pl. Rep. 387d. Kar@av’ ὁμῶς ὅ τ᾽ ἀεργὸς ἀνὴρ ὅ τε πολλὰ ἐορ- 
γώς, the indolent and energetic [have died] die alike, I. 320. 

b. GNomic Aorist. Especial force, vividness, or actwality of expres- 
sion is often given to a general statement by the use of the Aor. (cf. 592, 
603 Ὁ, 605): ᾿Ανὴρ δ᾽ ὅταν τοῖς ἔνδον ἄχθηται ξυνὼν, ἔξω μολὼν ἔπαυσε καρ- 
diay dons,when a man becomes weary of the society of those at home, going 
abroad he [has relieved] relieves his heart at once of tis disgust, Kur. Med. 

c. The general statements in similes are often expressed by the Aor., 
especially in Homer : Ἤριπε δ᾽, ὡς ὅτε τις δρῦς ἤριπεν, he fell, as when an 
oak falls, Il. 482. See I. 33; and for Aor. with Pres. or Perf., I. 23. 
A. 62, H. 4. (4) A like use of the Fut. is doubtful or rare: Ὥς δ᾽ ὅτε 
κινήσει Ζέφυρος, as when the west-wind shall stir, B. 147 v. l. (for κινήσῃ). 


607. “πι. Assoture ΑΝῸ Revative Time. The time of an 
action is absolute, as simply viewed from the time of speaking 
or writing ; but relative, as not so viewed, but from the time 
of another action. 

_ a. The tense conforms to relative time far oftener in Greek than in 
English : in Ἔλεγεν ὅτι τὸ στράτευμα ἀποδίδωσι, he said that he [resigns] 
resigned the army, vii. 6. 8, ἀποδίδωσι conforms to the relative time, as 
the time of saying and resigning was the same, but resigned conforms to 
the absolute time, as the action was past when the author was writing. 

608. iv. Sywnesis, &c. The relations of time have nothing 
sensible to fix the conceptions of the mind. It ranges there- 
fore with freedom through all time, past, present, and future ; 
and, at pleasure, transfers in thought the events of one period 
to another. Re ver 


$613. © RULE XXXI.—USE OF THE MODES. 6.299 


a, Even if the events are viewed ‘in their proper time, a less direct 
mode of stating them sometimes spares the feelings, or is deemed more 
refined, courteous, or politic. 


609. 1. Vision. That which is past or future is often 
seen in the imagination as present, and is so expressed. This 
figure of speech is called vision ; and the present tense so used 
is termed (a) the ΗΙΒΤΟΒΙΟ or (Ὁ) the PROPHETIC PRESENT, 
according as it expresses the past or the future : 

(a) Τῷ τρόπῳ Sidddvrar; how does (did) he perish? Soph. (Ὁ) Μιᾷ 
μάχῃ τήνδε Te προσκτᾶσθε, in one battle you (will) win this land, Th. 4. 95. 
: @. That which 7s to be may be viewed as already on the way : "Epyerar 
ὥρα, the hour is coming, Jn. 4. 21. Etps Φθίηνδε,. I [am going] shall go to 
Phthia, A. 169. — This became the regular use of the Ind.efw. See 603 c. 


610. 2. a. A present or even future action, in view of the 
nearness or certainty of its completion, may be spoken of as 
already accomplished ; and (Ὁ) that which is present or even 
past is sometimes expressed by the Future, as though not yet 
_ finished, or for the sake of less direct expression (608 a) : 

(a) “Av τοῦτο νικῶμεν, πάνθ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται, if we conquer this, we have 
accomplished all, i. 8. 12.. (Ὁ) Todpdv. . σπέρμ᾽ ἰδεῖν βουλήσομαι, J [shall] 
‘choose to learn my origin, Soph. Alrjoouwat, I [will] beseech, Eur. Ale. 


She 6 ἃ past tense may be used, in speaking of that which ts pres- 
‘ent as related to some past opinion, feeling, remark, action, event, or obliga- 
tion : Κύπρις οὐκ dp ἣν θεός, Venus [was] is not then a goddess (as we sup- 
-posed), Eur. ἔξιφυν ἀμήχανος, I [was born] am by nature incapable, 
‘Soph. (8 50 φύω). Ὥφελε μὲν Κῦρος ζῆν, [C. ought to be living] Would 
that Cyrus were living / ii. 1. 5. Οὐκ ἐχρῆν μέντοι σκοπεῖν ; Apol. 3. 


612. 4. The tense belonging to the effect of an action is sometimes 
‘used for the tense of the action itself (Pres. and Impf. for Perf. and Plup., 
or Aor.). So commonly in ἥκω and οἴχομαι (1 am come, I am gone) ; 
-often, as in Eng., in verbs of hearing, learning, and saying ; and some- 
.times in others : Eis καλὸν ἥκετε, you [are here, having come] have come 
‘opportunely, iv. 7. 3. Κῦρος δὲ οὕπω ἧκεν, C. had not yet come, i. 5. 12. 
“Qs ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν (audimus), as we have heard [are informed], v. 5. 8. 


IV. USE OF THE MODES. 


(For a general view, see 30 ο, 269.) 


A. INTELLECTIVE. 


613. Rute XXXI. The INDICATIVE expresses 
JSact ; the SUBJUNCTIVE, present contingency; and 
the OpraTIve, past contingency. 


a. The Ind. presents the action as DECIDED IN POINT OF FACT (it és 
or is not, has been or has not been, will be or will not be, &c.), whether this 
decision is declared or asked about, is known or unknown, is according to 


800 SYNTAX. R. XXXI.— MODES.—conTINGENCY. § 613. 


the terms of the statement or contrary to them ; but the Subj. and Opt. 
present the action as UNDECIDED, and have respect to its CONTINGENCY 
or CHANCE (i. e. whether the action may be or may not be, might be or 
might not be, might have been or might not have been, &c.). 

b. The Subj. and Opt. are achronic with respect to the action itself 
᾿ (690 a), but have a distinction of time with respect to its contingency. 
The Subj. expresses present contingency, i. e. some chance at the present 
time that the action will occur ; but the Opt., past contingency, i. e. some 
chance at some past time that the action would subsequently occur. 


G14. a. If there will be some chance that an event will occur, there 
is of course now some chance that it will occur ; and if there is now some 
chance, then, whether recognized or not, there always has been. Future 
contingency, therefore, is contained in present; and all contingency, in 

: 


past, 

b. Hence, the past is the generic time for the contingent, as the pres- 
ent for the actual (602 c) ; and whatever is contingent is referred to past 
contingency, unless it is supposed with some degree of present expectation 
or looking forward to a decision, in which case it is referred to present 
contingency. 

A. PRESENT ConTINGENCY : 7 will go, if I can have leave (and | in- 
tend to ask for it). J think, that I may go, if I can have leave. I wish, - 
that you may go. He reads, that he may learn. 

B. Past ConTINGENCY. (1) Past supposition: 7 thought, that I might 
go, if I could have leave. I wished, that you might go. He read, that he 
might learn. (2) Present supposition not implying expectation or the 
looking forward to a decision: I would go, if I should have leave (but 1 
have no thought of asking for it). J could go with perfect ease. I should 
like to go. (8) Present supposition contrary to fact: (a. In regard to the 
present.) I would go, if I had leave (but 1 have none, and therefore do 
not go). (B. In regard to the past.) J would have gone, if I had had leave 
(but I had none, and therefore did not go). 

c. The range of past contingency is vast ; for there is nothing which it 
is proper for us to suppose at all, of which we may not conceive that there 
was some chance at some distant period in past eternity. 


615. That which is supposed contrary to fact is regularly 
expressed in Greek by the Ind., as already decided (613 a) ; 
while the very act of supposition presents it as having been 
at some time contingent (614 c). It is therefore thrown back 
into the past as the time of its contingency; and to a time 
prior to that of the opposing fact, as then only could there 
have been a chance in its favor. It is therefore expressed by 
what is termed a prior tense, i. e. a tense of the Ind. referring 
to this prior time. 

a. Supposition contrary to present fact (what now is) is regularly ex- 
pressed by the Impf., i. e. the Pres. thrown back into the past; and 
(b) supposition contrary to past fact (what has been), by the Plup. (the 
Perf. thrown back into the past), or (0) oftener by its equivalent Aor.: 
Ei μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἄν, if you had not come, we should now be 
marching, 0.1. 4. Ei ἀπεκρίνω, ἔσως av. . ἐμεμαθήκη, if you had an- 
swered, I should perhaps have learned, Pl. (4) So, ‘‘ If I had time to-day, 
I would go”; ‘‘If I had had time yesterday, I should have gone.” 


§ 619. RULE 0, — LAW OF SEQUENCE. ὦ 301 


e. Homer sometimes uses here the Opt.: Καί νύ κεν ἔνθ᾽ ἀπόλοιτο... ., εἰ 
μὴ dp ὀξὺ νόησε, he would have perished, had she not quick perceived, B®. 311. 

f. If there will be no mistake respecting the time, the Impf. may take 
the place of the Aor. or Plup., to mark the act as continued or repeated 
(592): Οὐκ ἂν προέλεγεν, εἰ μὴ ἐπίστευεν ἀληθεύσειν, he would not have 
predicted (thus often), had he not believed that his words would prove true. 

616. That which is indefinite is so far undecided; and 
hence often employs the forms of contingent expression : 

a.) The Subj. and Opt. are used in conditional, relative, and temporal 
clauses referring to the indefinite. See 634, 641. 

b.) The secondary tenses of the Ind. are used with ἄν to denote in- 
definitely any one of a past series of acts. (c) This construction seems 
especially appropriate to the Aor. as the general expression for a single 
past act (592): Πολλάκις. . ἠκούσαμεν ἄν τι κακῶς ὑμᾶς βουλευσαμένους, 
we would often hear of your planning amiss [used to hear], Ar, (4) The 
Impf. is so used (even in its iterative form, 332) ; though oftener and more 
appropriately without ἄν, as referring to the whole series (592, 632): Ave- 
ρώτων dy αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν, I would ask them what they meant, Pl, Apol. 22 Ὁ. 

617. Ruiz O (Law of Sequence). The Supsunctive regu- 
larly follows a tense referring to present or future time; and 
the OpraTiveE, a tense referring to past time. 

a. In general, therefore, the primary tenses (269 c) and the Imv. are 
followed by the Subj.; the secondary tenses, by the Opt.; and the Inf. 
and Part., by either, according to the finite tenses whose places they 
occupy, or usually, according to those upon which they depend. 

b. In the Att., the Subj. is scarce used, except in dependent clauses 
or those which can be so explained. In the Epic, it is sometimes in- 
dependent, chiefly (with or without ἄν, 619 f) as a softer, or with a nega- 
tive stronger, form for the Fut.: Kat ποτέ τις εὔπῃσι (ἐρέει), some one may 
hereafter say (will say), H. 87, 91. Οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃσι βιός nought 
can [will] your bow avail, A. 387. 

ce. The Greek Subj. is commonly translated by our Potential or Ind., 
rather than by our Subj., which, indeed, is now used far less than form- 
erly. (d) In conditional and relative clauses, the Aor. subj. has often ἃ 
force like that of the Lat. and Eng. Fut. Perf.: ᾿Επειδὰν πάντα ἀκούσητε, 
κρίνατε, when you shall have heard (audiveritis), all, judge, Dem. 44. 2. 

6. The Opt. is scarce used, except in dependent clauses and those 
which can be so explained, or as a conclusion dependent on some premise. 


618. Use or "ἂν (Ep. κέ, 163.a, Dor. xa). This particle, 
which has no corresponding word in English, is a mark of con- 
tingence, and has two chief uses : 

1.) “Av is joined with (a) the secondary tenses of the Indica- 
tive, (b) the Optative, (c) the Infinitive, and (d) the Participle, 
to mark them as depending on some condition expressed or 
implied. 

(a, Ὁ) See 631 Ὁ, d. (ο, d) The Inf. and Part. take ἄν, when it would 
belong to the finite modes of which they supply the place. See 621. 

619. 2.) Αν is combined with various connectives before 
the subjunctive, thus forming compound connectives, of which 
the parts are sometimes distinct and sometimes united in form: 


302 SYNTAX. —- MODES. — USE OF “AN. § 619. 


a.) With εἰ ¢f (not as whether), uniting to form ἐάν, by contraction ἤν 
(so always in Hom., except as κέ is used for ἄν), and sometimes “av (dis- 
tinguished by position, from simple ἄν, 621). See 631 ὁ. 

b.) With Relative Pronouns and Adverbs, and other Temporal Con- 
nectives ; ὃς ἄν, ὅστις ἄν Ews ἄν, (ὅτε ἄν) ὅταν, (ὁπότε ἄν) ὁπόταν, (ἐπεὶ ἄν) 
ἐπήν or ἐπάν, (ἐπειδὴ ἄν) ἐπειδάν, εὖτ᾽ dv: πρίν ἄν, μέχρι ἄν - Χο. See 641. 

9.) Sometimes with the final conjunctions ὅπως, ὡς, ὄφρα (thus ex- 
pressing more distinctly the idea of contingency). See 624 a, e. 

d.) That &v was thus combined before the Subj. (which grammatically 
it modifies), and not before the Opt., appears to have been due to the 
later and less strongly marked separation of the Subj. from the Ind. 
forms. (6) Dialectic, late, or rare exceptions, however, occur both ways 
(especially in the early poets) : Et μέγα νεῖκος ὄρηται, if a mighty contest 
arise, w. 98. EX cov στερηθῶ, if I lose you, Soph. “Os κε... δοίη δ᾽ ᾧ κ᾿ 
ἐθέλοι, that he might give her to whom he pleased, B. 53. 

f. In the Epic, ἄν is sometimes joined more directly with the Subj. 


- 620. a. In the Epic, ἄν is often used with the Fut. ind. as with 
the Subj. (chiefly in the form κέ) : Εἴ κεν... ἐθελήσει, if he shall wish, O. 
213. (Ὁ) Rare and disputed cases also occur in the Attic, in which ἄν 
is used with the Fut.: Holg δυνάμει συμμάχῳ χρησάμενοι μᾶλλον ἂν κολά- 
σεσθε, by using what auxiliary force you can better chastise them, ii. 5. 13. 

6. Critics deny that ἄν ever properly belongs to the Imv., or to the 
Pres. or Perf. ind. (d) Verbs with which ἄν is connected are commonly 
translated into Eng. by the potential mode. 


621. The place of ἄν is after the verb which it modifies ; or far 

oftener, after some prominent or characteristic word which is earlier in 
the sentence: as (a) a leading verb on which its own verb depends 
(especially such a verb as οἴομαι think, δοκῶ scem, οἶδα know, φημί say) ; 
(b) a participle or other word expressing the condition ; (c) an interroga- 
tive, negative, or connective; (d) any emphatic word. (e) Hence it 
often shows an emphasis upon the word to which it is attached (and from 
which it is not regarded as parted by such particles as μέν, δέ, τέ, γάρ, 
&c., cf. 520b). (f) Between ἄν and its verb, even another verb some- 
times intervenes. Thus, 
(a) Οὔομαι ἂν ὑμᾶς μέγα ὀνῆσαι, I think that you would greatly benefit, 
iii. 1. 88. (Ὁ) Λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; if one λαά said it, do 
you think they would have believed? Dem. 71. 4. (ὁ) Πῶς ἂν οὖν ἐγὼ ἢ 
βιασαίμην ; how could I compel? v. 7. 8. (4) ἙΕυμενὴς ἂν δικαίως ἢ προ- 
δότης νομίζοιτο ; would he be justly considered a friend or a traitor ¢ Hel. 
2. 3. 48. (6, f) Σὺν ὑμῖν μὲν Av οἶμαι εἶναι τίμιος, with you, 7 think I 
should be honored, i. 8. 6. (ἃ, ἢ) -Χρήσιμοι ἂν ἐδόκουν εἶναι v. 6. 1. 


622. a. For perspicuity, emphasis, or euphony, ἄν is often used 
more than once for a single verb ; while (b) near verbs, similarly used, 
do not commonly require its repetition : (a) Zras ἂν ὥσπερ οὗτος . ., λέ- 

ow’ ἄν, standing as he does, I would say, Cyr. 1. 3. 11. See i.°3. 6. 
tb Κατακάνοι ἂν .., ἢ ζῶντας... ἕλοι, καὶ κωλύσειε. ., καὶ ποιήσειεν, 
he would slay, or take alive, &c., i. 6. ἃ. See ii. 5. 145 iv. 6. 16, 


623. The general principles which govern the use of the intellective 
modes will now be applied to particular kinds of sentences, which may be 
termed, from their offices or connectives, final, conditional, relative, tem- 
poral. and complementary. ° "τ ἰς 


§ 627. RULE P, FINAL SENTENCES. 303 


1. Final (after iva, ὅπως, ὡς, μή - ὄφρα poet.). 


624. Ruiz P. After a final conjunction, (a) an object of 
present forethought is expressed by the Subjuncteve, or (b) in the 
Future, by the Jndicative ; but (c) an object of past forethought, 
by the Optative, or (d), to mark it as now contrary to fact, by 
a prior tense of the Indicative : 


(a) Tpddw (γέγραφα, γράψω), ἵνα μάθῃς (μανθάνῃς), scribo (scripsi, 
scribam), ut discas, I write (have written, shall write), that you may learn 
(be learning). ᾿Ἐμοὶ δὸς αὐτὰ, ὅπως... διαδῶ, Cyr. Ὡς δ᾽ ἂν μάθῃς... 
ἀντάκουσον, listen in turn, that you may learn (if you will), ii. 5. 16 (619 ὁ). 

(b) Instead of the Subj., the Fut. ind. is here commonly used after 
words of attention, care, or effort, and sometimes after others (regularly 
joined by ὅπως, sometimes by ὡς, ὄφρα, or ph): Ποιμένα det ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, 
ὅπως σῶαί τε ἔσονται ai oles, a shepherd must take care, [how his flock 
shall be safe] that his flock be safe, Mem. 3. 2. 1. 

(c) “Evypaya (ἔγραφον, ἐγεγράφειν), wa μάθοις (pavOdvors), scripsi (scri- 
bebam, scripseram), ut disceres, J wrote (was writing, had written), that 
you might learn (be learning). Φίλων ᾧετο δεῖσθαι, ws συνεργοὺς ἔχοι, he 

. thought he needed friends, that he might have coworkers, i. 9. 21. 

(d) Ἔχρην ce Ἰ]ηγάσου ζεῦξαι πτερὸν, ὅπως ἐφαίνου, you ought (rather) 
to have saddled the wing of Pegasus, that you might appear, Ar. Pax 135. 

6. The final conjunctions ὡς, ὅπως, ἵνα, and ὄφρα are in their origin 
relatives ; and μή seems to have become a connective through the ellipsis 
of one of these, the fuller form being still often retained: Οὕτω ποιεῖν, 
ὅπως... φανείη, to act [in that way in which] so that he might appear, Cyr. 


625. a. To the English reader, the use of the connectives after 
verbs of fearing often seems reversed, as in Latin, French, &c.; apprehen- 
sion for being indicated rather than apprehension against : “Ὅπως λάθω, 
δέδοικα, metuo ut lateam, [1 am apprehensive for this, how I may elude] 
I fear I cannot elude, Eur. Δέδοιχ᾽ ὅπως μὴ τεύξομαι, vereor ne inveniam, 
[1 am concerned for this, how I may not find] J fear that I shall find, Ar. 

b. Yet words of fear are sometimes followed by a complementary con- 
struction, as in Eng., especially if themselves modified by ph: Μὴ φοβοῦ, 
ws ἀπορήσεις, do not fear that you will want, Cyr. 5. 2.12. Cf. 630. 


626. Exuipsis. <A word of attention, care, or fear is some- 
times to be supplied before ὅπως or μή: : 


Ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες [sc. ὁρᾶτε], see then that you be men, i. 7. 3. 
Ὅπως μὴ οὐχ οἷός τ᾽ ἔσομαι [sc. δέδοικα], I fear that I shall not be able, Pl. 
. Μὴ... σοὺς διαφθείρῃ γάμους, ah, lest she prevent thy marriage! Eur. 


627. This ellipsis appears to have introduced, 


1.) The use of the Subjunctive or Future Indicative after οὐ 
pn, as a future of strong denral : 


Οὐ γάρ [sc. φόβος ἐστί or δέδοικα] σε wh. . yao” οὐδ᾽ ὑποπτεύσουσιν, 
[there is no danger that they may know or will suspect you] they surely 
will not know or suspect you, Soph. Οὔ ce μὴ προδώ, Id. Οὐδεὶς μηκέτι 
μείνῃ, 20 one will stay longer (cf. βοηθήσει), iv. 8, 18. ek ap 


304 SYNTAX. R. Q, R.— MODES. § 628. 


628. 2.) The use of the Subjunctive as Imperative. 


This occurs chiefly (a, b) in the 1 Person (where the Iimv. is wanting, 
270 a); and (0) in the Aorist with μή (including its compounds), accord- 
ing to this special rule for the 2 and 3 Persons: (RULE Q.) In prohibi- 
tions with μή, the Pres. is put in the Zmv., and the Aor. in the Subj. 
(4) Exceptions to this rule are doubtful in the Pres.; in the Aor., they 
are very rare in the 2 Person, but not in the 84. Thus, 

(a) Μὴ dGvapévopev. ., ἀλλὰ ἡμεῖς ἄρξωμεν [sc. ὁρᾶτε, or ὁρᾶτε ὅπως], 
[see that we do not wait] let us not wait, but ourselves begin, iii. 1. 24. (Ὁ) 
This Subj. is often preceded by ἄγε, φέρε, or some other Imy., after which 
a connective might be supplied: Φέρ᾽, ἀκούσω, come, let me hear, Hat. 1. 11. 

(c) Μὴ ποιήσῃς ταῦτα (Sc. σκόπει], ne feceris hoc, [see that you do not 
do this] beware of doing this, vii. 1. 8. Μὴ θαυμάζετε, do ‘not be wonder- 
ing (as you now are), i. 3. 3. Μηδ᾽ ἐπίκευθε, M75’ ἐπικεύσῃς, do not con- 
coal, π. 168, 0. 263. (ἃ) Μηδεὶς... νομισάτω, let no one think, Cyr. 


{ 629. a. Another form of ellipsis is found in such expressions as 
Qs δὲ συντέμω, but to be concise [I add this only], Eur. Tro. 441. 

b. A final clause may refer elliptically to the present or even past: Φοβεῖ- 
σθε uh. . viv διάκειμαι, you fear [lest it prove] that J am now affected, Pl. 


630. The use of final clauses blends with that of infinitives and . 
complementary clauses; and one construction is sometimes found where 
another would rather have been expected ; as, (a) ὅπως, &c. (Ep. and 
late, even tva), after words of entreating, exhorting, promising, command- 
ing, forbidding, wishing, and the like ; (b) Inf. or Complementary Clause 
after words of fear or care; &c.: Θέλω ἕνα μοι δῷς Mk. 6. 25. See 620 Ὁ. 


ul. Conditional (after εἰ, ai Ὁ. E.; εἰ μή). 


631. Ruiz R. In the nyPorHEticaL PERIOD, (a, b) if the 
PREMISE is presented as already decided in point of fact, it takes 
_ the Inpicative ; (0) if it is presented as undecided, but with 
present expectation of decision, it takes the SuBsuNcTIVE ; 
(4) otherwise, it takes the Oprative. In the first case, the 
CONCLUSION is commonly in the Indicative or Imperative ; in 
the second, in the Future Indicative or an equivalent ; and in 
the third, in the Optative with ἄν. Me 


(a, b) If the premise is decided, the conclusion is also decided, so far as 
depends upon the premise ; and is expressed accordingly, unless there is 
some reason, aside from the premise, for a different expression. There 
are here two constructions. 

(Form a.) If the premise is presented as agreeing with fact, or without 
indication on this point, any form of premise or conclusion consistent 
with such an agreement may be used: Εἰ γράφει, καλῶς ποιεῖ (καλῶς 
ἕξει, ypapérw), if he is writing, he is doing well (it will be well, let him 
write). Hi ἔγραψε, καλῶς ἔποίησε (καλῶς ἔχει), if he wrote, he did well (it 
is well), Ei γράψει, καλῶς ποιήσει, if he will write, he will do well. Ei 
δοκεῖ σοι, στεῖχε (πλέωμεν), if it seems best to you, go (let us sail), Soph. 

(Form b.) If the premise is presented as contrary to fact, it takes a 
prior tense of the Jndicative ; and the conclusion, a prior tense with ἄν 
(615, 618 ἃ) : Ei ἔγραφε, καλῶς ἂν ἐποίει, si scriberet, bene faceret, if he 


§ 634. IN THE HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD. 305 


were now writing, he would be doing well. Bi ἔγραψε, καλῶς ἂν ἐποίησεν 
(καλῶς ἂν εἶχεν), of he had written (yesterday), he would have done well (it 
would now be well). Οὐκ ἂν ἐποίησεν ᾿Αγασίας ταῦτα, εἰ μὴ ἔγὼ αὐτὸν ἐκέ- 
λευσα, 4. would not have done this, if I had not commanded him, vi. 6. 15. 

(Form 6.) Here the conclusion, as depending upon a decision yet to be 
made, is properly expressed by the Fut. ind., or some other form referring 
to the future (as the Imv., Opt. of wish, &c.): ᾿Εὰν γράφῃ (γράψῃ), καλῶς 
ποιήσει, si scribat (scribet), bene faciet, if he write, he will do well. Xpa 
αὐτοῖς, ἐὰν δέῃ τι, use them, if you have any need, Cyr. “Hv .. ἀφέλω- 
por. ., ἀπολοίμην, may I perish, if I take, Ar. — For ἐάν, &c., see 619 a, 

(Form d.) If the premise is wndecided and without present expectation 
of decision, the conclusion must also be, so far as depends upon the pre- 
mise ; and both are therefore appropriately expressed by the Optative, 
with ἄν in the conclusion (618). Ei γράφοι (γράψαι), καλῶς ἂν ποιοίη 
(ποιήσαι), si scribat, bene faciat, if he should write, he would do well. 
Οὐδὲ γὰρ Av Mijdoxos . . ἐπαινοίη, εἰ ἐξελαύνοιμι τοὺς εὐεργέτας, M. would 
not approve, if I should drive out our benefactors, vii. 7. 11. 

e. In forms Ὁ and d, ἄν is regularly used in the conclusion, but not in 
the premise, unless that is itself dependent upon some condition expressed 
or implied (618): Εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἂν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι, 
if I would trust any other man (should he so affirm), 7 trust you, Pl. 

f. In the conclusion, the omission of ἄν with a past tense of the Ind: 
is chiefly for the sake of more decided expression ; (g) while its omission 
with the Opt. is almost wholly poetic, and chiefly Epic. See 632. 


632. A past tense of the Ind. (commonly the Impf.) without ἄν may 
take the place of another form in-the conclusion, to express more decidedly 
a habit or series of acts, a continued, unfinished, or threatened act or state, 
some property of an act (as possibility, propriety, necessity, &c.), or some 
fecling respecting an act, even though the particular acts themselves may 
be indefinite, contingent, or unreal (cf. 611): Οὐδὲν ἤνυον, εἰ μὴ Tod- 
tous πείσαιμι, I effected nothing, unless I should persuade these, Cyr. Οὐδὲ 
γὰρ, εἰ πάνυ προθυμοῖτο, ῥῴϑιον ἦν, nor, if he should greatly desire it, was 
at easy (facile erat), iii. 4.15. ᾿Ηισχυνόμην μέντοι, εἰ. . ἐξηπατήθην, I 
should be ashamed indeed, if I had been deceived, vii. 6. 21. See 634. 


633. a. If the conclusion is itself a dependent clause, its form is 
commonly determined by this dependence, and the condition usually con- 
forms (617) : ᾿Επορευόμην, ἵνα, εἴ τι δέοιτο, ὠφελοίην αὐτόν, 7 went that I 
might aid him, tf he should need, i. 3. 4 (624). 

b. The conclusion has sometimes a second condition, expressed or 
understood, to which its verb conforms: "Hay δ᾽ ἐμὲ ἕλησθε, οὐκ ἂν θαυμά- 
capt, εἴ τινα εὕροιτε, if you elect me, I should not wonder if you should 
Jind, vi, 1. 29. Ei διέλθοιεν.., ἣν μὲν βούλωνται, διαβήσονται iv. 1. 3. 

c. The true conclusion is sometimes implied, rather than expressed, in 
the grammatical apodosis ; or (d) is elliptically contained in it: (c) Οἱ δ᾽ 
ᾧκτειρον, εἰ ἁλώσοιντο, others pitied them [for what they would suffer], i 
case they should be taken, i. 4.7. (ἃ) Ἐϊὕρημα ἐποιησάμην, εἴ πως δυναίμην, 
I accounted it a godsend [thought that it would be], if Z could in any way. 


634. InpEermiTe on GENERAL Premise. If the premise 
refers indefinitely or generally to acts of a certain kind or 
series, (a) it sometimes takes the Indicative, from the general 
decision of the kind or series as a whole ; but oftener the Opta- 
tive or Subjunctive, from the want of definiteness in respect to 

COMP. GR, T 


306 SYNTAX. ΒΕ. R.— HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD. . 684, 


‘particulars (616), —(b) the Opt. if the kind or series is now 
past, (c) but otherwise the Subj. (4) The conciuston has 
commonly the form appropriate to the kind or series as a 
whole, but (e) sometimes that appropriate to a single act. 
(f) Mixed constructions occur in both premise and conclusion. 

a, 4) Ef ris τι ἐπηρώτα, ἀπεκρίνοντο, if any one any question, t 
railed Th. 7. 10. "Alp: d) Εἴ aie Hk Ms Eos pena we shoul 
Sail to bring anything, he bade us bring tt, Eur. Ale. (c, 4) Ἢν δ᾽ ἐγγὺς 
ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνήσκειν, if death come near, no one is will- 
ing to die, Ib. (Ὁ, d, e) Ei τις αὐτῷ δοκοίη... Braxevew, . . ἔπαισεν ἂν, 
kal ἅμα αὐτὸς προσελάμβανεν, if any one seemed to him to shirk, he would 
give him a blow, and at the same time took hold himself, ii. 3. 11. 

635. IncorroraTion. The condition, instead of being ex- 
pressed in a distinct clause, is often incorporated in the con- 
clusion, especially in a participial form : 

_ Λέγοις ἂν εὖ φρονῶν [= ef εὖ gpovolns], you would speak, if you were a 
Friend, Soph. O. T. αθοῦσ᾽ ἐρῶ, Ib. Ὥσπερ ἂν δράμοι τις περὶ νίκης, 
as one would run [if he were running] for victory,-i. 5. 8. Αλλως δὲ οὐκ 
ἂν τολμῷεν, they would not venture otherwise [if it were not so], v. 4. 34. 


636. Ex.irsis. In a hypothetical period, the premise or . 
the conclusion is often omitted ; the other part retaining its 
proper form (as-also in 635) : 

1. PREMISE OMITTED. Among the conditions most naturally 
supplied, and therefore most frequently omitted, are those of 
inclination with-possibility and of possibility with inclination ; 
since these are the two great conditions of human conduct. 

a. Hence the frequent use of the Opt. and past tenses of the Ind. with 
᾿ἄν (specially termed potential Opt. or Ind.), to denote one of these ideas, 
the other being implied as a condition. Other familiar ideas are also im- 
plied, as of effort, necessity, propriety, occasion, existence, actwality, &e.; . 
‘and (b) the premise is often involved in an independent sentence, or 
otherwise supplied by the context. Thus, (a) Atvato dy. . εὑρεῖν ὅτῳ ἂν 
χαρίσαιο; feonld you be able if you tried] could you find one whom you 
might oblige (if you should wish) ? Cyr. ᾿Ἤδιστ' ἂν ἀκούσαιμι, J should 
‘most gladly hear (if I might), ii. 5. 15. (Ὁ) Οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἣ δύναν- 
rar φέρειν, διαῤῥάγειεν γὰρ dv, they cat no more than they can bear, for they 
would burst (if they did), Cyr. Ἔτι οὖν ἂν γένοιο... φίλος ; would you 
yet become a friend (if 1 should now forgive you)? i. 6. 8. See 637. 

637. With the ellipsis of a premise, the Optative with ἄν 
may supply the place (a) of the Imperative, or (b) of the In- 
dicative, especially (c) of the Fut. ind.; (d) or may express 
wish in the form of a question : 2 

(a) As Imv., it expresses permission, or command in the softened lan- 
guage of permission, or prohibition in the strong form of denying permis- 
sion: Κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτόν, you may now betake yourself [might if you 
should with Soph. Xwpois ἂν εἴσω, go within, Id. Οὐκ ἂν βασιλῆας 
᾿ἀνὰ στόμ᾽ ἔχων ἀγορεύοις, ‘you must not harangue,’ B. 250, Ε 
. (Ὁ) Αὐτὸ ἂν τὸ δέον εἴη " θᾶττον γὰρ ἀναλώσουσι, this [would be, if we 


§641 RULES. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 307 


could have it] is the very thing we want; for they will sooner expend, iv. 7. 
7. Ποῦ δῆτ᾽ ἂν elev οἱ ξένοι ; where then [might be] are the strangers ? Soph. 
(c) Ovxér’ ἂν κρύψαιμι, no longer [if I might, would 17 will I conceal tt, 
Ar. ἸΚλύοις ἂν ἤδη, thow wilt ndw hear, Soph. —So esp. in the 1 Pers. 
(4) Πῶς av ὀλοίμαν ; [how might I die, if I should seek death ?] Would 
that I might die/ Eur. Tis dv... δοίη; O that one would give! Soph. 


638. τ΄ Conotusion omitrep. To this ellipsis may be 
referred the common expression of wish (a) by the Optative, or 
(b) as contrary to fact, by a prior tense of the Indicative (615): 


(a) Et μοι γένοιτο φθόγγος [sc. ἡδοίμην ἄν], [if I might have a voice, I 
should be glad] O that I might have a voice ! Kur. Hec. 836. Ei yap yévouro 
[sc. καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι], [for] O of it might be [it would be well]! Cyr. 6. 1. 38. 

(Ὁ) Εἴθ’ εἶχες .. βελτίους φρένας [80. ἡδόμην ἄν], if you but had a better 
mind! Kur. Ei γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν elyxov,would I had such power! Id. 

c. From the great use of these elliptic forms, especially a, the connec- 
tive εἰ (commonly in the forms εἴθε, εἰ γάρ, or αἴθε, ai yap D.-E.) came to 
be regarded as a particle of wishing, and the Opt. as the appropriate 
mode for the expression of a wish (modus optativus, the wishing mode). 
(d) Hence it was so used without the connective ; and (e) sometimes, as 
a less direct form, took the place of the Imv., especially in the 3 Pers. 
(the two modes being sometimes used together, and these again with the 
Subj.): (4). Οἱ θεοὶ ἀποτίσαιντο, may the gods requite / 111. 2. 6. (6) Ἤ 
Tis. . ᾿Αχιλῆϊ παρσταίη, or [may] let one stand by A., T. 119. 

f. “Av does not belong to this Opt. of direct wish, which is often thus 
distinguished from the Opt. in its other uses. 

g. A wish in opposition to fact is also expressed by the 2 Aor., and 
rarely by the Impf., of ὀφείλω ought (50) ; the particles of wishing being 
often prefixed, to add strength : ᾿Ολέσθαι δ᾽ Sedov, [1 ought to have per- 
ished] Would that I had perished! Soph. O. T. 1157. ᾿Ὥφελε μὲν Κῦρος 
ζῆν (611). Et0’ ὄφελες ἄγονός τ᾽ ἔμεναι, Would you were unborn! T. 40. 
‘Qs πρὶν ὥφελλον ὀλέσθαι, O that I had sooner died / 2. 764 (648 ἃ). 


639. a. The conditional form often takes the place of other forms, 
especially from Greek courtesy and moderation of speech (654 a) ; as, after 
verbs of emotion ; in the frequent use of εἴ τις for ὅστις, and like substi- 
tutions, &c.: Τόδε ἐθαύμασα, εἰ [= ὅτι] .. τίθης, this Π wonder at, [if] 
that you place, Pl. Rep. 348 6. “Exacov καὶ χιλὸν καὶ εἴ τι ἄλλο χρήσιμον 
ἦν, they burned both fodder and [if anything] whatever else was of use, i. 


11. Relative or Temporal. 


640. Rure S. A RELATIVE CLAUSE commonly uses the 
modes like other sentences to which it is most nearly akin. 


a. From such analogies, some relative clauses have been distinguished 
as conditional relative, final relative, &e. 


641. 1. ConpirionaL RELATIVE CiavusEs, ὅσ. A relative or 
temporal clause referring to that which is indefinite or general or not yet 
determined, may be viewed as contingent (616); and-then has regularly 
(a) the Subj., if it depends on a primary tense, but (b) the Opt., if it 
depends on a secondary. For the form of the connective, see 619d. 
(c) Such a clause has commonly a form and force akin to those of an in- 
definite premise (634) ; while its leading clause resembles in form the cor- 
responding conclusion. Thus, Ary ἃ 


308 MODES. R. T.—ORATIO OBLIQUA.—OPT., &C. OF WISH. § 641. 


(a) Ὅ τι ἂν [= ἐάν τι] δέῃ, πείσομαι, whatever [if any] evil must be met, 
1 will suffer (651 a), 1. 8. 5. ᾿Οπόταν καιρὸς ἢ, ἥξω, when it is the proper 
time, I will come, vii. 3. 36. ᾿Εἰπειδὰν πάντα ἀκούσητε, κρίνατε Dem. 

(Ὁ) ᾿Εθήρευεν ἀπὸ ἵππου, δπότε [= εἴ more] γυμνάσαι βούλοιτο, he hunted 
on horseback, whenever [if at any time] he might wish to exercise, i. 2. 7. 
᾿ Φοβοίμην δ᾽ ἂν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, ᾧ δοίη, ἕπεσθαι, 1 should fear to follow the guide 
whom he might give us, 1b. 17. "Emel τις διώκοι, προδραμόντες ἕστασαν, 
when any one gave chase, they would run before and stop, i. 5. 2. 

d. Most temporal clauses are also relative (as above) ; and those which 
are not, usually follow the same analogy (introduced by πρίν, μέχρι, ἄχρι, 
&c.) : Μὴ στέναζε, πρὶν μάθῃς (619 6), do not groan, before you [may] have 
learned, Soph. Ph. 917. »Ipiv μάθοιμι Ib. 961. “Avéuever . ., ἔστε ἐμφά- 
γοιεν, he waited until they [should have] had eaten, Cyr. 8. 1. 44. 

_ & Ὅστις, as requiring no additional mark of indetiniteness, is oftener 
joined with the Ind., than ὅς used indefinitely : Ὅστις δ᾽ ἀφικνεῖτο, i. 1. 5. 


642. 2. ΕἾΝΑΙ, Retative Cravses. Α relative clause having the 
force of a final clause (558 a) has commonly in Attic the Fut. (Ind., rare- 
ly Opt. except in Indirect Discourse, 643) ; but oftener in Epic the Subj. 
or Opt. (except Fut.) : Ὅπλα κτῶνται, οἷς ἀμυνοῦνται Mem., Iéuyor tu’, 
ὅστις σημανεῖ Kur., "ΑΎγελον ἧκαν, ὃς ἀγγείλειε ο. 458, § 558 a. 

ἃ. In such relative clauses in Attic, the Subj. occurs chiefly after ἔχω 
{commonly without ἄν) ; and the Opt. chiefly after another Opt. 


Iv. Complementary (Oratio Obliqua, &c.). 


643. Rutz ΤΌ The Oprarive is the finite mode appropri- 
ate to Indirect Discourse in past time. Thus, 


a. Direct Discourse, Λέγει (εἶπεν), dpa” (“ εἶδον, ‘dpopar”), he 
says (said), “41 see” (“1 saw,” ‘I shall see”); Indirect Discourse in 
present time, Λέγει ὅτι ὁρᾷ (εἶδεν, ὄψεται), he says that he sees (saw, shall 
see) ; Ind. Discourse in past time, Εἶπεν ὅτι ὁρῷ (ἴδοι, ὄψοιτο), he said 
that he saw (had seen, should see). ᾿Ανηρώτα, τί βούλοιντο, he asked, 
what they wished (quid vellent), ii. 3. 4 (directly, ri βούλεσθε;). Ὅ τι δὲ 
ποιήσοι, οὐ διεσήμηνε, but what he would do, he did not indicate, ii. 1. 23. 
᾿Ηγνόει ὅ τι τὸ πάθος εἴη, he knew not what the matter was, iv. 5. 7. 

b. In the change from Direct to Indirect Discourse, the tense is not 
commfhonly changed, even though the mode may be. — It continues to ex- 
press relatively (i. e. with reference to the time of the leading verb), the 
same time which it expressed absolutely in Direct Discourse ; while the 
English idiom commonly requires us to translate it according to its abso- 
lute time as now used. See 607, and ὁρῷ, ἴδοι, ὄψοιτο, above ; and cf. 660. 

6. The rule applies not only to leading verbs in the quotation, but to 
others connected with them : “EXeyor . ., ὅτι παντὸς ἄξια λέγοι Levys, 
χειμὼν γὰρ εἴη, they said, that the proposal of S. was worth everything, for 
it was winter, Vii. 3. 13 (directly, λέγει Z., x. y. ἐστιν»). ᾿Απεκρίνατο yap, 
ὅτι... βουλεύσοιτο περὶ αὐτῶν 6 τι ϑύναιτο, he answered that he would pro- 
wide for them what he could, vii. 1. 34 (directly, βουλεύσομαι ὅ τι ἂν δύνω- 
μαι, ὃ 641a). Cf. 659b. (4) But if a verb so connected expresses the 
writer’s own thought, it must retain the form of Direct Discourse. 

e. The rule may extend to various dependent clauses, which are thus 
referred to the speech or mind of another : “Edevyov ἔνθα μήποτ᾽ ὀψοίμην, 
I fled where (as I believed) J should never see, Soph, "Querecpov. εἰ ἁλώ- 
σοιντο (633.c). (ἢ) So rarely even to clauses elliptically expressed as in- 
dependent: Ὑπέσχετο... δηλώσειν ἄγων, οἴουτο μὲν μάλισθ᾽ ἑκούσιον. Soph- 


ἢ 647. ᾿ΒΌΒΟΌΧΟΤΙΥΕ OF DOUBT. — — 309 


g. That which is presented in Indirect Discourse, is not presented as 
fact, but as the statement, thought, or feeling of some person, and con- 
sequently as having some degree of contingency. 


644. The Greek has here an especial love of VARIETY, 
either for its own sake, or for ewphony, or to express in various 
degrees contingency or positiveness of conception ; so that 


1.) Indirect and Direct Discourse are freely blended ; commonly by a 
change to the latter, either (a) after the introductory particle ὅτι, or (Ὁ) 
in the body of the quotation, chiefly after a relative, a parenthetic clause, 
or one of the larger pauses: (a) Εἶπον, ὅτι ““ ἱκανοί éopuer,” they said, [that 
they were able] ““ We are able,” ν. (0) ᾿Επιδεικνὺς δὲ, ws εὔηθες εἴη, ἣγε- 
μόνα αἰτεῖν παρὰ τούτου, ““ ᾧ λυμαινόμεθα τὴν πρᾶξιν,᾽ showing, that it was 
Jolly to ask a guide from him, ‘‘whose plan (said he) we are frustrating,” i. 


645. 2.) Indirect Discourse (a) retains freely the modes and tenses 
of Direct Discourse ; and often blends them with its own proper forms, 
whether (b) in a leading and dependent verb, or (c) in verbs not so 
related : (a) "Ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἀποδίδωσι (607), he said that he [resigns] resigned 
(a compromise between the regular ἀποδιδοίη and the direct ‘‘ ἀποδίδωμι). 
(Ὁ) Ἔλεγον, ὅτι περὶ σπονδῶν ἥκοιεν, ἄνδρες οἵ τινες ἱκανοὶ ἔσονται, ‘ that 
they had come respecting a truce, men who [will] would be competent,’ 
ii. 3. 4. (ὁ Ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, ᾿Αριαῖος δὲ... λέγοι, they 
stated that C. [is] was dead, and that A. said, ii. 1. 8. See 652a. 


646. In the change from Direct to Indirect Discourse, (a) the Impf. 
and Plup. ind. are usually retained, lest, if changed to the Opt., they 
might be confounded with the Pres. and Perf. ind. so changed ; and (b) 
they are sometimes even used in Indirect Discourse, instead of these 
tenses. (c) Prior tenses, expressing supposition contrary to fact (615), 
require especially to be retained ; and (d) the Aor. Ind. is usually retained 
in dependent clauses of the quotation, for distinction from the Aor. Subj. 

(a) Εἶχε yap λέγειν, καὶ ὅτι... συνεμάχοντο, for he could say that they 
had assisted (cf. orparedouwro), Hel. 7. 1. 34. (Ὁ) "Ev πολλῇ δὴ ἀπορίᾳ 
ἦσαν οἱ “EXdnves, ἐννοούμενοι μὲν, ὅτι ἐπὶ ταῖς βασιλέως θύραις ἦσαν, . . 
προὐδεδώκεσαν δὲ αὐτοὺς καὶ οἱ. . βάρβαροι, ‘reflecting that they were at 
the gates of the king, and had been betrayed by the barbarians,’ iii. 1. 2. 
(c) Πυθοίμην . ., tiv ἄν ποτε γνώμην περὶ ἐμοῦ εἴχετε, εἰ. ., ‘what opinion 

ou would have of me, if I had . .,’ Dem. 1227. 2. (d) "Ἔλεγον, ὡς ὁ 
Ξενοφῶν οἴχοιτο. . ἃ ὑπέσχετο αὐτῷ ἀποληψόμενος, ‘had gone to receive 
what he had promised him,’ vii. 7. 55. ie 

647. Supsunotive or Dovusr (Conjunctivus deliberativus). 
a. In complementary clauses, where doubt respecting the 
future is expressed or implied, the Subjunctive is often used, 
chiefly in the 1 pers. (cf. 628 a). (Ὁ) The conneetive is some- 
times omitted ; and (c) sometimes the leading verb itself. 

(a) Οὐκ ἔχω τί λέγω, non habeo quid dicam, 7 know not what [I may 
call] to call ut, Dem. 124. 24. “Epwrg δὴ πῶς με θάπτῃ, he asks how he 
shall bury me, Pl. Phedo 115d. (Ὁ) Βούλει [sc. ὡς] λάβωμαι; wilt thou 
[that] I take ? Soph. Ph. 761. (ὁ) ““Παραινῶ σοι σιωπᾶν." ‘*[Sc. Παραι- 
veis ὡς] ᾿Εγὼ σιωπῶ ," ““7 advise you to be silent.” “ [Do you advise that] 
1 be silent?” Ar. Ran. 1132. : 

ἃ. Hence the Subj. is used in asking what one is to do, can do, &c., 
chiefly in the 1st pers. and the indefinite 3d: [Sc. Βούλει ὡς] Ἐϊπωμεν ἢ 


310 SYNTAX, R. U.— INTERCHANGE OF MODES.  § 647, 


᾿σιγῶμεν, ἢ τί δράσομεν ; shall we speak or be silent, or what shall we do? 
Eur. Ion 758. Ποῖ Ba; πᾶ στῶ; τί λέγω ; whither can I go? where stop? 
what say 3 [sc. ἀπορῶ, I am at a loss whither, &c.] Eur. Alc. 864: 


648. Oprative or Dovsr. a. Indirect Discourse in past time 
may change this Subj. to an Opt.:’EBovAevero . . εἰ πέμποιεν, he consulted 
whether they should send, i. 10. 5. Ἡπόρει ὅ τι χρήσαιτο Hel. 7. 4. 39. 
(b) The connection must distinguish this use of the Opt. for the Subj. of 
present time, from its use in 643 a, for the Ind. of Direct Discourse. 

c. Hence the Opt. is sometimes used without ἄν in questions, chiefly 
in poetry: Ποῖ τις φύγοι ; whither could one fly? [sc. ἀποροίην ἄν). Ar. 

d. A different ellipsis.explains the poetic use of the Opt. with ὡς to 
express wish : [Sc. Βουλοίμην ἂν] Ὥς ὄλοιτο παγκακῶς, O [1 should wish] 
that she might perish miserably / Eur. Hipp. 407. ‘Qs wh θάνοι o. 359. 


v. Interchange. 


649. Rute U. The uses of the FINITE MODES are often 


enterchanged. 

a. Especial freedom belongs here, as elsewhere, to the poets ; partic- 
ularly to Homer, and others who sung before the use of the modes became 
fixed. 

b. The Greek has also great freedom here, as elsewhere, in combining 
different forms of construction (392) ; and (c) one part of a sentence often 
conforms to another, not as this 7s expressed, but as it might have been ex- 

ressed : Ei μὲν ἐπαινῶ [= ἐπαινοῖμι] αὐτὸν, δικαίως dv με καὶ αἰτιῷσθε, if T 
πὶ βρη should commend him, you would justly blame me, vii. 6. 15. 

d. If the form of a leading verb does not yes with the time of its 
action, a dependent verb sometimes conforms to the one, and sometimes to 
the other: Hist. Pres., Tpdge . . ὅτι ἥξοι (v. ἢ. ἥξει), he writes that he 
[would come] will come, i. 6. 3. Opt. of Wish, &c., TeOvainv.., ἵνα μὴ 
ἐνθάδε μένω, let me die, that I may not remain here, Pl. Εἰρήνη. . ἔχοι 
πόλιν, ὄφρα μετ' ἄλλων κωμάζοιμι, may peace possess the city, 80 that I may 
be merry with others, Theog. Ποιήσαιτο (ἂν), wa. . εἴη (v. 2. ἡ) ii. 4. 8, 


650. 1. Dependent sentences often conform to RELATIVE, 
instead of absolute, time (607) : 


Karéxavoev, iva μὴ Κῦρος διαβῇ, he had burned (the boats), that C. 
[may] might not cross, i. 4.18. “Empaccoy ὅπως τις βοήθεια ἥξει, they 
negotiated that some succor [shall] should come, Th. 3. 4. Cf. 653. 


651. wu. Generic Use. This has a varied application to 


the modes: 

1. The INDICATIVE is the generic mode ; and hence may be used for 
the Subj. or Opt., if it is not deemed important to mark the contingency : 
Χρήσθων ὅ τι βούλονται, let them use me as they [may] please, Ar. 

a. As the Impf. and Plup. have no separate forms out of the Ind., they 
often remain in this mode, for distinction from the Pres. and Perf., in 
cases where other tenses would take the Opt. or Subj.; especially the 
Impf. expressing a repeated or continued act or state in past time : Ἔλε- 
γεν, ὅτι ὀρθῶς ἡτιῶντο, καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῖς paptupoln, he said that 
they had blamed him justly, and that the result sustained them, iii. 3. 12 
(directly, ἠτιᾶσθε, ὑμῖν μαρτυρεῖ). See 632, 634, 646. 


652. 2. The Oprartve is the generic contingent mode, as the earlier 
developed, and as expressing past contingency (614b). It is, hence, 


§ 657 RULE XXXII. THE IMPERATIVE. 311 


often used for the Subj., especially to render the expression more general, 
indefinite, vague, or doubtful, or from a reference in the mind to some- 
thing past, distant, or contingent : ᾿Αποτειχίζει, ὡς ἄπορος εἴη ἡ ὁδός, he 18 
building a wall, so that the way might be impassable (for any one), 11. 4. 4. 

a. We observe here, as elsewhere, the Greek love of variety, and the 
tendency to drop into a more general form, after the use of one that is 
more special or definite (cf. 692 ο, 605 b): Μετέρχομαι, ws ὕβριν δείξωμεν 
Αἰγίσθου θεοῖς, “γόους τ᾽ ἀφείην, I go, that I may show to the gods the inso- 
lence of Af., and [might] utter wailings, Eur. El. 58. 


653. 1. The freedom of the mind in its conceptions of 
time affects the Mopxs, as well as the tenses (608 s). 


a. Especially is the Subj. often used for the Opt., from a view of the 
past as present (or sometimes, as extending to the present). Cf. 650. 


654. iv. The contingent is often conceived or spoken of 
as actual; and the actual, as contingent; especially from 
strong assurance or vivid fancy in the former case, and from 
courtesy or modesty in the latter. Cf. 608 a. τῷ 

a. The taste, refinement, popular institutions, and civic life of the 
Greeks fostered a spirit of mutual concession and respect, which often led 
them, and especially the Athenians, to express even decided opinions and 
well-known facts, not as if asserted, but as if modestly and courteously 
suggested, and referred to others for a decision. Hence they often used 
the contingent modes, especially the Opt., instead of the Ind.; and the 
Opt., as being still less direct, instead of the Subj. See 637, 639, 652. 


B. Vouirive. 


655. Rute XXXII. The Imperative is the 
most direct expression of an act of the will. 


a. From the fondness of the Greeks for passing from indirect to direct 
forms of expression (cf. 644), the Imperative is sometimes found in 
dependent clauses : Θνητὸς δ᾽ 'Opéorns: ὥστε μὴ λίαν στένε, O. was mortal ; 
so that [do not grieve] yow should not grieve to excess, Soph. El. 1172. 


656. a. In general but earnest address, the 2d Pers. of the Imv. is 
sometimes used with πᾶς, or tls, or both, instead of the 3d: Χώρει δεῦρο 
πᾶς ὑπηρέτης " τύξευε, παῖε" σφενδόνην τίς μοι δότω. Come hither every 
man of you! Shoot, smite. Let some one give mea sling. Ar. Av. 1186. 

b. Such familiar imperatives as ἄγε, φέρε, ἴθι, εἰπέ, and ἰδέ may be 
used in the singular, as interjections, though more than one are ad- 
dressed ; and in the 2d Pers., though associated verbs are in the 3d: 
“Aye δὴ, ἀκούσατε, come now, hear, Apol. 14. Ἴθι... Tus. . δότω Ar. 


C. INCORPORATED. 


657. In dependent clauses, the Greek has great freedom 
in the employment of either distinct or incorporated forms, ac- 
cording as a more or less intimate union is desired ; and also 
in respect to the manner of incorporation. Thus (a) a depend- 
ent clause may be preserved entirely distinct ; or (Ὁ) its subject 


312 SYNTAX. — INCORPORATED MODES. ὃ 657. 


or most prominent substantive may be incorporated in the lead- — 
ing clause, leaving it otherwise distinct ; or (c) its verb may be 
also incorporated as an Infinitive, or (d) yet more closely as ἃ 
Partiiple. The union often becomes still closer by an attrac- 
tion, through which (e) the leading verb adopts, for a subject 
or object, the subject of the dependent clause ; or the Inf. or 
Part. adopts, for its grammatical subject, either (f) the subject 
or (g) an adjunct of the leading verb. (h) Different forms are 
often combined or blended. E. g., 


(a, Ὁ) Ἤισθετο, ὅτι τὸ Mévwros στράτευμα ἤδη ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ἣν (v. 1. Ἤ. 
τό τε Μ. στράτευμα, ὅτι ἤδη ἐν K. ἢν), he perceived, that the army of Meno 
was now in Cilicia (the army of M., that it was, &c.), i. 2. 21. ἸΠαρεσκεύ- 
afovro, ὅπως . . ἐσβαλοῦσιν, they prepared [how they should invade, 
624 Ὁ] to invade, Th. 2. 99. See 474 Ὁ, 573 a. (c, d) Παρεσκευάζοντο . . 
στρατεύειν (πολεμήσοντες, or ὡς πολεμήσοντες), they prepared to make 
war, Th. 1.115; 2.7. See 598b. (6) See 573. 

(f) ᾿Ενομίζομεν ἄξιοι εἶναι [= ἡμᾶς ἀξίους εἶναι], we thought that we were 
worthy, Cyr. 7. 5. 72 (cf. νομίζοιμι yap ἐμαυτὸν ἐοικέναι Ib. 5. 1. 21). Νό- 
page. . ἄνδρα ἀγαθὸν ἀποκτείνων [= σεαυτὸν droxtelvoyvta], consider your- 
self putting to death a good man, vi. 6. 24. Οἴμαι εἶναι τίμιος (621 ; cf. 
οἶμαι μὲν ληρεῖν με Pl. Charm. 179 4). (g) Προσήκει ἄρχοντι φρονίμῳ εἶναι, 
it becomes a ruler to be prudent, Mag. Eq. 7.1. See 667. 

(hy “A\Aw re τρόπῳ πειράσαντες, καὶ μηχανὴν προσήγαγον, both at- 
tempting in other ways, and [they brought up] bringing up an engine, Th. 

i. The Inf. and Part. may also be used impersonally. See 482d. 

j. An especial variety of construction appears with σύνοιδα, συγγι- 

ὥώσκω, ἔοικα, and some other words: “Hocxas βασιλεὺς εἶναι (ἡδόμενος, 

εδιότι), you seem to be king (pleased, like one fearing), Cyr., Hel., Pl. 
So Ὅμοιοι ἦσαν θαυμάζειν (v. 2. θαυμάζοντες, = θαυμά ζουσι), they seemed 
to be wondering, iii. 5. 13. 

k. Some verbs may be followed either by the Inf. or the Part., with 
scarcely any difference of meaning, as in some of the examples above ; 
and others, with an obvious difference. In the latter case, the Part. 
commonly denotes that which is Jess dependent on the action of the lead- 
ing verb, or is a more immediate, positive, or personal object of percep- 
tion : Τοῦτο μὲν οὐκ αἰσχύνομαι Mywv: τὸ δὲ αἰσχυνοίμην ἂν λέγειν " 1 am 
not ashamed [saying] to say this (which is said) ; but I should be ashamed 
to say that (which from the shame is not said) ; Cyr. 5.1. 21. “Av ἅπαξ 
μάθωμεν ἀργοὶ ζῆν, if we once learn to live in idleness, 111. 2. 25 ; “Iva μάθῃ 
σοφιστὴς ὧν, that he may learn that he is a schemer, Asch. Pr. 61. 


658. The use of both the incorporated modes is even more 
extensive in Greek than in English. 


1. Hence we often translate the Greek Inf. and Part. by finite verbs 
with connectives (that, when, while, as, and, if, although, because, since, 
in order that, &c.). Sometimes, also, from a difference of idiom, the Inf. 
and Part. are interchanged in translation : Παρὼν ἐτύγχανε, happened to be 
present, i. 1. 2. ᾿Εβούλετο ἑαυτὸν φιλεῖσθαι, wished himself beloved, Cyr. 

a. With ἄν, the Inf. or Part. commonly supplies the place of the cor- 
responding tense of the Opt., or past tense of the Ind. (618); and is 
usually translated by our potential mode: Καὶ δ᾽ ἂν τοῖς ἄλλοισιν ἔφη 
παραμυθήσασθαι, he said he would advise the rest, 1. 684 (directly, av. . 


§ 661. INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE. © ~ 313 


“παραμυθησαίμην 1. 417). ‘Qs οὕτω περιγενόμενος ἄν, as though he would 
thus prevail, i. 1. 10 (directly, περιγενοίμην ἄν). 


659. 2. The use of the incorporated modes, particularly the Inf., is 
very great in Indirect Discourse, sometimes (a) continuing through a 
series of sentences, or (b) even extending to relative, and rarely to other 
subsidiary clauses (cf. 661 a); and being interchanged and blended not 
only (6) with other forms of Indirect Discourse, but also (4) with those of 
Direct Discourse. For the use of the tenses here, see 660 Ὁ E. g., 

(a) See Hdt. 1. 24; Cyr. 1. ὃ. 45. (Ὁ) Ἔφη δὲ, ἐπειδὴ οὗ ἐκβῆναι τὴν 
ψυχὴν, πορεύεσθαι .. εἰς rorov. ., ἐν &. . δύ᾽ εἶναι χάσματε, he said that, 
when his soul had left the body, it went to a place, in which were two open- 
ings, Pl. (c)‘Qs μὲν στρατηγήσοντα ἐμὲ... μηδεὶς ὑμῶν λεγέτω... ., ὡς δὲ... 
πείσομαι, let none of you speak of me as to take command, but (say rather) 
that I wild obey (680), i. 8. 15. (d) "Edy ἐθέλειν πορεύεσθαι, . . ““ ἐγὼ 
yap,” ἔφη, ‘oida,” he said that he wished to go, ‘‘for,” said he, “1 know,” 

iv. 1. 27. See i. 3. 20, vii. 1. 39; and cf. ὃ 644. 

6. Ὅτι and ὡς are sometimes even followed, after intervening words, 
by an Inf. or Part., instead of a finite verb: Εἶπε δὲ, ὅτι, ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα 
ἡ στρατεία λήξῃ, εὐθὺς ἀποπέμψειν αὐτόν, he said that, as soon as the cam- 
paign was ended, he would send him home, ili. 1.9. Cf. 644 ἃ, 

f. The use of the Inf. in Indirect Discourse after verbs of saying, think- 

- ng, perceiving, and the like (verba sentiendi et declarandi), is not broadly 
separated from its objective use after verbs of commanding, advising, 
entreating, teaching, learning, wishing, intending, and the like. (g) After 
verbs of promising, hoping, expecting, and the like, the Inf. is oftener in 
the Fut., according to the rule for Indirect Discourse. 


660. a. The Inf. and Part. are achronic in respect to absolute time 
(590, 607). (0) But the Part., the Inf. Fut. and Fut. Perf., and the 
Inf. in Indirect Discourse (cf. 648 Ὁ), commonly express the same time 
relatively (i. e. with reference to the verb on which they depend), which 
the same tense of the Ind. would express absolutely. (c) For the use 
here of the Pres. and Peif. as also Impf. and Plup., see 269c. (d) Other- 
wise the Inf., as in Eng., commonly expresses simply the relation of the 
action to the time (267 c), leaving the time itself to be inferred from the 
connection. This time is often a relative future ; and then the less com- 
mon Fut. Inf. might also be used, to give prominence to the time. E. g., 

(Ὁ) “Hues λέγων (λέξας, λέξων) he went saying (having said, to say). 
Λέγει δρᾶν (ἰδεῖν, ὄψεσθαι), he says that he sees (saw, shall see). Cf. 643 a. 
(0) ᾿Ιᾶσϑαι αὐτὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησι, he says that he himself healed the wound, 
i. 8. 26 (directly ἰώμην). (4) Βουλόμενοι... ἔχειν (ἀποκλήσασθαι, v. 1. ἀπο- 
κλήσεσθαι), wishing to have (to intercept), Th. 8. 9; 6.101. See 598. 

e. The Aor. Part. sometimes agrees in time with the leading verb, 
chiefly with another Aor. when both refer to a single act, and with such 
verbs as λανθάνω, τυγχάνω, φϑάνω, and περιοράω : Ti ἂν εἰπών σέ τις 
ὀρθῶς προσείποι ; what could one call you and call you rightly? Dem. 
232. 20. ᾿Ιδὼν εἶδον, [seeing] swrely I saw, Luc. Ὁ. Mar. 4. «Δήσομεν 
ἐπιπεσόντες, we shall attack by surprise, vii. 3. 43. See § 677. 


661. a. Clauses depending upon the Inf. and Part. have usually 
the same form as if these were finite verbs : Ἕτοιμος ἣν ἀποτίνειν εἰ κατα- 
γνοῖεν, he was ready to pay, if they should condemn him, Isoc. 361 e. 

b. From the familiar association of the Acc. with the Inf., and the 
Gen. with the Part., words commonly governing other cases are often 
followed by these in connection with an Inf. or Part.: “Ypas προσήκει 


coMP. GR. 14 


314 SYNTAX. —R. XXXII, — INFINITIVE. § 661. 


καὶ ἀμείνονας . . εἶναι, it befits you to be [that you should he] braver, iii. 2. 
15 (cf. ὑμῖν προσήκει Tb. 11, § 450). “Hpiovros εἰσόρᾳς ἐμοῦ, you sce me 
going (432 h), Soph. Tr. 394. (6) Sometimes the Acc. occurs for another 
case with the Part., if its use is analogous to that of the Inf. 

d. In the use of the incorporated modes with adjuncts, there is often 
a union of two constructions : ΑΎγελλε δ᾽ ὅρκῳ προστιθείς, annownce [with 
an oath, adding it], adding an oath, Soph. El. 47. 


662. From the intimate union subsisting between the Inf. or Part., 
and the leading finite verb, a word properly modifying the one is some- 
times placed in immediate connection with the other. Thus we find 
(a) such adverbs as ἅμα, αὐτίκα, εὐθύς, ἐξαίφνης, μεταξύ, ὅμως, καίπερ, 
&c., joined with the Part. instead of the leading verb ; and- sometimes 
(b) a particle joined with the leading verb instead of the Inf. or Part., 

articularly ἄν (621), and οὐκ with φημί : (a) “Aya ταῦτ' εἰπὼν ἀνέστη 
having said this, he at the same time rose], as soon as he had said this, 
he rose, iii. 1. 47. Μεταξὺ παίζων εἰσέρχεται, [playing, meanwhile] he 
enters in the midst of his play, Pl. (Ὁ) Οὐκ. ἔφασαν ἰέναι, they said they 
would not go, i. 3. 1. 


αι, Lhe Infinitive (Verb-Noun, “Ὄνομα τοῦ ἹῬήματος ἢ). 


663. Rute ΧΧΧΙΠ. The INFINITIVE is con- 


strued as a neuter noun (491 a). Hence, | 

(a) The Inf. may be the Βύβύξου of any word which would 
agree with a noun, or (b) even of another Inf.; (c) it may 
itself agree as an APPOSITIVE; (4) it may DEPEND upon any 
word which would govern a noun; or (e) it may be used, like 
a noun, to express a CIRCUMSTANCE ; particularly such as are 
denoted by the Gen. of cause, the modal Dat. (466 5), the Ace. 
of specification (481), and the adverbial Acc. (483). (f) The 
ARTICLE is often prefixed to the Inf. to give prominence to its 
substantive character, or to define the relation which it sus- 
tains as a substantive, by marking the case. If the Inf. is gov- 
erned by a preposition, the insertion of the article is required. 

(a) Φεύγειν αὐτοῖς ἀσφαλέστερόν ἐστιν, to fly 18 safer for them, iti. 2. 19. 
(Ὁ) Δοθῆναι αὐτῷ σάζειν τοὺς Ἕλληνας, that it should be granted to him to 
save the Greeks, ti. 8. 25. (c) Td γὰρ γνῶναι ἐπιστήμην που λαβεῖν ἐστιν, 
to learn is to acquire knowledge (534. 8), Pl. Thezt. 209 e. (4) Θερμότερον 
πιεῖν, warmer for drinking, Mem. 3. 18. 3. Μανθάνειν γὰρ ἥκομεν, we 
have come to learn, Soph. O. C. 12. (6) ᾿Εξῆλθεν τοῦ σπεῖραι (429 a). 
ὋὉρᾷν στυγνὸς Fv, καὶ τῇ φωνῇ τραχύς, he was stern in aspect, and rough 
in voice, ii. 6. 9. (f) Διὰ τοῦ ἐπιορκεῖν, through perjury, 11. 6. 22. 

g. In Greek, as in Eng., the Inf. Act, (or Mid.) is often used, where 
the Inf. Pass. might have been used with reference to a nearer, more ex- 
plicit, or more natural subject : “Agcos θαυμάσαι, worthy to admire] be 
admired, Th. 1. 138 (cf. θαυμάζεσθαι, Id. 2. 40). Θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι, EK. 725. 

h. The Inf. is often named from its special office : as, the Inf. of Direct 
or Indirect Object, of Purpose, of Specification, the Adverbial Inf., &c. 


664. Arricty wirn THE Inr. a. The prevalent use of the Inf. as 
a direct or indirect object of a verb or adjective, is not commonly dis- 


ὁ 667. CASE OF ITS SUBJECT. RULE XXXIV. 315 


tinguished by the article ; while its rarer subjective use as a Gen. is usu- 
ally so distinguished. Hence it usually wants the article, where it would 
be naturally translated by the Eng. Inf., and also in Indirect Discourse ; 
but commonly takes it when it modifies a noun, unless the noun is so 
joined with a verb, that the Inf. may seem related to them jointly (as 
together equivalent to some verb, &c.): See examples above. Upigaors 
τοῦ ἀθροΐζξιν (4440). "ἔλαβον πρόφασιν στρατεύειν, they seized a pretext 
for war, Hel. Ἵνα... φόβος εἴη .. στρατεύειν, that they might fear, &c., il. 

b. In some cases it seems indifferent whether the Inf. is regarded as 
the subject of a verb, or as depending upon the verb used impersonally. 
See 571f. In such cases, or when the Inf. is thfe subject of ἐστί and an 
adjective, it commonly wants the article. 

c. The article is often prefixed, especially in the tragedians, where it 
would not have been expected, and is often in the Acc. (of direct object, 
effect, or specification), where another case might have been expected. It 
is used the more freely, if some negation is expressed. Thus, Td δρᾶν οὐκ 
ἠθέλησαν, [willed not the doing] were not willing to do it, Soph. “Os ce 
κωλύσει τὸ δρᾷν, who will prevent thee [as to] from doing it (405), Id. 


665. a. The Inv. or SpecrricaTion and the ApvErRBIAt Ivr. have 
a large range, and are variously translated. In some of these uses, the 
Inf. is often said, though not in the strict sense of the term (401 N.), to 
be absolute. HE. g.,’Ex δείματός του νυκτέρου, Soxeiv ἐμοί, from some night 
vision, [according to the seeming] as it seems to me, or methinks, Soph. El. 
410. ᾿Αλλ εἰκάσαι μὲν, ἡδύς, but to guess, joyous, 1d. O. T. 82. ᾿Ολίγου 
δεῖν πλείους ἀπεκτόνασιν, have slain [to want little] almost a greater num- 
ber, Hel. So μικροῦ δεῖν, ὀλίγου [se. δεῖν), μέκρου [sc. δεῖν], almost. 

b. The use of εἶναι as the Inf. of specification, or the adverbial Inf, 
will be particularly remarked with ἑκών, chiefly in negative sentences ; 
and with some adverbs, or prepositions followed by their cases, chiefly pre- 
ceded by τό Οὔτε συνθήκας ἂν ψευδοίμην ἑκὼν εἶναι, nor would I break my 
engagements willingly [to be willing], or, so far as depends on my will, 
Cyr. To νῦν εἶναι, [as to the being, or state of affairs, now] for the present, 
iii. 2. 87. Td κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι, so far as regards him, i. 6. 9. 


666. Rute XXXIV. The Sussect or THE Iy- 
FINITIVE 1s put in the Accusative : as, 


Οἰόμενοι. . Kipov ζῆν, supposing [C. to be] that Cyrus was alive, ii. 1. 
1 (cf. the finite Κῦρος ζῇ, C. ἐδ alive, 400). "Hétov . . δοθῆναί of ταύτας τὰς 
πόλεις, he requested that these cities should be given to him, i. 1. 8. 

a. The subject of the Inf. is very often, either properly or by attraction 
(474, 657 6), the direct olject of a preceding verb, and consequently in the 
Acc. Hence has arisen an association between this case and the Inf., 
which has led to this rule. (Ὁ) The Inf., on the other hand, extensively 
constitutes an indirect object of the verb or other word on which it 
depends. From the prevalence of this use appears to have arisen the 
resemblance-in form of the Greek and Lat. Inf. to the Dat., and the use 
of the prepositions ¢o and zu before the Inf. in Eng. and German: Πέπεικε 
τὸν μάντιν λέγειν, had perswaded the prophet [to the saying] to say, vi. 4. 14. 


667. a. This rule applies to the subject of the Inf. simply as such. 
(b) Very often, this subject has a prior grammatical relation, which 
determines its form ; (0) even if its two uses are not in immediate connee- 
tion. (d) Still, it is sometimes repeated in the Acc. for more distinct ex- 
pression ; and (e) is oftener so wnderstood. (f) For clearness, emphasis, 


316 SYNTAX. R. V., W. — INFINITIVE. § 667. 


or euphony, it is sometimes repeated in the same case, chiefly in the Nom. 
(g) Attracted and mixed constructions also occur. Thus, 

(b) Κύρου ἐδέοντο ws προθυμοτάτου . . γενέσθαι, they besought C. to be 
as strenuous as possible, Hel. 1. 5. 2. See 657 ἢ, g. Ἰᾶσθαι αὐτὸς τὸ 
τραῦμά φησι (660 ὁ). (c) Ἰοῦτο δ᾽ ἐποίει ἐκ rod χαλεπὸς εἶναι, he effected 
this by being severe, ii. 6.9. (4) Otuar δέ με ἀκηκοέναι, I think that I have 
heard, Pl. Rep. 400 b. ᾿Ενόμισε ἐωυτὸν εἶναι Hdt. 1. 34. (e) Δεομένων 
μον προστάτην [sc. με] γενέσθαι, entreating me [that I would become] to 
become leader, Cyr. 7. 2. 23. (f) ᾿Επομνύω cor. . ἐγὼ βούλεσθαι ἄν, I 
swear to you that I would choose, Cyr. 6. 4. 6. (9) ᾿Ελπίξζων. οὐδ᾽ ὧν 
αὐτὸς, οὐδὲ οἱ [for τοὺς, attracted by αὐτὸς] ἐξ αὐτοῦ, παύσεσθαι, trusting 
that neither himself, nor his descendants, would lose, Hdt. 1. ὅθ. ᾿Εννέπω 
σὲ... ἐμμένειν, . . ws ὄντι (as if σοὶ had preceded), Soph. O. T. 350. 

h. The subject of the Inf. is very often indefinite ; and is then com- 
monly omitted, though words may be expresged agreeing with it: ‘‘ Ovéa- 
μῶς ἄρα δεῖ [sc. τινα] ἀδικεῖν." ‘* Ov δῆτα.᾽ δ΄’ Οὐδὲ ἀδικούμενον dpa ἀντα- 
δικεῖν. ** One ought then by no means to injure.” ‘*Surely not.” ‘* Not 
then, when injured, to injure in turn.” Pl. Crito 49 b. 


668. Pironasm anv Ex.ipsis. 1. The Infinitive (a) is 
sometimes redundant, and (b) is sometimes omitted : 

(a) Χάριν dvridliwow ἔχειν, in return gives [to have] pleasure, Soph. O. 
C. 232. Αἰτήσομαι δέ σ᾽ οὐ μακρὸν γέρας λαχεῖν Id. Aj. 825. (Ὁ) Εἰς τὸ 
βαλανεῖον βούλομαι [sc. ἱέναι], I wish to go to the bath, Ar. “Egy ὁ ᾿Ορόντης 
50. οὕτω ποιῆσαι), Orontes [said that he had so done] assented, i. 6. 7. 


669. wu. The Infinitive often depends upon a word which — 
is omitted or implied in. another word. 
1. This often occurs in Indirect Discourse : 


Oi δὲ σφάττειν ἐκέλευον " οὐ γὰρ ἂν δύνασθαι πορευθῆναι [sc. ἔφασαν» " 
but they bade him kill them ; for (they said that] they were unable to pro- 
ceed ; iv. 5. 16. Karedppdvowy. ., μηδένα ἂν ἐπιχειρῆσαι, they despised the 
Soe, (thinking that) no one would attack, Hel. 4. 5. 12. 


670. 2. Rute V. The Inf. often forms an elliptical com- 


mand, request, counsel, salutation, exclamation, or question : 


Σύ μοι φράζειν [sc. ἔθελε], do you [please to] tell me, Pl. Soph. 262 6. 
ἸΠαῖδα δ᾽ ἐμοὶ λῦσαι A. 20 (so esp. in Hom.). Ζεῦ πάτερ, ἢ Αἴαντα λαχεῖν, 
“Ὁ [grant] that either Ajax may draw the lot,’ H. 179 (cf. Ζεῦ ἄνα, δός 
τίσασθαι, ‘grant that I may punish,’ I’. 351). Τὸν Ἴωνα χαίρειν [sc. κε- 
λεύω], I bid Ion hail, Pl. ion ὅ80 ἃ. "Eué παθεῖν τάδε [sc. δεινόν ἐστι], 
φεῦ / that I should suffer such things [is horrible], alas/ Aisch. Kum. 837. 
Ὦ βασιλεῦ, κότερον Néyav . . ἢ σιγᾶν [sc. χρή, or κελεύεις], Hdt. 1. 88. 

a. So often in proclamations, laws, &c.: Τοὺς Θρᾷκας ἀπιέναι [86. κελεύε- 
rat or δεῖ], it is ordered that the Thracians depart, or the T. must d., Ar. 
Ach, 172. (Ὁ) In exclamation, the article is usually prefixed : Tis τύχης / 
τὸ ἐμὲ viv κληθέντα δεῦρο τυχεῖν ἡ My ill-luck! That I should happen 
now to have been summoned hither! Cyr. 2. 2. 8 (429f). (0) In a few 
poetic passages, the Inf. follows εἰ γάρ or εἴθε, to express wish: Ei γὰρ... 
ἐχέμεν [sc. ὥφελες, 638 g], would thou hadst, ἡ. 311. See w. 376. 


671. 3. Rute W. Some connectives are followed by the 
Infinitive ; especially ὡς, ὥστε, οἷος, and ὅσος. 

a. This construction, like similar constructions in our own and other 
languages, is plainly due to ellipsis, though it has extended to cases 


§ 674. INF. WITH ὩΣ, &C. PARTICIPLE. 317 


where the ellipsis cannot be supplied without cumbering the discourse, 
and has some irregular forms. (b) It sometimes occurs where a connective 
seems needless ; and (0) is often parenthetic (chiefly with ὡς). E. g., 

(a) ᾿Επειδὰν δὲ σημήνῃ . ., ὡς [sc. σημαίνοι ἂν] ἀναπαύεσθαι, when the 
signal is given, as {it would be given] for resting, ii. 2. 4. Ὕπελάσας ὡς 
συναντῆσαι, riding up [so as] to mect him, i. 8.15. Βούλεται πονεῖν, ὥστε 
πολεμεῖν, chooses toil, so as to be [or that he may be] at war, ii. 6. 6. "EE 
ᾧ μὴ καίειν, Eq’ ᾧ τε πλοῖα συλλέγειν (557). Otor. . ἐφίεσθαι, Ὅσον γεύ- 
σασθαι" see ὅδ6 "Ὁ, ο, ἃ. (Ὁ) Ψυχρὸν ὥστε λούσασθαί ἐστιν, it is cold [so as 
to bathe in] for bathing (cf. λούσασθαι ψυχρότερον), Mem. 3. 18. 8. ᾿Εποί- 
noa ὥστε δόξαι, 1 had made [things so result that it should seem] ἐξ seem 
(feceram ut), i. 6. 6. (ὁ) ‘Qs δὲ συντόμως (or συνελόντι, or ἐν βραχεῖ, 56. 
λόγῳ, εἰπεῖν, ut breviter dicam, [I say this so as to speak] to speak briefly, 
(Ee. 12. 19, Ages. 5. 8, 7. 1. ‘Qs ἔπος εἰπεῖν Ρ]., Ὥς λόγῳ εἶπαι Hat., Ὥς 
εἰπεῖν Th., [that I may speak the word, &c.] so to speak. ‘Qs μικρὸν με- 
γάλῳ εἰκάσαι, to compare small with great, Th. 4. 36. 

d. Other modes are also used after these connectives, for the sake of 
greater precision, force, actuality, or independence of expression ; while it 
is here the especial office of the Inf. to describe, characterize, or modify 
something that precedes: KaréBawov, ws ἐπὶ τὸν ἕτερον ἀναβαίνειν [v. 1. 
dvaBatev], they were descending, so as to ascend the second [that they might 
ascend], iii. 4. 25. Κραυγὴν πολλὴν ἐποίουν .., ὥστε καὶ τοὺς πολεμίους 
ἀκούειν ὥστε. . ἔφυγον - they made so much noise that even the enemy 
heard (characterizing the noise by showing its effect) ; [so that] and there- 
fore they fled (narrating the result as a fact in the history) ; ii. 2. 17. 

-e. ‘Os and ὥστε, originally relative adverbs of manner, often express 
with the Inf. purpose or consequence ; ws esp. the former, ὥστε the latter. 


672. f. The Inf. is also used elliptically after 4, than: Μεῖζον 4 
φέρειν, [greater than it should be for one to bear] too great to bear (513 6). 


π. The Participle (Verb-Adjective). 


673. The Participle is either circumstantial, complementary, 
definitive, or descriptive, that is, it either expresses some cir- 
cumstance or complement of the leading verb, or defines or de- 
scribes some associated person or thing. | 


674. 1. The CrrcumsrantiaL ῬΑΒΤΙΟΙΡΙΕ is distinguished 
according to the circumstance denoted, as time, cause, means, 
condition, purpose, &c.; and also as (a) preliminary, (Ὁ) con- 
temporary, or (c) prospective, according as its action precedes, 
is simultaneous with, or follows, that of the leading verb. 


d. Itis often translated into Eng. by a finite verb with a connective, 
an infinitive, a circumstantial adjunct, or an adverb (658). The Greek 
usually prefers a participle and verb, where the Eng. uses two verbs 
closely joined by ‘and.’ (e) As a preliminary part., the Aor. is espe- 
cially used ; for brevity, often translated by the Eng. Pres. The prospee- 
tive part. is commonly in the Fut.; often translated by the Eng. Infinitive. 

E. g., (a) Μάνθαν ἐλθῶν, [having gone] go and learn, Ar. Nub. 89. 
Κῦρος ὑπολαβὼν τοὺς φεύγοντας, συλλέξας στράτευμα, ἐπολιόρκει Μίλητον, 
C. received the exiles, and raising an army besieged M.,i. 1. 1. (Ὁ) OF 
ληϊζόμενοι ζῶσι, who live by plundering, Cyr. 3. 2. 25. *Hxe. . ὁπλίτας 
ἔχων χιλίους, he came with 1000 hoplites, i. 2. 6 (so λαβών Ib. 8, ἄγων, 


15 ᾿ SYNTAX. Ε΄. ΧΧΧΥ͂. --- PARTICIPLE. δ 074. 


φέρων, = with). ἘἩελευτῶν finally (609 a) ; ἀρχόμενος, at first, Th. 4, 64; 
ἐπικρυπτόμενος (553 c), or λαθών (677 f), secretly. “O τι δέοι ποιοῦντας 
φίλους εἶναι, what they must [doing be] do to be friends, vi. 6. 4 (cf. iv. 
2. 8). (ὁ) Ἔπεμψέ τινα ἐροῦντα, he sent one to say (598). See 635. 

f. For participles expressing condition, see 635. Concession is some- 
times expressed by a finite verb (commonly preceded by καὶ εἰ or εἰ καί) ; 
but oftener by a participle with an appropriate particle, as καίπερ, καί, 
πέρ, καίτοι, οὐδέ, μηδέ, &c.: Προσεκύνησαν καίπερ εἰδότες, they did him 
homage, even [knowing] though they knew, i. 6.10. See 662 ἃ. 

g. Ἔϊχων, both with and without an Acc., is joined with some verbs, 
chiefly of trifling or delay; to give the idea of persistency (cf. 679 Ὁ) : 
Anpets ἔχων, you trifle [holding on] continually, Pl. Gorg. 497 a. (8) Ma- 
θών or παθών, with τί or ὅττι, sometimes forms a sarcastic or wondering 
‘why’ or ‘ because’: Τί yap μαθόντ᾽ és τοὺς θεοὺς ὑβριζέτην ; [having learned 
what new notions, &c.] what possessed you to insult the gods? Ar. Nub. 
1506. Τί παθοῦσαι... εἴξᾶσι γυναιξίν ; [having met with what, &c.] what 
has happened to them that they resemble women? Ib. 340. 


675. The Circumstantial Participle is often so loosely connected 
with the leading verb, that it is said (though not in the strictest sense of 
the term, 401 Nn.) to be put absolute. 


RuLE XXXV. A PARTICIPLE. AND SUBSTAN- 
TIVE are put absolute in the Genitive ; an IMPER- 
SONAL PARTICIPLE, in the Accusative: as, 


Τούτων λεχθέντων, ἀνέβησαν, these things having been said, they arose, iii. 
8.1. ᾿Ανέβη ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη, οὐδενὸς κωλύοντος, he ascended the heights [no 
one opposing] without opposition, i. 2. 22. υνδόξαν τῷ πατρὶ... γαμεῖ, 
[it having seemed well to] with the approval of his father, he marries, Cyr. 
8. 5. 28. ᾿Αδηλον ὃν, ὁπότε. . ἀφαιρήσεται, ‘as it was uncertain,’ Th. 1. 2. 

a. The Gen. absolute may be referred to the general head of the Gen. 
of Cause (often of time, 488 ; also of motive, reason, &c.). (Ὁ) The im- 
personal participle absolute commonly retained the generic Acc., the only 
form in which its proper gender, the neuter, could be distinguished 
(571) ; perhaps the rather, because this participle was so often akin to 
the Acc. of time or the adverbial Acc. (ὁ) The Gen. is here more readily 
admitted when the subject is afterwards expressed by a finite clause, than 
when it is expressed by the Inf. (571f): Δηλωθέντος, ὅτι... τὰ πρά- 
Ὕματα ἐγένετο, it having been shown that affairs depended, Th. 1. 74. 
TIpoorayOév μοι... ἄγειν, it having been charged me to convey, Dem. 

d. The use of the neuter Ace. as absolute is sometimes extended, 
chiefly to participles not agreeing with nowns, or such as are often used 
impersonally : Kupabty δὲ οὐδέν, nothing having been fixed, Th. 4. 125. 
ἹΠροσῆκον αὐτῷ τοῦ κλήρου μέρος 15:6. 51. 36. (6) Other genders some- 
times appear as if in the Acc. absolute, after ὡς or ὥσπερ (680) ; ἃ use 
which seems due to a verb of thinking or speaking expressed or understood, 
or to the influence of an associate construction : Ὥς μὲν στρατηγήσοντα 
ἐμὲ. ., λεγέτω, let him speak [of me as to take], as if I were to take com- 
mand (659 ὁ ; οἵ, 680 ο)ἡ. Ἐχετο δὲ πρὸς τοὺς θεοὺς . ., ὡς τοὺς θεοὺς (re- 
peated) εἰδότας, he prayed to the gods, as knowing, Mem. 1. 3. 2. 


676. 4. In the absolute construction, the substantive is sometimes 
omitted, and sometimes, though less-frequently, the Part. of the substan- 
tive verb: Εἶπον, ἐρωτήσαντος [se. αὐτοῦ, when he asked, they replied, iv. 


§ 67 8, ABSOLUTE, COMPLEMENTARY, &C. 319 


8.5. Οὕτω δ᾽ ἐχόντων [se. πραγμάτων, 577 c], affairs standing thus, iii. 2. 
10. “Axovros Bacthéws [sc. ὄντος], the king [being] unwilling, ii. 1. 19. 

b. Absolute and connected constructions of the Part. are, in various 
ways, interchanged and mixed ; the former giving more prominence to. 
the Part., and sometimes arising from a change of subject ; the latter 
showing more clearly the relation of the Part. to the rest of the sentence: 
Ac ἡμᾶς, ἐν τάξει τε ἰόντων [sc. ἡμῶν], by us, while marching in order, 
v. 8.13. Παρεσκευάζοντο, ὡς ταύτῃ προσιόντος καὶ δεξόμενοι, they pre- 
pared for his coming that way and for receiving him (680), i. 10. 6. 


677. 2. The ComMpLemMEeNTARY ParTicrPLE is used with 
verbs of sensation, of mental state and action, of showing and 
informing, of appearance and discovery, of concealment and 
chance, of conduct and success, of permission and endurance, of 
commencement and continuance, of weariness and cessation, of 
anticipation and omission, ἄτα. 


It may agree with (a) the subject or (Ὁ) an adjunet of the leading verb, 
or (ὁ) may be used impersonally ; and (d) is sometimes understood (chiefly 
av). It is (e) variously translated, sometimes even by an independent 
verb (as expressing the chief idea), while its leading verb is translated by 
an adverb or circumstantial adjunct. E. g., 

(a) ᾿Επαύσαντο πολεμοῦντες, they ceased warring, vi. 1. 28. Ἥδονται 
πράττοντες, delight in doing, Mem. 2. 1. 33. ᾿Εχθρὸς ὧν κυρεῖ, happens to 
be a foe, Kur. Actiw. . σοφὸς γεγώς, 1 will show that I have been wise, 
Id. (Ὁ) “Hxovce Κῦρον ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ὄντα, he heard [of C. being] that C. was 
in C., i. 4. 5. (ὦ) Ἑώρα πλείονος ἐνδέον, he saw [there being need] that 
there was need of more, vi. 1. 81. (4) Σῶς toh [se. ὦν], know that you 
are safe, Soph. (6) See f. 

_ f. A few verbs, as λανθάνω to escape notice, elude, φθάνω anticipate, 
ἀνύω despatch, διαλείπτω leave an interval, may either take complementary 

articiples, or be themselves used as circumstantial participles ; and Aav- 
ἄνω may express concealment either from others or from one’s self, 
according to its object expressed or understood : Λαθεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελθών, 
{to elude him departing] to depart without his knowledge, i. 3.17. Tpe- 
φόμενον ἐλάνθανεν, was secretly maintained, i. 1.19. ᾿Ελάνθανε βόσκων, he 
was fostering unawares, Hdt.1. 44. Ὅπως μὴ φθάσωσι... of Κίλικες κατα- 
λαβόντες, that the Cilicians might not anticipate them in taking possession, 
i. 3.14. Οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις. . λέγων, you cannot tell me too soon, i. 6. tell me 
at once, Mem. 2. 3.11. Οὐκ ἔφθασαν πυθόμενοι. ., καὶ. . ἧκον, they no 
sooner heard than they came, Isoc. ὅ8 Ὁ. Κλέψαι.. λαθόντας καὶ ἁρπάσαι 
φθάσαντας, to seize unobserved and take by surprise, iv. 6. 11. 

g. The Complementary Part. sometimes occurs with an impersonal ex- 
pression, or with an adjective and verb supplying the place of a simple 
verb. When thus connected, the real subject of the sentence is some- 
times iniplied in the Part.: Πολεμοῦσιν ἄμεινον ἔσται, it will be better for 
them [warring] to go to war, Th. 1. 118. Δῆλος ἦν ἀνιώμενος (573 0). 


678. 3. The DerinitivE ParticiPLe is equivalent to a 
relative pronoun and finite verb, and is most frequently trans- 
lated by these. It is often used substantively, and may not 
unfrequently be translated by a noun. (a) It occurs chiefly 
with the article (the proper sign of this use, 520); but (b) 
sometimes without it, if the class only is defined. LE. g., 


320 . SYNTAX. — PARTICIPLE. § 678. 


- (a) Ὃ ἡγησόμενος οὐδεὶς ἔσται, there will be no one who will guide us, 
fi. 4.5. Οἱ αὐτομολήσαντες, the deserters, i. 7.138. Tar ἄλλων τὸν βουλό- 
μενον, of the rest {him that] any one that wished, i. 8.9. (Ὁ) ἽἍΛπαντα γὰρ 
τολμῶσι δεινὰ φαίνεται, ‘appear fearful to the venturous,’ Eur. 

c. "Ὧν or γενόμενος definitive is often omitted. See 526. (4) The 
Part. used substantively sometimes takes the Gen. or a possessive adjec- 
tive, instead of the proper case of the verb (chiefly in poetry) : Ὅ 7 ἐκεί- 
vou [= ἐκεῖνον] τεκών, his father, Eur. Tis ἐμῆς κεκτημένης Ar. 

e. A DESCRIPTIVE PARTICIPLE is sometimes joined with εἰμί: Ἦν... 
φύσεως ἰσχὺν δηλώσας, he was one who exhibited strength of genius, Th. 


679. The Participle with such verbs as εἰμέ, γίγνομαι, ἔχω, 
ἔρχομαι, οἴχομαι, &e., often takes the place of a simple verb, 
either to supply some deficiency in inflection, or for the sake 
of more definite, emphatic, or metrical expression : 


a.) With Substantive Verbs: Ἦν .. σπεύδων [= ἔσπευδεν], he was 
secking, Eur. Ζῶντα ἐμὲ ἐᾶν εἶναι, to permit me to live, vii. 6 30. Μὴ 
προδοὺς ἡμᾶς γένῃ, do not abandon us, Soph. (a) The substantive verb 
is sometimes omitted : Δεδογμέν [se. aor εἰς. τήνδε κατθανεῖν, ‘itis de- 
eided,’ Soph. (β) The Perf. Part. with εἰμί is especially common, either 
to supply the deficiencies in the inflection of the complete tenses (300 b, 
317s), or to direct the attention more expressly to the state consequent 
upon an action : Ἦσαν ἐκπεπτωκότες, were fallen, ii. 3. 10. 

b.) “Exo commonly gives or strengthens the idea of possession, continu- 
ance, or persistency (holding on ; ef. 674g); and is most frequent with 
the Aor. act. part., and im the dramatists: Πολλὰ χρήματα ἔχομεν ἀνηρπα- 
κότες, we have [many things, having seized them} seized many things, i. 
3.14. ᾿Ατιμάσας ἔχει, he has persistently dishonored, Soph. Ant. 22. 

ec.) "Epxopat with the Fut. Part. forms ἃ more immediate Future. 
Ἔρχομαι ἀποθανούμενος νυνί, I am going to die now, Pl. Theag. 129 a. 

d.) The Part. of a verb of motion with otyopor is a stronger form of 
expression for the simple verb. Ὥιχετο ἀπιὼν νυκτός, he [departed going 
off] went off in the night, iii. 3.5. So Βῆ φεύγων, he fled, B. 665. 


680. Rute X. A Participie is often preceded by ὡς or 

ὥσπερ, chiefly to mark it as subjective ; 
. That is, as expressing the view, opinion, feeling, intention, or statement 
of some one,whether in accordance with or contrary to fact. The Part. 
thus construed may be either (a) dependent or (b) absolute. (c) It often 
supplhes the place of a finite verb or Inf.; and is sometimes complementary 
in force, though circumstantial in form (with words of thinking, saying, 
&c.).. E. g., 

(a) Περικλέα ἐν αἰτιᾷ εἶχον ὡς πείσαντα, they blamed P. as having per- 
swaded [because, as they complained, he had persuaded}, Th. 2. 59. Συλ- 
λαμβάνει Κῦρον ὡς ἀποκτενῶν (598 Ὁ). (Ὁ) Παρήγγειλε.. ., ὡς ἐπιβουλεύ- 
οντος Τισσαφέρνους, he gave command, [as he would, T. plotting] as if T. 
were plotting, i. e. on the ground alleged (whether truly or not), that T. 
was plotting, i. 1. 6. Κατακείμεθα, ὥσπερ ἐξόν, we lie, as if it were per- 
mitted, iii. 1.14. (ὁ) ‘Os μηδὲν εἰδότ᾽ ἴσθι με, [know me as knowing] be 
assured that I know nothing, Soph. Ph. 258. ‘Qs πολέμου ὄντος, . . 
ἀπαγγελῶ, I shall report [as I should, war existing] that there is war, 11. 
1. 21. Ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος, . . οὕτω τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε [so have your opinion, 
as if I were going] be assured that I shall go, i. 3. 6. 


§ 685. VERBAL ADVERB. R. Y., XXXVI. 321 


681. So the particles ἅτε, οἷον, ola, ὥστε (Ion.), may precede the 
Part., especially in presenting a cause or other circumstance as actual : 
Κῦρος, dre παῖς ὧν. ., ἥδετο, C., as [he naturally would be] being a boy, 
was pleased, Cyr. Ota δὴ παῖς φιλόστοργος av φύσει, ἠσπάζετο Ib. 


i. Verbal in -réos (Lat. -ndus). 


682. The passive verbal in -réos, expressing obligation or neces- 
sity, is often used impersonally, in the neut. sing. or plur., with éeri- 
and from some verbs it can be only so used (571 6, 589; cf. Lat. 
-dum est). In this use, it is equivalent to the Inf. act. or mid. with 
δεῖ or χρή : Σκεπτέον ἐστίν [= σκέπτεσθαι δεῖ], considerandum est, it is 
to be considered [= we ought to consider]. 66 1. 8. 11. Hence it imi- 
tates this Inf. in two ways, as follows: 

Rute Y. Impersonal verbals in -τέον, or -réa, (a) govern the 
same cases as the verbs from which they are derived ; and (Ὁ) 
have sometimes the agent in the Acc., instead of the Dat. (458): 

(a) Πάντα ποιητέον, we must do all things (572), iii. 1. 18 (cf. πάντα 
ποιητέα ὃ 458). Ovs οὐ παραδοτέα τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐστίν, whom we must 


not give up to the Athenians, Th. 1. 86. (Ὁ) Καταβατέον οὖν ἐν μέρει ἕκα- 
στον, cach one therefore must descend in turn, Pl. Rep. 520 ἃ. 


683. Constructions are sometimes blended ; as, (a) The ¢mpersonal 
with the personal construction of the verbal. (Ὁ) The Dat. of the agent 
with the dcc.: “Hptv νευστέον . . ἐλπίζοντας, we must swim, hoping, Pl. 


CHAPTER IV. 
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. 


684. The PARTICLE, in its full extent, includes the Adverb, 
Preposition, Conjunction, and Interjection. 


a. The name is specially given to short and familiar words of these 
classes, chiefly characteristic adverbs and conjunctions (66). 
The INTERJECTION is independent of grammatical construction. 
But, as expressing pleaswre or pain (and thus, indirectly, good or evil), 
surprise, &c., or as a sign of address or exclamation (65 6), it may itself 
be modified by a Gen. or Dat. (429 6, 453), or may introduce a Nom., 
Acc., or Voc. (401 Ὁ, 476a, 484). Among the interjections, are ἄ, ἅ, é, 
ἕ, 6, ὦ, ὦ, al, οἵ, wd, dd, ἰώ, lad, lov, ela eja, φεῦ, ὠόπ, εὐοῖ evoe, oval ve. 


A. THE ADVERB. 


685. Rute XXXVI. Apverss modify sen- 


tences, phrases, and words; chiefly verbs, adjectives, 
and other adverbs: as, 
comp. GR. 14" U 


. 


322 SYNTAX. —— ADVERBS. —+ NEGATIVE, ὃ 685. 


Πάλιν ἠρώτησεν, again he asked, i. 6. 8. ᾿Ορθία ἰσχυρῶς, very steep. 

a. If an adverb proper modifies any other part of speech, it is through 
the included idea of a verb, adjective, or adverb: Τῆς... πάλιν xara- 
βάσεως, the descent back, Th. 7. 44 (xaraBaivw, to descend). 

b. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase is usually parsed as 
modifying the verb or leading word of the sentence or phrase ; while it 
may also give a special emphasis or bear a special relation to some other 
word (57 ἃ, 59d): “Hypets ye νικῶμεν, we at least are victorious, ii. 1. 4. 
᾿Αριαῖος, . . Kal οὗτος... πειρᾶται, Ariwus, even HE attempts, iii. 2. 5. 

ὁ. Some classes of adverbs, specially termed particles, are chiefly cHAnR- 
ACTERISTIC in their use (684 a) : as, 

Negative ov, μή, not (regularly preceding the words which they modi- 
fy) ; Interrogative, Direct » ἢ, οὐ, μή, μῶν, Indirect εἰ, dpa, Ep. ἤ, i; 
whether, μή whether not, Alternative πότερον... ἤ utrum.. an, εἰ... ἤ, 
εἴτε... εἴτε, Ep. 4. . ἢ, whether. . or; Contingent dv, κέ (618 5) ; Con- 
firmative δή (389d), δῆτα, δῆθεν, dal, ἢ, μήν, τοί (271), Ep. θήν, indeed, 
truly, surely, forsooth, vat, νή, μά (476d) ; Emphatic or Intensive γέ, γοῦν 
(γέ οὖν), πέρ (389), καί even, οὐδέ, μηδέ, not even; Additive καί also, τέ et 
(389 j) ; Illative οὖν (389 g), ἄρα (Ep. ῥά, ἄρ) accordingly, then, νύν, Ep. νύ, 
now, γάρ (γέ ἄρ) ; Distinctive μέν on the one hand, δέ on the other hand. 


686. Necative Particies. The general rule for the use 
of οὐ and μή, whether simple or in composition, is this : — 

Negation, .as desired, feared, or assumed, uses pn; but other- 
wise, ov. Hence, 


a. The Subjunctive and Imperative take pf; but (Ὁ) the Indicative 
and Optative, only in forms of wishing (638, 648 d), and in final and con- 
ditional clauses (including those in 641, 642). (6) The Infinitive usually 
takes ph, except in Indirect Discourse ; and (4) the Participle, οὐ, except 
when it has the office of a conditional or indefinite relative clause (635, 641). 
(e) So where a participial or infinitive idea is involved. (a) My πονήσῃς, 
Μηδ’ ἐπίκευθε (628 ὁ). (Ὁ) Οὔτ ἂν δυναίμην, μήτ᾽ ἐπισταίμην λέγειν, 
I could not, and may I never be able to say, Soph. Ant. 686. Ei μὴ ταῦτά 
[ἐστιν], οὐδὲ τάδε, if that is not, neither is this, Pl. See 624 5, 631s. 
(c) Μὴ κλέπτειν, not.to steal, Cyr. 1. 2.2. Οὐ μεμνῆσθαί σέ φασιν, they 
say that you will not remember (609), i. 7.5. (4) Μὴ γιγνομένων τῶν 
ἱερῶν, if the sacrifices were adverse, vi. 4.19. Τὰ μὴ ὄντα ws οὐκ ὄντα, 
to represent] whatever is not as not existing, iv. 4.15. (6) Οὔτοι φίλα τὰ 
μὴ φίλα [sc. ὄντα], the displeasing cannot be pleasing, Eur. Tro. 466. 

f. The Epic Subj. for the Fut. ind. naturally takes οὐ (617 b). : 

g. After εἰ whether, and in dependent sentences of the form ‘‘ whether 
.. or not,” or ‘what. . and what not,” both od and μή are used. 

h. After μή, a second negation in the same clause is usually expressed 
by οὐ; and after ot, by ph: Δέδοικα μὴ οὐκ ἔχω, J fear lest I may not 
have, i. 7. 7.5 Οὐ ph λαλήσεις; (597 6.) See 627. ‘ 

i. Οὐ forms combinations with single words (akin to composition), in 
which it may remain where general rules require ph. These often belong 
to the figure Litotes, so prevalent in Greek (70m, ef. 654). E. g., οὔ 
φημι I [do not say] deny (662b), οὐκ édw I forbid, ob πολλοί few. 


687. InrerrocatTive Particurs. a. The chief are ἄρα (Post- 
Homeric, a stronger form of ἄρα, accordingly) and ἢ (indeed). (Ὁ) These 
do not themselves indicate the answer expected ; while dpa οὐ (or simply 
ov) implies that an answer is expected in the affirmative, but dpa pq 


§689  6Ο,ΆΟὨ. ῬΡΒΕΡΟΒΙΤΙΟΝ. R. ΧΧΧΥ͂Π. ᾿ 828 


(or ἢ μή, or simply μῆ, or μῶν contracted from μὴ οὖν), in the negative : 
“Ap οὐκ ἂν ἐπὶ πᾶν ἔλθοι; would he not resort to every means? iii. 1. 18. 
Μή σοι δοκοῦμεν; [we do not seem to you, do we?] do we seem to you? 


B. THE PREPOSITION. 


688. Rute XXXVIL PREPOSITIONS govern 
adjuncts, and mark their relations (58 6) : as, 


᾿ Ὡρμᾶτο ἀπὸ Σάρδεων, καὶ ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς Λυδίας... ἐπὶ τὸν Μαίανδρον, 
he set out from Sardis, and marches through L. to the Meander, i. 2. 5. 


_ a. More particularly, ἀντί, ἀπό, ἐξ, and πρό govern the Genitive ; 

ἐν and σύν, the Dative; avd and εἰς, the Accusative ; ἀμφί, διά, 
κατά, μετά, and ὑπέρ, the Genitive and Accusative ; ἐπί, mapa, 
περί, πρός, and ὑπό, the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. 


b. The Dat. sometimes follows ἀμφί, dvd, and μετά in the poets ; and 
ἀμφί even in prose, chiefly Ion. : "Audi τε μουσικῇ, about music, Hdt. 

c. The eighteen words above mentioned are all which are commonly 
termed prepositions in Greek (from the use in 387), though other words 
may have a prepositional force (708 ἃ). (4) “Ev and πρό, by the addition 
of ς (expressing motion or action), become (évs, cf. 156, 154) els or és, and 
πρός (689 a, i). Els prevails in Att. prose, except Thuc.; but és in Ion. 
and Dor.; while the poets may choose according to the metre. 

e. To the prepositions governing the Acc., must be added the Ep. suffix 
«δε, to (cf. 252, 882) : Οὔλυμπόνδε, to Olympus, A. 425 (cf. πρὸς "ολυμπον 420). 


689. The prepositions have primary reference to the rela- 
tions of place, and are used to express other relations by reason 
of some analogy, either real or fancied (many similar extensions 
of use appearing in our own and other languages). The use 
of the different cases with prepositions may be commonly re- 
ferred with ease to familiar principles in the doctrine of cases. 


1. Puace, Some prepositions merely show what place is referred to, 
while the relation to this place is marked by the case employed ; so that 
the same preposition may be used with different cases. From the place 
is expressed by the Gen.; into (or, with like sense, fo) the place, by the 
Acc.; in or at the place by the Dat., or sometimes the Gen.; throwgh the 
place, commonly by the Ace. Cf. 398, 433, 470a, e. The following are 
the chief distinctions of PLACE denoted by the prepositions. 

a. Within. *Ev, Lat. in with Abl., [αν the space within] in: ἐν Μιλήτῳ, 
in M.,i. 1.7. His, Lat. in with Acc., [1NTo the space within] into: εἰς 
πεδίον, into a plain, i. 2. 22. Ἔξ, ex, [FROM within] owt of: ἐκ τῆς χώ- 
pas, owt of the land,i.2.1. Διά, akin to δύο and Lat. dis-, [THROUGH the 
space within, dividing it in two] through: with Acc. poet.; commonly 
with Gen.: διὰ Φρυγίας, [IN a line dividing] through Phrygia, i. 2. 6. 

b. With. Σύν cum [1N the place with] with: σὺν ὑμῖν, with you, i. 3. 6. 
᾿Από ab, [From the place with] from: dm ἀλλήλων, from each other, i. 8. 

c. Amid, among, hence with: Μετά, akin to μέσος medius, and Germ. 
mit: νεκρῶν werd, [IN the midst of ] among the dead, Eur. Hec. 209 ; μετὰ 
Τρῶας, into the midst of the Trojans, A. 460. Μετὰ πρώτοισι Δ. 64. 


324 SYNTAX, R. XXXVII.— PREPOSITION. Ζὅἔ 689. 


d. Beside. Tlapa μὲν Κύρου, [From nse Aton Cyrus, i. 9. 29°; παρὰ 
Κύρῳ, [ar the side of] with C., i. 4.3; mapa ἹΚύρον, [To the side of] to C. 

e. About. “Api, akin to ἄμφω and Lat. ambo, amb-, on both sides of, 
hence, on different sides of, about: ἀμφὶ τὰ ὅρια, [THROUGH the region on 
both sides of] about the borders, Cyr. 2. 4.16; ἀμφὶ... πόλιος, [in the 
region | about the city, Hdt. 8.104. See 527 a, 688 b. 

f. Around. Ilept, akin to Lat. per: περὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον, [THROUGH 
the circuit] arownd the camp, v. 1.9; περὶ τοῖς στέρνοις, around the breast. 

g. On, upon, or against (as in cases of resting, leaning, pressing, &c., on 
or against). ᾿Ἐἰπὶ τοῦ ὕππου, [IN a position] on his horse, iii. 4. 49 ; ἐπὶ 
τῇ θαλάττῃ, upon [by] the sea, i. 4. 1; ἀναβάς ἐφ᾽ ἵππον, mounting [το a 
position] on horseback, iv. 7. 24; ἐπὶ θάλατταν, to the seaside, iv. 8. 22. 

ἢ. Over against. ᾿Αντί, akin to Lat. ante, very rare in its local sense. 

i. Before. IIpé pre, pro: πρὸ ποδῶν, [IN the way] before the fect, iv. 
6.12. To mark more active relations, and the idea of fronting, ς is added 
to mpd (688 ἃ) : ἄγει πρὸς βασιλέα, he is leading [Τὸ a position fronting] 
against the king, i. 3:21; πρὸς Νεμέας, [IN the direction fronting] towards 
Nemea, Th. 5. 59; πρὸς Βαβυλῶνι, in front of Babylon, Cyr. 7. δ. 1. 

j. Over, above. ὙὝπέρ super: ὑπὲρ... πέτρας, from above the rock, iv. 
7.4; ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς, over head, Ages. 2. 20; ῥιπτέουσι ὑπὲρ τὸν ὦμον, they 
throw it [To a place over and beyond] over the shoulder, Hdt. 4. 188. 

k. Under, beneath. “Ὑπό sub: ὑπὸ ξύγου, ὑπὸ ἁμάξης, from under the 
yoke, δ. 39; vi. 4. 225 ὑπὸ τοῖς digpous, [IN the space] under the seats, i. 
8. 103; εἶμ᾽ ὑπὸ γαῖαν, I shall go [ro the region] beneath the ea?th, Σ. 333. 

1. Up. ᾿Ανὰ... μέλαθρον, up to the roof, x. 239 ; ἀνὰ τὰ ὄρη, up through 
the mountains, 111. 5. 16 ; ἀνὰ σκήπτρῳ, on a sceptre, A. 15 (688 Ὁ). 

m. Down. Kara τῆς πέτρας, down from the rock, iv. 2.17 ; κατὰ ῥόον, 
down [along] stream ; κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν, along the way; κατὰ γῆν, by land. 


690. 9. Time. Ἔν τρισὶν ἡμέραις, in three days, iv. 8. 8. ἜΠΦ᾽ 
ἡμῶν, in our time, i. 9.12. Διὰ νυκτός, through the night, iv. 6.22. ᾿Αμφὶ 
δείλην, about evening, ii. 2.14. Ἱρὸ τῆς μάχης, before the battle, i. 7. 13. 
Μετὰ τὴν μάχην, after the battle, Ib. ’Amd γενεᾶς, from birth, ii. 6. 30. 


691. 3. Srate. Ἔν πολέμῳ, εἰς “πόλεμον, ἐκ πολέμου, in (into, out 
of) α state of war, vi. 1. 29; ἐξ ἴσου, [from equal ground] on an equality, 
iii. 4. 47. “Earl τῷ ἀδελφῷ, dependent upon his brother, i. 1. 4; ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν, 
in our power, v. 5. 20. Ὑπό σοι, wnder your power, vii. 7. 32. 


692. 4. Comparison. IIpé γε ἄλλων, before [more than] others, Pl. 
“Ὑπὲρ ἐλπίδα, above hope, Soph. Ant. 366. Περὶ πάντων, superior to all, 
A. 287 (the greater surrounding the less). apa τὰ ἄλλα ἔφα, [by the 
side of] in comparison with the other animals, Mem. 1. 4. 14. 

5. NumBer, ADDITION, DISTRIBUTION. af ὶ τοὺς δισχιλίους (531 ἃ). 
His χιλίους, to the wumber of 1,000, i. 8. 5. pos τούτοις, in addition to 
these, 111. 4. 18. "Ava ἑκατόν, [according to or by the hundred] a hundred 
each, iii, 4. 21. Kar’ ἐνιαυτὸν, [by the year] yearly, iii. 2. 12. 


693. «6. OriGin, Source, MATERIAL, &c. Τεγονὼς ἀπὸ Δαμαράτου, 
sprung from D., ii. 1.3. Φῶς... ἐκ Διός, a light from Jove, iii. 1.12; ἐκ 
ξύλων, [out of] of wood, Hdt. 1.194. Airety παρὰ τούτου, to ask from him, 
i. 3. 16. ᾿ὈὈλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν, few [from] of many, Th. 1. 110. 

7. Prorrcrion (defenders stand before, over, around). Μάχεσθαι.. 
πρὸ γυναικῶν, to fight [before] for their wives, 8. 56; πρὸ ὑμῶν, in your 
behalf, vii. 6. 27. Μαχόμενοι ὑπὲρ Κύρου, fighting [over] in defence of C., 
1. 9. 31. ᾿Αμύνονται περὶ τέκνων, fight for their young, M. 170. 


§ 699. : IN COMPOSITION. RULE Ζ. 325 


694. 8. Cavusr, Motive, Enp, Atm. "Amd τούτου, [from] on ac- 
count of this, Hdt. 2. 42. "HE ὑποψίας, [out of} from suspicion, 11. 5. 5. 
Ava πίστεως, through confidence, iii. 2.8. Διὰ καῦμα, [through] by rea- 
son of the heat, i. 7. 6. ἹΠερὶ νίκης, [about] for victory, 1. 5. 8. 

9. Action. This is commonly conceived of as proceeding out of the 
agent, or from him, or from his sphere, or from under his influence (ἐκ, 
ἀπό, παρά, mpés, ὑπό, 586, ἃ, ἢ. ᾿ 


695. 10. Means, InstruMENT, Manner. ᾿Απὸ λῃστείας, [from] 
by means of robbery, vii. 7.9. Σὺν αἰχμῇ, with the spear, Asch. ; σὺν τῷ 
δικαίῳ, with justice, justly, ii. 6. 18. Mer’ ἀδικίας, wajustly, Ib. Διὰ 
ταχέων, [through quick measures] rapidly, i. 5.9. "Ava κράτος, [up to 
one’s strength] at full speed, i. 10. 15. ἹΠρὸς βίαν, [resorting to] by 
force, Fisch. Pr. 208. ‘Yad pacriywy, under the lash, iii. 4. 25. 


696. 11. Connection, ConrorMITy, SEPARATION, ΟΡΡΟΒΙΤΊΟΝ, 
SUBSTITUTION. Σὺν τοῖς θεοῖς, with the help of the gods, ii. 3. 23. IIpds 
τοῦ Κύρου τρόπου, [looking towards] according to the character of C., i. 2. 
11. Kara σπουδὴν, [according to haste] hastily, vii. 6. 28; see 513 b. 
Παρὰ φύσιν, [beside] against nature, Th. 6. 17. Λέγων καθ᾽ ἡμῶν, speak- 
ing against us, Soph. Ph. 64. ᾿Αντὶ τούτων, [over against] in return for 
this, vi. 6. 82 ; ἀντ᾽ ἐκείνου, instead of him, i. 1. 4. 


697. 12. ΑΡΡΕΑΙ,, THEME, REFERENCE, SPECIFICATION, &c. Πρὸς 
θεῶν, [before] by the gods, vii. 6. 33. ᾿Αμφὶ σῆς λέγω παιδός, I speak 
about your daughter, Kur. ἹΠερὶ ἐμὲ ἄδικος, unjust [about] towards me, 
i. 6.8. Kara γνώμην, as to intellect, Soph. IIpds ταῦτα, in view of this, 
upon this, i. 6.9. "Es φιλίαν, in respect to friendship, ii. 6. 30. 


698. a. In many connections the preposition may be either em- 
ployed or omitted, at pleasure : Κραυγῇ πολλῇ, Σὺν πολλῇ κραυγῇ, with 
great clamor, i. 7. 4; ἵν. 4.14. (Ὁ) In Greek, as in other languages, 
prepositions with their cases form many adverbial phrases. See 382 a. 

c. In composition, a preposition usually shows its original meaning, or 
one that is easily derived from it: dva(kara, els, ἐκ) Baivw, to go up (down, 
in, out) ; κατανεύω I [nod down] consent, ἀνανεύω, I (nod up] refuse. 


699. Rute Z. A PREPOSITION IN COMPOSITION often gov- 
erns the same case as when it stands by itself. 


a. A preposition in composition often retains its distinct foree and 
government as such, according to this rule. (b) But oftener it seems 
to be regarded as a mere adverb (cf. 703 Ὁ), and the compound is con- 
strued just as a simple word would be of the same signification. See 486. 
(c) Hence the preposition may be repeated, or a similar preposition in- 
troduced. (4) This adverbial force is particularly obvious in émesis, and 
(e) when the preposition is used with an ellipsis of its verb (chiefly ἐστί). 
K. g., (a) Συνέπεμψεν αὐτῇ στρατιώτας, he sent with her soldiers, i. 2. 20. 
Hence compounds of κατά, against, often take the Gen. (cf. 689 τη, 696) : 
Καταδικάζω ἐμαυτοῦ, 1 give judgment against myself, vi. 6.15. (Ὁ) ‘Em- 
πλεύσας αὐτῷ, sailing against him, Hel. 1. 6. 23 (cf. πλεῖν ἐπ᾿ αὐτούς Ib. 
1. 11). (ὁ) ᾿Επειρῶντο εἰσβάλλειν εἰς τὴν Κιλικίαν, they attempted to enter 
[into] Ο΄., i. 2. 21. (d) "Ex δὲ πηδήσας. See 888 6. (6) ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἄνα [for 
ἀνάστηθι] ἐξ ἑδράνων, but [rise] up from the seats, Soph. Aj. 194. Eige)- 
θεῖν πάρα [for πάρεστι], it is permitted to enter, Eur. Alc. 1114. Cf. 785. 

f. The preposition, as such, and the general sense of the compound, 
often require the same case, as, particularly, in compounds of ἀντί, ἀπό, 


326 SYNTAX. R. XXXVIII. — CONJUNCTIONS, § 699. 


ἐξ, els, πρό, and σύν : ᾿Απέχοντες ἀλλήλων, distant from each other (405), 
ii. 4.10. (g) Verbs compounded with ἐπί, παρά, or πρός, denoting ap- 
proach, commonly take the Dat. (449), though the preposition by itself 
would govern the Acc.: Προσέρχεται τῷ Ἐξενοφῶντι, comes to X., iv. 8. 4. 

ἢ. TMEsIs, so called, occurs chiefly in the earlier (especially the Epic) 
Greek, when as yet the union of the preposition and verb had not become . 
firmly cemented ; and is here often to be regarded as the adverbial use of 
the preposition (703 b), rather than the division of a word already com- 
pounded. (i) In Att. prose it is very rare, and even.in Att. poetry 
(where it is most frequent in the lyric portions), it seldom inserts any- 
thing more than a mere particle or enclitic pronoun between the preposi- 
tion and verb. (j) The preposition sometimes follows the verb ; and is 
sometimes repeated without the verb. E. g., (h) “Amd λοιγὸν ἀμῦναι 
(388 ὁ) A. 67. (i) Διά w ἔφθειρας, κατὰ δ᾽ ἔκτεινας, you have ruined and 
slain me, Kur. Hipp. 1357. (j) ΠΠέμψαντος, ὦ γύναι, μέτα, ‘having sent 
me for you,’ Eur. Hee. 504. ᾿Απολεῖ πόλιν, ἀπὸ δὲ πατέρα, destroy the 
city and his father, 1d. Herc. 1055. So, "Qpvuro & . ᾿Αγαμέμνων, ἂν 
[sc. ὥρνυτο] δ᾽ ᾿Οδυσεύς, then rose Agamemnon and [up] Ulysses, τ΄. 267. 


C. Tue CoNnsuNcCTION. 


700. Rutz XXXVIII. ConsuncTions con- 
nect sentences and lke parts of a sentence: as, 


σθένει Δαρεῖος καὶ ὑπώπτευε, Darius was sick and apprehended, i. 1. 1. 
a. By like parts of a sentence are meant those of like construction, or 
performing like offices in the sentence, and which united by conjunctions 
form compound or complex subjects, predicates, ὧς. (62g). They are com- 
monly, but not necessarily, of the same part of speech and of similar form. 


701. The chief conjunctions are the following, in two great 
classes according as they are used in codrdination or subordi- 
nation (62) : 

1. CodrprnaTe. (a) Copulative (simply coupling) τέ (389 1),. καί (the 
stronger and more emphatic), que, et, and; τὲ... τέ, xal.. καί, and 
closest τὲ καὶ, both .. and; compounds οὔτε... οὔτε, μήτε εἰν μήτε, neque 
ον neque, neither . . nor (686). (Ὁ) Adversative (denoting opposition) 

ἀτάρ, μέντοι, sed, at, but, yet. (0) Distinctive (weakly adversative, 
often approaching the copulative) δέ but, and, to which μέν corresponds ; 
compounds 75¢ poet., ἰδέ and ἠμέν Ep.; οὐδέ, μηδέ, and not, but not, 
neither, nor even. (d) Alternative %, ἠέ Ep., aut, vel, or ; compounds Fre 
Ep. (389 1), strengthened ἤτοι ; ἢ .. 4, ἤτοι .. ἤ, either... or. 

2. SUBORDINATE. (e) Final (denoting purpose, or end) ἵνα, ὅπως, ὡς, 
ὄφρα poet., ut, quo, in order that ; ph ne, lest. See 624. (f) Conditional 
εἰ si (cf. 141), af Dor. and Ep., ἐάν, ἤν, “av, εἴ xe Ep., if; εἴπερ siquidem, 
if indeed ; εἰ μή, ἐὰν μή, nisi, unless; εἴτε... εἴτε, rarer εἴτε ᾿- ἤ, εἰ sis 
εἴτε poet., sive . . sive, whether, or. See 631, 619a. For ep 9 ἐφ gre, 
on condition that, see 557a. (g) Concessive (denoting concession, or ad- 
mission) εἰ καί, καὶ εἰ, etsi, even if, though; to which ὅμως tamen, yet, 
corresponds. See 674f. (h) Temporal (marking a relation of time) πρίν 
before, akin to πρό and Lat. prius; πρὶν ἤ priusquam ; μέχρι, ἄχρι, ἕως, 
ἔστε (ἐς, τέ, 389 j; Post-Hom.), donec, wntil. Most temporal connectives are 
relative adverbs (641d). (i) Complementary (66 d) ὅτι, ὅ Ep., quod, that ; 
ὡς, ὅπως chiefly poet., [how] that; εἰ (f), 4 Ep., num, whether ; πότερον 


§ 703. INTERCHANGE OF PARTICLES. 327 


(πότερα) . . ἤ, εἰ... ἤ, elre.. εἴτε, dpa... ἤ, ἢ . . 4 Ep., utrum.. an, whether 

. or. See 643, 6898. (j) Causal ὅτι quod, quia, because; ὡς, as, 
since; ὅτε, ἐπεί, quando, since; ϑιότι (5¢ ὅ τὸ, οὕνεκα, OBotveKa [on ac- 
count of this that, 557 a] because ; γάρ (γὲ dpa, at least in accordance with 
this, 685 ὁ) nam, for, since. (k) Consecutive (denoting result, or conse- 
quence) ὥστε, ὧς, ut, so that (671d, e). (1) Comparative 4 quam, than 
(511, 513). (m) Eaxceptive πλήν, GAN ἤ [other than, τ], εἰ μή nisi, ὅτι 
μή (n; after a negative), except, εἰ μὴ εἰ (714. 2) nisi si, except [if]. 

Nore. In Greek, as in other languages, conjunctions have their origin, 
for the most part at least, in other parts of speech used connectively. 
E. g., (ἃ) NevreR Pronouns, ὅτι, 8, quod, that, as λέγει ὅτι ἄξει, he 
says [what follows] that he will lead, iv. 7. 2Q; ὅτι μή (m), as ovdels . . 
ὅτι μὴ γυνή, no one [that was not] except a woman, Hat. 1. 181; διότι, 
οὕνεκα (7) ; ἀλλά (from neut. pl. of ἄλλος, 483 4) otherwise, on the con- 
trary, but; ἀλλ᾽ ἤ (m), as ἀργύριον μὲν οὐκ ἔχω, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ μικρόν τι, I have 
no moncy [other than] except a little, vii. 7. 53. See ἢ, 624 6. 


702. a. Ὅτι (that, the thing which) is stronger, more positive, di- 
rect, or actual in expression than ὡς (how, the manner in which). Hence, 
in indirect discourse, ὅτι chiefly introduces what is simply said and not 
questioned ; ὡς, what is described, or what is said but questioned, or what 
is not said, or what is presented as thought or not thought: «Λέγει ὡς ἀπε- 
κόπησαν..., καὶ ὅτι τεθνᾶσι... ἄλλοι, he states how they had been beaten off, 
and that others are dead, iv. 2.17. ᾿Ενεκάλουν ἐμοὶ, ὧς μᾶλλον μέλοι μοι, they 
brought against me the charge (which I do not admit), that I cared more, 
vii. 7. 44. Οὐ τοῦτο λέγω, ὡς οὐ δεῖ, 7 do not say this, that one ought not. 

b. A conjunction often connects the sentence which it introduces, not 
so much to the preceding sentence as a whole, as to some particular word 
or phrase in it: Προσβάλλουσι. . καταλιπόντες ἄφοδον τοῖς πολεμίοις, εἰ 
βούλοιντο φεύγειν, they attack, leaving ὦ way of escape for the enemy, if 
they should wish to flee, iv. 2. 11. 

c. In many connections, two forms of construction are equally admis- 
sible, the one with, and the other without, a connective. The two forms 
are sometimes blended. See 511, 644, 659e, 671. A conjunction is 
sometimes used in Greek, where none would be usual in English. 

A twofold construction is sometimes admissible, according as a word is 
regarded as belonging (d) to a compound part of a sentence; or (e) to a 
new sentence : (d) Πλουσιωτέρῳ μὲν ἂν... ἢ ἐμοὶ edidous, you would give 
to a richer man than I [am], Cyr. (6) Tots .. μᾶλλον ἀκμάζουσιν, ἣ ἐγὼ 
[sc. ἀκμάζω], παραινῶ, I exhort those of greater vigor than myself, Isoc. 


OBSERVATIONS. 


703. 1. InTeRcHANGE. In Greek, as in other languages, 
the uses of the PARTICLES are often interchanged. Thus, 


1.) a. Adverbs sometimes take a case, as prepositions ; 
(b) prepositions are sometimes used without a case, as ad- 
verbs, especially in Hom. and Hdt. (πρός even in Att. prose) ; 
(c) the same particle is used both as an adverb and as a con- 
junction, or as a connective and a non-connective adverb. 


(a) See 405s, 436d, 44 ο, 450. Hom. uses εἴσω and ἔσω as protracted 
forms for εἰς : ᾿Αγάγῃσιν ἔσω κλισίην, ‘into the tent’; Ἴλιον εἴσω, cf. εἰς 


328 PARTICLES. — INTERCHANGE. § 703. 


Ἴλιον " 2. 155, 145, 143. (Ὁ) Τάδε λέγω, δράσω re πρός [sc. τούτῳ], this 
I say, and will do it [in addition to this] too, ὔβοῃ. Πρὸς δ᾽ ἔτι iii. 2. 2. 
Ilepi, [above others] eminently, 0. 44. (0) Κῦρον δὲ (and) μεταπέμπε- 
Tat... καὶ στρατηγὸν δὲ (on the other hand, also) αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε i. 1. 2. 

d. In the connection of sentences, πρίν is variously used: (a) as a con- 
junction, with a finite mode, or (B) as a preposition, with the Inf. ; (y) 
as an adverb with 4 and a finite mode or (8) even the Inf., or (e) in 
Hom. with ὅτε ; or ({) as a correlative (and so πάρος, πρόσθεν, πρότερον) 
preceding another πρίν : (a) Μὴ στέναζε πρὶν μάθῃς (641d). (B) ᾿Εθύετο 
πρίν τινι εἰπεῖν, he sacrificed before speaking to any one, v. 6. 16. (γ) Πρὶν 
h. . ἐγένοντο, [sooner than] before they had come, Ages. 2. 4. (8) Πρὶν 
ἢ... deat, before he satiates, E. 288. (ε) Πρίν 7 ὅτε... δῶκεν, until [when] 
he gave, M. 437. (Ὁ Οὐδέ rts ἔτλη πρὶν πιεῖν πρὶν λεῖψαι, nor did any 
one dare to drink [previously] before offering, H. 480. 

e. When two prepositions are combined, which occurs most frequently 
in the Epic, either one or both of the prepositions are used adverbially, 
or one of the prepositions with its substantive forms the complement of 
the other: ‘Audi περὶ κρήνην, round about the fountain, B. 305. ᾿Απο- 
πρό, far away, Il. 669. ‘Ln’ ἐκ βελέων, from beneath the weapons, A. 465. 


704. 2.) One preposition or adverb is often used for an- 
other (or a preposition is used with one case for another), by 
reason of something associated or implied. This construction 
(especially frequent with ἐν, εἰς, and ἐκ, 689 a) is termed, from 
its elliptic expressiveness, constructio pregnans. Thus, 


A sign of ΜΟΤΙΟΝ for one of REsT. (a) ῬΠΈΕΡΟΒΙΤΙΟΝ : Οἱ ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς 
. . ἔφυγον [ἐκ for ἐν, by reason of ἔφυγον following], those in the market 
fled [from it], i. 2.18. ᾿Εφάνη Als. . εἰς ὁδόν, a lion appears [having come 
into] in the way, O. 275. Παρῆσαν εἰς Σάρδεις i. 2. 2. (b) ADVERB: Τῶν 
ἔνδοθέν [for ἔνδον] τις εἰσενεγκάτω, let one of those within (coming from 
within] carry in, Ar. Pl. 228. (ὁ) CASE: Πρὸς τὸ πῦρ καθήμενος, going 
to the fire and sitting by it, Ar. Vesp. 773. 

A sign of rest for one of Motion. (4) ῬΒΕΡΟΒΙΤΙΟΝ : “Ev γούνασι 
πῖπτε, fell [and rested] wpon the knees, B. 870. (6) ADVERB: Ὅπου [for 
ὅποι] βέβηκεν, where [for whither] he has gone, Soph. Tr. 40. (f) CAsE: 
IIpds πέτρῃσι βαλών, dashing upon the rocks, t. 284. 


705. 3.) The Greeks, especially the earlier writers, often 
employ the looser and more generic for the closer and more 
specific connectives (63 g), or for other forms of expression : 

Ἤδη τ' ἣν ἐν τῷ τρίτῳ σταθμῷ, καὶ Χειρίσοφος αὐτῷ ἐχαλεπάνθη, it was 
now the third day, and C. was angry with him [= when it was now, &c.], 
iv. 6.2. ᾿Απειρήκεσαν μὲν, ὅμως δ᾽ ἐδόκει, [they were weary indeed, but 
yet] although they were weary, yet it seemed, vi. 5. 30. 

The student will not fail to remark, —(a) The frequent use, in the Epic, 
of δέ for γάρ, and in general of coérdination or simple succession, in the 
connection of sentences, for subordination (62): Πίθεσθ᾽, ἄμφω δὲ νεωτέρω 
ἐστόν, be persuaded, [and] for ye are both younger, A. 259. (Ὁ) The fre- 
er use of γάρ in specification, where we should use that, namely, Ke. : 

ᾧδε δῆλον Fv: τῇ μὲν yap πρόσθεν ἡμέρᾳ . . ἐκέλευε, was plain from this, 
that on the preceding day he commanded. (c) The use of καί after a word 
of sameness, likeness, or anticipation (677 f): Ty αὐτῇ γλώσσῃ χρέονται 
καὶ Γελωνοί, they use the same language [and] as the Geloni, Hat. 


§ 709. So psig, ΣΝ 829 


706. 1. a, Adverbs and prepositional adjuncts are often used sub- 
stantively or adjectively, in any case required: Substantively, Nom.” Ἦν 
ες ὑπὲρ ἥμισυ... ᾿Αρκάδες, above half were Arcadians, vi. ἃ. 10. Acc. 
Kis μὲν ἅπαξ καὶ βραχὺν χρόνον, for once and a short time, Dem. 21. 1. 
Adjectively, UWedracrat δὲ ἀμφὶ τοὺς δισχιλίους, about 2,000 targeteers, 
i. 2.9. See 526s. (Ὁ) An adverb and a preposition governing it are often 
written together as a compound word: ἐσαεί forever, ἔμπροσθεν. | 


707. wt. In the doctrine of particles, especially connec- 
tives, the figures of syntax hold an important place: thus, 


A. ELLIPSIS. 


Ellipsis here consists either (a) in the omission of the par- 
ticles themselves, or (8), far more frequently, in that of words, 
and even whole sentences, related to them. 


a. A particle belonging alike to two parts of a sentence is either (a) ex- 
pressed in both (the most distinct and emphatic form) ; or (b) in the first 
only ; or (c) in the second only (more rarely and chiefly in poetry) ; or 
(d) is sometimes even omitted in both. (e) A like variety obtains in 
respect to other classes of words, and (f) when more than two parts of the 
sentence are affected. (a) "Ev Αἰγύπτῳ καὶ ἐν Σικελίᾳ, in EL. and in S., 
Mem. 1. 4.17. (Ὁ) Πρός re ψύχη καὶ θάλπη, to cold and heat, Ib. 2. 1. 6. 
(c) Ἢ ἁλὸς ἢ ἐπὶ γῆς, either on sea or land, μ.27. (4) Ἔγχος βριθὺ, μέγα, 
στιβαρόν, a spear, heavy, huge, stout, Il. 801. (0) Οὐδὲν σὺ μᾶλλον ἤ τις 
ἄλλος ἔχει, you have no more than any other one. Pl. See g. 

g. Copulative conjunctions are often omitted (especially if more than 
two particulars are joined) ; (h) less frequently, those of other classes. 
(i) When not joined by a connective, a clause is sometimes in parenthetic 
or inverted order, or placed in apposition with another clause. (g) Πόθου 
πατρίδων, γονέων, γυναικῶν, παίδων, from longing for cowntry, parents, 
wives, children, iii. 1. 3. (8) ‘Opriw. . [sc. ὅτι] ἐθυόμην, I swear [that} 
I sacrificed, vi. 1. 31. (i) Ταῦτα, . . ὄμνῦμε. ., ἔπαθον Cyr. v. 4. 31. 
᾿Αφειλόμην, ὁμολογῶ, I rescued him, I confess, vi. 6. 17. 

7. In annexing several particulars, the Eng. more frequently uses the 
copulative with the last only ; but the Greek, with all or none: Πλίνθοε 
καὶ ξύλα καὶ κέραμος (496 cc). Cf. ἃ, g. 

k. A secondary connective is sometimes used without its primary (66) : 
‘Ouolous μὲν φιλοσόφοις, like philosophers indeed [but not philosophers], Pl. 


708. 8. Connected sentences especially abound in ellipsis, 
from the ease with which the omission can be supplied from 
the connection. Εἰ, g., observe the frequent ellipses, 


1.) In replies. These (a, Ὁ, c, d) have various forms. See 68 ὁ. 

e. Ina dialogue or address, a speaker often commences with a connec- 
tive (most frequently an adversative, distinctive, or causal conjunction), 
from reference to something which has been expressed or which is 
mutually understood : ᾿Αλλ᾽ ὁρᾶτε, but you see, iii. 2.4. (f) In like man- 
ner, the Voe. is often followed by a connective : Ὧ γύναι, ὄνομα δέ σοι τί 
ἐστιν; woman, but what is your name? Mem. 2. 1. 26. 


709. 2.) Between two connectives: ᾿Αλλὰ [sc. παύομαι] γὰρ καὶ 
περαίνειν ἤδη ὥρα, but [no more, for] i is now quite time to stop (sed enim), 


330 PARTICLES, — ELLIPSIS. § 709. 


iii. 2. 32. Παρὰ τὴν θάλατταν ἤει " καὶ [se. ταύτῃ ec] γὰρ ἤδη ἠσθένει, he 
went by the sea; [and he so went,] for he was now sick, vi. 2. 18. --- 
(a) And yet, perhaps, in such examples as these, ἀλλὰ γάρ or καὶ γάρ 
may be regarded as forming but a single compound connective, or one of 
the particles may be regarded as a mere adverb (703 c). 

3.) With adyersative and distinctive conjunctions, with which we must 
sometimes supply the opposite of that which has preceded: Μὴ μ᾽ ἄτιμον 
τῆσδ᾽ ἀποστείλητε γῆς, ᾿ ἀρχέπλουτον [sc. δέξασθε], ‘dismiss me not, 
but receive me,’ Soph. Cf. 572 b. — For ellipsis with ἤ, see 513, 567 f. 


710. 4.) With conditional conjunctions: Et δ᾽ [sc. βούλεαι] ἄγε, if 
you will, come, A. 302, and often in Hom. Ei δ᾽ ἐθέλεις [sc. ἄγε] &. 487. 
Hi μὲν σύ τι ἔχεις πρὸς ἡμᾶς. λέγειν [sc. λέγε δή] eb δὲ μὴ (sc. ἔχεις], ἡμεῖς 
πρὸς σὲ ἔχομεν - if you have anything to say to us, say it; if not, we have 
to yous vii. 7.15. “Aw μὲν ὁ Κῦρος βούληται [καλῶς ἔχει] ef δὲ μή Cyr. 


,. 711. 5.) With ὡς, especially in expressing comparison, design, pre- 
tence, possibility, &c.: Θᾶττον ἢ [sc. οὕτω ταχὺ] ὥς τις ἂν Gero, quicker than 
[so quick as] one would have thought, i. 5. 8. ‘Qs els μάχην παρεσκεύασμέ- 
vos, arrayed as (he would array] for battle, i. 8.1. ‘Qs ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ, as 
things are for the most part, commonly, iii. 1. 42. ‘Qs ἀληθῶς, truly, Pl. 

a. ‘Qs, like our as, is remarkable for the variety of its use. It belongs 
to four classes of conjunctions (701), and also perforins various offices as a 
connective adverb and as a modal sign (65d). (b) It is often used to 
render expressions of quantity less positive : "Exwv [sc. οὕτω πολλοὺς] ὡς 
πεντακοσίους, having such a number as 500, i. 8. about 500, 1. 2. 3. 
(c) From its frequent use with the accusative after verbs of motion to ex- 
press the purposed end of the motion (472g), it came at last to be even 
regarded as a preposition, supplying the place of wpds or els, but chiefly 
before names of persons: Πορεύεται ὡς βασιλέα, he goes [as] to the king, i. 
2. 4. ‘Qs τὸν ὅμοιον, to the like, p. 217. 


. 12. γγ. Various ellipses occur with prepositions and adverbs: Ἵλα- 
pai δὲ ἀντὶ σκυθρωπῶν [sc. γυναικῶν, or = ἀντὶ τοῦ εἶναι σκυθρωποὶ] ἧσαν, καὶ 
ἀντὶ ὑφορωμένων ἑαυτὰς ἡδέως ἀλλήλας ἑώρων, they were cheerful instead of 
[being] downcast, d&c., Mem. 2. 7. 12. His [sc. τὸν χρόνον] ὅτε, for the 
time when, B. 99. Σὺν οἷς ἔχω (554). See 557, 699 6, 703 ἢ. : 


B. PLEONASM. 


᾿ 713. Under this head we remark, - 
1.) The redundant use of NeGatives. This appears chiefly, 


a.) In connection with indefinites, which in a negative sentence are all 
regularly combined with a negative: Οὔποτε ἐρεῖ οὐδείς, no one shall 
[never] ever say, i. 8. 5. Οὐδενὶ οὐδαμῆ οὐδαμῶς οὐδεμίαν κοινωνίαν ἔχει Pl. 

b.) In divided construction, and (c) in the emphatic use of οὐδέ and 
μηδέ: Μηδὲν τελείτω μήτε ἐμοὶ μήτε ἄλλῳ μηδενί, let him pay nothing 
either to me or to any one else, vii. 1. 6. Οὐ μὲν δὴ οὐδὲ τοῦτ᾽ ἄν τις εἴποι, 
nor surely could any one say this, i. 9. 18. Μὴ τοίνυν μηδέ vil. 6. 19, 

d.) In the common (but not necessary) use of μή with the Infinitive, 
after words implying some negation: Ναυκλῆροις ἀπεῖπε μὴ διάγειν, he 
forbade the shipmasters to transport [saying that they should πού trans- 

ort], vii. 2.12. Ἥξει τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι, will keep from sinking. (e) Οὐ 
is sometimes used in like manner, with a finite verb after ὅτι or ὡς : ᾿Αρ- 
νεῖσθαι.. ., ὅτι οὐ παρῆν, to deny that he was present, Rep. A. 2. 17. 


§ 716. _ PLEONASM, - 331 


f.) In the use of μὴ od for μή, with the Infinitive (commonly) and Par- 
ticiple (sometimes), after negative and interrogative clauses (sometimes after 
expressions of shame, fear, and the like, from the negation implied). The 
οὐ (as simply continuing the general negation of the sentence, cf. a, Ὁ, ὁ) 
may be here joined with μή, (g) even when this is redundant. E. ¢., 
(ἢ) Οὐδείς γέ w ἂν πείσειεν ἀνθρώπων τὸ μὴ οὐκ ἐλθεῖν, no one could per- 
suade me not to go [no], Ar. Ran. 65. Οὐ γὰρ ἂν μακρὰν ἴχνευον αὐτὸς, μὴ 
οὐκ ἔχων τι σύμβολον, I could not trace tt far of myself, (not having] with- 
out some clew, Soph. O. T. 220. Ὥστε πᾶσιν αἰσχύνην εἶναι, μὴ οὐ συσπου- 
ddgew, so that all were ashamed not to share his zeal, ii. 3.11. (g) Οὐκ 
ἐναντιώσομαι τὸ μὴ οὐ γεγωνεῖν, I will not refuse to speak, Aisch. Pr. 787. 

h.) In the occasional use of οὐ to strengthen the negative force of 4, 
than: Πόλιν ὅλην διαφθεῖραι μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ τοὺς αἰτίους, to destroy a whole 
city, rather than [and not rather] the guilty ones, Th. 8. 86. 

Two negatives in the same sentence have their distinct force, when one 
applies to the whole sentence, and the other to a part only ; and so com- 
monly (i) when the first is interrogative, or (7) the second is simple οὐ or 
μή, after a negative of its own class (686), or (k) the two negatives are of 
different classes: (i) Οὐ... οὐδὲ... δύνανται; are they not even unable ? iii. 
1.29. (j) Οὐδεὶς οὐκ ἔπασχε, no one was not affected, Symp. See 559 ο. 
(k) Οὐ... δύναμαι μὴ γελᾶν, I cannot help laughing, Ar. Οὔτε σιγᾶν, οὔτε 
μὴ σιγᾶν Esch. See 597e. For apparent exceptions, see f, g, 627. 

714. 2.) The repetition of various particles for greater 
clearness or strength of expression, particularly after interven- 
ing clauses, in divided construction, and with important or em- 
phatic words ; but sometimes, especially in poetry, for mere 
euphony or rhythm : 

Ἔλεγεν ὅτι, εἰ wh... πείσονται, ὅτι κατακαύσει, he said that, if they would 
not obey, [that] he would burn, vii. 4. 5. Οὐκ ἂν ἱκανὸς εἶναι οἶμαι, od? ἂν 
φίλον ὠφελῆσαι, οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἐχθρὸν ἀλέξασθαι, I do not think I should be able, 
either to aid a friend, or to repel a foe, i. 3. 6. — And for like reasons, 

3.) The addition of particles to words of similar meaning, and the use 
of needless connectives: Οἰόθεν οἷος, [solely] αἰ alone, H. 226. ᾿Απὸ βοῆς 
ἕνεκα, from shouting (so far as this was concerned), Th. 8. 92. 

4.) Duplicate expressions with particles; as (a) Postrive and ΝΈΘΑ- 
TIVE: Οὐκ ἥκιστα, ἀλλὰ μάλιστα, not the least, but the most, Hdt. 2. 4. 
(Ὁ) WHoLE and Parr (for special distinction) : Ὦ Zed καὶ θεᾳί Pl. 


c. ATTRACTION AND ANACOLUTHON. 


715. The influence of ATTRACTION sometimes passes even 
beyond a connective : as, 

Οὐδέν γε ἄλλο ἐστὶν, οὗ ἐρῶσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι, ἢ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ [for τὸ ἀγαθόν, 
through the attraction of ot], there is nothing else which men love, but the 
good, Pl. Cony. 205e. ἸΠατρὸς, εἴπερ. τινὸς [for ris], σθένοντος, from a fa- 
ther powerful, if any one was, Soph. Aj. 487. See 667 g, 702 ἃ. 

716. a. ANacoLuTHON is frequent in the connection of 
sentences, either from inadvertence or from preference (for the 
sake of ease, emphasis, &vc.). The clause completing the con- 
struction is often changed in form, or even omitted ; or (b) the 
regular correspondence of particles may be neglected : as, 


332 SYNTAX. — PARTICLES. § 716. 


(a) Ὥς... ἤκουσά τινος, ὅτι Kréavdpos .. μέλλει ἥξειν [for ws ἤκουσα, K. 
μέλλει, OF ἤκουσα, ὅτι Κ. μέλλει], as I heard Srom some one, [that] C. is 
about to come, vi. 4. 18. (Ὁ) Καὶ εἰ... 4 [for καὶ εἰ], both We [or] and {7, 
Th. 6. 64. Te. . ἔπειτα δέ, both. [but then] and, v. 5. 8. 

c. After a connective, a distinct sentence often takes the place of a part 
of a sentence, and (d) sometimes the reverse : (c) Λλλλῳ Te τρόπῳ πειρά- 
σαντες, καὶ μηχανὴν προσήγαγον, both attempting in other ways, and [they 
brought up] bringing up an engine, Th. 4.100. Seei. 10. 12; ii. 1. 7. 
(ἃ) Παρημέλουν . ., οὔτε yap . . διδόντες ΕΣ ἐδίδοσαν, as if γάρ had been 
omitted], they slighted them, [not giving] for they did. not give, Th. 1. 25. 


717. iv. The Greek especially abounds in combinations of 
particles, and in elliptical phrases having the power of particles. 
The use of these sometimes extends farther than their origin 
and structure would strictly warrant. E. g., 


a. ἄλλως τε καί, both otherwise and in particular, especially : Οὐδὲν vo- 
id oe ἄλλως τε καὶ ἄρχοντι, κάλλτον εἶναι κτῆμα vii. 7. 41. 

b. ϑῆλον ὅτι, it is evident that, evidently, ev οἵδ᾽ ὅτι, οἵδ᾽ ὅτι, σάφ᾽ ἴσθ᾽ 
ὅτι, and similar phrases, which are often inserted in sentences (quite like 
adverbs), or annexed to them: Τὰ μὲν δὴ Κύρου δῆλον ὅτι οὕτως ἔχει i. 3.9. 

c. εἰ δὲ μή, but if not, otherwise, used even after- negative sentences : 
My ποιήσῃς radra* εἰ δὲ ah, αἰτίαν ἕξεις, do not do this ; otherwise [i. 6. if 
you do] you will have blame, vii. 1. 8. So εἰ δέ, as adversative, some- 
times implies negation: Ei μὲν βούλεται, ἑψέτω ei de, . . ποιείτω, if he 
pie let him boil ; if the contrary, let him do, Pl. Euthyd. 285 ο. 

μή τί γέ not to [say aught surely] mention, i. 6. much less, nedum : 
Ἔν ἔνι... τοῖς φίλοις ἐπιτάττειν. ., μή τί γε δὴ τοῖς θεοῖς Dem. 24. 21. 

6. οὐ “γὰρ ἀλλά, for it is not otherwise, but, i. 6. for indeed: Ov yap 
aM ἡ γῆ Bla ἕλκει, for indeed the earth forcibly attracts, Ar. Nub. 232. 

f. od μέντοι ἀλλά, οὐ μὴν ἀλλά, yet no, but, i. e. nevertheless : Ὁ ἵππος 

get κἀκεῖνον ἐξετραχήλισεν - οὐ μὴν ἀλλ᾽ ἐπέμεινεν ὁ Κῦρος Cyr. 1. 4. 8. 

5. οὐχ ὅτι, μὴ ὅτι, οὐ μόνον ὅτι, οὐχ ὅσον, οὐχ ὅπως, μὴ ὅπως, οὐχ οἷον, 
I do not say that, not to say that, &c., i. 6. not only, or not only not: 

"Axpnoro. γὰρ καὶ ‘yuvditiy: , μὴ ért ἀνδράσι, useless even to women, not to 
say men, Pl. Οὐχ ὅπως δῶρα δούς, not only bestowing no gifts, vii. 7. 8. 


CHAPTER V. 
ARRANGEMENT. 


718. In the direct, or normal order of arrangement, which, 


however, various influences are continually changing or modi- 
fying, 

a.) A general connective or tivities leads in its sentence: and 
(b) a compellative-part (60), as calling attention, is placed early, if not 
first ; though, as independent, it may have any place which will not 
interfere with the required connection of other words. (c) Of the remain- 
der, the swhject-part precedes the predicate-part. (d) Exponents precede 
the words whose offices or relations they mark (65). E. g., ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐγὼ, ὦ 
Parive, θαυμάζω. ., but I, Phalinus, wonder, ii. 1. 10. 


§ 719. DIRECT ORDER OF ARRANGEMENT. 333 


MopIiFIERs (except as above, a) are thus placed in respect to their 
principals : (e) Adverbs and equivalent words or phrases precede them. 
(f) Other modifiers follow substantives without the article, (g) adjectives, 
and (h) adverbs ; and (i) may either follow or precede verbs. (j) For the 
arrangement with the article, see 520, 523s. (Kk) Of several modifiers of 
the same word, the more closely related are placed nearer to it (a Dat. of 
person, from more interest in the action, usually nearer than an Acc. of 
thing). HE. g., (e) "Ev ἴσῳ καὶ βραδέως προσήεσαν, they advanced evenly 
and slowly, i. 8.11. See 510. (f, g) ΚΚῶμαι πολλαὶ, μεσταὶ σίτου, many 
villages, full of corn, i. 4.19. (h) Χωρὶς τῶν ἄλλων (405a). () Κύρῳ 
δοῦναι χρήματα, to give C. money, i. 2.12. (k) Διαβάλλει τὸν Kdpov πρὸς 
τὸν ἀδελφόν, traduces C. to his brother, i. 1. 3. Aldwow αὐτῷ μυρίους δα- 
ρεικούς, gives him 10,000 darics, i. 1. 9. 

1.) An ¢nfinitive follows the principal verb ; (m) a participle follows or 
precedes it, according to the natural order of the thought. (n) Coérdinate 
sentences follow each other according to the order in which they lie in the 
mind. (0) Substantive and adjective clauses, except the indefinite rela- 
tive (641), follow the words upon which they depend. (Ὁ) Adverbial 
clauses may follow or precede the principal clauses, according to the nat- 
ural order of the thought ; and (q) are sometimes inserted in them, for 
the sake of a ¢loser connection. E. g., (1, τὴ) Συλλέξας στράτευμα . . 
ἐπειρᾶτο κατάγειν, having raised an army, he (then) endeavored to restore, 
i. 1.7. See 571, (n) Ὁ δὲ πείθεταί τε καὶ συλλαμβάνει, and he both be- 
lieves and (as a result) apprehends, i. 1. 8. (0, p, 4) ᾿Επειδὴ δὲ Κῦρος 
ἐκάλει, λαβὼν ὑμᾶς ἐπορευόμην, ἵνα, εἴ τι δέοιτο, ὠφελοίην αὐτὸν, ἀνθ᾽ ὧν εὖ 
ἔπαθον ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνου i. 3. 4. 

r. An order different from the preceding is termed, in general, indirect, 
varied, or abnormal ; or, more particularly, inverted, divided, purenthetic, 
mixed, confused, &c., as the case may be. See 71. 

t. Ifa complex or compound sentence is so arranged that there is no 
complete sense without the final clause, the structure is often termed 
periodic ; but otherwise, loose : Hi δοκεῖ σοι, στεῖχε (631 a). Χρῶ αὐτοῖς, 
ἐὰν δέῃ τι (631 c). The Greek well illustrates the progress, in advancing 
civilization, from the looser to the closer connection of thought. 


719. The order of the sentence is varied, chiefly, 


a.) To render certain words more emphatic or prominent, or 
(b) through the attraction or repulsion of other words. 


(a) a. The beginning and close of the sentence have a special promi- 
nence ; and of other places, the earlier are in general more favorable to 
emphasis than the later. It is but natural, that a sentence should com- 
mence with that which is most prominent or foremost in the mind, and 
that it should then proceed with that which is closely related to this, or 
next in prominence ; while the last word leaves the freshest impression. 
E. g., Μῆνιν ἄειδε... οὐλομένην, sing the fatal wrath, A. 1. Περὶ Ὁρόν- 
του τουτουΐ i. 6.6. (8) Any unusual order attracts attention; and in 

rose, commonly expresses emphasis or emotion : Οὐκ ἀνθρώπων ἀπορῶν 
βαρβάρων, not from want of mere men, — barbarians, i. 7. 3. Οὗπερ 
αὐτὸς ἕνεκα i. 9. 21. (y) See 476b. (δ) See 708 f. 

(Ὁ) « The desire of connecting kindred or contrasted words as closely 
as possible often varies the order; while a connection is avoided that 
would offend taste or might lead to mistake: Παρὰ φίλης φίλῳ φέρειν 
γυναικὸς ἀνδρί, fo bring from a dear wife to a dear husband, Asch. Ch. 89. 
Kal ἐποίουν οὕτως odrovi, 1. 11. See 541 ἢ, 567d. (Ὁ) If a word modi- 


334 SYNTAX. —- ARRANGEMENT. § 719. 


fying the verb comes early in the sentence, it often attracts the verb to a 

lace before the subject : "Evrat0a ἦσαν κῶμαι, here were villages (6), 
1. 4.19. ᾿Εἰπεὶ δὲ ἠσθένει Δαρεῖος, and when D. was sick, i. 1.1. (yn) A 
particle is sometimes attracted from its proper place: Οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πεί- 
σαιμι, I know not whether I could persuade (πείσαιμι ἄν, 621 a), Eur. Med. 
941. Καὶ viv ὅτι πολιορκοῦνται, and that they are now besieged, vi. 3. 11. 


9.) In conformity to the natural order and connection of the 
thoughts ; or (d) to present sooner an outline of these, some 
details being deferred. Thus, 


(c) Δαρείου καὶ 7 apa νὸν γίγνονται παῖδες δύο (412; the well-known 
parents being naturally mentioned before their children). Seet. (0) A 
word referring or gig mets δ to what is contained in the preceding sen- 
tence, has commonly a leading place, as introducing the new thought and 
connecting the thoughts: Ὁ μὲν οὖν πρεσβύτερος παρὼν ἐτύγχανε - Kipov 
(corresponding to πρεσβύτερος) δὲ μεταπέμπεται ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς, ἧς (refer- 
ring to ἀρχῆς) αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε " καὶ στρατηγὸν (corresponding to 
σατράπην) δὲ αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε πάντων, ὅσοι (referring to πάντων) εἰς Καστω- 
λοῦ πεδίον ἀθροίζονται. ᾿Αναβαίνει (the result οἵ μεταπέμπεται) οὖν ὁ Κῦ- 
pos. 1.1. 2. (ἡ When a question is made without an interrogative ex- 
θεν the predicate, as in Eng., often leads, as the part on which the 
orce of the question most directly falls: Τέθνηκε Φίλιππος; is P. dead ? 
Dem. 43. 10. («) A word pointing to a following sentence has naturally 
a late place: Διαβαίνοντες ὅδε, crossing as follows, i. 5. 10. 

(d) ᾿ἘΙνταῦθα ἀφικνεῖται ᾿Εἰπύαξα, ἡ Συεννέσιος γυνὴ, τοῦ Κιλίκων βασιλέως, 
παρὰ ἸΚῦρον, here comes E., the wife of S., king of the Cilicians, to C., i. 2. 
12. An outline is here first presented in Ἐνταῦθα (0) ἀφικνεῖται (ὃ ᾽Ε. ; 
then Ἔ. is defined by ἡ 2. γυνή, Σ. by τοῦ K. βασιλέως, and ἀφικνεῖται by 
παρὰ K. The early presentation of the general idea is often aided, (A) by 
placing first the shorter of two parts of the sentence ; (μὴ) by joining a 
word with the first of two or more words to which it is alike related ; 
(v) by dividing or separating a modifying part, &c.: "Eqatvero ἔχνια tar- 
πων καὶ κόπρος, there appeared the tracks and dung of horses. ἹΠερσῶν τοὺς 
ἀρίστους τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν ἑπτά, the seven noblest of his Persian attendants. 

e.) For the symmetry of the sentence; or (f) that it may 
close with a stronger or more important word. LE. g., 

Οὔτε γὰρ ἡμεῖς ἐκείνου ἔτι στρατιῶται . ., οὔτε ἐκεῖνος ἔτι ἡμῖν μισθοδότης, 
for neither are we longer his soldiers, nor he longer our paymaster, i. 3. 9 
(see €). Πολλάκις ἡδονὴ βραχεῖα μακρὰν λύπην τίκτει, PLEASURE brief 
long GRIEF often brings (71a). Ὃς μόνος μὲν πρὸς θεῶν ἀσεβὴς, μόνος δὲ 
πρὸς ἀνθρώπων αἰσχρός, which alone before the gods is impious, and before 
men base, ii. 5. 20. 

g.) For euphony or rhythm, especially in the poets ; (h) for 
variety itself; or (i) for general rhetorical effect. E. g., 

Μάχην ἔς, to battle (the metre forbidding és μάχην), O. 59. — The in- 
fluence of these three causes was very great, and is often quite obvious, 
though its full extent and manner are now beyond our cognizance. 


720. From their general want of emphasis, the following words can- 
not stand first in the sentence ; and are therefore called post-positive: the 
particles ἄν (not for ἐάν, 619a; Ep. κέ), ἄρα (not dpa, 685¢; Ep. ῥά, 
dp), αὖ (poet. αὖτε) and αὖθις (Ep. and Ion. αὖτις) again, yap, γέ, γοῦν, 
Sal, δέ, δή (exc. Ep. δὴ γάρ, δὴ τότε), δῆθεν, δῆτα, θήν, μέν, μέντοι, μήν, 


§ 723. PARTS OF COMPOUND WORDS. 335 


viv (not viv: Ep. νύ), οὖν, πέρ, τέ, rol, τοίνυν (see 68 ο, 701) ; also τὶς, 
and the indefinites beginning with w (the rather for distinction from the 
interrogatives) : Ὁ δὲ πείθεταί τε, καὶ συλλαμβάνει (718n). See 518, 548. 
a. When these words naturally lead a sentence or part of a sentence, 
they have commonly the second place or the earliest place allowable ; 
and, from their frequent need of an early position and their lack of prom- 
inence, they are often permitted to separate closely related words ; indeed 
they are often so inserted to give strength or emphasis to such words. 
Enclitic pronouns are sometimes placed in like manner. E. g., Ὃ μὲν οὖν 
πρεσβύτερος, the elder, then, i. 1.1. IIpds δὲ ἄρκτον, and to the north, 
i. 7. 6. °Ex δὲ τῶν (518 a). TIpds σε θεῶν (476b). See 520b, 621e. 


721. a. Variation of place extends to clauses, as well as words and 
phrases : Ὅτι δὲ ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἄγοι, . . ἤκουσεν οὐδείς, but, that he was lead- 
ing against the king, no one heard, i. 8. 21. “Ov εἶδες, οὗτός ἐστιν (551 ο). 

b. A subject common to a dependent and principal clause often pre- 
cedes the connective: Ot δ᾽ ἄλλοι ἐπειδὴ ἧκον, . . διήρπασαν, but when 
now the rest had come, they plundered, i. 2. 26. 


722. Posrscripr ro Syntax. Syntactic relations belong not 
only to distinct words, but also to the PARTS OF COMPOUND WORDS | 
(383 s). They are here either internal, between the parts them- 
selves; or external, between these parts and other words. 


1. Inrernat Rexations. Of the two elements which commonly 
unite in the compound, one may modify the other as an (a) adjec- 
tive, (Ὁ) adverb, (c—g) adjunct, or sometimes (h) appositive; or 
(i) one may belong to the other as an exponent ; or (j) the two may | 
be coupled. The same relations appear in compounds of more than 
two elements. LE. g., 


(a) ἀκρό-πολις upper city (ἄκρης πόλιος Ζ. 257), citadel ; κενο-τάφιον empty 
tomb, cenotaph, vi. 4. 9. (Ὁ) ὠκυ-πέτης swiftly flying, ἀ-γνώς unknown. 
(c) Direct Object : θανατη-φόρος death-bringing (θάνατον φέρων), νομο-θέτης 
legis-lator. (4) Indirect Object: ἐἰσό-θεος god-like (ἴσος θεῷ), ποδ-ηρής 
reaching the fect, i..8.9. (6) Agent: Διόσ-δοτος given by Zeus (ὑπὸ Διός), 
heaven-sent. (f) Instrument: χειρο-ποίητος manu-factus, made by hand 
(χειρί), iv. 3.5. (6) Time, Place, Origin, &c.: γνυκτι-πόλος nocti-vagus, 
night-roaming, οἰκο-γενής born in the house (ἐν οἴκῳ), ἀξιό-λογος worthy of 
mention (Λόγου), πυρι-γενής fire-born. (h) iarpé-yavris physician-seer. 
(i) ἔν-δοξος in repute (ἐν δόξῃ), ἀνθ-ύπατος pro-consul. (7) καλο-κ-ἀγαθία 
honor and virtue, Mem. 1. 6. 14 ; φό-γαλα eggs and milk, Galen. 

k. A modifier or exponent has commonly the first place in a compound, 
except that the object of a verb often follows it: φίλ-ιππος horse-loving, 
φέρ-ασπις shield-bearing, μισ-άνθρωπος misanthropic. 


723. 2. Exrernat Revations. An element of a compound has 
often the same rélation to another word, expressed or implied, as if 
it stood by itself. 


a.) It may so govern or be modified (see 486, b, 699a). (Ὁ) It may 
so modify or be governed ; often as a Gen. of property or relation : μήτηρ 
καλλί-παις, a mother of beautiful children (καλῶν παίδων), ὁμό-τροπος of - 
like character, ὠκύ-πους celeri-pes, [of swift foot] swift-footed. In this use 
it often represents the object of an implied verb of possession : ὠκεῖς πόδας 
ἔχων; having swift feet. (6) Each part of a compound may have an ex- 
ternal relation : ἀμφι-κίων having pillars around it. 


BOOK IY. 


PROSODY. 


ΤῬλώσσης μείλιγμα. 
Zschylus, Eumen. 


CHAPTER I. 
QUANTITY AND VERSIFICATION. 


725. In Greek all vowels and syllables are divided, in re- 
spect to QUANTITY (i. 6. the tume of their utterance according to 
the ancient pronunciation), into long and skort ; and the long 
are regarded as having double the time of the short. 


a. Hence the unit in measuring metrical quantity is the short syllable, 
or the breve (brevis, short), and a long: vowel or syllable is equal to two 
breves. For the marks of quantity (— ~), see 96 c. 

b. Quantity is of two kinds, natwral and local, Natural quantity has 
respect to the length of the vowel in its own nature ; but local quantity, 
to the effect which is produced by the position of the vowel in connection 
with other letters or syllables. In ὄρτυξ, quail, both syllables are short 
by nature, i. e. in the natural quantity of the vowels; but both become 
long by the position of these short vowels before two eonsonants (137 d). 

6. The quantity of a syllable is always the natural quantity of the 
vowel which it contains, unless some change is produced by position. 
Hence it is usual, in prosody, to regard the vowel as the representative of 
the syllable ; and language is often applied to the vowel which in strict 
propriety belongs only to the syllable. Thus, in ὄρτυξ, it is common to 
say that the vowels are long by position ; while, in strict accuracy, the 
quantity of the vowels themselves is not changed, but the syllables become 
long from the time occupied in the utterance of the successive consonants. 


J. NATURAL - QUANTITY. 


726. Ruel. e¢ and o are short: as in φέρομεν. 

Rutz 2. 7 and ὦ, diphthongs, and all vowels that are cir- 
cumflexed, or result from contraction or crasis, are long: as in 
ἡμῶν, πλείους, was, ἡμῖν, πῦρ" pis, dvs (156); κἄν (126). 

Rutz 3. Other vowels are commonly short: as in xAdpvdt. 


§ 730. NATURAL QUANTITY. 337 


‘a. All vowels which result from the union of two vowels have, from 
their very nature, a double time. See 115s. (Ὁ) To the general rule for 
the doubtful vowels (Rule 3) there are many exceptions ; which renders it 
necessary to observe the ACCENT, the special laws of INFLECTION and 
DERIVATION, the DIALECT, and AUTHORITY, by which is here meant the 
usage of the poets. 


727. A. Accent. From the general rules of accent (770 s), 
we learn, that in natural quantity, 


a.) In proparoxytones and properispomes, the last vowel is short : as in 
ἄρουρα, δύναμις, πέλεκυς - βῶλαξ, πρᾶξις, διῶρυξ. 

b.) In paroxytones, if the last vowel is short, the vowel of the penwit is 
also short ; and, on the other hand, if the vowel of the > penult 1 is long, the 
last vowel is also long: as in RET καρκίνος, xAapvdos: Λήδα, φοίνιξ. 


728. B. Ivriectioy. In the common affixes of declension 
and conjugation, the doubtful vowels are short, except cases of 
contraction, -a in the Sing. of Dec. 1, and aot for voi in the 
nude Present. 


Thus, Dec, 1, Gen. sing. and Ace. pl. -as, Nom. du. -a (13, 122), Aor, 
Pt. -σᾶς, -σασᾶ (35 4), Pf. 3 pl. -κασι (300 ἃ). For special rules in regard 
to the Sing. of Dec. 1, see 194s, 232s; for -éa, -€as in Dec. 3, 220; for 
nude Pres. forms in -ἄσι, 35a, 156; for the dialectic affixes, 20, 48 a. 


729. Sprcian Rutes or Dec. III. 1. The doubtful vowels are 
long in the last syllable of the stem, —(a) If the stem-mark is v: as, | 
παιάν, -Gvos, δελφίς, -ivos, Pipxus, -vvos (208): except in the adjectives μέ- 
Ads, -avos, Tddds, -avos (23 Ὁ, d), and the pronoun ris, Tivos. (b) In most 
palatals, if a long syllable precede : θώραξ, -ἀκος, μάστιξ, -ἴγος, πέρδιξ, 
“ixos, κήρυξ, -ὕκος. (0) Ittewords in -ts, -ἰθος, and in some owxytones in 
εἰς, Sos: ὄρνις, -ἴθος, κνημίς, -ἶδος, σφραγίς, -idos. (d) In a few other 
words: as, κέρας, -dros: Ψάρ, wapds- γρύψ, γρῦπός. 

2. Monosyllabic themes are long: xis, Kids " μῦς, μῦός - πῦρ, πῦρός. 
Except the pronoun ris (208 d). —So the neuter πᾶν (23) is lengthened. 


730. Sprrctan RULES OF ConsucaTion. 1. Before the OPEN AF- 
FIXES (303), — (a) α is short ; except in ἑάομαι heal, κάω, κλάω (309 b), 
and sometimes in the Epic and lyric poets for the ‘sake of the metre. 
(Ὁ) vis commonly long - κονΐω cover with dust, πρίω to saw ; but ἀΐω (7), 
ἐσθίω, δέδέα, eniov from mivw (60). (0) vis variable : aw, Ἅζω, θύω (Ὁ). 

2. Before the REGULAR CLOSE AFFIXES, — (4) In lingual and liquid 
verbs, the doubtful vowels are short: as, ὥρίσα (39d), κέκρικα, ἐκλίθην 
(304 8); except βρίθω weigh down, F. βρίσω. (6) In pure verbs, a is short, 
except when the theme ends in -ἄω pure, or -ράω ; υ is commonly long ; 
and v variable: ἔσπᾶκα, ἐσκέδασα (510 ο, 6), but εἴασα, ἐθηράθην (310) ; 
ἔτισα (310), but pbicw, ἐφθίμην (50) ; ἀνύσω, πέφῦκα, θύσω, ré0vKa (310). 

3. Before the AFFIXES OF VERBS IN -pt, the doubtful vowels are short, 
except in the Ind. sing. of the Pres. and Impf. det., and in the 2d Aor. 
act.: δείκνῦμι, δείκνύμεν, ESpav. See 518 5. 

4. Before a CONSONANT STEM- -MARK, — (f) In the theme, α is common- 
ly short, but t and v long: μανθἄνω, κλίνω, ὀδύρομαι ; but ἱκάνω, τΐἵνω, 
φθίνω (60). ) In the liquid Fut., and in the 2d Aor. (340. 3), the 
doubtful vow Ni are short, but in the liquid, Aor., and in the 2d Perf., 
they are long : κρινῶ, ἔκρινα (152) ; ἔλαβον, érpiBnv (347 g); κέκράγα, Kéxpt- 
γα, μέμῦκα (312 a): except 2 A. ἐάγην (50, ἄγνῦμι), ἐλήλῦθα, &c. (812 a). 

COMP. GR. . 15 cet 


338 PROSODY. — QUANTITY. §-731. 


- 91.. °C. Derivation. Rute 4, Derivatives follow the 
quantity of their primitives. : 
a. This rule applies to compounds, as well as to simple derivatives. 
In applying the rule, observe 366d. E. g., Onpdw, F. Onpdow, Pf. P. re- 
θήραμαι" Onpdo mos, Onpaua, Onparys, Onpards* ἔντιμος (ἐν, τιμή). 


732. D. Diatect. The Doric a for ἡ is long ; and a, where 
the Lonic uses ἡ, is commonly long (190 ἃ). See also 134. 


733. E. Avurnority. For doubtful vowels which are long, 
and not determined by the rules already given, observe the 
usage of the poets, and the marks of quantity in the lexicons. 

_ a, Familiar examples are “arn destruction, σφρᾶγίς seal, τρᾶχύς rough, 
μικρός small, νίκη victory, ὅμιλος crowd, σιγή silence, xaXivbs bridle, πῦρός 
wheat, σύλἄω to plunder, ὕλη forest, φυλή tribe, χρῦσός gold, pix soul. 


II. LOCAL QUANTITY. 


734. Rute 5. A vowel before two consonants or a double 
consonant is long (725 ο, 137 d): as in ὄρτυξ, ἐλπίζοντες paw. 
a. This rule of position holds, as in Latin, if the consonants are wholly 


or partly in the same word with the vowel ; and commonly, also, if they 
are wholly in the next word. 


735. Exception. When the two consonants are a mute 
followed by a liquid wm the same simple word, the quantity of 
the vowel is often not affected, especially in Attic verse. 


Nore. This exception results from the easy flowing together of the 
_ mute and liquid, so as to produce the effect of a single consonant. 

a. In the Attic, the quantity of the vowel is commonly not affected, if 
the mute is smooth or rough, or, if middle, is followed by p; but is regu- 
larly lengthened before a middle mute followed by p, v, or A. Thus, the 
penult is regularly short in πέπλος, τέκνον, πότμος, ἴχνος, ἀγρός, ἕδρα - and 
long in δόγμα, ἕδνα, στρεβλός, as well as in the compound ἐκρεῖν. 


736. A short vowel is sometimes lengthened before a single 
consonant or another vowel, especially in Epic poetry. This 
occurs chiefly in the following cases : 


a.) When the consonant may be regarded as doubled in pronunciation. 
This applies mostly to the liquids, and in the case of these (chiefly initial 
ὁ, cf. 146) sometimes extends even to Attic verse : Αἰόλου [as if -ολλ-] x. 
36, δε νέφος A. 274, "ἔδεισας X. 19, ἐμε' ῥέπον Soph., wéya ῥάκος Asch. 

b.) Where F has been dropped (188 5) : yd'p ev [réOev, 27 f] I. 419, 
κέν ἑ κύνες X. 42, mpo's οἶκον [Fotxov] I. 147. — Yet the Epic sometimes 
gives the digamma, if indeed used, only the force of a breathing (98 6). 

c.) Before a masculine cesura; and sometimes, without a cesura, by 
the force of the arsis (745 ο, 741): ὄνομα - Οὗτιν ι. 366; ἀπδέρσῃ P. 283. 

d. In Hexameter verse, one of three successive short syllables, a short 
between two long syllables, and a short syllable at the beginning of a line, 
must of necessity be made long. The second case sometimes occurs in the 
thesis. E. g.,’amwovéecOar ΚΞ. 46; ᾿Ασκληπιοῦ δύο B. 731 (cf. ᾿Ασκληπιοῦ 
υἱόν A, 194), Ἕως ‘6 ταῦθ᾽ A. 198 ; ᾿Επειδή (€) X. 379, “Apes, “Apes HE. 31. 


ἕ 


§ 741, | VERSIFICATION, > 339 


737. Rue 6. A long vowel or diphthong at the end of a 
word may be shortened, if the next word begins with a vowel. 


a. In the thesis of Hexameter and Pentameter verse, this shortening is 
the general rule : ‘Huerép@ ἐνὶ οἴκῷ év"Apyet A. 30. les, ὁ μὲν Kredrov, 
ὁ δ᾽ dp Εὐρύτοῦ, “Axropiwves B. 621. (Ὁ) This rule does not apply to the 
Iambic and Trochaic metres of the drama, as there the hiatus is scarce 
allowed. (c) Rarely, a long vowel or diphthong is shortened before a 
vowel in the same word: éumdioy v. 379, οἷος (ot) N. 275, τοϊοῦτος Soph. 


738. Rute 7. The last syllable of every verse is common. 


a. That is, the metrical pause at the end of the verse renders the 
quantity of the last syllable indifferent ; and it may be regarded as either 
long or short according to the metre. (Ὁ) In some kinds of verse, how- 
ever, the scansion is continuous ; i. e. the verses are formed into systems, 
at the end of which only this freedom is allowed, the preceding syllables 
being all subject to the rules of prosody, as if in a single verse. 


739. a. In giving the rules of quantity, position should not be ad- 
duced, unless some change has been made from the natural length of the 
vowel. For convenient distinction in metrical analysis, a vowel whose 
quantity is to be referred to Rules 1 and 2 may be said to be long or short 
by nature ; to Rule 3, by the general rule (i. e. for the doubtful vowels) 5 
to Rule 4, by derivation; to Rule 5, by position (i. 6. before two con- 
sonants, or a double consonant) ; to Rule 6, by position before a vowel ; 
to Rule 7, at the end of the verse. 


III. VERSIFICATION. 


740. Greek verse is founded upon RHYTHM ; i.e. the regu, 
succession of long and short quantities. 

a. Elementary combinations of syllables, showing the rhythm, are 
termed FEET (as if steps in the rhythmic movement) ; regular combina- 
tions of feet, VERSES (versus, ὦ turn) ; and regular combinations of verses, 
STANZAS, STROPHES, or SYSTEMS (744). For a table of feet, see 77. 

b. A single foot, taken by itself, is called a monopody (πούς, foot) ; 
a combination of two feet, a dipody; of three, four, five, six, &c., a tri- 
pody, tetrapody, pentapody, hexapody, &c.; of a foot and a half, a triemim 
(τριημιμερής, of three half-parts) ; of two and.a half, three and a half, four 

nd a half, &c., penthemim, hephthemim, enneémim, ὅθ. See 745 e. 


41. The long syllables are naturally pronounced with a 
greater stress of the voice than the short. This stress is 
termed ARSIS, (ἄρσις, elevation), while the alternate weaker tone 
is termed THESIS (θέσις, depression). These terms are also ap- 
plied to the parts of the rhythm which are thus pronounced. 


a. The arsis (also termed imetrical ictus or rhythmic accent) is here 


marked thus (', ΄, or to indicate greater force, "). 
b. As one long syllable is equal to two short, the partial substitution 
of -_ for .! in the arsis (resolution), and of — for ~~ in the thesis (con- 


tr action), may be made without affecting the rhythm. 
c. In the common kinds of verse, the metrical ictus is determined by 
the prevailing foot. Hence in Trochaic and Dactylic verse, every foot 


340 PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION. § 741, 


receives the ictus upon the first syllable , while, in Iambic and Anapestie 
verse, every foot receives it upon the second, except the anapest and pro- 
celeusmatic, which receive it upon the third. (4) Iambic, Trochaic, and 
Anapiestic verse has commonly a stronger ictus upon every other foot ; and 
is hence measured, not by single feet, but by dipodies (740b). 


742. The simplest and most familiar rhythms are those in 
which a long syllable alternates with one, or with two short 
syllables (L~+-+~-, or L~-~+~-~+4~-L). In the latter, 


termed equal or quadruple (-~~ = 4 breves, 725 a); but in 
the former, the thesis is only half the arsis, and the rhythm is 
termed triple (-- -- = 3 breves). 


a. Of these, the equal is the more stately in its movement, and the 
more appropriate to those kinds of verse which are’ farthest removed from 
common discourse ; while the triple has more nearly the movement of com- 
mon conversation, and is hence better adapted to the more familiar kinds 
of verse, and to dialogue. 

b. Other rhythms are formed by doubling the arsis, by prolonging the 
thesis, or by variously compounding simple rhythms. (c) Verses, in which 
the equal and triple rhythms are united, are termed logaedic (λόγος dis- 
course, ἀοιδή sony, see a). 


743. Verses are named, — (a) From the prevailing foot: Jam- 
bic, Dactylic. (Ὁ) From some poet who invented or used them, or 
the species of composition in which they were employed: Aleaic, 
from Alezus; Sapphic, from Sappho; Heroic, as used in singing the 
deeds of heroes. (¢) From the number of measures (i. 6. feet, or 
dipodies, 741 d) which they contain: monometer (μονόμετρος, of one 
measure), dimeter, trimeter, tetrameter, pentameter, hexameter. (4) From 
their degree of completeness; thus a verse is termed catalectic (κατα- 
Anye, to end abruptly), when its last foot is incomplete; brachycata- 
lectic, when it wants a whole foot at the end; acatalectic, when it 
has its just measure; hypercatalectic, when it has one or two sylla- 
bles beyond; hypermeter, when it exceeds in any way its just meas- 
ure; acephalous (ἀκέφαλος, headless), when it wants a syllable at the 
beginning; anacrusic, basic, or syncopated, when affected as below. 

e. A long or short syllable or pyrrhic is sometimes prefixed to a lyric 
rhythm beginning with the arsis. This is called an anacrisis (ἀνάκρουσις, 
striking up). A similar prefix of greater length is called a basis (a term 
sometimes applied to any monometer ; βάσις, step). (f) In the drama, 
exclamations often occur extra metrum (i. e. not included in the metre) : 
eG! Eur. Ale. 5386. Τί φῶ; Soph. O. C. 315. Tarawa! Ib. 318. 

- g. Metrical syncope is the omission of a thesis in the middle of a 
rhythm ; where we may suppose the time to have been supplied, as in 
modern music, by a vest, or by dwelling longer upon an adjoining arsis. 


744. Metrical composition is either in MoNosTICHS, SYSTEMS, OF 
STANZAS. (a) Monosticus (μονόστιχος, of a single line) consist of the 
same verse repeated, as in Hexameter verse (748), Iambic Trimeter 
(756), ἄς. (Ὁ) Systems are formed by the repetition of similar 
rhythms, with continuous scansion (as if a single long line, 738 b) 


§ 746. . KINDS OF VERSE, CSURA. 341. 


and an appropriate close. (c) Sranzas (also called strophes) are 
formed by the union of different kinds of verse. A stanza of two 
lines is called a distich ; of three, a tristich, of four, a tetrastich. 

d. The most common systems are easily arranged in dimeters, with 
here and there a monometer ; and close with a dimeter catalectic. 

e. The Greek choral odes were written in stanzas of very varied struct- 
ure, but commonly arranged in duads or triads (sometimes in tetrads or 
pentads). A duad consists of two stanzas, corresponding in metre through- 
out. Of these, the first is termed the strophe (στροφή, turning round, 
stanza), and the second the antistrophe (ἀντιστροφή, counter-turn or -stanza). 
A triad consists of a strophe and antistrophe, preceded, divided, or fol- 
lowed by a third stanza of different metre, which according to its place is 
termed prodde (πρό before, ᾧδή ode), mesode (μέσος middle), or epode (ἐπί 
after). Of these, the epode is far the most common, 


745. Cmsura (ceedo, to cut) is the cutting of the metre by 
a division in the sense. It may be (a) of the foot, or (b) of the 
verse. In the former, a foot is cut by the ending of a word; 
in the latter, a verse is cut by a pause permitted by the sense. 


c. This pause, which is often slight, is called the cwswral pause ; and 
the syllable preceding any cesura, the cwsural syllable. When this syl- 
lable is pronounced with the arsis, the ceesura is termed masculine ; with 
the thesis, feminine. A ceesura in the second foot is named triemim, from 
the portion of the verse which has preceded (740 b) ; in the third, penthe- 
mim, in the fourth, hephthemim ; &c. 

ἃ. The cesura of the verse (often called simply the coesura) is more 
frequently, but not necessarily, a cesura of the foot. A prominent ex- 
ception is the cesura often occurring in Hexameter verse after the fourth 
foot (which is then commonly a dactyl), named the bucolie or pastoral 
ceeswra from its prevalence in pastoral poetry. See also 757, 761. 


746. 4. Htatus between words was admitted the most freely in 
Epic poetry, where however it may be often removed by the insertion of 
the digamma (98 6, 99 Ὁ). It was the most studiously avoided in Attic 
poetry, especially in the Tragic Trimeter (756). 

SynizEsis (117). Ὁ. In Epic poetry synizesis is very frequent, espe- 
cially when the first vowel is €; thus, ἐξα, €g, éai; €0, €0l, G00; Ew, EW: 
Πηληϊάδεω, χρυσέῳ ἀϊνά, A.1,15; see 27 ἢ, 197 ς, 222b, 8280. We find 
more rarely ae; ia, ial, Τὴ, ἴῃ, t0; 00; va, bor; &c. Synizesis sometimes 
occurs between two words, when the first is 4, ἢ, δή, μή, ἐπεί, or a word 
ending in the affix -y or τῳ: ἢ οὐχ Εἰ. 349, δὴ ὄγδοον η. 261, ἐπεὶ “οὐ. 

c. In Attic poetry, synizesis occurs chiefly in the endings -ews, -εων, -εαὶ 
of Dec. 3 (220d) ; in a few single words and forms (as θεός Eur. Or. 399) ; 
in the combinations ἢ οὐ and μὴ οὐ, regularly pronounced as one syllable ; 
in some other combinations in which the first word is 4, ἢ, μή; ἐπεί, or 
ἐγώ : μὴ εἰδέναι Eur. Hipp. 1335, ἐπεὶ οὐδέν, ey εἰμ᾽ Soph. Ph. 585. 

ἃ. In SCANNING, observe not only the division into dipodies and feet, 
but also the arsis or metrical ictus (741), and the verse-ceesura (745). ὁ 
Unless these are carefully marked, the metrical character and expression 
of the verse are, to a great extent, lost. (e) In the following exhibition of 
metres, the division of feet will be marked by a single bar (| ); the divis- 
ion of dipodies by a double bar ( ||) ; the verse-ceesura by an obelisk ( t ), 
sometimes doubled ( ¢ ) ; and sometimes the omission of a syllable by a 
caret (a). An anacrusis will be denoted by A, and a basis by B; and 
of syllables metrically long or short (whether by nature or position), the 
former will be printed in full-face, and the latter in common Greek type. 


342, VERSIFICATION. — DACTYLIC. § 747. 
A. Dacrytic VERSE. 


747. The place of the fundamental dactyl is often supplied 
by a spondee (-- -- -- ΞΞΞ -" --)Ξ. See 741 b. 


748. 1. The common HExaAmeter or Heroic VERSE consists 
of six feet, of which the first four are either dactyls or spon- 
dees, the fifth commonly a dactyl,'and the sixth always a 
spondee. 


a. When the fifth is a spondee, the verse is termed spondaic, and has 
commonly an expression of greater weight or dignity. This occurs most 
frequently when the verse ends with a word of four syllables. (b) The 
favorite cesura of the verse is the penthemim (the ‘‘heroic cwsura”), 
which is almost equally masculine and feminine (745). After this, the 
most frequent cesuras are the masculine hephthemim (often preceded by 
a triemim), and the pastoral (745d). (c) Even when the penthemim is 
not the principal verse-cesura, it is yet seldom wanting as a foot-csura. 


d. ScHEME AND EXAMPLES. . 

2. 3. 4. : 6. 
He ΞΕ τς ἜΣ ΠΝΎΝ ἐπ τ Bee 
[πὸ ot Ati thee 
᾿Αλλὰ καϊ[κῶς ἀφί[η, t kpare|pdv δ᾽ ἐπὶ | μῦθον ἔϊτελλεν. A. 25. 
ἘΠ κέν | πως ἀρ)νῶν κνίσης t αἰγῶν τε τελείων. A. 66. 
Στέμματ᾽ ἔχων ἐν | χερσὶν t ἐϊκηβόλου [᾿Απόλ!λωνος. A. 14. 


749. wu. The Execiac ῬΕΝΤΆΜΕΤΕΚ consists of two dactylic pen- 
themims (740 b), the first containing two dactyls or spondees with 
a ceesural syllable, and the second, two dactyls with a final syllable. 
It commonly alternates with the Hexameter, forming what is termed, 
from its early use in plaintive song, the Elegiac Metre. 


ἘΣ Sabian αν οἷν 


ea 


Ειὐχομέϊνῳ μοι | κλῦθι, t καϊκὰς δ᾽ ἀπὸ | κῆρας ἄϊλαλκε +” 
Xol μὲν | τοῦτο, dela, t | σμικρὸν, ἐμοὶ δὲ μέϊγα. Theog. 13. 


750. im. Other Dactylic Metres are, (a) Pure, consisting of 
dactyls only; (Ὁ) Impure, consisting of dactyls and spondees ; 
(c) olic, containing, in place of the first foot, a basis or anacrusis 
(743 e); (d) Logaedic (742), in which dactyls are united with 
trochees. Thus, 


1. Dimeter. 


(a) Μυστοδόϊκος δόμος. Ar. Nub. 303. 
(Ὁ) Aponic (LU | +—). Πότνια, | θῦμον. Sapph. 1. 4. 


2. Trimeter. 
(Ὁ) Πολλὰ yap | ὥστ᾽ dxd|pavros. Soph. Tr. 112. 
(c) PHERECRATIC (B.j + ~—| 1 —). "Ἔλδεαι φίλον | ἦτορ. Pind. Ο. 1. 6. 
Vix dijraré οὔ τη. Hor, Od. 1. 14. 
GLYCONIC. Τὸν σὸν | δαίμονα, | τὸν σὸν, ὦ 
(B.|+0-]Lo~) Τλᾶϑμον | Οἰδιπόδα, βροτῶν. Soph.O.T.1193. 


§ 755. “ ANAPASTIC. TAMBIC. ~ 343 


8, Tetrameter. 
(a) ALCMANTAN. Maco’, ἄγε, | ΚΚαλλιόϊπα ὀύγα τῷ Διός. Alem. 36 [4]. 


(ἃ) GREATER ΤΣ (A. peg a ιν τ | ἯΣ er 
haere τὸν χείϊμων᾽, ἐπὶ | ων τιθείς. Alc. 84 [27]. 
LEssER ALCAIO (_ Vo | Low 


Kpvcoxd| ja. ἢ Zepi| pw μίήγεισα.. ‘i 5 [24]. 


4, Pentameter. 
(Ὁ) "Arpel|Sas μαχίμους, t onan bhaaorepse< Aisch. Ag. 123. 
(4) SAPPHIC oe Jto|tror 
Αἱ δὲ ‘Sapa [μὴ Bene? 1 avn | δώσει. Sapph. 1. 22. 


B. ANAP&STIC VERSE. 


751. The place of the fundamental anapeest is often sup- 
plied by a spondee or dactyl, and, very rarely, by a proceleu- 


STABLIC (os ς Ἐπ τ eee es a ee a ee 


752. 1..The Anapestic, from its strong, even movement, was ἃ 
favorite rid for marching songs; and was greatly employed in 
SYsTEMS, by the dramatic poets, as intermediate between the lambic 
of the common dialogue, and the lyric metres of the choral odes. 

a. These systems are scanned continuously (738b), but are usually 
arranged so far as convenient, in dimeters (whence the common name of 
this species of verse, the AnApastic Dieter). They uniformly close 
with the dimeter catalectic, called, from its use in proverbs (παροιμίαι) the 
paremiac verse (744d). (Ὁ) This verse requires a cwesura after each 
dipody, except in the parcemiac. 


Πελάσει!ς δόμοις, { || ὧν 7 ἐπί WE 
Σπεύϑεις enti T {|ἰπράξει[ας, ἐπεὶ 
ἐνναῖος ἀνὴρ, 
Αἰγεῦ, | παρ᾽ ἐμοὶ || ᾽δεδόκη] σαι. Eur. Med. 759. 


. 753. π᾿. The combination of the regular dimeter with the pa- 
roemiac (cf. 757, 761) forms the Anapamstic TETRAMETER CATALECTIO 
of comedy, also called the Aristophanic. 


~v+t[~~4tl- y+] -~+tti--+|]-- 4 --+ -: &e. 
TM γὰρ εὔ'ὶδαιμον T || καὶ μακαριστὸν f || μᾶλλον | νῦν ἐσίτι δικασ᾽ τοῦ. 

754. wm. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other kinds 
of Anapzestic verse, both common and logaedic (742 ο) : 


Dim. Hypere. Τότε μὲν | περισα! μότατος | καὶ dpio||ros. Eur. Herc. 1018. 
Locaepic. 1An.,1Iam. Νεμέᾳ | δὲ τρίς. Pind. N. 6. 34. 

1 An., 3 Iam. Cat. Maxapt| ζομέν | σε, τέτ᾽]τιξ. Anacreontic. 

3 An., 2 Ια. δΔολερὸν | μὲν ἀεὶ | κατὰ πάν] τα δὴ | τρόπον. Ar. Ay. 451. 


C. JTAMBIC. VERSE. 


755. The place of the fundamental iambus may be sup- 
plied by a tribrach (~ + = -L '—), except at the end of a line. 
To add dignity and ariel to the verse, the jirst foot of a di- 


3440 VERSIFICATION, — IAMBIC. § 755. 


pody (where the arsis is less strong) is very often lengthened 
to a spondee, and not unfrequently to a dactyl or anapest. 


a. Comedy admits the anapest in every place except the last of a verse 
or system ; and also tragedy, when it is wholly contained in a proper 
name. 


756. τ. The [ampic Trimerer AcaTatectic (also called, from 
the number of its feet, the Senarius) is the principal metre of 
dramatic dialogue (752). 

a. This verse has for its cesura the penthemim or, much less frequent- 
ly, the hephthemim. The latter is sometimes anticipated by the elision 
of the syllable after which it would properly fall, forming what has been 


termed by Porson the quasi-cesura. Lines occur, though rarely, which 
have neither of these ceesuras. ἡ 


b. The Tragic Trimeter admits the tribrach in every place but the last ; 
the spondee in the Ist, 3d, and 5th places; the dactyl in the Ist and 3d; 
and the anapest in the Ist. The feet which are admitted only in proper 
names or in comedy (755 a) are placed, below, in parentheses. 


a. 2. 3 Ἶ 
εὐ δα, ΕΣ οὐ PS ae es ee 
Tube Pp SOTO See 
Spondee. — + —ft + — 4+ 
Dectyhy. —ss- Pe, ἢ ! 


Anapest. -—~ Δ (CL alr 


᾿Εγὼ | δ᾽ ἄτολ [{μιός εἰ με tT συγ γενῆ | Gedv. Alsch. Pr. 14. 
Θορύβῳ | τε πίσυϊϊνος t κἀ μαθεῖ || παῤῥη ἰσίᾳ, 
Πιθανὸς | ἔτ᾽ αὐτοὺς t περι[βαλεῖν || κακῷ | row. Eur. Or. 905. 


757. τι. The Iamaic Terrameter Catarectic is peculiar to com- 
edy. It consists of two dimeters, the second catalectic (οἵ. 753, 761); 
and has commonly a ceesura after the first. 


Ὅτου | χάριν || μὶ ὁ δεσπότης { || ὁ σὸς | κέκλη [κε δεῦρο. Ar. Pl. 260. 


758. τ΄ The Iambic verse sometimes occurs in systems of the 
common form (744 4). 


759. tv. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other kinds 
of Iambic verse (for logacedic examples, see 754) : 
Tripody. Ὕπεσ [τί μοι | θράσος. Soph. El. 479. 
Dim. Cat. Θέλω | λέγειν || ᾿Ατρείδας. Anacreontic. 
Dim. Hypere. Σύ τοι, | σύ τοι || κατηξίωσας. Soph. Ph. 1095. 


Ὁ. TrocHAic VERSE. 


760: The place of the fundamental trochee may be sup- 
plied in any part of the verse by a tribrach (-- -- = + ~~). 
The last foot of a dipody (where the ictus is less strong) is 
often lengthened to a spondee or anapzest. In proper names, 
the dactyl is admitted in some places. 


§ 766. TROCHAIC, &C0. — ACCENT. 345 


761. 1. The Trocuatc TerrAmMetTeR CaTALEcTic occurs in both 
tragedy and comedy. It consists of two dimeters, the second cata- 
lectic (753, 757); and has commonly a ceesura after the first. 


ΠΠολλα [χοῦ σκοποῦντες | ἡμᾶς {|| els ἅπανθ᾽ εὑ!ρήσε! τε. Ar. Vesp. 1101. 


762. τι. The Trochaic verse sometimes occurs in systems of 
the common form (744 d). 


763. wr. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other 
kinds of Trochaic verse (for logacedic examples, see 750) : 
Tripody (IrHypHALLICc). IIdwrpo|dos πεΪλειάς. Aisch. Th. 294. 
Trim. Δωρίῳ φωϊ!νὰν évjappdéiiat we|StAw. Pind. O. 3. 9. 
Trim. Cat. Ti γὰρ | ἐν wéviiro κυ! βερνῶν ται Golat. Ib. 12. 4. 
Tetram. "Hore | μοι θεϊῶν ἕκατι || μυρία παν τὰ κέλευθος. Pind. 1. 4.1. 


a. Syncope sometimes explains a seeming interchange of Iambic and 
Trochaic rhythm (743g): Βοάν - id, a KAder ὡβολοστάται. Ar. Nub,1155. 


E. Orser METRES. 


764. The metres which remain are Lyric, and for the most part 
admit with great freedom isochronous feet, or the substitution of 
two short syllables for one long, or of one long for two short : 


a. Cretic (Let). Φρόντισον | καὶ γενοῦ. Alsch. Sup. 418. 
b. Baechie (_ + 1). Τίς ἀχὼ, | τίς ὀδμὰ | rpocérra | μὶ ἀφεγγής. Asch. 


6. Choriambic (10+). Τυμνασίου | λέγειν τι Set. Ar. Vesp. 527. 
d. Rising Ionic (__+ 1). Πεπέρακεν | μὲν ὁ περσέ]πτολις in. ΖΒ. 
6. Peonic (---.....). Ὦ μακάρὠ | Αὐτόμενες, t | ὥς σε μακα]ρίζομεν. Ar. 


765. £. An Antispast, combining an iambic with a trochaic rhythm, 
admits in the first part any foot which is admitted into lambic verse, and 
in the second any foot which is admitted into Trochaic, each with the ap-. 
propriate ictus. The addition of a long syllable (which may be resolved 
into two short) forms the Dochmius ; which has consequently a triple ic- 
tus, with great variety of structure (thirty-two forms having been counted): 


Dochmiac (1L 1+). Μεθεῖται στρατὸς | στρατόπεδον λιπὼν. οι. 


CHAPTER II, 
ACCENT. 


766. In every Greek word, one of the three last syllables 
was distinguished by a special tone of the voice. 


1. This tone is commonly spoken of simply as the tone, or the accent. 

2. The versification of the ancient Greeks was founded upon quantity 
without regard to accent ; that of the modern Greeks is founded upon ac- 
cent without regard to quantity. 

3. The accent, even if not regarded in pronunciation, is still useful, as 
serving, —(a) To distinguish different words, or different senses of the 
same word: εἰμί to be, εἶμι to go; ὁ the, & which (249 9) ; wore; when? 

COMP. GR. 15* 


346 PROSODY. — ACCENT. Ὁ § 766. 


moré once; ἄλλα other things, ἀλλά but ; λιθοβόλος throwing stones, λιθό- 
Boros stoned (386. 1). (Ὁ) To distinguish different forms of the same 
word : Opt. ἐκ-λύσαι, Inf. ἐκ-λῦσαι, Imv. ἔκ-λυσαι, (37 f, h). (0) To aid 
in ascertaining quantity (727). (4) To show the original form of a 
word : thus the circumflex over τιμῶ, PiAG, δηλῶ, marks them as contract 
forms of τιμάω, φιλέω, δηλόωὼ. (6) To show how a word is employed in 
the sentence ; as in cases of anastrophe, and where the accent is retained 
by a proelitic or enclitic (785 5). 


767. a. Ina final or initial, and often in an intermediate 
syllable, ἃ long vowel is treated in accentuation as consisting 
of two vowels (108, 115), and thus forming two tone-places 
(i. 6. places in respect to accent). (Ὁ) But jinal -a and -o in 
affixes are regarded in accentuation as short vowels, except in 
the Optative. 


c. By long vowels, in accentuation, are meant those that are long by 
nature, including diphthongs ; and by short vowels, those that are short 
in natural quantity, without regard to their position (725). 

'd. It is not strange that this treatment of final -at and -οὐ should have 
at length resulted from the natural hurrying of the voice over such familiar 
endings. For the exception in the Opt., see 272 d. 

e. The Greek grammarians adopted an ascending line (’) as the mark 
of an accented place, and a descending line (‘) as the mark of an unac- 
cented place. A syllable in which an unaccented followed an accented 
place was entitled, of course, to a double mark (’* ). 

’ f. In counting tone-places, the ultima is counted as the first place if 
its vowel is short, but as the first and second if its vowel is jong. If the 
ultima forms two places, the penult makes the third, and completes the 
number allowed. If the ultima forms only a single place, then a short 
vowel in the penult forms the second ; and a long vowel, the second and 
third. One of these, however, a long penult often gives up to the ante- 
penult, contenting itself with a single oe Thus the antepenult forms 
the third place, if the ultima and penult are both short by nature ; and’ 
often also, if the ultima is short and the penult long. - No account.-is 
taken of any place beyond the third, or beyond the accent if this is sooner 
reached. In the following words, which are all accented on the highest 
place, the several places would be thus numbered and marked : 

Δι εν ἢ 3. Δ 2 1 821 3821 82 1 8 21 82 1 
θές, πάϊς, δόλὸς, δόλοὺ, δόλοὶ, ταὐρὸδὺ, Tddpds, τάὐροὶ, ἑκούσὰὶς, ἑκόὐσα", 

82 1 8 21 821 82 1 Dis > gills Dene ἀνθ. τ Se | 
Exdioal, πολέμοὺς, πόλὲμὸς, πόλὲμοὶ, ἀνθρώποὶς, ἄνθρὼπὸς, ἄνθρὼποὶ. 

g. Τὸ 15 evidently needless, except for grammatical illustration, to mark 
unaccented syllables, and when the two marks (‘‘) fall upon the same 
syllable, it is more convenient in writing to unite them into one (%, or, as 
rounded for greater ease, ~ or ~). Dropping, therefore, the marks over 
the unaccented syllables, and uniting the double marks, we write thus : 


θές, παῖς, δόλος, δόλου, δόλοι, ταύρου, ταῦρος, ταῦροι, ἑκούσαις, ἑκοῦσα, 
ἑκοῦσαι, πολέμους, πόλεμος, πόλεμοι, ἀνθρώποις, ἄνθρωπος, ἄνθρωποι. 
768. A syllable or vowel is termed grave, if it has no ac- 


cent ; circumflexed, if it forms an accented followed by an un-' 
accented place ; acute, if it forms an accented place not so fol-’ 


§ 772. GENERAL LAWS. IN VOWEL CHANGES. 347 
lowed: as the final syllables and seeded in λύρα, νῆσος, i. μνᾶ, 
τῆς; θεᾷ, ὠοῦ, γυπῶν, τιμῶ - φδή, τό, ὠόν, αἴξ, αἰγός, ἐμοί. 
OXYTONE, Acute. 
PERISPOME, if its Ultima is < Circumflexed. 
‘A word is BARYTONE, Grave. 
_ termed operant hit ‘ta Penulé ia | Acute. 
ROPERISPOME, Circumflexed. 
PROPAROXYTONE, if its Antepenult is Acute. 
‘a. The terms above, and those applied to the marks of accent (94), are 
formed from the Greek and Latin words τόνος accentus, fone, ὀξύς aciitus, 
sharp, περισπώμενος circumflexus, bent round, βαρύς gravis, heavy, παρά. 
beside, and πρό before. (Ὁ) The paroxytones, properispomes, and propar- 
oxytones are all included in the general class of barytones. See § 5. 

769. The accent is termed final, when it falls upon the 
ultima. According as it goes back from this, or forward to- 
wards it, it is said to recede or advance. When it recedes as 
far as the general laws permit, it is termed recessive. When it 
retains the same place as in the theme, so far as these laws 
permit, it is termed retentive. 


I. GenerAt LAws oF ACCENT. 


: 770. Law I. The acute accent cannot recede beyond. 
the antepenult ; and can fall upon this, only when the ultima 
is short. 

a. Hence the accent of ὄνομα name, τράπεζα, ἄγγελος (15 5), must ad- 
vance in the Gen. to the second syllable : ὀνόματος, τραπέζης, ἀγγέλου. 

Ὁ. In accentuation, ε before w in the endings of the Gen. and of the 
Attic Dec. 2is not regarded as forming a distinct syllable (120i, 200, . 
220 c): hence, "Arpeidew, πόλεως, πόλεων " εὔγεως. So, in some compound 
adjectives, even with an intervening liquid : as, φιλόγελως (237 b). 

e. Final § and , making position after a short vowel (734), forbid the’ 
acute on the antepenult, though not the circumflex on the penult : hence 
ἐριβώλαξ, -ἄκος, though ἐρίβωλος, fertile. 


‘771. Law II. a. The crrcumriex can only fall upon a. 
long vowel. (Ὁ) It cannot recede beyond the penult ; and can 
fall upon this, only when the last vowel is short, —(c) being 
the only accent which a penult long by nature can then receive. Ὁ 


Hence, (a) Bods, μῦς, πᾶς (19, 23), become in the Nom. pl. βόες, μῦες, 
᾿πᾶντες : (Ὁ) μοῦσα, νῆσος (15s), in the Gen. μούσης, νήσου : (0) αἴξ, θήρ 
(175), ᾿Ατρείδης (15), in the Nom. pl. alyes, θῆρες, Fee (767 Ὁ). 


II. AccENnT IN VoWEL CHANGES. 


(772. a. Contraction. Law III. In contraction, the. 
acute followed by the grave produces the circumflex: νόος νοῦς, 
ὀστέον ὀστοῦν (10),τιμάω τιμῶ, φιλέειν φιλεῖν (42)." 


348 ACCENT, — IN DECLENSION, ΄ § 772. 


1. Otherwise the accent is not affected by contraction, except as the 
general laws may require: τίμαε τίμα, τιμαέτω τιμάτω, τιμαοίμην τιμῴμην “ 
ἑσταότος ἑστῶτος (261, 771 ο).. See 120 5. 

2. Some contract forms are accented as though made by inflection 
without contraction ; or fall into the analogy of other words. Thus, 

In contracts of Dec. 2, — (a) The accent remains throughout upon the 
same syllable as in the theme: εὔνοος, εὐνόου, cont. εὔνους, εὔνου (Nom. pl. 
εὔνοι or εὖνοι, 767 Ὁ), kind. (Ὁ) The Nom. dual, if accented upon the 
ultima, is always oxytone: v, ὀστώ (16). (0) Except in the Nom. dual, 
all simple contracts in -ovs or -ovy are perispome : χρύσεος χρυσοῦς (23), 
᾿ Kdveov κανοῦν, basket. —(d) Oxytones of the Attic Dec. retain throughout 
the accent of the theme : νεώς, ved, νεῷ (16); ἀγήρω (22). Cf. 120e. 

In contracts of Dec. 3, — (e) The Acc. of nouns in -@ is oxytone : ἠχόα 
ἠχώ (19a). So Dat. χρωτί χρῷ perispome (207 a). These cases follow 
the analogy of 775. (f) The contract Gen. pl. of τριήρης (213 c) and some 
like compounds is made by some paroxytone : as, τριηρέων τριήρων. 

g.) The Subj. and Opt. pass. of verbs in - μὸν and preteritives are accented 
by some without regard to their contraction: thus, τίθωμαι, τίθῃ, τίθηται, 
δίδοιτο (45 ὁ) ; κέκτωμαι, μέμνῃτο (517 6). (h) This is usual in the depo- 
nents δύναμαι, ἐπίσταμαι, κρέμαμαι, and the 2 aorists ὄνασθαι, πρίασθαι (50). 

3. In the resolution or extension of a vowel, a circumflex is resolved 
into its acute and grave (767 9) : παῖς πάϊς, φῶς φόως (105a, 103 b). 


773. x. Crasis. In crasis, the accent of the first word is lost ; 
while that of the second remains without change, except as required 
by 1771 6: ταὐτό for τὸ αὐτό, κἄν for καὶ dv, τἄλλα for τὰ ἄλλα. 


774. co. Avostropne. The accent of an elided vowel is thrown 
back upon the penult, except in prepositions and conjunctions: δείν᾽ 
ἔπη for δεινὰ ἔπη; κατ᾽ ἐμέ (κατὰ), GAN ἐγώ (ἀλλὰ). See 128. 


III. Accent 1n INFLECTION. 


775. Law IV. A long affix of declension can only take the 
acute in the direct, and the circumflex in the mdirect cases. 

a. Hence, δή, -ῆς, -ἢ, τήν (15) ; χοροῦ, -@, -ῶν, -οἷς, -οὐς (16) ; γυπῶν, 
-οὖν (17). (Ὁ) Except in the datives ἐμοί, μοί, σοί (27 ἃ). See also 772d. 

776. Law V. The accent is RETENTIVE in declension ; but 
RECESSIVE in comparison and conjugation : ὧόν, ὠοῦ, aa (16); 
κακός, κακίων, κάκιστος (260 a); Avw, ἔλῦον, λέλύκα (37). 

777. A. Decienston. 1. In Dec. 1, the affix- ὧν of the Gen. pl. 
is circumflexed, as contracted from -ἄων (197 c): τράπεζα, τραπεζῶν. 


2. In adjectives in -os, the feminine is accented throughout, so far as 
the general laws permit, upon the same syllable as the masc.: thus, φί- 
λιος, φιλία, friendly, Pl. φίλιοι, φίλιαι, Gen. mase. and fem. φιλίων ; while, 
from the noun ἡ φιλία, friendship, φιλίαι, φιλιῶν. (a) In most other 
adjectives, the fem. retains the accent of the theme, but subject to the same 
changes as in nouns of Dec. 1: μέλας, μέλαινα, μελαίνης, μελαινῶν (22). 


778. 3. In Duc. 3, dissyllabic Genitives and Datives throw the 
accent upon the affix. ' 
a. Hence, from γύψ, &c. (17 5), γυπός, αἰγί, πατρός, ἀνδρῶν, κυσί, ἀρνί. 


/ 


§ 783.) IN CONJUGATION. 349 


b. Except those which have become dissyllabic by contraction, participles, 
and the Gen. pl. and dual of these ten nouns, dds, Suds, θώς, κάρα, οὖς, 
παῖς, σής, Tpws, pis, φῶς (light), and of the adjective πᾶς (also Dat. πᾶσι, 
23): πόλεϊ πόλει (19), ἔαρος ἦρος (209 a) ; δόντος, θέντι, δῦσι (26) ; παίδων, 
φώτων, drow (17). (0) The contraction is not regarded in accenting the 
Gen. and.Dat. of οἷς (19d), οὖς, στέαρ, φρέαρ (207 ; yet see b), and Θρᾷξ 
(G. -xés). (4) Observe the accentuation of οὐδείς (25), τίς, τὶς (28), γυνή 
(203 a), θυγάτηρ (210 b) ; and of datives in -ἄάσι, from liquids (145 a). 


779. 4. The natural tone of frequent address gives RECESSIVE 
ACCENT to the Voc. in a few familiar words: as, Dec. 1, δεσπότης, master ; 
Dec. 2, ἀδελφός, brother; Dec. 3, γυνή (203 a), ᾿Απόλλων, &e. (208 ἢ) ; 
Voc. δέσποτα, ἄδελφε, γύναι, "Απολλον. So V. δύσμητερ w. 97. 

a. In the Voce. sing., -ev and -ov final are always circumflexed : ἱππεῦ. 
5. From the tendency to recessive accent in comparatives and com- 
pounds (795), the Voc. and Neut. sing. forms are so accented —(b) In 
most compound paroxytones in -wv and -ys, except those in -ῴρων, -wins, 
-WANS, -ἤρης, -ώρης, and -έτης : εὐδαίμων fortunate, Neut. and Voc. εὔδαι-. 
μον " V. Σώκρατες, ‘Hpdxdees (19). So a few other neuter adjectives, when 
used adverbially : ἄληθες ; really ? (c) In comparatives in -ων : ἡδίων, ἥδιον. 

ἃ. Recessive accent appears also in some Nom. forms in -a for -ys 
(197 b): εὐρύοπα. (e) Observe the accentuation of μήτηρ, θυγάτηρ, Δημή- 
Typ (210b). (f) In the forms in -φι, -θι, -θεν (190s), the accent usually 
falls upon a short vowel in the penult, but is otherwise retentive. (g) For 
peculiarities in the accentuation of the numerals and pronouns, see 25, 27 s. 


i 


780. B. Consucation has exceptions to the law of reces- 
swe accent ; chiefly in the Infinitive and Participle. 


1. These forms are accented upon the PENULT:— (a) All Infinitives 
in -at not preceded by -σθ- or -pev- : λῦσαι, λελυκέναι, λυθῆναι, τιθέναι - but 
λύσασθαι, τίθεσθαι (37, 45), θέμεναι (333). (Ὁ) The 2 Aor. mid. Inf.: Ac 
πέσθαι (38), ἀπο-δόσθαι (451); but πρίασθαι, ὄνασθαι (50; as if pres.). 
(c) The Perf. pass. Inf. and Part.: λελῦσθαι, λελυμένος ; except a few pre- 
teritive participles, and Epic infinitives, as ἥμενος, ἀκάχησθαι T. 335. 


781. 2. These forms are OXYTONE : — (a) Participles in -s, Gen. 
-ros, except in the Ist Aor. act.: λελυκώς, λυθείς, ἱστάς, δούς but λύσας 
(37, 45). (Ὁ) The 2 Aor. act. Part.: λιπών (38). (ὁ) The Pres. partici- 
ples (as if 2 Aor.) ἰών (45m), κιών {fr. κίω go, poet., II. 263), ἐών E. τ. (50 
εἰμί a). (d) The 2 Aor. την. forms εἰπέ say, ἐλθέ come, εὑρέ find ; and in 
Attic, ἐδέ see, and λαβέ take ; except in composition, as ἔξ-ελθε, εἴσ-ιδε. 


782. 3. These forms are PERISPOME :— (a) The 2 Aor. Inf, in -ew: 
λιπεῖν (38). (Ὁ) The 2 Pers. in -ov, of the 2 Aor. Imyv.: λιποῦ (38), θοῦ, 
δοῦ (45 i) ; except in compounds of more than two syllables from verbs in 
“μι, as ἀπόδου, but προδοῦ. 

ΝΌΟΤΕΒ. c. That the βηπαΐ accent in the preceding forms should be 
acute on the theme of the Part., and circumflex on the Inf. (considered as 
a Dat., 666 b), is in accordance with Law IV. (775). (ἃ) The cireuniflex 
in AvOG, lord, τιθῶμαι, δῶ, λυθεῖεν, τιθεῖο (37, 45), and like Subj. and Opt. 
forms, is due to contraction (772). (e) Monosyllabic forms long by nature, 
except Participles, are generally circumflexed : εἶ, jv, ἢ, ὧν (45 1). 


783. a. The accent of a verb in COMPOSITION can never recede 
beyond a prefix (277) ; or beyond the nearest syllable of the preposition : 
thus, ἐπέχω (ἐπί, ἔχω, 50), ἐπεῖχον, ἐπέσχον, ἐπίσχες. (Ὁ) The preteri- 


350” ACCENT. — GRAVE, PROCLITICS, ENCLITICS. § 783. 


tive οἶδα (46) is treated as without reduplication: σύν-οιἰδα. (c) The 
accent of εἰμί recedes in composition only in the Pres. Ind. and Imy. 

d. For the accent in εἰμί and φημί, see 45, 7870 ; for κεῖμαι, 50. 
Other examples of irregular or various accentuation are χρή, ἐχρῆν (50 
xpdwd); 1 Aor. Imy. εἶπον or εἰπόν (50 φημί 0) ; els or εἴς (50, εἰμέ 1), ἰδού 
as exclam. (50 ὁράω) ; forms noticed in 316c; &c. 


IV. AccENT IN CONSTRUCTION. 


784, A. Grave Accent. Law VI. Oxytones, followed by 
other words in closely connected discourse, soften their tone, 
and are then marked with the grave accent (‘): Στρατηγὸν δὲ 
αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε (480). ᾿Ἐπὶ τὰ καλὰ καὶ ἀγαθά. 

a. Except the interrogative τίς (253 a), and words followed by enclitics. 

b. The terms acute and oxytone are still applied to the syllable and 


word, although the tone is softened. Syllables strictly grave are never 
marked, except for grammatical illustration, as in 767. 


- 785. B. Awnastroruse. In prepositions af two short sylia- 
bles, the accent commonly recedes to the penult, when they 
follow the words which they would regularly precede, or take 
the place of compound verbs : thus, 

_ Σοφίας πέρι, about wisdom, Pl. (the like placing of other prepositions is 
poetic) ; ὀλέσας ἄπο for ἀπολέσας, having lost, ι. 534 (δ 6991); ἄνα, πάρα, 


ἔνι (699 6). This recession is termed ἀναστροφή, turning back. 
τ ὃ. Some so write περί and ἀπό when used adverbially. 


786. C. Proctitics. Ten monosyllables, beginning with 
a vowel, are called proclitics (προκλίνω, to lean forward), because 
they commonly so lean upon the following word as to lose their 
proper accent. They are the aspirated forms of the art., ὁ, ἡ, 
oi, ai, and the particles οὐ not, eis into, ἐν in, ἐξ out of, εἰ if, as as. 

a. These forms of the article are written with the accent, when used in 
Epic as relative, and by some, when used as personal pronouns: 8 . . ἤλυ- 
Ges, who camest, B. 262; ὁ γάρ, but ὃ γάρ Bek., for he, A. 9. (Ὁ) The 
proclitics retain their accent when they close a sentence, or in poetry 
follow a word whose relation they denote (718d), or are followed by an 
enclitic : οὐ δῆτα, no, indeed, but πῶς yap οὔ; how not? ws βόες, but βόες 
ὥς x. 299, as kine; ἐκ κακῶν, but κακῶν ἔξ, from the base ; εἴ ποτε, if ever. 


787. Ὁ. Encuitics. Law VII. The accent of an enclitic 
falls, as acute, upon the ultima of the preceding word, or upon 
its penult if it is a paroxytone, uniting with any accent already 
upon the syllable : as, 

"Ανθρωποί τε, héminés-que, and men, δεῖξόν μοι, shédw me; εἴ ποτε 
(786 Ὁ) : ἀνήρ τις (784 4) ; φίλος μου, my friend ; ἢ ῥά νύ μοί τι πίθοιο 
(705 ἃ ; each enclitic throwing its accent back). — But see 788 d. 

Enclitics are so named as leaning in pronunciation upon the preceding 
word (ἐγκλίνω, to lean upon). They are these familiar words of one or 
two syllables: (a) These oblique cases of the personal pronouns ; 1 Pers. 
pod, pol, μέ: 2 P. σοῦ, col, σέ: 8 P. οὗ, of, + viv, σφίσι, σφέ. For 


δ 790. IN FORMATION. | 351 


other enclitic forms of the personal pronouns, see 27 ἢ, g. (Ὁ) The im- 
definite pronoun τὶς, through all its cases (but not ἄττα) : and the in- 
definite adverbs wh, wot, πού, πώ, πώς, ποθί, ποθέν, ποτέ (53). (c) The 
Pres. ind. of εἰμί to be, and φημί to say, except the 2d Pers. sing. ; and 
even here in the Ep. form εἷς : νήπιός εἰς, stultus es, +. 273. (4) The 
particles γέ, viv (νύ), πέρ, τέ, τοί, with the poetic θήν, κέ, ῥά, and -δέ (688 e). 
e. Some familiar combinations of this kind are commonly, and others 
sometimes, joined in writing, and viewed as compounds: εἴτε, ἤτοι, μήτι, 
ὅστις (observe the accent, 28h), οὐδέποτε, ὥσπερ, Gore. (f) The prep- 
osition -δέ, fo (688 6), is always so attached : "Odvumdvde, δόμονδε. (5) In 
pronouns and adverbs compounded with -8é (252, 531x.), the syllable 
preceding -8é always takes the accent, which is acute or circumflex accord- 
ing to the law in 775. (h) In ἐγώ, ἐμοί, and ἐμέ, the accent is drawn 
back when γέ is affixed (389 6) : ἔγωγε, ἔμοιγε, ἔμεγε. (i) Hie and ναίχϊ 
are accented as ending in enclitics ; and οἴκαδε (225 i) as a single word. 


788. An enclitic retains its accent, (a) At the beginning of a clause 
or verse, or after a parenthetic insertion: φημὶ γάρ, for I say. (Ὁ) After 
the apostrophe: πολλοὶ δ᾽ εἰσίν, but they are many. (c) If it is emphatic 
or strongly reflexive : οὐ Κῦρον, ἀλλὰ σέ, not C., but you. (d) If it isa 
dissyliable, preceded by a paroxytone, or by a properispome in -§ or -ψ 
(710 6) : ἄνδρες τινές, some men. (e) If it is a personal pronoun, preceded 
by an orthotone preposition which governs it and is not itself more em- 
phatic: παρὰ wot, περὶ σοῦ, πρὸς oé- but ἐπί ce ἢ σύν σοι, against you 
rather than with you, vii. 7. 82. Yet πρός με (sometimes σε) iii. 2. 2; 
and some exceptions occur, chiefly in the poets, with other prepositions. 

f. When ἐστί is prominent in the sentence, it becomes a paroxytone 
(as at the beginning, or when it expresses existence or possibility, and com- 
monly after such words as οὐ, μή, ἀλλά, εἰ, καί, ὅτι, ὡς, τοῦτο) : "Ἔστιν οἵ 
(659 4) ; ἔστι λαμβάνειν, one can take, i. ὅ. 3; τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, it is so. 

g. A word which neither Jeans upon the following nor upon the pre- 
ceding word, but stands, as it were, erect, is called, in distinction from 
the proclitics and enclitics, an orthotone (ὀρθότονος, erect in tone). 


A 


V. Accent In ForRMATION. 


789. GENERAL Principte. In each word, the accent be- 
longs to that syllable upon which the attention is most strongly 
Jixed. — If, from some law of language, this syllable cannot. 
receive the accent, it draws it as near to itself as possible. 


1. In the origin of language, the attention is absorbed by the greater 
distinctions of thought ; but, as these become familiar to the mind, it 
passes to the less, and then to those that are still subordinate. In the 
Greek, as in other languages, the accent originally belonged to the sylla- 
bles containing the essential ideas of words, 1. 6. to their radical syllables. 
But, in proportion as these became familiar, there was a tendency to 
throw the accent upon those syllables by which these ideas were modified, 
either through inflection, derivation, or composition. Compare γράφω 7 
WRITE, with ἔγραφον J was writing, γέγραφα I HAVE written, γραφή the 
ACT of writing, Ὑραφεύς the PERSON who writes, γὙραφικός SUITED to writing. 


790. «4. The Doric was characterized by its adherence to general rules 
and old usage; (Ὁ) the Lesbian Molic, by its tendency to throw the ac- 
cent as far back as possible ; (c) the Attic (which the Ionic appears to have 
more nearly approached), by an expressive variety of accent. 


302 ACCENT. — IN SIMPLE WORDS. § 791. 


791. The accent of the THEME IN DECLENSION, and of uN- 
INFLECTED WORDS must be learned from special rules and from 
observation. 


Note. For derivatives, the marks of accent in ὃ 363 — 382 should be 
carefully noticed. The rules below are not intended for proper names, 


A. Special Rules for Simple Words. 


1.) Or Dec. I. All contracts are perispome: Ἑρμῆς, μνᾶ. Of other 
words, — (a) Those in -as are paroxytone: ταμίας. (Ὁ) Most in -ys are 
paroxytone, except verbals in -rys from mute and pure stems of verbs in 
-#, which are commonly oxytone : ᾿Ατρείδης (so alt patronymics in -8ys), 
ναύτης, ψάλτης, προφήτης, προστάτης " δικαστής, ποιητής. (0) Nouns in 
κα short (194) have recessive accent: μυϊὰ, μοῦσα, τράπεζᾶ, ἀλήθεια. 
(4) Most abstracts in -ta, those in -συνη, and those in -ea from verbs in 
-εὐω (363, 367), are paroxytone: σοφία, σωφροσύνη, maideid. (6) Most 
other verbals in -a long or -y are oxytone: φυγή, φθορά, φυλακή. Σ 


792. 2.) Or Dec. II. (a) Adjectives in -ος preceded by a mute are 
commonly oxytone, especially those in -Kos, verbals in -ros, and ordinals 
in -στος : κακός, ἀρχικός, opards, εἰκοστός, χαλεπός, σοφός, δολιχός, ἀγαθός. 
So verbal nouns in -ος denoting the agent: ἀρχός, τροφός. (Ὁ) On the 
contrary, in primitive nouns with a mute stem, the accent is more frequent- 
ly recessive: κῆπος, κρόκος, πλοῦτος, ψάμαθος. (c) All ordinals not end- 
ing in -στος have recessive accent : δέκατος. (4) Adjectives in -λος, -pos, 
and -vos (except those in -tvos denoting material or country, 375 ὁ, e) are 
commonly oxytone: ψιλός, φοβερός, σέμνός, πεδινός - ξύλινος, Ταραντῖνος. 
(6) Nouns in -pos with a long penult are commonly oxytone ; while in 
adjectives in -pos the accent is commonly recessive: ὀδυρμός, βωμός - χρή- 
σιμος. (f) Nouns in -os pure are more frequently oxytone : ναός, θεός, 
vids, vvds. (g) Verbals in -reos (374f), numerals in -atos and -πλοος 
(240), and most adjectives in -aves from nouns of Dec. 1, in -ovos, and in 
«os, are accented upon the penult: ποιητέος, διπλόος, ἀγοραῖος, ὁποῖος, 
égos. (h) Adjectives in -eos, in -ἰος preceded by ὦ consonant, and in -εος 
joined immediately to the root, have commonly recessive accent : θήρειος, 
οὐράνιος, χρύσεος. (i) Very few neuters are oxytone ; and in most neuters 
the accent is recessive: μόριον, ποτήριον, ὄρνεον, ἔλαιον. But a diminu- 
tive in -vov, forming a dactyl, is commonly paroxytone : παιδίον, 


793. 3.) OF Dec. III. (a) Nouns in -ay, -evs, τω, -ws -00s, -as 
-aSes, -ἴς -ἴδος, masculines in -ρ, and almost all nouns in which the 
stem-mark is v preceded by a, ε, ἢ, or t, are oxytone: παιάν, ἱππεύς, ἠχώ, 
αἰδώς, λαμπάς, -άδος, πατήρ, λιμήν, -évos. (Ὁ) Nouns in -ewv, names of 
months in -ων, and most feminines and augmentatives in -wv, are oxytone ; 
other words in τῶν are more frequently paroxytone: κυκεών, χελιδών, ἀμ- 
πελών - κλύδων. (0) Monosyllabic nouns which have the Acc. in -a are 
commonly oxytone ; those which are neuter (see d), and most which have 
the Acc. in -v, perispome: αἴξ, πούς, θήρ, θώς - τὸ φῶς, τὸ πῦρ (so πᾶς, 
πᾶν, 23); βοῦς, ναῦς. (4) In neuter nouns, in words in -ξ and -Ψ, in 
verbals in -rwp, and in nouns in -ts or -vs with the Gen. in -ews, the ac- 
cent is recessive: κέρας, βούλευμα κόραξ ; δύναμις, πέλεκυς. (6) Female 
appellatives in -ἰς (36 ο, 368s) have the accent upon the same syllable 
as the.masculine, except when this is a proparoxytone or dissyllabic bary- 
tone (in which case the feminine commonly becomes oxytone) : πολίτης, 


§ 797. IN COMPOUNDS. — INDEX 1. 353 


πολῖτις." Πριαμίδης, ἸΠριαμίς - αἰχμάλωτος, αἰχμαλωτίς . Iépons, ἸΠερσίς, 
(f) Simple adjectives are commonly oxytone, if the stem-mark is a vowel; 
paroxytone, if it is a consonant: σαφής, ἡδύς - μέλας, χαρίεις (22 5). 


794. 4.) Avverss. (a) Adverbs in -ws derived from adjectives 
are, with very few exceptions, accented like the Gen. pl. of their primi- 
tives (381 ἃ) : σοφῶς, ταχέως. (Ὁ) Derivative adverbs in -Sov, -8a, -t, -a, 
and -ξ are commonly oxytone; those’in -δην, -axts and -w, paroxytone 
(381s): πλιυθηδόν, Μηδιστί, duaxel, παραλλάξ - σποράδην, πολλάκις, ἔξω. 

5.) Prepositions. The eighteen prepositions proper (688 6) are all 
oxytone: ἀπό, κατά. For the removal or loss of the accent, see 785, 786. 


B. Rules for Compound Words. 


795. In composition, there is a general tendency to recessive accent. 
But, — (ἃ) Compound adjectives in -ys are more frequently oxytone : as, 
εὐπρεπής. (Ὁ) Compounds in which -os is affixed to the stem of a verb 
united with a noun are commonly oxytone, if the penult is long; but if the 
penult is short, they are commonly paroxytone when aefive in sense, and 
proparoxytone when passive (386b): σιτοποιός (387 a) ; λιθοβόλος and λιθό- 
Bodos (386. 1). (6) Compound adjectives of Dec. 3, with a palatal or lin- 
gual stem-mark, in which the latter part is a monosyllable derived from a ᾿ 
verb, are commonly oxytone: ἀποῤῥώξ, ἡμιθνής. (ἃ) Words derived 
from compound words are commonly not accented as though themselves 
compounded ; but their compounds again follow the general rule: thus, 
κατασκευάζω, κατασκευαστός (792a), ἀ-κατασκεύαστος. 


797. INDEX I.—GREEK. 


The references are here made, as in other parts of the Grammar, to sections 
and their parts. The letter s (from the Lat. seguens) is often added, as else- 
where, to signify and the following ; but is often omitted as needless, where it 
might have been added. The signs < and > represent the forms at the angle 
as arising by contraction or some other change, chiefly euphonic, from the 
forms at the opening, or as used in their stead. The sign x denotes opposition 
or distinction. Dialectic use is marked by an older style of figures in the ref- 
erences (as, 329). For abbreviations, see 798. To increase the practical value 
of the Index, the form or construction of a word is sometimes referred to the 
appropriate rule or remark, although the particular word may not have been 
cited as an example in the present edition, perhaps not even in the larger Gram- 


mar. In the latter case, the reference is marked with an accent(’). The 
index for the conjugation of verbs is contained in § 50. 
A 4, 106; <v 138, 142. | ἀγανακτέω w. dat. 456,|d8SeAdds w. gen. 442 a, 


ἀ- cop. 385: priv. 385, 
compounds w. gen. 436. 
109s, 118d, 7, 11s. 

ἀγαθός cp. 262 b, 260 a, 
261 a, b; w. acc. 481’. 

ἀγάλλω mid, 5827. 

ἄγαμαι w.acc., gen., 429a, 
443 b, 432 f. 


COMP. GR, 


w. pt. 677’. [pt. 677’. 
ἀγαπάω ν΄. dat. 456, w. 
ἄγγελος dec. 16. 
ἄγε imv. 656 b. 
ἀγήραος, -ws, dec. 22. 
ἀγνώς 386, w. gen. 432 Ὁ. 
ἄγχι, -od, cp. 262 d, 

263d; w. gen. 448 ο. 


w. dat. 451; ἄδελφε 779. 
“Αιδης dec. 225 Ὁ; *Ai- 

δόσδε 688 e ; 488 a. 
ἀδικέω w. 2 acc. 480b, 

w. pt. 677a; pres. as 
ἄδικος dec. 22. bf 612. 
-αθ- in 2 aor. 353 a. 
“Alas, -ὦ acc, 199. 3. 


Ww 


954 αι 
ἂν 108; in accent. 767. 
αἰ, D., E., for εἰ if, 701 f. 
αἰδώς 219 b, 214, 215 ο. 
até dec. 17. 
aipéo w. 2 acc. 480a; 
mid. 579, pass. 588’. 
-ator old dat. pl. 198. 3. 
αἰσϑάνομαι w.gen.432b, 
h, w. dep. verb 657, 677. 
αἰσχρός, -ρῶς, cp. 260, 
261 8, 263. 
αἰσχύνομαι w. acc. 472, 
w. inf. x pt. 657k. 
airéw w. 2 acc. 480 ο. 
αἴτιος, -άομαι, W. gen. 
444 f, 431 ¢, dat. 454d. 
ἀκόλουθος w. gen. 442 ἃ, 
‘-w. dat. 450. 
ἀκούω w. gen. and acc. 
432¢,h, 4848 ; as pass. 
575a; pres. as pf. 612; 
' w. inf. or pt. 657 k, 677. 
ἄκρος, use 508 a. 
'ἀλγεινός cp. 260, 261 6. 
ἅλις w. gen. 414 ἃ. 
ἁλίσκομαι w. gen. 431 ο, 
w. pt. 677’. 
ἀλλά 701 Ὁ, n, x ἄλλα 
766a; introd. 708e; 
ἀλλὰ γάρ 709, ἀλλ ἤ 
700 m, n. : 
ἀλλάσσω w. gen. 429 ἃ. 
ἀλλήλων 27, 244. 3. 
ἀλλοῖος w. gen. 406 ἃ. 
ἄλλος dec. 281; use 567 ; 
w. gen. 406a; as adv. 
' 509 e, δ67 6; x ὁ ἄλλος 
523f ; ἄλλο τι (4) 567 g. 
᾿ἄλλως τε καί 717 a. 
ἅλς dec. 208. 
ἀλώπηξ dec. 203 Ὁ. 
ἅλως dec. 2251. [662. 
&paw. dat. 450; w. pt. 
ἁμαρτάνω w. gen. 405. 
ἀμείνων compt. 261 a, f, 


ἀμπέχω w. 2 acc. 480 ο. 
‘dul 688, 689e; of ἀμφί 
527 a. [480 ο΄. 
a ona w. 2 800. 
ἄμφω dec. 25, 240 c. 
&vconting. w. ind., opt., 
“inf., pt., 618, 658a; w. 
sub. 619 ; w. fut. ind. 
620 ; pos. 621, 662b; 


INDEX I. 


repeated 622, omitted 
691 e-—g; w. pot. opt. 
or ind. 636s; w. ind. 
of habit 616 b ; not w. 
opt. of wish 638 f. 
ἄν conj., < édv, 619 ἃ. 
ἀνά 688, 6891; sc. στῆθι 
699e, 785; w. num. 
239 f, 692. 5. 
ἀναμιμνήσκω const. 473. 
ἀνέχομαι w. gen. 432f. 
ἀνήρ dec. 18, 210, 208 f ; 
in address 484g ; ἁνήρ, 
ὡνήρ, 125. 
ἀντί 688, 689h; ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, 
because, 557 ; derivat. 
w. gen. 445, w. dat. 455. 
ἀντιποιέομαινγ. gen. 480, 
ἄντρον dec. 16. 
ἀνύω const. 677 f. 
ἄνω cp. 262d, 263. 
ἄξιος, &c., w. gen. 431); 
w. dat. 454d. 
ἀπιστέω w. dat. 456. 
ἁπλόος, -ofs, dec. 23 ; 
cp. 257 ¢, d. 
ἀπό 688, 689b; form 
186; cp. 263’; w. 
pass.586d> [gen.431a. 
ἀποδίδομαι sell, 579, w. 
ἀποδιδράσκω 472 f. 
ἀπολαύω w. gen. 412. 
᾿Απόλλων dec. 208 f, 
2118.  [w. dat. 456. 
ἀπορέω w. gen. 414} ; 
é&troorepéw w.gen. 414 b’; 
w. 2 ace. 480 ο. 
ἅπτω, mid. w. gen. 426. 
ἄρα (ῥά, dp) 685c¢ ; pos. 
720 ; ἣν as pres. 611. 
dpa (ov, μή); 687. [262b. 
ἀρείων, ἄριστος, cp. 261a, 
ipéokw w. dat. 457. 
"Apns 21, 216 ο, 220a. 
ἀρι- in compos. 385 ἃ. 
ἀριστεύω w. gen. 419 c. 
ἀρκέω w. dat. 453 ; per- 
sonally 573. 
ἄρκυς dec. 219 f. 
ἀρνέομαι ὅτι οὐ 713 d. 
ἀρνός dec. 18, 210. 
ἅρπαξ 2908 ; cp. 259. 
ἄῤῥην dec. 22, 208 ἃ. 
ἄρχω w. gen. 407, 425 ; 
pt. as adv. 674 b. 


γίγνομαι ὃ 797. 
ἅσσα, ἄσσα (-ττα), 253a, 
264}, 28. [226 g. 
ἀστήρ, -τράσι 145a; 
ἄστυ dec. 19, 215 b. 
-αται, -ATO < -νταῖ, -VTO 
158, 300 Ὁ, 329. 
ἀτάρ conj. 701 b. 
ἅτε as, w. pt. 681. 
ἅτερος = ἕτερος 125 Ὁ. 
᾿Ατρείδης 369', dec. 15. 
ἀτυχέω w. gen. 405, 427. 
av 4, 108; «(ἀξ 142. 
αὖ, αὖθις, pos. 720. 
αὐτίκα w. pt. 662. 
αὐτός dec. 28,251, 255b; 
cp. 262d; use 540s; 
w. dat. of assoc. obj. 
4676 ; w. compt. and 
sup. 513f; as pers. 
pron. 540g; ὁ αὐτός 
540b, w. dat. 451. 
αὑτοῦ < ἑαυτοῦ 244. 
ἀφαιρέομαι const. 485d. 
ἀφειδέω w. gen. 405 Ὁ. 
ἄχθομαι w. dat. 456; 
w. pt. 661 b, 677’. ~ 
ἄχρι(ς) 164; w. gen. 
4450; ἄχρι οὗ 557 a. 
B 4, 137 ; <7, ¢, 147. 
βασιλεύς (sc. ὁ) 533 Ὁ ; 
cp. 262 d. 
βασιλεύω w. gen. 407 ; 
aor. x pres. 592d. 
βελτίων, &c., 260, 261e. 
οηθέω, &c., w. dat. 453. 
opéas, -Apas dec. 15, 
196, 198. 1. 
βουλεύω, mid. 579. 
βούλομαι, βούλει 559 ο, 
647}; βουλομένῳ 48 Ν. 
ods dec. 19, 2145, 217. 
4,137¢; <x, x, 147. 
yap 701j; in specif. 
705b; anacol. 716 a; 
pos. 720; ὁ γάρ 518b. 
γέ 389 c, 685 b, ὁ ; pos. 
720; encl. 787 ἃ, h. 
γείτων const. 442, 450. 
γέλως dec. 207 ὁ ; com- 
powls oat Ἂς Ἢ 
ένος, pas, dec. ᾽ 
Ves. © (473. 
γεύω w. gen., acc., 432a, 
γίγας dec. 17, 206. ᾿ 
γίγνομαι w. gen. 412, 


δ 707. γίγνομαι 
487a'; w. dat. 449; 
w. pt. 679. [657 k. 
ιγνώσκω w. inf. x pt. 

Noss dec. 21, 227 Ὁ. 

γόνυ dec. 224 c. 

γράφω, mid. 579, 581, w. 
gen., acc., 431 ο, 480 ο. 

γυνή dec. 203, 779. 
oy dec. 17, 203. 

Γωβρύας dec. 15, 198. 1. 

A 4, 137; in dece.: 217. 
ϑαίμων dec. 18, 208. 
δάκρυον,-ρυ dec. 14, 225f. 
δάμαρ dec. 17, 153 a. 
Savelf{w, mid. 581. 
δέ 685 c, 701 ¢; for γάρ 
705a; introd. 708e; 
os. 720: ὁ δέ 518. 
-δὲ local 688 e, 382, 252; 
enclit. 787 d, f, g. 
δεῖνα dec. 27, 245. 
δένδρον, -εον, dec. 225 f. 
δέσποτα voc. 779. 
δέω need, w. gen. 414b; 
w. num. 2426 : δεῖ w. 
- ace.473b; w.inf.598a; 
: μικροῦ [δεῖν], &c., 665 : 
δέομαι w. gen. 414 ο, 
434 a. 
δή, δῆθεν, δῆτα, δαί, 68 ο, 
389 ; pos. 673. 
δῆλός εἰμι 573, 677 2; 
δῆλον ὅτι 717 Ὁ. 
δηλόω w. pt. 677. [208 ἢ. 


Δημήτηρ dec. 210 b, 

διά 688, 689 ἃ. 

διαλέγομαι 580, w. dat. 
452 a. [677 f. 


διαλείπω, pt. or w. pt. 
διατρίβω ν΄. pt. 677 a. 
διαφέρω (-popos) w. gen. 
406; mid. w. dat. 455’. 
διδάσκω w. 2 acc. 4806; 
mid. 581. 
δίδωμι, pres. x aor. 594. 
δίκαιός εἰμι w. inf. 573. 
δίκην w. gen. 436d. . 
διότι conj. 701 1. 
διπλάσιος w. gen. 409. 
δίπους dec. 22, 231 ο. 
δοκέω personally 573 ; 
(ws) δοκεῖν ἐμοί 665, 
.671¢'; pt. abs. 675 ¢, d. 
δόλος dec. 14, 11s. 
ϑόρυ dec. 21, 224 ο. 


‘GREEK. 


Sods dec. 26, 205, 233. 
δύναμαι w. acc. 472f; 
or -ros, w. rel. 553 ¢. 
δύο, δύω, dec. 25, 240 ο. 

δύς dec. 26, 205, 233. 

δυσ- 385¢; aug. 283. 

δωρεάν adv. acc. 380 ἃ. 

δῶρον dec. 14, 11s. 

Ἔ ψιλόν 4, 98 b, 106; 
<o 138, 142, 152s; 
ims. in cont. 120i. 

-εα- in plup. 2916 : -ea, 
-eas, in ace. 220. 

ἐάν (εἰ dv) 701 f, 619 a. 

ἑαυτοῦ > αὑτοῦ dec. 27, 
244, 248; use 5378; 
as gen. τοῦ. 539 d. 

ἐάω w. ov, forbid, 686i. 

ἐγγύς cp. 263d; w. gen. 
4450 : w. dat. 450. 

ἐγώ dec. 27, 243, 246 ; 
use, 536s; ἔγωγε 787 ἢ, 

ἕθεν for οὗ 27 f, 247 f. 

εἰ, εἴπερ, εἰ μή, εἴτε, εἰ 
kat, εἰ μὴ εἰ, 101 Ff, g, i, 
m, 631s, 699 ἃ, 648 5, 
674; εἰ γάρ, εἴθε, εἰ, 
in wish 638 ; εἴτις 639; 
ell. w. εἰ δέ, ef δὲ μή, &e., 
710, 717 ¢; εἰ procl.786. 

-εια- in opt. 293d, e. 

εἰδώς dec. 26, 233 ο. 

εἴκοσι(ν) 52, 163 a. 

εἴκω w. dat., gen., 455g, 

εἰκών dec. 224a. [405 Ὁ. 


εἰμί be x εἶμι go 766. 3; 


enclit. 7876 : w. gen. 
421s, 487; w. dat. 
459 ; w. pt. 679 ; ἔστιν 
οἵ, &¢.,559; ἔστι, ἣν, w. 
pl. nom. 570 ; ἣν as aor. 
603 b, as pr. 611. 
εἰπέ, -dv, acc. 781, 783 6; 
εἴργω w. gen. 405. [656. 
-εἰς adj., 155°; cp. 258. 
εἷς dec. 24, 240b; ν΄. 
dat. 451, sup. 512 ¢. 
εἰς, és, 688, 689a; w. 
num. 239f, 692. 5; 
proclit. 786; εἰς ὅτε 
712. [480 ο΄. 
εἰς(ἐκ) πράττω w. 2 acc. 
ἕκαστος 376d; const. 
501, 548 ο. 
ἐκδύω w. 2 acc. 480 c. 


“Eppeas 355 
ἐκεῖνος 281, 252; ἐκει- 
.voot 252¢; use 542; 
w. art. 524. 
ἑκὼν εἶναι 665 Ὁ. 
ἐλάσσων,-ττων, cp. 261 b, 
262}, ἔλαττον as indec., 
adv., 507 6, f, 511 ο. 
ἐλαύνω as intrans. 577 6. 
“Ἑλλάς, -ην, as adj. 506f. 
ἐλπίς dec. 17, 204. 
ἐμαυτοῦ dec. 27, 244, 
248 ; use 537s. 
ἐμός 252. 5; use 538. 
ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ x μοῦ, μοί, 
μέ, 346 c, 5368, 787 5. 
-ev, inf. in, 809 ο, 326. 
ἐν (ἐνί) 688, 689 ἃ; proclit. 
786 ; in compos. 166, 
698 c; as adv. 703 b; 
for εἰς 704d: ἐν τοῖς 
w. sup. 512b; ἔνι for 
ἔνεστι 699 e, 785. 
ἐνδίδωμι intrans. 486 d. 
ἔνδον, -οθεν, -οθι, w. gen. 
445¢; interch. 704. ᾿ 
ἕνεκα, -κεν, γγ. gen. 436d. 
ἔνοχος w. gen. 491 ο, ἃ. 
ἐξ, ἐκ, 688, 689, 165; 
proclit. 786 ; cp. 262d; 
w. pass. 586; for ἐν 
704: ἐξ ὅτου, &e., 557 a. 
ἐξαίφνης w. part. 662. 
ἐξάρχω in hypall. 474. 
ἔξαρνος w. acc. 472]. 
ἑξῆς w. gen. 445, w. 
dat. 450 a. (426. 
ἐξ(ἐφ)ικνέομαι w. gen. 
ἐξόν absolute 675’. 
ἔξω cp. 262d, 263. 
ἔοικα const. 657 j. 
ἐπαινέω w. gen. 429 a, 
443b; w. 2 acc. 480b’. 
ἐπεί(δή) w. aor. 605 ο, 
617d; ν΄. εὐθέως, rd- 
χίστα, &e., 553. 1, Ὁ; 
ἔπί 688, 689g; w.num., 
240 f, 692.5 ; in compos. 
699g: ἐφ᾽ ᾧ (τε) δδ7α, 
w. inf. 671; ἔπι 785. 
ἐπυχώριος w. gen. 437 Ὁ. 
ἔρημος, -dw, w.gen. 414 Ὁ. 
épt- in compos. 385 ἃ. 
ἔρις, -igw, w. dat. 455 ; 
dec.-17, 204. 


- Eppéas, -ἧς, dec. 15,196. 


356 ἐῤῥωμένος 


ἐῤῥωμένος cp. 257 d. 
ἔρχομαι ν΄. δ νὴ 598 Ὁ, 
c; pr. for fut. 6096: 
ἐλθέ oxyt. 781 d. 
ἐρῶν dec. 26, 152, 121. 
ἐρωτάω w. 2 acc. 480 ο. 
ἔστε (ἐς, τέ) conj. 701h. 
ἑστώς dec. 26, 233 a. 
ἔσχατος cp. 262 d, ο. 
ἑταῖρος cp. 262d. 


ἕτερος 376; use 567 ; ἥ 


w. gen. 406. 
ev <eF 142, 217b; <0, 
&c., 131 Ὁ, 323 ¢, f. 
εὔγεως dec. 200 ἢ. 
εὐθύ(ς) 164; w. gen. 
430 ; w. part. 662. 
εὔνοος accent. 772 a. 
εὑρίσκω w. pt. 677 ; εὑρέ, 
oxyt. 781. 
éiis, Hus, dec. 237 ἃ. 
εὔχαρις dec. 22, 204. 
ἐφελκυστικόν (v) 163 ο. 
ἐχϑρός cp. 260, 261 6. 
ἔχω reflex. 577 ο, ἃ, w. 
gen. 420b; w. pt. 679; 
ληρεῖς ἔχων 674g; mid. 
w. gen. 426. 
-εως, -ewv, Att. gen. 220. 
ἕως dec. 225], 199. 
F 4, 98e, 100, 138s; 


in dec. 217; in cj. 345; 


in pron. 27 ἢ, g, 246s ; 
in pros. 736 b. 
Z 4, 137d; <mute&I 
143 ο, 261 b, 349. 
{a-, Sa-, insep. 385 ἃ. 
{am w. acc., dat. 485d: 
fdwr, ζῶν, dec. 26. 
Ζεύς, Ζάν, dec. 21, 224f. 
-{@, verbs in, 349, 378s. 
4, 106; ims, 311. 

ἢ 109s, 1184, 7, 11 5. 
% or, than, 701 4,i,1; 
w. compt. 511, 513, om. 
5lle; ἢ κατά, } ws, 
&e., 513; ἢ οὐ 713h. 

ἢ indeed, 685 ο, 687. 

ἢ δ᾽ ὅς 518f [08 ο. 

fas adv. 580 ο΄ ; w. sup. 

ἠδέ (ἰδέ E.) conj. 701 ο. 

ἥδομαι w. dat. 456 ; in 
dat. 459. N.; w. pt. 677. 

ἡδύς dec. 23, 2185, 217, 
233 ; cp. 260. 


INDEX I. 


ἥκιστος sup. 262 Ὁ : ἥκι- 
στα n0, 708 b. 
ἥκω w. adv. and gen. 
420 Ὁ ; as perf. 612. 
ἡλίκος 53 ; in condens., 
556, 565’. 
ἡμέρα, gen. 433, dat. 
469 a, acc. 482; wt. 
art. 533d; om. 507 Ὁ. 
ἡμίν, μας, &c., 247 g, 1. 
μισυς dec. 220 g ; com- 
ounds 242 e., 
ἣν < ἐάν 619 α, 681 8, 
ἧπαρ dec. 17, 206. 
< €ap, hipos, 209,778 Ὁ. 
“Hpaxdéns dec. 19, 219 ¢, 
7191, 222d. 
ἥρως dec. 19, 216. 
-ἧς « -έες nom. 121e. 
“ἢς9, τῇσι, dat. pl. 198. 
-ns in form. 386. 2; ep. 
258. [262 b. 
ἥσσων, -ττων, compt. 
ἥσυχος cp. 257d, 259a. 
Are, ἤτοι, 701 ἃ. [779 a. 
ἠχώ dec. 19, 2148, 7726, 
ὡς, dec. 225 j, 219 Ὁ. 
4,137; changes 147s. 
θανάτου, use 431 ἃ. 
θάσσων (ταχύς) 261 Ὁ. 
θἄτερον, -ov, 125 Ὁ. 
θαυμάζω w. acc. & gen. 
432 f, 4726; w. εἰ 639. 
θαυμαστὸν ὅσον, &c., 565. 
θεά dec. 15, 194 5. 
θείς dec. 26, 205, 238. 
Θέμις dec., use, 224 g. 
-Oev, gen. in, 192, 380b. 
θήν δ ὁ; pos. 720; 
encl. 787 d. 


᾿θήρ dec. 18, 208. 


εθι, dat. in, 191. 2. 
θνήσκω, tenses, 600 a. 
θρίξ dec. 17, 203 b. 
θυγάτηρ dec. 210b, 208f. 
θύραζε, θύρασι, 882,880 ο. 
I 4, 106 ; usubs. 109. 

I consonant 138s, 148. 
iSé,70,imv. 656 Ὁ ; 781d. 
ἴδιος w. gen. 437 Ὁ. 
ἵεμαι w. gen. 430 b. 
ἱερός w. gen. 437 Ὁ. 
τιη- in opt. 293. [566 a. 
ἵνα 701 6, 624e; ἵνα τι; 
ἱππεύς dec. 19, 21, 213s. 


A § 797. 
ἰσόμοιρος w. gen. or dat 
442 ἃ. 


ἴσος & der. w. dat. 451. 
ἰχθύς dec. 19, 217, 2191. 


πίων, -ἰστος, in cp. 260s. 


K 4, 187 ; tense-s. 288. 
kat 701 a, 68 ὁ ; crasis 
126 ; w. num. 242; w. 
οὗτος 544a; w. pt. 
674; for other con- 
nectives, 705 : καὶ τόν 
(és) 518e, ἔ; καὶ εἰ 
701g; πολὺς καί 7026; 
καὶ γάρ Τ09 ; καίπερ 
674f, 662. [262}. 
κακός cp. 260 5, 261 6, 
καλέω w. 2 acc. 480 ἃ. 
καλός cp. 260 [dec. 226. 
κάρα in periphr. 4876 ; 
κατά 688, 689m; in 
cp. 513 Ὁ ; compounds 
w. gen. 699a: κάτ 136. 
κατανέμω w. 2 acc. 480 a. 
κέ(ν), κά, 163a; = dv618; 
pos. 720; encl. 787d. 
κεῖνος 281, 255 ο. 
κέρας dec, 17, 207, 2226 ; 
compounds 237 Ὁ. 
epbatdlos ep. 260. 
κεφαλῆς const. 426 Ὁ. 
κηρύσσει (ὁ κήρυξ) 571d. 
κινδυνεύω w. gen. 4464. 
kis dec. 19, 216}, 217. 
κλείς dec. 17, 207, 2228. 
κλέπτης cp. 262 ἃ. 
κλύω w. gen. 482 a, 
434 a’, 4135 as pass. 
575a; as perf. 612’. 
κοινός & der., w. gen. 
& dat. 424, 437 b, 450. 
κόπτομαι as act. 575 b. 
κόραξ dec. 17, 203. 
κόρυς dec. 17, 204. 
κορέννυμι w. gen. 414 a. 
κράτος & der. w.gen. 407. 
κρείσσων, κράτιστος, Cp. 
261 Ὁ, 262 b. 
κρύπτω w. 2 acc. 480 ο. 
κρύφα w. gen. 444 a. 
κύρω, -éw, w. gen. or dat. 
427, 450’; w. pt. 677 ἃ. 
κύων dec. 18, 210. 
A 4, 187; A «νλ, AI, 
150,143a,3491; changes 
of Ag 152. 


δ 797 λαγχάνω 
λαγχάνω w. gen. 427. 
λάθρα w. gen. 444. 
λάλος cp. 257 ἃ. 
λαμβάνω w. gen. 423, 
426; λαβέ oxyt. 781. 
λανθάνω const. 677 f. 
λαός, λεώς, dec. 200’. 
λέγω w. 2 δοο. 480b; λέ- 
γουσιν 571¢. 
λείπω w. gen. 405’, 406 b. 
λέων dec. 17, 205. 
λίμην dec. 18, 208. 
λιπών dec. 26, 781. 
λούω, mid. 578. 
λύγξ dec. 17, 203. 
λύρα dec. 14, 194s. 
λύω ν΄. gen. 405: λύων, 
λύσας, dec. 26. 
λῴων, λῷστος, 261 a, 262}. 
4, 137; changes of 
& w. 148, 150, 152, 160. 
μά x νή w. ace. 476 ἃ, 
685¢; μὰ τὸν --- 532. 
μάκαρ, -αιρα, 235 ἃ. 
μακρός cp. 261b,e; μα- 
κρῷ, by far, 468. 
μάλα cp. 263a; μᾶλλον, 
᾿ μάλιστα, in ep. 510; 
μᾶλλον om. 5131. 
μάλης, ὑπό, 228 c. 
μανθάνω w. gen. 434 a, 
413; w.inf. x pt. 657k; 
τί μαθών; 674h. 
Μασκᾶς dec. 227 b. 
μέγας dec. 24, 236; ep., 
261 Ὁ ; μείζων dec. 22, 
211, 
τμεθα,-μεσθα,299: -μεθον 
299 Ὁ, 96, page 7. 
μείων cp. 261 ἃ ; μεῖον ἃ5 
indecl. 507 6. [ep. 259. 
μέλας dec. 23, 208 ο, 233 ; 
μέλλω w. inf. 598 a. 
μέλει & der. w. gen. 432d ; 
w. dat. 457: 571d. 
μέν, μέντοι, 685 ο, 701b, 
c; pos.720: ὁ μέν 518; 
ἃς μέν 519 f. 
μέσος cp. 257d, e; use 
508 : -ow w. gen. 425 ἃ. 
μεστός, -dw, w.gen.414a. 
μετά 688, 689 ὁ ; com- 
pounds w. gen. 424. 
μεταπέμπω, mid. 579, 
μεταξύ w. part. 662. 


μέτεστι w. gen., dat., 
421, 459. 

péxpt(s) 164; w. gen. 
4456; w. οὗ, &c., 557; 
conj. 701 h, 703 ο. 

μή adv. x ov, 6868; 
redund. 713; μηδέ 
emph., μὴ οὐ, 713 ¢, f ; 
μή τί γε, μὴ ὅτι (ὅπως), 
717d, g: conj. 701e, 
6248: μηδέ, μήτε, Conj. 
701 ο, ἃ. 

μηδείς dec. 25, 240b; 
μηδέν as indecl. 507 6. 

μηκέτι < μὴ ἔτι 165 ©. 

μῆλον dec. 16, 11s, 771. 

μήν 685c; pos. 720. 

μήτηρ dec. 210 Ὁ. 

-pt form 45, 313s, 335. 

μικρός cp. 261 a,e, 262} ; 
μικροῦ (δεῖν) 665. 

μιμνήσκω W. gen., acc., 
432 ¢, 473. 

ply acc. 271; use 539 6. 

μισθόω, mid. hire 581. 

μνάα, μνᾶ, dec. 15, 196. 

μόριον dec. 16, 770. 

μόσσυν dec. 225 f. 

pod, μοί, μέ, encl. 787 ; 
x ἐμοῦ, &e., 246¢,53683 
μοί ethical 462 6. 

μοῦσα, μυῖα, dec. 15, 

Lagos dec. 23, 232. 

4, 137 ; corresp. to a 
138, 142,156, changes8, 
150s, of vs 152s, w<vI 
142a; ν final 160; 
movable 162s. 

ναί x μά w. ace. 476d. 
ναός, νεώς, dec. 16, 200. 
ναῦς dec. 19, 21, 216 5, 
222 f; ναῦφι 1090 ἃ. 
ναύτης dec. 14, 194 5. 
νέατος sup. 257 6. 
νεώς dec. 16, 200, 772 ἃ. 
νή x μά w.ace. 476, 68 ο. 
vy- privative 385 b. 
νῆσος dec. 16, 771. 
viv acc. 27g; use 539e. 
γομίζω w. dat. 466 c. 
νόος, νοῦς, dec. 16, 225g. 
νύ(ν) 163 ἃ, 68 ὁ ; pos. 
720; encl. 787 d. 
vvE17f; gen., dat., acc., 
433, 469, 482. 


ὁμοῦ 357 


ἘΞ 4, 1875 «ζ κσ,γσ, χα, 
161. 


ξύν -- σύν 170, 688 5. 
Ὃ μικρόν 4, 98 ο, 106; 
kind.w. a, ε,114, 512}. 
6 art. 28, 249s; accent. 
786; in crasis 125; τώ 
for τά 234e; in form 
és 518 6 : use as pron. 
516s; as art. 520s, 
generic 522, limiting 
5238s; w. inf. 663f, 
664; arrangement 528 ; 
ellipsis 527s, 532s: 
ὁ μέν (δέ, yap), καὶ τόν 
(ὅς) 518; ἐν τοῖς ὅ12 Ὁ. 
8S¢ dec.28, 252; use 542s; 
x οὗτος 5438; = adv. 
545a; = éyd 546; ν΄. 
art. 524: ὁδί 252 ο. 
ὀδούς dec. 17, 205 a. 
᾿Οδυσ[σ]εύς dec. 21,222. 
ὄζω w. gen. 412, 486 ο. 
-οθεν, -οθι, 191s, 380. 
ὀθοὔνεκα 126 ὃ ; use 701 j. 
οι 4; in accent. 767. 
οἶδα w. pt. 677 ; οἶδ᾽ ὅτι 
717 Ὁ; οἷσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσον 
655. 
Οἰδίπους dec. 21, 214s. 
οἰκεῖος w. gen. 437b; 
w. dat. 450. 
οἶκος om. w. gen. 438. 
olxtpds cp. 260. 
οἴμοι 453; w. gen. 429 6. 
-ovo Thessal. gen. 201. 
οἴομαι > οἶμαι parenth. 
313e; w. gen. 413. 
οἷος 53; use 549s, 5638; 
in condens. δδ 5, 565 ; 
in exclam. 564b; w. 
inf. 671 : οἷός re 556 ¢; 
οἷον, ola, w. pt. 681. 
ὄϊς, οἷς, dec. 19, 21. 
τοισι dat. pl.201d. [679. 
οἴχομαι ἃ5 pf.612; w. pt. 
ὀλίγος cp. 261 Ὁ, 262 b; 
w. art. 523f: ὀλίγου 
(δεῖν) 665 ; ὀλίγῳ 486. 
ὅλος w. & wt. art. 629 6. 
ὄμνυμι w. ace. 472f. 
ὁμοῦ & der. w. dat. 450s, 
w. gen. 4428 : w. καί 
705¢; ὅμοιός εἰμι const. 


657j; ὅμως w. pt. 662. 


358 ὄνομα 


ὄνομα in periphr. 437 ¢ ;} 


Σ ace, dat. 485 +. 

ém- in pron. & adv. 377. 

ὅπου, ὅποι: ποῦ, ποῖ" 
οὗ, of, 53; w. gen. 420; 
interchanged 704. 

᾿᾽Οποῦς dec. 17, 207 ο. 

ὅπως adv. 53, 559 a, 
624e; conj. 701e, 
624s; in ell. 626. 

ὁράω ν΄. ὅπως, μή, 626 ; 
w. pt. 677. 

ὀρέγομαι w. gen. 430 Ὁ. 

ὄρνις dec. 224 6. 

ὀρχέομαι w. acc. 477 Ὁ. 

ὅς rel., dec. 28, 250: 
wse as rel. 5498, as 
complem. 563s ; attr. 
552s, Att. 554a, in- 
verse 554¢ ; w. modes 
640s: ὃς βούλει 559 Ὁ: 
ὅς as demonst. δ18 f, 

' 519 f: ὅς possess. 252. 
5; use 538 5. 

ὅσος 53 ; use 549s,563s; 
in condens. 556, 565 ; 
in exclam. 564b; w. 
inf.671: 8covasindecl. 
or ady. 507 e, f, 556d; 
ὅσῳ 468 : ὁσημέραι 551i. 

ὀστέον, -οῦν, dec.16,772. 

ὅστις, ὅτις, ὅτου, &c., dec. 
28, 254, 2556 : use as 
rel. 549s, as complem. 
5638; x ὅς 549s; w. 
modes 640s: 8 τι μα- 
θών (παθών) 674 ἢ. 

ὅτε (ὅταν 619 b) w. modes 

. 640 5΄; w. sup. aor. 
553 b, 605. 

ὅτι 701 i,j, n, 6435; 
x ws 702; not elided 
129a; redund. 644, 
659e; repeated 714 ; 
in anacol. 716; pos. 
719: w. sup. 553¢; 
ὅτι μή 701m. 

ου 4,115 8; <oF 217}. 

ov, ot, ἕ, dec. 27, 246: 
encl. 787 ; use 539. 

od > οὐκ, οὐχ, οὐχί, 165, 
685c; x μή 686; 
interrog. 687 ; redund. 
713; wt. μά 476d: 
ov μή W. subj. or fut. 


INDEX. i. 


597, 627; οὔ φημι, &e., 
686i; οὔτε, οὐδέ, 701a, 
6, 713 b, ¢ ; οὐ γὰρ ἀλ- 
λά, οὐ μέντοι (μὴν) ἀλλά, 
οὐχ ὅτι(ὅσον, ὅπως), 717. 
οὐδείς (οὐδὲ εἷς 240 b) 24 : 
οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐ 559. 
οὐκοῦν therefore 687 ο. 
οὖν < ἐόν (ὧν D., 1.) 389 σ, 
685 ὁ ; pos. 720. 
οὕνεκα 126, 557a, 701]. 
οὖς dec. 17, 207, 778 ο. 
"οὗτος dec. 28, 252: use 
5428; x 6de 5438; in 
repetition, assent, 544; 
in address 401, 3, 546; 
pl. for sing. 489d; w. 
art. 524: οὑτοσί, 252c. 
ovTw(s) 164; x ὧδε 547: 
ὀφείλω in wish 638 g. 
ὄφρα 701, 624, 53 Vv. 
ὀψέ cp. 263a; w. gen. 
420 ; w. ἣν 571d. 
IT 4, 137 ; changes 147s. 
παιάν dec. 18, 208. 
παῖς dec. 17, 204, 778 Ὁ. 
παλαιός cp. 257 d. 
πάλιν in compos. 166. 
παρά (παραί 134, πάρ 
136) 686, 689d; in 
cp. ὅ118 ; w. pass. 
586d ; incompos.699 g: 
πάρα 699e, 785. 
Παράρτημα, App., 80. 
πᾶς dec. 23,729.2,778b, 
7980; w. gen. 416b; w. 
art. 523e; w. τὶς 548c¢; 
w. rel. 550f5; ν΄. imv. 
656: πᾶν in compos. 


166. (674h. 
πάσχω 575a'; τί παθών; 
πατήρ dec. 18, 210, 

208 f. [222 d. 


Πάτροκλος dec. 21, 
παύω ν΄. gen. 405; mid. 
5828; w. pt. 677. 
πείθω w. 2 acc. 4806; 
w. dat. 455 g, 456. 
Πειραιεύς dec. 220 6. 
πέλας & der. w. gen. 
445¢; w. dat. 450. 
πέμπω w. dat. 450b; 
w. 2acc. 472g. [414b. 


πένης cp. 258 ; w. gen. 
πενθικῶς w. gen. 429 c. 


§ 797. 


πέρ 389 h, 685; w. pt. 
674}; pos. 720; encl. 
787 ἃ. 

περί (πέριξ) 688, 689 f; 
not elided 129; asady. 
708}: πέρι 785 ; of περί 

πέρυσι(ν) 108 4. [527 ἃ. 

πηνίκα; w. gen. 420 ἃ. 

πῆχυς dec. 19, 213s. | 


πλείων, -έων, -εἴστος, -εῖν, 


πρό 


2601 8, ἃ ; πλεῖον as 
indecl. 507e, 51lc; 


πλεῖον, -etora,in cp.510. 
πλεονέκτης cp. 258 a. 
πλέως dec. 236b;.& 
der. w. gen. 414 a. 
πλῆθος acc., dat., 485 y ; 
w. pl. 499 a. 
πλήν w. gen. 406 ; conj. 
701m: πλὴν et 710. 
πλούσιος, -τέω, W. gen., 
“4148. [aec. 479. 
πνέω w. gen. 436¢, w. 
πνύξ dec. 224 ἢ. | 
πόθεν, ποῖ, ποῦ, πῶς, 53; 
w. gen. 420. 
trovéw w. dat., 2 acc., 460, 
480b; mid. 579, 581, 
585; w.gen. 430,431 b; 
in periph. 475. 
ποιητής 15, 366 d, 791 Ὁ. 
πόλις dec. 19, 21, 217 g, 
h, 222 ¢. 
πολιτεύω, mid. 582 6. 
πολύς dec. 24, 236; w. 
art. 523 f; cp. 261; 
w. καί 702¢: πολλοῦ 
431 a, πολλῷ 468. 
πόῤῥω, πρόσω, ν΄. gen. 
405, 420 ἃ. : 
πορφύρεος cp. 257 ο. 
ie dec. 208 f, 
211 a. 
ποτέ, TOV, πώς, XC., X πό- 
τε; &c., 53,5638; pos. 
720; encl. 787b: ποτέ 
w. interrog. 389i. [n. 
πότερος 3768: -ov 701i, 
πότνια, -va, fem. 238 Ὁ. 
πούς dec. 17, 214s, 291 ο. 
πρᾶος dec. 24, 236 c. 
πρίν const. 703d. 
πρό 688, 6891; in crasis 
126: cp. 262d ; w.comp. 
5lla; πρὸ τοῦ 519 Ὁ. 


§ 797. πρός 
πρός (προτί, worl, πότ, 
136) 688, 689i; in ep. 
5lla; w. pass. 586d ; 
asadv.703 Ὁ ; incompos. 
699g; in accent. 788 6, 
προσβάλλω w. gen. 436 ο. 
προσήκει w. gen., dat., 
421,450 ; -ovabs. 675d. 
πρόσθε(ν' 164 a), πρότε- 
pov, w. πρίν 703 ἃ. 
πρότερος cp. 262 ο, d. 
προὔργου 382 ; cp. 262d. 
πρῶτος cp. 262 ο, ἃ. 
πῦρ dec. 14, 220 f. 
πῶς ἄν in wish 637d. 
P 4, 187; aspirated, 
doubl., 93 d, 146, 159e; 
changes of po 152s. 
ῥᾷδιος cp. 261. 
ῥήτωρ dec. 18, 153. 
is dec. 18, 208. 
,oors, 4, 90. 1, 137; 
corresp. to ε 138, 142, 
152s; final 160, 164; ¢, 
o.oo < mute & 1143. 
σαλπίζει (sc. 60.) 571b. 
σαφής dec. 22, 213 ; 
-ἧς, -@s, cp. 258. 
σεαυτοῦ, σαυτοῦ, dec. 27, 
244, 248; use 537. 
-σϑα in 2 pers. 297 Ὁ. 
-σκον,͵ -σκόμην, iter. 332. 
σκοπέω, mid. 5827; w. 
ὅπως, μή, 624, 626. 
σός 252. 5; use 538. 
σοφός dec. 23, 232; -ds, 
-s, cp. 257, 263. 
σπέος dec. 21, 222d. 
σταθμός dec. 226 Ὁ. 
στοχάζομαι w. gen. 430. 
σύ dec. 27, 246s; use 
536s; σοῦ, col, σέ, encl. 
787s; σοί ethical 462e: 
σύγε 389 ο. [4428. 
συγγενής w. gen., dat., 
υγνώσκω const.657j. 
σύν (ξύν 170) 688, 689b; 
in compos. 166; w. 
num. 240f: compounds 
“w. dat. 451, 699f; w. 
gen. 424. 
συνελόντι 671 ο. 
σύνοιδα const. 657 j. 
σῦς, ἧς, dec. 14, 141. 
σφέ, υφίσι, σφίν, 27, 


_ GREEK, 


246 ἃ, 247; use 539 ;! 


encl. 787s. 
σφέτερος 252. 5, 538s. 
σφοδρός cp. 257 a. 
σφώ, σφωέ, &c., 27,246 8. 
Σιχῆμα᾽ Αλκμανικόν497 c; 
᾿Αττικόν, ΠΠινδαρικόν(βοι- 
ὠτιον), 569 ἃ. 
cote w. gen. 408 ἃ. 
Σωκράτης dec. 19, 213s. 
σῶμα dec. 17, 206. 
σῶς, σῶος, dec. 236 d. 
σωτήρ dec. 208 ἢ, 
σώφρων cp. 259. 
T 4, 137; changes 147s. 
τάλας cp. 259. 
τἀμά = ἐγώ 428. 
ταμίας dec. 15, 195. 
ταύτῃ adv. 380 ο. 
ταὐτόν, ταὐτό, 199 a. 
ταχύς, -éws, cp. 261 b, e, 
263:7ivraxtorny 483d; 
ws τάχιστα, &e., 553 b,c. 
τέ 389¢, 685¢, 7018 ; 
pos. 720 ; encl. 787d. 
τελευτάω w. gen. 405; 
pt. as adv. 674b. 
τέλος adv. acc. 483. 
-réos,verb.in, 269d, 37 4f; 
w. dat. 458 ; const. 682, 
572. [257 s. 
-TEpos, -TaTos, cp. in, 
τέσσαρες dec. 25, 240 e. 
τηλίκος, -olros, -όσδε, 
58, 252, δ47'. 
τίθημι, mid. 579. 
τιμάω w. gen. 431 Ὁ. 
τυιμωρέω, mid. 579. 
tis indef. dec. 28, 253, 
2556; pos. 548 b, 720, 
520b; encl. 787b; 
affixed 389 a: use 548 ; 
w. pl. 489d, 501; tlas 
indecl. 507 6, g. 
τίς interrog. dec. 28, 
253,255e; use563s; w. 
art. 581 a; in condens, 
555: τί γάρ, τί δέ, &e., 
564c; ἵνα τί 66 ἃ. 
Τισσαφέρνης dec. 225 d. 
τό γε, τὸ καὶ τὸ, πρὸ τοῦ, 


519b; τὸ νῦν εἶναι 
665b: τοί, ταί, =oi, αἱ, 
28 j. [pos. 720. 


τοί encl. 685 ο, 787d; 


piv 


τοῖος, -οὔτος, -dcde, 53, 
252, 199 a, 547. 
τοξεύω w. gen. 430. 
-ros, verbal in, 374e, 
w. dat. 458. 

τόσος, -οῦτος, -όσδε, 53, 
252, 199, 547. [253. 
τοῦ = τινος, &e., 28f, g, 
τράπεζα dec. 15, 791 ο. 
τρεῖς clec. 25, 240 9. 
τριήρης dec. 2180, 219 a. 
τρίτον ἡμιτάλαντον 242 6. 
τρόπῳ, -ον, -ους, 48 α. 
τυγχάνω w. gen. 420 5, 
434 ; w. part. 677. 
τύννος, -o0Tos, 53, 252a. 
τῷ th(wh)erefore 519 Ὁ. 
Ὗ ψιλόν 4, 98}, 10ῦ ; 
ὕ- 980, ὑποϑο; U<F, 
eF, 138, 142, 217b, c. 
ὑβριστής cp. 259 a. 
ὑγιής cont. 120 f. 

ὕδωρ dec. 206. 

vids dec. 21; om. 438. 
-upt, less Att. -dw, 315 a. 
ὕμιν, was, &c., 247 g, 1. 
ὑπάγω θανάτου 431d. 
ὑπακούω, -ἤκοος, W. geNy 
dat., 492 g, 455 g. 
ὑπάρχω w. gen. 425; w. 
dat. 459; w. pt. 677’. 
ὑπέρ (ὑπείρ 134 688, 
6891 ; ep. 262 d. 

ὑπό (vrai, ὑπ, 136) 688, 
689k ; cp. 262d; w. 
pass. 586. 

-us adj. 218 6 ; ep. 258. 
ὑστερέω, -ifw, -atos, W. 
gen, 408. | 
vorrepos,-TaTos, cp. 262d. 
ᾧ 4, 137; 147 s, 159, 167. 
dalvw, mid. 582. 
φανερός εἰμι 573 ο. 
φέρτερος, -ἰστος, 
cp. 262 b. 

φέρω, mid. 578 a, 585: 
φέρε 656 Ὁ. 

ts 684b; w. gen. 429e. 


359 


&e., 


εὔγω as pass. 575 a. 
mpl, φασίν 571 ο ; ἔφη 
574; οὔ φημι 6861. 
φθάνω, p. or w. pt. 677 f ; 
w. καί 705¢e. [482 Ὁ 
φθονέω w. gen. dat., 


-pu(v) old dat. 190, 163. 


360 φίλος 


ἴλος cp. 257 ἃ, 261 6. 

λέψ dec. 17, 151, 778. 

oBéw, mid. 5828; or 
φύβος, w. ὅπως, μή, 
624s; om. 626 5. 


q 
φυλάσσω, mid. 579. 
φύξιμος w. acc. 472j. 
φύω w. gen. 412. 
as dec. 17, 206, 224f. 
X 4, 187 ; 147s, 159. 
χαίρω w. dat. 456. 
Xaples dec. 23 ; ep. 258. 
χαλεπαίνω w. dat. 456. 
χάρις dec. 203 a ; χάριν 
380 a, w. gen. 436d. 
χείρ dec. 18, 224 f: yel- 
ρων, -ἰστος, 261, 262 Ὁ. 
Χορός dec. 16, 775. 
Χράομαι w. dat. acc, 
466 b, 478. 


ῥροντιστής const. 472j. | xpd 


GREEK INDEX, 


χρή ν΄. gen., ace., 473 Ὁ; 
w. inf. 595: ipf. 611. 
χρήζω w. gen. 414 ο. 
χρῆμα in periph. 446a; 
τί χρῆμα why 483 ¢: 
vos, gen. 433, dat. 
469, 485, ace. 482. 
χρύσεος dec. 23, 772 ο. 
χρώς dec. 224e, 207 a. 
W 4,137; <0, Ba, go, 
ψαύω w. gen. 426, [151. 
"2 μέγα 4, 98c, 106: 
-o ἃ -pt forms 270 c. 
ῳ 109 5, in cont. 7,118 ἃ, 
119s; in dec. 11s. 
ὦ, ὦ, 684b: Sin address 
484, 401.3; crasis 126. 
ὧδεχ οὕτως 547, 53. 
φὠδή dec. 15, 195, 775. 
wv dec. 16, 775. 
ὡς proclit.786 ; use711a, 


ὥφελον § 797. 
53, 70] ο, i,j,k; w. 
gen. 420b; w. dat. 
462d; w. sup. 553 ; in 
condens. 558 b, 565 ; w. 
pt. 598 b, 680,67 ; fin- 
al 624s; complem.643s, 
x ὅτι 702 a, om. 647b; 
in wish 648d; w. inf. 
671, 518d; w. adv. 
711; w. num. 711b; 
as prep. 711 ; in ell. 
711: ἔστιν ὡς 559 ἃ. 
ὥσπερ 8589}: w. pt. 680, 
675e; in ell. 711. 
ὥστε 389}, 7876 ; consec. 
701k, 671d; w. imv. 
655 ; w. inf. 671,513 ἃ. 
wv Ion. 1316. 
ὠφελέω w. dat. 453 ; w. 
acc. 472 Ὁ. [638 g, 
ὥφελον in wish, 611, 


798. INDEX IL—LATIN AND ENGLISH. 


This Index is designed, not only for prominent subjects and words, but also 


for the authors most cited, and for abbreviations. The writings of Xenophon 
are commonly cited without naming the author, and the Anabasis without 
even naming the work (by book, chapter, and section, according to the usual 
division: as, iv. 8. 12). The Hiad and Odyssey are cited by book-letter and 
verse as numbered by Wolf, Bekker, &c.; a capital referring to the Iliad, and 
a small letter to the Odyssey (A. 25, for Il. iv. 25; δ. 184, for Od. iv. 184). In 
Pindar, the references are made to the verses of Heyne; and in the Drama- 
tists, to those of Dindorf. The- Historians are commonly cited by book and 
chapter, according to the usual division; Demosthenes, by the pages and lines 
of Reiske; the other Orators and Plato (including Timzus ocrus), by the 
pages and lines or division-letters of Stephens; &c. Figures indicating the 
times at or about which the authors flourished are here subjoined to their 
names, from the latest edition of Liddell & Scott’s excellent Lexicon. It will be 
understood that the year before Christ 1s denoted, unless the number is followed 
by ‘‘A. D.” In most cases, the meaning of the abbreviations used in this 
work will be plain from their familiar use, or from the connection and the fol- 
lowing list.of words ; in other cases, special aid will be given below. For some 
explanations applying to the Index itself, see § 797. 


ABSOLUTE nom. 401; compt. & sup. 
514; time 607; inf. 665, gen., acc. 

Absorption of vowels 118. i(pt) 675. 

Acatalectic verse 748. 

Accent 766s; final, recessive, reten- 
tive, 769: rhythmic 741. See page 12. 

Accusative 10, 186 ἃ, 398, 485d; 
local idea 470: in appos. w. sent. 396; 
of rel. attracted 554; subj. of inf. 
666; abs. 675; w. verbal in réov 682 s; 
Ww. prep. 688s. See page 12. 


Achronic forms 590 a, 613 Ὁ, 660. 
Active Voice 30, 271 6 ; for pass. 575; 
trans. and intrans., = mid., 577, 585: 
Verbals w. gen. 444; w. acc. 472). 
Actual sentence 61f : mode 800, 613; 
interch. w. contingent 654. 
Acute accent 94, 767e; > grave 784: 
Additive particle 685. [syll. 768. 
Address 57; voc. 484, nom. 401. 3. 
Adjective 55, 173; dec. 22s, 229s; 
num. 25, 289; pron. 28, 249: compar, 


§ 798. 


ADJU 


256: der. 873; compos. 385 5: SYNT. 
492 5, 506s: pos. 718 f, s: Adj. Clause 
62h; pos. 718 0. [circumst., 58. 

Adjunct, prepos. x nude, complem. x 

Adopted stems 358. 

Adverb 55,685 ; num. 52,241, pronom. 
53, 877, charact., neg., interrog., &c., 
685s: cp. 263, 262d; der. 380: synt. 
685, 708s; w. art. = adj. 526; attracted 
554d, 558b; as prep., as conn. and 
non-conn., 703; used subst. 706: pos. 
18 e, s. 

Adverbial clause 62h, pos. 718 p; 
acc. 488, 880, gen., dat., 380; phrases 
529, 698; inf. 655; pt. 674 d. 

Adversative conjunctions 701 b. 

Aolic dialect (Aol., =.) 82, 84, 87 ; 
opt. 298 e; verse 750. [tor, § 85. 

#schines (Aischin.) fl. 345, Att. ora- 

ZEschylus (Aisch.) fl. 484, Att. tra- 

edian, ὃ 85: Agamemnon, Choéphori, 
tumenides, Persea, Prometheus, Sep- 
tem contra Thebas (Th.), Supplices. 

Affixes, open x close, 726 ; nude x 
euph.-183, 808: of dec. 11, 180 5, 20, 
analyzed and compared 12s: of pers. 
pron. 27 6: of cj., subjective x obj., pri- 
mary X sec.,imv., inf., partic., 52,88 5, 
285 8, 48, 321 5: nude 290 a, 318, 820; 
regular 303; union w. 8. 804 8. 

Afformatives 360, 32 f. 

Agent, suff. of, 365; w. pass., gen. 
586, 434, dat. 586, 461, 458, acc. 682}. 

Agesilaus, see Xenophon. 

Agreement 63a, 492s; acc. to form x 
sense 498s; of subst. 898, adj. 504, 

ron. 505, verb 568. 

Alczus (Alc.) fl. 606, Aol. lyrist. 

Alpha privative 385, 436. 

Alphabet 1s, 90s ; hist. 97. 

Alternative adv. 685¢; conj. 701 ἃ, 

Anabasis, see Xenophon. 

Anacoliithon 70+; in synt. of appos. 
896c, nom. 402, adj. and pt. 504 Ὁ, 
compt. 511, art. 532, fin. verb 644s, 
649 s, 655, inf. and pt. 659, 667 g, ver- 
bal 683, particle 716. 

Anacreon fl. 540, Ion. lyrist : poems 
in imitation of, Anacreontica(Anact.). 

Analysis of sentences 57s, 72s, words 
75e, cp. 29, verb 32, affixes 12s, 276, 
82, 35s, metres 78. [verse 751. 

Anapest 77: anapeestic rhythm 742, 

Anastrophe 71a; of accent 785. 

Antecedent, def. or indef., 549 ; in 
clause w. rel. or om. 551; attracted 
558s: clause un. w. rel. clause 555s. 

Antepenult 111, 767 f, 770. 

Antistrophe 744 6. 


COMP, GR. 16 


LATIN & ENGLISH. 


ATTR 361 


Antithesis 6, 104; or contrast, 71 a. 


Aorist 30b, 267 c, 273s; w.o changed 
or om. 152, 806: second 289, in pures 
818 Ὁ; stem 47, 336, 340; accent 780s; 
redupl. 284. 6; intrans. 338 Ὁ: SYNT., 

x def. and compl. tenses, 590s; as se- 
quel 592c, 605 b; generic use 602 Ὁ, 
603,605 ; gnomic 606; x ipf. as conting. 
or indef. 615s; x pres. w..“7 628; inf. 
660, 598; pt. 674e, 660e; pass. and 
mid. interch. 576; aor. sub. = fut. pf. 

Apheresis 6, 108 ο, 1240.  [617c. 

Apocope 6, 103 ὁ ; in particles 136. 

Apodosis 62 j; see Conclusion. 

Apollonius Rhodius fl. 200, Epic poet. 

Apologia (Apol.), see Xenophon. 

Aposiopésis 68 e, 532. 

Apostrophe 6, 103d, 127, 135b; 
accent 774, 788 Ὁ: rhetor. 70 g. 

Apposition, -tive, 58; dir. pred., 
modal, &c., 393; partitive 395, 417: 
synt. 3938; w. sentence 396, w. voc. 
485 a, by synesis 894 0: appositional 
verb 59a, 437. 

Apud (ap.) = quoted in. 

Aristophanes (Ar.) fl. 427, Att. come- 
dian, § 85: Acharnenses, Aves, Eccle- 
siaziise, Equites, Lysistrata, Nubes, 
Pax, Plutus, Ranz, Thesmophoria- 
Ζ 585, Vespe: Aristophanic verse 753. 

Aristoteles (Aristl.) fl. 347, philos- 
opher (ὃ 85b): Rhetorica, &c. 

Arrangement, log., rhet., rhythm., 
64; hyperb. 71; dir. or normal x indir. 
or varied, periodic x loose, 718; why 
varied 719 8. 

Arsis 741; affecting quant. 736 c. 

Article, prepos. x postpos., 28, 249s ; 
in crasis 125; proclit. 786: SYNT., use 
as gen.defin.518 s: as art. proper 820 5: 
generic, 522: limiting 523s; order of 
description x statement 523; w. αὐτός 
540 b; w. ἀμφί, περί, 527 a; in contrast, 
&c., = poss. pron., 530: repeated 523 b, 
j, 584.4; omitted 533 s. 

Aspirate mute 4, 137: breathing 93: 
aspiration om. 159, 348, 167; trans- 
ferred 159 g, 167. [554. 

Assimilation 104; of rel. or antec. 

Asyndeton 68 d, 707; Eng. x Gr. 707). 

Attenuation of vowels 107, 114: at- 
tenuated stems 341. 

Athenzus fl. 228 A. D., scholar. 

Attic dialect 82, 85; old, mid., new, 
>Common, 85a, b: dec. 200; gen. 
220f; redupl. 281 ἃ, 357.2; ορί. 298 ¢; 
imv. 800d; fut. 805; accent 790. 

Attraction 70q: in synt. of appos. 
896 b, ace., &c., 474, agreement 500, 


362 ATTR 


- adj. 608 5, pron. 5528, 565, verb 573,) 


649 ἃ, inf. and pt. 657, 666 5, particle 
715, 702 d; affecting pos. 719, 553, 662. 

Attribute 60 Ὁ, 492 Ὁ. 

Augment, syll. x temp., 277; rules 
278s; in dial. 284; in accent 783. 

Authority in prosody 726 b, 733. 

Auxiliary verbs 274, 285 a, 317, 679. 

BASE in cp. 29, 256a; in cj. 289 e. 

Bekker’s Edition of Homer, 1858 

Beeotic (Beeot., B.) dialect 82. [(Bek.). 

Breathings 4, 93; <_F, Σ, 141; in 
dial. 167 ὁ: marks 98b. * 

Breve (short syllable) 725 a. 

Castra, of foot, verse, masc., fem., 
&c., cxestiral pause, syll., 745; affect- 
ing quantity 736 c. 

Cases, dir. or indir., right or oblique, 
subjective, obj., or resid, 10, 179, 
897s; affixes 11 5, 180s; hist. 186s: 
use .897s, generic 485, in denoting 
place or time 470, 482 e, absolute 675, 
w. prep. 689: Latin 399 b, c. 

Catalectic verse 743. 

Causal conjunctions 701 j. 

Causative verbs 379, 473, 577, 581. 

Cf. = confer, compare, consult. 

Characteristic 172d: exponents 66. 

Chief = principal clauses 626 : chief 
= primary tenses 267 b: -ly (ch.). 

Choral odes 744 e. 

Chorus using sing. 488 a. 

Chronic x achronic forms 590 a. 

Circumflex accent 94, 767e, g; 771: 
-flexed syll. or vow. 768; long 771, 726. 

Circumstantial adjunct, or circum- 

Cj. = conjugation. [stance, 58 ἃ, s. 

Clauses 57; kinds 62, 58h; pos. 
7180, s, 721. [compos. 388 b. 

Close vowels 107 a: affixes 172c: 

Cognate vowels 4, 110 b: consonants 
4, 187 b, 167: themes 338d. 

‘Collectives 55 ; w. pl. 499. 

Comedy, comic (com.), 85s. 

Common dialect 85a: gend. 174: 
commonly (comm. ). 

Comparison (cp.) 29 (anal.), 256s ; 
by use of adv. 510; accent 776: see p. 
11: Comparative (compt., comp.) w. 

n., w. 7, &c., 408, 511 5; w. dat. of 
measure 468; abs.,too, as pos., 5145s: 
Comp. conjunction 4 701 1. 

Compellative 57, 484s: -part 60.. 

Complementary adjunct, or comple- 
ment, 58d, 6, 63f: pron., adv., 66 ἃ, 
568 5: conjunction 701i: clause 648 s. 

Complete tenses 30 b, 267 ὁ; redupl. 
280; auxil.and nude forms 317 s, 679a: 


INDEX 11. 


8 798. 


Χ def. and indef. 590, 599: special 
uses 599; preter. 268, 600; as pres. or 
fut. 610. {and parts 62 b, g. 

Complex modification 59: sentence 

Composition 359, 383 s ; dir. x indir. 
loose x close,double, &c., 387s; vowel 
383 a; elision 128 a, 282.2; augm., &., 
282; synt. relations 722; accent 783. 

Compound word 359b; verb 3887, 
699: sentence 62 c: vowel (diphthong) 
108: system 267 f: consir. 68 f, 495. 

Concession expr. by pt. or w. conj. 
674 f, 701 g. [631 5; omitted 638. 

Conclusion x premise 62] ; forms of, 

Condensation, 555, 565. 

Condition 621] ; see Premise: Con- 
ditional con). 701 f; sentences, forms 
of, 631s, rel. 641; for oth. forms, 639. 

Conjugation (cj.), distinctions 30, 
265 s; hist. 271s; anal. 32, 35s, 277s; 
paradigms 37s, 48b; prefixes 277, 
284; affixes 285, 48, 321; stem 47, 
49, 886: quant. 728s; accent 776, 780. 

Conjunctions (conj.) ὅδ, 65s, 700, 
classes, origin, 701; om. 707; repeat- 
ed 714; pos. 718 a, 720. 

Connecting vowels, or connectives, 
of dec. 12 5, 183, cp. 29, 256 s, cj. 82 ἢ, 
85 5, 290s, 326, compos. 383. 

Connective exponents, conj. x conn. 

ron. or ady., primary x sec., 66: pos. 
18.a, 720. 

Consecutive conj. 701 k, 671 ἃ, 6. 

Consonants 4, 137s; in Gr. alph. 
98; old 188; changes 139 s; final 160; 
movable 162; dial. and poet. var. 167s; 
added or om. in 8. 217, 844 5, 348. 

Construction, personal for impers. 
573: Constructio preegnans 704. 

Contingent sentence 61 f; modes 806; 

“τ 618s; particle 618, 685c: Contingen- 
cy, pres. X past, fut., 613s. 

Contraction (cont., ct.) 7, 117s, 131; 

uant. 726; accent. 772: in_versif. 
741b: Contr. verbs 42, 309, in Lat. 43. 

Codrdinate vowels 110b; consonants 
137 Ὁ, 168; sentences 62¢; conjunc- 
tions 701: Codrdination 62c ; for subord. 

Copula 60 Ὁ ; omitted 572. (705. 

Copulative conjunctions 701 a. 

Correlatives, pronominal, 53, 377. 

Corresponding vowels and conso- 
nants 188; connectives 66f. 

Cp., in § 50 = compounded ; in the 
Sodas = comparison. [accent 773. 

Crasis 117, 124, 133; quant. 726; 

Ct. = contracted. 

Cyropedia, see Xenophon, 


DACT .- 


Dactyu 77: -ic verse 742, 747. 


δ 798. = DATI LATIN & 


Dative 10, 186 f, 190, 398, double 
office 399: w. prep» 688s, w. comp. 
_ verbs 699 ἢ, g. See page 12. 

Declarative sentence 61. 

Declension 10s, 173s; distinctions 
173; three methods 180; gen. rules 
181; affixes 11s, 183; hist. 186; par- 
adigms compared w. Lat. 14, ἘΣ 
Dec. 1. 145, 189, 198: Dec. 11. 14, 16, 
187, 199; Dec. m1. 14, 17, 186, 202; 
dial. 20s; irreg. 21, 223; def. 227: 
adj. 22, 229; num. 25, 240s; pt. 26, 
234; pron. 27, 239: quant. 728, ac- 
cent 775s. [verbs 337. 

Defective nouns 227; adj. 238 ; 

Definite tenses 30 b, 267 ὁ ; x indef. 
590s; for oth. tenses 6025: article 520: 
relatives 549. [479. 

Definitive, old, 249, 516: noun (acc.) 

Degrees of compar. 256; use 510; 
interch. 515: Degree-sign 256 a, 29. 

Demonstrative pron. and ady. 28, 
53, 252, 8377; syNT. 542; om. bef. rel. 
551 ἢ; in attr. 552s; for rel. 562. 

Demosthenes fl. 355, Att. orator, § 85. 

Dependent sentences 62 b, 58. 3, h. 

Deponent, mid. x pass., 266 c, 576 b. 

Derivation, -tive, 54, 359s ; euph. 
changes 361; quant. 731; accent 789s. 

Dieresis 6, 105; accent 772. 3; 
-mark 96 b, 110 a: in versif. 745 ἢ. 

Dialects 81s: variations in orthog. 
and orthoépy 130, 167, dec. 208, &c., 
Cj. 48, 284, 321, accent 790: Dia- 

‘lectic Forms (D. F.). 

Digamma = Vau; see F, before Z, 

-in Greek Index: verbs 345. 

Diminutives, gend. 175; der. 371. 

Diphthongs 4, 106 ; prop. x improp. 
108; corresp.115a; resolved 105, 132; 

quant. 526, 737; in accent. 767. 

Direct cases 10, 179, 397, 186 ο, in 
accent. 775: complement, obj., 58 e: 
discourse, quot., 62k, 643, w. indir. 
644, 659: compounds 388: order 718. 

Distinct sentence, verb, mode, 62a, 
80c; in depend. clauses, x incorp.,657. 

Distinctive adv. 685¢: conj. 701 ο. 

Distributive pronouns 55, 501. 

Division of syllables 111. 

Doric dialect (Dor., p.) 82, 86s: fu- 
ture 305 d, 325 Ὁ: accent. 790. 

Double accusative 480 : consonants 4, 
137 a, ἃ, 170; affecting quant. 725, 
734: αἰ. cons. verbs 41, 270 ο, 311. 

Doubtful vowels 4, 106, 726. 3. 

Dual number 178 ; old plur. 186 g, 
271¢; in cj. 299: used w. pl. 494. 

ELEGIAC poets 83: verse 749. | 


363 


Elements of the sentence 57: of the 
word 172; in dec. 183, cp. 256, cj. 32, 
der. 359 5, compos. 383 5. 

Elision, see Apostrophe. 

Ellipsis 68 ; in synt. of appos. 394s, 
gen. 418b, 438, dat. 450d, 462, acc. 
476, adj. 506, 511b, art. 527, 533, 
pron. 536, 551, 555, 562, 565, verb 571, 
626, 636, 647, inf. 668, pt. 676, 678 ο, 
particle 707. 

Emphatic changes in s. 346: parti- 
cles 685¢: repetition 69b: position 

Enclitics 787 ; accent. 788. [719 ἃ. 

Ending, see Flexible. 

Epenthesis 6, 103 ; see Insertion. 

Epic, or Homeric, language (Ep., E.) 

Episéma 1, 91, 98 ἃ. 83. 

Epithet x predicate adj. 59a, 492 Ὁ. 

Equestri, De Re, see Xenophon. 

‘Equal, or quadruple, rhythm 742. 

Essential x inflective 172 a, c. 

Ethical dative 462 e. 

Etymology 172s ; tables 9s. 

Euphonic changes 99 ; of vowels 7, 
113s, of consonants 8, 189s, 147s: 
affices, dec., ¢j., 188, 187, 808, 271f. 

Euripides fl. 441, Att. tragedian, 
§ 85: Alcestis, Andromache, Bacche, 
Cyclops, Electra, Hecuba, Helena, 
Heraclidze, Hercules Furens, Hippo- 
lytus, Ion, Iphigenia in Aulide, phi 
genia in Tauris, Medéa, Orestes, Phee- 
nissx, Rhesus, Supplices, Troades. 

Exclamation, nom. in, 401 b, gen. 

᾿ 429f, dat. 453, acc. 476 a, pron. or 
ady. 564 b, inf. 670, interj. 684 Ὁ: ex- 
clamatory sentence 61 d. 

Exempli gratia (e. g.), for example. 

Exponents for words 65, sentences 
66; pos. 718d, 720: exponential ad- 
junct 58 ο. [3240, 48 ο. 

Extension of vowels 108 Ὁ, 135, 3220, 

Fret 77, 740; interch. 741 Ὁ, 747, 
751, 755; ictus 741¢; ceesura 745. 

Feminine gender 174 ; in adj. 232; 
w. masc. form 234: cesura 745 ο. 

Figures affecting letters and sounds 
6, 99: of syntax, of rhetoric, 67 s. 

Final consonants 160, movable 162: 
conjunctions 701 e: clauses, modes in, 
624: syll. of verse 738: accent 769. 

Finite modes, sentences 62 ἃ ; synt. 
of, 568s; interch. w. incorporated 
657, 659, 671. 

Flexible endings, or flexives, of dee. 
12, 188; of cj. 821, 295, 328. 

‘Flourished (of authors ; fl.) 


ENGLISH. FLUE 


Fluents (A, p) 4, 137. 


364 FORM 


Formation 172, 359 ; of simple words 
362, compound 383; quant. 731; ac- 
cent 789: formative X radical 172 b. 

Fractional numbers 242 d, e. 

Fragment (Fr.). — French (Fr.). 

Future indef. 30b, 266s, 2738; 
subjective tense 584; wants sub. and 
imv. 269b; liquid 152; Att., Dor., 
805, 325 b: second 289: synv. 596s; 
for imy. 597; gnomic 606; for pres. or 

st 610; in final clause 624b; inf. 

ad 660 ; pt.674 6, expr.purpose 598 b; 


mid. for act. 584, for pass., Ὁ. v., 576 a, 


c: def. and complete 596.a% Contin-|_ 


gency 614. 
Future Perfect 80}, 2676, 273 6, 
819: use 601. [490 s. 
GENDER 174; rules 175s: in synt. 
General or indef. premise, 634, 641. 
Generic use 63g, 392a; of cases, 
485, tenses 602s, modes 651, connec- 
tives 705: time for fact 602 ο, con- 
tingency 614 Ὁ: article 522. 
Genitive 10, 186e, 398, 485b: w. 
art. 628 ο; in pron. 538; abs..675; w. 
prep. 688 8. e page 12. 
Gentile x patrial noun or adj. 368 c. 
Gnomic use of pres. 602 ἃ, aor., &c., 
Government, or regimen, 63. [606. 
Grammatical x logical parts 60. [768. 
Grave accent 94, 767 e, 784: syllable 
Hpt.= Herodotus. 
Hellenica (Hel.), or Historia Greeca, 
see Xenophon. [pated 756 a. 
Hephthemim 740}, 745 ὁ ; antici- 
Herodotus (Hdt.) ἢ. 448, Ion. his- 
torian, § 83. _ (748. 
Heroic (Kpic) poetry 83; verse 743, 
Hesiodus (Hes.) fl. 800 2, poet (Ep.): 
Opera et Dies, Scutum Herculis, The- 
Heteroclites 223, 225. [ogonia. 
Heterogeneous nouns 223, 226. 
Hexameter 743, 748 : -pody 740 b. 
Hiatus, how avoided, 99s, 117s, 
162, 217; 190; in poetry, 746 a, 787 5. 
Hiero, see Xenophon. 
Hippocrates fi. 430, medical writer 
in Ion., ὃ 83. [ondary tenses 267 b. 
Historic present 609: historical =sec- 
History of Greek lang. 81, 359, 
orthog. 97, dec. 187, pron. 246, 249 8, 
ep. 264, cj. 271, 336, accent 789. 
Homérus ἢ, 900%, Ep. poet, ὃ 83: 
Ilias, Odysséa, Hymni (in Apollinem, 
Bacchum, Cererem, Martem, Mercuri- 
um, Venerem), Batrachomyomachia. 
Hypallage 70 r, 474 ἃ. 
Hyperbaton 71, 719 8. 


INDEX. IT, 


INFL § 798. 


Hypercatalectic verse 743. 

Hypothetical period 62 j, 631s. 

IamBus, lamb, 77: Iambic rhythm 
742, verse 755. [part of a work. 

Ibidem (Ib.) = in the same work or 

Ictus in pronunce. 79 ¢: metrical 741. 

Id est (i. 6.) = that is. 

Idem (Id.) = the same author. 

Ilative, or inferential, adverbs 685 c. 

Imitative verbs 378 c. 

Immediate= nude adjunct 58 ¢: im- 

mediate, or included, x causative 

verbs 473, 582 8. 

Imperative (imv.) 30 ο, 269 5, 272 e, 
655; in perf. 318, 599d; x sub. w. 
μή 628: sentence 61c. 

Imperfect (impf.,ipf.) 30b, 267,271 ; 
x aor, 591s; X aor. and plup. as 
conting. or indef. 615 a, 616 b, in wish 
688 Ὁ, g; for aor. or plup. 603 c, 604, 
612, pres. 611. 

Impersonal verbs 571, pass. 589; inf. 
and pt. 657i; pt. abs. in acc. 675: 
verbal 682. 

Improper diph. 4, 108 : redupl.357.3. 

Impure vowel, affix, stem, word, 112. 

Imv. = Imperative. 

Inceptive verbs 350, 379 a. 

Incorporation, -ated sentence, verb, 
mode, X distinct or finite, 62a, 80 ο, 
657. See Infinitive, Participle. 

Indeclinable (aptote) 227 a. 

Indefinite (indef.) pron. and adv. 27s, 
53, 245, 258, 548: rel. 549: subject of 
verb 571, inf. 667 h: tenses 80 b, 267 c; 
x def. 590 5, complete 599; how sup- 
plied 608: action 616: premise 634. 

Independent sentence 62e : elements 
57 f: nominative 401. 

Indicative (ind.) 30c, 269, 271s: 
SYNT., X sub. and opt. 613; expr. 
suppos. contrary to fact 615, habit w. 
av 616, purpose 624, wish 638; in 
hypoth. period 631s, 634s; in indir. 
disc. 648 5; generic use 651. 

Indirect cases 10, 179, 186 ο, 397s: 
complement, obj. 58e: compounds 
888: disc. or quot 62k: order 718 r. 

Infinitive 30c, 269, 272: sYNT. 6578; 
x pt. 657 d, ks in indir. disc. 659; re- 
lation to time 660; as neut. noun, w. 
or wt. art., 663s; of specif., adv., abs., 
665; w. acc. 666, other cases 667; 
redund. or om. 668; as'imyv., &c., 6705; 
w. connectives 671: pos. 7181; accent 

0 


780 8. 
Inferential, or illative, adverbs 685 e. 
Inflection 172 ; three periods 276. 
Inflective x essential 172 a, c. 


δ 798.  INSE LATIN. & 


Inseparable particles 385, 252, 688 e. 

Insertion of cons. to prevent hiatus 
99s, 217, 190; οἵ in contr. 120i; of 
p, mid. mute, 146; for metre 171; of 
σ, ἡ, &c., in 6]. 807, 311; of v in s. 
351. 1; of vowel and σ in compos. 388. 

Intellective sentence 61 : modes 90 ο, 
6138 s. 

Intensive verbs 379 : adv. 685 ο. 

Interchange, -ed (interch.). 

Interjection 55, 684 Ὁ. . 

Interrogative pron. or adv. 28 g, 53, 
2538, 564; ν΄. art.531; doubled 566 b; 
pos. 718, 720: particles, dir., indir., 
altern., 685 ο, 687: sentence 61, ex- 
pressing wish 597. 

Intransitive use of act., esp. in sec- 
‘ond and complete tenses, 577 b, 338 b. 

Inversion 71a: inverse attr. 554. 

Jonic dialect (Ion., 1.), old, mid., 
new, 82s: forms in 3 pl. 300d, 329: 
feet and verse 77, 764: accent. 790. 

lota subscript 109 : form of verbs 349. 

Ipf., impf., = Imperfect. 

Irregular nouns 223 : adj. 236: cp. 
262: verbs 50, 886 5. 

Isocrates fl. 380, Att. orator, ὃ 85b. 

_ Iterative pron., see αὐτός : form in cj. 

KINDRED vowels 114 b. [332. 

LaBias 4, 137 ; changes 147s: in 
Dec. mr. 17, 203: 1. verbs 88 5, 270 ο. 

Lacedeemonidrum Respublica (Lac.), 
see Xenophon. 

Laconic dialect 82, 141 a. 

Language, significant elements 55, 
gen. synt. 56 s; Indo-European 81. 

Last syllable of verse common 738. 

Late (1.), 7. ὁ. during the long period 
of decline which followed the loss of 
freedom. 

Lesbian dialect 82, 84, 87 a, 790 b. 

Letters, Gr., Heb., Lat., 1s, 90, 98. 

Limiting article 523 s. 

Linguals 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 
147 5; in Dec. 111. 17, 204, contr. 207: 
lingual verbs 39, 270 c. 

Liquids 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 
144s, 168s; Dec. m1. 18, 208: liquid 
verbs 40, 152, 811 Ὁ, 342. 3, 347. 

Local quantity 725, 794 5. 

Logical parts 60: order 64. 

Long vowel 4, 106; = 2 short 115, 
725; shortened bef. vowel 737; form- 
ing 2 tone-places 767: syll., by nature 
or pos., 725 5. [718 t. 

Loose compounds 388 b: structure 

Lucianus fl. 160? A. D., essayist and 


wit: De Historia Scribenda, Dedrum 


ENGLISH. ' OBJE 365° 


Concilium, Dialogi Dedrum (Ὁ. D.), 
Dedrum Marinodrum (D. Mar.), Mor- 
tudrum (D. M.), Parasitus. 

Lysias fl. 411, Att. orator, § 85. 

MaAGIsTER Equitum, see Xenophon. 

Masculine 174 ; form as fem., esp. in 
du. and pL, 234 ἃ, 6, 489 c, 490: ca- 

Megarian dialect 82. [swra 745c., 

Memorabilia Socratis, see Xenophon. 

Metaplasm, -asts, 223 s. 

Metathesis 6, 104, 145 ; in cj. 308, 
342; in der. 361 ἃ. 

Metre 740s: metrical ictus 741. 

Middle Mutes 4, 137; ins. 146b; 
changes 146s; see β, y, ὃ: Stem 47, 
886: Voice 30, 266; synt. 575s, 578: 

Modal sign 65 : appos. 898 ο, 394 b. 

Modern Greek pronunce. 79. 2. 

Modes 30c¢, 265, 269s; hist. 272; 
affixes 286s; conn. vowels 290, 326;° 
flex. endings 295, 328: synr. 613s. 
See page 12. 

Modilied stems 49, 339 a. 

Modifiers 57 g, 58 ; pos. 718 5. 

Monosyllables, roots 340. 8, 869; 
quant. 729.2; accent 782 6, 786, 793 c. 

Movable consonants 162. 

Mutes 4, 137; changes of and w., 
147 5, 167; m.and liquid as affect- 
ing quant. 735: in Dec. 11. 17, 208: 
in cj. 88 5, 270 ο, 847. 

ΝΆΑΒΑΙΒ 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 
189 5: nasal form in cj. 351. 

Nature, long or short by, 725 5. 

Negative pron. and adv., object. x 
subj., 58, 686; as interrog. or affirm. 
687; redund. w. indef., inf., &c., 713; 
ov μή W. sub. or fut. 627: sentence 61e. 

Neuter (neut., N.) 174 ; dec. 188 ; in 
adj. 281: as generic gend. 491, 496, 
502; pl. w. sing. verb 569; impers. 
571e: as adv. or acc. of effect 380 a, 

New stem in cj. 47, 336. [483, 478. 

Nominative (nom., nN.) 10, 186d, 398 5, 
485; for voc. 182, 401 ο; in appos. w. 
sent. 396: as subject 400, 568; om. 571; 
by attr. 578, 657: independ. 401. 

Noun 55; dec. 14s, 193s; deriv. 
863; compos. 386; synt. 898 5; quant. 
728s; accent 775s, 791. 

Nude affixes, dec., 183, 187, ef. 808, 
313, 320, 326 6, 335: adjunct 58 c. 
Number 178, 270; signs 12, 33a; 

use and interch. 488 5, 494 5. 

Numerals 25, 52, 239s; how com- 
bined 242; letters as, 1, 91. 

OBELISK (+t) 96 ο. [448, 470 5.. 

Object ὅ8 δ, 63f; dir. x indir. 397s, 


366. OBJE 


Objective affixes 36, 285: voice 271 6, 
274: cases 10, 397s; gen., adj., 4442; 
dat. 448 s: negative 686, 58 Im. 

Oblique cases 179 Ὁ ; as adv. 380. 

Odes, choral, 744 e. 

(Economicus, see Xenophon. 

Old stem 47, 386. [rhet. 68. 2. 

Omitted (om.): omission as fig. of 

Open vowels 107 a: affixes 172 ο. 

Optative 30 ο, 269, 272d, Att., Aol., 
298 c, e; conn. vow. 298: SYNT., X 
ind., sub., 613; law of sequence 617; 
in final clauses 624, the hypoth. per. 
631, rel. and temp. clauses 640, 
complem., indir. disc., 643; potential 
636; for imv. or ind., esp. fut., 637, 
654a; of wish 638, 637 d, 648d; of 
doubt 648; generic conting. mode, for 
sub., 652, 654 a. [blended 644. 

Oratio recta x obliqua 62k, 643; 

Order, direct or normal x indirect 
or varied 718; why varied 719. 

Orthotone 5, 788 g. 

Other Examples (Ὁ. E.). 

Oxytone 768 ; w. grave mark 784. 

PALATALS 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 
147 5, 169s: in Dec. m1. 17, 203: in 
cj. 89, 270.¢, 849s. [162s; «252d. 

Paragdge 6, 103: paragogic cons. 

Parenthesis, -thetic, 71 ὁ. 

Paroxytone 768. 

Participle 30 c, 269s, 272}, c; dec. 26, 
205, 234: sYNT., 657s, 673s; as adj., 
w. anacol., 504; x inf. 657 ἃ, k; rela- 
tion to time 660; circumst., as adv., 
674s, w. dat. 462, expr. purpose 598 Ὁ, 
674 6, condition 635, concession 674 ἢ, 
abs., impers., 675; complem. 677; 
defin., desc., 678; w. aux. verb 679; w. 

ὡς, &c., 680: pos. 718m; accent 780 s. 

Particles elided 128 ; in compos. 
884s, 889: syYNT., classes, 6848 ; 
interch. 708; ellips. 707; pleon. 713; 
attr. 715; anacol. 716; combin. 717: 
pos. 718, 720; accent 785s, 794. 

Partitive appos. 393d, 395: gen. 
415s: adj. 419f. 

Parts of sentences ὅθ 8. 

Passive Voice 30; synt. 575s, 586s; 
w.gen., dat., 586, 484 b, 461; impers. 
589: Verbals 364, 374; w. dat. 458. 

Pastoral, or bucolic, cesura 745 d. 

Patrials x gentiles, der., 368, 375 8. 

Patronymics, der. 369. 

Pause cxsural 745 ¢ : final 738. 

Pentameter 743, 749. 

Penthemim 740 Ὁ, 748 ο. 

Penult 111 ἃ ; in accent. 768s. 


INDEX II. 


PRES. ὃ. 798. 
Perfect (perf., pt) ; see Complete. 
Period, hypothetical, 62j, 631s. 


Periphrasis 69d; in synt. of gen. 
and adj. 487 ο, 499d, acc. 475, art. 
527s, verb 598, 637. 

Perispome 768 ; verbs 309. 

Person 246, 270; signs 246, 249 ; in’ 
. 33a, 271: agreement 492, 496; 
change 5038, 539 ο, 644. 

Personal Pronouns 27, 243, 247; 
hist. 246; encl. 787: syNT., 536s; eth. 
dat. 462e: Construction for impers. 

Pf., perf, = Perfect. [573. 

sea x clauses 56 a. 
indarus fl. 490, lyric poet, § 84: 
Isthmia, Nemea, Glvinpla: Pythia. 

Plato fl. 399, Att. philosopher, ὃ 85: 
Apologia, de Republica, be. 

Pleonasm 69; in synt. of gen. 446, 
dat. 462 6, acc. 477, pron. 505 b, cp. 
510s, art. 628}, verb 574, inf. 668, 
prep. 699, neg., &c., 713. 

Pluperfect (plup.; plp.), aug. 280s ; ea 
>n, εις 291 c; cont. 615: see Complete. 

Plural (plu, pl., p.) 178, 186, 271; 
signs 12, 88a: interch. or joined w. 
sing. or dual 488 5, 494s, 499 5, 569. 

Plutarchus fl. 80 A. D., biographer 
and philosopher: Pompeius, &c. 

Poetic (poet., po., P.), poetry, 898 5. 

Polysyndeton 69 f. 

Position of words and clauses 718 5, 
721 e: in prosody 725, 734s. 

Positive degree 256 ; joined orinterch. 
w. sup. or compt. 512, 515: sent. 61 6. 

Possessive pronoun 28, 252. 5, 538; 
w. or implied in art. 524, 6806: gent- 
tive 448. [cles, &c., 720. 

Postpositive article 249 Ὁ, 250 : parti- 

Potential opt., ind., 636 a. 

Precession of vowels 107, 114s, 130; 
in contr. 115s; in affix 195; in s. 
of dec. 114 ἃ, 217, of ej. 841; ὅο. 

Predicate 57 ; -part, log. x gram., 60 ; 
pos. 718 ο, 5: adj., &c., 59 a. 

Prefixes 1726; of verbs 32, 277s, 

Preformatives 32 c, 356. [284. 

Premise 621 ; forms 631 ; indef. or 
gen. 634; om. 686. 

Preposition 55 ; elided 128; apoc. 
136; w. and wt. case as adv. 382, 
703: SYNT. 688s, 487; in compos., 
tmesis, 699, 486; constr. preeg. 704; 
pos., accent, 718 ἃ, 785s, 794. 5. 

Prepositional adjunct 58 ¢, 706. 

Prepositive vowel 106 : article 249 b. 

Present definite 30b, 267 : generic 
tense, gnomic, 602s; historic, pro- 


§ 798. PRET LATIN ἃ 


phetic, 609; for perf.612; X aor. w. 
μή 628: contingency 613 5. [600. 
Preteritive use, verbs, &c., 46, 268, 
Primary tenses 30b, 267b, 2718; 
followed by sub. 617: affixes 32 i, 35s, 
286: elements of sent. 57. 

Primitive x derivative 359. 

Principal word 57 h : sentence 62 Ὁ. 

Prior tense (impf., aor., plup.) 615. 

Proclitics, or atona,- 786. 

Prohibition w. μή 628. 

Prolepsis 71 Ὁ, 474 b, 657. (377. 

Pronominal correlatives 53, 362 6, 

Pronoun 55, 275, 243s, 509, 535s. 
See Article; Substantive, Personal, 
Adjective, Indefinite, Relative, &c. 

Pronunciation, four methods, 79. 

Proparoxytone 768, 770. 

Proper diphthong 4, 108: redupl. 
857: name w. or wt. art. 522 g, 533 a. 

Properispome 768, 771. 

Protracted Stems 346 s. 

Protasis = premise 62 7. 

Pt., part., = participle. 

Pure vowel, affix, stem, word, 112: 
nouns in Dec. 11. 19, 212s; verbs 
42 5, 270 c, 309, 313. 

Q. v. = quod vide, which see. 

Quadruple, or equal, rhythm 742. 

Quantity, natural x local, 725s ; in 
dec: 728 s, cj. 728, 730, der. 731. 

Quotation or dise., dir. x indir, 62k. 

RADICAL x formative 172 b, 359. 

Rare (r.). 769. 

Recessive x retentive or final accent 

Reciprocal pronoun 27, 244.3. 

Redundant nouns 233 b: verbs 338. 

Reduplication 280, 273e, 284; Att., 
281d; in compos. 282; in 2 aor. and 
fut. 284 6, 5: ins., proper, &c., 357. 

Reflexive pronoun 27, 244, 248 ; use; 
dir. x indir., 587s, 513 ἢ, 541h. . 

Regular affixes of verb 303, 8 8. 

Relative Pronoun and Adverb 28, 53, 
250, 254s, 877: syNT. 5498; attr. 
522s; condens. 555; rel. for defin. and 
conn. particle 557: w. another conn., 
&c ,561: Clauses640s. [Xenophon. 

Republica Atheniensium, De, see 

Residual cases, 10, 397s: dat. 465s. 

Retention, fig. of synt., 70v. [769. 

Retentive x recessive or final accent 

Rhythm 740s ; affecting pos. 718 g. 

Root 172 b, 340. 3, 359. 

Rough breathing 93 ; w. init. v and p 
93 c,d; «ἘΣ, 141, 345; mutes 4, 137; 
changes of and w., 147 5, 159, 167. 


ENGLISH. SUBJ 367: 


Sappuo fl. 611, Hol. lyrist : Sapphic 
verse 750. 4. [738 b, 744 b. 
Scanning 746 ἃ : continuous scansion 
Scholia, notes of Greek grammarians. 

Scilicet (sc.) = namely. ‘ 

Scripta Sacra (S. S.): Septuagint 
(Lxx.), Psalms, Proverbs, &c.; New 
Testament, Matthew (Mat., Mt.), Mark 

(Mk.), Luke (Lk.), John (Jn.), &c. 

Second tenses and systems 289 ; rel. to 
stem 47, 336 b, 340. 4; use 338 b. 

Secondary tenses 80}, 267 Ὁ, 271d, s; 
conting. and indef. 615s; w. opt. 617; 
w. ἄν 618; in hypoth. per. 651 55} expr. 
wish 638: affixes 321, 35 s, 286. 

Semivowels 4, 137 ; four old, 138 ; 
changes of and w., 139 s, 147 5, 1688. 

Sentence 56 ; parts 57s ; kinds, con- 
nection, 61s; condensed 555, 565; pos. 
718 n, s, 721: words in appos. w., 396: 
sentential analysis 57 5, 72s; exponents 

Sequence of modes, law of, 615. [66. 

Sequens (s) = following. 

Short vow. and syll. 4, 106, 725s ; 
elided 127; > long in dec. 194, 218 5, 
cp. 257, cj. 275 d, 288 a, 310, 314, 347, 

compos. 886c.  [139s, 151s, 169 8. 

Sibilants 4, 137s; changes of or w., 

Signs of relation or case, number, 
and gender, in dec., 12; of degree, in 
cp-, 29; of person, number, voice, 
mode, and relation, in ¢j., 821, 88; of 
tense 32 g, 35 s. 

Simple sentence 62e : vowels x diph- 
thongs 4, 106: words 359; der. 362 8; 
accent 791s: ‘succession 62d, 705 a. » 

Singular (sing. 5.) 178 ; interch. or 
joined. w. pl. 488 5, 499 5, 569. 

Smooth, or soft, breathing 93; for 
rough 930, 167¢; <(_ F 141: mutes 4, 
137; changes of and w., 147 s, 167s. 

Sophocles fi. 468, Att. tragedian, 
ὃ 85: Ajax, Antigone, Electra, Edi- 

us Colonéus, Edipus Tyrannus, Phi- 
tétes, Trachinize; Fragmenta. 

Specification, ace. of, 481: nom. in, 

Spirants 4,137s. See 2, F,I. [402b. 

Stanza x system 740 a, 744. 

Stem (5) x root 172 ; of noun 180b: 
of verb 270 b, 82, 47, 336s. 

Stem-mark, or characteristic, 172d. 

Subject of sentence 57 ; -part, log. x 
gram. 60; pos. 718 c, s: of word 63a, 
492, finite verb 400, pass. 586, inf. 666; 
om., subj. of appos. 394, adj. 506, art. 
527, rel. 551, verb 571, pt. 676. 

Subjective cases 10, 397s: gen., adj., 
4446: affives 285, 382i, 35: sense of 
middle 582: neg. 686, 53 IV. 


368 SUBJ 


Subjunctive (sub.) vowel 108 : mode 
30c, 269, 272d; x ind., opt., 613, 
269 c, 617 g; w. prim. tenses 617; w. av 
combined 619; in final clauses 624. 
as fut. 627, as imv. 628; in hypoth. 
per. 691 5, as indef. prem. 634; in rel 
and temp. clauses 640-s; of doubt 647: 
for opt. 560, 653, fut. 617 b. 

Subordination, -ate clause, 62 Ὁ, h ; 
see Dependent: conjunctions 701. 2. 

Subscript, see I in Greek Index. 

Substantive 55, 57s; dec. 173; ep. 
262d; der. 8625: synt. 393s: pron. 
27, 243; synt. 5386: verbew. gen. 487; 
w. dat. 459; om. 572, 676, 678 ο, in 
conden. 555,565: clause 62 h, 66 d, 648. 

Succession, Simple, 68d; early use 

Suffixes in der. 360. [705 a. 

Superlative 256s, 510s; w. gen. 
419 c; w. dat. 468; w. positive, ἐν τοῖς, 
‘ets, doubled, 512; w. reflex. 513 f; 
abs., “οὗ eminence,”’ interch., 514s. 

Syllables, division 111; union 117 ; 
quant. 725c; accent 766s: syllabic 
augment 277: syllabication 111. 

Syllepsis x zeugma 68 f, g, 49 5. 


Symposium, or Convivium,:see Xen-| 


Syneresis 6, 105. [ophon. 
Syncope 6, 103, 140, 144; in Dee. 111. 
207, 210, 217; in fut. 806 b; in 5. 342; 
in der. 361d: metrical 748 g, 763 a. 
Synecdoche 70j, 481, 587. 2. 
Synesis 70p; in appos. 894 ο, adj., 
-pron., verb, 498s, 569, tense 608s, 
‘mode 653 5. 
Synizésis, or Synecphonésis, 117 b, 
220 ἃ, 222 b, 323, 746b,c. [144. 
System in cj. 267 f; in versif. 740 a, 
Tau form in cj. 352. 
Temporal nwmbers 52, 243 : augment 
277 5: conjunctions 701 h: clauses 641. 
Tenses 30 b, 265, 267 ; systems 267 f, 
289 b; formation 31; hist. 271s; signs 
-82 g, 288, changed 152, 305s, 325; 
base, or tense-stem, 2896; first x seg- 
ond 289, 336, 888 b, 840: ΒΥΝΎ. 590s. 
Tense-sign, -stem, -system, see Tenses. 
Tetrameter 743. [6]. 270 Ὁ. 
Theme 1726; in Dec. 1. 202; in 
Theocritus fl. 280, Dor. poet, § 86. 
Theognis fl. 544, Ion. elegiac poet. 
Thesis 741; quant. in, 736 d, 737. 
Theta form in ο]. 353. 
Third future, see Fut. Perf. [8 85. 
Thucydides fl. 423, Att. historian, 
Time of verb 267 ; absolute x relative 
607; generic 602 ο, 614 Ὁ: of vow. an 
syll. 725: cases expr, 482 e° 488 6. 
Tmesis 388 c, 699 d, ἢ, 5. = 


INDEX. II. 


+ Atheniensium, Symposium, 


ZEUG § 798. 


Tone, or accent, 766s: places 767. 

Transitive verb 55, 486 ¢ ; or intrans. 
577: sense 70 c. [740 b, 745 ο. 

Trimeter 743 ; Iambic 756: triemim - 

Trochee 77 : -aic verse 742, 760. 

ULTIMA 11la; in accent. 767 5. 

Union of syllables 117s ; accent. in, 

Usually (usu.). [722s: vow. 383 a. 

V. l. = varia lectio, various reading : 
v. v., Vice versa = and the converse. 

Variable stems 49, 336s: varied or- 
der 719. 

Vectigalia, Venatio, see Xenophon. 

Verb 55, 57¢; ¢., distinctions 30, 
265s; classes, in -w X -μι, 270 ο, de- 
ponent 266,irregular, &c., 886 5, 378 5, 
appositional 59 a; hist.271; forms ana- 

_ lyzed 82, translated 34; prefixes 277; 
affixes 35 s, 285, 48, 325 s; generai par- 
adigm 87, 48b; mute, liquid, &c., 38s, 
8045: contract 42, 309, 48¢, 321s; in 
-μι 45, 318, 335; preteritive 46, 268, 
817s; stenr49, 336; catalogue 50: der. 
878; compos: 887: sYNT , agreement 
568 s, 492 8, w. subj. om., impers., 571; 
om. 572; pers. for impers. 573: use 
of voices 575, tenses 590. modes 618: 
quant. 728, 730; accent 776, 780. 

Verbal 8626 ; noun 363, adj. 269 ἃ, 
374, adv. 381: w. gen. 444, dat. 458, 
acc. 472 j; impers. 682. 

Verse, versification, 740 5, 766. 2; 
kinds 742s; casura 745; dact. 747, 
anap. 751, iamb. 755, troch. 760. 

Vision, fig. of, 70 u, 609.. 

Vocal elements 4, 106s. 

Vocative 10, 179, 186g; same w. 
nom. 181 5, 203, 208 f; in Dec. 1, 194. 2: 
synt. 4845: accent 775, 779. 

Voices 30, 265s; hist. 271e, 274: 
synt. 575s.  [655. See Imperative. 

Volitive sentence 61: mode 80 ο, 

Vowels 4, 106s; open x close 1075 ; 
pure X impure 112; precession, kin- 
dred, 114; union 117 s; dial. var. 130: 
connect. of dec. 12, 188 5, of cj. 32 ἢ, 
85s, 290, 326, of compos. 383; v. form 
in cj. 355: quant. 725s; accent 767 8. 

WirH (w.). — Without (wt.). 

XENOPHON fi. 401, historian, biogra- 

her, and essayist (Att., § 85): Agesi- 
aus, Anabasis, Apologia Socratis, - 
Cyropedia, De Re Equestri (Kq.), 

᾿ Hellenica (Hel.), or Historia Greeca, 
Hiero, Lacedzemoniorum Respublica, 
Magister Equitum, Memorabilia So- 
cratis, (Economicus, De Republica 

ectiga- 
lia, Venatio. ree. 

ZEUGMA x syllepsis 68f, g, 495s. ΄ 


‘ 


799, TABLE OF SECTIONS. 


Tn each division below, the numbers in the first column indicate paragraphs or sections 
in former editions of the Grammar; while those in the second refer to corresponding sec- 
tions in the Revised and Compendious Editions. A small s signifies and the following. 


Old. New. ) Old. 
q § 
1 1 145 
2 3 16 
3 4 1785 
4 9 21 
5 11 
6 12 228 
7 15 24 
8 20a | 25 
9 16 26 
10 208} 27 
11 17 
12 18 29 
18 17 
14 19 81 
15 206} 82 
16 21 838 
1 22 88 
18s 23 89 
20 24 40 
21 25 41 
22 26 42, 
23 27 438 
24 28 45 
25 52 46 
26s 30 47 
28 81 48 
29 35 49 
80 36 50 
81 82 51 
82 48 N. 
83 84 52 
845 37 53 
44 54 
86s 885 | 55 
415 40 
48s 41 57 
458s 42 58 
48s 45 59.7 
53 45u 
548 45k | 60 
s | 61 
57 45h | 62 
58s 46 63 
45q | 64 
61 49 65 | 
62 54 66 
63 53 67 
64 76 68 
74 69 
66 72 70 
67 78 71 
§1 815 | 72 
2s 88s | 73 
3 84 74 
4 85 75 
5 86 76 
6 85c | 77 
7 87 78 
8s 88s 
10 90 79 
1: 91 
12 92 81 
18 98 82 


New. 


ve 


. New. 


Old. 


New. 


Old. 


New. 


Old . 


830 
831 5 


ΕΣ ΕΣ ΕΘ ΚΞ δ 


ΤΙ 


ΞΕΕΓ ΕΣ ΤΟ ΘΟ οι 


ΠῚ 
γι 


New. 


370 SECTIONS COMPARED, § 800. 


872 429 | 487s “481. | 515 546° | 570s 592 [627 667 [689 735 
873 480 482 {516 6547 | 572 6598 s 671s | 690 786 
874 481] 440s 483 6175 548 | 578 594 6291 556c | 691 787 
875s 482 | 442s 484 [819 549 (574 595 |680 673 |692 7 
8185. 4383 | 444 604 | 520s 550 |575 608 [4815 674 |698 739 
8805 434 5228s 6551 606 | 6338s 677 740 
882 4385 | 445 491 552. | 576 609 =| 6848 657k 1695 741 
883s 43868 | 446 4958 |525 558 603 | 685 θά 742 
886 9 | 4478 526s 654 | 577s 6599s |686 678 | 697 77 
7 445 507 y 559b 605 | 6387 679 7414 
3888 441 | 450 x 502 | 528 555 |581 596 6888 675s |698 743 
389 442 507 6 2 559¢ | 582 60] 699 745 
890 448 | 451 89 |529 556 |5838 598 |64la 504b1700 7 
891la 4870 491 |5380 557 | 584s 610 B 657h [1018 746 
β 4480 | 452 508° | 581 586s 6185 | 642s 682 |7038 747 
i 4880 | 4538 4995 |582 560 (588 618s |644 683 |704 748 
436c | 454 498 N. 589s 614s |645 684 | 705 749 
392s 444 | 455 53838 561 | 591s 269 |646 685 106 750 
394 445 | 456 508 | 534 5 617 [647 686s |707 751 
395 446 | 457s 509 |535 563 |598 615 708 = 752 
396 447 | 459 504b | 536s y 620 |649s 689s |709 753 
397 510 | 5873 551g |594 616 707 1110. 754 
398 449 | 461 6511 | 538 595a 6387b 712 #|711 = 755 
399 462 512 | 539 B 687c¢ | 652s 699 ἢ 756 
400 4651 463s 5138 | 589.2 566 ¥ 647d | 654s 700s | 7138 ‘757 
4015. 452 | 465 514 | 540s - 567 7 |656 705 |714s 758s 
4538 | 466 515 |548 568 |596 628+ |657 708 |716 760 
404 454 | 467s 5163 |544 4958 |597a 597 |658 706 |717 761 
405 455 | 469 6; a 650la | 598 659 704 |718s 762s 
406 456 | 470s 521s |545s 571 | 599s 660 707 [Τ 764 
407 4578 | 472 847 «52 648d [601] 7088 [12 765 
408 459 | 473 524 |548 499 [601] 6 662 711 |722 766 
409 460 | 474 525 |549 569s | 6021 650s |663 7095 | 728s 767 
410 462 | 475 526 | 550 6 6648s 7138 |725 768 
411 4638 | 476 627 | 551 578 8 626 |667 714 |726 7708 
412 464 | 477 552 «4674 |6038 681 (668 715 |727s 772s 
413 3895b | 478 529 | 558s 575s 635s |669s 716 |729 784 
414 465 | 479 555 BT 5 63828 |671 Ti ΤΊ 7 
4185 466 | 4 581 |556 575a | 605.5 612 718d 1181] Ἰδ6 
417 461 481 5 557 578 |606 6408 nN, 79 | 732s 787s 
4 467 484 582 1558 579 | 607s 643 78.2 78a | 7 789 
419.4 485 5 s |559 580s 1609 644 a 720 |785 790 
466b | 490s 518 582 |610 645 B 719 | 7386 791 
420s 469 | 4928s 519 |561 5838s [061 648 ..Y ΠΟΒῚ | 7387 792 
470s | 494 505 |562 586 647 | 674.4 621} [Τ 198 
428s 472 | 495s 489s |563 587 [612 655 484 | 7389 ᾿9ὅ 
425 474s | 499 505b | 564° 588s | 6138 656 | 675s 725 [140 76s 
426s 476 565. 690 | 614s 6578 | 678s 726 [141 778 
428 472f | 501s 535s | 566 616s 661s | 681 727 | 742s ΤΊ 
472g | 508s 587s | 567 608s | 617-5 657i | 682 728 | 744 175 
i | 506s 539 B 618s 658s | 683 129 146 ΤἸτθ 
48 478 507.7 7c y 611 | 620s 663 | 684 7 116... ΤἹ 
481 477 508 5 s | 568 7 |623 665 | 68 731 | 780 
432 478 512-42 643b 624 668s | 686 782 | 747 781 
479 5138 4885 660 | 625 670 | 687 188 | 748s 782s 
4343 480 514-645 ἰὅ0θ9 691 6026 666 6088 ἴ8εὲ 10 794 


800. ‘Let me repeat, that so far from dissuading from the study of 
Greek as a branch of general education, I do but echo the universal opin- 
ion of all persons competent to pronounce on the subject, in expressing my 
own conviction that the language and literature of ancient Greece constitute 
the most efficient instrument of mental training ever enjoyed by man ; and 
that a familiarity with that wonderful speech, its poetry, its philosophy, 
its eloquence, and the history it embalms, is incomparably THE MOST VAL- 
UABLE OF INTELLECTUAL POSSESSIONS.” —Manrsu’s Lectures on the Eng- 
lish Language. τ 

THE END. 


© +6 


* 5 
me ον 
eal 


τς 
a 


Ls 


+, ὧν ἃ. 
DE ayy oe 
at mon 


THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
STAMPED BELOW 


AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 


WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 

K ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 
WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH 
DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
OVERDUE. 


OCT 17 1939 


ea a a 
on 


: SSS 
noah ~~ 

- eee nee 
Se ee 


oS caer τ ται 
= 


γῶν aaa τον πῶς νὰν 


ὄν 


ne oe at on Oe aw ed Tok Sows ane So 
ace DASE Re ae So EO th προ σικσ- Ral 


tee, oe wb 


Πα ΞΕ Σ πεῖνα 


ἐπότε ὐπτος 


